Cosmographie in four bookes : containing the chorographie and historie of the whole vvorld, and all the principall kingdomes, provinces, seas and isles thereof / by Peter Heylyn.

COSMOGRAPHIE: THE SECOND BOOK, CONTAINING THE CHOROGRAPHY and HISTORY OF Belgium, Germanie, Denmark, Swethland, Muscovie, Poland, Hungarie, Dalmatia, Dacia, Greece; with the Isles thereof. (Book 2)

Of BELGIVM.

HAving pursued the fortunes of the Roman Empire through the 4 Western Dioceses or Divisions of it, wholly subdued to the command of that conquering State; let us next look on those Countries which lay further North, and either never felt the force of the Romane Armies, or were but conquered in part; o•• els were reckoned as the members of some great Province. Of this last sort was all that tract which is now called Belgium, or the Netherlands, bounded on the East with Westphalen, Gulick, Cleve, and the land of Triers, Provinces of the Higher Germanie; on the West with the main Ocean, which divides it from Britain; on the North with the River Ems, which parts it from East-Frize∣land; on the South, with Picardie and Champagne, two French Provinces; upon the South-east with the Dukedome of Lorrain.

By the Latins (especially of these last times) it is called Belgium from the Belgae the most potent peo∣ple of all these parts; and sometimes also Germania inferior, or the Lower Germanie, (in the same sense as by the English it is called the Low Countries and the Netherlands) from their low situation, and the conformity which they have with the other Germans in Laws, Language, Customes and Manners. The more peculiar name is Flanders, which though but one of the 17 Provinces, hath yet given denomi∣nation to all the Netherlands, the people of which were once generally called by the name of Flem∣mings; and that either for the power of that Province, in regard of the others, or by reason of the great trade and traffick formerly driven at the Fairs or Marts of Bruges (a Town thereof) by the Mer∣chants of all parts of Europe, or in respect that lying neerer then the rest to France, Spain, Italy and England, that name was better known and took notice of. But this was when the whole Coun∣trey was under the command of many Princes, of which the Earls of Flanders w••re esteemed most potent. And though this name continued also after the incorporating of most of these Provinces in the house of Burgundie, at which time they were called the Estates of Flanders: yet since the falling off of Holland, and the rest of the Vnited Provinces from the Kings of Spain, it hath lost this honor; the name of Flanders being now restrained within narrower bounds.

And for the name of Belgium, though I find that name most currant amongst the Latines of this age, yet I see little reason for it. For first, the Provinces of Flanders, Hainault, Namurce, Luxembourg, Limbourg, Brabant, Holland, Zeland, Vtrecht and Gelderland with their Appendixes were never reckoned of as parts of old Belgium, or Gallia Belgica: And secondly, old Belgium,

or Gallia Belgica,* 1.1 contained many large estates which are not now within the reckoning of these 17. Provinces, that is to say, Als••tia, and a great part of the lower Palatinate, the Dukedomes of Lorraine, Cleve, and Juliers; the Bishopricks of Colen, Mentz, and Triers; and so much of France as containeth the Privince of Picardie, and part of Champaigne.

As for the Belgae from whence we have the names of Belgium, and Gallia Belgica, they were originally Germans who driving out the Gauls, planted themselves within the Rhene: esteemed by Caesar to be the valiantest of the Gallick nations for those three reasons; First, they were the farthest from Provence where the Roman civilities, and more affable course of life, was embraced. Secondly, they dwelt on a Sea not then frequented by Merchants; and so wanted those assurements to effeminate which are in Countries of tra••••ique. And thirdly, they bordered on the Germans, a warlike nation, with whom they were continually in armes. This people seeing the prosperous successe of Caesars victories in Gaul joyned together in a common League, and mustered an army of 269000. fighting men against him. But seeing they could not draw him out of his Fortresses they retired again, and that in such disorder, that three Legions, (for no more was Caesars Army) put them to an infinite slaughter. After this Caesar fighting against them severally, overcame them all, and made their Country, and the Countrey of the bordering Germans, whom he also vanquished, subject unto the Roman Empire. By Constantine the Great made part of the Diocese of Gaul, and by him cast into four Provinces, that is to say, 1. Belgica Prima, containing the Dukedome of Lorraine and the land of Triers, the Metropolis whereof was Triers; 2. Belgica Secunda, comprehending Artois, Picardie, and the Coun∣trey of Chambray, with parts of Campagne and France Speciall; of which the Metropolis was Rhemes; 3. Ger∣mania Prima, comprehending Alsatia, part of the Palatinate and the Bishoprick of Mentz, the Metropo∣litan City of that Province; and 4. Germania Secunda, containing Cleveland, Brabant, Guelderland, Vtrecht, Holland, Zeland, Flanders, Hainalt, Namurce, Luxembourg, Limbourg, and the land of Colen; which last was honoured with the title of the Metropolitan. In the declining of the Empire, they were invaded and possessed by the French; under whom they made the Kingdome of Metz or Ostenrick united to the rest of France by Childerick the third, and made a Member of that Kingdome, of which they continued an especiall part, till the time of Lewis the godly, Son of Charles the Great. By whom, and Charles the Bald, and others of that line both in France and Germanie, they were parcelled into many petite estates, and principalities; so many of them became united in the house of Burgundie, passing under the accompt of Belgium; under which name and notion we do now consider it.

And taking it according to this name and notion, it is in compasse 1000. Italian, or 250. German miles: and is situated in the northern Temperate Zone, under the 7. 8. & 9. Climates, the longest day in the midst of the 7. Climate where it doth begin, being 16. hours; and the beginning of the 9. Climate increased to 16. hours three quarters, or near 17. hours. The Aire in these later dayes grown more wholesome then formerly; partly by the wonderfull increase of the Inhabitants, and partly by the incredible industry of the people, who by draining the Marishes, and converting the standing waters into running streams, have purged the aire of many grosse and unhealthy Vapours, which did thence usually arise in times foregoing.

The Countrey is very populous, containing welnigh three millions of souls, the men being for the most part well proportioned, great lovers of our English Beer, unmindfull both of good turns and injuries: of good wit for inventing, and of a most indefatigable industry for perfecting the rarest Manufactures. For unto them we are indebted for the making of Cloth, which we learnt of the Flemmings; as also for Arras-hangings, Dornix, Clocks, Watches, and the perfection of the Mariners Compasse. They restored Musick, and found out divers Musicall Instruments, being naturally good Musicians, and generally so given unto it, and so perfect in it, that heretofore (till the Art of Mu∣sick grew more common) there were not many great mens houses, which had them not to teach their Children. To them belongeth also the invention of Chariots, the laying on of colours with oyle, the working of Pictures in glasse, and the making of Worsteds, Saies, and Tapestries: the making of which and other Stuffes, being driven out of their Countrey by the Duke of Alva, they first taught the English. The women generally are of a good complexion, well proportioned, especially in the leg and foot; honourers of vertue, active, and familiar. Both within doors and without, they govern all; which considering the naturall desire of women to bear rule, maketh them too imperious and burdensome.

They use for the most part the Germane or Dutch Language, with a little difference in the Dialect. But in the Provinces adjoyning to France, that is to say, Luxembourg, Mamurce, Artois, Hainalt, and some parts of Flanders, and Brabant they use the French; but speak the same very corruptly and im∣perfectly by reason of that mixture which it hath of the Dutch or German, yet so, that one may easily discern those people to be French originally; or some remainder of the old Gaules mastered by the French, but not rooted out: from their language or first originall called to this day by the name of Wallons, the Germans usually changing G into W, as Warre for Guerre, Warden for Guardian, and in the like case Wales for Galles. I know there is another Etymologie of the name of Wallons, some making them to be of the Burgundian race, who at their first passing over the Rhene enquired their way of the Countrey people in these words, Ou allons, i.e. Whither go we; which being oft repeated by them, occasioned them to be called Wallons: A trim invention doubtlesse, but of no solidity, nor to be fur∣ther honoured with a confutation.

The Countrey in those parts which lye towards Germanie, especially on the South-east bordering upon Cleveland and Lorraine, is somewhat swelled with hils, and overshaded with woods; the re∣liques

of the great Forrest of Ardenne, which once took up a great part thereof. But towards the West and North, where it joyns to the Sea, it is plain and levell, ••ull of flats and marishes, affording very litle corne, but abounding in pasturage, which yeeld a great increase of butter and cheese, good store of beeves and horses of more then ordinary bignesse. By reason of which low and levell situati∣on, and the ill neighbourhood of a troublesome and unruly sea, it hath been formerly much subject to inundations, insomuch as in the time of King Henry 2. Flanders was so overflown, that many thousands of people, whose dwellings the sea had devoured, came into England to beg new seats; and were by that King first placed in Yorkeshire, and then removed to Pembrookeshire. Since that, it hath in Zeland swallowed eight of the Islands, and in them 300. Towns and Villages: many of whose Churches and strong buildings are at a dead low water to be seen. And as once Ovid said of Helice, and Buris, cities of Achaia, so may we of these,

Invenies sub aquis, & adhuc ostendere nautae, Inclinata solent cum moenibus oppida versis.

That is to say,

The waters hide them, and the Saylers show The ruined wals and steeples as they row.

The chief Commodities which they vent into other Countries, are Linnen, Scarlets, Worsted, Saies, Silks, Velvets, and the like rich Stuffes; together with great quantities of Armour, Ropes, Cables, Butter, Cheese, &c. Of which, excepting Cheese and Butter, there is nothing of the naturall growth of the Countrey: the rest being Manufactures, which they make out of such materials as they fetch out of forein Regions. But the Commodity which yeeldeth them most benefit is that of Fish, not caught upon their own coast neither, but either in the northern seas, or the coast of Eng∣land: the very Herrings which they catch on the shores of England (to the no small dishonour of the English nation) bringing them a revenue (besides what is pursed up by the Adventurers) of 440000. pounds per annum; and that of Codfish which they catch on the coasts of Frizeland, amounting to 150000 l. sterling yearly.

Captains of note and eminence it hath bred but few, the People living till of late in perpetuall peace. The chief of those whose names have been transmitted to us, 1. Civilis, a Prince of the Bata∣vians, for subtilty of wit compared to Hannibal and Sertorius, of which in his long war against the Ro∣mans in the time of Vespasian, he gave very good proof. In the middle times, 2. William Earl of Holland, elected Emperour of Germanie, 3. Baldwin Earl of Flanders, Emperour of Constantinople. 4. Philip the good, and 5. Charles the Warlike, Dukes of Burgundie, 6. Charles the fift, Emperour and King of Spain: and of late times the Princes of the house of Nassaw and Orange, transplanted hither in the Regency of Maximilian, out of higher Germany. And to say truth, their Genius doth not lie so much, for land ser∣vice, as it doth for the seas; in which they have been very famous, and not lesse fortunate. For of this nation was Oliver de Noort, the fourth that compassed the world; Jacob le Maire, the first discoverer of the Straight, or Fretum, which now beareth his name; besides divers others. And generally the peo∣ple are so expert in Navigation, (especially those bordering on or near the coasts) that they ••eem born for and to the seas: many of which being born on ship-board and bred up at sea, know no other Countrey; and brook the land as ill as a fish doth the dry ground. Which naturall inclination to it, and the necessity they have of employing themselves that way, (the Countrey not being other∣wise able to provide sustenance for those multitudes of men which it doth abound with) hath so ex∣ceedingly increased their shipping, that it is thought that they are masters of more vessels of all sorts, taking one with another, then almost all the rest of Europe.

Scholars of note it hath bred many. 1. Erasmus, the great Restorer of learning in these parts of the World. 2. Justus Lipsius, as eminent a reviver of the Latine Elegancies. 3. Joseph Scaliger, the son of Julius, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a man not to be followed in all parts of learning; but of equall arro∣gance. 4. Rodolphus Agricola. 5. Levinus Lemnius. 6. 7. Janus Douza, the Father and the Son. 8. Abra∣ham Ortelius, and 9. Gerard Mereator, the Geographers. 10. Geo. Cassander, 11. Dr. James Harmin, 12. Gerard Vossius, eminent Divines, and 13. Hugo Grotius, of as great parts (but seasoned with more modesty and moderation) as the famous Scaliger. 14. Jansenius, and 15. Pamelius two right learned men, but of the Pontifician party.

The Christian Religion was planted in severall Provinces, by severall men: in Holland, Zealand, and Friseland, by Willibrode an Englishman, the first Bishop of Vtrecht; whence by degrees it gained on the rest of the Countrey: these being the first people of the Frankes or Germans converted totally to the Gospell. In tract of time it fell from the primitive purity, participating of the Errours and Cor∣ruptions of the Church of Rome; from which when they desired to reclaim themselves, they were therein opposed by the King of Spain and his Ministers. Hence the beginning of the troubles; enlarged afterwards on pretence of civill rights, invaded and infringed by the Spaniard, affecting a more absolute Dominion over them, then their Laws admitted. At this time as the country doth stand divided betwixt the States & the Spaniard; so stands it with Religion also: the Spaniard permitting only the Religion of the Church of Rome, within the Provinces & Estates under his command; and the States General indulging the free use of all Religions (even the very Jewes) but countenancing only that of the Reformed Chur∣ches, according to the Platform laid down by Calvin.

Chief F••••ests of this 〈◊〉〈◊〉 are 1. that of Ardenne, which in the time of Caesar extended from the banks of the Rhene as 〈…〉〈…〉 ••••urney one way, and Champagne another way; and was in compasse 500. miles, in the least accom••t. At this time, though the greatest of all Gaule Belgick it reacheth but from ••ie••ge to Theonville, 20. leagues in length: and yet not all that Woodlands neither, though within the Vierge of the Forest; there being much tillage and many Villages in that tract of ground; the prin∣cipall of which is the town of S. Hu••ert, situate almost in the midst of it. 2. Niepe, and 3. Numen, in the Earldome of Flanders: the first extending to the banks of the River Lis, the other coming up close to ••pris. 4. Pondsberg in the Confines of Hainalt and Flanders, near unto Mount Gerrard: all of them parts of this great Forest of Ardenne, which once overshadowed all this Countrey. 5. Nor∣mault in Hainalt, in which is much Char-coal made; supposed for that reason to be a part of that Forest, which the old French called La Charbonniere. 6. Echterwald in Guelderland near Arn∣••em, &c.

The chief Rivers are 1. Rhene, which ariseth out of two springs in the Lepontian Alpes amongst the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, united into one stream near C••ur: thence passing by the Cities of Constance, Basil, Spire, Wormes, Mentz, and Colen, is again divided about the confines of Guelderland into four branches or channels. Of which the first is called the Wael, which running through Guelderland by Nimmegen, and Bomel, loseth it sel•• in the Maes: the second, which keeps the name of the Rhene, passeth by Arnhem, from thence in a contracted channell to Vtrecht, and so through Holland unto Leiden: the third called the Lecle, taketh his course through the Provinces of Vtrecht and Holland, and so into the sea betwixt Dort and Roterdam; and the fourth called the Ysel which passing by the towns of Zutphen and Deventer, betwixt ••ueblerland, and Ouor-ys••l, emptieth it self into the Ocean near Amsterdam. And of these branches I have given the exacter reckoning, partly because the course of that famous River is otherwise not easie to be observed; and partly because the knowledge of a great part of these Provinces de∣pendeth on the knowledge of the course of this River. A River of such reputation in the ancient times, that into it the old Belgae used to cast the children which they suspected to be Illegitimate: for were they born of lawfull bed, they floated on the waters; if of an unlawfull, they sank immedi∣ately. Whereunto Claudian alluding saith, nascentes explorat gurgite Rhenus. But the great searcher of Antiquities, Versiegan is of opinion, that they thereby only inured their children to hardnesse, and made tryall of their strength, adultery being rarely found among them, and so these kindes of experi∣ments needlesse. 2. Mosa, or the Maes, or the Meuse, which rising in France not far from the springs of the Seine and the Marne passeth through Loraine, Luxemburg, Namur; from thence by Ruremond, and Ven••: where turning toward the West, it taketh in a part of the Rhene, and falleth into the sea not far from Bril, with so great a violence, that the waters of it for a long space do continue fresh. 3. Ems, in Latine called Amisus, dividing the two Friselands. 4. Scaldis, which arising in Picardie, and run∣ning through Artois and between Hainalt and Brabant, meeteth with the sea a little above Antwerpe: and 5. Lis or Ley, which runneth quite through Flanders. Besides which Rivers and others of infe∣riour note (which we shall meet withall in their proper places) here are great store of lakes, pools, and marishes, which do both fortifie the Countrey, and provide it of fish: besides many navigable channels, made by the hand of man from one River to another for the convenience of passage, and the more easie transport of their commodities.

The shore of this countrey hath been much worn out by the Sea, especially that of the Islands of Z••land, and such as lye scattered about Holland, where they are defended with banks and ram∣parts, painfully made, and chargeably maintained. These banks are about ten ells in height and twenty five in breadth at the bottom: They are made of the hardest clay that may be gotten; in the inside stuffed with wood and stone, on the outside, covered with mats strong and thick made.

The former inhabitants were divers, as shall be shewed particularly in their proper dwellings. They are at this present divided into seventeen Provinces; besides the two great Bishopricks of Leige and Cambray, which being alwaies under the protection of the Belgicke Princes, partakers of their fortunes either good or ill, and lying intermixt among their estates, shall have their turn in the description of these Countries, divided generally

• into
• 2 Bishopricks
  • 1 Leige or Luick.
  • 2 Cambray.
• 4 Dukedomes
  • 1 Limburg.
  • 2 Luxenburg.
  • 3 Gelderland.
  • 4 Brabant.
• 1 Marquisate; viz. of the holy Empire.
• 7 Earldomes
  • 1 Flanders.
  • 2 Artoys.
  • 3 Hainault.
  • 4 Namur.
  • 5 Zutphen.
  • 6 Holland.
  • 7 Zeland.
• 5 Baronies
  • 1 West-Friseland.
  • 2 Vtretcht. 3 Over-yssell.
  • 4 Machlin.
  • 5 Groyning.

Of these nineteen, two only did acknowledge the Soveraignty of the Kings of France, viz. Flan∣ders and Artoys: the Earls whereof were Homagers unto that Crown; but seldome did descend so low as to do their Homage, quitted at last to Philip the second King of Spain and his Successours, by

K. Henry the second of France, in the treaty at Cambray, Anno 1558. The rest were held originally of the German Empire, and by Maximilian Emperour of Germa••e, and Regent of those Countries for his son Philip, (who had a purpose to subject them to the Empire again) were made the tenth Circle of the Empire, called the Circle of Burgundie. But neither since, nor before that time, would the Princes of the house of Burgundie acknowledge any such subjection, but governed these Estates as absolute Princes, without relation to the Empire, or subordination to the Emperor, or Imperi∣all Officers: never appearing at the Diets, nor contributing to any Taxes there imposed, nor holding themselves bound by any Constitutions which were made therein. So that these severall Relations being out of use, we must behold it at this time as it stands divided betwixt the Spani∣ard and the States: beginning first with those Provinces which belong to the Spaniard; the true Proprietary of the whole; and therein first with Flanders as of most esteem.

1. FLANDERS, and 2. ARTOIS.

THese two I have thought fit to joyn together, because at first but one Estate; and though divi∣ded for a time, yet after five or six descents were again united, and have so continued ever since.

1. FLANDERS so called (as some say) a Flando, because it lyeth open to the winds, is bound on the East with Hainalt and Brabant; on the West with the English or German Ocean, on the North with the Seas of Zealand, and a branch of the Scheld; and on the South with part of Picardie in France, interposing betwixt Calice and Graveling.

The Soyle indifferently fruitfull in corn and pastures; the aire healthfull, temperate and plea∣sant. The whole Countrey not in length above 90. miles, and in breadth but sixty: and yet contai∣ning in that compasse above thirty Cities, (for they reckon all Cities which be walled) 1154. Vil∣lages; which stand so thick, (as needs they must in so narrow a compasse) that the Spaniards a•• their first comming in with King Philip the second, took the whole Province for one Town. Divided commonly into Imperialem, 2. Gallicam, and 3. Teutonicam: or Flanders Imperiall, 2. Flanders Gallicant, and 3. Flanders Flammengant.

1. FLANDERS FLAMMENGANT, which is the greatest of the three, is bounded on the East with Imperiall Flanders, and the River Scheld; on the west with the English Ocean; on the North with the seas of Zealand; and on the South with Artois and Flanders Gallicant: The chief Towns of it, 1. Gaunt, in Latine called Gandavum, seven miles in compasse; but taking in the Suburbs which are great and large, the whole circuit is ten miles at least. One of the greatest Cities of Europe for extent of ground: but not so populous as many of a lesse capacity; there being made waste ground even within the wals. Commodiously seated on the banks of the Scheld and the Ley, both which run thorow it, and make in it 26. Ilands, joyned together with 98. Bridges: and had not her many sedi∣tions ruinated her beauties, she might have been the Queen of Europe. In this Town were born John Duke of Lancaster, commonly called John of Gaunt, and Charles the fift Emperor and King of Spain: which last to restrain the People from their old seditions, which had been very troublesome to his predecessors (the Gauntois taking on them many times to rule and over-rule their Princes.) built a strong Citadell in the place where stood the Abbie of S. Bavons. For Churches, Monasteries, and other places of devotion there were numbred in it 55, all of them answerable to the grandeur and renown of the City, the private buildings being also very stately, if not majesticall. But now it is much fallen from its former glories, the often seditions of this people drawing upon themselves the vengeance of their angred Prince; and their wealth much empaired by the long wars and the diver∣sion of their trading by the Hollanders, who command the seas. 2. Bruges or Brug, more within the land; a town that hath neither Port nor River, yet formerly of such wealth, and the people in those times so willing to shew it, that Queen Joan the wife of Philip the fair, having been there and marked the pomp of the women, complained, that She was not Queen alone. The town of four miles circuit within the wals, wonderfully well peopled, the buildings fair and sumptuous, (amongst which 60. Churches and Religious houses) the streets large and streight, and a spacious market-place, from which the six principall streets of the City do passe directly on to as many ••ates, which is very plea∣sant to behold. And though the Town hath neither Port nor River as before was said, yet was it anciently of so great trading, that it was accounted one of the four Mart-towns of Christendome, flou∣rishing chiefly by the benefit of the English Cloth, and sensibly decaying when the English traffick was removed hence to Antwerpe. It was walled by Earl Baldwin, Anno 890. is distant three leagues from the sea: and seated on a fair and deep channell made by art, and filled with the waters of all the ad∣joyning Fountains and Rivulets: which artificiall channels are in these Countries very frequent, to the great enriching of the whole State. 3. Ypres a town seated very strongly, and almost impreg∣nable, on a small river so named, a reasonable rich Town, and well built, though most of the houses be of timber: very well served with water, conveyed into every house almost in leaden pipes; of which there is so great a number, that the foundations of it seem to be laid in lead. 4. Bourbourg, a fine strong town, but little; pertaining to the French King in the rights of the House of Burbon. 5. Comines, on the River Lis or Ley, beautified with a strong castle and an excellent Library, but more in being the birthplace of Philip de Comines that notable States-man and Historian. 6. Courtray on the same River of Ley, one of the ancientest towns in Flanders, yet still continueth well built; and of very great strength both by art and nature, famous for a great over∣throw given the French, Anno 1301. for which the town was called of long time the Sepulchre of

the Frenchmen. 7. W••nocksberg so called of a goodly Abby built upon an hill in the honour of S Wi∣nock an English man of an holy life: sacked by the French, Anno 1538. but since reedified and made more beautifull then it was before. 8. Graveling on the sea side, which since the taking of Calice by the French, hath been made the strongest town in the Low-countries. 9. Oudenard seated on the Scheld, a fair strong town, and of very great traffique, especially for Tapestry, and the finest Linnens, which are herein made: the birth-place of Margaret, Dutehesse of Parma, and Mother to Alexander, Prince of ••arma that renowned souldier.

The principall Ports of Flanders being four in number, are all of them seated in this part, viz. 1. Dunkerke, a small but safe Port belonging to the French King (as doth Graveling also) in the right of the house of Vend••s••e, both taken lately by the French, and so returned ex post liminio to the proper owner. Most memorable in these dayes, in that the people of it in the times of war, so infested the seas. 2. Scluse, seated at the mouth of the Channell of Bruges; beautified with a very fair Haven, able to contain 500 good Ships, and is now subject to the States; with whose safety it could not well stand to le•• the Span••ards enjoy any safe and large harbour so near unto them. Over against it lyeth the Isle of Cassandt, (famous for the birth of George Cassander, a moderate and learned Papist:) Formerly as big again as it is at the present, having then a fair town in it, and many rich villages; of which there is but one remaining, (of the same name with the Iland) the rest all swallowed by the sea. 3. Newport, a pretty Town, with a very strong Castle, built on a well frequented Haven, but not very safe, and therefore not much used by the men of war, nor made rich by Piracies, as Dunkerke. Near to this town, Anno 1603. was fought the field-battell betwixt Arch-duke Albert, and the States; the victory next under God, being gotten for the States by the valour of the English, and the excellent con∣duct of the Veres. 4. Ostend, not walled till the Low-countrey wars, and then but with a mud-wall only, and that not finished till the Arch-duke sate down before it; insomuch as the Arch-dutchesse Isa∣bell is said to have sworn that she would not shift her smock till the town were taken: who had she kept that rash oath, had been very lowsie, the town (then garrisoned with English) holding out against the said Arch-duke a siege of three years and as many moneths.

2. IMPERIALL FLANDERS, so called, because it was long under the obedience of the Emper••s, is severed from Brabant by the River Dender, and from the Gallick Flanders, by the River Scheld about Oudenard. It was sometimes called Bracant, of a Castle of that name destroyed by Baldwin le Debonaire Earl of Flanders: and is now called the County of Alost, from the chief town thereof so named; the jurisdiction whereof containing 170 Villages, extendeth as far as to the wals of Gaunt, and the Gates of Oudenard. The town strong and indifferently fair, situate on the River Dender, most famous in these times for a Fair of Hops which is kept there yearly. 2. Hulst, a walled town, and the chief of the four towns in the County of Waes; the other three being 3. Axele, 4. Mouchont, 5. As∣seneds, of which little memorable; but that they were all taken from the Empire by the said Baldwin le Debonaire in the time of the Emperour Henry the fourth. 6. Dendremond, situate at the mouth of the Dender where it entreth into the Scheld; a strong town both by Art and Nature, and much enriched by making Fustians, and a weekly market of Flax. A distinct Signeure of it self, with many rich villages belonging to it, incorporated into the Earldome of Flanders by the marriage of Earl Lewis de Malaine with the Lady Margaret of Brabant, to which house it formerly appertained. 7. Rupelmond, on the mouth of the River Rupel, where it falleth into the Scheld, famous in former times for an ancient Castle in which were kept the Muniments and Records of the Earls of Flanders: more in late times, for being the birth-place of Mercator, that renowned Cosmographer. 8. Mont Gerhard, called by the French Grand∣mont, a fine and pleasant town seated on the Dender. Which three last towns, together with Bornhen a fair large village, having some jurisdiction on the parts adjoyning, made up that estate, which was called the Propro, or Donaire of Flanders, because not holden of the Empire; or the Kings of France, but in the soveraignty alone of the Earls hereof.

3. FLANDERS GALLICANT, so called from the French language there spoken, lyeth on the south of Flanders Flammengant, having Hainault on the East, Artois on the West, and the Country of Cambray on the South. The chief towns of it, are 1. Listle, in Latine, Insula, so called from its Iland-like situation, amongst ponds, pools, and marishes, dryed up and made firm land by Earl Baldwin le Barbum, who built the town Anno 1007. which afterwards was walled by Baldwin de Lisle, his son, (born in this town, and hence so named) Anno 1066. The town made rich by manufactures, and resort of Mer∣chants; accompted the best town of traffick next Amsterdam, and Antwerp, in all the Netherlands. Not far from which are to be seen the ruines of an ancient Castle called Brug, the Seat or Manour house of the ancient Forresters, who had the government of this Countrey for the Kings of France. 2. Doway (Duacum in Latine) a fair and strong town seated on the Scharpe, having many fountains, good buildings, and a great number of Churches; made an University by King Philip the second of Spain, who built there∣in a Seminary or Colledge for English Fugitives. 3. Orchies, a pleasant town and well traded for the making of Serges, which with the other two make up the three Estates of this part of Flanders. 4. Ar∣mentiers, an unwalled town, but of very great trading; here being yearly 25000. pieces of Cloth sent hence to Italie, and thence to Constantinople. 5. Tournay, (or Dornick, as the Dutch call it) a great, rich, mighty, and strong town, seated on the Scheld, well built and full of stately and magnificent Churches and religious Houses; and anciently honoured with a See Episcopall. A town of great importance and much contended for betwixt the Flemmings and the French; but finally fell unto the French, as the more puissant Prince: taken from them by Henry the eighth of England, Anno 1513. to whom the Citizens paid 100000 Duckets for their present ransome; restored by him unto the French,

Anno 1518.* 1.2 for the sum of 600000. Crowns; and finally from them recovered by Charles the fift, who restored it to the body of Flanders from which it had been long dismembred, but so that it is governed as a State apart, and is called the Signeury of Tournesis, having a goodly jurisdiction over the Countrey round about it. 6. S. Amand, in the Countrey of Tournesis, pleasantly seated on the Scharpe; in which is one of the richest Abbies in all Flanders; the Abbat thereof having the temporall and spirituall juris∣diction over it, and the parts about it. And so much for the Chorographie of the Earldome of Flan∣ders; inhabited by the Nervi, and Morini, in the time of Caesar.

11. ARTOIS, is bounded on the East with Flanders Gall••••ant, and the Countrey of Cambray; on the South and West with Picardie; on the North with Flanders Flammegant and the River Lis. The aire exceeding temperate, and the soyle so fruitfull that it serveth as a Granarie to a great part both of Flanders and Brabant.

On the West part hereof towards France, lyeth the Earldome of S. Paul, so called from the chief town thereof, a goodly Signeurie, and of great jurisdiction and revenue: containing besides many Villages, the good town of Berne, a walled town, and of great importance. The Earls hereof were of the noble family of the Earls of Luxembourg, the last of which was Lewis of Luxembourg, made Con∣stable of France by K. Lewis the 11. With whom, as also with Edward the 4. of England, and Charles Duke of Burgundie, he plaid so many crosse tricks, that having long deluded them all and kept them in a continuall jealousie of one another he was at last by Duke Charles taken and beheaded. After whose death, this goodly Signeurie fell to the house of Vendosme in France, by the marriage of Francis Earl of Vendosme with Mary the daughter of this Lewis: to whom it was adjudged by the power and favour of the French-Kings; the Heirs Males being made uncapable of succession in it by the Attaindure and Confiscation of the said last Earl. By means whereof the house of Vendosme were entituled to many fair Estates in Artois and Flanders, and much good lands in France which they were pos∣sessed of.

The Armes of these Earls were Argent, a Lyon Gules armed and Crowned Or, his tail forked of the second.

As for the residue of Artois, the towns of most importance in it, are Arras, in Latine Attrebatum Ci∣vitas, the chief City of the Attrebates, the old inhabitants hereof in the time of Caesar; and still the chief City of this Province, a large, populous, and well fortified City, anciently honoured with a See Episcopall, and stocked with an industrious people; the first makers of the Cloth of Arras, which took name from hence. Divided into two distinct towns, both of them walled, and called by two severall names: the lesser called La Cite, subject to the Bishop, beautified with a fair and stately Cathedrall Church, and a Library containing many excellent Manuscripts, the lesser called La Ville, subject to the Prince, having large streets, and a rich Monastery of the yearly revenue of 20000. crowns. By Ptolemy it is called Regiacum, seated within a bow-shoot of the River Scharp: and here∣tofore the Metropolitan town of Flanders, till Artois was dismembred from it; since which time the chief City of this Province, as before is said. 2. S. Omer a fair town, and well peopled, seated upon the River Aa, some 8. Dutch miles from the Ocean, so called from S. Omer, or Audomarus, Bishop of the Morini, who built a Monastery in this place, from which grew the town, the second of esteem and rank in all the countrey. Near to it is a goodly lake of fresh water, in which are many little Ilands affording good pasturage for Cattell: of which Lewis Guicciardine reporteth, that by fastning a cord unto the bushes which grow in them, a man may draw them which way he will; and that under them there are found great numbers of fishes, who bed themselves there for shelter against the Weather. 3. Betune, a strong town, and seated amongst excellent pastures, of which the people make great plenty of the best Cheese: which, with the territory hereof, fell to Guy of Dampierre Earl of Flanders in right of Maud his wife, daughter and heir of Daniel the Lord of this town. 4. Aire, on the Lys, a strong town with a Castle of great antiquitie. 5. Bapaulme, a little, but well fortified town; and yet more strong because it cannot be besieged for want of fresh water, which is not to be had within three leagues of it. 6. Renty, an unwalled town, but fenced with a very strong Castle, be∣sieged by the French Anno 1554. but being overcome in a set-field by Charles the fift, they were fain to raise the siege and go home again. 7. Hedinfert, on the confluence of two little Riverets, Blangis and Canche, a frontier town on the edge of France, one of the strongest and most defensible places of all the Netherlands, built by Charles the fift out of the ruines of old Hesdin, which having taken from the French, he commanded it to be razed as no longer serviceable, and raised this town instead thereof, somewhat near France. 8. Ter••in, or Theroven, the Tervanna of Ptolemy, and Civitas Morinum of Anto∣ninus, a frontire town, held for a long time by the French, by whom thought impregnable, till taken by King Henry the 8. Anno 1513. they changed their opinion. A siege not only memorable for the issue of it, but for two other matters of great moment: the one that the Emp. Maximilian came and served in person under the colours of S. George, with the English crosse upon his breast; the other, that the French intending to victuall the town had so great an overthrow, that had the English followed their fortune, they had opened a fair way to have made themselves masters of all France; the French King being so astonished on the newes hereof, that he prepared to flie into Britain. But the English more minded the spoyles and riches of Terwyn then the sequell of an absolute victory; Et fru•• malue••unt victoria, quam uti, as the Historian said of Hannibal. It is now after many changes of fortunes in the hands of the French; and by some reckoned and accompted of as a part of Pieardie. There are besides these four walled towns more, that is to say, Lilliers, Pern, Lens, and La Bassei, of which little memorable; and to the number of 854. Villages.

These Countries of Flanders and Artois,* 1.3 were anciently part of the great Forrest of Ardenne, no∣thing but a continuall waste of Woods and Deserts, till the Conquest of it by the French: the Sea coasts being then unpeopled for fear of the Danes, who by their frequent Piracies did much vex those shores, and the inland countries meanly planted, for want of corn and other necessaries for the life of man. By Dagobert K. of France, anno 621. this wild country extending then as farre as the River Some, and comprehending besides Artois and Flanders, a good part of Picardie, was given unto one Li∣deric le bucq, with the title of Forrester, to be holden under the Soveraignty of that Crown. In whose posterity it continued with the title of Forresters till the time of Baldwin the first, the son of Odoacer, the seventh of the Forresters, whose names occurre upon record, there being a long intermission of their names and memories, during the ravagements and depredations of the Danes and Normans. This Baldwin having first ravished, and afterwards married Judith, sister to Charls the Bald King of France and Emperour, was by him created Earl of Flanders, the Soveraignty thereof reserved as before it was; in whose issue i•• remained entire, till Philip the first Earl of that name, gave unto Philip Augustus K. of France, the country of Artois, with Boulognois, and Verumanduois, now parts of Picardie, in mar∣riage with Isabel his N••ece, daughter of Baldwin Earl of Hainalt. By Lewis the 8. son and successour of Philip Augustus, Artois was given in portion to his youngest son Robert, made the first Earl of Ar∣tois by K. Lewis the 9. anno 1234. And by the marriage of Lewis the first of Flanders, with Margaret the heir of Artois, and the Earldom of Burgundie, both those Estates were added unto this of Flanders, now made farre mightier then before. And yet before this great accession of estate, it was accoun∣ted the prime Ea••ldom, as Millain was the prime Dukedom of Europe: these Earls being priviledged to write themselves Dei gratia, all others Dei clementia only; and Flanders being grown abroad to so great esteem that it was generally used for all the Netherlands. Finally, by the marriage of Margare•• daughter of Lewis de Malain Earl of Flanders, to Philip the Hardie Duke of Burgundie, this great estate became united to that house, and afterwards was conveyed unto that of Austria, as shall be shewn hereafter in due time and place. In the mean season let us take a brief survey of

The Earls of FLANDERS and ARTOIS.

• 864 1 Baldwin the first Earl of Flanders.
• 879 2 Baldwin II.
• 918 3 Arnulph, son of Baldwin the 2.
• 960 4 Baldwin III. son of Arnulph.
• 964 5 Arnulph II. son of Baldwin 3.
• 988 6 Baldwin IV. son of Arnulph.
• 1029 7 Baldwin V.
• 1067 8 Baldwin VI. Earl of Hainalt.
• 1070 9 Arnulph III. Earl of Hainalt.
• 1071 10 Robert son of Baldwin the 5. and brother of Baldwin the 6.
• 1093 11 Robert II. son of Robert the 1.
• 1111 12 Baldwin VII.
• 1118 13 Charles son of Canutus K. of Denmark, and Adelize the daughter of Robert the 1.
• 1127 14 William, son of Robert the son of William the bastard Duke of Normandie, and Maude his wife, daughter of Baldwin the 5.
• 1132 15 Theodorick of Elsas, Nephew of Robert the first, by his daughter Heltrude.
• 1169 16 Philip of Elsas.
• 1191 17 Baldwin VIII. Earl of Hainalt in right of Margaret his wife, daughter of Theodo∣rick, and sister of Philip.
• 1199 18 Baldwin IX. Earl of Flanders and Hainalt, and Emperour of Constantinople.
• 1205 19 Ferdinand, son of Sancho K. of Portugal, in right of Joan his wife, daughter of the Emperour Baldwin.
• 1244 20 William II. of Dampiere, son of Margaret the sister of Joan.
• 1255 21 Guy, brother of William the 2.
• 1304 22 Robert III. surnamed of Betune the son of Guy.

The Earls of ARTOIS.

• 1234 1 Robert of France, grandson of Philip Au∣gustu••, and Isabel the daughter of Bald∣win the 8. made the first Earl by Lewis the 9.
• 1245 2 Robert II. son of Robert.
• 1302 3 Otheline, Earl of Burgundie, succeeded i•• right of Maud his wife, the daughter of Robert the 2.
• 1315 4 Philip the Long K. of France, Earl of Bur∣gundie and Artois in right of Joan his wife, the daughter and heir of Maud, and Otho, or Otholine.
• ...

• 1323 23 Lewis, grandson of Robert the 3. in right of his mother Earl of Rethel, and in the right of his Grandmother Earl of Nevers, and of Artois in right of his wife.
• 1361 5 Margaret daughter of Philip of France,* 1.4 and Joan, Countesse of Artois and Burgundie, married to Lewis Earl of Flanders, &c.
• 1347 24 Lewis de Malain, Earl of Flanders, Nevers, and Rethel, in right of his father, and of Artois and Burgundie in right of his mother; whose daughter Margaret conveyed this great estate to Philip the Hardie Duke of Burgundie: Of whom and his Successors in a place more proper.

The Arms of Flanders were Or, a Lyon sable, langued and armed Gules. Those of Artois being Seme of Flower de Lyces Or, in a field Azure; a file of three Labels Gules, charged with as many Castles of the first.

HAINALT.

HAINALT is bounded on the East with Namur, on the West with Flanders, on the North with Brabant, on the South with Picardie, and Champagne in France. It was antiently called Sal∣tu•• Garbonatius: by some writers of the middle times, the lower Picardie: and is supposed to have taken this new name from the River Hain, or Hania which passeth through it.

The length thereof is 60 miles, 48 the breadth, comprehending in that compasse 950 Villages, and 24 towns; in and amongst which there is reckoned one principate, 10 Earldoms, 12 Peerdoms, or Pairries, 22 Baronies, 26 Abbeys, one Lord Marshall, besides other Officers of the Prince, descending by inheritance to the Lords of this Province.

The air hereof is very good, and the soil fruitfull by reason the country is watered with so many Rivers, as the Scheld, the Sambre, the Dender, and severall lesser streams, besides divers lakes, marishes, ponds, and pools, which do much enrich it: the country abounding in most places with fresh Med∣dows and sweet Pastures, good fruits and profitable trees, but especially with great plenty of corn. Here are also in some parts of it notable Mines of iron and lead; and excellent quarries of the best stone, fit for all kind of buildings.

The principall of the Towns are 1. Monts, situate at the confluence of the Haine, and a little River called Trulle, which gives a good naturall strength unto it, fortified besides with a very strong wall, three large deep ditches, and an antient Castle. The Town, great, beautifull, and rich, adorned with sumptuous buildings both private and publick, and replenished with wealthy Merchants, and men of trade: the principall of all the Province erected into an Earldom by Charls the Great, and some∣times used for the stile of the Earls of Hainalt. In this town is the noble Nunnerie of S. Valdrude, once a Dutchesse of Lorrain, the Nuns whereof are to be Ladies and Gentlewomen of noble families, in the morning apparelled in white, like Nuns; in the afternoons according to their birth and qua∣lities, who when they please may leave the Cloister and be marryed. The Abbesse hath both juris∣dictions in the town and country about it; and antiently did put the Earls of Hainalt into possession of the state. Another Nunnerie like this (but not of such large Revenues) there is at 2 Ma••buige on the Sambre, a good town of Merchandise. 3. Valenciennes seated on the Scheld, and a little River called Rouelle, which make not only in it many pleasant Isles, but passe almost under every mans house, to the great benefit and delight of the place and people. The fite hereof so strong by na∣ture, (besides the fortifications of Art) that on the one side it may be easily made unapproachable by water; and on the other sides so defended by hils, that it can hardly be besieged but by three Armies at once. A goodly, large and beautifull town, especially for publick buildings, the chief whereof are the Church of our Lady, built after the antient manner of Architecture, with sumptuous arches 〈◊〉〈◊〉 goodly Pillars of Marble and Porphyrie; the Earls Palace and the Town-hal, buildings of great mag∣nificence, and excellent workmanship: the birth-place of Henry the 7. Emperour of Germdnie, of Mary daughter of Charls the Warlike, and Froissart the great French Historian. Finally a town, which for the eminence thereof, is governed as a State apart by it self, having under the jurisdiction of it, 3 Towns and 132 Villages, which on occasions of appeal resort not to the Provinciall Councell at Montz, but the great Councell at Machlyn. 4. Chimay upon the River Blanche near a pleasant Forrest, which gives the title of a Prince to the eldest son of the Duke of Arschot, one of the principall Lords of Brabant, who have here a very goodly Palace. 5. Halle, seated on the Seine, which runs through it, a place of great credit amongst the Papists, by reason of an Image of the blessed Virgin, famed for many miracles. Of which, see Lipsius on that Subject. 6. Beauvais an old town, at a pillar whereof begin all the wayes leading into France, made of paved stones by Brunhault the wife of Sigebert King of Mets, or Austrasia, who with Fridegond the wife of Chilperick, and Katharine Medices the wife of Henry the 2. are said to be the three Furies of France. 7. Landrecie on the River Sambre, famous for the notable resistance which it made to Charls the 5, 1543. 8. Mariemburg, built by Marie Queen of Hungarie, Governesse here for the said Charls, anno 1524. to serve as a Bulwark against France, on which it frontireth. 9. Philippe Ville, built and well fortified for the same reason by King Philip the 2. 10. Bouchant, upon the Scheld, in the county of Ostrinand, which countie is the title of the first son of Hainalt, and by that name William the eldest son of Albert Earl of Hainalt and Holland,

was admitted Knight of the Garter by King Richard the 2.* 1.5 11. Conde a good little town seated on the Scheld, the moi••ie whereof belonged heretofore to the house of Montpens••er in France; as 12. Anghien a town of great trade for tapestrie to the house of Vendosme: from whence the Princes of Conde, and Dukes of ••nghien do derive their ticles. 13. Beaumont upon the knap of a goodly hill, whence it hath the name, belonging at the present to the Dukes of Arschot, but antiently the partage of the second son of the Earls of Hainalt. 14. Bins, or ••inche, on a branch of the River Hain, one of the jointure∣towns of the Countesses of Hainalt, much beautified and made a place of pleasures by Marie Queen of Hun••arie, to whom it was given by Charls the 5. (commonly called the Queens Paradise) but burnt and utterly destroyed by the French, anno 1554. 15. Ath, seated on both sides of the Dender, a little, but a pleasant and wealthie town; here being held the staple of Linnen for all this country, the cloth here sold amounting to 200000 crowns per annum.

As for the History of Hainalt, the antient Inhabitants thereof were the Nervii, the most valiant peo∣ple of the Gaules, dwelling within this part of the Forrest of Ardenne; which in the beginning of the Kingdome of the French, gave the title of Earl to many great and puissant Princes. Growing too great, and trusting too much to that greatnesse, they drew▪ upon themselves the jealousies of those mightier Princes, by whom at last Brunulph Earl of Ardenne was slain in battle, and his estate parcelled out amongst his children: Alberic, surnamed the Orphelin, one of his younger sons, being by Sigeber•• King of Mets or Austrasia, enfeoffed of this country, by the name and title of Earl of Hainalt, (H••nne∣via the Latines call it.) Twice this Estate was added or united to that of Flanders. 1 In the person of Baldwin the 5. Earl of Flanders, succeeding hereunto in right of Richild his wife, daughter of Reg∣nier the 3. 2 By the marriage of Baldwin the 6. of Hainalt, with Margaret Countesse of Flanders, sister and heir of Philip of Elsas, Earl of Flanders. But being divided the first time by the usurpation of Flanders, wrested from Arnulph the 3. by his Uncle Robert, and the second time by the intrusion of John de Avesnes, naturall son of Margaret the second daughter of the Emperor Baldwin, into the Estate and Earldom of Hainalt; it was finally annexed to Holland by the marriage of John de Avesnes to Adelize, or Aleide, daughter, (and at the last) heir of Florence the 4. Earl of Holland, Zeland, &c. from which it never was divided, till they were both incorporated into that of Burgundie.

The EARLS of HAINALT.

• 1 Alberic, one of the younger sons of Brunulph, Earl of Ardenne.
• 2 Waultier, son of Alberic.
• 3 Waultier II. son of Waultier the first.
• 4 Wau••tier III. son of Waltier the second.
• 5 Albon, in right of his wife, eldest daughter of Walter the third.
• 6 Albon II. son of the said Albon by that wife.
• 7 Manassier son of Albon the second.
• 8 Regnier, son of Manassier.
• 9 Regnier II. son of Regnier the first.
• 10 Regnier III. son of Regnier the second.
• 11 Baldwin V. of Flanders, in right of Richild his wife, the sole daughter to Regnier the third, was Earl of Hainalt.
• 1070 12 Arnulph, son of Baldwin and Richild, despoiled of his estate and life by his Uncle Robert, who seised on the Earldom of Flanders.
• 1071 13 Baldwin II. brother of Arnulph, succeeded in Hainalt.
• 14 Baldwin III. son of Baldwin the second.
• 15 Baldwin IV. son of Baldwin the third.
• 16 Baldwin V. son of Baldwin the fourth.
• 17 Baldwin VI. of Hainalt, and VIII. of Flanders, in right of Margaret his wife, sister and he••r of Philip of Elsas, Earl of Flanders.
• 1199 18 Baldwin VIII. of Hainalt and IX of Flanders, Emperour of Constantinople.
• 1295 19 Joan Countesse of Hainalt and Flanders, first married to Ferdinand of Portugal, and then to Thomas Earl of Savoy.
• 1244 20 Margaret the younger sister of Joan, married to William of Bourbon Lord of Dampierre, by whom she had William and Guy both Earls of Flanders.
• 21 John de Avesnes, base son of Margaret, begot before her marriage by Buschart her Guardian, the Porter of S. Peters in L'Isle, by force and fraud extorted Hainalt from his Brethren born in lawfull wedlock; and married Aleide daughter and heir of Florence the 4. Earl of Holland: whose successours in both Estates we shall meet with there, and amongst them, with William the 2. father of Queen Philippa, wife of Edward the 3. one of the most considerable of all the number.

The Arms hereof are quarterly Flanders and Holland.

4. The Bishoprick of CAMBRAY.* 1.6

Southward with Hainalt lieth the Bishoprick of CAMBRAY, containing a goodly Town and territory, reckoned of anciently as a part of Hainalt, now a state distinct; rather confederate with the Princes of the Netherlands, then subject to them.

The Principall City hereof is Cambray (called in Latine, Cameracum) seated on both sides of the River Scheld; a fair, goodly and mighty City, full of people, many of which are rich Merchants, but all of them industrious, especially in making that fine linnen Cloth, from hence called Camerac, or Cambrick. The private buildings very fair, but the publick much fairer, especially the Mona∣steries and other Churches, of which the most remarkable is that of our Ladie, an ancient and sumptu∣ous fabrick, and the See Episcopall. From whence the countrey and territory hereunto adjoyning, is called Cambresis, in which are divers Villages and places of importance; the chief of which is Cha∣steau Cambresis, six leagues from the City, remarkable for the treaty held there betwixt France and Spain anno 1559. in which a peace was happily setled amongst all the chief Princes of Christendome. 2. Avesnes le sec (so called to distinguish it from Avesnes in Hainalt) near which are digged excellent white stones for building, little inferiour unto Marble.

This Bishoprick was founded in the person of S. Diogenes, a Grecian born, Anno 390. or thereabouts. Whose Successours in tract of time became so potent, that at the last the Bishop hereof became both the Lord spirituall and temporall of the Town and territory, honoured with the title of a Duke, and Prince of the Empire, and in the end made an Arch-bishop by Pope Paul the 4. anno 1562.

The City of Cambray made Imperiall by the Germane Emperours, was first by Henry the fift given in protection to Robert of Hierusalem Earl of Flanders; afterwards setled and confirmed on all his Suc∣cessours by the Emperour Frederick, anno 1164. Which notwithstanding, the French finding it con∣venient for them, divers times possessed it: but governing with too great insolence, they were dri∣ven out by the people, in the time of Lewis the 11. and the town yeelded voluntarily unto Maxi∣milian, governour of these countries for his son Philip. Charles the 5. in the year 1543. built a strong Citadell in it, pretending that he did it for defence of the Town against the French; but indeed to keep it for himself. After this it was taken by the Duke of Alenson, (brother of Henry the 3. of France) then Governour of the Netherlands, anno 1582. but regained not long after by the Spaniards, the Inha∣bitants giving up the Town for want of victuals. Since that continually possessed by the Spaniards; but so, that the people still enjoy their ancient priviledges, and are governed by their own lawes and Bishops.

5. NAMVR.

The Earldome of NAMVR hath on the East Hainalt, on the West the Bishoprick of Leige, on the North Brabant••, and on the South Luxenbourg. The countrey very small, containing only 182. Villages and four walled Towns; but plentifull of all commodities, and replenished with a loyall and industrious people. Particularly the aire hereof is very wholesome; the countrey watered with many rivers and pleasant brooks, (amongst which the Sambre, and the Maes) which besides the benefit of portage, yeeld great plenty of fish. The hils, whereof it hath not many, clothed with woods, abounding with all kinde of fowle and venison; the vallies eminently fruitfull of all sorts of grain, rich mines of Lead, quarries of Marble of all colours, as also of Porphyrie or Jasper, and great plenty of Coal; but in mines of Iron so abounding and that continually hammered by a painfull peo∣ple, that Vulcans forge may seem to be restored to the world again, and seated here; which as it makes the people wealthy, so it keeps them from idlenesse. And as for the Nobility, they are gene∣rally valiant, given to all military exercises fit for their degrees, and very affectionate to their Prince; the greatest vertue of a subject.

Walled Towns it hath but four, as before was said, that is to say, 1. Namur, the chief of all the Province, where resideth the Councell for the countrey, from which lyeth no appeal but to Machlyn only. Seated between two hils on both sides of the Sambre, which doth there fall into the Meuse. The City rich, inhabited for the most part by the Nobility, defended with a strong Castle, and beau∣tified with a fair Cathedrall, founded here in the Church of S. Albin anno 1559. Not farre off in the Villages of Ardenne and Monstier, are two Nunneries of Ladies, like those of Montz and Maubuige, spoken of in Hainalt. 2. Bovines upon the Meuse, sacked by the French anno 1554. since repaired, and fortified. 3. Charlemont, a small Town, but of most exact fortifications, built by Charles the 5. anno 1555. to oppose the French, who had then possessed themselves of Mariemburg, a Town of Hal∣nalt. 4. Valencourt, a little Town, but standing in a goodly and fruitfull countrey. Of the Villages the chief is Doue, seated on the Meuse or Maes, fortified with a strong Castle, and honoured with the title of a Viscountie; 2. Floren, 3. Vascie, and 4. Sausin, of much beauty and greatnesse.

The ancient Inhabitants of this countrey were a part of the Nervii; first made an Earldone by some of the descendents of the sons of Clodius the second King of the French, who being dis∣possessed of their Fathers kingdome by Meroveus, the Master of his horse (to whom he had commit∣ted the guardianship or tuition of them,) were forced to betake themselves to the most defensible

parts of the great forrest of Ardenne,* 1.7 and the parts adjoyning: where they founded the great Earldome of Ardenne: divided in succeeding times into many parcels, of which this was one. By what and by how many Earls possessed, I am yet to learn: but sold it was by John the last Earl unto Philip the Good; continuing ever since in the house of Burgundie, or in their right in those of Austria and Spain.

The Armes hereofate Or, a Lyon Sable, debruised with a Bend Gules.

6. LVXENBOVRG.

LVXENBOVRG is bounded on the East with the Mosette, and the land of Triers; on the West with the Meuse or Maes, and a branch of the forrest of Ardenne; on the North with Luyck-land, Namur, and a part of Hainalt; and on the South with the Dutchie of Lorrain. Divided into two parts, the Eastern part being called Fanenne, fruitfull of corn, and yeelding withall some wines, some mines, and many excellent quarries of goodly stone; the Western called the Ardenne, a re∣mainder of that spacious Forrest which sometimes overshadowed all this countrey, barren of corn, but very plentifull of Venison, and of Fowle good store. The people of this country are not all of one language, those nearer Germanie, as in Luxenbourg, Arlune, Rodemark, Theonville, and the rest on that side, speaking the Dutch; as those of Ivois, Mommedi, Morvill, and Damvilliers, with the rest border∣ing on France, do a corrupt or broken French. In which regard the pleadings held before the Councell residing in Luxenbourg, are made in both Languages, that so they may be understood by all that have businesse there. But the Nobility and Gentry (of which there is more in this Province then in any other of the seventeen) speak both Tongues perfectly. A breed of men full of vertue, cur∣tesie, and hospitality towards one another, and of great truth and faith to their Prince: but recko∣ned for the worst Landlords in all these countries, governing their Subjects and Tenants like the Pe∣sants of France, contrary to the use and liberties of the rest of the Netherlands. Both sorts, as well the Nobility as the Commons, hate both Law and Lawyers; and for the most part end their con∣troversies amongst themselves, without any processe.

The whole countrey containeth in compasse about 70. leagues, or 200. Italian miles, in which are comprehended 23. walled Towns, and 1168. Burroughs and Villages. The principall of which are 1. Lucembourg, built in the place where anciently stood the Augusta Veromanduorum of Ptolemie; and took this new name quasi Lucis burgum, from the image of the Sun there worshipped, seated on the Alsnutius, or Alze, which runneth through it; large and of a strong situation, but not very well built; nor yet recovered of the spoils which the long wars betwixt the French and the Spaniard brought upon it, before the treaty of Cambray. However it is the chief Town of the Province, ho∣noured with the residence of the Councell hereof, and the Sepulchre of John K. of Bohemia, slain in the battell of Crecie against the English, anno 1348. 2. Arlune, on the top of an high hill, so called quasi Aralunae, from an Altar consecrated to the Moon in the times of Paganisme. 3. Theonville, on the Moselle, over which it hath a goodly bridge; a frontier Town near Metz, and the border of Lorrain; and for that cause made marvellous strong, but taken by the French anno 1558. and restored the next year by the peace of Cambray. 4. Bostoack, a fair Town, and very well traded; commonly cal∣led the Paris of Ardenne, in which part it standeth. 5. Mommedi, on an high hill at the foot of which runneth the River Chiers. 6. Danvilliers, once a very strong place also; both taken and ransacked by the French anno 1552. 7. Morville upon the Chiers, the one half whereof belongeth to the Duke of Lorrain, the other to the King of Spain, as Duke of Luxenbourg for which cause called Laville commune. 8. Rock di March, fortified with a strong Castle. 9. Ivoys, a place once of great importance, sacked by the French anno 1552. and restored by the treaty of Cambray, on condition it should never more be walled. 10. La Ferte on the Chiers, a Town of the same condition.

In the skirts of this countrey towards France standeth the Dukedome of Bovillon, and the principa∣lity of Sedan; distinct Estates, and in the hands of severall Owners; yet so that the Soveraign of Sedan is stiled Duke of Bovillon. Towns of most note, 1. Bovillon the chief Town, built on the side of an hill near the River Senoy; a fair large City, and beautified with a goodly Castle on the top of an hill; so strong as well by Art as Nature, that before the use of great Ordnance it was held impreg∣nable; but since it hath been often taken, sometimes by the Emperours, and finally anno 1552. by the French King. It hath command over a fair and goodly Territory, honoured with the title of a Dutchy, and is now in the hands of the Bishops of Leige; to one of whose Predecessors named Obert, it was sold by Godfrey of Bovillon Duke of Lorrain, at his going to the Holy-land. 2. Sedan or Esdain, situate on the banks of the Maes or Mosa, the usuall residence of the Prince, a fine neat Town, well fortified, and planted with 80. brasse Pieces of Ordnance: honoured also with a seat of Learning, which being of a middle nature betwixt a Grammar Schoole and an University, is in the Criticisme of these times, called a Scholaillustris, to which men may send their children to learn good letters, though they can take in them no Degrees, that being a priviledge reserved only to the Universities. So that these Schooles may be somewhat like our Collegiate Churches of Westminster, Winchester, and Eaton but that the younger Students in these last named, are more re••trained to Rhetorick and Grammar, then in the other; though these more liberally indowed for the incouragement and reward of lear∣ning, then all the Scholae illus••res of either Germanie. 3. Loni. 4. Mouson, (Musonium it is called in Latine) a Town of great strength and consequence on the River Maes, upon some jealousies of State, garrison'd

by the French (as some other good Peers of this Dukedome are.)* 1.8 5. Sausi, and 6. Florenge, which two last came unto the Princes of Sedan by the Lady Jone the wife of Robert Earl of Mark, and mother of that Robert Earl of Mark who first of all this house was honoured with the title of Duke of Bovillon. All taken and levelled with the ground by Charles the 5. in his war against Robert Earl of Mark, and Duke of Bovillon; but afterwards repaired on the peace ensuing. 7. Jamais, a Town of great importance on the edge of Lorrain; by the Duke whereof in the year 1589▪ it was taken after a long siege from the Lady Charlotte, the last Heire: Generall of this House; and laid unto that Dukedome as a part thereof.

As for the Dukedome of Bovillon it was anciently a part of the great Earldome of A••denne: by Geo∣frey of Ardenne Duke of Bovillon, united to the Dukedome of Lorrain, at his investiture in that estate, anno 1004. By Geofrey the 2. of that name, and fift Duke of Lorrain, it was given in Dower to his Sister Ida, at her marriage with Eusta•• Earl of Boulogne in Picardie; to whom he brought the famous Godfrey (surnamed of Bovillon, because Duke thereof, before he did succeed into that of Lorrain) re∣nowned for the conquest of Hierusalem, and the Holy-land. Who afterwards succeeding in the Duke∣dome of Lorrain, sold his Estates of Bovillon unto Obert Bishop of Leige, as before was said: by whom and his Successors both the Estate and Title of Duke of Bovillon, was peaceably enjoyed, till the yea•• 1530, or thereabouts: when Eberha••d of Mark, Bishop and Cardinall of Leige, sold it to Robert Earl of Mark his brother, descended from Engelbert Earl of Mark, and a daughter of the house of Aremberg, who brought with her Sedan, Jamais, and others of the Towns spoken of before. But Robert being worsted by Charles the 5. (for whom he was too weak an enemy) the Town of Bovillon being taken by the conquering Emperour, was afterwards restored to the Bishops, and nothing but the title of Dukes of Bovillon left to the Princes of Sedan. And that he might be able to hold Sedan, this Robert was fain to return again to the protection of the French (as his Ancestors had done before) and died anno 1535. leaving h••s titles and estate unto Robert his son, one of the Marshals of France: whose grandson, called also Robert, being a dear friend and companion of Henry of Bourbon K. of Navarre, and afterwards of France also, dying without issue at Geneva, anno 1588, committed to him the disposall of his estates and of the Lady Charlotte his only Sister. And he so well discharged his trust, that (having setled his own affairs) he gave the Lady in marriage to Henry de la Tour, Vis∣count of Turene in France, one who had done him very good service in the course of his long war against the Leaguers, and with her the possession of Sedan, and the title of Bovillon; whose posterity do still enjoy it. As for the Town of Bovillon it self, being taken from Duke Robert by Charles the 5. and from the Imperialists by the French, anno 1552. as before was said, it was at last restored un∣to the Bishop of Leige by the treaty of Cambray, anno 1559. but without prejudice to the title of the Prince of Sedan. So that at this time there are no fewer then three which write themselves Dukes of Bovillon, viz. the Bishop of Leige who hath possession of the Town; the house of de la Tour, who is in∣vested in Sedan and some other pieces; and finally the Heirs Males of the collatorall line of the house of Mark, who hold some other parts and places of this estate.

But to return again to the Dutchy of Luxembourg, it was at first a part of the great Earldome of Ardenne; dismembred from it in the time of the Emperour Otho the first, by Sigefride the son of Ricuinus Prince thereof; who in the division of that estate amongst his Brethren had this for his por∣tion, with the title of Earl, denominated from the Castle (now the town) of Luxembourg, selected by him for the seat of his principality. Of his Successours there is little to be found upon good re∣cord, untill the time of Henry the 1. father of Henry the 7. Emperour of Germany, and of a Royall progeny of Kings and Princes, two of the which are most considerable, though all of them of eminent quality in their severall times, viz. 1. Henry elected and crowned Emperour, by the name of Henry the 7. said to be poisoned by a Frier in the Holy Chalice, to prevent some designs he had against the Pope, in asserting the Imperiall power in Italie: 2. John the son of this Henry, chosen King of Bohemia, in regard of his marriage with Elizabeth daughter of Wenceslaus, King thereof; the possession of which Realm he left unto his Posterity advanced unto a Dukedome by Charles the 4. the eldest son of this John, in the person of Wenceslaus his younger brother. What else concerns it, we shall finde in this following Catalogue of

EARLS and DUKES of LVXEMBOVRG.

• 1 Sigif••ide, the son of Ricuine, Prince of Ardenne.
• 2 Henry Earl of Luxembourg, slain in the quarrell of Rainold Earl of Gueldres, contending with John Duke of Brabant for the Dutchie of Limbourg.
• 3 Henry II. by means of his brother Baldwin Elector of Triers, chosen Emperour of the Ger∣mans, the 7. of that name, anno 1308. first crowned at Aken, and afterwards at Rome; one of the last Emperours that medled in the affairs of Italy.
• 1313 4 John, son of Henry II. Earl of Luxembourg, married Elizabeth daughter of Winceslaus the elder, King of Bohemia; of which he was upon that marriage elected and crowned King, anno 1311. in the life of his father, slain by the English in the battell of Crecie, anno 1346.
• 1346 5 Wenceslaus the younger son of John, created Duke of Luxembovrg by his elder brother Charles the 4. Emperour and King of Bohemia.
• ...

• 1383 6 Wenceslaus II.* 1.9 eldest son of the said Charles the 4. Emperour and King of Bohemia also, suc∣ceeded his Uncle in the Dukedome.
• 1419 7 Sigismund, brother of Wenceslaus, succeeded Wenceslaus in all his estates; to which he added the Crown of Hungarie by the marriage of Mary daughter of King Lewis the first.
• 8 Elizabeth, daughter of John Duke of Garlitz, (a Town of Lusatia) the brother of Sigismund, by the gi••t of Sigismund her Uncle, being then alive; the better to fit her for the bed of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Bourgogn Duke of Brabant; after whose decease she married John the 3. Earl of Hamalt, Holland, &c. But having no issue by either of them, she sold her interest in this Dukedome to Philip the Good in pursuance of the contract and agreement made at her first marriage, for setling this estate in the house of Burgundie.

The Armes are B. six Barrulets A, supporting a Lyon, G, crowned and armed, Or.

7. LIMBOVRG.

The greatest of the Estates of Belgium for extent of territory at the time of their incorporating in the house of Burgundie, was that of Brabant, comprehending 5. of the 17. Provinces, that is to say, the Dukedome of Limbourg and Brabant, the Marquisate of the holy Empire, the Earldome of Namurce, and the Seigneury of Macklyn.

1. LIMBOVRG, hath on the East the Dukedome of Gulick in High Germany; on the West the Bishoprick of Leige: on the North, Brabant; and on the South, the Dukedome of Luxembourg. The Soyle fruitfull of all necessary commodities, excepting wines, the want whereof is recompensed with most excellent wheat, great store of sewell, and plenty of the best iron mines in all these countries: all which commodities it hath of so great excellency in their severall kinds, that it is said of them proverbially, that their Bread is better then bread, their Fire hotter then fire, and their Iron harder then iron. It is also well stored with medicinable simples, and enriched with a mine of Copperas, (by Plinie called Lapis ••rosus, lib. 34. c. 10.) which being incorporated with brasse makes Lattin, and in∣creaseth the brasse by one third part. Lapis aerosus multum aeris habet, & ex eo fuso fit aes, as that Author hath it.

It is one of the least of the Belgick Provinces, containing in it but 125. Villages, and no more then five walled Towns or Cities, viz. 1. Limbourg, which gives name to the whole Estate, plea∣santly seated on an hill amongst shady woods, under which runneth the River Wesdo, which having watered the whole countrey emptieth it self into the Maes; well built, and fortified with a very strong Castle, mounted upon a steep Precipice, of no easie accesse. 2. Walkenbourg, called by the French Fauquemont, a reasonable fair Town, with a large territory, two Dutch miles from Maestricht; conquered from Reynold Lord hereof by John the 3. Duke of Brabant. 3. Dalem a little Town with a Castle, the territory thereof extending beyond the Maes; conquered by Henry Duke of Brabant, of that name the second. 4. Rhode le Duck, a little old Town with as old a Castle, half a league from Wal∣kenbourg. 5. Carpen, situate between Gulick and Colen, beautified with a Collegiate Church, and a strong Castle, in which there is a Governour with a good Garrison for defence of the place. Each of these Towns hath jurisdiction on the parts adjoyning; but with appeal unto the Chancery of Brabant.

The ancient inhabitants of this ••act, and the Bishoprick of Leige adjoyning, were the Eburones. When it was first made an Earldome, I am yet to seek: but of an Earldome it was made a Dukedome by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1172. Henry one of the Dukes hereof, marryed his daugh∣ter Margaret to Godfrey the 3. Duke of Brabant, which gave that house some colour to pretend unto it▪ backed with a better title on the death of an other Henry, the last Duke of Limbourg, whose next heir Adelph sold it to John Duke of Braba••t, pretending to it in the right of the former marriage, anno 1293. But Reynold Earl of Gueldres, thinking himself to have a better title then Adolph, in right of Ermingrade his wife the daughter of Herman, a late Duke hereof, put in his plea, and challenged it by force of Armes: but being vanquished and taken prisoner by the said Duke John in the battell of Woranem, was fain for his release, to release all his claim and title to the Dukedome of Limbourg; after that quietly enjoyed by the Dukes of Brabant, till they fell both together to the house of Bur∣gundie.

The Armes hereof are Argent, a Lyon Barrie of ten pieces, Or, and Gules.

8. LVICK-LAND, OR The Bishoprick of LEIGE.

Westward of Limbourg, but a far mightier estate then it, lieth LVICK-LAND, as the Dutch, or the Bishoprick of LEIGE, (Le••diensis) as the Latine and French writers call it: anciently under the protection of the Dukes of Brabant, and afterwards of the Princes of the house of Burgundie, as Lords of that countrey. By some accompted of, and described as a part of Germany; but for the

reasons before mentioned I shal place it here:* 1.10 environed on all sides with the Belgick Provinces that is to say, with the Dukedome of Limbourg on the East, with Brabant on the North and West; on the South with Luxembourg.

The Aire hereof is very wholesome, and the Earth as fruitfull, abounding with all kinde of grain and fruits, some store of wine; and as for flesh, fish, fowle, and venison, it hath very great plenty, and that too of an excellent taste. But the chief riches of this Countrey is under ground, consisting in mines of Lead, and Iron, and some few of Gold; quarries of Albasier mingled with all sorts of Marble; rich veins of Brimstone, and unexhaustible pits of Coal, which last it hath in such abun∣dance, that there is digged within the compasse of one league of the City of Leige, not only suffi∣cient for that great City, but so much overplus as being sold at mean prices about the countrey amounts unto 100000. duckets of yearly value. The Coal much sweeter then elsewhere, and of a nature contrary to all other Coal, in that it is kindled with water, and quenched with oyle: and the strong servour of it taken off by casting salt on it.

The whole countrey containeth 24 walled Towns, and 1800. Villages, the principall of which are 1 Leige or Luick, (in Latine Leodium) situate in a pleasant valley environed with hils, the Meuse en∣tring it in two branches, accompanied with four lesser Riverets, which make in it many delightfull Ilands. The compasse of it about four miles, the ordinary buildings very fair, all built of stone; the Bishops palace a magnificent and sumptuous piece: the Churches in number forty, of which eight are Collegiate, 32. Parochiall; all of them for their riches and bounty excelling all in any City of France or Germanie. Besides these, there are so many Convents, M••nasteries, and religious houses about the Town, that taking all together they amount to an hundred: all of them of such fair reve∣nues, so well endowed, and the Religious persons there of so great authority, that it is cailed the Paradise of Priests, and that deservedly. It is also an University of good Antiquity, wherein were Stu∣dents at one time, 9. Kings sons, 24. Dukes sons, 29. Earls sons, besides Barons and Gentlemen: the greatest part of which were Canons of the Church of S. Lambert, which is the Cathedrall of the City. Yet notwithstanding it hath tasted of the malice of fortune as well as others, being first destroyed by the Danes, then by the Normans, twice taken and once destroyed by Charles of Burgundie, anno 1468. Subject it is unto the Bishop as Lord temporall of it; from whom (being long since made an Imperiall Ctiy) there lyeth an Appeal to the Chamber of Spires. 2. Dinand upon the Meuse, near Namur, of ve∣ry great traffick till destroyed by Charles of Burgundie, in the same year with Leige: hardly recovered of which wounds, it was again sacked by K. Henry the 2. of France, anno 1854. 3. Maeseck, upon the Meuse or Maes also, a league from whence is the fair Nunnery of Thuren, of the same nature with that of Mentz, and others spoken of before: the like to which there is near 4. Bilsen, another Town of this Bishoprick; the Abbesses of each having the priviledge of coyning both gold and silver. 5. Lootz, by the Dutch called Borclom, in the county of Diostein; made a county in the time of Charles the Great, the title and possession of Vgier the Dane, so famous in the History of Gallen of France, and others of the old Romances. 6. Franchimont, which gives the title to a Marquesse of the Bishop of Leige. 7. Centron or S. Truden, a fair Town, so called of the Abbie, dedicated to that Saint. 8. Huy or Hoey, so called of a violent River, which there runs into the Meuse. 9. Tungres, the chief City of the Ton∣gri, (which together with the Eburones were) once the Inhabitants of this tract in which are still the ruines of a Temple consecrated to Hercules. Anciently an Episcopall See, translated hence to Maestreicht, and at last to Leige: and in those times so great, and of such renown, that Attila the Hun destroyed in it 100. Churches: now but a very small Town, and not worth the mentioning but for these Antiquities. Eight leagues from hence, amongst the shady thickets of the Forrest of Ar∣denne, is that so celebrated 10. Villages, and those famous hot Baths, frequented from all the places of Europe, called the Spa: not so pleasant, as wholesome; not so wholsome, as famous. Yet are they good for sundry diseases, as the Tertian Ague, and Dropsie, the Stone, the exulceration of the Lungs, the Sciatique, &c. They are of most virtue in July, because they are then hottest, and to such as taste them. they relish much of iron, from some iron mines, it seemeth, through which the waters run, which feed them. These Baths of great fame in the time of Plinie, who doth thus describe them. Tungri Civitas fontem habet insignem, plurimis bullis stillantem, ferruginei saporis, quod ipsum non nisi in fine potus intelli∣gitur. Purgat hic corpora, febres tertianas discutit, calculorum{que} vitia. So he, lib. 31. cap. 2. agreeably to the nature of them at this present time.

As for the Bishoprick of Leige, it was first founded at Tungres, as before was said; after the sackage of which City by Attila, removed anno 498. by S. Servatius unto Maestricht. But the people of Maestricht having Martyred S. Lambert, then Bishop, anno 710. by Hubert his designed Successour, with the leave of Pope Constantine, it was translated to this place, and a Cathedrall Church here founded by the name of S. Lambert. His Successours did so well husband their advantages, that they did not only buy the Dukedome of Bovillon, but the City and territory of Leige, sold unto Speutus and Obertus successively Bishops of it, by Godfrey of Bovillon, Duke of Lorrain (of which Dukedome it was formerly a part or member) at his departure hence to the Holy-land: not much increased since that in lands, though he be in titles, the Bishop being stiled a Prince of the Empire, Duke of Bovillon, Marquesse of Franchimont, Earl of Lootz, and Hasbain. Yet are not his ordinary Revenues above 30000. duckets yearly, his subjects living very well under him, at easie rents, and growing for the most part unto good estates: An argument whereof may be, that when the Leigeois had rebelled against Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundie, (under whose Cleintele they were, as Duke of Brabant) they bought their peace of him at the price of 600000 Florens of the Rhene, to be paid in six years. After which time

again rebelling against Charles the warlike (as they have been observed to be the most rebellious City in Europe excepting Gaunt) they were able to wage 30000 men,* 1.11 but not being able to with∣stand the forces of their Lord Protectour, they fell into that miserable destruction spoken of before. Since that time they have lived with more moderation under the protection of the Princes of the house of Austria: but counted neutrall in the quarrells betwixt the King of Spain, and the States con∣federate, as formerly between the Spaniard and the French, though many times they suffer in the contestations.

9. BRABANT. 10. The MARQUISATE, And 11. MACHLIN.

THese I have joyned together, though distinct estates, because they have a long time followed the same fortune, and that the two last doe no otherwise differ from the first, then the parts from the whole: the Marquisate, and Machlin, being reckoned as parts of Brabant, and included in it.

9. BRABANT is bounded on the East, with Luickland, or the Bishoprick of Leige; on the West, with the River Scheld, and a part of Flanders; on the North, with the Maes, which severeth it from Holland, and Guelderland; and on the South, with Hainalt, Namur, and part of Luickland.

The Air hereof is generally very wholesome, and good, and the Soil naturally fruitfull, except∣ing Kempenland, (being the parts hereof lying towards the North, which being barren of it self, is made indifferently fertile by keeping Cattell, Soiling the ground, and other arts of good Husban∣dry. The people live in most freedome, and are the best priviledged of any in Belgium; A thing for which they are more beholding to the Princes goodnesse, then their own great wits; being no∣ted to be none of the wisest, especially as they grow in age, when most men learn wisdome. Bra∣banti quo magis seneseunt, eo magis stultescunt, as Erasmus telleth us.

The length hereof, from S. Gertrudenberg to Genblaurs, North and South, is 22 Dutch, or German miles; from Helmont to Berghen ap Some, East and West, 20 of the same miles; the whole com∣passe 80. Within which circuit are conteined 26 walled Townes; and Villages with Parish Chur∣ches 718. of which, the odde 18 called Franks, or Market-townes, enjoy the priviledges of walled Townes, or Cities, though unwalled themselves.

Places of most importance in it, are 1. Shertogen Bosch, or the Bosch, as the Dutch; Bois le Duc, or Bolduc, as the French; and Silva Ducis, or Boscum Ducis, as the Latines call it: each name derived ac∣cording to the severall languages, from a pleasant wood belonging to the Dukes of Brabant, where the Town now stands, situate on a litle River called Deese, some two leagues from the Maes, neer the borders of Guelderland: a large and well built Town, very strongly fortified, and of great trade for Clothing, here being made yeerly, in the time of Lewis Guicciardine 20000 Clothes, worth 200000 Crownes to the Clother or Draper; made an Episcopall See anno 1559. the Cathedrall, which is fixed in the Church of S. John, being fair and large, and beautified with one of the goodliest Dials in the Christian world. This is the principall town of Brabant (properly and distinctly so called) comprehending under it the four Countries of Kempenland, Maesland, Peeland, and Osterwick; and was taken by the Confederate Estates from the King of Spain, after a long and chargeable siege, Anno 1628. 2. Tilmont, on the little River Geet, once the chief of Brabant, but long since decayed. Arschot on the litle River Dennere, which gives the title of a Duke to them of the Noble house of Croy; the Dukes hereof (advanced unto that honour by Charles the Fift) being men of greatest Re∣venue and Authority of any in Belgium. 4. Bergen ap Zome, so called from the River Zome, upon which it is situate, about half a league from the influx of it into the Scheld, and not far from the Sea, which gives it a reasonable good Haven. A town of great strength by nature, but more strongly fortified: Famous for being made a Marquisate by Charles the Fift, anno 1553. more for the notable resistance which it made to the Marquis Spinola, anno 1622. 5. Breda, upon the river Merck, a Town pleasantly seated, well fortified, and of great Revenue, having under it the Town and Territorie of Steenberg, the franchise of Rosindale, and the Seigneury of Osterhout: the residence, Baronie, and chief town of the Princes of Orange, from whom being taken by the Spaniard in the beginning of those wars, it was again recovered by some venturous Gentlemen, who hiding themselves in a Boat covered over with Turf, were conveyed into the Castle, which they easily mastered, and made the Prince Lord of it again. After re-taken by the Spaniard, anno 1625. but now in the possession of its naturall owners. 6. Diest, on the River Dennere, a good town, and of a large territory and jurisdiction, belonging to the Prince of Orange, who had it in exchange for some other lands of the Duke of Cleve; and in right hereof is Burgrave of the City of Antwerp. 7. Grinbergen, an ancient Baronie, with a large jurisdiction, descendible on the youngest sonne onely, after the manner of Burgh English, as our Lawyers call it. 8. Gertrudenberg, standing on the Douge, not far from the influx of it into the Maes, the furthest town in the North of Brabant, where it joyns to Holland: which makes it a matter of dispute betwixt those Provinces, to which of them it doth belong. A town of great trade for fishing, plenty of Salmons, and Sturgeons being taken here; but of Shads especially, whereof 18000 are sometimes caught in a day, salted, and sent abroad into forain parts: It acknowledgeth the Prince of Orange for the Lord thereof; as doth also 9. Grave, a good

town upon the Maes,* 1.12 bought by these Princes of the King of Spain with consent of the States; with∣out whose approbation, no part of the Domain is to be dismembred. 10. Maestreicht (in Latine, Tra∣jectum ad Mosam) so called of a ferry over the Maes in former times, supplyed now with a goodly Stone bridge in the place thereof. A fair and goodly town, beautified with two Collegiate Chur∣ches, in one of which the Dukes of Brabant were alwayes Canons, subject in part to the Bishop of Leige, and partly to the Duke of Brabant: The children are subject to that Prince to whom the Mother was subject at the tim•• 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Birth, without relation to the Father, according to that Maxime of the Civill Law, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 sequitur ventrem: And if a stranger come to live there, he must de∣clare to which of the two he will be subject, yet is the Duke of Brabant the chief Soveraign of it, he only having the power of Coynage, and of granting pardon to Offenders: and as a town of this Dukedome, besieged and taken by the confederate States, Anno 1632.

Here is also within the limits of this Dukedome, the town and Signeurie of Ravesiem, situate on the banks of the Maes, held by the Dukes of Cleve, of the Duke of Brabant; but no otherwise sub∣ject; and on the same River, the Town and County of Horn, a Fief Imperiall, beautified with a strong Castle, and a goodly Territory, in which is Wiert; the residence of the Earls of Horne descen∣ded of the ancient house of Montmorencie in France.

2. THE MARQVISATE OF THE EMPIRE, so called, because the farthest bounds and Marches of the German Empire frontizing on Flanders, which appertained unto the Soveraignty of the Crown of France, comprehendeth four of the best Towns in Brabant, with very large and spacious Territories adjoyning to them, viz. 1. Lovain, on the River Dyle, about four English miles in compasse, but in that compasse much of the ground is taken up with Vineyards, Gardens, Mea∣dowes, and pleasant Fields, which make the situation far more delightfull, then if all built, and peopled. It was the Mother town of Brabant, and sometimes gave the title of an Earl to the Dukes hereof: afterwards made an University by Duke John the 4. anno 1426, wherein are contained about 20 Colledges, such as they be; much priviledged, and inriched with pensions for publick Readers, by King Philip the 2. 2. Brussels (Bruxella) the seat of the ancient Dukes of Brabant, and of the Dukes of Burgundie also, after they came to be Lords of these Countries, seated upon the Sinne, and other sweet springs and Riverets, which make it one of the sweetest situations in all Europe: having with∣all, a goodly channell made by Art from Brussels, to the River Dele, and from thence to the Scheld; the charge whereof amounted to ••00000 Crowns. It is of the same compasse with Lovain, the buildings sumptuous, and the town very rich; not only in regard that it is the ordinary seat of the Prince, or his Regent, and of the Chancery for all Brabant, and the Dutchy of Limbourg; but in regard of the rich Manufactures of Armour and Cloth of Arras, of Silk, Gold, and Silver, which are there in∣dustriously pursued. 3. Nivello, on the borders of Hainalt, in a very rich and fruitfull soil, re∣markable for the abundance of fine Linnen, which is therein made, but most of all for a very rich Nunnery (or rather Nurserie) of noble Ladies; of the same nature with those of Mentz, and others before described. 4. Antwerp, situate in a goodly plain on the River Scheld, above 17 leagues from the Sea, but furnished with eight Channels cut out of the River for the transport of Commodities, one of the which is capable of 100 great Ships, the private buildings very handsome, but the publick sumptuous; the chief whereof were weckoned the Church of Nostre Dame, the Bourse, the Town-house, and the house of the Easterlings, or Eastern Merchants, well peopled, and of so great Trade in the former times, that it was held to be the richest Empory of the Christian world: the commodities here bought and sold, amounting to more in time moneth, then that of Venice in two years. The causes of which sudden growth and increase of Trading, are said to be these, 1. The two Marts holden here every year, either of them during six weeks, in which time no mans person could be arrested, or his goods distrained. 2. The King of Portugall having in the yeer 1503. diverted the course of Merchandise from Alexandria and Venice to the City of Lisbon, kept here his Factories, and sent hi∣ther his Spices, and other Indian Commodities; for which cause the Merchants, in the yeer 1516. forsook Bruges in Flanders, and setled here. And 3. many of the Nobility and Gentry during the long and bloudy wars betwixt France and Spain, forsook their Country houses, and repaired hi∣ther; by means whereof Antwerp, in a very little time grew bigger by 3000 houses, then it had been formerly. But as the growth hereof was sudden, so the fall was sensibler occasioned through the yoking of it with a Citadell by the Duke of Alva, which made Merchants afraid to resort any longer thither, as a place of little freedome, and lesse security: but chiefly by blocking up the Haven, and intercepting the trade at Sea, by the more powerfull Hollanders, which hath removed this great traffick to Amsterdam, and other towns of their Country. So that now the chief support of it is the reputation which it hath of being an Imperiall City, the place of receipt for the Kings Revenues, and a Bishops See founded here in the yeer 1559. which draweth hither some resort of Lawyers and Church-men.

3. The Signeurie of MACHLIN, consisteth only of that City, and a small Territorie of nine Villages adjoining to it. The Citie seated on both sides of the River Dele, which ebbeth and flow∣eth to the town and a league above it: and running through the very midst, maketh in it a number of small Islands, to the great ornament and commoditie of it. A goodly town, containing seven Pa∣rish Churches besides the Cathedrall, being the See of an Archbishop founded here in the year 1559. strong in regard it may be easily drowned on all sides: and of great wealth by reason of the many manufactures of linnen, great Artillery of Brasse and Iron, Bels, painted works and others of like use and ornament. And being situate in a manner in the Center of Brabant, distant four Leagues from

Antwerp, Lovain,* 1.13 and Bruxels, was made by Charls the Warlike (who loved the place) the ordinary seat of the great Councell of State, to which appeals are made from the other Provinces. But yet more beautifull in former times then it is at the present, the City being much defaced by firing 200 barrels of powder, anno 1546. and by the ••ackage of of the Spaniard, by whom it was taken by force, anno 1572. most memorable at this time for a famous Nunnerie like to that of Nivelle, wherein are some∣times 1600 Nuns, who when they please may leave their Cloister and be married. A town though in Brabant, yet not of it, but a State distinct: for which cause many 〈◊〉〈◊〉 men at the time of their child∣birth, use to lay downe their b••llies in some Village of Brabant, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 their children may be capable of the priviledges and immunities of that country. The principall of the Villages is named Leest, or Heyst, pleasantly seated on an hill, the residue of the Burroughs lying at the foot thereof. Both Town and Villages the patrimonie heretofore of the noble family of the Bertholds: which failing in the person of Gualter, slain in the battle of Worancan by John Duke of Brabant; it sell the one half to the Bishop of Leige, who sold his moitie to John the second Duke of Brabant, the other to the Earl of Gueldres, who in the year 1333. sold his part unto Lewis of Malain, Earl of Flanders. But he sold nothing but the title, John the third Duke of Brabant having seised upon it, and added it to his estate: the occasion of some quarrels between those Princes, composed by the marriage of that Lewis with the heir of Brabant.

But to return again unto Brabant it self, the antient inhabitants hereof, were the Aduatici, and some part of the Tungri: accompted by the Romans a part of the Province of Germania secunda; and by the French a Province of the Kingdom of East-France, or Austrasia, when it was a Kingdom; as after of the great Dukedom of Lorrain, conteining then the modern Dukedoms of Lorrain, Gulick, and Brabant, with the lands of Luick. Brabant at that time had the name of Basse (or Low) Lorrain, and as a memory thereof, there is a Court for criminall and civill causes held at Genappe (one of the Franks or Market towns of Brabant) called La Court de Lorrain to this day. A Dukedom first erected by the Em∣perour Otho the 2. who gave it to Charles of France son of Gerburg his Aunt, by Lewis surnamed Trans∣marine, King of France; reserving out of it as a Dower for his said Aunt Gerburg, the towns and ter∣ritories of Lovain, Bruxels, Nivelle, and Antwerp, lying in the Marches of his Dominions towards France, which he honoured with the title of the Marquisat of the holy Empire, anno 981. Gerburg the sister, and after the death of her brother Otho, the heir of Charls, disseised of Lorrain and the right of that fair inheritance by the Emperour Henry (who gave it to Geofrey of Ardenne) succeeded her Grand∣mother the first Gerburg in the towns and territories of Lovain, Nivelle, and Bruxels, which she con∣veyed in marriage to Lambert, one of the sons of Reyner of Hainalt, with the title of Earl of Lovain. Henry his son having made himself Master of Antwerp also, was by that means possessed of the whole Marquisate, but still retained the title of Earl of Lovain. Godfrey the 6. Earl, having enlarged the bounds of his Dominions, was by the Emperour Henry the 5. anno 1108. created the first Duke of Brabant: whether so named from the old Bratuspantium, which Caesar placeth in this tract, or that it was so called quasi Brachland, that is to say, a barren soil, is not yet determined. John the first Duke of that name, added hereunto the Dutchie of Limburg, and John the third, the Signeurie of Malines or Machlin. How it became united to the house of Burgundie, is to be seen by the en∣suing Catalogue of the

The EARLS of LOVAIN, and DUKES of BRABANT.

• 104 1 Lambert, one of the sons of Regnier Earl of Hainalt, made the first Earl of Lovain in right of Gerburg his wife.
• 1015 2 Henry the son of Lambert, who took Antwerp, making it the head City of the Marquisate of the holy Empire.
• 1046 3 Lambert II. son of Henry.
• 1054 4 Henry II. son of Lambert the second.
• 1068 5 Henry III. son of Henry the second.
• 6 Henry IV. son of Henry the third.
• 1096 7 Godfrey surnamed Barbatus, brother of Henry the fourth, created the first Duke of Brabant by the Emperour Henry the fifth, anno 1108. father of Adelize, the second wife of our Henry the first.
• 1140 8 Godfrey or Geofrey II. son of Godfrey.
• 1143 9 Godfrey or Geofrey III. son of Godfrey the second.
• 1183 10 Henry V. son of Godfrey the third.
• 1230 11 Henry VI. surnamed the Good, son of Henry the fift.
• 1247 12 Henry VII. surnamed the Magnanimous, by whose marriage with Sophia daughter of Lewis the sixt, Lantgrave of Turingia, the Lantgravedome of Hassia came into this house, invested on it in the person of Henry his son, by the said Sophia.
• 1260 13 John, son of Henry the seventh, took in the Dukedom of Limbourg, and destroyed the potent Familie of the Bertholds: his younger brother Henry, by another venter, succeeding in Hassia.
• 14 John II. son of John the first, bought of the Bishop of Leige the moitle, or one halfe of Machlyn.

• 1312 15 John III. son of John the second,* 1.14 added the whole estate of Machlyn to the Dukedome of Brabant.
• 1355 16 Joane, eldest daughter of John the third, married to Wenceslau•• the first Duke of Luxembourg, but dyed without issue.
• 1406 17 Anthony of Burgogne, son of Philip the Hardie, and the Lady Margaret his wife, daughter of Lewis de Malain Earl of Flanders, and of Margaret the sister and heir of Joane; after the death of the said Wenceslaus and Joane his wife, succeeded in the Dukedom of Brabant, his elder brother John giving way unto it.
• 1415 18 John IV. sonne of Anthony by his first wise Joane daughter of Waleran Earl of Saint Paul.
• 1426 19 Philip, the second son of Anthony, and brother of John the fourth.
• 1430 20 Philip II. called the Good, Duke of Burgundie, son and heir of John Duke of Burgundie, elder brother of Anthony; on the deth of his two Cousin Germans John and Philip, succeeded In the Dukedom of Brabant, as the direct heir of the Lady Margaret, wife of Lewis de Ma∣lain, and daughter of John the third, the last Duke of Brabant of the house of Lo∣vain.

The Arms hereof are Sable, a Lyon Or.

12. HOLLAND, 13. ZELAND, 14. WESTFRISELAND.

Having thus spoken of those Provinces which stil continue in subjection to the King of Spain (ex∣cept some few towns in Flanders and Brabant before mentioned;) let us next look on those which have withdrawn their obedience from him, beginning first with Holland, and its Appendixes, as of more power and consideration then all the rest. Which though distinct Provinces and acting in their se∣verall capacities at the present time: yet having been alwayes under the command of the same Prin∣ces, they must be joined together in the Storie of them, but shall, be severally handled as to the Chorographie.

HOLLAND, so called quasi Holt-land, that is to say, a woodie country, as Ortelius hath it, but rather quast Hollow-land, from the bogs and marishes, and unsound footing on the same: hath on the East the Zuider See, Vtrecht, and some part of Guelderland, on the West and North the German Ocean, on the South, the Islands of Zeland, and some part of Brabant.

The country for the most part lyeth very low, in so much that they are fain to fence it with Banks and Ramparts to keep out the Sea, and to restrain the Rivers within their bounds, so that in many places one may see the Sea far above the Land, and yet repulsed with those Banks: and is withall so fenny and full of marishes, that they are forced to trench it with innumerable dikes and channels to make it firm land, and fit for dwelling: yet not so firm as to bear either trees or much graine. But such is the industry of the people and the trade they drive, that having little or no corn of their own growth, they do provide themselves elsewhere notonly sufficient for their own spending, but where∣with to supply their neighbours: having no timber of their own, they spend more timber in build∣ing ships, and fencing their water-courses, then any country in the world; having no wine, they drink more then the people of the country where it groweth naturally; and finally having neither Flax nor Wool, they make more cloth of both sorts, then all the countries in the world, except France and England.

The present inhabitants are generally given to Sea-faring lives, so that it is thought that in Hol∣land, Zeland, and West-Friseland, there are 2500. ships of war and burden. The women for the most part laborious in making stufles. Nay you shall hardly see a child of four years of age, that is not kept to work, and made to earn its own living, to the great commendation of their government. The greatest of their natural Commodities is Butter and Cheese, of which, besides that infinite plen∣ty which they spend in their own houses, and amongst their Garrisons, they sell as much unto other Countries, as comes to 100000 Crowns per annum. By which means, and by the greatnesse of their fish-trade spoken of before, they are grown so wealthy on the land, and so powerfull at Sea, that as Flanders heretofore was taken for all the Netherlands, so now Holland is taken generally for all the Pro∣vinces confederated in a league against the Spaniard.

The whole compasse of it is no more then 180 miles, no part thereof being distant from the Sea, above three houres journey: and yet within that narrow circuit, there are contained no fewer then 23 walled Towns, and 400 Villages: some situate in the North, and others in South-Holland, as it stands divided. In South-Holland (being that part hereof which lyeth next to Zeland and the middle channell of the Rhene passing from Vtrecht unto Leiden,) the principall Towns are, 1. Dort (in La∣tine Dordrectum) formerly the Staple for Rhenish wines, a large, rich, and well-peopled town: anci∣ently joined to the firm land, but in the year 142, rent from it by the violence of the Sea, and made an Iland of great command upon the traffique of the Maes and the Wael, upon whose confluence it stands; but of most note for an Assembly of Divines out of divers Countries following Calvins do∣ctrine, for condemnation of the Lutheran or Arminian Tenets, concerning Universall Grace and Pre∣destination,

de••••••nation,* 1.15 anno 1618. 2. ••eterdam, seated on a dike or channell called the Rotter, not farre from which at a 〈◊〉〈◊〉 named 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Leck, one or the three main branches of the Rhene, falleth into the Ma••s: among, ••air, and well traded Port, the birth-place of the learned Erasmus. 3. Schoon-he∣ven, situate on the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a fair town having a commodious haven. 4. Gorichom upon the VVael, where it 〈◊〉〈◊〉 with the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from the Church whereof one may discerne 22 walled townes. 5. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 one of the six principall towns of Holland, rich and well fortified; seated on a Dike called Yssei, drawn from the middle channell of Rh••ne; as is also, 6. Over-water, and 7. Yssel-stein, this last belonging properly to the Prince of Orange; the first of great trade for making cables and cords for shipping. 8. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 or Lugdunum Batavorum, an University founded anno 1564. The town con∣sisteth of 41 Islands, to which they passe partly by boats, partly by bridges, whereof there are 144; and of them 104 builded with stone. Here is in this town a castle said to have been built by Hengist the Saxon, at his return out of England. And not far off stood the famous Nunnerie of Rainsburg of the same nature with those of Mentz and Nivelle before described; so liberally endowed, that 2000 persons did there dayly receive relief. 9. Vianen on the Leck, a Seigneurie distinct from Holland, pertaining antiently to the Lords of Brederode. 10. Delse, a town of great trade for cloathing, large and well built, beautified with spacious streets, and goodly Churches; the birth-place of that mon∣strous Heretick David George, who called himself King and Christ Immortall. He fled with his wife and children, anno 1544, to Basil; there he set up his Doctrine: the points whereof were, 1. That the Law and the Gospell were unprofitable for the attaining of Heaven; but his Doctrine able to save such as receive it. 2. That he was the true Christ and Messas. 3. That he had been till that present, kept in a place unknown to all the Saints: and 4. that he was not to restore the house of Israel by death or tribulation, but by love and grave of the Spirit. He dyed in the yeare 1556. and three dayes after his Doctrine was by them of Basil condemned, his goods confiscate, and his bones taken up and burned. Hee bound his Disciples to three things: 1. to conceal his name: 2. not to reveale of what condition hee had been: and 3. not to discover the articles of his Doctrine to any man in Basil.

In that part thereof which is called North-Holland, lying betwixt the middle channel of the Rhene, and the Zuider-See, the towns or Cities of most importance are 1. Alamar, encompassed with deep sens and marishes, a rich town in regard of the great plenty of butter and cheese, which is made a∣bout it more then in any place in Holland, and famous for the defeat which the Duke of Alva received before it. For he in the beginning of the Low-countrey troubles, having with the losse of 20000 of his own men forced Harlem, laid his siege round about this town. Had he left any way for the souldiers to have fled thence, the town had been abandoned: but having environed them round, he put them to such a resolution or desperation, (choose you whether) that manfully they resisted three of his assaults; and in the end made him depart with great losse as well of his souldiers, as his re∣putation. 2. Amsterdam, a very fair Haven Town, where divers times at one tide 1000 ships of all sorts have been seen to goe out and in: So truly said a modern Poet,

Quod Tagus, at{que} Hermus vehit, & Pactolus, in unum Vere hunc congestum dixeris esse locum.

What Tagus, Hormus, and Pactolus beare; One would conjecture to be heap'd up here.

The people thereby made so rich, that if a fleet of 300 sail should come into the Port fraught with all kinde of commodities, in five or six dayes they would be ready to buy all the lading. Si∣tuate it is on the Gulph called the Tie, and the dike or channell called Amstell, whence it hath the name of Amsteldam, in Latine Amstelodunum: built uon piles like Venice, and resembling it in so many points, that it may be justly called the Northern Venice. First fortified with Towers and ramparts by Giselbert of Amstell about 300 yeares agone. But being burnt through the envy of its neighbours, it began to be walled anno 1482. Grown to this wealth since the diverting of the trade from Antwerp hither, and for that cause inhabited by men of all Nations, and of all Religions, and those not onely tolerated and connived at in private, but openly and freely exercised without any dislike. A greater Confusion (in my minde) then that of Babel; this being of Religions, that of Lan∣guages only. 3. Harlem on the Lake called Harlem-meere, the greatest Town of all Holland, and the second for dignity; well built, and very pleasantly situated amongst many goodly meadowes, near a de∣lightfull forrest, and round about environed with wealthy Villages: famous for the invention of printing; invented here, but perfected at Mentz in higher Germany; the first book which was ever printed being Tullies Offices. 4. Naerden on the Zuider-See, fortified with a strong Castle, held of the Earles of Holland by the Dukes of Brunswick, to whom it antiently belonged. 5. Enchuisen, on the very point of the Gulph of Zuider-See opposed to Friseland, from which not distant above two leagues. A town of great consequence to the prince of Orange in the first revolting of these Countries from the King of Spain. For siding with him in that war, and standing conveniently to obstruct the passages by Sea unto Amsterdam: it compelled that City in short time, by stopping all supply of victuals and other necessaries, to yeeld it selfe unto the Prince. 6. Hoorn on the same Gulf also, a rich town with a very good Haven, and of so great strength by reason of the multitude of Dikes and channels which are round about it, that it seemes impregnable. 7. Edam upon the same Gulfe

(or Zuider-See) remarkable for the great number of ships which are built yeerly in it;* 1.16 and an incre∣dible number of the best Holland Cheeses made in the Countrey round about it. 8. Medemblick on the Ocean, seated in the best Countrey of Holland for the feeding of Cattell; unwalled, but en∣joying all the priviledges which a walled town hath; and fortified with a right strong Castell.

The chief of the Holland Villages is the Hague or Graven Hague, in Latine Haga Comitis, because formerly the Court and residence of the Earls of Holland, who had here a very large and beauti∣full Palace, founded by Earl William King of the Romans, and therein a chief and excellent Library gathered together by John Harie a Canon Regular of this place, and by him given to Charles the fift. In former time the residence of the Councill for the Province of Holland; as it is now of the Com∣missioners or Delegates of the confederate Provinces, called by the name of the States-Generall. Now much increased in buildings, of what it was; and yet so great in the time of Lewis Guicciardin that it then contained 2000 housholds. The Inhabitants will not wall it, as desiring to have it rather accounted the chief Village in Europe, then the second City. The other Villages of note, 2. Egmond, 3. Brederode, 4. Wassenar, which anciently gave name to three Noble families: of which none but that of Brederode now left for ought I can learn. Neer to the last stood the famous Fortresse called Arx Britannica, built by Caligula in memory of his great battel upon this Shore. For making shew of a voyage into Britain to subdue that Island, he borded his Galley, embattelled his souldiers, caused his Trumpets to sound, gave them them the Signall, and then commanded them to gather Cockles. Which Tower or Fortresse was at the fall of the Roman Empire overwhelmed by the Sea, the ruins whereof at a dead low water are still to be seen.

Besides these places on the firm land or Continent, there are some Islands which pertain to the State of Holland, called by the generall name of Voorn, because situate directly against Holland, Voorn sig∣nifying as much as before, or in old English Bevorne: but known by their distinct and more proper names of Somersdike, 2. Gaurode, 3. Rierschille, so called of their principall towns: and 4. Voorn, specially so named, the chief of them all, being of a fat and fruitfull soil, plentifull of most sorts of grain. The principall townes whereof are 1. Briel (which we call the Brill) a strong town, and the first which revolted against the Spaniard, An. 1572. Cautionarie to the English with the town of Flushing; chosen by them in regard of the great command it hath upon the passage to Gertrudenberg and the rest of Brabant, 2. Gerulit, a small town, but having a jurisdiction over many villages. There are also on the North side of Holland the Isles Wyerengeh and Texel; of which little memo∣rable.

One speciall accident concerning Holland, I cannot over passe in silence, namely how Margaret Countesse of Hennenberg, and sister to William King of the Romans, being of the age of 42 years, was de∣livered at one birth of 365 children, the one half males, the other females, the odde one an herma∣phrodite, christened at the Church of Losdune not far from the Hague, by the names of John and Eli∣zabeth, in two Basins, still to be seen the said Church, by Guido the Suffragan of Vtrecht: all which immediately after dyed, and with them the mother.

The Armes of Holland of it self, as a State distinct, are Or, a Lyon Gules.

ZELAND, so called as some think quasi Sea and Land, consisteth of seven Islands, the remainder of 18 which the Sea hath swallowed; and in them 300 inhabited Townes. Severed from Flanders with the left branch or arm of the Schelde, which they called Honte, and on the East from Brabant with the right branch of the said River, which still keeps his name on the North from Holland, with the Gulph called the Flack; and on the West with the main Ocean from the Kingdom of England.

The Countrey generally more fruitfull then the neighbouring Brabant, producing great quan∣tity of excellent corn, plenty of Coriander, and aboundance of Mader, used in dying: the soil al∣so very rich in pasture, but low and marishy, which makes the air to bee very unhealthy, and the whole destitute both of fresh water and wood; the want of which last is supplyed with coal out of England and Scotland, or by Turf digged amongst themselves, but very sparingly for fear of weakning the Sea banks.

The whole containeth 8 Towns and 100 Villages. The Islands which remain, being divided into the Western and the Eastern, are 1. Walcheren, (Valachria in Latine) lying to the Southwest of Slags in Flanders, the richest and most populous of all this Province, in compasse 10 Dutch or 40 Italian miles. The principall towns of which are 1. Middleburg, seated upon a Creek of the Sea, well walled and fortified, the streets spacious, the houses and Churches well built; inhabited by weal∣thy Merchants and industrious tradesmen, and of late times (since the removing of the English trade from Antwerp) a most flourishing Emporie. So called, because built in the midst of the Island; or because built (as saith Ortelius) by Prince Zelandus, of whom this Province was thus named, in honour of his Grandfather Metellus, and by him called Metelli Burgum. 2. Flushing, of great note for its good Port and invincible strength. One of the first Townes which the Low-Countreymen took from the Spaniards, by the diligence of Voorst a Seaman and Monsieur de Berland, then the Bay∣liffe thereof, and not long after put into the hands of the English, as a Town of Caution: the first Governour of it being the renowned Philip Sidney. A poore Town then it was, God wot, now the Key of the Netherlands, without whose licence no ship can passe either to or from the City of Antwerp, insomuch that if the Duke of Alva in the beginning of his Government had bestowed that paines in fortifying this and others of the Maritime Townes, as he did in the strengthening

Antwerp,* 1.17 and some mid-land Cities; he had in all probability hindred the remedilesse revolt of these flourishing Countries. Not far off standeth the Fort called the Rammikins, once cautionary to the English also, together with the Brill, the chief Town in the Isle of Voorn, (an Isle of Hol∣land) all three being taken from the Spaniard, An. 1572. made Cautionary to Queene Elizabeth An. 1585. and finally surrendered by King James, to the States united An. 1616. Robert Lord Lisle (afterwards created Earl of Leicester) the brother of Sir Philip Sidney being then Governour of Flushing. 3. Ramne, or Armyden, an unwalled Town, but beautified with one of the goodliest and most frequented Havens in all the World: out of which one may sometimes see 500 sail of ships, of great burden, set forwards on their voiages to severall parts. 4. Vere or Camfere, seated in the North part of the Island; which once gave title to a Marquesse, and from the which the noble Families of the Veres (now and of long time Earls of Oxford) took demomination. So as it is no marvell that so many of that family have ventured their Estates and lives in the wars of this Countrey being their Grandmother in a manner, or their Primitive Parent, from whence trans∣planted into England.

2. SOVTH-BEVERLAD, situate betwixt Walcheren and Brrbant, the greatest of the Isles of Zeland, heretofore 20 Dutch miles in compasse, but now much diminished by the rage and fury of the Sea; by which the Town and Signeury of Borsule, with all the Countries round about it, was swallowed up, An. 1532. That which remains hath in it many goodly Woods and pleasant Thickets, full of Fowl and wilde Beasts for hawking and hunting. Chief Towns here are 1. Romerswall seated on the East towards Bergen ap Some, severed at the same time from the rest of the Island, and made an Island of it self; defended with continuall charge from following the sad fate of the Town of Bor∣sule. 2. Goes, or Tergoes on the Northern Coast, a strong Town, well priviledged, and the only wal∣led Town in all the Island.

3. NORTH-BEVERLAND, lying betwixt South-Beverland and the Isle of Showen, in for∣mer times esteemed the Paradise of Zeland, and having in it a proper Town called Chort-Cheen; but so destroyed by the great Sea-breach spoken of before, that there is nothing now remaining but a few poor Villages.

4. WALFERSDIKE, lying between the two Beverlands, the smallest of the Western Islands, as having in it no more then two Villages, but replenished with good store of Pasture.

And these are all which fall in the division of the Western Islands, so called because they lie West∣ward of the River Scheld; as those which they call the Eastern Islands, on the East thereof. Of which last there are three in number.

1. SCHOWEN, lying on the Northwest of Holland, so neer unto North-Beverland in former times, that the Inhabitans could talk together from one shore to the other: but now the Sea hath set them at a greater distance. It containeth in compasse six Dutch miles; chief Towns wherein are 1. Siriczed, the antientest Town of all Zeland, once beautified with a fair and commodious Haven, now choaked up with beach; yet still reputed for the second Town of all the Province; the whole trade thereof consisting in Salt and Mader, of which it yeelds good plenty: most famous for the birth of Levinus Lemnius that renowned Philosopher and Physitian. 2. Brewers-Haven, inhabited onely by Fishermen, not else remarkable.

2. DVVELAND, so named from the multitudes of Doves or Pigeons, situate between Schou∣wen and Tolen, in compasse about 4 Dutch miles; hath no good Town in it, but onely Countrey Villages and Gentlemens Farms. Surrounded by the Sea An. 1530. but by the industry and dili∣gence of Adolph of Bugundy and Lord of Soferes in Flanders, recovered again; and at the excessive charge of the people hitherto preserved.

3. TOLEN, so called from the chief Town of the Island, where the Earles toll was wont to be paid, whence it had the name; is situate over against the Northwest of Brabant, from which disjoined by a narrow Creeke or Arm of the Sea: the second Town of note being called S. Mar∣tins Dike, walled, but not otherwise considerable.

Agreeable to the quality of this Countrey of Zeland, are the Arms thereof; being Or, a Lyon Gules, rising out of a Sea, wavie, Argent, & Azure.

WEST-FRISELAND hath on the East, Groyning-land, and a part of Westphalen in High-Ger∣many; on the South Over-yssell and the Zuider-See; on the North and West, the main Ocean. The Countrey generally moorish and full of fennes, unapt for corn, but yeelding great store of pastu∣rage: which moorishnesse of the ground makes the air very foggie and unhealthy, nor have they any fewell wherewith to rectifie it (except in that part of it which they call Seven-wolden) but turf and Cow-dung, which addes but little to the sweetnesse of an unsound air. Nor are they better stored with Rivers, here being none proper to this Countrey but that of Leuwars, the want of which is supplyed by great channels in most places, which doe not onely drain the Marishes, but supply them with water. Which notwithstanding, their pastures doe afford them a good breed of horses fit for service; plenty of Beeves both great and sweet, the best in Europe next these of England: and those in such a large increase, that their Kine commonly bring two Calves, and their Ewes three lambs at a time.

The Countrey divided into three parts. In the first part called WESTERGOE, lying to∣wards Holland, the principall towns are 1. Harlingen, an Haven town upon the Ocean, defended with a very strong Castle. 2. Hindeloppen on the same Coast also; 3. Staveren an Hanse Town, opposite to

Enchuisen in Holland;* 1.18 the town decayed, but fortified with a strong Castle which secures the Haven. 4. Francker, a new University, or Schola illustris, as they call it. 5. Sneck in a low and inconvenient situation, but both for largenesse and beauty the best in this part of the Province, and the second in esteem of all the countrey. In O••ffergo••, or the East parts lying towards Groiningland, the townes of most note are 6. Leuwarden, situate on the hinder Leuwars, the prime town of West-Fri••eland, and honoured with the supreme Court and Chancery hereof, from which there lyeth no appeal: a rich town, well built, and strongly fortified. 7. Doccum, bordering upon Groyning, the birth place of Gemma Frisii••. In SEVEN-VVOLDEN, or the Countrey of the Seven Forrests, so called from so many small Forrests joining neer together, is no town of note; being long time a Woodland Countrey, and not well inhabited till of late. The number of the walled Townes is 11 in all; o•• the Villages 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Burroughs 345.

To this Province belongeth the Isle of Schelinke, the shores whereof are plentifully stored with Dog-fish, took by the Inhabitants in this manner. The men of the Iland attire themselves with beasts skins, and then fall to dancing; with which sport the fish being much delighted, make out of the waters towards them; nets being pitched presently betwixt them and the water. Which done, the men put off their disguises, and the frighted fish hastning towards the sea, are caught in the toyles.

Touching the Frisons, heretofore possessed of this countrey, we shall speak more at large when we come to East-Friseland, possessed also by them, and still continuing in the quality of a free Estate, go∣verned by its own Lawes and Princes: here only taking notice that the Armes of this Friseland are Azure, semy of Billets Argent, two Lyons Or.

The ancient Inhabitants of these three Provinces, were the Batavi, and Caninefates, inhabiting the Island of the Rhene situate betwixt the middle branch thereof and the Wae••, which now containeth South-Holland, Vtrecht, and some part of Gueldres; the Frisii dwelling in West-Friseland and the North of Holland; and the Mattiaci, inhabiting in the Isles of Zeland. By Charles the Bald, these countries be∣ing almost unpeopled by the Norman Piracies, were given to Thierrie, son of Sigebert a Prince of Aquitain, with the title of Earl: his Successours acknowledging the Soveraignty of the Crown of France, till the time of Arnulph the 4. Earl, who atturned Homager to the Empire. In John the 2. they became united to the house of Hainalt; and in William the 3. to that of Bavaria: added to the estates of the Dukes of Burgundie in the person of Duke Philip the Good, as appeareth by this successi∣on of

The EARLS of HOLLAND, ZELAND, and LORDS of WEST-FRISELAND.

• 863 1 Thierrie or Theodorick of Aquitain, the first Earl, &c.
• 903 2 Thierrie II. son of Thierrie the 1.
• 3 Thierrie the III. the son of Theodorick the 2.
• 988 4 Arnulph, who first made this Estate to be held of the Empire; shin in a war against the Fri∣sons.
• 993 5 Thierrie IV. son of Arnulph.
• 1039 6 Thierrie V. son of Theodorick the 4.
• 1048 7 Florence, brother of Thierrie the 5.
• 1062 8 Thierrie VI. son of Florence, in whose minority the Estate of Holland was usurped by Godfrey le Bossu Duke of Lorrein, by some accompted of as an Earl hereof.
• 1092 9 Florence II. surnamed the Fat, son of Thierrie the 6.
• 1123 10 Thierrie VII. who tamed the stomachs of the Frisons.
• 1163 11 Florence III. a companion of Frederick Barbarossa, in the wars of the Holy-Land.
• 1190 12 Thierrie VIII. son to Florence the 3.
• 1203 13 William, the brother of Thierrie, and Earl of East-Friseland, which countrey he had before subdued, supplanted his Neece Ada his Brothers daughter; but after her decease, dying without issue, succeeded in his owne right unto the Estate.
• 1223 14 Florence IV. son of William.
• 1235 15 William II. son of Florence the 4. elected and crowned King of the Romans; slain in a war against the Frisons.
• 1255 16 Florence the V. the first, as some write, who called himself Earl of Zeland: the title to those Ilands formerly questioned by the Flemmings, being relinquished to him on his marriage with Beatrix the daughter of Guy of Dampierre Earl of Flanders.
• 1296 17 John, the son of Florence the 5. subdued the rebellious Frisons; the last of the male-issue of Thierrie of Aquitaine.

EARLS of HAINALT,* 1.19 HOLLAND, &c.

• 1300 18 John of Avesnes Earl of Hainalt, son of John of Avesnes Earl of Hainalt and of the Ladie Aleide, sister of William the 2. and daughter of Florence the 4. succeeded as next heir in the Earl∣dome of Holland, &c.
• 1305 19 William III. surnamed the Good, Father of the Lady Philippa wife of one Edward the 3.
• 1337 20 William IV. of Holland, and the II. of Hainalt, slain in a war against the Frisons.
• 1346 21 Margaret, sister and heir of William the 4. and eldest daughter of William the 3. married to Lewis of Bavaria, Emperour of the Germans: forced to relinquish Holland unto William her second son, and to content her self with Hainalt.
• 1351 22 William V. second son of Lewis and Margaret, (his elder Brother Steven succeeding in Ba••a∣ria) in right of Maud his wife, daughter and coheir of Henry Duke of Lancaster, succeeded in the Earldome of Leicester.
• 1377 23 Albert the younger Brother of William the fift, fortunate in his warres against the Fri∣sons.
• 1404 24 William VI. Earl of Osternant, and by that name admitted Knight of the Garter by King Richard the 2. eldest son of Albert.
• 1417 25 Jaquelme only daughter of Earl William the sixt, first marryed to John the 4. Duke of Bra∣bant, the son of Anthony of Burgogne, from whom divorced under colour of Consangui∣nity, she was marryed after to Humfrey Duke of Glocester, and then to Frank of Borjelles, a private Gentleman; being unworthily handled by Duke John of Burgundie, surrendred her estates to Duke Philip the Good.
• 26 Philip the Good, Duke of Burgundie, son of John Duke of Burgundie, and of the Lady Margaret sister of Earl William the sixt, and daughter of Albert, Earls of Hainalt, Holland, &c. succeeded on the resignation of the Lady Jaqueline, his Cousin Germain; transporting these Estates to the house of Burgundie.

15. VTRECHT. 16. OVER-YSSELL.

The Bishoprick of VTRECT, I mean the temporall jurisdiction and estate thereof, contained once all that tract of ground which now makes up the Provinces of Vtrecht, Over-Yssell, and Groining. But Groining was long since dismembred. Vtrecht and Over-Yssell remaining parts thereof till the yea•• 1528. when added to the rest of the Belgick Provinces, by Charles the fift.

VTRECHT hath on the East Guelderland; on the West, North, and South environed with Holland. The Countrey very fruitfull, much dryer then Holland, and so fitter for all sorts of grain. It containeth 70. villages and five walled Towns, that is to say, 1. Wick at Duersteed, situate on the middle Channell of the Rhene where it diverteth into the Leck; well built, and fortified anciently with a good Castle; supposed to be the Batavoducun spoken of by Tacitus, the mansion at that time of the second Legion. 2. Rhenen, upon the same branch or Channell, whence it hath the name, about which is digged abundance of turfe for fewell. 3. Amesfort on the River Ems, (called in Latine Amisus) a fair Town and well peopled. 4. Montfort, upon the Yssell, pleasantly seated and of great strength, as being anciently a frontier Town against the Hollanders. 5. Vtrecht, situate on the middle Chan∣nell of the Rhene, first called Antonina, from one of the Antonines of Rome; but Dagobert King of France gave it the name of Trajectum (or Vltrajectum) we now call it Vtrecht, because there was at that time the common Ferry over the River. The town large, beautifull, and very sumptuously built, having in it many goodly Churches, of which five were anciently Collegiate, besides two famous Monasteries of noble women, such as those spoken of elsewhere: the private houses well contrived, most of them having goodly cellars, vaulted with wonderfull art and skill, to which the people may resort in all times of danger. Sometimes the Seat-Royall of Radbold King of the Frisons, then of the Bishops; honoured of old with a Juridicall resort for the parts adjoyning, and now the principall of this Province. A city so miraculously seated amongst walled Towns, that a man may go from hence in one day to any one of 50. walled Towns or Cities, thence equally distant; or to any one of 26. Towns to dinner, and come home to bed.

OVER-YSSELL, in Latine, Transisulana, so named from its situation beyond the Yssell, is bounded on the East with Westphalen; on the West with the Zuider-Zee; on the North with West-Friseland, on the South with Guelderland. The countrey very plain, and without hils, but wet, and moorish; affording excellent good pasturage, and not defective in corn. Divided into three parts, that is to say, Tuent, confining upon Wesiphalen; Ysselland on the River Yssell, and Drent beyond the River Vecht; in all which are contained 11. Towns and 100. Villages. The principall of which are▪ 1. Deventer, on the River Yssell, strong and well fortified, and withall beautifull and well peopled▪ an Hanse town, and the chief of all this Province: first taken for the States by the Earl of 〈◊〉〈◊〉

then Governour of those countries for Queen Elizabeth,* 1.20 anno 1586. treacherously reyeelded to the Spaniard by Sir William Stanley; but in the year 1590. again recovered by the States. 2. Swoll, stan∣ding on a little River which runs into the Vidre, anciently fortified with a double ditch and very strong ramparts; an Hanse town, as is also 3. Campen, situate on the left shore and fall of the Yssell into the Zuider-zee; a fair and large town, and of very great strength by reason of those in accessible marishes amongst which it is situate. These three are in that part hereof which is called Ysselland, and by some Saland, by whom (erroneously) supposed to be the countrey of the ancient Salii. In that part hereof which is called Tuent, we have the Towns of 4. Oldensel, 5 Enschede, 6. Delden, 7. Almeloo; of which little memorable. And in that of Drent, the Town and Castle of Vallenhoven, standing up∣on the Zuider-zee, well served with all sorts of victuals: for which cause made the ordinary residence of the Governour and supreme Councell for the whole Province.

The ancient inhabitants of these two Provinces, were some parts of the Batavi and Frisii minores for that of Vtrecht; the Bructeri, and (as some say) the Salii, in Over-yssell: both Provinces belonging anciently to the Episcopall See of Vtrecht, founded by Dagobert King of France, who endowed it with great lands and territories; the first Bishop being Willibald an Englishman, who converted these parts to Christianity. His Successours grew to so great power, that they were able to bring 40000. men into the field: and with great courage did maintain their estate and patrimony against the incroaching Earls of Holland. But at the last, having continued for the space of 900. years, Henry of Bavaria Bi∣shop hereof, being extremely distressed with war by the Duke of Gueldres; and driven out of the Ci∣ty of Vtrecht by his own subjects (perhaps upon some humour of Reformation) alienated all the tem∣poralties of his Bishoprick to Charles the fift, anno 1527. And the next year, the Imperialists by one of the factions were let into Vtrecht; at what time both the Estates of the Countrey, and Pope Clement the 7. confirmed the Alienation made by the Bishop. After which solemne Acts of theirs, the Empe∣rour caused himself to be invested in this estate by the States of the Empire (for Vtrecht was of old an Imperiall Fief;) and for the better Government and administration of it, divided it into two Provinces, as it still coutinueth. But what this Bishop lost in power, his Successours not long after gained in title: the Bishop of Vtrecht being made an Archbishop or Metropolitane, anno 1561. but by reason of the change of Religion which was then working, and the falling off of these Countries which soon af∣ther followed, he had but little joy in his new preferment.

17. GVELDERLAND. 18. ZUTPHEN, and 19. GROINING.

The Dukedome of Guelderland, at such time as it was first taken in by Charles the fift contained under it, the Dutchy of Guelders properly and specially so called, the Earldome of Zutphen, and the Town and Seigneurie of Groining: held by distinct titles, and governed ever since their union with the Belgick Pro∣vinces, as distinct Estates.

GVELDERLAND I bounded on the East with Cleveland, and the Earldome of Zutphen; on the West with Holland and Vtrecht; on the North with Over-yssell, and the Zuider-Zee; and on the South with Brabant and the land of Gulick. The countrie flat, having few hils in it, but many plea∣sant and commodious woods, especially that called Echterwalt; of corne and cattell very fruit∣full.

The whole Countrey is generally divided into two parts. 1. The Veluwe, contained within the Zuider-Zee, the Rhene, and the Yssell, the barrener of the two and the worse inhabited, the people here∣of preferring wealth before health as in other places; but affording a more pure aire and a plea∣santer dwelling then the other, the woods and forrests well replenished with most kinds of game. 2. The Betuwe (so called of the Batavi who possessed these parts) intercepted betwixt the middle Rhene and the Wael, exceedingly fruitfull in corn, and of so excellent a pasturage for the feeding of Cattell, that in the year 1570. there was a Guelderland Bull sold in Antwerp which weighed 3200. pounds.

In both divisions (not reckoning in the county of Zutphen) are contained 300. villages, and 16. walled Towns, besides some fortified of late since the wars began. The chief whereof are 1. Nim∣megent (in Latine, Noviomagus) an Imperial City, ordained by Charles the great to be one of the three Seiges of the Empire for these outer parts, the other two being Theonville in Luxembourg, & Aix or Aken in the land of Gulick. And as a Town Imperiall it had anciently the priviledge of coyning money: for which and other freedomes of immunities indulged unto it, the people did no other service to the Emperours, then once a year to send a man to Aix or Aquisgrane, with a Glove full of Pepper. But the town being sold to the Gueldrois by William Earl of Holland and King of the Romans for 21000. marks of silver, anno 1248. the power of coynage fell to those Princes; and yet the Town was brought to do better service, then formerly it had done at Aken. The Town high mounted on the top of an hill, the Wael which is there large and deep running at the foot of it: rich, great, and populous, having besides the modern fortifications an ancient Castle with so goodly a prospect, that from thence one may behold the best part of the countrey; built, as some say, by Julius Caesar to command those parts. Under the jurisdiction of it are 2. Tiel, and 3. Bomel, two walled Towns, both situated on the Wael, both strong, and having many rich villages under their command; and 4. Gheut, on the

Wael also,* 1.21 an unwalled Town, but having all the priviledges which the walled Towns have. Not for off, at 〈…〉〈…〉 meeting of the Wael and the Maes, stands the strong Fort of S. Andrews, raised by the Archduke 〈◊〉〈◊〉 to command the passage of those Rivers; but in the year 1600. taken in by 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Count of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 (after Prince of Orange) and ever since garrisoned by the States to secure that passage. 5. Riuermond, seated on the mouth of the Ruer, where it falleth into the Maes; a beau∣tifull and well peopled City, strong by Art and Nature, and seated in a fruitfull countrey: heretofore of the Diocese of Leige (as Nimmegen anciently of Colen) but made a See Episcopall by King Philip the 〈…〉〈…〉 1559. This is the second Capitall City of Guelderland, and hath under the jurisdiction of it, 6. Venlo, a strong Town on the Maes, on which the Duke of Cleve yeelded himself to Charles the fift, anno 1543. 7. Gueldres, heretofore of such reputation that it gave name to all the countrey; and well it doth deserve to do so still, being the only Town in all this Dukedome which neither first nor last hath been won by the Hollanders: but still preserved themselves in their obedience to their natural Princes. 8. St••ael, or Straelen, a well fortified piece, but which, according to the chances of War, hath oft changed its masters. 9. Arnhem, the Arenacum of Taeitus, and in those times the mansion of the 10 Legion, situate on the Rhene, not above a mile from the great Channell, which Drusut to keep•• his souldiers from idlenesse caused them to dig, to let the waters of the Rhene into those of the Yssell; called therefore by the Ancients Fossa Drusiana, by the moderns Yssell-Dort. The Town large and well-built; the ordinary residence heretofore of the Dukes of Guelderland, who had here their Chancery, and other supreme Couurts of justice. This is the third Capitall City of Gueldres (ancient∣ly of the Diocese of Vtrecht) and hath under the jurisdiction of it, besides divers Villages, 10. Wag∣beninghen on the Rhene, the same which Tacitus cals Vada. 11. Harderwick on the Zuider-See, burnt to the ground anno 1503. but since reedified, and now more strong and beautfull then ever formerly. 12. Hattem upon the Yssell, a good town of war, but not else observable.

Within the limits of this Dukedome stands the Town and County of Culemberg, erected into a County by King Philip the second, by reason of the fair territory which belonged unto it, former∣ly held in Fee of the Dukes of Guelderland, but otherwise not reckoned as a Member of ••it. 2. The Town and Earldome of Buren, situate on the River Liughe, having a strong Castle anciently, and a goodly territory; holden immediately of the Empire as a Fief Imperiall. The patrimony of the va∣liant Maximilian of Egmond, Earl of Buren, who died anno 1549. after whose death it fell to Philip of N••ssaw eldest sonne of William Prince of Orange, and Anne the daughter of the said Maximi∣lian.

ZVTPHEN accompted formerly for the 4. Capitall City of Guelderland, now a distinct Pro∣vince of it self, is bounded on the East with Westphalen; on the West with that part of Guelderland which is called the Velluwe; on the North with Over-yssell; on the South with Cleveland. It contai∣neth 8. walled Towns besides many Villages; that is to say, 1. Doetecum, standing on the old Yssell, rising out of Westphalen. 2. Doesburg, where the old Yssell falleth into the new Yssell, or the trench called Fossa Drusiana, communicating thereunto its name. 3. Brookhurst, a County of it self, which anciently had its particular Governour. 4. Lochen upon the River Berkell. 5. Tsheerenbergue, a Town and County. 6. Groll taken by the Prince of Orange for the States Confederate, anno 1627. 7. Bre∣dervord, a town of war, and subject to the change of Masters, as such places are. 8. Zutphen, or Zuidfen, so called of the Southern situation of it amongst the Fennes, on the right shore of the Yssell, whereit receiveth in it the River Berkel, which runs through the Town. A Town indifferently well built, as well for private as publick edifices; a distinct state in Civill matters, but in spirituall subject (in former times) to the Bishop-of Munster: a thing observable, and not to be paralleld elsewhere, that the four chief Towns and quarters of one Province only, should appertain (as here in Guelder∣land) to four severall Dioceses. Of which there may some reason be assigned for Zutphen, in regard it is a State more ancient then that of Guelderland it self; and not depending anciently on the fortunes of it: united to it by the marriage of Othe of Nassaw, the first Earl of Guelderland, with Sophia daugh∣ter and heir of Wickman the last Earl of Nutphen. So as this Earldome ended when that first began. Af∣ter this it continued subject to the Earls and Dukes of Gueldres, till the revolt of Holland and the other Provinces from the King of Spain, at what time it was besieged for the States by the Earl of Leicester; at the siege whereof fell that gallant Gentleman Sir Philip Sidney, of whom our British Epigrammatist thus verfifieth.

Digna legi scribis, facis & dignissima scribi; Scripta probant doctum te tua, facta probum.

Thou writ'st things worthy reading, and didst doe Things worthy writing too. Thy Acts thy valour show And by thy works we do thy learning know.

And though upon the losse of that gallant man (nephew and heir unto that Earl) the siege was raised at the present; yet was it re-enforced again anno 1190. and the Town then taken; continuing ever since in the confederacy of the States united.

GROINING-LAND,* 1.22 hath on the east East-Friseland, on the west West-Friseland, on the North the main Ocean, on the South Over-yssell; so wedged in as it were betwixt both Friselands, that some hold it to be but a part of the West. It containeth under it the Country called the Ommel••nds, (corrupt∣ly for the Emmelands, as I conjecture, because lying along the River Ems) and therein 145 Burroughs and Villages: the chief whereof are 1. Dam, near the Ems, bordering on East-Friseland: 2 Keykirk: 3. Old-Haven, standing on the Sea. As for the town of Groyning it self, it is rich, great, and very well built, situate-amongst divers small streames which run through it; and having also divers Channels for conveyance of waters, which addes much to the safety and strength thereof. A town of great jurisdiction, both within, and without, judging absolutely without appeals in causes, both Civill, and Criminall; in Spirituall, subject heretofore to the Bishop of Munster, till made one of the new Bishopricks by King Philip the second, anno 1559. And though the Prince in Civill causes had his officer or Lieutenant there; yet in Criminall the town was Soveraign, and granted pardons as Soveraign of the whole estate, paying to the Prince for all duties yeerly, but 6000 Crowns. Both Town and Country anciently belonged to the Bishops of Vtrecht, by whose negligence in defending them, they submitted their estate to the Dukes of Guelderland. But the Dukes of Saxonie laying some claim to it, disturbed this agreement for a time; during which Ezardus the Earl of East-Frise∣land possessed himself of it: but not able to make good his unjust possession, sold his estate therein to Gueldres, anno 1514. to whom of right it did belong. Afterwards in the yeer 1536. they put them∣selves under the command of Charles the fift, but with the reservation of all their priviledges, and ancient Liberties: for preservation of the which, in danger to be over-born by the power of the Spaniard, they consederated with the rest of the united States, anno 1594. and so still continue.

The antient inhabitants of these Countries were the Menapii and Sicambri, very valiant people possessing Guelderland, and the Majores Frisii, which were planted in Groyning, and the rest of Friseland. Of these the Sicambri were accompted the most valiant people, uniting with other nations in the name of French, and by that name, possessing, with the rest of those Nations, the mighty Empire of the West. In the division whereof, by the posterity of Charles the Great, these Countries were first part of the Kingdome of Austrasia, or East-France, afterwards of the Germane Empire: governed at the first by Guardians, or Protectours, created by the people in the reign of Charles the Bald: the two first being Wickard, and Lupold (or Leopold) two Brethren; who fixing their chief Seat in the Castle of Gueldres, occasioned the whole Country to be called Guelderland. But they, and their successours, by what name or title soever called, were in effect but Provinciall Officers, accomptable to the Emperours for their administration; the first free Prince hereof being Otho of Nassaw, who having to his first wife, the Lady Aleide, daughter of Wickard, the last Guardian; was by the Emperour Henry the third made first Earl of Guelderland: adding thereto the State of Zutphen, by a second marriage, as is said before. In Reinold the ninth Earl it was made a Dukedome by the Emperour Lewis of Bavaria, anno 1339. sold by Duke Arnold (justly incensed at his ungracious son Adolp) to Charles Duke of Burgundy, for 92000 Florens of ready money, and an Annuall pension, anno 1472. But not∣withstanding this Agreement, Adolph (upon the death of Charles) possessed himself of it, and left it unto Charles his son; who finally surrendred it unto Charles the fift, anno 1547.

EARLS and DUKES of GVELDERLAND.

• 1079 1 Otho of Nassaw the first Earl.
• 2 Gerard, the son of Oth, by his first wife Aleide.
• 1131 3 Henry, the son of Gerard.
• 1162 4 Gerard II. son of Henry.
• 1180 5 Otho II. brother of Gerard.
• 1202 6 Gerard III. son of Otho the second.
• 1229 7 Otho III. son of Gerard, who walled the towes of Ruermond, Aruhem, Bomel, Goch, Wageni••gen, and Harderwick.
• 1271 8 Reinold, son of Otho the third, taken and imprisoned till his death, by
• 1326 9 Rainold II. his own son, created the first Duke of Gueldres, by the Emperour Lewis of Bava∣varia, at Francfort, Anno 1339. liberall to the poof, and a great Patron of the Muses.
• 1343 10 Rainold III. son of Rainold the 2^d, molested with continuall wars with his brother Edward, by whom taken, and imprisoned till his dying day.
• 1371 11 Edward, the son of Rainold the second, by Eleanor the daughter of Edward the third of England, his second wife, dyed the same yeer with his brother; the last of the male issue of Otho of Nassaw.
• 1371 12 Mary, (by some called Joan) Sister of Edward, by the same venter, and wife of William Earl of Gulick.
• 13 William, son of William Duke of Gulick, and Mary of Gueldres, admitted Knight of the Gar∣ter by King Richard the second.
• 14 Rainold IV. the brother of William.
• 15 Arnold of Egmond, son of John Lord of Egmond, and Mary his wife, daughter of Joan, the sister of Rainold, and William, the two last Dukes, succeeded in the estate of Gueldres; taken,

• impri••oned, and most barbarously handled by his own son Adolph,* 1.23 and delivered by Charles the Warlike, Duke of Barg••ndie he sold to him his estates of Gueldres, and Zutphen to be injoyed by him after his decease, anno 1472.
• 1473 16 Adolp••, the wicked son of Arnold, dispossessed of his estate by the said agreement which Duke Charles enjoyed for his life; after the death of the said Charles was restored to li∣berty by the Gauntois, anno 1467. and made the Generall of their forces against Lewis the eleventh.
• 1477 17 Charles, son of Arnold, after long wars with the Princes of the houses of Burgundy and Austria, p••••tending the sale and legacy of Duke Arnold, to Charles the Warlike; surrendred his estates unto Charles 〈…〉〈…〉, to be enjoyed by him after his decease, if he left no issue. According to which 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Emperor Charles succeeded him in Gueldres and Zutphen, anno 1538. being the year of his 〈◊〉〈◊〉: after that time accompted in the number of the Belgick Provinces.

The Armes hereof were Quarterly, 1. Azure, a Lyon Or, crowned Gules; for the Dukedome of Guelderland; 2. Azure, a Lyon Gules, for the Earldome of Zutphen.

Thus have we seen a Country, which at the first erecting of these Estates, was nothing in a man∣ner but bogs and marishes; and at the best, but a continuall Wildernesse of woods and forrests: by the great providence of the Princes, and extreme industry of the People, made the most populous, best planted, and the wealthiest Estate (for the bignesse of it) in the whole habitable world. And we have seen those severall Estates and Principalities, by Marriages, and other Contracts, reduced into the hands of the house of Burgundy: under the Princes of which great and illustrious Family, infe∣riour to no Kings of Christendome for Power and Riches, especially Duke Philip the Good; the subjects hereof did so abound in wealth and plenty, that Philip de Comines who then lived, affirmeth that this Country seemed like the land of Promise. Some thought there was a purpose in this Duke Philip, of erecting these estates into a Kingdome; diverted from it by the difference and variety of Lawes and Priviledges, which those people severally lived under; not to be brought without great difficulty and distaste, to one forme of Government: yet might have done it, if he would, as himself openly affirmed to the Embassadours of King Lewis the 11. But Charles his son being more bent on the de∣signe, negotiated to that end with the Emperour Frederick, whom he met at Triers, anno 1473, and doubtlesse had obtained his purpose, upon the marriage of his daughter with Maximilian, Fredericks son (which was then propounded) had not his rash ingagement against the Swissers, and his untime∣ly death therein, broke the course of his projects; which projects had they took effect, as in all probability they had but for that engagement, he had extended his dominions all along the Rhene, and on both sides of it, from the Alpes unto the German Ocean; and been the most considerable Prince at that time in Christendome: all Elsats in high Germany, being sold, or mortgaged to him by the Duke of Austria, the Dukedome of Lorrain at his mercy; besides, the hopes he had of the Earldome of Pro∣vence, intended to him by King Reny, which would have opened him a way to the Mediterranean: he being dead, the Government continued, as before it was; each Province having its distinct Lawes and living according to their ancient Priviledges, till the attempt of Philip the second, King of Spain; most resolutely (but unfortunately) bent to bring them under the command of that Crown, to cancell all their priviledges, and new mould the Estate, according to his own will and pleasure: occasioning thereby the Revolt of a great part of the Country; and the setting up of a new Estate, opposite unto him▪ and destructive of his interesse in it. But before we come unto this change, we will first look upon the Princes Power, Revenue, and other things considerable touching this Estate whilest it stood entire under the Princes of the house of Burgundie, and

LORDS of BELGIVM.

• 1369 1 Philip the Hardie, Duke and Earl of Burgundie, Earl of Flanders and Artois, the first great raiser of this House.
• 1404 2 John the Proud, Duke of Burgundie, &c.
• 1419 3 Philip the Good, added to his estate the Dukedomes of Brabant and Limbourg, the Marquisa••, and Machlin, by the death of his cousin Philip; the Earldomes of Hainalt, Holland, Zeland, and the Lordship of West-Friseland, by the resignation and death of the Countesse Jaqui∣line, whose next Heir he was; the Dukedome of Luxemburg, and the Earldome of Namur, which he bought for money.
• 1467 4 Charles the Warlike, who bought the Estates of Gueldres and Zutphen; and held them peace∣ably all his life.
• 1476 5 Mary, the daughter and Heir of Charles, married to Maximillan, son of the Emperour Frede∣rick; from whom King Lewis the eleventh of France took the Dukedome of Burgundie, and the greatest parts of the Counties of Burgundie, and Artois; unfortunately killed with a fall from her horse, and an unseasonable modesty in not suffering the Chirurgions to dresse her wound; the hurt which she had taken being in her thigh.
• 1482 6 Philip III. sonne of Mary and Maximilian, to whom Charles the eight of France restored all the places in Artois, and the County of Burgundie taken by his Father: marryed Joane daugh∣ter of Ferdinand and Isabel, Kings of Spain.
• ...

• 1506 7 Charles II. Arch-Duke of Austria, King of Spain, and Emperour of that name the fift; added to his Estate in these Countries, the Dukedome of Guelderland, the Earldome of Zutphen, the Lordships of Vtrecht, Over-yssell, and Groyning.
• 1558 8 Philip IV. of Belgium, and the II of Spain, invading these Countries against their privi∣ledges, was by a great part of them rejected from being their Prince, anno 1581. which made him after a long and a bloody war, to surrender all his interesse in them to
• 1599 9 Isabella Clara Eugenia his daughter, and Albert Archduke of Austria, whom he married to her: during whose Government, a truce for 12 years was made, and in the preface to that Truce the Confederate Estates declared to be treated with as a Free Estate, to whom the Kings of Spain could pretend no title.
• 16 10 Philip V. of Belgium, and the IV. of Spaine on the decease of the Arch-Duchesse Isabella his Aunt, succeeded in the possession of some, and the title unto all the Belgick Provinces.

The ordinary Revenue of these Countries to the Dukes of Burgundie, and after to the Kings of Spain, before the breach, were estimated at three millions of Crowns yeerly, which was more then any King in Christendome at those times received; the French onely excepted: the very measuring of corn in the City of Antwerp, being farmed yearly for 100000 Crowns in ready mony; But the ex∣traordinary was far greater: the Estates of these Countries in the year 1550 granting to Charles the fift an Aide, which they call the Noventale, amounting to 150000 crowns a moneth; and yet the Pro∣vinces of Luxenbourg, Limbourg, Gueldres, and Groyning, were not rated to it: And it is said, that Phi∣lip the second at his first coming to the Estate, was presented with a grant of 40 millions of Florens, to be paid in few years. So that these Countries were the true Correlative of both his Indies: the losse of which, before the making of the truce, anno 1609. cost him above 100 millions of Crownes, and the losse of 400000 men.

The Forces of these Princes by Land, may best be seen in the expedition of Charles (then Earl of Charolois) against Lewis the eleventh, whom Duke Philip the Good his father furnished to that enter∣prise with 9000 Archers, and 1400 men of Armes, every one of which had five or six great horses attending on him: and at his setting forward, was told by his Father, (never accompted for a Braggart) that if he fell into any danger, he should not be abandoned for the want of 100000 fight∣ing men. The said Duke having thus sent away his son, and being provoked by the indignities of those of Leige, and Dinand, who revolted from him: suddenly raised an Army to 28000 horse, and aproportionable number of foot, for the chastisement of that proud and rebellious people. And Charles himself, succeeding on the death of his Father in his unprosperous attempt upon the Swit∣zers, had no lesse then 8000 men at the siege of Morat. As for their power at Sea, I find not that they kept any standing Navy, nor needed they so to doe, as the case stood with them, considering that when they had occasion of any such service, they used to take up all the Ships which they found in their harbours (of which there never wanted good store) employing as many as they pleased, and dismissing the rest.

The principall order of Knighthood ordained by these Princes, was that of the Golden Fleece, first instituted by Duke Philip the Good (in imitation of the Order of S. George in England) anno 1430. The name and fancy borrowed, as some conceive, from Gedeons Fleece; from Jasons Fleece, as others think; but more probably from the Golden Fleeces of England, which brought him in so much gold and trea∣sure in the way of custome. Their Habit is a Collar of Gold interlaced with irons seeming to strike fire out of a Flint, (ex ferro flammam being the word:) at the end whereof hung the To••sond' Or, or Fleece of Gold. Their number at the first was but 25. (which is the number of Knights of the English Garter) increased afterwards by the same Duke Philip unto thirty one. Charles the first raised them to fifty one: And now the King of Spain hath assumed a liberty of making as many as he pleaseth: this being the onely Military, or Civill Order of which those Kings have the be∣stowing; the orders of Alcantata, Calatrava, and the rest of Spanish institution, being rather Religious, and Monasticall, at the best but mixt. Saint Andrewes day, the day of the Instal∣lation.

In this great Pomp and Glory did these Princes live, as long as they continued in good termes with the subject Provinces being masters of more goodly Jewels, magnificent furniture for their houses, & costly moveables then any 3 of the greatest Princes in all Europe. And on the other side, the subjects whilst they lived in duty under so great Princes, attained unto the height of all worldly happinesse: in their Apparell excessively gorgeous, in their Feasts and Banquets over-sumptuous, in their Manners dissolute, vices which usually accompany that kind of felicity. An happinesse too great to continue long. By the ambition and violence of Charles the Warlike, they were first plunged into a war against Lewis the eleventh, of which they did not only feel the present miseries, but lost all the Towns and Holds which they had in Picardy, with the whole Dutchy of Burgundy. And by a like, but better grounded Ambition of Charles the fift, they were exercised in continuall wars against the French, who miserably harrowed, and ransacked the Countries of Luxemburg, Hain••lt, and Artois, bordering next unto them. Charles at his death commended them to the especiall care of Philip his son, ad∣vising him to use them kindly, as those that were the chief supporters of his State and Glory: ad∣ding, that if he should deal otherwise with them, it would prove the ruine of his Fortunes. And on the other side, the People, to obtain his favour, presented him at his first entrance on the Go∣vernment,

with a grant of 40 millions of Florens, as before was said. But he transported with ambition, and a Catholick, zeal, not onely forgot their love, but his fathers counsell; and had no sooner concluded on a peace with France, effected by the treaty of Cambray, anno 1559. but pre∣sently he cast his thoughts on the subjection of this people to his will and pleasure. For they were so fortified with Priviledges, which their former Princes had granted, and the latter had been sworn to observe, that he wanted much of that absolute and uncontrollable command, which he strongly aimed at. Some of which Priviledges were, that the Prince could place no stranger amongst them, with jurisdiction over their Estates and persons, in Offices of war or justice. 2. The Prince could give nothing to the Clergy: nor 3 leavy any subsidies, without the States of the Coun∣try. But the main Prerogative was, that if the Prince by violence or wrong, did infringe any of the said Charters and Franchises the people after the declaration thereof made might goe to election of a new Prince. This not a little grieved the Spaniards, that such base and unworthy people (for so they esteemed them) should in such liberty possesse so brave and rich a Country; their King bear∣ing no title of Majesty, or absolute command over them. Besides, the Reformation of Religion, which then began to grow to some strength, moved the King to reduce them back to the Church of Rome, by the power and terrour of the Inquisition; and by the erecting of some new Episcopall Sees amongst them (for before there were but three in all) to settle some more constant course of Ecclesiastical Disci∣pline: Against both which, when the people violently opposed, he then resolved of bringing them by Spanish Rhetorick (that is, by the Sword and the Cannon) to their old obedience. To these ends he sent the Duke of Alva, an old and expert Captain (as having 60 years been a Souldier) with a puissant Army to be his Vice-Roy among them. He also gave him a Commission of that large ex∣tent, that he might place and displace whom he would, and execute all such as he could finde oppo∣site to his designes. At that time the two chief men among them were the Prince of Orenge, and Count Egmont: the first more potent with the people, the latter, with the Souldiers. Had these two joyned together, they might easily have prevented D. Alva's entrance; but Egmont was so soothed up with Letters from Spain, that he believed not the Intelligence which the Prince had concerning the Dukes Commission. The Earl exhorted the Prince to submit himself to the pleasure of the King, and so to prevent the ruine of his house: The Prince desired the Earl to maintain the Liberty of the Country; as for himself, He had rather be a Prince without an House, then a Count with∣out an Head. Being thus resolved, the Prince retires to his friends of Nassaw, in high Germany; the Earl stayeth to congratulate the entrance of the new Governour: who had no sooner setled him∣self, but he intrapped the Counts of Horne and Egmond, and beheaded them, anno 1567. Being thus rid of these two, with diverse others of good quality, who living would have much hindred his proceedings; he quartered his Spaniards in the Townes and Provinces, spoiled the people, not of their Priviledges onely, but their Liberty. Among the Reformed he brought in the bloudy Inqui∣sition; and indeed so tyrannically did he behave himself, that the people were forced to a defensive war, as well for their lives, as substance. This was a war of State, not Religion; the most part of the Hollanders being Papists, at the time of their taking Armes. During these troubles, the Prince of Orenge was not idle, but he in one place, and Count Lodewick his brother, in another, kept Duke Alva imployed; though divers times not with such fortunate successe as they did expect. In the year 1572, Flushing was surprised by Voorst, and Berland, as we have before said. So also was the Brill in Voorne, an Island of Holland, by the Count de la March, and not long after, all Holland, except Amsierdam, followed the fortune and side of the Prince, together with all the towns of Zeland, Midleburg excepted, Anno 1573. Duke Alva being recalled, Don Lewis de Requisens was appointed Go∣vernor; during whose rule many of the Belgians abandoned their Country: some flying into Germany, others into France, most into England. After his death, and before the arrivall of Don John, the Priuce and his party recovered strength and courage again, till the coming of the Prince of Parma, who brought them into worse case then ever. Yet anno 1581. they declare by their writings di∣rected to all people, that Philip of Spain was fallen from the Government: and take a new oath of the People, which bound them never to return to the Spanish obedience. This done, they elect Francis Duke of Anjou, heir apparent to the French King, and then in no small hopes of marrying Queen Elizabeth of England, to be their Lord. But he intending rather to settle a Tyranny in himself, then to drive it from the Spaniard, attempted Antwerp, put his men into the town, but was by the valour of the Burgers shamefully repulst. Shame of this ignoble enterprise, especially grief for its ill suc∣tesse, took him out of the world. About which time, the estate of these Countries was thus by this Hieroglyphick expressed. A Cow represented the body of Belgium: there stood the King of Spain spur∣ring her, the Queen of England feeding her, the Prince of Orenge milking her, and Duke Francis plucking her back by the tail, but she foul'd his fingers. During his unfortunate Government, Par∣ma prevailed in all places, especially after the death of William Prince of Orenge, treacherously slain with a Pistoll, anno 1584. Now were the poor Hollanders truly miserable; desperate of pardon from their Prince, and having none to lead them, none to protect them, but such as were likely to re∣gard their own profit more then theirs. England was the only sanctuary they had now left: to which they sue, offering the Queen thereof the soveraignty of their Provinces, who had, if not a true, yet a plausible title to them: As being generally descended from Edward the third, and Philip his Wife, who was sister, and (as some say) Heir to William Earl of Hainalt, Holland, &c. If Margaret, from whom the right of Spain is derived, were daughter to Earl William, then was our Queen to succeed after Philip, who was rejected: if that Margaret were (as many write) his younger sister, then was

our Queen the undoubted Heir: her predecessour Philippa being Earl Williams eldest sister. But that Heroick Queen not disputing the right of the title, nor intending to herself any thing, save the honour of relieving her distressed neighbours; and providing for her own estate, by this diversion; took them into her protection. Under which the Belgian affairs succeeded so prosperously (I will not now stand upon the particulars) that before they would hearken to any treaty of peace, they forced the King of Spain to this conclusion, that he treated with them as with a free Estate, abstract∣ed from all right and title, which he might pretend unto the places which they were possessed of. This peace was concluded anno 1609. since which time, they have kept Garrisons well disciplined, and as well paid: so that these Countries have in these late dayes been the Campus Martius, or School of defence for all Christendome, to which the youth of all Nations repair to see the manner of Forti∣fications, and learn the art of war. Thus did they for 40 years hold the staffe against a most puissant Monarch, and in the end capitulated with great advantage; that it is observed, that whereas all other Nations grow poor by war, these only grow rich. Whereupon it is remarkable to consider into what follies and extremities Princes run, by using their people to the warre. The Kings of France place most of their hopes in their Cavalrie, because in policie they would not that the Vulgar should be exercised in arms. Lycurgus gave a Law to the Lacedemonians, that they should never fight often with one enemie: the breaking whereof, made the Th••bans a small Common-wealth, to be their equals in power. The Turks won the vast Empire they now possesse, by making many and speedy wars. But now that policy being worn out of fashion, we see that (to omit Persia) the little and di∣stracted Kingdom of Hungarie, hath for 200 years resisted their Forces. So was it between the Dukes of Austria and the Switze••s; and so it is betwixt the Spaniard and Low-country men, who formerly being accounted a dull and heavy people, altogether unfit for the wars; by their continuall combat∣ing with the Spaniard, are become ingenious, full of action, and great managers of causes appertain∣ing to sights either by Sea or Land. We may hereby also perceive what advantage a small State gain∣eth by fortifying places and passages; there being nothing which sooner breaketh a great Army, and undoeth a great Prince, then to beleaguer a well fortified town: for that herein he consumeth his time, and commonly loseth his men, credit, and money, as the Romans before Numantia; the great Tu••k in Malta, and Charls of Burgundie before Nancie. For where war is drawn out of the field unto the wals, the Mattock and Spade being more necessary then the Sword and Spear, there the valour of the assailant is little available, because it wanteth its proper object.

Thus as before we brought these severall Estates and Provinces into one hand; so now we have broke them into two, the one part continuing in obedience to the Crown of Spain, the other gover∣ning themselves as a State apart. Under the King remain the Dukedoms of Luxembourg, Limbourg, and Brabant, (some few towns excepted) the Marquisate of the Empire, the Earldom•• of Hainalt, Na∣mur, Artois and Flanders (except only S. Ivys) and the Lorship or Signeurie of Machlyn; with many pla∣ces of importance in the Dutchie of Gueldres, to countervail the towns with-held from them in Flan∣ders and Brabant. This is by far the greater part of the Countrie, and more fruitfull in regard of the Commodities there naturally growing; but as much inferiour to the other in power and riches by reason of their strength in shipping, by which they have the command at Sea, and thereby draw the whole trade of Christendom, driven before at Antwerp, to Amsterdam, and other towns of their con∣federacie.

For the government of these Provinces, there is a Regent sent from the Court of Spain, whose au∣thoritie is generally as great as that of the Kings, save that all matters of moment passe under the Kings name, and that all Officers of any great trust and moment are appointed by him: and that all laws, decrees, sentences and negotiations are dispatched in his name. For the assistance of the Regens there is a Privy Councell, a Councell of State, and a Councell of Finances, by whom all things are ordered which conern the publick, the Regents authoritie cooperating and concurring with them: without which, though they may consult, they can execute nothing. And for the governance and well or∣dering of the severall Provinces, there is in every one of them a Lieutenant, or Provinciall Gover∣nour, subordinate to the Regent and accomptable to him: and in each Province a particular Coun∣cell held in the Kings name, consisting of more or lesse Counsellors (as the bignesse of the Province is) for the most part Doctors or Licentiates of the Civill-Laws, with a President as the head thereof: which in some places they call the Parliament after the manner of the French, and in some the Chancerie. To these Courts all the Subjects do resort for justice in causes both Criminall and Civill: to these are brought appeals from inferiour Judicatures, such as the Courts of great Towns, and particular Fran∣chises: and from these lieth an appeal to the great Councel at Machlyn, supreme and superintendent un∣to all the rest.

When any thing is to be done which concerns the profit of the Prince, or otherwise is of publick moment, the Regent sendeth out letters in the Kings name to command the Estates, that is to say, the Clergy, the Nobility, and the principall Towns of every Province (except those of Luxembourg, Guel∣ders, West-Friseland and Over-yssel, who by speciall priviledge cannot be called out of their own coun∣tries) to come before him. The place of their Assembly is for the most part at Bruxels, the Court and residence of the Regent, because the Brabanters are also priviledged not to be summoned out of the Precincts of their own Province. Where being come, the States assemble not all together, but those of one Province at a time, so one after another: to whom the President or some one of the Councell of State proposeth in the Princes name, that which he demandeth: to which if any town oppose, then all which the rest have done is of no effect; nothing being granted by the Deputies or States of

any Province, but with this condition, that all the rest of the Estates do agree unto it. Without this punctuall content of all parties interessed, the Prince can impose nothing, by their Laws, upon the Subject, nor alter any thing at all in the publick government.

And as the people are thus priviledged in regard of the Prince, so are the Princes and Prelates pri∣viledged in regard of the Pope: it being agreed upon between them,

• 1. That the Prince is to give Clergie-Benefices, and the Pope to confirm them.
• 2. That neither Prelate nor Lay-person may be cited to Rome, but the Pope to send his Delegates or Commissioners into the Countrie.
• 3. The Pope not to give a Benefice nor grant a Pardon, nor send a Bul into the Country without the leave of the Prince.
• 4. That no Clergie man can buy lands or other immoveables without the Princes consent. And
• 5. That the Prince hath power to visit the Clergie, to see if they be well governed or not, and if they be not, to reform the abuses.

Great priviledges, if considered rightly, greater then which few Protestant Princes do pretend to in their own Dominions.

As for the Revenue raised by the Spaniard out of his part of this Estate, it is not easie to be guessed at: and of that which is, there comes but little to his Coffers. The expences of his Court there, is as great as ever under any of the former Regents, and his charge of entertaining Souldiers for his towns and garrisons, greater then before. Nor doth it now stand with reason of State to lay any arbitrarie taxes upon the people, lest he exasperate them to a second Rebellion, or startle them to some new Con∣federacies against his quiet.

Under the government of the Confederate Estates, are the Dukedome of Guelderland, excepting some few Towns in the hands of the Spaniard, the entire Earldoms of Holland, Zeland, and Zutphen, the Seig∣neuries of West-Friseland, Vtrecht, Over-Yssell, Groining, the town of Sluyes, with the Isle of Cassandt in Flanders, and many pieces of importance in the Dutchie of Brabant. This is the lesser part by far, and far inferiour to the other in regard of the soil, but the more populous of the two, and by the indu∣stry and great trading of the people, the more rich and powerfull. Governed after their own old Laws, by the particular Estates of every Province not yet united into one entire body of a Comon∣wealth: saving that for the better preservation of their confederacie, the Commissioners of the seve∣rall Provinces doe consult together, whom they have honoured with the name of the States Generall.

The Estates of the particular Provinces, elected out of the principall towns and places of most impor∣tance, doe order the affairs thereof according to their ancient priviledges, rights, and customs, as well by themselves as by their Colleagues and Officers whom they doe appoint, and that as well for mat∣ters of State, as in point of Justice. For administration of the which, the Governour, President, and Counsel∣lors of the Provinciall Courts, have the cognizance of all cases both civill and criminal; and in all causes of appeal from inferiour Courts, in each of which they do proceed without appeal, making their Acts and Commissions in the name of the said Governour, President, and Councell; but pronouncing sentence and executing judgment in the right of the Soveraigntie of the said Province. And these Provinciall States are chosen generally out of the Plebeians or common people, and the Burgers (at the best) of the grea∣ter Townships: the Nobilitie and Gentry being so worn out, that in all Holland, and Zeland, there are not left above 3 families of Gentlemen; and those compelled to live after the Plebeian fashion for fear of envie, and to avoid the insolencie of the saucie Clowns, who out of rudenesse and the desire of equality, hate nothing more among them then the name of a Gentleman.

Out of these Provinciall States which hold not for any certain and determinate time, but only du∣ring the pleasure of the communitie for which they serve, are chosen one or more for each severall Province, according to the condition and capacitie of those which are chosen, to reside at the Hague, there to consult of the affairs which concern the publick: but so, that be they more or lesse out of every Province, they make amongst them but one suffrage when any thing is to be put unto the Vote. And these they call the States Generall, first because a collected body out of all the Provinces, and se∣condly, because they are not properly to deal in any matters of particular concernment, which are determinable absolutely by the States Provinciall, but only in such things as concern the generall good of the whole Estate; as treating with Ambassadours, making war and peace, &c. For their assistance in the which, there is a Councel of State made up of the Governours and some eminent men of every Province (in which the Ambassadour of England, as long as we held Flushing and the other Cautiona∣rie Towns, had his voice or suffrage:) by whose advice they dispose of all things which concern the publick. But so, that if any difficultie do appear in the businesse they conclude nothing till they have the approbation and consent of the particular Cities and Provinces for which they are chosen, to whom they are accomptable for their administration, and by whom revocable whensoever they please.

The Revenue of this Estate doubtlesse is exceeding great, the Armie which they keep in continuall entertainment, consisting of no lesse then 30000 men, which they can draw into the field, leaving the Forts and Towns very well provided: yet so well paid, that we never read of any mutinie amongst them for want thereof. The whole charge, with the entertainment of Captains and superiour Offi∣cers, is said to amount to 500000 l. per annum, raised on the people by Excise laid upon all commodi∣ties, and many taxes of like nature so insupportable in themselves and amongst men which would be thought to live in a free State, that should the Spaniard, or any Prince in Christendome lay but half so much upon their Subjects, it would occasion a Revolt. So that whereas one of the first causes of their

falling off from the King of Spain, was to free themselves from taxes and impositions, illegally (as they said) inforced upon them, they have drawn upon themselves more arbitrarie and illegall pay∣ments then any Nation in the World. So little have they got by the change of government. Tou∣ching their power at Sea, we have spoke alreadie. All I shall now adde to it, is by way of instance, which is, that in the year 1587. the King of Denmark on pretence of some displeasure, arrested 608 ships of theirs, of all sorts at one time, in the Sound; and that the next year after they set out upon ve∣ry short warning, an hundred good men of war to join with England against the invincible Armada which then threatned both. To conclude, there is nothing wanting to these Countries, wherewith the God of all blessings doth enrich a Nation, but a gracious Prince, unitie of Religion, and a quiet Govern∣ment: which if it pleased the Almighty to confer upon them, they would surpasse all neighbouring States in treasure, potencie, content, and all worldly happinesse.

There are in these Countries,

• Archbishops 3.
• Bishops 15.
• Universities 7. Viz.
  • Lovain,
  • Doway,
  • Leige,
  • Leyden,
  • Harderwick,
  • Franeker.
  • Groyning,

And thus much of Belgium.

OF GERMANIE.

GERMANIE is bounded on the East with Prussia, Poland, and Hungarie; on the West with France, Switzerland, and Belgium; on the North with the Baltick Seas, and some part of Denmark; on the South with the Alps, which part it from Italy. By which accompt the modern Germanie much differeth from that described by Tacitus, and others of the Roman writers: that comprehen∣ding the three Kingdoms of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, with so much of the Kingdom of Poland as lieth on this side of the River Vistula; but boun∣ded on the East with the Rhene, and on the South with the Danow: the mo∣dern Germanie containing on the further banks of those Rivers, 5 whole Ro∣man Provinces, that is to say, Noricum, Ripense, and Mediterraneum, Rhoetia secunda, Belgica, and Germa∣nia prima, with some parts of Rhoetia prima, and Germania secunda, but terminated with the Danes, and the Baltick Sea.

It was first called thus by the Romans (as some conceive) who seeing the people both in customs, speech, and course of life, so like those of Gallia, called them the Germanes to the Gaules: the word Germanus in the Latine, signifying a Brother of the whole bloud, (as our Lawyers phrase it) that is to say, a brother both by father and mother: those which have the same mother but divers fathers, being called Fratres uterini. And of this minde is Strabo, who speaking of the great resemblance which was betwixt these Nations, in manners, speech, customs, and way of life, concludes it thus, that the Ro∣mans did with very good reason call them Germans, cum fratres eos Gallorum hoc nomine vellent ostendere; intending to signifie by that name that they were the brethren of the Gaules. But this is to be under∣stood of those people only which dwelt next to Gaule, and not of all the Nations which inhabited in this vaste Continent, according to the ancient extent thereof: it being very well observed by Tacitus, that Germanie was at first Nationis non Gentis nomen, the name of some of the Nations only, not of all the Country: the name in processe of time spreading over all that large tract of ground, and those scat∣tered Nations which were either conquered by them, or incorporate with them. Others will have the name to be meerly Dutch, deriving it from Ger, which signifieth all, and the word man, signifying in that language as in ours; whence also they derive the name of Almans; by which they would im∣ply that the Almans or Germans are a very warlike Nation, a people that have in them nihil nisi virile, nothing not worthie of a man. Bocartus somewhat near to this, telling us that Ger in the antient Gallick did signifie as much as Guerre in the modern French, would have them at their first coming over the Rhene to be called Germans by the Gaules, that is to say, men of war, (or Gens d' Armes in the present French) by reason of the great and many victories obtained by them.

The like diversity I find for the name of Almans: For though some gave them the name of Almans from the same originall from whence they fetch the name of Germans, as was said before: yet others as probably conjecture, that they had that name because they consisted of so many severall Nations coming out of the North and North-east hither, that they seemed to be an Hotch-poth of all sorts of men, kneaded into one name and Nation, which is the conceit of Asinius Quadratus. But for my part I doe conceive (supposing the name of Almans to be Dutch originally) that the whole Country was

not called Almain, till such time as the Princes of the Dukedome of Almai•• (since called Suevia or Schweben) did possesse the Empire: which continuing in that potent familie near 100 years, might very well occasion them to be called the Emperours of Almain, or the Almain race, and so impart that name to the Empire also. And for the Almains naturally and properly so called, (of whom we shall speak more when we come to Suevia) I see no Etymologie more agreeable to true Antiquitie, then to derive the name from Mannus the son of Tuisco, one of their Gods and a principall Founder of this Nation, (Tuisconem Deum & Filium Mannum, originem gentis conditoresque,) as is said by Tacitus, the people being called Ale manni (with a double n) in all antient writers, as men that did derive them∣selves from this Mannus the son of Tuisco. In like sort as I think the Marco-manni inhabiting the coun∣tries of Moravia, were so called, as the Manni of the Marches or out-borders of Germanie, and not the Mark-mans, as if they were men of mark, the only men of fame and honour of all those Nations: which might as well be pressed from the Dutch originall, as that of All-man, in the meaning by them preten∣ded. And unto this opinion I am swayed the rather, because I find the Dutch Nation generally so much inclined to derive their Originall from Tuisco, (from whom the Teutones inhabiting about Brandenbourg may well fetch their Pedegree) the name of Dutch-land, or Dutch-men, coming near in sound to Tuisc-land, and Tuisc-men: In which I shall subscribe to Verstegans opinion, though for the most part I look upon him but as the second part of Goropius B••canus.

But being the Etymologies of the names of most antient Nations are very uncertain, and for the most part founded on conjectures only, let us leave the name a while, and survey the Country: the length whereof (according to the truest and exactest measurement) from East to West, that is to say, from the Vistula, or Wixell to the Rhene, is estimated at 840 Italian miles; the breadth from North to South, that is to say, from the Ocean to the Towne of Brixen in Tyrol, 740 of the same miles. So that the figure of it being near a square it may take up 3160 miles in compasse, or there abouts. Situate in the northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the sixth and tenth Climates, the longest day in the most Southern parts, being 15 hours and an half, and in the most Northern, 17 hours and a quarter.

In this compasse and extent of ground are supposed to live 10 millions of people. The men of the poorer sort laborious, painfull, and of a sincere and honest carriage; the Nobles for the most part either Scholars or Souldiers, and true lovers of honour, though Tacitus hath otherwise resolved it, affirming that the Gaules fight for liberty, the Belgians for honour, and the Germans for gain. Which yet is true enough of the common souldiers, who if they fail of pay, fail in courage presently. Of both sorts they are generally tall and big, of great bones, much flesh, and large sinews: but com∣monly of such a phlegmatick constitution, that they have not spirit enough to manage such a masse of flesh as they bear about them. Which want of naturall heat to concoct that humour, makes them for the most part to be men of a bright, or light-brown hair, and fair complexions. They are little addicted to Venus, and very much to Bacchus; whence the Proverb, Vivere Germanorum est bibere; and the old Verses,

Germani possunt cunctos tolerare labores, O utinam possent tam bene ferre sitim.

The Dutch themselves to labour well inure; O would they thirst could half so well indure.

This love unto their liquor, together with their naturall temper, maketh them fat and corpulent. Whereupon Pope Julio the second, stiling the Spaniards birds of the air, because of their ambition; the Venetians and Genoeses, fishes of the sea, because so much accustomed to Navigation: called the Ger∣mans by the name of the Beasts of the field. And when Augustus was resolved to take unto himself the Supream government of Rome, he was advised by Agrippa to choose a guard of Germans to attend upon him. The reason was (as Dion giveth it) because in those great bodies there was little malice hidden, and lesse subtlety; and that they were a people that took more pleasure to be commanded, then to command. In matters of war this people have been formerly in a measure famous; yet not so much by the valour or conduct of their Captains (for they have had but few such) as by their own hardinesse. They withstood the Romans 210 years, afflicting and troubling them more in that space, than either the Carthaginians, Spaniards, Gauls, or Parthians; and even at the last (saith Tacitus) Triumphati magis sunt quamvicti. In our times the Rutters and Lansknights of Germany, (for so they call their horse and foot) have been much imployed: but more by reason of their numbers, easily rai∣sed out of so large a Country, then any opinion of their valour; being slow of motion, dull of ap∣prehension, fearfull of putting any thing to the chance of war. By reason of which fearfulnesse as they are very cruell upon all advantages, not sparing either age or sex when they get the victorie: so are they apt to run upon any Alarm, not to be rallied, if once routed, upon any perswasions. Inso∣much as Charls Count of Mansfield, General of an Armie of 50000 sighting men, but most of this Nati∣on, was forced to suffer a small Armie of 10000 Turks to passe by his trenches, being the•• strongly encamped before Strigonium, (now Gran) a Town of Hungarie, and to victuall the town before his face: not daring to set upon them or disturb their purpose, for fear lest being lustily charged, his Germans would give back and indanger all. And yet besides these weaknesses they have some great faults. One of which is a custome, if their wages be not duly paid, (though it be in the very midst

of a battell) to cry Guelt, Guelt, throw down their weapons, and suffer themselves to bee cut in perces by the Enemie. And so they served Frederick the Electour Palatine at the battell of Prague. The other is an extreme humour of spoil and plunder: on which they are so bent wheresoever they come, that such as entertain them have just cause to say that they receive more damage by them then they doe by their enemies. Two undeceiveable notes of mercenarie valour.

The women are of a good complexion, but by reason of their intemperance in eating and drink∣ing much given to corpulency: women of a good carriage (as the saying is) good Bearers, and as fruitfull breeders. Scrvilely obsequious to their husbands, whom many of good rank serve at the table with trenchers and other necessaries, and take away when he hath done, eating the residue apart with and amongst their maides: scarse sitting down with him once a week, and then too at the lower end, or at some such distance. And though the women by their lawes have a property in the goods which they bring with them at their marriage, or are given them after, (so as the husband hath but the use of them onely) and may dispose of them by their last will at the time of their death; yet is their condition thereby little better: the husband being no lesse churlish and imperious then hee would be otherwise. Which made Caracalla to say often, that only that Nation knew how to rule their Wives, which added the feminine article to the Sun, and the masculine to the Moon, as the Germans doe. Most of them as well VVives as Virgins (except persons of honour) use to goe bare sooted within doors, and seldome put on shoes or stockins but when they are to goe abroad upon their occasions. A thing that seems the more strange in regard of the extreme coldnesse of the Countrey, which is so fierce, that generally they lodge between two Feather beds both in summer and winter: and in most houses have their stoves, of which the doores and windowes are kept very close, as well to re∣tain the heat as to keep out the cold. Which though they may be usefull and inoffensive in Gentle∣mens houses; yet in the common Innes where all sorts of people are necessitated to throng together, the ill smels, never purged by admitting any fresh air, are ready to stifle and choak up the spirits of raw Travellers not accustomed to them.

The diet of Germany France and Italy, is by a Traveller thus censured: the Germans have much meat, but fluttishly dressed; the French little, but neatly cooked; the Italians neither the one nor the other. And to say truth, the Germans have meat enough: the people being generally of good stomachs, and either by nature or ill custome, excessive both in eating and drinking, seldome rising from the table till they have consumed all which was set before them. Insomuch as in some places it is provi∣ded by Law, that in their feasts they shall not sit above five houres at the table. During which time if by intemperance either in eating or drinking, a man disgorge his foul stomach in his fellows lap, or pisse under the table, it is no disgrace to him, nor at any time taken notice of to his reproach. Which humour of gormandizing and excessive drinking, is not onely cherished a∣mong the Vulgar, but even amongst their greatest Princes, who besides what they doe in this kinde themselves, have their drinking champions, as well to answer all challenges, as to challenge all comers: contending with each other, as a point of State, whose cellar shall afford the greatest and most capa∣ble Vessels.

The title of the Fathers descend to all the children; every son of a Duke being a Duke; and every daughter, a Dutchesse: a thing which the Italians hold so ridiculous, that they put it in the forefront of this facetious Satyre. The Dukes and Earles of Germany, the Dons of Spain, the Monsieurs of France, the Bishops of Italy, the Nobility of Hungary, the Lairds of Scotland, the Knights of Naples, and the younger brethren of England, make a poore company. For by this common assuming of the Fathers honour, and parting his lands among all the brethren; the Nobility is beyond reason multiplyed, and no losse impoverished: there being not long since 17 Princes of Anhalt, and 27 Counts of Mansfields; to most of which, their Armes have been the best part of their riches; & nihil nisi arma & manus, & in his ••mnia; as Tacitus once said of the ancient Britains. And yet there is not one of this poore Nobility that will vouchsafe to marry with the daughter of the wealthiest Merchant; or suffer any of their sisters to be married to any under the degree of a Nobleman: nor any juster cause of disheriting their children, then ignoble marriages, never permitting the issue of such a Bed to succeed in any of their ••ees, Estates, or titles, by means whereof though they debar themselves of such accessions of wealth as matches of that kinde might bring them: yet to the great honour of their generosity in this parti∣cular, they preserve the pure ••••ream of their bloud from running into muddie channels, and keep the spirits of brave men though they want the fortunes.

The Languages here spoken are the French in Lorrain, and some towns of the Bishop of Triers; the Italian in the highest parts of Turol, which lie next to the Commonwealth of Ve••ice; the Sclavo∣nian spoken in Bohemia, Moravia, and some parts of Lusatia: and the high Dutch, the generall Language of the Country. A language very antient doubtless (though I am not so much a Goropian as to think it sp••ke in Para••ise, or before the Floud) and such as by reason of the little or no impression which the Ro∣man Armies made upon this contrary hath lesse commixture with the Latine, then any which is used in these Western parts, (the VVelch excepted) and is very harsh by reason of its many Consonants.

This Country was esteemed by Tacitus to be rude and barren, containing nothing but unpeopled Forrests, unprofitable Heaths, and unhealthy Pools Germaniam informem terris, asperam coelo, tristem cultu a pectuque, as he further addeth. And such no doubt it was in those times wherein Tacitus lived: the people not being civilized, nor the Countrey cultivated, nor any means found out to rectifie the sharpnesse of that Northern air. But he who doth observe it now cannot but confesse that there is no Countrey in the World either better planted, or replenished with more goodly and gallant Cl••ies: being also in most parts both pleasant, healthy and profitable, abounding with mines of silver, and

interiour metals plentifull in corn and wines, with which they supply the defect of other Nations; as also with Flesh, Fish, Linnen, Quicksilver, Allom, Saffron, Armour and other iron-workes. The AraSble lands so spacious in the Eastern parts, that the husband man going forward with his Plough in the morning, turned not back again till noon; so making but two furrows for his whole days work. For this Verstegan is my Authour, and if it be not credible let him bear the blame.

Souldiers of most eminencie in the Elder times, were 1. Arminius the Prince of the Cherusci, who overthrew Quintilius Varus and the Roman Legions, 2. VVitikind the last King of the Saxons: for the middle ages, 3. Otho the first, 4. Frederick Barbarossa, 5. Rodulph of Habsburg, Emperours and Kings of Germany, 6. Henry surnamed the Lion, Duke of Saxony. 5. And in the last Centurie of years, 6. Frederick the second Electo••r Palatine, who made good Vienna against the Turks; 7. Albert of Bran∣denburg, of whom more hereafter. 8. Earnest Earl of Mansfeild, 9. John George of Jagerndorf, 10. Albert VVallenstein Duke of Fridland, and divers other of late dayes.

Scholars of note the elder times afforded none, nor the middle many; learning being here so rare in the middle of the eighth Centurie, that Vigilius Bishop of Saltzburg was condemned of heresie, for holding that there were some Antipodes. In the next age there flourished Rhubanus Maurus, Haimo of Halberstade, VValusrians Strabus, men learned for the times they lived in. And in the fol∣lowing times, Ockam a stout defender of the rights of the Empire against the encroachments of the Pope; Otho Frisingensis the Historian, Albertus Magnus, the Philosopher, of which last it is said that he made the Statua of a man, which with the help of artificiall Engines could speak articulately; and was the work of 50 yeares. Then in the dayes of our Grandfathers, we have 1. Martin Luther, that great instrument of the reformation; 2. Philip Melanchthon his Coadjutor in that worke, but of more excellent parts, and farre better temper: thence called the Phenix of that Age. 3. Jo∣achim Camerarius, a great friend of Philip; 4. Martin Chemnitius, a solid and laborious writer; 5. Fla∣cius Iflyricus the chiefe Authour of the Magdeburgian Centuries and Father of the Rigid Lutherans; 6. Sebastian Munster, an industrious Cosmographer, and a learned Linguist; 7. Silburgius, and 8. Bux∣dorfius, as great Linguists as hee: not to descend to further instances in those, who have so filled the Marts of Francfort in these later times.

But the greatest excellency of this people lyeth in the Mechanicall part of learning, as being eminent for many Mathematicall experiments, strange water-workes, medicinall extractions, Chymistry, and the Art of Printing, and inventions of like noble nature, to the no lesse benefit then Admira∣tion of the World. Amongst which I cannot choose but instance in that work of Regiomantanus, an excellent Mathematician and a cunning Artizan, spoken of by Keckerman, who at the coming of the Emperour Maximilian to the City of Nuremberg, made a wooden Eagle, which flew a quarter of a mile out of the Town to meete him, and being come to the place where hee was, returned back of its owne accord, and so accompanyed him to his lodging. A thing if true (as the Relator was a man of too much gravity to abuse the World with an untruth) exceedingly beyond that Mi∣racle of a flying Dove, for which Archytas is so famed amongst the Antients exceeded oenly by himselfe in a like invention, which was that of an Iron flye, (the greater Miracle of Art, because lesse in quantity) which at a Feast, to which hee had invited some of his especiall friends, flew from his hand about the room, and returned againe, as is affirmed by Peter Ramus. Expressed thus by Divine Du Bartas,

Once as this Artist more with mirth then meat Feasted some friends, whom he esteemed great, From his learn'd hand an Iron flie flew out, And having flown a perfect Round, about, With wearyed wings return'd unto her Master, And as judicious on his arm he plac'd her. O divine wit that in the narrow Womb Of a small flie could find sufficient room For all those Springs, Wheels, Counterpoise, and chains, Which stood in stead of life, and spur, and reins.

And amongst these I reckon Bertholdus Swart a Franciscan Fryer, the inventer (though by accident) of the fatall instrument, the Gun. Studious in Chymistrie, he made mingled dryed earth, sulphur, and some other ingredients, which he had put into a Mortar, covered with a stone: and striking fire to light a candle, as the night came on, a spark by chance fell into the mortar, and catching hold of the Sulphur and other minerals with great violence blew up the stone wherewith it was covered. Amazed at which he made triall severally of these ingredients to find out which of them it was which produced that effect, which having discovered he caused an iron pipe to be made, crammed it with Sul∣phur, Saltpetre and stones; and putting fire to it, saw with what violent noise and sury it discharged it self. This invention hee is said to have first communicated to the Venetians, anno 1330, or there∣abouts: who having been often vanquished by the Genoys, and driven almost to a necessity of yeel∣ding to them, by the help of their Guns, (Bombards they were then called) gave unto their enemies a notable discomfiture. And this was the first battell that ever those warlike pieces had a part in: which not long after, put to silence all the engines and devices, wherewith the Antients were wont to make their batteries. The next that made use of this instrument, were the inhabitants of the Baltick

Sea; and not long after them, the English, at the siege of Calice, anno 1347. about which time, they began also to be used in Spain. The French, it seemeth, learned the use of them from the English: and the first benefit received by them, was the death of that famous Leader, Thomas Montacute, Earl of Salisbury; who at the siege of Orleance was slain with a great shot, anno 1425. The Turks are behol∣ding for them, to the wars they had with the Venetians; beholding I say, for notwithstanding the harm received by them at first, yet afterwards growing expert in managing of them, they gave unto Vssan Cassanes, and Hysmael, two of the most mighty Emperours of Persia, two memorable over∣throws, by the help of their great Ordnance only. The Portugals were in this Art the Tutors to the Persians: for as Solyman the Turkish Emperour objected against them, they not only aided Tamas the Sophi, with certain Harcubuciers, but also sent him workmen to shew him the use and making of Artil∣lery. These great pieces at the first invention were rude, unwieldy, and charged with stone bullets only: but by degrees they came to that perfection, both for the wall and the hand, which they now have. Whether now Archery or Gunning be to be preferred, I stand not here to determine; on∣ly this I am sure of, that victories have been of late purchased with lesse expence of bloud, and life, then ever formerly. But of this Theame more perhaps hereafter, when we shall come to take the Parthian Archery into consideration.

The Religion of this Country it is not easie to name, considering so many are here allowed; Jewes being intermixt with Christians; and these divided into Papists and Protestants; the latter also subdivi∣ded into Lutherans, Calvinists, &c. The Christian faith first planted here, if Dorotheus Bishop of Tyre be of any credit, by S. Thomas surnamed Didymus one of the twelve. But being there is little trust unto his Relations, the best way were to say with the Magdeburgians and the Martyrologies, that the Germans had not all the same Apostle: that the Gospell was first preached amongst the Rhoetians and Vindeici, by S. Lucius of Cyrene; amongst those of Noricum by S. Mark; by S. Crescens at Mentz, S. Clemens at Mets in Lorrain; all of them Apostolicall men, and of the number of the 70. after that by S. Maternus at Co∣len, and by S. Eucherius at Triers. That the faith was planted very early in these countries, Irenaeus the renowned Bishop of Lyons, anno 170. is sufficient evidence; who takes notice of it: and that it pro∣spered very well and took very good root, appeareth by the Bishop of Ments, Triers, Wormes, Spires, Ba∣sil, and Strasbourg, subscribing to the Councell of Colen in the reign of Constantius the son of Constantine the Great, anno 347. But the light hereof being extinguished for a time by those barbarous nations who fell upon these out-parts of the Roman Empire; began to shine again, on the conversion of the French, in all parts of this countrey: the Conquests and example of this puissant Nation giving great incouragement thereunto. In which as those of other Countries doe not want their honour, so the greatest part thereof belongs to the English Saxons: Willibrod the first Bishop of Vtrecht, Willibald of Aichstat, Swibert of Virden, Willibald of Breme, and specially Boniface the Archbishop of Mentz, being most gloriously fortunate in that sacred service. The Moravians, Bo••e∣mians, and others farther off, came not in till afterwards. Not fully converted to the faith, they began to suck in the corruptions of the Church of Rome; discerned and opposed by John Husse, and Hierome of Prague, Bohemian Divines: who by reason of the marriage of King Richard the second of England, with the daughter of Wenceslaus Emperour and King of Bohemia, had opportunity to be acquainted with the preachings of Wiclef, the points of whose Doctrine they approved and propagated. But these two being burnt at Constance by the decree of that Coun∣cell, their followers in Bohemia would not so give over: but after many sufferings and much bloud∣shed obtained at last a toleration of the Emperour Sigismund their King: more able to make good his word in his own dominions, then he had been to save the two Martyrs from the fire at Constance, to whom he had granted his safe conduct for their comming and going. In this condition they remai∣ned, under the name of those of the Sub utra{que} or Calistini, because of their Administring the Sacra∣ment in both kindes, till the rising of Luther: who justly offended at the impious and unwarrantable Assertions of Frier Tekel, and others of the Popes Pardon-mungers; first opposed their doings, and after questioned that authority by which they acted: falling from one point to another, till he had shaken the foundations of the Roman Fabrick. Of the successe of his undertaking we shall speak more punctually in the Dukedome of Saxony, the place of his birth, the Scene of this great Action, and the proper Sphere of his Activity. Suffice it now to say, that his doctrine was so well approved of, that the Dukes of Saxonie, Brunswick, Lunenbourg, Wirtenberg, Mecklenberg, and Pomerania; the Marquesse of Branderbourg, the Lantgraves of Hassia, and most of the Free and Imperial Cities did adhere unto it, who from their Protestation made at Spires (the Imperiall Chamber) to that effect, anno 1529. had the name of Protestants. The next year following they delivered in the Confession of their faith at Auspurg, a City of Suevia, thence called Confessio Augustana; authorized, or tolerated at the least, after a long war with variable successe on both sides, by the Emperour Charles the fift at the Pacification made at Passaw, anno 1552. and afterwards more fully at Ausbourg, (where their Confession had first been tendred) anno 1555.

In the mean time arose up Zuinglius amongst the Switzers, of whose both Doctrine and successe we have spoken there. These not communicating Councels went two severall waies, especially in the points of Consulstantiation and the Reall presence, not reconciled in their times, nor like to be agreed upon amongst their followers. For Calvin, rising into the esteem and place of Zuinglius added, some Tenets of his own to the former doctrines, touching Predestination, Free-will, Vniversall Grace, Finall per∣servance (points fitter for the Schooles then a popular Auditory) by which the differences were wi∣dened, and the breach made irreparable: the cause being followed on both sides with great impa∣tience, as if they did not strive so much for truth, as victory. And of the two those of the Lutheran par∣ty

seemed more violent (though the other was altogether as irreconcilable) who could not choose but stomach it to see themselves undermined and blown by a new form of doctrine, not tolerated in the Empire but under colour of conformity to the Confession of Ausburg. For Zuinglianisme being en∣tertained amongst the French, a busie and active people, spread it self further in few years then it was propagated by the Switzers (men of the same temper with the Dutch) in all times before. Insomuch as it did not only prevail in France, but by the reputation of Calvin, and the diligence of his fol∣lowers, was wholly entertained in the Kingdome of Scotland, the Netherlands, and even in Germanie it self; in which it got footing in all the territories of the Counts Palatines of the Rhene, in some of the Lantgraves of Hassia, in the Imperiall City of Strasburg, many of the Hanse-towns, and amongst other Princes and Free Cities of inferiour note. The rest of Germanie containing the Patrimoniall Estates of the house of Austria, the Dukedomes of Bavaria and Lorrain, the territories of the three Spirituall Electours, and of all the other Bishopricks in the hands of the Clergie, some of the Mar∣quesses of Baden, part of the subjects of Cleve, and but three of the Imperiall Cities (and those small ones too) that is to say, Gmund, Vberlinque, and Dinekell-Spuell (unlesse some more be added by the late great successes of the house of Austria) remain in their obedience to the See of Rome: yet so that there be many Protestants in Bohemia, Austria, and in other the Estates of the Popish Princes; as there be Papists in the Free Cities of Frankford, Nurenberg, Vlm, Aken, and some other places, besides the late increase of them in both Palatinates.

As for the Government of their Churches those that continue in obedience of the See of Rome, are under the old form of Archbishops and Bishops: co-aevall in all Germanie (as in most places else) with the faith it self. The Calvinists (by which name the Zuinglian••st now also passeth, if not eaten out) submit themselves for doctrine, discipline, and formes of worship, to Calvins Modell, whereof we have spoke more at large when we were in Geneva. And for the Lutherans, they have divided the Episcopall function from the Revenues; giving those last to some of their younger Princes, with the title of Administrators of such a Bishoprick; the function or jurisdiction to some of the more eminent Clergie, with the title of a Superintendent, assigning to them a priority both of place and power be∣fore other Ministers; which they enjoy for term of life, together with some liberall maintenance in proportion to it. In other things, as habit and title of dignitie, they differ not at all from the other Ministers: and over them in place of Archbishops they have their generall Superintendents; all of them of each sort accomptable to the supreme Ecclesiastical Consistory (as formerly to the Provinciall or Natio∣nall Synod) made up of Counsellors of State, and the heads of the Clergie: so that the form is much the same as in elder times, the greatest Alteration being in the names; and that no other in a man∣ner then by changing the old Greek word Episcopus, into the new Latine word Superintendens: both signifying an Overseer though in different languages. And so ex Graecis bonis, Latinas fecere non bonas, in the Poets words: which is in brief the totall of the Innovation. And as they do conform thus far to the elder times in form of government, so do they also come up to them in their formes of worship, re∣taining still a setled and prescribed Liturgie for all their Churches, most of the holy dayes observed in the former Ages, the Crosse in Baptisme kneeling at the Communion, and many other innocent and significant Ceremonies, commended to the Church by most pure Antiquitie. In point of mainte∣nance as defective as the Cal••inists are, few of their Ministers having Tithes, most of them pensions or sti∣pends, and those small ones also, seldome exceeding two or 300. Guldens, besides wood for fewell, corn and some other necessaries.

Now because mention hath been made of the H••••se-towns and Imperiall Cities, we are to understand that the Cities of this Countrey are of three sorts. 1. Such as are holden in possession by some of the Princes in way of inheritance, part of their patrimony and estates, as Heidelberg, Vienna, Munchen, Witten∣berg, &c. 2. Such as are held originally of the Empire it self, which are called Free Cities for their great Prerogatives of coyning money, and governing themselves by their locall Ordinances; Imperiall in regard they know no Lord or protectour but the Emperour only, to whom they pay two third parts of such contributions as are assessed in the Assemblies or generall Diets, and 1500. Flore••s yearly for themselves and their territories. They are in number about 60. many of which are of a fair and large estate, such as are Nurenberg, Ausburg, Ingolstade, Spires, Wormes, &c. Of which thus Guicciar∣dine. Those (saith he) are called Free Cities, which acknowledging by a certain determinate tribute the authority of the Empire, do notwithstanding in all other things govern themselves after their own laws, not seeking to amplifie their territories, but defend their Liberties. 3. The third sort is of those which are called Hanse-towns, or Hansteden, that is, (say some) An zee steden, Towns upon the Sea; such as those were who first entred into this confederacy, but at this time the name extends to many inland Cities, and of no great trading, joyned with them in a league for their common defence and preservation. A league made first against the Danes, and the Earls of Holst by some of the Maritime Towns bordering next unto them, that is to say, Lubeck, Hambourg, Rostock, Wismar, Stralesund, and Luneburg: but afterwards many other of the Imperiall Cities and Towns of trade, associated with them in an offensive and defensive league against all enemies whatsoever. In number about 72. those of Livonia and Prussi•• being taken into the reckoning, many of which are able to put to sea 150. good sayle of ships: such as lie more within the land contributing in money or otherwise to the com∣mon charge. First hanselled by Waldomar the 3. of Denmark, whom they vanquished in a navall bat∣tell. After that growing into credit, and driving a great trade in most parts of Christendome, they enjoyed many large and ample priviledges, wheresoever they came: called amongst us sometime by the name of Easterlings from their Easternly dwellings; and Merchants of the Steel-yard from the

place where they stowed their commodities; and Guilda Teutonicorum in regard of their nation, for the most part Dutch. But the English learning so much wit at the last as to make use of their own ship∣ping, they began here by little and little to decay; and are now almost worn out of memory with us, though still of good esteem and credit in other Countries.

The principall Rivers hereof are 1. Danubius, or the Danow, which rising out of Nigra Sylva, or Schwartzen Wald as the Germans call it, at a little Village of Schwaben called Don Eschingen, about two Dutch miles from the shores of the Rhone, passeth through Schwaben, Bavaria, Austria, &c. by the Ci∣ties of Vlm, Regensberg, Passaw, Vienna, Rab, Buda, and Belgrade, beyond which it beginneth to be cal∣led Ister, by which name most generally known amongst the Grecians: and receiving into its chan∣nell, from the long tracts of the Alpes, the Sarmatian and Carpathian mountains, about 60. navigable Rivers, besides lesser Brooks, disgorgeth his full stomach by seven severall mouths (the names where∣of we shall finde in Dacia) into the lap of the Euxine sea; the whole length of his course 1500 miles. Insomuch as we may say with a modern Poet,

Cedere Danubius se tibi Nile negat.

O seven-mouth'd Nile, I plainly see, Danow will scarce give way to thee.

2. Rhene, of whose originall and course we have spoke more fully when we were in Belgium: which running from Switzerland through Germany and Belgium, after a course of 800. miles, emptieth it self into the German Ocean. The like doth also the 4. Elb (Albis) after a journey of more then 400 miles; arising about the lower skirts of Bohemia, and passing by Magdeburg and Brunswick, and so betwixt the Dukedome of Holstein (now part of Denmark) and the rest of Germany. 4. Odera, which hath its fountain in the hithermost parts of Moravia, and after it hath run its course through Brandenburg and Pomerania, of some 300. miles in length falleth at last into the Baltick sea. 5 Visurgis or the Weser, which issuing out of the hils of Turingia runneth through Hassia and Westphalen, to the City of Breme, not far from which it fals into the German Ocean. 6. Vistula, or the Wixel, which rising out of the Carpathian mountains betwixt Poland and Hungarie, first passeth by Cracovia the chief City of Pole, then betwixt Pomeren and Prussia, and so into the Baltick sea: the ancient boundary of this Countrey dividing it from Sarmatia Europaea. 7. Maenus, or the Maine, which hath its spring in the mountains of Bohemia, and passing by the Cities of Bamberg, and Weirtzberg, is received into the Rhene beneath Francford. 8. Amasus or the Ems, which hath its fountain near Paderborn in Westphalia, and passing between the two Friselands falleth into the German Ocean not far from Emden.

Chief mountains of this mighty Countrey, besides the Alps spoken of before, which run in a long tract betwixt it and Italy, are 1. Abnoba, now called Schwartze wald, (the present name both of this Mountain and the Forrest of Martiana which doth overshadow it) out of which rise the springs of Danow, and the Neccar, two principall Rivers of this Country. 2. The Sudetae, incircling Bohemia, covered with the woods called anciently Gab••eta and Luna, now called the Wolds of Passaw and Be∣haimer from the places adjoyning. 3. Gretius in Austria, now called Culemberg, the ancient bounds be∣twixt Pannonia and Noricum, two Roman Provinces. 4. Vogesus, commonly called Vauge, and by some French writers Le Mont de Faucities, which encircling Lorrain divideth it on the East and South from Elsats and the County of Burgundie. As for the Forrests of this Countrey, besides those spoken of already, that of most note was the Forrest of Hercinia (of which all the rest were but limbs or branches) the beginning whereof was about the borders of Switzerland and Alsatia, from thence run∣ning Eastward along the course of the Danow unto Transilvania, and thence declining on the left hand through the vast Countries of the Lituanians, Moscovites, and Russes, in which last there are still many vast deserts of it; the greatest part thereof in Germanie being long since consumed; in place whereof are many goodly cornfields and wel-built Cities. A wood so formidable to the Romans that they durst never venture to search the end of it: the length thereof after the end of sixty daies journey being un∣discoverable, and the further search into it quite laid aside.

These Boundaries and Landmarks being thus described, we shall the better follow the Chorographie of this great continent, according to the severall Principalities and Estates therein: having first taken a survey of the ancient condition of it, with so much of the story as concerns the whole, before it came to be divided into so many hands. The Countrey first planted by the posterity of Gomer, who descending from the Mountains of Albania, their first seat, in memory thereof first called Gomerini, after Cimmerini, by which name known to Pliny, Ptolemy and others of the ancient writers: removed into the more fruitfull plains of Phrygia, and there built the City Cimmeris which Pliny speaks of. But that small Province proving of too narow a compasse to contain his Off-spring, and the adjoy∣ning Countries being taken up in the former Plantations, they removed unto the Northwest of the Euxine sea, where we finde a City of their building called Cimmerium, mentioned both by Pliny and Strabo; and the adjoyning straight or Fretum, called by the name of Bosphorus Cimmerius, by the Greeks and Latins. Driven from these dwellings by the more powerfull Scythians, they spread themselves into the West, where they began to be called Cimbri: and by that name, and under those of the Am∣brones, and Teutones, severall branches of them, intended an invasion and conquest both of Gaul and Italy: wherein they had prevailed in all probability, nisi isti seculo Marius contigisset, had not Marius hapned to have lived in that Age; by whom discomfitted and destroyed. That these Gomerians or

Cimbre, were the first inhabitants of Gaul, Germany, and all the nations of the North and West of Eu∣rope, is generally agreed upon by all the learned; divided into severall nations, and those also subdi∣vided into lesser tribes, and more obscure families: amongst which those of Teutones, or Tuiscones, from which the Dutch do so affect to derive themselves, might be some of the principall there setled, and not well pleased with that desert dwelling, such of them as dwelt nearest to the Rhene passed over that River; and beating the Gauls further up into the Countrey, possessed themselves of their dwellings: enjoying them (till conquered by Julius Caesar) without any Rivall. But Caesar, moved with the com∣plaints of the Gauls, and the insolencies of Ariovistus a king of the Germans (for by that name for the Reasons aforesaid the Romans called them) marched into their Quarters: the Roman Legionaries be∣ing so affraid of this dreadfull Enemy, ut testamenta passim in principiis scriberntur, (saith the Historian) that many of them made their testaments at the Gates of their Camp, before they fell upon the Ene∣my. Vanquished by Caesar, and Ariovistus being fled over the Rhene, the Romans by command of their Generall made a bridge over the River, and rather terrified then conquered the neighbouring Ger∣mans; more fully brought into subjection by Drusus the adopted son of Augustus Caesar, from thence called Germanicus; by whom the Rhoeti and Norici, then lying out of the bounds of Germany, (now included in it) were subdued also. So that the whole conquests of the Romans upon this Countrey, as it is now bound, contained no more then the Provinces of Germania and Belgica prima, with part of Germania Secunda, belonging unto the Diocese of Gaule, the greatest part of the two Rhoetia's, being un∣der the Diocese of Italy; Noricum Mediterraneum and Ripense, with some part of Pennonia, parts of the Diocese of Illyricum: none of them lying within the bounds of the ancient Germanie. For the Ger∣mans did not endure the yoke so long, as to be brought within the number of the Roman Provinces. Provoked with the lust and insolencies of Quintilius Varus, who succeeded Drusus in that charge, they set upon him under the conduct of Arminius, a chief Prince amongst them; kill him and utterly cut off three Legions. After which defeat Augustus laid aside the affairs of Germany, confining his Empire within the Rhene, which Drusus had extended to the banks of the Ocean. Hac claede factum, ut imperi∣um quod in littore Oceani non steterat, in ripa Rheni fluminis staret, saith the Historian. Nor did the Ro∣mans only forbear to revenge this losse, by making a new war upon them; but seemed more care∣full to defend themselves against their invasions, then to incurre the hazard of a new defeat: quar∣tering eight Legions with their severall wings and Aides on the shores of the Rhene, and four upon the Banks of the Danow; to keep these people from incroaching on the Romans Provinces. But the fatall period of that Empire, drawing on apace, the French, Burgundians, Almans and other Dutch nations break through those Guards, dispossesse the Romans of all Gaul, Rhoetia, and Noricum, which they share amongst them: till in the end, the French prevailing over the rest, extend their Empire over all the modern Germanie; chiefly performed by the valour of Charles the Great, created Emperour of the West by the people of Rome, and crowned with the Imperiall Crown by Pope Leo the 4. on Christmasse-day, anno 801. So that now the old Prophacie of the Druides, concerning the removing of the Empire into the West, came to be accomplished; though Tacitus in his time ac∣counted it for a vain and idle prediction. For when Civilis raised a Rebellion amongst the Batavi (the Hollanders and parts adjoyning) against Vespasian, then newly made Emperour: possessionem re∣rum humanarum, Transalpinis gentibus portendi, Druidae canebant; the Druides prophecled of the transla∣tion of the Empire to the Transalpine nations. Accomplished, as before is said, in the person of Charles the Great, King of France and Germany, by whom divided, (for the better ordering or Gover∣nance of it, into West-France, or West-reicts, in the barbarous Latine of those times called Westrasia; containing the modern France, and so much of the Netherlands as lyeth on the French side of the River Maes, and Osten-rich (i. e. the Eastern Kingdome) in the Latine of those times Austrasia, containing so much of the modern Germany and Pannonia, as was possessed by the French, with the rest of the Ne∣therlands: this after subdivided into the Kingdomes of Lorrain and Germany, whereof the first contai∣ned all Germany within the Rhene, together with the Belgick Provinces before described, the Counties of Flanders and Artois excepted only; the Kingdome of Germany taking up the rest. For by Ludovicus Pius the son of Charles the great Empire of his Father was parcelled out into many members, as Italie, France, Burgundie, Lorrain, and Germany; distributed amongst his sons and nephews with the title of Kings: By means whereof the Kingdomes of Germany and Lorrain united in the person of Lewis the Ancient, in little time were alien'd from the house of Charles, and left off to be French; possessed by the great Princes of Lorrain, Saxonie, Schwaben, and Bavaria; by whom dismembred into many principalities and inferiour states, all passing under the accompt and name of the Dutch or Germans. The Kings and Emperours of which here follow.

The KINGS and EMPEROURS of GERMANIE.

• Anno Chr.
• 801 1 Charles the Great Emp. K. of France and Germanie.
• 815 2 Ludovicus Pius, King of France, Germanie, and Emperour of the Romans.
• 841 3 Lewis surnamed the Ancient, second son of Ludovious Pius, King of Germanie, to which anno 876. he united that of Lorrain also.
• 4 Charles the Grosse, son of Lewis the Ancient, reigned joyntly with Caroloman and Lewis his elder Brethren, after their deaths sole King of Germany. Anno 880. he succeeded Ludo∣vicus
• ...

• ... vitus Ba••bus in the title of Emperour, continued unto his Successours; and during the minoritie of Charls the Simple, by a faction of the French Nobility, was chosen King of France: the whole estate of Charls the Great becoming once again united in the person of one Soveraign Prince.
• 891 5 Arnulph, the naturall son of Caroloman, the brother of Charls, King of Germanie, and Emp.
• 903 6 Lewis, or Ludovicus IV. (Lewis the brother of Charls and Caroloman being reckoned for one) King of Germanie and Emperour.
• 913 7 Conrade the son of Conrade, the brother of Lewis the 4. the last Prince of the issue of Charls the Great. After whose death the Francones and Saxons, seeing Charls the Simple, King of France, overlaid by the Normans, took that advantage to transferre the Empire to themselves, and they made choice of Henry Duke of Saxony to be their Emperour. A worthy Prince, by whom some Nations of the Sclaves, the Hungarians, and part of Lor∣rain were subdued, or added to the Empire.
• 920 6 Henricus, surnamed Auceps, or the Fowler, Duke of Saxonie. 12.
• 938 9 Otho, surnamed the Great, the son of Henry Emperour and King of Italie. 36.
• 974 10 Otho, II. son of Otho the first Emperour and King of Italie. 10.
• ...

  984 11 Otho III. son of Otho the 2. Duke of Saxonie (and the last of that house which had the title of Emperour and King of Italie.) After whose death, all right of succession being disclaimed, the Emperours became Elective, but for the most part wholly ingrossed or Monopolized (since the Failer of the house of Saxonie) by the Dukes of Franconia, Sue∣via, Bavaria, and Austria, notwithstanding the libertie or freedom of Election preten∣ded to by the Electors. The businesse first projected in the Court of Rome, to make the Emperours lesse powerfull, and distract the Germans, whom they feared, into sides and factions: confirmed by a decree of Pope Gregory the fifth, being a Native of that Country. The Electors only six in number, that is to say,

  • 1. The Archbishop of Mentz, Chancellour of the Empire.
  • 2. The Archbishop of Colen, Chancellour of Italie.
  • 3. The Archbishop of Triers, Chancellour of France.
  • 4. The Count Palatine of the Rhene, Arch-Sewer.
  • 5. The Duke of Saxonie, Lord Marshall; And
  • 6. The Marquesse of Brand••nburg, Lord Chamberlain.
  Upon equalitie of voices, the Duke (but now King) of Bohemia, was to come in for the 7. who by Office was to be Cup-bearer at the Coronation. For upon Coronati∣on dayes, or dayes of like solemnitie, these Offices are performed only, and then per∣formed in this manner. Before the Palace gate standeth an heap of Oats so high that it reacheth to the brest of the horse on which the Duke of Saxonie rideth, bearing in his hand a silver wand and a silver measure, both which together weigh 200 marks: then sitting still upon his horse he filleth up the measure with oates, sticketh his wand in the Remainder, delivereth the measure of Oats to some of his servants which stand next him, and so attendeth the Emperour into the Court. The Emperour being en∣tred and sate down at the Table, the three spirituall Electors standing orderly toge∣ther, say Grace before him. Then cometh the Marquesse of Brandenburg on horse-back also, with a silver basin in his hand, full of water (the basin of the weight of 12 marks of silver) and a fine clean towell on his arm, which alighting down he holdeth forth unto the Emperour. Then comes the Count Palatine of the Rhene, mounted on his horse, with four silver Platters full of meat) every one of the weight of three marks) which alighting also, he carrieth and setteth down upon the table. And finally the Duke (or King) of Bohemia, on horse-back (as the others were) with a Napkin on his Arm, and a covered cup of the weight of 12 marks, entreth the Great-hall, alighteth from his horse, and giveth the cup unto the Emperour to drink. But we must know that these services are seldome or never (especially of late times) performed by the Electours in person. It is enough if they send their Embassadours to do it, or sub∣stitute some one or other of the Emperours Court to perform it for them.

  The election is usually holden at Francfort on Maenus, whither the Electours or their deputies come, upon the day appointed by the Bishop of Ments, whose office it is to as∣semble the Princes. In their passage into Francfort, they are guarded by every Prince, through whose territories they passe. Their attendants must not exceed the number of 200 horse-men, whereof 50 only must be armed. When they are all met, they goe to 8. Bartholomews Church; where after Masse said, the spiritual Electors laying their hands on their breast, and the temporall on the book, shal swear to choose a fit temporall head for the people of Christendom. If in the space of 30 days they have not agreed, then must they eat nothing but bread and water, nor by any means go out of the citie, til the greater part have agreed on a man, who shall forthwith be acknowledged King of the Romans. The Election being finished, & the partie chosen, the inauguration was anciently holden, 1. at Aken in Gulick, where the new elected Emperor received the silver crown for Ger∣many, 2. at Millain, where he received his iron crown for Lombardie; 3. at Rome, where he received the golden crown for the Empire. But those journeys unto Rome and Millain have been long laid by, the Emperours holding their Election to be strong

• ...

  enough to make good their Title to that honour, being meerly titular. The form of which Election, the priviledges of the Princes Electours, and other fundamentall constitutions of the German Empire; we find summed up in the golden Bul of Charls the 4. by whom first promulgated anno 1359.

• 1002 10 Henry II. surnamed the Saint, Duke of Bavaria, the first Emperour elected according to the constitution of Gregory the fift.
• 1025 13 Conrade II. Duke of Franconia, surnamed Salicus.
• 1040 14 Henry III. surnamed Niger, the son of Conrade.
• 1056 15 Henry IV. son of Henry the third, in whose dayes the Popes began to usurpe authority over the Emperours: insomuch as Leo the ninth having received the Popedom at the Emperours hands, repented himself of it, put off his Papall vestments, went to Rome as a private person, and was there new chosen by the Clergie. This done by the per∣swasion of a Monke called Heldebrand, who being afterwards made Pope by the name of Gregory the 7. excommunicated this Henry, the first Prince that was ever excommu∣nicated by a Pope of Rome: from which time till the year 1254. there were continual wars and thunders betwixt them and the nine following Emperours; some of them being excommunicated, some forced to put their necks under the feet of the Pope; others to quit the care of the Common-wealth, and betake themselves unto the wars of the Holy-Land, leaving the Pope to doe what he list in Germanie.
• 1106 16 Henry V. son of Henry the 4. armed by the Pope against his father, whom he had no soo∣ner succeeded in the Empire, but the Pope excommunicated him, for being too stiffe in the businesse of investitures, and raised up the Saxons against him: by whom van∣quished, and otherwise afflicted by the Popes practises, he was forced to submit unto his commands; and was the last Emperour of the house of Franconia.
• 1125 17 Lotharius Duke of Saxonie, seised on the Empire without any election, reconciled unto the German Princes by the means of S. Bernard. He settled the affairs of Italie in two jour∣nies thither, 13.
• 1136 18 Conrade III. son of Frederick, the first hereditary Duke of Sweve, or Schwaben, and fifters son unto Henry the fifth, vanquished Henry surnamed the Proud, Duke of Saxonie and Bavaria; and going to the holy wars with Lewis King of France discomfited the Turks near the Banks of Meander. 15.
• 1153 19 Frederick, surnamed Barbarossa, Duke of Sueve, crowned at Rome by Adrian the 4. and not long after excommunicated by Pope Alexander the 3. to whom he was fain at last to submit himself, the Pope insolently treading on his neck. He went after to the Holy Land, (where he dyed) having difcomfited the Turks in three great bat∣tels, 39.
• 1190 20 Henry VI. son of Frederick King of Sicil, in right of Constance his wife, crowned by Pope Celestine, who employed him in the wars of the Holy Land; in his journey towards which, he dyed at Messina. 8.
• 1198 21 Philip Duke of Sueve, brother of Henry the 6. excommunicated by the Pope (who loved not this Familie) by whose means Otho the son of Henry the Lion, Duke of Saxonie, was set up against him. The occasion of great wars among the Germans, reconciled by marriage of Otho with a daughter of Philip. 9.
• 1207 22 Otho IV. son of Henry surnamed the Lyon, Duke of Saxonie and Bavaria, crowned at Rome by Pope Innocent the 3. by whom not long after excommunicated, for taking into his hands some towns of Italie which belonged to the Empire: vanquished in Brabant by the faction raised up against him, he relinquished the Empire to his Compe∣titor.
• 1212 23 Frederick II. King of Sicil and Naples, son of Henry the 6. having settled Germanie dispo∣sed himself for the wars of the Holy Land, where he recovered the possession of the Realm of Jerusalem; excommunicated by the Pope at his return into Italie; not long after poisoned.
• 1250 24 Conrade IV. son of Frederick, the last Emperour of the house of Schwab••n. After whose death, the Empire being distracted by the Popes practises into many factions, each faction chose an Emperor or King of the Romans: so that at one time there were elect∣ed, Henry Earl of Turingia, William Earl of Holland, Alfonso King of Castile, the renowned author of the Alfonsive Tables, and
• 1254 25 Richard Earl of Cornwall, brother of Henry the 3. of England, the best-monyed man of all his time, supposed therewith to buy the suffrages of the Archbishop of Colen, and Ele∣ctour Pvlatine, by whom he was elected and crowned King of the Romans, anno 1254. and after he had dealt in the affairs of the Empire 6 years, he returned into England, where he dyed. During these battels, and the times since Henry the fourth, the Popes had in a manner forced the Emperours to abandon Italie, so that Rodolphus who suc∣ceeded, sold all his rights in Italie to the fairest chapman. Nor did the craft of the Popes rest there, but extended into Germanie also: where by arming the Princes against the Emperours, and raising the Prelates to the dignitie and estate of Princes, he made the Empire of small power and consideration. Made smaller yet by the unworthinesse

• and weaknesse of some of the Emperours, who to get that honour for themselves, or to leave it after them to their sons, dismembred from the same many towns and fair possessions, given by them to the Electors for their votes and suffrages: by means where∣of the Princes grew in time so strong, that there were few of them who durst not under∣take a warre against their Emperors. And this appeareth by the Example of Charls the fifth, who though the most mighty and most puissant Emperour which had been in Germanie since the death of Charls the Great, yet found himself so over-matched by these ruffling Princes, that he was willing to resign the Empire to his brother Ferdi∣nand. But to proceed; after an interregnum of 12 years from the Exit of Richard Earl of Cornwall, the title was at last accepted by
• 1273 26 Rodolph Earl of Habsburg, a petite Prince, (others of greater Estates and Fortunes not daring to take up the honour) the Raiser of the present Austrian Familie.
• 1292 27 Adolph Earl of Nassaw, who served in person under King Edward the first of England against the French; for which disrelished by the Germans, he was encountred and slain near the Citie of Spires.
• 1298 28 Albert Duke of Austria, son of Rodolphus the Emperour, to whom Pope Boniface the 8. gave the Realm of France, of which he had deprived King Philip the Fair. But Albert would not meddle out of Germanie, and did nothing in it.
• 1308 29 Henry Earl of Luxembourg made a journey into Italie to recover the rights of the Empire (where an Emperour had not been seen in 60 years) supposed to be poisoned in the Chalice by a Frier at Benevent a town of the Popes. 6.
• 1314 30 Lewis Duke of Bavaria, crowned at Aix in the wonted manner, opposed by Frederick Duke of Austria, chose by another Faction, and crowned at Bonna, a town of the Arch∣bishop of Coleno, but being defeated, Lewis remained sole Emperour, ex communica∣ted by Pope John 22. 33.
• 1346 31 Charls IV. son of John King of Bohemia, and grandson of Henry the 7. crowned with the iron Crown at Millain, 1354. the framer of the Golden Bull. 32.
• 1378 32 Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, and Earl of Luxembourg, deformed and vicious, deposed by the German Princes. 22.
• 1400 33 Rupertus Elector Palatine passed into Italie for the recovery of the Dukedome of Millain, sold by Wenceslaus; but was well beat by John Galeazes, and so returned. 10.
• 1410 34 Jodocus Barbatus, Marquesse of Moravia, uncle to Wenceslaus.
• 1411 35 Sigismund, brother of Wenceslaus, King of Hungarie and Bohemia, and Earl of Luxembourg, crowned at Rome on Whitsunday, 1432. travelled exceedingly for establishing the peace of Christendom, distracted at that time with three Popes at once, a great promoter of the Councell of Constance.
• 1439 36 Albert II. Duke of Austria, son in law of Sigismund, whom he succeeded in all his estates and titles excepting Luxembourg. 1.
• 1440 37 Frederick III. Duke of Austria, the son of Ernest of Austria, and next heir of Albert the 2. procured the calling of the Councell of Basil for the peace of Christendome; travelling for that cause to Rome, where declared Emperour, anno 1442. 54.
• 1494 38 Maximilian, son of Frederick, Duke of Austria, who first united the Estates of Burgundie to the house of Austria. A Prince that undertook many great Actions, but went tho∣rough with none. 25.
• 1519 39 Charls V. King of Spain, son of Philip King of Spain, and Archduke of Austria, son of Ma∣ximilian by the Lady Mary of Burgundie. A puissant Prince who had prisoners at the same time the French King, and the Pope of Rome. He ruined the League made by the Protestants at Smalcade, took prisoners the Electour of Saxony, and the Lantgrave of Hassia, drave the great Turk from Vienna, won the Kingdom of Tunis, and in the end resigned all his Estates and dyed in a Monasterie. 39.
• 1558 40 Ferdinand, Archduke of Austria, the brother of Charls, King of Hungarie and Bohemia, elected King of the Romans by the procurement of Charls, anno 1531. Upon whose re∣signation he was chosen Emperour, anno 1558. 7.
• 1565 41 Maximilian the son of Ferdinand, elected King of the Romans in the life of his Father, anno 1562. succeeding in the Empire after his decease.
• 1577 42 Rodolphus, the eldest son of Maximilian, had great wars against the Turk, with whom in the year 1600 he concluded a peace; but being undermined by his brother Matthias, was forced to surrender to him the Kingdoms of Hungarie and Bohemia, and to con∣tent himself with Austria and the Empire only. These eight last Emperours were all of the order of the Garter. 36.
• 1612 43 Matthias brother of Rodolphus K. of Hungarie, Bohemia, and Archduke of Austria; in whose time were sown the seeds of that terrible war, which had almost destroyed the Empire. Having no children of his own, he procured Ferdinand of Gratz, to be declared Suc∣cessor into his Estates.
• 1619 44 Ferdinand of Gratz, Archduke of Austria, son of Charls of Gratz, one of the younger sons of Maximilian the 2. succeeded Matthias in all his Estates and titles. A Prince more zealously affected to the See of Rome then any of his Predecessors, and a great enemy

• of the Protestant Religion; occasioning thereby that long and bloudy war in the Empire of Germanie, not yet fully ended.
• 1637 45 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. broke the great power of the Swedes, (called in for the support of the German liberty, & against the violent resolutions of his Father) at the battle of Norlingen, the 12. Emperour of the house of Habsburg, and the 9. of the house of Austria without intermission. The cause of which is to be attributed to Charls the fift, who procured in his life time that his brother might be chosen Rex Romanorum, as his successour. Now Rex Romanorum is defined to be one, who is already so farre estated in the Empire, that on the death, deposition, or resignation of the present Em∣perour, he is immediately to succeed. This definition may passe, though there be no necessity of the succeeding of the Rex Romanorum into the Empire. For Charls the fift, though he made his brother King of the Romans, had no small hopes to have left his son Philip his successour in the Empire: for fear of which, it was thought by many that his brother lent D. Maurice a helping hand to drive him out of Germany. The reason why Charls did institute this Rex Romanorum, was questionlesse a desire to per∣petuate the Soveraignty in his own house: but his pretences were, 1. Because he ha∣ving the command of many Nations, he could not alwayes be present in Germany. 2. The troubled State of Christendome, by reason of Luthers preaching, especially there. 3. The violent power of the Turks, who now began to be nigh neighbours unto them. 4. The late Rurall war raised by the Boores, and scarce yet thoroughly extinct. And 5. The imminent disobedience in every part of the Empire, seemed to require a Prince both of power and title to assist him in the Government of it. By these suggestions he effected his design therein; but hereby changed in a manner, the Imperiall stile. For whereas the first Emperours of the house of Charls the Great, were Emperours of the Romans and Kings of Germanie: the later Emperours of the house of Charls the fift, may not improperly be called Emperours of Germanie and Kings of the Romans. Tis true indeed, that the understanding and wise D. of Saxonie through all these fair pre∣tences truly saw the main plot; which was to take Germanie (as Galba, in his excellent Oration to Piso, said of the Roman Empire) unius quasi familiae haereditatem, and therefore he first flatly denyed to yeild to any such election. Then he motioned that there might be an act made to prohibit the continuance of the Imperial authority, longer in one family, then for 3 successions. But prevailing in neither, he left the Electors, by whom Ferdinand was chosen, and not long after crowned at Aken or Aqui••grane in Cleveland, the 16 of Ja∣nuary, anno 1531. This policie hath been ever since continued by his successours; and the Germans are the more willing to hearken to it, because the Austrian Princes are Natives of this Countrey, and able to back out the Empire in its compleat Ma∣jestie.

And to say truth, it is but need that some great Prince or other be elected to it, who by the power and reputation of his own estate may preserve the honour of the Empire; confined in a manner within Germany, and there so weakened by the alienating of whole Countries from it (some titulary acknowledgement excepted onely, that it is nothing in effect, but magni nominis umbra, the shadow of a mighty body, a meere empty title. For if we looke upon the present state and condition of it, we shall finde it otherwise too weak to support the great and swelling title of the Roman Empire. For as for the Empire it self it hath some Countries repu••••das parts of it, which yet acknowledge no subjection, as Belgium, Switzerland, and Denmark: Some doe acknowledge a kind of subjection, but the Princes of them come not to the Imperiall Diets, as the Dukes of Savoy and Lorrain, and some of the Italian Potentates. Finally, some both confesse the Emperour to be their Soveraign, and that they owe service to his Courts, which are the Princes and Cities of Germany onely; but those so priviledged, so exempted from his commands, so absolute and incontrollable in their own estates, that they care little for his power, and not much (if any thing) for his per∣son: of which we shall speak more hereafter, when we come unto the form of the publick Govern∣ment. In the mean time if we would know by what occasions the Empire became so infeebled; it may be said, that the reasons and occasions of it have been very many. As the first, the weaknesse and improvidence of the Caroline race, dismembring from it many powerfull and wealthy Provinces, reserving onely a bare Homage, and some slight acknowledgement. 2ly, The cunning of the Popes, who knowing that they could not wax strong in Italy, if they did not weaken the Emperours estate in Germany, first wrested out of their hands the Investitre of the Bishops, Abbots, and other Ecclesiasticall preferments: who being now made their owne creatures, were so increased both in revenue and power by little and little, and fortified with so many immunities, that some of them grew in time to be Free Estates, all of them Princes of the Empire. 3ly, But fearing that this might not bring the Emperours low enough, they baited them with continuall factions and pe••∣petuall broils; which put them to a necessity of making what friends they could, though they paid very dearly for them▪ and taking up what moneys they could of the wealthier Cities; paying them in exemptions and Royall priviledges, when they could not otherwise cancel or discharge the debt. 4ly, And unto this, the making the Empire Elective gave no little help, few of them looking on the Empire but as Tenants of it for term of life; and therefore were more likely to discharge such debts by impairing the Publick Patrimonie, which they had no hold in, then to diminish any thing of their own

estates.* 1.24 5^ly, But being the title of Emperour was the greatest honour, which any of that Nation could be capable of, and such as by good husbandry might be made beneficiall unto their posterity, (as we see what good uses have been made of it by the Austrian family ever since the time of Rodolph of Habspurg): who would not part with some of the Imperiall rights to advance his owne house to an equall greatnesse. 6ly, A thing which the Electours understood sufficiently, and therefore were resolved to make the best of the market, knowing that the commodity could be bought of none but themselves: as in the Election of Wenceslaus sonne of Charles the 4^th, of whom it was but ask and have, what they had a minde to.

By these and every of these meanes the Body of the Empire came to be divided into many Estates, and those Estates to be made absolute and independent as before is said. The principall whereof, which being described will make up the Chorographie of this great Continent, are those of 1. Cle∣veland, 2. of the Estates of the three spirituall Electors, 3. the Palatinate of the Rhene, 4. Alsatia, 5. Lor∣rain, 6. Suevia or Schwallen, 7. Bavaria, 8. Austria and its appendixes, 9. The confederation of Wederaw, 10. Farnconia, 11. Wittenberg, and 12. Baden, 13. the Palatinate of Northgoia, or the Vpper Palatinate, 14. Bo∣hemia, and the incorporate Provinces, 15. Pomerania, 16. M••cklenberg, 17. the Marquisate of Brandenberg, 18. Saxonie and the Members of it, 19. the Dukedomes of Brunswick and Lunenburg, 20. the Lantgrave∣dom of Hassia, 21. VVestphalen, 22. Eastfriseland. Such lesser States as being absolute and free, are of lesser moment, shall be reduced (together with the Imperiall Cities) to those severall Provinces, in which they are included, or out of which they were taken. As for the Province of Holstein or Holsatia, though it be Imperiall, and in which respect by some accounted as a Province of Germany: yet being under the com∣mand of the King of Denmark, and by all Writers reckoned as a part of that Kingdom; I shall there speak of it. Some of these are thus censured by Aubanus a late writer. They of Suevia (saith hee) are whores; they of Franconia Ravishers and Buggers; they of Bohemia Heretiques; those of Bavaria Theeves, they of Saxony Drunkards; they of Friseland and Westphalia Swearers; and they of the Palatinate, Gluttons. But I hope more charitably of them all then so. I know there is another division of this Countrey, made by the Emperour Maximilian at the Diet of Colen, anno 1522. who for the better raising both of men and money for all Publick services, caused it to be divided into the ten Circles of 1. Lower Saxony, 2. Vpper Saxony, 3. VVestphalia, 4. of the Rhene, 5. of the four Electours of that part, 6. Franconia, 7. Suevia, 8. Bavaria, 9. Austria, and 10. Burgundie. But that before proposed being the more particular I shall follow that, according to the order before laid down, begin∣ning first with those which together with the Belgick Provinces and the Dukedome of Lorrain, con∣tained antiently the Provinces of Belgica and Germania prima; and some part of Germania secunda; and made up the Kingdome of Austrasia strictly and specially so called.

CLEVELAND.

CLEVELAND, or the Estates of the Duke of Cleve, before dismembred and divided betwixt the Competitors for the Dukedome on the death of the last Duke hereof, anno 1609. contained the Duke∣domes of Cl••ve, Gulick, and Berg, and the Earldome of Mark or March, all lying in a ring together. And though these two last lye on the other side of the Rhene, and so not properly within the old prccincts of the Kingdome of Lorrain, or any of the Roman Provinces before named: yet being they belonged all to the same Prince, not parted by the interposition of other Countries, they shall be han∣dled here together as the same Estate.

1. The Dukedome of CLEVF, properly and distinctly so called, hath on the East the Countries of Mark and Berg, with some part of VVestphalen; on the West Guelderland, and some part of Limbourg: on the North the Earldome of Zutphen, and the land of Overyssell; and on the South Gulick and the land of Colen. So called from Cleve the chief town of it.

The Countrey very fruitfull both for Corn and pasturage, well stocked with Cattell of all sorts, for necessarie use and pleasure; good store of Fowle, both tame and wilde: blessed also with an healthy air, and in a word, with all things needfull for the life of man: well watered with the Rhener, the Roer, the Dussell, the Ezfat, and the Nirsi, common to this and the rest of the in∣corporate Provinces.

Places of most importance in it are first Cleve (in Latine Clivia) so called because built on the sides of three little hils (which the Latines call Clivi), gently descending towards the Banks of the Rhene, which not far off divides it self into severall channels. An antient town, and of great note in former times, as appeares by many old foundations, and other monuments of Antiquity, con∣tinually digged up in the fields adjoining, but chiefly by an old foresquare Tower, built on the highest of the three hils, of great height and state; founded by Julius Caesar as a bulwork against the Germans inhabiting the further side of the River. For proof of which besides the old traditi∣on constantly maintained, there is an Inscription on the Gates of the Dukes Palace, neer adjoining to it, which saith anno ab Vrbe DCXCIIX. C. Julius Dictator, his partibus subactis, hanc Arcem sun∣davit. i. e. that in the yeare 698 from the building of Rome, Julius Caesar the Dictator, having sub∣dued those parts of the Countrey, caused this Tower to be built. 2. Santen, on the banks of the Rhene, a town of great antiquity, as the ruines of it doe declare; supposed by Pighius to bee the Trajan a Colonia of the Antients. 3. VVesel (in Latine Vesalia) a fair and rich town, seated on the con∣fluence of the Rhene with the river of Lippe, which rising in VVestphalia doth here lose it selfe: of

great note for a Colledge of secular Canons,* 1.25 built here by Eberard the ninth Earl, anno 840 or thereabouts, and an hospitall liberally endowed for old impotent persons, founded by Henry de Baers the Dukes Chancellour. A town not subject to these Dukes though within the Dukedome, being reckoned an Imperiall City and one of the Hanse Towns; now neither so Imperiall nor so Free, as formerly: possessed first by the Spaniard with a Garrison of 3000 men, (at the beginning of the war of Cleve) by D. Lewis Velasco; and from them taken by the States of the Vnited Provinces, anno 1628. 4. Burich, on the French side of the Rhene, over against Wesel, amongst goodly corn fields and pleasant pastures. 5 Duisberg, or Tuitchberg, in Latine called Tento-burgum, a town of the antient Germans, (as the name importeth) situate on the Rhene, betwixt the Angra and the Ruer, two noted Rivers. A town formerly of great trading, and notably well built, Imperiall, and one of the Han••e, but ceased to be Imperiall when sold by Rodulph of Habspurg to Thecdorick the ninth of that name Earl of Cleve, and together with 6 Cravenburg, another town of this Dukedome, but of lesser nose. 7 Emmerick on the Rhone, a well frequented town, remarkable for a very fair School. 8 Rees, 9 Griet, and 10 Griethusen, all upon the Rhene. 11 Calcar, a town more within the land, but not far from the River, grown wealthy by the trade of cloathing, and the best beere or ale in all these parts, sold thence aboundantly into the Countrey round about. Not far from whence, at a place called Auf∣de Baern, it is supposed that Caesar Germanicus built his bridge over the Rhene, when he went from Vetera Castra against the Marsi, a nation of Germany. 12 Gennep upon the Niers or Nirsi, not far from its influx into the Maes, which together with Duiffele and Riexwald were bought of Sigismund the Emperour by Adolph the first Duke of Cleve for a great sum of money.

South of the land of Cleve, betwixt it and Colen, lyeth the County of MVERS, extended all a∣long on the bankes of the RHENE, a distinct State, the Earle of which is subject to no other Prince, but the Emperor only: so called from Muers the chief town of it, situate on the French side of the Rhene over against Duysburgh. Next Towns to which are 2. Orsey, 3. Augur; of which little me∣morable. A small territory, but in a very fruitfull soil. The neighbourhood whereof to the land of Colen (to which it serveth as an Outwork upon that side) preserving it in former times from the Dukes of Cleve; who otherwise, no doubt, either by Arms or marriage had been masters of it; as they were of the adjoyning Provinces on both sides of the River.

2. GVLICK-LAND, or the Dukedome of Gulick, hath on the East the County of Muens, and the land of Colen; on the West Guelderland and Limbourg; on the North Cleve, and on the South the rest of the land of Colen. The Aire and Soil much of the same nature as in Cleve; save that here is a greater plenty of Woad for dying, and a better breed of Horses then in the other.

Places of most importance in it, are 1 Gulick, in Latine Juliacum, (whence the French call it Juliers) known by that name in the Itinerary of Antoninu••; sufficient proof for the Antiquity thereof, but not otherwise famous. Seated upon the River Roer; the chief seat heretofore of the Dukes of Gulick, before the uniting hereof with Cleve: and since the dissolution of that Estate possessed sometimes by the States of the Vnited Provinces, and sometimes by the Spaniards; called in by the Compe••itors to asser•• their Titles. 2 Duerin, on the same River, the Marcodurum of the old writers; and of late memorable for the long siege which it held against Charles the fift, in his wars against William Duke of Cleve and Gulick for the Dukedom of Gu••lders. 3. Munster Eyphel•• (in Latine, Monaste∣rium Eyphalie) so called to distinguish it from Munster of Westpbalen, pleasantly seated in a valley begi••t with mountaines not far from the spring or fountaine of the river Erfat. 4 Caster so called of a stately and magnificent Castle built for defence of this part of the Countrey. 5 Berken on the river Erp. 6 Merodon beautified with a strong Castle, which gives name to an honourable and antient family. 7 Enskereh. 8 Berklen, &c.

There is also within the limits of this Dukedome, the famous town of Aix, as the French, or Aken, as the Germans call it: famous of old times for the hot Bathes both within and without the town; whence it had the name of Aix or Aquen, (in Latine, Aquisgranum) situate on the edge of Limbourg, in a fruitfull foil; but the buildings nothing answerable to the fame of the place, in∣habited for the most part by Smiths and Brasiers, who drive the greatest trade herein: working continually on iron and other metals, with which they are supplyed aboundantly out of L••••ge and Limbourg. The town Imperiall, but under the protection of the Dukes of Gleve: at the ex∣piration of which family, under colour of some quarrels about Religion, it was seis••d on, and garrisoned by Marquis Spinola, for the King of Spain. Of great fame formerly for the death and sepulture of Charles the great, by whom made one of the three Seates of the Western Empire, and designed by him to be the place in which the King of the Romans should receive his Crowne for the Kingdome of Germany, at the hands of the Archbishop of Colen. The town supposed to be formerly that wintring Campe of the Romans, called in Tacitus Vetera, which was taken by Civilis in the beginning of his rebellion against Vespasion; during which warres it is often men∣tioned by the Writers of those times. They were built and strengthened by Augustus, the bet∣ter to keep under the Germans: quippe illis bybernis obsideri premique Germanias Augustus credide∣rat; as Tacitus. At this day this Towne and Triers are reputed famous for holy reliques: here being said to be among others the bearing cloth wherein our Saviour was wrapt, when he was in his swadling clouts; which the Emperour solemnly worshippeth at his inauguration. Concerning the ambition which the Papists have to bee thought possessours of these reilques: See I be∣seech

you how pitifully they have mangled the head of S. John Baptist.* 1.26 They of Amiens brag that they have his face, and so do they of S. John D' Angeli••. The rest of his head is at Malta, yet is the hin∣der part of his scull at Namur, and his brain at Novum Rostoviense. Another part of it is at Maurienna, another piece at Paris, his jaw at Wesel, his ear at S. Flowres, his fore-head and hair at S. Salvadores in Venice, another piece of his head is at Noyon, and another at Luca, yet is his whole head intire and un∣maimed in S. Sylvesters Church at Rome: and so no doubt is this bearing-cloth at more places then one.

But to return again to Gulick; first made an Earldom in the person of Eustace brother of Godfrey of Bovillon Duke of Lorrain, who seised upon it, as his part of the Estate, on the death of Godfrey, his el∣der brother being absent in the Holy-Land. In the person of William the 4. of that name, it was made a Marquisate, advanced unto that honour by the Emperour Lewis of Bavaria, anno 1329. created not long after Duke of Gulick, by Charls the 4. anno 1356. His two sons, William and Raynold, both Dukes successively, dying without issue: the Estate fell to Adolphus Duke of Berg, or Mont, as the next heir male, anno 1423. and finally together with that of Berg, was added to the Dukedome of Cleve by the marriage of Mary heir hereof, with John the 3. Duke of Cleve, with which conjoined till the expiration of that noble familie; whereof more anon.

As for the Estates of Berg and March, they had one originall, begun by two Brothers, the sons of Theodorick Lord of Teisterbant, of the house of Cleve; out of which house as they descended, so into that they finally were again resolved as their first materials. Of these two brothers Adolphus being the Elder, was by the Emperour Henry surnamed the Fowler, made Earl of Altena, anno 930. or there∣abouts: and Eberard the younger by the same Emperour made Earl of Berg. But Eberard entring a Monasterie of his own Foundation, left his estate and Earldome of Berg to the elder brother. United thus into one estate, they became again divided betwixt the sons of Adolph the 3. of that name, and fourth Earl of Altena and Berg. Engelbert the younger son enjoying the estate of Berg, and Eberard the elder succeeding his father in that of Altena. How they became united to the house of Cleve, wee shall see hereafter, having first looked over the Chorographie or Description of them.

3. The Dukedom of BERG, bounded on the East with Westphalen, and the Countrie of March; on the West with the Rhene from Wesel up as high as Colen, by which parted from the Dukedome of Cleve; on the North with the River Lippe, which separates it from the rest of Cleve; and on the South with the Land of Colen. So called from the hillinesse of the Countrie, Berg in Dutch signify∣ing an hill, (as Bourg doth a Town or Burrough) from whence the Earls and Dukes hereof are called Montenses in Latine, and Les Contes, and Dues de Mont in French. The Countrie for the most part, in the Vales especially, yeelds a great store of the best wheat, and consequently of the purest bread; and in the hill Countries rich mines of Coale, wherewith they doe supply their neigh∣bours.

Chief places in it are, 1 Dusseldorp, so called of the River Dussel, upon which it is situate, the River not far off falling into the Rhene. 2 Adenbourg built by Eberard the first Earl of Berg, the seat of him and his successours, till removed to Dusseldorp. 3 Keiserswerd, situate on the Rhene, belong∣ing anciently to the Empire, but bought for a great sum of mony of Charls the 4. by John Earl of Cleve. 4 Mulheim, on the Rhene also, just against Colen on the other side of the water, fortified in the year 1614. and made the Receptacle of the Protestants of that Bishoprick, prohibited the free exer∣cise of Religion in their own dwellings; but razed not long after by Marquis Spinola on complaint made by those of Colen to the Emperour Matthias. 5. Stelt, or Steltium, on the Roer, amongst the Coale mines. 6. Angermond, on the mouth of the River Angra, as the name imports. 7. Essen or Es∣sendia, on the borders of the Countie of March, once an Imperiall, but under the protection of the Earls of Berg. Of most note for a Monasterie here built by Alfride the 4. Bishop of Hildesheim for 52 Nuns and 20 Canons, liberally endowed, and having great command on the Dorps adjoining.

How Berg at first was made an Earldom, how joined unto Altena, and disjoined again, hath been shewed before. No sooner made a State distinct, but it was added to the patrimonie of the Earls of Gulick by the marriage of Earl William with the daughter and heir of Berg. Parted again betwixt Wil∣liam and Adolphus sons of Gerrard the 2. anno 1247. the first succeeding in the Earldom of Gulick, and the last in Berg. During this partage made a Dukedom in the person of William the first of that name, by Wenc••slaus the Emperour, anno 1389. whose son Adolphus as next heir succeeded in the Dukedom of Gulick, anno 1423. How both were added unto Cleve, hath been said alreadie.

The DUKES and EARLS of BERG.* 1.27

• A. Ch.
• 1 Engelbert the first Earl of Berg, di∣stinct from March.
• 2 Adolphus son of Engelbert.
• 3 N. the sister of Adolphus

GULICK.

• A. Ch.
• 1129 1 Eustace the first Earl of Gulick distinct from Lorrain.
• 2 son of Eustac••.
• 3 William Earl of Gulick.
• 4 Gerrard Earl of Gulick and Berg.
• 5 William II. son of Gerrard.
• 6 Gerrard I•• son of William the 2.
• 1247 7 Adolphus II. younger son of Gerrard the 2.
• 1296 8 William III. son of Adolphus.
• 1337 9 Gerrard III.
• 10 William IV. created the first Duke of Berg, anno 1389. outed of the grea∣test part of his Estate by his son Adolphus.

• 1247 7 William III. eldest son of Gerrard the 2.
• 8 Gerrard III. son of William.
• 9 Gerrard IV. son of Gerrard the 2.
• 1325 10 William IV. created first Marquesse, after Duke of Gulick.
• 11 William V. Duke of Gulick and Guel∣dres.
• 12 Rainold Duke of Gulick and Guel∣dres.

• A. Ch.
• 11 Adolphus III. the son of William the first Duke of Berg, succeeded also unto Rai∣nold the last Duke of Gulick, dying without issue, 1423.
• 1434 12 Gerrard IV of Berg, and V. of Gulick, son of William, and brother of Adolphus.
• 1475 13 William V. of Berg, and VI. of Gulick, son of Gerrard.
• 1511 14 Marie daughter and heir of William Dut∣chesse of Gulick and Berg, conveyed the whole Estate in marriage to John the 3. Duke of Cleve, and Earl of March, con∣tinuing in that Familie till the expira∣tion of it in the person of John Willi∣liam the last Prince hereof, anno 1610.

4 The Earldom of MARCH or MARK, hath on the East and North Westphalia, on the West the Dukedom of Cleve, on the South that of Berg or Mont. So called as being seated in the Marches of Westphalen, out of which it was taken. The Countrie for the most part like the rest of West∣phalen, more fit for pasturage then corn; woodie and yeelding store of pawnage to those heards of swine, with which it plentifully abounds.

Chief places in it are, 1 Werden upon the River Ruer, on the edge of Westphalia, the people whereof get great wealth by grazing of Cattle. 2 Soest (in Latine, Susatum) for wealth and greatnesse not in∣feriour to any in Westphalen, (except Munster only) consisting of ten parishes, and lording it over ma∣ny rich and pleasant Villages. Anciently it belonged to the Bishops of Colen, but in the year 1444. did voluntarily yeild it self to the Duke of Cleve, (being then Earl of March also) and by Duke John the 4. courageously defended against those Prelates. 3 Arusberg, a fine and pleasant site, used for a retiring place by the Electours of Colen, unto whom it belongs. 4 Dortmond, (in Latine, Tremonia) a Countie anciently of it self, and held immediately of the Empire, possessed by the Tro••manni, a tribe of the Suevians, from whence first called Tretmania, and at last Tremonia. 5 blancostein, built com∣modiously by Adolphus the fift of that name, and first Earl of March, as was also 6 H••m or Hammone. 7 Vnna, of which nothing memorable. 8 Altena, the first title of the Earls of this house, before they assumed that of the Earls of March, assumed first by Adolphus the 4. on the Conquest of some Lands in the Marches of Westphalen, continuing in that Familie till united with Cleve.

As for the Earldom or Dukedom of CLEVE, out of which it was taken, and to which the rest of those estates did in time accrew; it was one of the most ancient Estates or Principalities in these parts of the world: continuing in a direct line for the space of 900 years held by them of the Kings of France, and afterwards of the Kings of Lorrain, till the incorporating of that Kingdom with the Ger∣man Empire. Begun first by Elias Grullius, companion to Charls Martel, in his wars against the Fri∣sons, Saxons, and Bavarians, whose son Theodorick added hereto by marriage the Countie of Teisterbant,

containing the Towns and Seigneuries of Aliena,* 1.28 in Wesiphalen, as also of Bomel, Heusden, Buren, Cu∣lemberg, in the Belgick Provinces. By Baldwin the sixt Earl was added the territory of Twentzen, (in Latine, Regio Tuentana) given him by Ludovicus Pius; by Theodorick the fift, the town and Seigneurie of Duislake, setled upon him on his marriage with Mathilda, the heir thereof: by Theodorick the 9. the County of Hulkenrade, near Nuys, in the land of Colen: together with the towns of Duysburg, and Culembourg, bought of Rodolphus Habspurgensis: by John his son the town and territory of Keisarswerd, bought of Charles the 4. By Adolph the 29. Earl, the Earldome of March, formerly taken out of it, was again united: by Adolph his successour, (made the first Duke hereof by the Emperour Sigismund, anno 1417.) the Lordships of Gennep. Duiffels, and Reixwald, bought of the said Emperour; together with the County of Ravenstein, the Towns of Leoburg, Limers, and Hatteren, for the ransome of Willi∣am Duke of Berg, and other noble persons taken prisoners by him anno 1397. by John the first Duke of that name, the Town and territory of Soest; and finally by John the 3. the Dukedomes of Berg and Gulick, as heir thereof by his mother Mary, sole daughter and heir of William the fift and sixt, the last Duke thereof. To which great height this ancient and noble family had not long attained, and thereby made themselves and their sons and daughters fit matches for the greatest Princes: but it pleased God to bring it to its fatall end, and by that means to dissipate•• his brave estate in the hands of strangers: as shall be shewed in the Conclusion of this Catalogue of

The EARLES and DUKES of CLEVE.

• A. Ch.
• 717 1 Elias Grallius companion in the wars of Charles Martell.
• 732 2 Theodorick Earl of Cleve, and Lord of Teisterbant.
• 755 3 Rainold son of Theodorick Earl of Cleve and Teisterbant.
• 767 4 Conon, of great fame in Armes, under Charles the great.
• 778 5 John, son of Conon, marryed the daughter of Michael Curopalates Emperour of Constanti∣nople.
• 790 6 Robert, the eldest son of John.
• 798 7 Baldwin, the brother of Earl Robert. After whose death anno 830. the Earldone of Teister∣bant was taken out of it, and made the portion of Robert a younger son; from whom descended the two houses of March and Berg.
• 830 8 Ludowick, son of Baldwin.
• 834 9 Eberard, brother of Ludovick; who gave Teisterbant to his brother Robert.
• 843 10 Luithardus, Earl of Cleve.
• 878 11 Baldwin II.
• 928 12 Arnold.
• 968 13 Wignan, son of Arnold.
• 1004 14 Conrade made an Earl of the Empire, in the life of his father.
• 1045 15 Theodorick II.
• 1088 16 Theodorick III. companion of God∣frey of Bovillon in the holy Land.
• 1114 17 Arnold II. brother of Theodorick the 3.
• 1161 18 Theodorick IV.
• 19 Arnold III.
• 1205 20 Arnold IV.
• 1218 21 Theodorick V.
• 1229 22 Theodorick VI.
• 1247 23 Theodorick VII.
• 1255 24 Theodorick VIII.
• 1271 25 Theodorick IX.
• 26 Otho son of Theodorick.
• 1309 27 Theodorick X. brother of Otho II.
• 2325 28 John brother of Theodorick, and Canon of Colen; the last of the masculine issue of Elias Gral∣lius.
• 29 Adolphus, the VII. of March, son of Adolph the 6. of March, and Mary of Cleve, first Archbishop of Colen (as six of this house of March had been (almost) successively before

• him succeeded on the death of his Uncle John to the Earldome of Cleve;* 1.29 inaugurated thereunto by Charles the 4.
• 1389 30 Adolph II. of Cleve, and VIII. of March, created the first Duke of Cleve by the Emperour Sigismund at the Councell of Constance, anno 1417.
• 1443 31 John III. son of Adolph, Duke of Cleve, Earl of March, and Lord of Ravenstein.
• 1481 32 John II. of the rank of Dukes, and the IV of the Earls.
• 1521 33 John III. Duke of Cleve and Earl of March, &c. by descent from his Father; and Duke of Gulick and Berg in right of his wife, daughter and heir of William the last Duke there∣of.
• 1539 34 William son of John the 3. and Mary his wife, daughter and sole heir of William the last Duke of Gulick and Berg: father of the Lady Anne of Cleve, one of the wives, of Henry the 8. of England. He contended very strongly against Charles the fift for the Dukedom•• of Gueldres, but being too weak for so great an Adversary, made his submission to him at Venlo, and so saved his estates.
• 1584 35 John William, son of the former William, during the life of Charles Frederick his elder bro∣ther, was Bishop of Munster; on whose death, anno 1575. he resigned that dignity, and in the end succeeded his Father in his whole estates; which he managed with great piety and prudence till the year 1610. and then died issuelesse. The last of that an∣cient and noble family of the Dukes of Cleve. After whose death, much quarrell and contention grew about the succession, betwixt the severall competitors and preten∣ders to it: of which the principall were 1. Leopold Archduke of Austria, pretending an investiture from the Emperour Rodolphus, to whom for want of heirs males, the estate was said to be escheated. 2. John George, Duke of Saxonie, descended from Si∣byll, daughter of Duke John the third: at whose marriage with John Frederick the Electour of Saxonie an. 1535, it was said to have been solemnly agreed upon, that on the failing of the heirs males of Cleve, the issue of that marriage should succeed therein. 3. John Sigismund the Electour of Brandenburg, in behalf of his son, George William, Duke of Prussia, by the Lady Anne his wife, eldest daughter of Albert of Brandenburg Duke of Prussia, and of Maria Leonora, the eldest sister and next heir of the Duke deceased. 4. Wolfgangus Gulielmus Palatine of Newburg, son of Magdalen the younger sister of that Mary, who claimed the estate as nearest kinsman one degree to the said last Duke. And though the right seemed most apparently on the side of Brandenbourg; the Estate in tayle pretended by the Duke of Saxonie, being formerly cut off by Imperiall authori∣ty: and that pretended to by the Duke of Newburg, not of force in Germanie; yet being that Leopold was in Armes, and had already forced a possession of most part of the Countrey; the two Princes of Brandenbourg and Newburg soon agreed the contro∣versie, and by the help of the Protestant Princes their Confederates, recovered the greatest part of it from the hands of Leopold. But the Palatine of Newburg not content with his partage, first married with a daughter of the Duke of Bavaria, then reconciled him∣self to the Church of Rome; called in the Spanish Armes under the command of Mar∣quisse Spinola, to abet his quarrell: which made George William, son of the Elector of Brandenbourg, and the Lady Anne, to call in the Forces of the States, under the command of Maurice Earl of Nassaw after Prince of Orange. The issue of which war was this, that Spinola possessed himself of Wesel, Aken, Mullheim, Pusseldorp, and most other places of importance in Berg, and Gulick; and the States got into their power the Towns of Gulick, with Rees and Emmerick, in the Dukedome of Cleve; and almost the whole County of Mark. And though they both pretend to keep them for the use of those Princes in whose cause they stand: yet when such strong parties keep the Stakes, it is most easie to determine who will win the game: such alterations as have hapned in the chance of war, by the reciprocall winning and losing of some Towns on both sides, not much conducing to the benefit of the rightfull Princes.

EARLES of ALTENA and MARCH.

• A. Ch.
• 834 1 Robert, son of Baldwin, to whom the County of Teisterbant was given by Eberard.
• 2 Theodorick son of Robert, the first Lord of Altena.
• 3 Adolphus I. Earl of Altena.
• 4 Adolphus II. Earl of Altena and Berg.
• 5 Conrade Earl of Altena and Berg.
• 4 Adolph III. Earl of Altena and Berg.
• 5 Eberhard Earl of Altena; his youn∣ger brother Engelbert succeeding in Berg.
• 6 Frederick, Earl of Altena.
• 7 Adolphus IV. created the first Earl of March.
• 1249 7 Engelbert, Earl of March and Altena.
• 8 Adolphus V. son of Engelbert.
• 9 Engelbert II. from whom by a second wife the daughter and heir of A∣remberg, descended that branch of the house of March, which till of late, were Soveraigns of Sedan, and Dukes of Bovillon.
• 10 Adolph VI. husband of Mary (or Margaret) daughter and heir of Theodorick the 9. Earl of Cleve.

2. The Estates of the three ELECTOR-BISHOPS.

Adjoyning to the Estates of Cleve are those of the Spirituall Electors of the Empire of Germanie, Co∣len, Ments, and Triers; not so contiguous and conterminous as those of Cleveland, and therefore to be laid out severally by their metes and boundaries: And first for

1. COLEN-LAND, or the Estate of the Archbishop and Elector of Colen, is bounded on the East with the Dukedome of Berg, from which divided by the Rhene; on the West with Gulick; on the North with Cleve it self and the County of Muers; and on the South extending to the land of Triers. The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Vbii, in former times possessed of the Countreys of Berg, and March; but being warred on by the Germans bordering next upon them, they were by the Clemency of Agrippa, then Lievtenant of Gaul, received into protection, and by him placed along the French side of the Rhene, as well for defence of the borders of the Roman Empire, as for their own se∣curity against that Enemy. Won from the Romans by the French in the reign and under the conduct of Childerick, anno 412. or thereabouts; and from the French by the Emperour Otho the first, anno 949.

Since that time,* 1.30 the City of Colen hath remained Imperiall, and of late times incorporated amongst the Hanse-towns: but the territory near unto it, and a great part of Westphalen, subject immediately to the Bishop, much of the lands which formerly belonged to the Kingdome of Lorrain, being conferred upon this See by the Emperour Otho the second at such time as the Dukedome of Lorrain was erected by him. The Bishops See first founded here by S. Maternus, one of the Disciples of S. Peter; as hath been constantly affirmed by old tradition: but howsoever an Episcopall See without all question in the time of Constantine: Maternus, Bishop hereof, subscribing amongst others to the Councell of Arles anno 326. And being Colen was in those times the Metropolis of the Province of Germania Secunda the Bishop had the power of a Metropolitan, according to the rule and observation so often mentioned. Afterwards when the Empire was made Elective, these Bishops, with their brethren of Mentz and Triers, were made three of the seven, which were to nominate and elect the succeeding Emperour: after which time it is no wonder that they grew both in power and Patrimony.

Places of most importance within this Electorate, are 1. Bonn, situate on the banks of the Rhene, in the most pleasant and fruitfull place of all the Countrey; the ordinary refidence of the Archbi∣shop, whose house or Palace here, is said to be one of the fairest in all Germanie. By Tacitus called Benna, and sometimes Castra Bonnensia, the wintering Camp in his times, of the sixt Legion. 2. Nuys, by the same writer called Novesium, (Nivesia by Antoninus) seated on the Erp, not far from its fall into the Rhene; the break-neck of the glories of Charles Duke of Burgundie: who being resolved to get this town into his hands, as a convenient passe into Germanie, lay so long before it, that he lost the opportunity of joyning with King Edward the 4. of England, whom he had purposely invited to the war of France; and yet was fain to go without it. By means whereof he grew so low in reputation, that he was undermined by the French, defied by the Lorrainer, forsook by the English, baffled by the Switzers, and at last overthrown and slain by that beggerly nation. 3. Ernace, or Andernach, by Marcellinus called Antenacum, one of the ten Garrisons erected by the Romans on the banks of the Rhene, to secure their Province from the Germans: the other nine, being Confluenz, Bopport, Wormes, Bing, Zabern, Altrip, Selts, Strasburg, and Wassenberg. 4. Lintz, seated on the same River also. 5. Sontina, a town of good repute. 6. Zulp, now a village of no esteem but for the Antiquities of it, by Tacitus and Antoninus called Tolbiacum; most memorable for the great victory which Clovis the first Christian King of the French (upon a vow made in the heat of the fight to embrace the Gospell) obtained against the whole power of the Almans, never presuming after that to invade his territories. 7. Rhineburg, commonly called Berck, the most northern town of all the Bishoprick, situate on the Rhene (as the name imports) there where the lands of this Bishop, as also of the Dukes of Cleve, and the Earls of Muers, meet upon a point. A Town which for these 60. years hath been of little use or profit to the right owner, possessed sometimes by the Spaniards, sometimes by the confederate States; for each commodiously seated, as opening a passage up the River, and receiving great customes on all kinde of Merchandise passing to and fro. But having finally been possessed by the Spaniard from the year 1606, till 1633, it was then regained for the States by Henry of Nassaw Prince of Orange; with the losse of no more then 60. men: there being found in the Town 30. Brasse peeces of Ordnance, 70. barrels of powder, with victuals and ammunition of all sorts thereunto proportionable. 8. Co∣len, situate on the Rhene, first built by the Vbii before mentioned, and by them called Oppidum Vbio∣rum: afterwards in honour of Agrippina (daughter of Germanicus, and wife of Claudius) who was here born, made a Roman Colonie, and called Colonia Agrippina; and sometimes by way of eminency Co∣lonia only; thence the name of Colen. A rich, large, populous, and magnificent City, containing about five miles in compasse; in which are numbred 19 Hospitals, 37 Monasteries of both Sexes, 30 Chappels of our Lady, 9 parishes, and 10 Collegiate Churches, besides the Cathedrall, being a Church of vast greatnesse, but of little beauty, and not yet finished: the Metropolitan whereof is Chancellour of Italy, the second of the three Electors; and writes himself Duke of W••stphalen and An∣grivaria. Nigh to this Town did Caesar with incredible expedition make a bridge over the Rhene, which more terrified the barbarous enemy, then the reports of his valour: so powerful is laborious industry, that it overcometh all dysasters, and maketh the mostunpassable waters yeeld to Heroick resolutions.

In this Town also are said to lie the bodies of the three wisemen, which came from the East to worship our Saviour; vulgarly called the three Kings of Colen. The whole story is at large written in tables, which are fastned unto their Tombes. The pith whereof is this. The first of them called Melchior, an old man with a large beard; offered Gold as unto a King; the second called Gasper, a beardlesse young man, offered Frankineense as unto God: The third called Balthasar, a Blackmoor with a sprea∣ding beard, offered Myrrhe as unto a Man ready for his Sepulchre. That they were of Arabia, the tale saith, is probable; firs, because they came from the East, and so is Arabia in respect of Hierusa∣lem: and 2. because it is said in the 72 Psalme, The Kings of Arabia shall bring gifts. As for their bodies, they are there said to have been translated by Helena, the mother of Constantine, unto Constantinople; from thence by Eustorfius, Bishop of Millain, removed unto Millain; and finally brought hither by Rainoldus, Bishop hereof, anno 1164. This is the substance of the history; which for my part I reckon among the Apocrypha, (except it be their comming from some part of Arabia) but have not leisure in this place to refell the Fable.

2 Next to the Bishoprick of Colen lieth the land of TRIERS, extended all along the course of the Moselle, from the Dukedome of Lorrain on the South, to the influx of that River into the Rhene at the City of Confluentz, where it bordereth on the Land of Colen: and being bounded on the East with Luxembourg, as on the West with some part of Franconia. The Coun∣trey

towards Lorrain,* 1.31 and Luxembourg, somewhat wilde and barren; more fruitfull about Triers it self, and the bank of the Rhene; in all parts generally more pleasant then profitable, the greatest riches of it lying in woods and Minerals. The Bishops See here first erected by Eucherius, a Disciple and follower of S. Peter. The reality whereof, not only testified by the Martyrologies, but by Metho∣dius a writer of approved credit; who addes Valerius and Maternus for his next successours; the line Episcopall continuing till the Councell of Arles anno 326, Agritius Bishop of Triers subscribing to the Acts thereof. From this time forwards and before the Bishop had the reputation and authority of a Metropolitan, the City of Triers being anciently the Metropolis of Belgica prima, within which it stands: increased exceedingly by being made one of the three Electors of the Spiritualty, though the last in or∣der, and Chancellour to the Emperour for the Realm of France; the fortunes of which Realm it fol∣lowed, till wrested from it, with the rest of the Kingdome of Lorrain, by the German Empe∣rours.

Places of most importance in it, are 1. Confluents, now Cobolentz, the Confluentes of Antoninus, so called because seated on the confluence or meeting of the Rhene and the Moselle; the station anciently of the first Legion. A populous and well-built town; and seated in a pleasant and fertill Countrey. 2. Embretstein, over against Cobolentz, on the other side of the Rhene, beautified with a strong Castle of the Bishops, mounted upon a lofty hill, which not only gives a gallant prospect to the eye, but commands both the Town and River. 3. Boppart, seated on the Rhene, and called so quasi Bon∣port, from the commodiousnesse of the Creek (upon which it standeth) for the use of shipping: one of the forts (as Confluents before mentioned was) erected by the Romans on the Rhene for defence of Gaul against the Germans; occasioning in time both Towns. It was once miserably wasted by Richard Earl of Cornwall and King of the Romans, because the Bishop of Triers agreed not unto his Election; but soon recovered of those hurts. The ancient name hereof in the Itinerarie of Antoninus, is supposed to be Bodobriea: pawned to the Bishops of Triers by Henry the 7. and not yet redeemed. 4. Sarbrucken, on the edge of Lorrain (by Antoninus called Pons Sarvix) seated on the River or Brook called Sar, (whence it had the name) at the fall thereof into the Moselle, possessed at the present by a branch of the house of Nassaw (but Homagers of this Electour) entituled hence according to the Dutch fashion, Counts of Nassaw in Sarbruck. 5. Veldents, and 6. Belstern on the Moselle; of which nothing memorable. 7. Tre∣ves, or Triers, in Latine Treveris, the principall City of the Treveri, who possessed this tract: seated upon the Moselle also; the Metropolis of the Province of Belgica Prima, and honoured with the residence of the Vicar or Lieutenant Generall, for the whole Diocese of Gaul: by consequence the seat of a Metropolitan when it submitted to the Gospell. Of such antiquity, that it is said to have been founded 150. years before the City of Rome: of no great beauty of it self, and as little trading: the River not being capable of ships of burden; and the air generally so cloudy and inclined to rain, that it is by some called merrily Cloaca Planetarum. It passed sometimes among the number of Imperiall cities, but now acknowledgeth the Elector for the Lord thereof; by whom made an Vniversity, one of the an∣cientest in all Germanie, and of as much resort for the study of good Arts and Sciences, as the best amongst them. 8. Obert-Wesel, or Vesalia Superior, so called to distinguish it from Wesel in the Duke∣dome of Cleve, which is Vesalia inferior, or the Vnder-wesel: the furthest place of this district, seated on the Rhene, not far from Bacebarach, a Town of the Palatinate, of no great note, but that it is accompted for a Town Imperiall.

3. The Bishoprick of MENTZ, is not laid out by bounds and limits as the other; because the Patrimony and estate thereof doth not lie together: dispersed for the most part about Franconia, in∣termixed with the Lands and Towns of the Princes Palatine, the Bishops of Wormes, Spires, and others. So that the temporall Estate of this Electour is every way inferiour unto those of Triers and Colen; su∣periour unto both in place and dignity: he being the first in rank of the whole Electorall Colledge, Chancellour for the Empire, and in all meetings sitteth at the right hand of the Emperour. The Bi∣shops See first placed here, as some report, by S. Crescens, one of the Disciples of S. Paul, of whose be∣ing sent by him into Gallia (for so the Ancient writers understand Galatia) the Apostle speaketh 2 Tim. 4. Though others with more probability seat him at Vienna in Daulphine. But whether it were here or there, certain it is that anciently this City was a See Episcopall, Martin the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Councell of Colen anno 347. And if a Bishop, certainly a Metro∣politan Bishop, this City being in those times the Metropolis of the Province of Germania Prima. But Christianity being worn out of these parts of Germanie, by the conquests of the French, Almans, and other infidels; was again restored in this tract by Boniface, an Englishman, the first Archbishop of Mentz of this new plantation, (in and about the time of Pepin, surnamed the Grosse, Maire of the Pa∣lace to the French Kings, and father of Martell) who for the Orthodoxie of his doctrine, and the number of Churches planted by him, hath been deservedly honoured with the title of the Apostle of Ger∣manie.

Towns of most note belonging to the Bishops hereof are 1. Mentz it self, the Moguntiacum of the An∣tients, so called from the River of Maine formerly Mogus and Moganus in the Latine; now better known by the name of Moenus) opposite to the fall whereof into the Rhene it was built of old, so having the command of both Rivers: for that cause made the seat of a Roman officer, commonly cal∣led the Duke of Mentz, who had a charge of the Frontiers, and especially of those ten Garrisons plan∣ted on the banks of the Rhene, spoken of before. Stretched out in great length on the River side, but not of answerable breadth: well built and populous towards the water, in other parts not so well inhabited. The publick buildings generally very large and beautifull, the houses built according

to the old Roman modell;* 1.32 the most magnificent whereof is the Bishops Palace, who is the immedi∣ate Lord both of the Town and Territory, extended on both sides of the Rhene, fruitfull in all na∣turall commodities, and abounding with most excellent wines. Of good note also for an University here founded by Theodorick, one of the Electours: but especially for the Art of Printing which was here invented, or perfected at the least, and made fit for use. 2. Bing seated on the Rhene, another of the Garrison towns erected by the Romans on the banks of that River. In a small Island of which, not far from this town, is a Tower, or Castlelet, called the Mouseturn, i. e. the tower of Mice: built by one Halto, (or Hanno) Archbishop of Mentz, anno 900, or thereabouts. Who in a yeer of great scarcity pretending to relieve the poor people oppressed with Famine, caused them to be gathered together into an old barn, where he burnt them all; saying they were the Rats and Mice which de∣voured the Corn. After which barbarous act he was so persecuted by those Vermin, that to avoid them, he was fain to build a Palace in the midst of the Rhene; whither the Rats and Mice followed him, and at last devoured him. 3. Lausteine. 4. Hasford. 5. Oxenford. 6. Alderburg. 7. Mid∣dleburg. 8. Ca••lostadt, the birth-place of Carolostadius, of great note in the time of Luther. 9. Bis∣choffstein. 10. Koningsberg, (mons Regius in Latine) the birth-place of Johannes de Monte Regio, a fa∣mous Mathematician, as appeareth by his Comment upon Ptolemies Almagest, most of these in Franken∣land, but of this Electorate.

3. The PALATINATE of the RHENE.

The PALATINATE of the RHENE is situate wholly in Franconia; bounded upon the East with the Dukedome of Wirtenberg, and some part of Franconie; with the residue thereof, and the River Main upon the North; on the South with Elsats, or Alsatia; and on the West, with the land of Triers: extended in length from Coub to Gemersheime, north and south 72 miles; and in breadth from Sweibrucken to Lauden, east and west 90 miles.

It is called also the Lower Palatinate, to difference it from the Palatinate of Bavaria, which is called the Vpper: the Palatinate of the Rhene, because lying on the banks of that famous River. The whole Coun∣try is said to be the most pleasant part of all Germany, stored with all sorts of fruits and metals, abounding with those cool wines, which growing on the banks of the Rhene, have the name of Rhenish, adorned with many goodly Towns both for strength, populousnesse, and beauty; and finally, watered with the famous Rivers of the Rhene, and the Neccar. Chief Towns hereof, 1. M••∣spach, a pretty neat town on the banks of the Neccar, and a Prefecture, not far from the borders of Wirtenberg; 2. Ladenberg, neer the influx of the same River into the Rhene; the moiety whereof was bought by Rupertus Emperour and Palatine, of the Earls of Hohenloe, anno 1371. the other moiety be∣longing to the Bishop of Wormes. 3. Winh••ime, a small town not far from Ladeberg, belonging once to the Arch-bishop of Mentz, but on some controversie arising about the title, adjudged unto the said Rupertus, and his heires for ever. 4. Scriessen in the same tract, well seated, but not very large, sold with the Castle of Straluberg to the said Rupertus, by Sifride (or Sigifride) of Straluberg, the right heir thereof, anno 1347. 5. Heidelberg, on the right shore of the Neccar (going down the water) compassed on three sides with Mountains, and lying open onely towards the West, which makes the air hereof to be very unhealthy. The chief beauty of it lyeth in one long street, ex∣tended in length from East to West: on the South-east side whereof is a fair and pleasant Market-place; and not far off a very high mountain called Koningstall (that is to say, the Kingly Seat) upon the middle ascent whereof is the Castle, where the Princes Electours use to keep their Courts; and on the very summit or top thereof, the ruines of an old Tower blown up with gun-powder. A town of no great bignesse, nor very populous, there being but one Church in it, which was used in the time of my Author for Prayer and Preaching: the rest being either ruined, or imployed unto other uses, if not repaired again since the Spaniards became masters of it, for more frequent Masses. How∣soever it hath the reputation of being the chief City of this Palatinate: not long since furnished with a great and gallant Library, which for choice, and number of Books (especially Manuscripts) was thought not to be fellowed in all Europe, (till matched, if not over-matched by the famous Bodleian Library of Oxford:) most of them to the great prejudice of the Protestant cause, being carryed to Rome, and other places of that party, when the town was taken by the Spaniards, anno 1620. Finally for the town it self, it was once part of the possessions of the Bishop of Wormes; from whom it was taken by the Palatines; it is now famous, for being the seat of the Palsgraves, the sepulchre of Rodolphus A∣gricola, and for an University founded by the Emperour, and Palatine Rupertus, anno 1346. 6. Baccha∣rach, on the banks of Rhene, so called quasi Bacchi ara, for the excellent wines. 7. Coub on the other side of the water; near unto which is the old and fair Castle called Psalts, from whence the name Psalts-grave, or Palsgrave, seemeth to some to have been derived. 8. Openheim, a strong town, which together with Keisers, Lauterne and Ingelheim, were given to the Palatines by Wenceslaus: and after set∣led on them, by Rupertus the Emperour and Palatine, for 100000 Florens, anno 1402. 9. Cruintznacke, called antiently Stauronesus. 10. Frankendale; lately a Monastery onely, but being peopled by such of the Netherlands, which to avoid the fury of Duke Alva, fled hither; is now a town of prin∣cipall strength. 11. Germersheim, and 12. Manheim, a well fortified town, seated on the confluence of Rhene and Neccar.

On the Eastern part of the Country standeth 13 Laden, situate on the little River Tiberus, the fur∣thest bound of the Palatinate towards the North-east, there ad••oyning to the rest of Frankenland. And on the west side the Townes of 14 Newstat, 15 Keisars Lautern, in Latine called Caesarea Lutra, once a town Imperiall, from which, and from its situation on the River Luter, it received this name. 16. Sweibrueken, the title of a younger house of the ••saltsgraves, whom the Latine writers call Prin••lpes Bipontani: the French, the Princes of Deuxpon••s. 17. Sin••neren on the north-west point of it, where it meets with the District of Triers; the title of another Branch of the Palatine Family, called the Dukes of Sin••neren. In all there are contained within this Palatinate 24 walled Towns, and 12 fair Palaces of the Prince: most of which they have added to their estate within little more then 400 yeers. Such excellent managers have they been of their own estates, so potent in ordering the affaires of the Empire both in war and peace; and so ingrafled themselves into the most no∣ble Families of Germany, that I may well say with Irenicus, Non est alia Germaniae familia, cui plus de∣beat nobilitas.

Within the limits of this Country, and intermingled with the lands of the Princes Palatine, are the Bishopricks of Spires and Wormes; both ancient, and of great Revenue, but feudataries for a great part of their estates to these Electors. Of these more towards the head of the Rhene, stands the City of Spires, by Ptolomy called Ne••magus, from the newnesse of the building when that name was given; by Antoninus, Civitas Nemetum, from the Nemetes, who possessed this tract; and sometimes Spira, by which name it doth still continue. A town Imperiall, and antiently a Bishops See; Tessis the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Councell of Colen, anno 347. A neat Town, and very delectably seated. Of great resort by reason of the Imperiall Chamber, the soveraign Court of Judicature of all the Empire; capable of Appeals from the Tribunals of all the Princes, and free States thereof. A Court which first followed the Emperour in all his Removes (as antiently the Kings Bench in Eng∣land) by Maximilian the Emperour first made Sedentary, and fixt at Frankfort; removed after to Wormes, and finally to this City by Charles the fift. Sufficiently famous in that the name of Protestants was here taken up, given to the Princes, and free Cities following the Reformed Religion, upon their legall Protestation here exhibited. More down the water in the same shore thereof, stands the City of Wormes, one of those built upon the Rhene, for defence of Gaul against the Germans; by Ptolomy cal∣led Borbegomagus; by Antonine, Civitas Wormensis, whence the modern name; but generally Civitas Vangionum, from the Vangiones the old inhabitants of those parts, whose chief City it was. A town Imperiall as the former, and a See Episcopall as that is, and as ancient too; Victor the Bishop hereof subscribing to the Acts of the Councel of Colen before mentioned. A town to be observed for the first appearance which Luther made before Charles the fift, (the Imperiall Chamber then being holden in this City) who being disswaded from that journey by some of his friends, returned this resolute answer to them, That goe he would, though there were as many devills in the town, as there were tiles on the houses. Chief towns belonging to these Bishops, are 1 Vdenheim, a town belonging to the Bishop of Spires, whose residence it sometimes is: conveniently seated for the command of the Country, and therefore upon some designe which was then in hand, fortified strongly by the Bishop. But this new Fortification being begun in a time of peace, gave great occasion of distrust to the neighbouring Prin∣ces; who interposed with Frederick the fift, then Prince Elector (of whom held in chief) to cause the Bishop to desist from the finishing of it. Which when he refused to doe, pleading a Placard from the Emperour Matthias to compleat the work; the Prince Electour, with the rest of the Confederates, beat it down by force: for this contempt, cited to Spires the Imperiall Chamber, in which it was also resolved to proceed suddenly, and severely to their condemnation. One of the chief motives which occasioned that unfortunate Prince, to entertain the offer of the Crown of Bohemia; and conse∣quently a chief cause of the German wars. In managing whereof this town was thought so commodious, that Marquis Spinola caused the works to be raised again, made it the strongest hold in all those Countries, and caused it to be called by the name of Philipsberg. 3. Rotenberg originally be∣longing to the Bishops of Spires, but of late times possessed by the Princes Palatine. Others of lesser slote I forbear to mention.

The first Inhabitants of this Country on the French side of the Rhene, were the Nemetes, and Van∣giones spoken of before; on the other side, the Intuergi. First conquered by the Romans, and from them conquered by the French; of whose Empire it remained a part, till dismembred from it at the erection of the Kingdome of Lorrain, in the fall whereof it was annexed to the Empire of Germany. By little and little got into the hands of the Princes Palatine, who being originally Officers of the Emperours houshold (such as the Maires of the Palace to the French Kings at the first institution) had first the honour of Counts Palatine bestowed upon them; and afterwards the place of an Electour in the choice of the Emperour. But where their Estate then lay, where they fixed their dwelling, and what provinces or people they had subject to them, a nullo inveni scriptum, I could never find any good Record to build on, saith the learned Munster: their habitation and possession in and of these parts, (acquired for the most part by Armes and Money) not being above 450 years standing at the utmost. Likely it is, they had their residence for the most part in the Emperours Palace, living up∣on their rents, (as other great officers of Court in these later times) the dignity and authority of so great a place seeming sufficient to content them: but called Count Palatines of the Rhene, because their Jurisdiction and Authority lay most especially in those parts of the Empire which were towards that River: Afterwards on the marriage of Otho, the second of that name Duke of Bavaria, with Gertrude, the daughter of Henry the Elector Palatine; this office with the Electorall dignity fell into

that house, possessed at that time of those parts of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which not long after on the dividing of that estate betwixt Rodolphus and Ludo••••ous, the son of ••udovick the 2. Electour Palatine, and Duke of Bavaria, made up this Palatinate. A State which suddenly received a great augmentation, partly by the care and good husbandry of Rupertus, Emperour and Electour Palatine; partly by the weak∣nesse and ambition of Wenceslaus Emperour and King of Bohemia; and partly by the valour of Frede∣rick, the Prince Electour. Of these the first bought in the townes of Winheim, Ladeberg, and Scriessen, with the Castle of Stralnberg, with their lands and territories. The second gave unto the Palatines for their voices in his election, three strong towns of the Empire, viz. Keisars Lauterne, Ingelheim, and Openkeim: and the last took in battle, anno 1452. the Earl of Wirtenberg, the Marquesse of Baden, the Bishop of Spires, and the Archbishop of Mentz, and ransomed them on what condition he pleased. More particularly the Earl of Wirtenberg (for it was not yet erected into a Dukedome) payed for his ransome 100000 Florens; the Bishop of Mentz redeemed himself for 450000 Florens. The Bishop of Spires gave for his liberty, the towns of Rottenberg and Wersaw: and the Marquesse of Baden yeelded up in lieu of his freedome, the Country of Spanheim, of which Cruitznack is a part; the towns of Besiken, and Binheim; the right which he pretended to Eppingen, a town over against Gemersheim; and his royalties between this Gemersheim and Selts a town of Alsatia, in fishing and hunting. So having brought these Princes unto their Estate; let us next take a view of those who have successively enjoyed both the State and Title, as far as we can goe by the light of Story.

ELECTORS Palatine of the RHENE.

• A. Ch.
• 1. Henry Count of Palatine in the time of Otho the third, by whom ordained to be one of the six Electors.
• 2 Sigefride, the sonne of Adelheild, wife of this Henry the Electour, by a former hus∣band.
• 3 Ezeline and Conrade, sonnes of Sigefride.
• 4 Ludoifus, son to Ezeline.
• 5 Conrade, Elector Palatine in the time of Henry the fift.
• 6 Frederick, sonne to Frederick Duke of Schawben, Nephew to the Emperour Conrade the third.
• 7 Henry II. surnamed the Lyon, Duke of Saxonie and Bavaria.
• 1195 8 Henry III. sonne of Henry the Lyon, and husband of Clementia, daughter of Conrade Duke of Schawben, and Elector Palatine.
• 9 Henry IV. sonne of Henry the third, in the life of his Father; the last Elector Palatine of the nomination and appointment of the Emperour, the dignity from hence for∣wards becoming hereditary.
• 10 Otho, Duke of Bavaria of that name the second, Electour Palatine of the Rhene, in right of Gertrude his wife, sister and next heir of Henry the fourth, whom he succeeded in the Electorall dignity, confirmed therein by the Emperour Frederick the second.
• 1269 11 Ludovicus Electour Palatine, and Duke of Bavaria, the son of Otho.
• 1294 12 Rodolphus the eldest son of Lewis or Ludovicus, succeeded his Father in the Palatinate and Electorall dignity: Northgoia, or the Palatinate of Bavaria, being added to his part, to make even the scale; his younger brother Ludovicus succeeding in Ba∣varia.
• 1315 13 Adolphus, surnamed the Simple, resigned the Electorall dignity to his brother Rodolphus, as the fitter man to undertake it.
• 1327 14 Rodolphus II. on the resignation of Adolphus.
• 1337 15 Rupertus, the brother of Rodolphus the second, founder of the University of Heidelberg, anno 1346.
• 1385 16 Rupertus II. sonne of Adolfus the Simple.
• 1398 17 Rupertus III. elected Emperour in the place of Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, anno 1406, made Knight of the Garter by King Henry the fourth.
• 1410 18 Ludovious II. surnamed Caecus, and Barbatus, married Blanch, daughter to King Henry the fourth of England.
• 1439 19 Lud••vicus III. son of Lewis the second.
• 1451 20 Frederick, brother of Ludovicus, during the minority of Philip his said brothers sonne, succeeded in the Electorall dignity; and added much to that Estate by his personall vertue.
• 1478 21 Philip, the sonne of Lewis the third, pretended to the Dukedome of Bavaria in right of Margaret his wife; but after a long, and bloudy war forced to go without it.
• 1508 22 Ludovicus IV. son of Philip.
• 1544 23 Frederick II. brother of Lewis the fift, who first introduced the Reformed Religion into the Palatinate.
• ...

• 1556 24 Otho-Henry,* 1.33 son of Rupertus the Brother of Frederick, and Lewis the last of the direct line of this house of Bavaria.
• 1559 25 Frederick III. Duke of Simmeren, descended from Stephen Palatine of Zweybruck or Bipont, younger son of the Emperour Rupert, succeeded on the decease of Otho-Henry without issue.
• 1576 26 Ludovicus V. son of Frederick the third, a munificent benefactour to the University of Heidelberg.
• 1483 27 Frederick IV. son of Lewis the fift, married Ludoriea, or Loise, daughter of William, and sister of Maurice, Princes of Orange.
• 1610 28 Frederick V. married the Princesse Elizabeth daughter of James, King of Great Britain. In danger of being proscribed for demolishing the works of Ʋdenheim he accepted the Crown of Bohemia, but worsted at the battle of Prague, and warred upon by the Bavarian and the Spaniard, he lost both that, and his own native Estates and Dignities; of which deprived by Ferdinand the prevailing Emperour: the Lower Palatinate being assigned over to the King of Spain, the Vpper Palatinate with the Electorall dignity to the Duke of Bavaria. Restored to the possession of the most part of his Country, by the power of the Swedes, he dyed at Mentz, Novem∣ber 19. 1632.
• 1632 29 Charles Ludovick, the heir both of his Fathers Estates, and misfortunes too, not yet ad∣mitted to his honours (contrary to the fundamentall constitutions of the Empire, by which the sons of the Electours and other Princes are not involved in the guilt of their Fathers offences) but in fair hopes to be restored thereto in part, by the Pa∣cifications made at Munster this present year, 1648. which I pray God to prosper for the peace of afflicted Christendome.

The Religion of this Country hath much varied since the first Reformation, established by Frede∣rick the second, according to the forme and doctrine of the Confession of Auspurg: the doctrine and discipline of Calvin being introduced by Frederick the third; the Lutherans formes restored again by Lewis, or Ludovick the fift; after his death exchanged by Frederick the fourth for that of Calvin; as more conducing to the ends of some needy Statists, who could not otherwise raise their fortunes then by invading the Tithes and Glebe, and other poor remainders of the Churches Patrimony. Of which the Clergie being universally deprived throughout this Country, and reduced to miserable short stipends by the name of a Competency, became so contemptible, and neglected by all sorts of men, that at the last the Church of the Palatinate was in the same condition with the Church of Israel under the reign of Ieroboam; when Priests were made out of the meanest of the people. And for the Go∣vernment of their Churches, though moulded to the Genevian plat-form, as neer as might be; yet were those Princes loath to leave too much power in the hands of the Elderships; and therefore did appoint some superiour officers to have an eye on them, whom they called Inspectores & Praepositos, their power being much the same with that of the particular Superintendent amongst the Lutherans; and over them a standing Consistory consisting of three Ministers, and as many Counsellers of State, of the Princes nominating, who in his name were to take care of all things which concerned the Church. A temperament for which they were beholding to Erastus, a Doctour of Physick in the Uni∣versity of Heidelberg, who made this Pill to purge Presbytery of some Popish humours, which secretly lay hid in the body of it. But this whole modell is now changed, and the Religion of the Church of Rome restored in most parts of the Country, since the conquest of it by the Spaniard, none being pub∣lickly authorized and allowed but that.

But to return again to the Civill State, and the Concernments of these Princes, The Palsgrave hath many prerogatives above the Electours of either sort. He taketh place of the Duke of Saxony, and Marquesse of Brandenburg; because Henry the Palatine, was descended of Charles the great: for which cause he is also in the vacancy of the Empire, Governour of the Western parts of Germany; in which office he had power to alienate, or give offices, to take fealty and homage of the subjects; and which is most, to fit in the Imperiall Courts, and give judgment of the Emperour himself. And look whatsoever shall in the vacancy of the Empire, be by the Palatines enacted, that the new Empe∣rours are bound by Oath to confirme, and ratifie.

The Revenues of these Princes were conceived to be about 100000 l. per annum: nor could they be supposed at lesse; the silver Mines about Amberg onely in the upper Palatinate, yeelding 60000 Crownes a yeer, and the passage of one Bridge over the Rhene about 20000 Crowns more; besides the demeasne Lands, and the Lands of the Church incorporated (since the Reformation) into their Estate.

The Armes hereof are Diamond, a Lyon Topace, Armed and Crowned Ruby.

4. ALSATIA.* 1.34

ALSATIA or ELSATS, as the Dutch call it, is bounded on the East with the Rhene, which parteth it from the Marquisate of Baden, and some part of Schwaben; on the West with the Mountain Vauge, or Vogesus, which separateth it from Lorrain; on the North with the Palatinate; on the South (where it groweth very narrow) with a point of Switzerland. A Country for the pleasantnesse and fertilitie of it, inferiour to none in Germanie; called therefore Elsats, (as some think) quast Edelsats; that is to say, a noble Seat: derived more probably by others from the river Ill, the only River of note in all this tract, and called so, quasi Ill-sats, the seat or situation on the River Ill.

It is divided generally into the Lower and higher, to which the Countrie called Sungow may come in for a third. The LOWER ALSATIA is that which bordereth on the Palatinate, so called because further off from the Mountains, and down the water in respect of the course of the Rhene. A Countrie so aboundantly fruitfull in wine and corn, (with which it furnisheth some parts of Ger∣ma••y, and not a few of the neighbour Countries) that it is generally called Germaniae nutrix, or the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of Germanie; by Winphelegius the Epitome or Abstract of it. Chief towns therein are 1 Stras∣burg, so called from the multitude of Streets (the Dutch call them Strats) anciently Argentoratum, and then Argentina, from the Roman Exchequer, or Receipt here kept in the time of their greatnesse; or from some Mines of silver which were found about it. A stately, rich, and populous Citie, well sto∣r••d with publick garners and cellars of wine, against times of dearth: Situate on the two Rivers Ill and Brusch, where they both fall into the Rhene; by which and by the helps of Art very strongly for∣tified: designed from the first foundation for a Town of war, this being another of the towns which the Romans built to defend the Rhene against the Germans. Now an Imperiall Citie, and a See Epi∣scopal, the Bishop whereof is Lord of the Lower Alsatia; the Church Cathedral, one of the fairest in all Germanie: much famed for a Clock of most admirable workmanship, and a Steeple of as curious a frame as that, mounted 574 foot in height, the highest of any in Christendome, higher by 40 foot then the Steeple of S. Pauls in London, before the firing of it. Of this thus saith the Poet in Adr••anus.

Vrbs praetlara situ, ripis contermina Rheni, Maxima cui celsae metiuntur moenia turris.

Strasburg on Rhenes inamell'd banks doth lie, Whose Tower even bids defiance to the skie.

2 Zabern, or Elsatz Savern, the Tabernae of Antonine and Marcellinus, another of the old Roman Garri∣sons, destroyed by the Almans, and repaired again by Julian the Apostata then Emperour. Now the chief place of Residence for the Bishops of Strasburg, and well frequented in regard of the Courts of Justice kept by his Officers in this Citie for the Lower Alsatia. 3 Altrip, so called from Alta ripa, from the high banks of the river on which it is seated; another of the Towns or Forts which the ••omans like politick conquerours built on the West side of the Rhene, to prohibit the incursions of the barbarous Nations, as was also 4 Selts, seated on the Rhene betwixt Strasburg and Zabern; and 5 Weissenberg, more towards the Palatinate, now a town Imperiall, but seated on the river Lutra not far ••••om its fall into the Rhene; encompassed with little hils and delightfull groves, the River gently washing the walks thereof, and adding much to it both of strength and beautie. 6 Hagenaw, between Selis and Strasburg, but not so near unto the Rhene as either of them, first walled by Frederick Barba∣ressa anno 1164. and since that time of great importance for command of the Countrie: but seated in a ••tandie and unfruitfull soil, frequented chiefly heretofore by the old Lantgraves of Elsars for the commodities of hunting. More from the Rhene, 7 Stechfield, corruptly so called for Steffansfield, from the Monasterie of S. Stephen there founded. 8 Hasle on the Brusch, &c.

Places of most importance in the HIGHER ALSATIA, are 1 Rufach on the river Ombach, belonging to the Bishops of Strasburg, of old called Rubeacum, from the red colour of the earth, well ••uilt, invironed with a double Suburb; in ancient times of great resort by the Roman Nobilitie, much taken with the fruitfulnesse and pleasures of it: and well inhabited at this day, as is all the Countrie round about it, by reason of their vigorous proceedings against Theeves; from whence 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Germans have a Proverb, that the old gallows at Ruffach is made of oak. 2 Ensheim or Ensisheim, on the river Ill, anciently the station of the tenth Legion, and then called Aruncis; now of most note for the ••••preme Court of justice there held for Brisgow, Sungow, and this part of Alsatia, by the Archdukes of Austria, the chief Lords thereof. 3 Colmar, an Imperiall Citie, raised out of the ruines of old Argen∣ta••ia, destroyed by Attila and the Huns: well built and situate almost in the very Navell of Alsatia, not above an hours journey from the foot of the Mountains, but in a fruitfull and rich soil both for corn and pasturage, the Countrie hereabouts being very well watred with the Louch, Duro, Fecht, and Ill. 4 Sch••estad, in the modern Latine, Selestadium, but by the ancients called Elcebas, the station at that time of the 19. Legion, afterwards of great fame for a Church here built by Hildegardis Dut∣chesse of Schwaben, anno 1044. according to the pattern of the Temple of Hierusalem: which in tract of time became the richest Monasterie in all these parts. Situate in a very fertile and delightfull soil,

having the Rhene on the one side, and some spurs of the Mountaine Vauge shadowed with Groves of Chesnuts upon the other: walled in the time of Frederick the 2. about the year 1216. and on the East defended with impassible fenns. 5 Gebwiser, and 6 Watwell, both seated near the aforesaid Mountains, and both subject to the Abbat of Murbach. 7 Keisersberg, 8 Turchein, two Imperiall towns, but not otherwise memorable; as neither are many of the rest, but for name and number; there being rec∣koned within this small Province of Elsats, (not including Sungow) 46 Cities and Townes begirt with walls, besides Castles, Forts and Villages, almost innumerable; and amongst them more Free and Imperiall Cities, then in any one Province of the Empire.

The Southern part of Elsats bordering on the Canton of Basil, is commonly called by the name of Sungow, in Latine, Sungovia, and Sungoia: but in former times the Dukedom of Pfirts, from Pfirt the chief town of it, and the Dukes seat: the Countrie very ploutifull in corn and wine (as the rest of Elsats) affording good store of each to the neighbouring Switz••rs. Chief Towns hereof, are 1 Mul∣hansen on the river Ill, heretofore under the command of the Bishops of Strasburg, as were also Keisers∣b••rg, and Colmar, but being taken in by Rodolph of Habspurgh, after his advancement to the Empire it was made Imperiall, and is now confederate with the Switzers. 2 Befort, remarkable for a Collegiate Church there founded by the Earls of Pfirt, in which lye buried 13 Earls, and as many Countesses. 3 Malz-munster, so called from a Monasterie of Nuns there founded by Maso a Prince of the old Almans. 4 Thann, a neat Town beautified with the fair Castle of Engleberg, mounted upon the top of a lofty hill. 5 Mors-munster, so named of an ancient Monasterie there founded by the Earls of Pfirt, most of them great builders of Religious houses. 6 Altkirk, not far from the head of the river Ill. 7 Pfirt it self, seated on the Ill not far from Altkirk, in a countrie heretofore over-grown with Woods and Forres••s, whence it had the name; called by the French le Pais de Ferrette (corruptly for le Pais de For∣rest) by the Dutch moulded into Pfirt: by which name (of the Countie of Ferrette) it is called by Philip de Comines, and other French writers, and by that name was pawned by Sigismund the Arch∣duke, to Charls Duke of Burgundie, made by that means too near a neighbour to the Switzers, as it pro∣ved in fine.

Westward hereof, betwixt it and the Countie of Burgundie, lyeth the Towne and Earldome of Montb••lgard (Montis belligardium in the Latine) united by the marriage of Henrica, daughter and heir of Henry the first Earl hereof anno 1396. to the house of Wirtenberg. Chief Towns whereof, are 1 Clare∣wang, 2 Passewang, 3 Grans, all antiently beautified with Castles; and 4 Montbelgard, a Town of great strength, proud of a Castle Royall on the top of a fair and lofty Mountain, whence it took that name; once the seat of its proper Earls, as after of the Princes of the house of Wirtenberg: but now both town and Castle in the power of the French, who after their good luck in the Dukedom of Lorrain, caused a good Garrison of their own to be put into them, anno 1633. under pretence of keeping them for the Children of a Brother of the Duke of Wirtenbergs, to whom the inheritance be∣longed.

The antient Inhabitants of this tract were the Tribochi, with parts of the Nemetes and Rauraci; first conquered by the Romans, then subdued by the Almains, after by the French, and by them made a part of the Kingdome of Lorrain: in the full of which Kingdom it was reckoned for a Province of the German Empire. Governed for the Emperours by Provinciall Earls, in the Dutch language cal∣led Landgraves, at first officiarie only, and accomptable to the Emperours under whom they served; in the end made hereditarie and successionall unto their posterities. The first hereditarie Landgrave said to be Theodorick, in the reign of Otho the third; after whose death the Empire being made ele∣ctive, gave the Provinciall Governours some opportunities to provide for themselves. In his male-is∣sue it continued till the reign of Frederick the 2. who began his Empire anno 1212, and dyed anno 1250. during which intervall this Estate was conveyed by daughters to Albert the 2. Earl of Habs∣purg, Albert Earl of Hobenburg, and Lewis Earl of Ottingen. Rodolph of Habspurg son of this Albert, after∣wards Emperour of the Germans, marrying with Anne the daughter of the Earl of Hohenlbe, became possessed also of his part of the Countrie: which added to his own, made up the whole Vpper Elsats, continued since that time in possession of the house of Austria descended from him. The third part comprehending all the Lower Alsatia, was not long after sold by the Earl of Ottingen to the Bishop of Strasburg, whose Successours hold it to this day, assuming to themselves the title of the Landgraues of Elsats. But as for Sungow or the Countie of Pfirt, that belonged anciently to the Princes of the house of Schwaben: in the expiring of which potent and illustrious Familie, by the death of Conradine the last Duke, anno 1268. that great estate being scattered into many hands, it was made a distinct Earldom of it self. And so continued till the year 1324. when Vlrich the last Earl dying with∣out issue male, left his estate betwixt two daughters, whereof the one named Anne, conveyed her part in marriage to Albert Duke of Austria, surnamed the Short, Grandchild of Rodolphus the Emperor before mentioned; the other named Vrsula, sold her moietie to the said Albert for 8000 Crowns. Since that it hath been alwayes in the possession of the Dukes of Austria, (save only for the time in which it was pawned or mortgaged, together with Alsatia, to the Duke of Burgundie) governed in Civill mat∣ters and points of Judicature, by the Parliament, or Court of Ensbeim in the Vpper Elsats.

5. LORRAIN.* 1.35

The Dukedom of LORRAIN, is bounded on the East with Elsats; on the West with the Country of Barrois in France, (belonging to the Dukes hereof, and the rest of Champagne; on the North with Luxembourg, and the land of Triers; and on the South with the County of Burgundy: from which and from the Province of Elsats parted by the Vogesus or Vauge, wherewith incompassed on those sides. Assigned unto Lotharius, eldest son of Lewis the Godly, with the stile of a Kingdome: from thence called Lot-reich by the Dutch, Lot-regne by the French, from which the modern name of Lorrain, and the Latine, Lotharingia, are to fetch their Pedegree.

The Countrey is in length about four dayes journey, almost three in breadth: much over∣grown with Forrests, and swelled with Mountains; the spurs and branches of Vogesus, and the once vast Wildernesse of Ardenne; yet so sufficiently stored with all manner of necessaries, that it need∣eth no supply out of other places. Some lakes it hath which yeeld great quantity of fish; one more especially 14 miles in compasse, the fish whereof yeelds to the Dukes coffers 20000 l. yeerly, it affordeth also divers metals, as Silver, Copper, Tin, Iron, Lead, in some places Pearls: Calcidonians also of such bignesse that whole drinking cups are made of them; and a matter of which they make the purest glasses not to be paralleld in Europe. They have also a goodly breed of Horses, equall to those of Barbary, or the courser of Naples.

The people by reason of their neighbourhood to, and commerce with France, strive much to imitate the French in garb and fashion; but one may easily see that it is not naturall; and have much in them also of the Dutch humour of drinking, but far more moderately then the Dutch themselves: Generally they are a politick and an hardy Nation; not otherwise able to have held their estate so long against the French Kings and the Princes of the house of Burgundy. They lived very happily in former times under their own Dukes, not being at all oppressed with taxes; which made them very affectionate towards the Prince; and usefull unto one another. Their language for the most part French, as in Artois, Luxembourg, Triers, and other of the bordering Provinces, members of the French Monarchy in former times: not so refined and elegant as is spoke in France, nor so corrupt and course as that of Montbelgard, and the the County of Burgundy.

The rivers of chief note, are 1. Marta, or the Meurte, which receiving into it many Rivers, and passing with a swift stream by the wals of Nancie, glides along fairely for a good space within sight of the Moselle, into which at last it fals near Conde. 2 Mosa, the Meuse or Maes, whose spring and course hath been already described in Belgium. 3 Moselle, famous for the designe which Lucius Verus Governour for the Emperour Nero, had once upon it. For whereas it ariseth in the mountain Vauge, not far from the head of the river Soasne, and disburdeneth it self into the Rhene at Confluence: he intended to have cut a deep channell from the head of this unto the other; so to have made a passage from the Ocean to the Mediterranean: the Soasne emptying it self into the Rhosne (a chief River of France) as the Moselle doth into the Rhene. 4 Selle, which mingleth waters with the Moselle not farre from Mets. 5 Sora. 6 Martane. 7 Voloy, others of lesse note; all of them plentifull of Salmons, Perches, Tenches, and the best sorts of fish: as in their Lakes great store of Carps, some of them three foot long and of excellene tast.

Principall Cities are in it are 1 Mets, by Ptolemie called Divodurum; Metis, & Civitas Mediomatricum by Antoninus, the chief City of the Mediomatrices who possessed this tract. Seated in the pleasant plain at the confluence of the Sore and Moselle: the Royall Sea, in former times, of the French Kings of Austrasia, hence called Kings of Mets; long before that a Bishops See, as it still continueth. 2 Toul, the Tullum of Ptolemie, the Civitas Leucorum of Antoninus, so called from the Leuci, the In∣habitants of it, and the tract about it: pleasantly seated on the Moselle, and antiently honoured with a See Episcopall. 3 Verdun, an antient Episcopall See also, the Civitas Verodonensiam of An∣toninus, seated on the Meuse or Maes: the Bishop whereof, as also those of Mets and Toul (being the onely ones of this Countrey of Lorrain) acknowledge the Archbishops of Triers for their Metro∣politan. All of them in the number (heretofore) of Imperiall Cities, possessed of large and goodly territories, and of great revenue: but taken by the French King Henry the second, anno 1552. during the wars between Charles the fift and the Protestant Princes of Germany, under colour of aiding them against the Emperour. And though Charles tryed all wayes to recover them to the Em∣pire againe, and to that end maintained a long and desperate siege against the City of Mets: yet was the Town so gallantly defended by the Duke of Guise, that he was fain to raise his siege, and goe off with dishonour. Since that, they have been alwayes under the subjection of France; a Parliament being erected at Mets for the ease of the people, as in other Provinces of that Kingdome.

Of such Towns as immediately belonged to the Duke of Lorrain, the principall are Nancey, not great, but of a pleasant and commodious site: well watered by the river Meurte or Marta; and fortified better then before, in the year 1587. on occasion of a great Army of the Germans passing into France to aid the Protestants: most commonly the Dukes seat, and famous for the dis∣comfiture which Charles Duke of Burgundy here suffered with the losse of his life. 2. St N••∣c••las, a town so populous, well seated, and neatly built; that were it walled, it would hardly yeeld

preceedency to Nancie. It took name from the body of Saint Nicolas, here buryed, whose reliques have purchased no small reputation and riches to this town. 3 Vaucoleur, the birth-place of Joane the Virgin, to whose miracles and valour, the French attribute the delivery of their coun∣trey from the power of the English: but being at last taken prisoner, she was by the Duke of Bed∣ford then Regent of France, condemned and burned for a Witch. Of which crime I for my part doe conceive her free. Nor can I otherwise conceive of her and her brave exploits, then of a lusty lasse of Lorrain, tutored and trained up by the practise of the Earl of Dunois commonly called the Ba∣stard of Orleans; and so presented to Charles the seventh, French King, as if sent immediately from Heaven. A project carryed on of purpose (as the most intelligent of the French writers say) Pour fair revenir la courage aux Francois, to revive the drooping spirits of the beaten French, not to bee raised againe but by help of a miracle. Upon the sight of her Statua on the bridge of Orleans, a friend of mine did adventure on a copy of verses in her commendation, too long to be inserted here▪ but they ended thus.

She di'd a Virgin; 'Twas because the earth Bred not a man whose valour and whose birth Might merit such a blessing. But above The Gods provided her an equall Love, And gave her to Saint Denys. She with him Protects the Lilies, and their Diadem. You then about whose Armies she doth watch, Give her the honour due unto her match. And when in field your standards you advance, Cry loud, Saint Denys and Saint Joan for France.

Townes of lesse note are 4 P••nt a Moson, so called from a bridge on the River Moson with a small University. 5 Vandemont which gave a title of an Earl to a younger branch of the house of Lor∣rain. 6 Neauf-Chatteau, on the edge of the Countrey towards Barrois. 7 Amance, seven leagues on the South of Mets, sometimes the Chancery of Lorrain. 8 Riche Court, neer the Lake called Gar∣de-lake, out of which floweth a River which runs into the Meurte. 9 La Mothe, seated on a River which fals presently into the Moselle. 10 Churmes, the place of treaty between the Duke of Lor∣rain and the Cardinall of Richelieu, the result whereof was the surrender of the town of Nancie, and by consequence of all the Dukedome into the hands of the French, Septemb. 1633. Of lesse note there are 1 Saint Die, 2 Saint Hippolit, 3 Bouquenon, and 4 Saverden; the first towns of this Dukedome taken by the Swedes, anno 1633. in the warre against Lorrain. 5 Saint Miel, 6 Oden-Chasteau, 7, Mirecour; all taken the same yeere by the French, in the prosecution of that war, be∣fore the treaty at Charmes. 8 Romberville, 9 Espinul, 10 Gerbrevillier, &c.

The old Inhabitants of this Countrey were the Mediomatrices, and the Leuci spoken of before, together with the Vindonenses, all of them conquered by the Romans, under whom this Countrey and the District of Triers made up the whole Province of Belgica Prima. From them being taken by the French with the rest of Gaule, it was made a Kingdome, the Provinces of Germania Prima & Secunda, (containing all the parts of Germany before described, and so much of the Netherlands, as lye on the Westside of the Rhene) being added to it, called first from the Eastern situation by the name of Austenreic or Austrasia the portion of Theodorick the fourth sonne of Clovis the first Christian King of the French, from the chief City of his Kingdome called the King of Mets, whose successours follow in this order.

The KINGS of AVSTRASIA or METS.

• 514 1 Theodorick the base sonne of Clovis the Great vanquished the Turingians, and ex∣tended his Kingdome as far as Hassia and Turingia, as we call them now,
• 537 2 Theodebert the sonne of Theodorick, repulsed the Danes infesting the coasts of the Lower Germany; and added Provence (taken from the Gothes of Italy) unto his Estates.
• 548 3 Theobaldus the sonne of Theodebert, subdued the Almans, and added much of their Coun∣trey to his own Dominions.
• 555 4 Clotaire King of Soissons the youngest sonne of Clovis the Great, succeeded Theobald in this Kingdome, as afterwards his brother Childebert in the Realm of France, anno 560. uniting in his person the whole French Dominion.
• 565 5 Sigebert the sonne of Clotaire, vanquished the Hunnes, then falling into his Estates: killed in his Tent by the practises of Fredegond, the wife of Chilperick King of France.
• 577 6 Childebert the sonne of Sigebert, successour to his Uncle Guntrum in the Realm of Or∣leans.
• 598 7 Theodebert the II. the sonne of Childebert, vanquished and outed of his Kingdome by Clotaire the second of France: from whose eldest sonne Sigebert descended the illu∣strious family of the Earls of Habsburg.
• ...

• 617 8 Clotaire the II. King of France, on the death of Theodebert King of Austrasia, and his bro∣ther Theodorick King of Orleans, the sole King of the French.
• 9 Dagobert, in the life of his Father King of Mets or Austrasia, whom he succeeded, at his death, in the Realm of France.
• 645 10 Sigebert II. the eldest son of Dagobert, made choise of this kingdome, for his part of the whole French Empire; therein preferring it to West-France, or France it self, which he left to Clovis the 2. his younger Brother. He brought the Suevians to obedience and subdued the Sclaves.
• 656 11 Childebert II. son of Grimoaldus, Mayre of the Palace to Sigebert, was by the power of his Father made King of Mets; Dagobert the son of Sigebert being shorn a Monk, and sent into Scotland.
• 12 Clovis the 2. King of the French, having vanquished and beheaded Grimoald, dispossessed Childebert of the Kingdome, which he took himself.
• 662 13 Childerick the 2. son of Clovis, after the death of Clotaire his elder Brother, succeeding in the Kingdome of France united all the French Dominions into one Estate. In which condition it remained (but with some inlargement of the bounds) till the partition made by and amongst the Children of Lewis the Godly; the name of Austrasia or East-France, being extended by Charles the Great, over all Pannonia, and so much of Germa∣nie as was under the command of the French. In which division, Lewis the 2. sonne, surnamed the Ancient, being invested in the Kingdome of Germanie, or so much of East-France or Austrasia as lay on the East side of the Rhene: Lotharius the eldest sonne had for his share the title of Emperour, and therewith Italy, Provence, Burgundie, and so much of Austrasia or East-France, as lay on the French side of the River. Afterwards subd••vided into three Estates; Italie with the title of Roman Emperour, being given to Lewis the eldest son, to Charles the youngest Provence, with the Kingdome of Bur∣gundie; and to Lothaire the second son Austrasia on this side of the Rhene, from hence called Lot-reich, Lot-regne, and Lotharingia, as before was said. But Lothaire dying without issue, the Kingdome of Lorrain containing all the Netherlands (except Flan∣ders and Artois) and all the parts of Germanie before described, became divided betwixt the Kings of France, and the German Emperours: each taking to themselves the title of Kings of Lorrain, the River Meuse or Mosa parting their possessions. But in the end, after much vicissitude and interchangeablenesse of affairs; both Princes laid aside the title of Kings; incorporating so much as they held hereof into the rest of their Estates: Otho the third of Germanie, and Lewis the fift of France, being the last that pleased themselves with that broken title. In the mean time, this Countrey of Lor∣rain it self, together with some part of the Land of Triers, Bovillon, Gulick, Luickland, and Brabant, being taken out of the rest, were by Otho the second made a Dukedome, anno 981. and by him given with the title of Duke of Lorrain, to Charles of France, son of Gerberge his Aunt by Lewis the 4. surnamed Transinarine, son of Charles the Simple. Charles thus advanced by his Uncle, and finding himselfe wholly neglected by Lothair•• the French King, his brother, shewed himself so alienated from the French, and wedded to the Germans, that the French after the death of his Nephew Lewis the fift (whose next Heire he was) rejected him, and chose Hugh Capet for their King. Otho the son of this Charles, dying without issue, left his estate to Geofrey Earl of Ardenne, Bovillon, and Verdun, (his near kinsman by the mothers side) from whom the Dukes of Lorrain doe derive themselves. From Hermingrade the daughter of Charles descended the Lady Isabel of Hainalt, wife of Philip the 2. King of France, thereby uniting the bloud of Pepin and Hugh Capet, to the great content of Lewis the 9. her Nephew: of whom it is said that being a man of a tender conscience he never joyed in the Crown of France, till it was proved that he was descended by his Grand-mother, from Charles of Lorrain, whom Hugh Capet had unjustly dispossessed. But to return again to the Dukes of Lorrain, I find not any great improvement made of the Estate by any of them, more then the adding of the Dutchy of Barr in France by Rene Duke of Anjou, and titularie King of Naples; but on the contrary a great weakning and distraction of it by the Dukes hereof: Luickland and the Dukedome of Bovillon being sold unto the Bishop of Leige, by Godfrey, furnamed of Bovillon, after King of Hierusalem: Brabant torn from it by Geofrey Earl of Lovain in the time of Baldwin brother of Godfrey, and Gulick-land, by Eustace the brother of Baldwin; the Bishops of Triers not being negligent all this while, of the opportunity: so that we have no more to do, but to present the Reader with the Catalogue of

The DUKES of LORRAIN.

• A. Ch.
• 851 1 Charles of France, took prisoner by Hugh Capet, in which state he di∣ed.
• 1001 2 Otho, son of Charles.
• 1004 3 Godfrey Earl of Ardenne, cousin of Otho by his mother, a daughter of the house of Ardenne: confir∣med herein by the power of the Emperour Henry the first.
• 1119 4 Gozelo of Bovillon, the brother of Godfrey.
• 1044 5 Godfrey II. son of Gozelo.
• 1070 6 Godfrey III.
• 1078 7 Godfrey IV. of Bovillon, sonne of Eu∣stace Earl of Boulogne in Pi∣cardie, and of Ida the daughter of Godfrey the 2. created King of Hierusalem, anno 1099.
• 1180 8 Baldwin brother of Godfrey, Duke of Lorrain, and King of Hierusa∣lem.
• 1119 9 Thierrie son of William the brother of Baldwin.
• 1128 10 Simon son of Thierrie.
• 1141 11 Matthew son of Simon.
• 1176 12 Simon II. son of Matthew.
• 1207 13 Frederick brother of Simon.
• 1213 14 Theobald, son of Frederick.
• 1219 15 Matthew II. son of Theobald, no great friend of the Popes.
• 1259 16 Frederick II. son of Matthew.
• 1303 17 Theobald II. son of Frederick.
• 1311 18 Frederick III. son of Theobald.
• 1329 19 Rodolph son of Frederick.
• 1346 20 John son of Rodolph.
• 1382 21 Charles son of John.
• 1430 22 Rene Duke of Anjou, and King of Naples, &c. in right of Isabel his wife the daughter of Charles.
• 1452 23 John II. son of Rene and Isabel, suc∣ceeded on the death of his mo∣ther.
• 1470 24 Nicolas son of John.
• 1473 25 Rene II. son of Frederick Earl of Vandemont, and of Violant or Yo∣land daughter of Isabel and Rene the first; the Vanquisher of Charles of Burgundie at the battell of Nancy.
• 1508 26 Anthony son of Rene the 2.
• 1544 27 Francis son of Anthony.
• 1545 28 Charles the II. son of Francis.
• 29 Henry son of Charles married Katha∣rine, sister to Henry the 4. of France.
• 1624 30 Francis brother of Henry.
• 1630 31 Charles Nephew to Francis by his brother the Earl of Vandemont, and son-in-law to him by the marri∣age of his daughter and heir suc∣ceeded by a mixt title of descent and marriage. Being resolved to hold it in his own right, he put away his wife and daughter of Francis, and took another to his bed which he better fansied: punished not long after by the losse of his whole estate, for immediately he ingaged himself in the wars of Germanie, in behalf of Ferdinand the 2. But being beaten by the Swedes at the battell of Psaffenbofen in the County of Hanaw, he lost a great part of his Countrey to the Victors, who pursued him home. And on the other side Lewis the 13. of France, picking a quarrell with him for receiving the Monsieur his brother, and the marriage of the Monsieur with the Lady Margaret the Dukes sister, deprived him of the Dutchy of Bar: and falling into Lorrain with a puissant Army, at such time as the Swedes were there, compelled him to put into his hands the City of Nancie, and by consequence all the rest of his Estates, Septemb. 1633. since which time the Duke hath never been restored thereto (for ought I can hear) nor hath any thing left him in it but the Town of La Mothe (if that) together with a good cause, many hearts, and an invincible courage.

The Armes of Lorrain are Or, a Bend Gules, charged with 3 Larks Argent. But herein I finde Bara an old Herald, to differ from Paradine the most exact Genealogist of the French nation. For Bara chargeth the Bend not with 3 Allovettes Larks, as Paradine doth, but with 3 Allerions: which are in Blazon small Birds wanting beaks, feet and legs. Of this last opinion, is the most worthy Antiqua∣ry Camden Clarencieux: who withall telleth us, that when Godfrey of Bulloigne was at the siege of Hie∣rusalom, shooting at S. Davids tower there; he broached three feetlesse birds, called Allerions upon his arrow, and thereupon assumed this armes.

The revenues of the Prince are 700000 Crowns: whereof 200000 arise from the customes of the salt made in his Countrey; and the other 500000, from his Coronet lands. He is an absolute Prince, and giveth for his device, an armed hand comming as it were from Heaven, and grasping a naked sword: to shew that he holdeth his estate by no other tenure, then God and his sword: the only hope, at this time, of the present Duke. For though he be accompted a Prince of the Empire, and his Dukedome reckoned for a part of the fift Circle thereof, which is called the Circle of the Rhene; yet he neither comes unto the Diets, nor holds himself bound by any of the orders and decrees which are made therein, as the rest of the great Princes of Germanie: his neighbourhood to the French former∣ly securing his estate against any force the Empire durst bring against him for those neg∣lects.

6. SVEVIA or SCHWABEN.

The Dukedome of SVEVIA or SCHWABEN,* 1.36 according to the ancient limits and extent thereof, was bounded on the North with Frankenland, and the Lower Palatinate; on the South with the Switzerland, and the Alpes of Tirol; on the East with the River Lech, parting it from Bavaria; and on the West with the Rhene, dividing it from Sungow and both Alsatia's. But now the Dukedome of Wirtenberg, the Marquisate of Baden, and other lesser estates being taken out of it; it is contracted and restrained within narrower bounds: having on the East Bava••ia, on the West the Dukedome of Wirtenberg, and so much of the Rhene, as serveth to divide it from Sungow and the Vpper Elsats; on the North Franconia or Frankenland; and on the South a little of the Rhene, with some part of the Switzers.

The Countrey for the most part mountainous and hilly, overspred with some spurs of the Alpes, and the Woods of Nigra Sylva, or Swartzenwald; recompensed notwithstanding with great plenty of springs and Rivers, (and amongst them the Neccar and the renowned Danubius) which do issue from them: which makes the Vales hereof to be very fruitfull, sufficiently stored with all necessary pro∣visions. Nor are the woods and mountains so unprofitable, but that besides the great plenty of fewell, and the pleasures of hunting, they doe afford some Mines of iron, and other me∣tals.

The people in regard of their mountainous situation, more fierce and warlike then the rest of the Germans; and so accompted of by Plutarch in former times: industrious in severall Trades and Ma∣nufactures, especially in the weaving of linnen Cloth, which is made here in great abundance: and who, by reason they have so much in them of the South, are supra modum in Venerem proni, as Aubanus tels me, at least more given to Venus then the other of the Germans are; the women also being said to be very forwards in this kinde; as tractable and easie as the men could wish them.

The whole is generally divided into the Hegow lying next to the lake of Constance; the Algow ex∣tending to Bavaria; Brisgow upon the West of the River Rhene; and North-Schwaben on the northern side of Danubius. Principall Cities in the HEGOW, are 1. Lindaw, situate like an Iland in the Lake of Constance, encompassed almost with the waters thereof, but joyned to it with a Causey of 290 paces long: one of the Free or Imperiall Cities; made so for money, by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1166. 2. Buchorn, and 3. Vberlingen, on the same lake, both Imperiall also: 4. Scaff-haussen, seated on both sides of the Rhene, not farre from the efflux thereof out of the lake Cell, (so called from a town of that name belonging to the Archdukes of Ausiria: but anciently by the name of Lacus Ve∣netus:) and near those dreadfull fals or Cataracts of that River no lesse then 50 cubits downwards with great noyse and violence. For which cause all vessels that go down the Rhene, are fain to un∣lade themselves, and by Carts to carry their goods to this Town, where they imbark them again. Which as it yeeldeth great benefit unto the Town by tols, and imposts, so doth it alwayes keep it stored with abundance of Barks and other vessels; whence it hath the name of Scaff-haussen, that is to say, the house of Skiffes, or the Town of Ship-boats. The Town conveniently seated amongst rich pastures, and sweet groves on both sides of the River, not without some pleasant hills, and those well planted with vines, near adjoyning to it: Imperiall, but now a Canton of the Switzers, as hath there been shewn. 5. Arbon, upon the lake it self (the Arbor F••lix of Strabo) belonging to the Bishop of Constance. 6. Merspurg, the ordinary seat and residence of the Bishop of Constance, Lord of the most part of this Tract, on the same lake also. 7. Constance it self, situate on both sides of the Rhene, where it issueth out of the lake, called from hence the Lake of Constance; but by the Dutch, Boden-zee, from the Castle of Bodmin; by Plinie and other Ancients Lacus Acronius, and Brigantinus, made by the confluence of the Rhene and some other Rivers falling out of Switzerland. The Town Imperiall, an Episcopall See, and a flourishing Emporie. Famous for the Councell here holden anno 1414. of great renown as well for the multitude and quality of the people which were there assembled, as for the importance of the matters which were therein handled: The people of most note there assembled were Sigismund the Emperour, 4 Patriarchs, 29 Cardinals, 346 Archbishops and Bishops, 564 Abbats and Do∣ctors, 10000 secular Princes and noble men, 450 Common Harlots, 1600 Barbers, and 320 Min∣strels and Jesters. The businesse there handled was first the pacifying of a Schisme in the Church, there being at that time three Popes, (or rather Anti-Popes) Gregory the 12. resident at Rome, John the 23. at Bononia, and Bennet the 13. in Spain; all three deposed by the Councell, and Martin the 5. made sole Pope, by the unanimous consent of the Councell declaring both by matter of fact, and by a publick Con∣stitution here made and ratified, that a Councell is above the Pope. The other main businesse was the procee∣ding against John Hus, and Hierome of Prague, (spoken of before) both which notwithstanding the Emperours safe conduct, were here condemned of Heresie, degraded, and burnt. Now the manner of degrading a priest is this. (I hope to be excused for this digression.) The party to be degraded is attired in his priestly Vestments; holding in the one hand a Chalice full of wine and water, and in the other a guilt plate (or Paten as they call it) with a Wafer. Then kneeling down, the Bishops Deputy first taking from him all those things, commands him to say no more Masses for the quick and dead. 2 Scraping his fingers ends with a piece of glasse, he commandeth him from that time forth not to ballow any thing: and 3 stipping him of his priestly habit, he is clothed in a lay attire, and so

delivered over to the Secular Magistrate. But to return again to the City of Constance, being pro∣scribed by Charles the fift for refusing the Interim, and not able to withstand such forces as were raised against them, they put themselves under the Protection of Ferdinand, then King of the Romans, and brother of Chalres. But herein they fell out of the Frying-pan into the fire, as the saying is. For Ferdi∣nand being possessed of the Town, seised on the common Treasury, and upon all Records and wri∣tings which belonged unto them; set out an Edict that all the Ministers within eight daies should depart the City, and that no Citizen from thenceforth should wear any weapon. And so instead of a Protectour he became their Master.

Chief Cities in the part hereof lying towards Bavaria, which is called the ALGOW, are 1. Buchaw, on the lake called Feder-zee, a Town Imperiall. 2. Ravenspurg, a Free City seated amongst mountains, whereof one hangeth over it, the River Ach running by it in a bed so narrow, that not able to receive the waters which fall down from the hils, it much endamageth all the Countrey by frequent Land∣flouds. 3. Woongen (the Nemavia of Antoninus) Imperiall also. 4. Kempten, the Campodunum of Strabo; and 5. Mimmegen, the Drusomagus of Ptolemy, both Imperiall Cities, the last about three miles in circuit, po∣pulous, rich and very well traded. 6. Psullendorf, 7. Zeukirk, 8. Bibrach; all three Imperiall; the last sup∣posed to be the Bragodurum of the Ancients. 9. Ausburg, on the River Lech, looking into Bavaria, first made a Roman Colony by Augustus Caesar, and by him called Augusta Vindelicorum. The principall City in those times of the Vindelici, a potent people of this tract. A City of great wealth and state, contai∣ning about nine miles in circuit; and very strongly fortified, by nature on the East and North where the ground lies low, and under water, and on the West and South by Art. The buildings for three parts of it are of clay and timber, but on the West part seated on an hill built of Free-stone six or seven stories high; in which are many fair houses of the principall Citizens, and many stately Palaces which belong to the Fuggars a family of very great (almost Princely) Revenues, possessed of many goodly dwellings both in the City and the Suburbs, and adjoyning territories: who though they have of late obtained the honour of Barons in regard of their wealth, still keep themselves (con∣trary to the custome of Germanie, where traffick is counted a disgrace to a Noble man) to the trade of Merchandise. The publick Edifices of it very decent, especially the Cathedrall Church, a majestick building; the other Churches, ten in number, and the Religious houses correspondent to it. Of old time Ceres was here worshipped, from whence (or from the fruitfulnesse of the soile) the City gives a sheaf of corn for the Armes thereof: since their conversion unto Christianity made a Bishops See. Destroyed by Attila and his Hunnes, it was after built more beatifully then it had been former∣ly▪ at last made Imperiall, and the Mistresse of as large a territory as most Cities of Germany. Famous for the confession of faith, exhibited in this place to Charles the 5, by the Protestant▪ Princes, hence called Confessio Augustanae, anno 1530. 2 For the Interim or mixt forme of Doctrine, containing some points of Brotestantis••e, but most of Popery, here tendred to both parties by the said Emperour (but received by neither) to be subscribed to and observed till the differences could be setled by a Generall Coun∣c••ll; And 3 for the publick allowance here given by Decree of all the States of the Empire to the Protestant party, to professe openly their Religion without any impeachment; anno 1555. a Limitati∣only laid on the Ecclesiasticks, that if they changed their Religion they should lose their preferments, which were to be bestowed on others more addicted to the See of Rome.

In the third part hereof called BRISGOW, lying on the East of the River Rhene, and the West of Wirtenberg, places of most importance are 1 Friburg, upon the Triesse and other streams descending from the mountains of Swartzen-wald under which it lyeth: founded by Berchthold Earl or Duke of Zeringen (the Castle of Zeringen once the chief seat of those Princes, being then near adjoyning to it) in the reign of Henry the 5 Emperour anno 1112 or thereabouts: Famous in those daies for silver-mines, now for an University here established, anno 1459. and being in present estimation the chief of the Countrey. 2 Offenbach, 3 Gengenbach, both upon the Kintrich, and both Towns Imperiall; the first so named from Offa an English Saxon, the Apostle of these parts of Germanie. 4 Hochberg, which gives the title of a Marquesse to the Marquesses of Baden, who are Lords thereof. 5 Zel, once Imperiall, but of late times belonging, as doth also 6 Badenwille, to the Marquesse of Baden. 7 Waldshut upon the Rhene, in a barren, cold, and mountainous Countrey, but well stored with woods. 8. Brisach, by Antonine called Mons Brisiacus, a garrison in his time against the incroaching Almains; and situate at that time on the French side of the Rhene; the course of the River being since turned on the other side, where now it runneth. Built Castle-wise on the top of a round hill, in which there is also a strong Tower or Fortresse, raised by Berchthold the third, for defence of the place, otherwise strong enough by its own naturall situation, and might be made impregnable but for want of water, which is all drawn from one deep well in the heart of the Town, or brought with great charge and trouble from the Rhene, which runs underneath it. The Town fair, populous, and well built; once of most note in all the Countrey, from hence called Brisac-gow, or Brise-gow; but after the buil∣ding of Friburg by Berchthold the 4, it grew by little and little to be lesse frequented, the other being seated more conveniently for trade and businesse.

Finally in the fourth and last part hereof called NORTH-SCHWABEN, because on the North side of the Danow, the places most observable are 1 Gmand, on the Rheems; 2 Dinkel-Spuell on the Warnitz, two Imperiall Towns; which with Vberlinque or Werlingen, (all three but mean in building, territory or estimation) spoken of before, are the only three Imperiall Cities in all Germanie, which totally adhered unto the doctrines of the Church of Rome. 3 Boptingen on the Egra, an Imperiall City; 4 Norlingen on the same River but in a low and moorish ground, yet of great resort, populous,

and well traded. Most memorable for the great defeat here given the Swedes by Ferdinand the third, now Emperour, at his first entrance on the Government: in which Bannier, one of the principall commanders of that nation, was slain on the place, Gustavus Horn, another of as great eminence, taken Prisoner, their whole forces routed: and thereupon so strange an alteration of the affairs of Germanie which they had almost wholly conquered (though not for themselves) that the Palatinate, not long before restored to its proper owner, was again possessed by the Spaniards, Frankenland by the Imperi∣alists; and the remainder of the Swedes forced to withdraw into their holds on the Baltick seas, anno 1637. 6 Rotweil, not far from the head of the Neccar, an Imperiall City, and a Confederate of the Switzers. 7 Donawerdt, seated on the confluence of the Donaw and the Werdt, whence it had the name; most commonly called only Werdt, an Imperiall Town: the habitation of John de Werdt, once a B••••wer herein, but afterward a chief Commander of the forces of the Duke of Bavaria in the late German wars. 8 Villengen, on the Bregen a small river falling into the Danow; a Town belonging to the Princes of the house of Austria. Not far from which stands 9 Furstenberg, an ancient Castle, the Earls hereof are Princes of the Empire, and Lords of a great part of the Countrey; in a Village of whose called Don-Eschingen is the head of Danubius. 10 Vlme, an Imperiall City, situate on the meeting of the Blave, the Iler, and the Danow: the principall City of North-Schwaben, about 6 miles in com∣passe, rich, populous, well fortified, and stored with an Armory, for Ordnance and all manner of Ammunition not inferiour to any in Germanie. The Town but new, taking its first rise from a Monastery here founded by Charles the Great, which after grew to be a great City; and took the name of Vlme from the Elmes about it. At first it belonged unto the Monkes, of whom having bought their freedome in the time of Frederick the third it became Imperiall. The Danow hereabouts begins to be navigable, having so violent a stream that the Boats which go down the water use to be sold at the place where they land; it being both difficult and chargeable to bring them back again. Not far hence on the banks of the Danow lye the Suevian Alpes, and amongst them the old Castle of Ho∣henberg, the Lord whereof, on the ruine of the house of Schwaben, became possessed of a great estate here, and in upper Elsats, sold afterwards to Rodolph of Habspurg, the founder of the now Austrian Fa∣mily.

The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Brixantes, Suanetes, Rugusci, and Calucones, who together with the Vindelici (of whom more hereafter) and other tribes of the Rhaeti, (of whom somewhat hath been said before in the Alpine Provinces) possessed themselves of that Countrey which lyeth betwixt the River Inn and the head of the Rhene East and West, Danubius and the Alps of Italy North and South. Within which compasse are the greatest part of the Grisons, the Dukedomes of Schwaben and Bavaria, on this side the Danow; and part of the County of Tirol; and not a few of the Cantons of Switzerland. Subdued by Drusus and Tiberius Nero, sons-in-law of Augustus, it was made a province of the Romans; divided into Rhaetia Prima, taking in all the Countries from the Rhene to the Leck, or Lycus; and Rhaetia Secunda, lying betwixt the Leck and the River Inn, which by another name was called Vindelicia. By which accompt all Schwaben on the South side of the Danow was part of the Province of Rhaetia Prima, continuing so till vanquished and subdued by the Almans, in the time of Valentinian the third, Emperour of the Western parts. As for the Almans who succeeded in possession hereof, they were originally some tribes and families of the Suevi, the most warlike nation of the Germans, inhabiting upon the banks of the River of Albis: who jealous of Caesars great successes, brought against him 430000 fighting men, of which 8000 were slain, and many drowned. They used to stay at home, and go to the war by turnes, they which stayed at home, tilling the land; to whom the rest returning, brought the spoil of the Enemies. But after which blow, we hear little of them till the time of Caracalla, the son of Severus; during whose reign, descending towards the banks of the Rhene and the Danow, and mingling with other nations as they passed along; they assumed first the name of Almans, either from that promiscuous mixture of all sorts of men; or (as I rather think) from Mannus, the son of Tuisco one of the great and National Gods of the Germans. And though well beaten by him at their first comming down, near the River Moenus; and afterwards more bro∣ken by Diocletian, who slew at least 60000 of them at one time, in Gaul: yet never left they to infest the Provinces of the Empire which lay nearest t them; till in the end following the tract of the Hunns who had gone before them, and beaten down many of the Forts and Garrisons which were in their way, they made themselves Masters of Rhaetia Prima, Germania Prima, and part of Maxima Sequa∣norum, containing besides the Countries spoken of before, Alsatia, and so much of the Lower Palatinate as lies on the French side of the Rhene. But quarrelling with the French their next neighbours (of whose growth and greatnesse they began to be very sensible) they were first vanquished by Clovis the first Christian King of the French, in that great and memorable fight at Zulph, near Colen: and afterwards made wholly subject to the Conquerour; by whom oppressed with an heavy and lasting servitude. About this same they returned again to their old name of Suevians: their estate being erected into a Dukedome, called many times the Dukedome of Almain; and when so called, divided into the upper Almain, comprehending the Countrey of the Grisons, with some parts of Switzerland, and Tirol; and the Lower or the Proper Almain, which contained the rest of the Estates of the ancient Almans, called for the most part by the name of the Dukedome of Suevia or Schwaben, and finally transmitting that name to this Province only, the best part thereof. These Dukes at first officiary only, removable at the will of the Emperour, and accomptable to him: not seldome many at one time, especially whilest under the command of the French: some of them being Dukes of the Upper, and others of the Lower Almain. So that there is no great certainty of their succession, nor much care to be taken in sear∣ching

after it; though otherwise men of great Authority and Command in their severall times. The most remarkable amongst them was Rudolph, Earl of Reinfelden, and Duke of Schwaben, (descen∣ded from the Earls of Habsburg) in the reign of Henry the fourth, against whom he was chosen Em∣perour by the practise and procurement of Pope Hildebrand: but overcome and wounded at the bat∣tell of E••ster, he died not long after of his wounds, with great repentance for rebelling against his Soveraign. After his death, some Provinces being dismembred from it, and other lesser estates first erected out of it: it was made Hereditary in the person of Frederick, Baron of Hohenstaussen surnamed the Antient, by the munificence and bounty of the said Henry the fourth, whose daughter Agnes he had married. His successours follow in this order.

The DUKES of SCHWABEN.

• 1 Frederick the ancient, the first Hereditary Duke of Schwaben.
• 2 Frederick with the one eye, son of Frederick the Ancient.
• 3 Frederick III. surnamed Barbarossa, son of Frederick with the one eye, Duke of Schwaben, and Emperour, he succeeded the Emperour Henry the fift, in the Dukedome of Fran∣conia; and left the same unto his successours.
• 1190 4 Frederick IV. second son of Barbarossa, his elder brother Henry succeeding in the Empire, by the name of Henry the sixt.
• 5 Conrade, brother of Frederick the fourth.
• 6 Philip, brother of Conrade, after the death of Henry the sixt, elected Empe∣rour.
• 1207 7 Frederick V. son of Henry the sixt, elected Emperour by the name of Frederick the second, King of Naples and Sicil also in right of his mother.
• 1250 8 Conrade II. son of Frederick the fift, King of both Sicils, and Emperour of Germany, after the death of his Father, poisoned as was supposed by his base brother Manfred, who succeeded in his Kingdom of Sicil.
• 1254 9 Conradine, the son of Conrade, pursuing his right unto the Kingdomes of Naples and Sicil, was overcome and taken prisoner by Charles of Anjou successour unto Man∣frede in those estates; and by his command beheaded at Naples, anno 1268. After whose death (being the last of that powerfull and imperiall Family) this vast E∣state was brought unto a second dismembring, and divided amongst the Bishops, Princes, and Free Cities hereof: of which last there are more within the old Pre∣cincts of this Dukedome, then in all Germany besides. So that beholding it in the first and second dilapidation, we finde many goodly Patrimonies and fair Estates (besides what belongeth to the Cities and Episcopall Sees) to have been raised out of the ruines of this great Dukedome: that is to say, the Dukedomes of Zeringen and Wirtemberg, with the Marquisate of Baden, dismembred from it, when conferred on Frederick of Hohenstauffen; the Earldomes of Pfirt, Hohenberg, and Friburg, (besides a great improvement of the Earldome of Hapsburg) advanced out of the second ruine. How Pfirt and Hohenberg were unitted to the house of Austria, hath been shewn al∣ready: and what becomes of Wirtenberg, and Baden, shall be shewn hereafter. Here it is onely to be noted, that the Family of Zeriugen possessed of almost all Brisgow, and great part of Switzerland, owe their Originall to Berthilo, or Berthold, a younger son of Guntrom the first Earl of Hapsburg. Which being extinguished in the person of Berthold the fift, (who dyed the same day in which the Emperour Rodolph of Haps∣burg was born) anno 1218. the rights hereof descended on the Earls of Friburg, the principall City of that Country. Eggow, the last Earl of which house being over∣laid by his undutifull and rebellious Subjects, sold his estate therein ••o 12000 Ducats to Albert and Leopold, Dukes of Austria, sons of Albert the Short, whose succes∣sours enjoy all Brisgow to this very day.

The Armes of Schawben were Argent, 3 Leopards Sable.

7. BAVARIA.

BAVARIA is bounded on the East with Austria, on the West with the river Leck, or Lycus, which parts it from Schawben; on the North with Northgoia, or the Vpper Palatinate, and on the South, with the Earldome of Tirol, and Carinthia. It containeth the whole Province of Rhaetia Secunda, and so much of Noricum Mediterraneum, as now makes up the Bishoprick of Saltsburg: and by a distinct name was called Vindelicia, as being the ancient habitation of the Vindelici, so named from the two

Rivers of Vindis and Lycus (now the Werd and the Leck) upon which they lived.* 1.37 According where∣unto it is thus versified by a German Poet.

Respicit & late fluvios Vindimque, Lycumque, Miscentes undas, & nomina Littoris; unde Antiquam Gentem, populumque, Urbemque vocarunt Vindelicam.—

In English thus:

Vindis and Lycus, floods of noted Fame, He next beholds, mingling their streames and name, To which the old Vindelici doe own, The name both of their Nation, and their Town.

Meaning by their Town, as I conceive, Augusta Vindelycorum, their Metropolis or Capitall City. But after such time as the Boii or Boiarians had driven out the Romans, and got possession of this Country, the name of Vindelicia, and Rhaetia secunda, grew into disuse: that of Boiaria succeeding in the place thereof, mollified or corrupted into Bavaria the present name of the Country amongst the Latines; but by the Dutch called Bayeren, by the French Bavier.

The whole divided into three parts; the Higher, lying towards the Alpes of Tyrol; the Lower, ex∣tending all along the banks of the Danow and the District of Saltzburg, situate betwixt the Inn and the Dukedome of Austria: all three much over-spread with woods and forrests, remainders of the Hercinian forrest described before. But more particularly the Higher lying towards the Alpes is cold and barren, affording no wines, and but little corn: the Lower being more fruitfull, and better plan∣ted, for some parts (especially about Regensberg, and Landshut, inferiour unto none in Germany, for the richnesse and pleasantnesse of the situation. Of the District of Saltzburg we shall speak by it self; because by some not reckoned as a part hereof. In all, great quantity of fenell for the fire, and of Timber for building; no lesse of Swine fatted in the woods, and sent away by numerous herds in∣to other Countries.

The Christian Faith first preached here amongst the Boiarians, by Rupertus Bishop of Wormes, driven from his See by Childebert, King of the French, anno 540. or therabout, and here made the first Bishop of Saltzburg: corrupted at this time with the Leaven of the Church of Rome, to which this Country (setting aside the Imperiall Cities) is more intirely devoted, then any other in Germany.

Principall Cities in the Higher, are 1 Munchen, (in Latine Monachium) the Dukes seat; seated on the Isee, or Isarus, in a very sweet and delightly soil, among ponds and groves, daintily inter∣laced with pretty Riverets, and inriched with many excellent Gardens: that of the Duke being hardly to be paralleld in all this Continent. First founded by Henry Duke hereof in the time of Otho the first, anno 972. now grown a large and populous City: the publick buildings, as Churches, Tur∣rets, Libraries, the Senate-house or Guild-hall, and common Market-place, of such excellent Structure, that they serve not onely for use and Ornament, but for Admiration. Amongst them none more eminent then the Library in the Ducal Palace, wherein is conceived to be 11000 Volumes, the most part of them Manuscripts. A town made choice of by Maximilian the now Duke of Bavaria to be the receptacle of the spoiles got by him in the wars of Germany: here being found (at such time as the town was taken by the King of Sweden) 140 brasse Peeces (besides other great Guns) hid un∣der the ground; one of the which was charged, instead of Powder and Shot, with 30000 Crowns in Gold. 2 Landsberg, upon the Leck, or Lycus, neer the Alpes of Tirol, once of great strength, be∣cause a Frontire towards Schwaben; but proving a dangerous neighbour to the Swedish Garrison planted in these parts during that was against the Duke of Bavaria, was by them taken and dismant∣led; and is now an open Village onely. 3 Martenwald, now a place of note or beauty, heretofore the Inutrium of Ptolomy seated near the Alpes. 4 Fridberg, well fortified by Duke Ludovick, or Lewis the second, for a bul wark against those of Ausburg.

In the LOWER Bavaria, there first offers it self to consideration, the town of 1 Rain, seated on the Leck, not far from the fall thereof into the Danow: memorable for the skirmish neer to it betwixt the Swedes and Bavarians, at the first passing of the Swedish forces over that River: in which John Earl of Tilly, so famous for his long and fortunate conduct, received his deaths wound, of which he died at Ingolsiad within few weeks after. 2. Newburg upon the Danow, not far from Rain; the first town of Bavaria taken in by the Swedes, after the said defeat of Tilly. 3. Ingolstad, said to be built by a Tribe, or Nation of the Sueves, called Angeli, and thence called Angelostadium, or Anglesiade: first made a City by Ludovick of Bavaria, Duke and Emperour; and in the yeer 1410 made an Univer∣sity, much priviledged by Duke Lewis, or Ludovick the fift, and Pope Pius the second. A town so strongly fortified both by Art and Nature, that it seemes impregnable: and indeed proved so to Gusiavus the late King of Sweden: who here found the first check to his prosperous fortunes, being forced to raise his siege without endangering it, and finde work elsewhere. 4 Regensberg (in La∣tine Ratisbona) on the Danow also, where it receives the River Regen, when it hath its name: built

in the place of Tiberina or Augusta Tiberii, so called of a Colonie brought hither by Tiberius Caesar, about the time of our Saviours passion: afterwards called Rhaetopolis, or the Citie of the Rhaetians, the chief of Rhaetia secunda. At this time a fair, rich, and populous Citie, beautified with an infinite num∣ber of Churches and Religious Houses; anciently an Episcopall See: and of late made the ordina∣rie place for the generall diets of the Empire. In former times the seat of the Kings and first Dukes of Bavaria, then made Imperiall; and now mixt, or both. For being still Imperiall, at the least in name, it was seised on unexpectedly by the now Duke of Bavaria, when the Swedes first got footing within his Dominions, held by him with a very strong Garrison, after the losse of Mun••hen his chief place of residence, till at last won from him by the Swedes, anno 1633. 5 Passow, by the modern Latinists, Pa∣tavia; but by some thought to be the Boiodurum of Ptolomie, then a Roman Garrison. Seated on the Danow, where it meeteth with the Inn, and the Ils: by which divided into three towns, Passaw, Inn∣stade, and Ilstade: the whole Compositum being a rich Fair, and well-traded Citie. A See Episcopall and subject immediately to the Bishop, as chief Lord hereof, who hath his dwelling in the Castle of Oberhusen, adjoining to that part hereof which is called Ilstade. A place remarkable for many meet∣ings and consultations of the German Princes: especially for that of the year 1552, in which all for∣mer quarrels being laid aside, the Protestants were first permitted the free Exercise of their Religion, by the consent and edict of Charls the fift, who had most laboured to suppresse it. More in the land is 6 Frising, on the swelling of a fine round hill neer the River Ambra which runs beneath it; called an∣ciently Fraxinum: conceived to be built by some of the Presidents or Lieutenants for the Roman Em∣perours: honoured with an Episcopall See about the year 710. one of the Bishops whereof common∣ly called Otho Frisengensis, was the best Historian of his time. 7 Landshut, upon the river of I••ar, in the richest and most pleasant countrie of all Bavaria; a beautifull and well-built Citie, the work of Lewis Duke hereof in the year 1208. adorned with a Church of most curious building for the service of God, and a magnificent Palace for the use of the Duke. 8 Freistet, the only Imperiall town, (ex∣cept Regensburg) in all this Dukedom. The whole number of Cities and great towns in both Bava∣ria's is supposed to be 80; that is to say, 34 Cities, 46 great towns: of which these the prin∣cipall.

The Bishoprick or District of Saltsburg being the third part of Bayeren or Bavaria (according to our former division of it) extendeth from the Inn, or Oenus, towards the confines of Austria. The soil hereof rockie, drie, and barren, excepting some few valleys only, as seated in the midstst of the Juli∣an Alps: the habitation heretofore of the Norici Mediterranei, of whom more hereafter. The princi∣pall town hereof is Saltzburg, seated upon the river Saltzach, whence it had the name: raised out of the ruines of Juvania placed hereabouts by Antoninus, the station of a cohort of Roman Souldiers be∣longing to the first Legion. An Alpine citie strongly situate amongst the Mountains, but no lesse beautifull then many of the lower grounds. The Royall seat of some of the Bavarian Kings, after of the Archbishops hereof, the most powerfull Prelates for Revenue and jurisdiction of any in Germanie: the See first fixed here by Rupertus or Rutbertus the first Apostle of these parts spoken of before; whose image or impresse is stamped to this day on the coins of this Bishoprick. At the time when Luther first endeavoured a Reformation, Cardinall Matthaeus Langius was Bishop here, who did ingenuously confesse that the Masse did not want its faults, that the Court of Rome were much corrupted, and the lives of Priests and Friers fit to be reformed: Sed quod misellus Monachus omnia reformet, id non esse tolera∣bile: but that such a sorrie fellow as Luther should attempt the work, that by no means to be indu∣red. 2 Newkirch, on the same River, near the head thereof. 3 Rotenbourg, on the East side of the Inn bordering on Bavaria. 4 Traunshaim, upon the river Traun, rising out of the Lakes. 5 Wildesmet, one of the farthest Northwards; and 6 Bishops-stoffe, one of the most Southern in all this tract.

The first Inhabitants of Bavaria (excluding the District of Saltsburg) were the Vindelici, as afore∣said: a people so resolvedly bent to maintain their freedome against the incroachments of the Ro∣mans, that when Drusus the son-in-law of Augustus, and father of Germanicus Caesar, made war upon them, the very women thereof took the alarm, & deficientibus telis, infantes in ora militum adversa mise∣runt; and when their darts were spent, threw their young infants (saith the Historian) at the heads of the Romans. After them in the declining of the Empire, succeeded the Bojarians, some of the ma∣ny tribes of the Boji, the most diffused and the multitudinous nation of Gaul and Germanie. Original∣ly of Gaul, inhabiting in the Dukedom of Bourbon, from whence some of them passed with the Senones and others of the Gauls, to the further side of the Alps, (in respect of them) where they tooke up the Countrie near the head of the Po. Wearied with long wars against the Romans, and by them deprived of half their Country; some of them passed into Germanie, and mingled themselves with the Taurisci, then dwelling in those parts which we now call Stiermark: others advancing further, thrust them∣selves into the Norici, (of whom more anon) and some retired themselves into the shelters and fast places of the Hircinian Forrest. Driven from this last by the Marcomanni, they fell into the countries of the Herma••duri and Norisci, (now the Vpper Palatinate) who mingling into one Nation with them, took the name of Bojarians; and by that name first known in the time of Clovis, the fift King of the French: by whose perswasion, in the 17 year of Anastasius Emperor of the East, they passed over the Da∣now, and possessed themselves of Vindelicia, or the second Rhaetia, with some part of Noricum, to which they gave the name of Bojaria, as before was signified. Governed first by Kings (as all Nations were) of whom we meet with none but Aldigerius (and he the last of that race) slain, fighting on the side of the Almans against the French, at the great battell of Zulp, near Colen: after which made subject to the Conquerours, as their neighbours and confederates the Almans were; but suffered to live under the

command and government of their own Princes by the name of Dukes. Of these from Theudo the son of Aldigerius, to Tassilo the last Duke, outed of his estate and honours by Charls the Great, for conspiring with the Lombards against him, are reckoned fifteen Dukes in all: whose names (for there remaineth little of them but the emptie names) we shall subjoine in the ensuing Catalogue of the

DUKES of the BOJARIANS.

• 493 1 Theodo son of Adalgerius the last King; from whose younger brother Vtilo, descended P••∣pin the Father of Charls the Great.
• 511 2 Theodo II. surnamed the Great.
• 537 3 Theodebert.
• 4 Theodo III. the first Christian Prince of the Bojarians.
• 565 5 Tassilo, son of Theodebert.
• 598 6 Garibaldus.
• 612 7 Theodo IV.
• 630 8 Tassilo II.
• 650 9 Theodo V.
• 10 Theodebert II.
• 11 Theodo VI. son of Grimoldus the brother of Theodebert the second.
• 708 12 Grimold.
• 13 Hugobert, brother of Grimold.
• 735 14 Vtilo.
• 765 15 Tassilo III. the last Duke of the Bojarians. Of whom more anon.

Amongst these few of any note, but 1 Theodo the first, son of Adalgerius, who abandoning the name of King, because lesse pleasing to the French who had newly conquered them, assumed that of Duke: and passing over the Danow, extorted the whole Province of Rhaetia secunda, with part of Noricum, from the Romans, anno 508. or thereabouts. 2 Theodo the second, named the Great, for his great and many victories against the Romans, whom he outed of all Noricum and Vindelicia; and whatsoever they held on the Dutch side of the Alps. 3 Theodo the 3. of that name, and the 4. in number of the Dukes, converted with his people to the Christian Faith, by the preaching of Rupertus before men∣tioned, anno 580. 4 Tassilo the 3. of that name, and the last of their Dukes of the race of Adalgerius, or of the old Bojarian bloud: who being deposed by Charls the Great, the whole countrie became immediately subject to the French, governed at first by their Lieutenants. Dismembred from the French Empire by Lewis the Godly, it was made a Kingdom (Pannonia being added and united to it) by whom conferred on Lotharius his eldest son, who was afterwards Emperour of the Romans: after his death possessed by the Kings of Germanie, but as a distinct Kingdom both in name and title, till the decease of Lewis the son of Arnulph the last, of the direct line of Charls the Great. He being dead and the Bavarians loth to be made a subject Province to the Kingdome of Germanie, one Arnulph of the issue of the said Charls, with the generall liking of the Bojarians, took upon himself the title of King: but being opposed therein by Conrade the brother of Lewis, Emperour and King of Germanie, as also by Henry the first who succeeded: he changed the title of King into that of Duke; the Founder of the present house of

The DUKES of BAVARIA.

• 1 Arnulph of the house of Charls the Great, first Duke of Bavaria.
• 2 Eberhard son of Arnulph, deposed by Otho the 1.
• 3 Berchthold, the brother of Arnulph, confirmed in the estate by the said Emperour Otho. Af∣ter his death this Dukedome was transferred for 17 successions from one great Fa∣milie to another, according to the power and pleasure of the present Emperour; in manner following.
• 4 Henry brother of Otho the 1.
• 5 Henry II. son of the former Henry.
• 6 Henry III. surnamed the Saint, son of Henry the 2. the first Emperour who came in by election, according to the Order made by Pope Gregory the 5.
• 7 Henry IV. surnamed Hezzel, brother to Cunegund the renowned wife of Henry the Saint; by whom preferred to this Dukedom, and by him deposed.
• 8 Henry Guelph son of Robert Earl of Altorfe in Schwaben (of the strange Originall of which Familie we shall speak in Saxonie) made Duke by the Emperour Conrade the 2.
• 9 Guelpho, son of Henry Guelph, or Henry the 5.
• ...

• 10 Ernest, created Duke hereof by the same Conrade the 2. by whom deposed again for con∣spiring against him.
• 11 Henry VI.
• 12 Cuno, accused of conspiracie, and displaced by Henry the 3. to make room for
• 13 Henry VII. son of the said Emperour Henry the 3. whom he succeeded in the Empire by the name of Henry the 4.
• 14 Agnes, the mother of the said Henry the 4. by the gift of her son.
• 15 Otho by the gift of the Emperesse Agnes, deposed not long after by Henry the 4.
• 16 Welpho III. son of Coniza the daughter of Guelph the 2 by Azon an Italian Marquesse, mad•• Duke hereof by the said Emperour Henry the 4.
• 17 Welpho IV. son to Welpho the 3.
• 18 Henry VIII. surnamed the Proud, brother of Guelpho the 4. by the marriage of Gertrude daughter of Lotharius the 2. Duke of Saxonie also. Deprived of both by the Emperour Conrade the 3.
• 19 Leopold, son to Le••pold the 4. Marquesse of Austria, made Duke by the said Conrade the 3.
• 20 Henry IX. brother of Leopold, after Marquesse, and at last Duke of Austria.
• 21 Henry X. surnamed the Lyon, son of Henry the Proud, restored by the Arbitrement of Fre∣derick Barbarossa (the Duke of Austria being otherwise satisfied) by whom not long after proscribed and deprived of both his Dukedoms. After which this estate became fixed and settled, in the person and posteritie of
• 1180 22 Otho of Wittlesbach, lineally descended from Arnulph the first Duke, advanced unto this honour by Frederick Barbarossa, sensible of the too great power of the former Dukes: the whole extent of this estate being reduced by this time to the limits of the modern Bavaria, and the Palatinate of Northgoia.
• 1183 23 Ludovick, or Lewis son of Otho.
• 1231 24 Otho II. son of Lewis, who by marrying Gertrude the sole daughter of Henry Count Palatine of the Rhene, brought the Electorall dignitie into the house of Ba∣varia.
• 1290 25 Henry Duke of Bavaria and Count Palatine of the Rhene, the sonne of Otho the 2.
• 1312 26 Ludovick or Lewis II. brother of Henry, Duke of Bavaria, and Elector Palatine of the Rhene.
• 1294 27 Ludovick, or Lewis III. second son of Lewis the 2. succeeded in the Kingdom of Bavaria; Rodolph the eldest son, succeeding in both Palatinates, and the Electoral dignitie. He was afterwards elected and crowned Emperour, known commonly by the name of Ludo∣vicus Bavarus.
• 1347 28 Stephen the eldest son of Ludovick the Emperour; William and Albert his two brethren successively enjoying the Earldoms of Hainalt, Holland, &c. in right of their mother.
• 1375 29 Stephen II. son of Stephen the 1. his brothers Frederick and John sharing with him parts the estate.
• 1413 30 Ludovick II. surnamed Barbatus, deposed and imprisoned by his own son Ludowick, who yet died before him without issue.
• 1147 31 Henry II, son of Frederick the second brother of Stephen the 2. succeeded on the death of Ludovicus Barbatus.
• 1450 32 Ludovick V. surnamed the Rich, who banished the Jews out of his estates, and seised their goods; the son of Henry the 2.
• 1479 33 George surnamed the Rich also, the Founder of the Universitie of Ingolstade! whose sole daughter and heir was married to Rupertus Prince Electour Palatine: with the Dukedom of Bavaria for her Dower. But Maximilian the Emperour not liking so much great∣nesse in the German Princes, confirmed the same on
• 1503 34 Albert III. son of a former Albert, Nephew of John of Munchen, by his son Ernestus: which John was youngest brother to Stephen the 2. who by the power and favour of Maxi∣milian the Emperour, succeeded unto George the Rich: the cause of a long and unhap∣py war betwixt the Electors of the Rhene and Dukes of Bavaria: the worst whereof, besides the losse of this Estate, fell upon the Palatines, proscribed and outed of their Country upon this quarrell; but upon their submission restored again.
• 1508 35 William the son of Albert the 3.
• 1577 36 Albert IV. a great Champion of the Doctrines and Traditions of the Church of Rome, and so extreamly affected unto the Jesuites, that he built Colledges for them at Landsberg, Ingolstade, and Munchen, his three principall towns.
• 1579 37 William II. son of Albert the 4. as zealous as his Father in the cause of the Church of Rome: in which exceeded very much by
• 38 Maximilian, eldest son of William the 2. who chiefly out of the same zeal sided with Fer∣dinand the 2. in the wars of Germanie, anno 1620. and took upon him the conduct of the Armies of the said Emperour against Frederick Count and Electour Palat••ne, chosen

• King of Bohemia.* 1.38 In which having done great service to the Imperiall and Romish in∣teresse, he was by the said Ferdinand invested in the Vpper Palatinate, called anciently (but not more properly then now) the Palatinate of Bavaria: together with the Ele∣ctorall dignitie: this last conferred at first upon him but for term of life in the Diet at Regensberg, 1623. the Electors of Mentz, Saxonie, and Brandenbourg, protesting against it; but afterwards in the Diet at Prague anno 1628. con••erred upon him and his heirs for ever, to the great prejudice of the Princes of the Palatine Familie, who by reason of their simultaneous investiture with the first of their house, are not to be deprived of their estates and dignities for the offence of their Fathers: the punishment not being to extend beyond the person of the offender. But notwithstanding their pretentions and allegations, the Duke is still possessed of the title and dignitie, confirmed therein by the conclusions of the Treatie of Munster: a new Electorate being to be erected for the Palatine Princes.

The Arms of this Duke are Lozenges of 21 peeces in Bend, Argent, and Azure.

The ARCHDUKEDOME of AUSTRIA.

The Archdukedome of AVSTRIA reckoning in the incorporate Provinces and Members of it, is bounded on the East with Hungarie and a part of Sclavonia; on the West with Bavaria, and some parts of the Switzers and the Grisons; on the North with Bohemia and Moravia; and on the South with Histria, and some part of Friuly in Italie. Within which circuit are contained the feverall Provin∣ces of Austria, properly so called, Stiria, Carinthia, Carniola, and Tirol: the qualitie of the whole will be best discerned by the Survey of particulars.

The ancient Inhabitants of the whole were the Norici, of the Romans, parted into the lesser Tribes of Sevates, Alauni, Ambisontii, Ambilici, and Ambidrauni: subdued by Drusus, son in law to Augustus Caesar, and made a Province of the Empire. After by Constantine the Great, divided into Noricum Me∣diterraneum, comprehending the Countries of Carinthia, Carniola, Stiria, and some parts of Tirol, with the Bishoprick or District of Saltsburg; of which Solyun was the Metropolis or Capitall Citie: and Noricum Ripense containing only Austria and those parts of Bavaria which lie Eastward of the River Inn, extended all along on the banks of the Danow. Known by no other names while possessed by the Romans; from whom being conquered by the Avares and other Nations; it gained those severall names and appellations specified before.

1 AVSTRIA, properly so called, hath on the East the Kingdome of Hungarie, from which parted by the River Rab; on the West, Bavaria; on the North the Bohemian Mountains towards the West, and on the other side the Teya, which separates it from Moravia; on the South, Stiria, or Stier∣marck, called by the Dutch, Ostenreich, and contractedly Oostrich, that is to say, the Eastern Kingdom (a part assuming to it self the name of the whole) this being the extreme Province of East-France, or the Eastern Kingdom of the French: in the barbarous Latine of those times called by the name of Austrasia, whence the modern Austria.

The air is generally very healthie, and the earth as fruitfull; yeilding a plentifull increase without help of compost, or other soiling; and of so easie a tillage to the husbandman, that on the North side of the Danow it is ploughed and managed by one horse only. Exceeding plentifull of grain, and abundant in wine, with which last it supplyeth the defects of Bavaria: great store of Saffron, some provision of salt: and at the foot of the Mountains not far from Haimbourg, some Ginger also. Nor wants it Mines of silver, in a large proportion. Divided by the River Danow into the Lower and the Higher: that lying on the North side of the River, towards Bohemia and Moravia, this on the South side towards Stiermark.

Places of most importance in the HIGHER AVSTRIA, are 1 Gmund, seated on a Lake cal∣led Gemunder See, bordering on Bavaria at the efflux of the river Draun, which ariseth out of it. 2 Lints, seated on the confluence of the said Draun, with the famous Danow, the Aredate of Ptolemie: A town before the late wars almost, wholly Protestant, but then being put into the hands of the Duke of Bavaria, began to warp a little to the other side. 3 Walkenstein on the Ens or Anisus, near the borders of Sti∣ermark. 4 Ens, on the fall of that river into the Danow; raised out of the ruines of Laureacum, some∣times the Metropolis of the Noricum Ripense, the Station at that time of the second Legion: afterwards an Archbishops See, made such in the first planting of Christianity amongst this people by S. Severine, anno 464. On the reviver whereof, suppressed by the Hunnes, Bojarians, and others of the barbarous Nations, by the diligence and preaching of S. Rupertus, the Metropolitan dignitie was fixt at Saltz∣burg. 5 Waidhoven, near the head of the river Ips. 6 Ips, seated at the influx of that river, and from thence denominated, the Gesodunum of Ptolemie and other ancients. 7 Newfull, on a great Lake so named. 8 Wels, on the main stream of the Danubius. 9 Haimburg, on the confluence thereof, and the river Marckh: Near to which at the foot of the Mountains now called Haimburgerberg (from the town adjoining) but anciently named Mons Cognamus, is some store of Ginger: a wonderfull great raritie

for these colder Countries.* 1.39 10 Newstat, first called so from the newnesse of it, being built of late. 11 Vienna, by the Dutch Wien, the principall of all these parts by Ptolemie called Juliobona, Vindebona by Antonine; the station in their times of the tenth Roman Legion, of whose being setled here there are many Monuments both within the City and without. Seated it is on the bankes of Danubius, well built both in regard of private and publike edifices: each private house having such store of cella∣rage for all occasions, that as much of the Citie seems to be under the ground, as is above it. The streets for the most part spacious, and all paved with stone, which makes them very clean and sweet in the midst of winter: fenced with a mighty wall, deep and precipitious ditches on all parts of it; and many Bulwarkes, Towers, and Ramparts, in all needfull places: the wals hereof first raised with some part of the money paid unto Leopold Duke of Austria, for the ransome of King Richard the first of England, taken prisoner by him as he passed homewards through this Countrey from the Holy Land. Esteemed at this day the strongest hold of Christendom against the Turkes, and proved experiment∣ally so to be in that most notable and famous repulse here given them, an. 1526. At what time 200000 of them under the conduct of Solyman the Magnificent besieged this City; but by the valour of Fre∣derick the second, Electour Palatine of the Rhene, and other German Princes gallantly resisted and compelled to retire, with the losse of 80000 souldiers. Nor doth the strength hereof so diminish the beauties of it, but that it is one of the goodliest townes in all the Empire, the residence for these last ages of the Emperours: made an Vniversity by the Emperour Frederick the second, revived, and much advanced by Albert Duke of Austria, anno 1356. Adorned with an Episcopall See, many magnificent Temples and stately Monasteries; but above all with a most sumptu••us and Princely Palace, wherein the Archdukes and Emperours use to keep their Courts; built by Ottacar, King of Bohemia, during the little time he was Duke of Austria. In the middle ages, as appeares by Otho Frisingensis, it was called Fabiana: but being ruined by the Hunnes, and again reedified, was first cal∣led Biana, (the first syllable omitted by mistake or negligence) from whence the Dutch Wien, and the Latine Vienna.

We should now take a view of the townes and Cities in the LOWER AVSTRIA, if there were any in it which were worth the looking after. The Countrey having never beene in the hands of the Romans, hath no town of any great antiquity, nor many new ones built or beautified by the Austrian Princes, since it came into their possession: the onely one of note being Crems or Cremia, on the left hand shoar of Danubius, going downe the water. 2. Rets, on the River ••ega bor∣dering on Moravia;; and 3. Freistat, at the foot of the Mountaines on the skirts of Bohemia. The old Inhabitants of this tract are supposed to be the Quadi, in that part which lyeth next to Bohe∣mia; the Marcomanni in those parts which are next Moravia: who intermingled with the Bo••i, and united with them into the name of Bojarians, wonne from the Romans the whole Province of the Second Rhaetia, and so much of Noricum, as lyeth betwixt the Inn and the Ens: leaving the rest to the Avares, who possessed that and the two Pannonia's, extorted also from the Romans in the fall of that great and mighty Empire.

But these Bojarians being conquered by Clovis the Great, and the Avares driven out of Pannonia by Char le magne; both Provinces became members of the French Empire, till the subduing of Pannonia by the Hungarians. To oppose whom, and keep in peace and safety these remoter parts, some Guar∣dians or Lords Marchers were appointed by the Kings and Emperours of Germany, with the title of Marquesses of Ostreich. At first Officiary onely, but at last hereditarie, made so by the Emperour Henry the first, who gave this Province to one Leopold, surnamed the Illustrious, the sonne of Henry Earle of Bamberg, of the house of Schwaben; and there withall the title of Marquesse, anno 980. This Marquisate was by Frederick Barbarossa raised to a Dukedome, 1158. Henry being the first Duke, whose brother Leopold took Richard the first of England, prisoner, in his returne from Palestine: for whose ransome hee had so much money, that with it he bought Stiermark together with the Counties of N••obourgh, and Liutz; and walled Vienna. His sonne Fredericus Leopoldus, was made King of Au∣stria, by the Emperour Frederick the second, anno 1225. Eleven yeares he co••tinued in this dignity, at the end of which hee was spoiled of his royall ornaments by the same hand, for denying his appearance at the Emperours summons, unto whom for some outrages, he had been complained of. Finally he died in the yeare 1246. leaving two daughters. His sister named Margaret was mar∣ryed unto Ottocar, sonne to Primislaus King of Bohemia: his eldest daughter, Gertrude, to the Mar∣quesse of Baden; and Agnes, the second unto Henry Duke of Carinthia. Ottocar pretending the right of his wife, tooke to him the Dukedome of Austria, which hee kept after the death of his wi••e, till the year 1228. in which he was vanquished and slaine by Rodolphus the Emperour. Rodolphus then gave it to Albertus his sonne, whose wife Elizabeth, was daughter to Meinhard Earl of T••••ol sonne of Duke Henry of Carinthia, and of Agnes daughter of Frederick Leopold: Margaret, the sister; and Gertrude, the other daughter of this Frederick, dying issuelesse. By this marriage Allert had the Dukedome of Austria, Stiria, and Carinthia, with the Earledomes of Tirol and Carniola. By whom it was first raised to the title of Arch-Duke, is not yet agreed. Some attribute it to Ro∣dolphus of Habspurg, at the investiture of his son Albert into these Estates, anno 1298. Others to Charles the fourth, advancing to that honour Rodolph the Ingenious; anno 1360. Some make it to be first given to Albert Duke hereof in the year 1430. and others post it lower to the marriage of Philip sonne of Maximilian of Austria and the Lady Mary of Burgundy, with Joan Princesse of Spain. But by whom soever given at first, it is now the constant and hereditary title of all this Family: the successive Princes whereof, from the first investiture, follow in the ensuing Catalogue of

The MARQESSES,* 1.40 DUKES, KINGS, and ARCH∣DUKES of AUSTRIA.

• 928 1 Leopold of Bamberg the first Marquesse.
• 988 2 Henry sonne of Leopold.
• 1014 3 Albert sonne of Henry, surnamed the Victorious.
• 1056 4 Ernestus sonne of Albert.
• 1075 5 Leopold II. sonne of Ernest, a companion of Godfrey of Bovillon.
• 1096 6 Leopold III. sonne of the second founder of the Abbey of Neubourg.
• 1136 7 Leopold IV. sonne of the third, by his halfe brother Conrade the third, the Emperour of the Germans made Duke of Bavaria.
• 1141 8 Henry II. brother of Leopold, Marquesse of Austria, and Duke of Bavaria; made the first Duke of Austria by Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1158. the whole countrey betwixt the Inn and the Ens, being added by the said Emperour unto his estate, on his relin∣quishing of Bavaria to the Duke of Saxony.
• 1177 9 Ludovick sonne of Henry, built Ens and Newstat; of great note in the warres of the Holy land.
• 1193 10 Leopold V. sonne of Ludovick, the irreconcileable enemie of our Richard the third, taken prisoner by him, in his passage homewards, and put unto a grievous ran∣some.
• 1230 11 Frederick the warlike, sonne of Leopold the fift, made King of Austria by the Emperour Fre∣derick the second, the last of the male issue of the house of Bamberg.
• 1246 12 Ottocar son to Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, pretending the right of Margaret his wife, si∣ster of Frederick, possessed himself of this Estate: adding thereto the Countries of Carinthia and Carniola, which he bought of Vlrick the last Princes thereof, but dis∣possessed of all by Rodolph of Habspurg.
• 1283 13 Albert II. sonne of Rodolph of Habspurg by his father made Duke of Austria, in right of Elizabeth his wife the lineall and direct heir of Agnes, daughter and heir of Frede∣rick King and Duke of Austria, after his fathers death chosen Emperour also.
• 1308 14 Rodolph the Ingenuous, his other brothers sharing with him in the estate.
• 1135 15 Albert surnamed the Short, the youngest and surviving brother of Rodolph, succeeded in the whole Estate; a great advancer of his house.
• 1358 16 Albert IV. sonne of Albert the Short.
• 1395 17 Albert V. sonne of Albert the fourth.
• 1404 18 Albert VI. sonne of Albert the fift, King of Hungary and Bohemia in right of Elizabeth his wife, daughter and heir of Sigismund the King thereof.
• 1439 19 Lad••slaus sonne of Albert and Elizabeth, King of Hungary and Bohemia, and Duke of Austria.
• 1457 20 Frederick II. on the death of Ladislaus without issue succeeded into the Dukedome of Austria, as the direct heir of Leopold the ninth, one of the younger sonnes of Albert the Short: chosen also Emperour.
• 1493 21 Maximilian sonne of Frederick enriched his house with the marriage of the heire of Bur∣gundy.
• 1519 22 Ferdinand Grandchilde to Maximilian by his sonne Philip King of Spain, and Archduke of Austria; succeeded his Grandfather in this Dukedome; King of Hungary, Bo∣hemia, and Emperour of Germany.
• 1565 23 Maximilian II. sonne of Ferdinand.
• 1577 24 Rodolphus III. sonne of Maximilian the second.
• 1••12 25 Matthias brother of Rodolphus.
• 1619 26 Ferdinand II. surnamed of Gratz, sonne of Charles Duke of Austria and Carinthia, the youngest sonne of Ferdinand the first the numerous Off-spring of Maximilian the second being all dead without issue; succeeded in the Estates of Austria, chosen Emperour also, King of Hungaria and Bohemia, &c.
• 27 Ferdinand III. sonne of Ferdinand the second, now living anno 1648. Archduke of Au∣stria, King of Hungaria and Bohemia, and Emperour of the Germans: Of whose estate and the Concomitants thereof, we shall say more, when we have took a view of the rest of the Provinces.

2. STIRIA, or STIERMARK, is bounded on the North with Austria, on the South with Carinthia; on the East with Hungary, and on the West with Carniola. Extended in length 110 miles, but in breadth not above 60, or thereabouts. The reason of the name we shall have anon.

Towns of most consequence, 1 Gratz, seated upon the River Mur, and the chief of the Province, from which the third branch of the house of Austria (since the time of Ferdinand the first) was cal∣led De Gratz, and had the Government of the Countrey for their part of that Patrimonie. A town once full of Protestants, and those so strong, that they could neither be forced out, nor hindered

from the free exercise of their Religion,* 1.41 till the year 1598, in which Margaret the late Queen of Spain, sister to the Archduke Ferdinand du Gratz, was by the Citizens solemnly entertained; with whom entered so many souldiers that the City was taken, and 14 Ministers of the Reformed Religion pre∣sently banished. 2 Rachelspurg, and 3 Pruck, both situate also on the Mur. 4 Stechaw, an Episcopall See seated on the Dra, or Dravus, a well known River, not far from the fall of the Mur into it. 5 Pe∣taw, the Paetovio of Antoninus, seated somewhat higher upon the Dravus. 6 Lamboch the Ovilabis of Antoninus, on the Dravus also. 7 Voitesperg, upon the River Kainach. 8 Cely, the Celeia of Pliny, not else observable. 9 Canisia, a well fortified place, and the strongest Bulwark of these parts against the Turk.

The whole Countrey mountainous and hilly, generally overspread with the spurs and branches of the neighbouring Alpes, and rich only in minerals; was antiently the habitation of the Taurisci (part of the Norici) from whom it took the name of Steirmark: the Germans calling that a Steir, which the Latines call Tauriscus, or a little Bullock. By which account Steir-mark, is nothing but the borders or Marches of the Taurisci, the utmost bounds of their possessions, as indeed it was: laid to Pannonia in the di∣stribution of the Roman Provinces, it was called Valeria, in honor of Valeria the daughter of Diocletian. But once dismembred from the Empire, it fell upon the name of Steir-mark, with reference to the Taurisci, spoken of before. First made an Earldom in the person of one Ottocarus advanced unto that ho∣nour by the Emperor Conrade the second. Leopold the fourth from this Ottocarus, (two other Ottocars in∣tervening) was made Marquesse of Stier-mark, and his sonne Ottocar the fourth was made Duke, by the Emperour Frederick Earbarossa.. But being without hope of issue, and infected with the un∣curable disease of the Leprosie, he sold this Countrey to Leopold the fift of Austria; bought with some part of that vast summe of money which he extorted for the ransome of King Richard the first, continued ever since in the possession of this potent Family: but so that it hath many times beene assigned over for the portion of the younger brethrens: as namely to Leopold the ninth of that name, one of the younger sonnes of Albert the short; Ernest the youngest sonne of that Leopold; and lastly to Charles the youngest sonne of Maximilian the second, called Charles of Gratz, father of Ferdinand the second, successour to Matthias in Austria it self, and all the rest of the Estates incorporate with it: not like to be so impolitickly dismembred from the chiefe of the house, as in former times.

2 CARINTHIA, by the Dutch called Karnten, is bounded on the East with Steir-mark and the River Levandt; on the West with the District of Saltzburg and the River Saltzach; on the North with Austria it selfe; and on the South with Carniola, and the River Dravus, which having its originall in the skirrs hereof passeth through these Austrian Provinces into Hungary, and falls at last into the Danow. The Countrey being situate in in the worst part of the Alpes, is generally poore and barren, except onely in minerals: extending all along the Dravus, for the length of 100 English miles, and 47 in breadth betwixt that River and the Mur by the which it is bounded.

Places of principall note in it are 1. St. Veit, or Sancti Viti, the chief town of the Countrey, situate at the meeting of the Glan and the Wunics, two small Rivers, adorned with a spacious market place, and a beautifull Conduit. 2 Vittach, seated on the Dravus in a pleasant valley, encompassed about with rocks; the houses hereof adorned on the outside with painted stories, very delightfull to behold. 3 Gurch, a small Town, but an Episcopall See. 4 Clagnfoot, on the Lake called Werd-Zee; a well fenced place, called antiently by the name of Claudia. 5. Wolsperg upon the Lavandt, so neer to Steir-mark that it is by some reckoned for a Town thereof. 6 Lavamundt on the same border, an Episcopall See; situate at the influx of that River into the Dravus. 7 Freisach, a town of much antiquity, seated on the Oleza. 8 Spittall, &c.

The strange and observable ceremonies, with which the Archdukes of Austria are acknowledged Dukes of Carinthia; take here out of Munster. In the meadowes adjoining to the Town of S. Veit, a certain countrey-man to whom that office of inheritance belongeth, sitteth on a Marble stone there be∣ing, holding in his right hand, a cow with a black calf; and in his left hand, a mare as lean as a rake. Then cometh the new Duke, attired in a plain rustick habit, his Courtiers attending him in their richest apparell: at whose approach, the Country-man above mentioned, demandeth, What hee is that so majestically cometh thitherward: and the people answer, that it is the future Duke. Hee againe asketh, whether he•• be a just Judge, and one that will maintaine the liberty of the countrey, and sincerity of the Religion: the people answer, he will: then he asketh, by what right he will displace him of his marble seat: to whom the Steward of the new Dukes house replyeth, hee shall give thee 60 pence in silver, the cattell now standing by thee, the cloathes which he hath at this time on, and thy house shall ever be free from taxe and tribute. This fellow upon this, taking the Duke by the hand, and bidding him to be a good Prince, giveth him a gentle cuffe on the eare, setting him on the marble stone, and taking away the cattell, de∣parteth. This done, the new Duke goeth to Saint Vites Church; and having done his devotions, putteth off his rustick weedes, and dresseth himself in clothes befitting a Prince: for such after their ceremonies he is acknowledged.

4. CARNIOLA, by the Dutch called Krain, is environed with Sclavonia, East: Friulo, West; Carinthia, North; and Ist••ia, South. The chief Towns are, 1 Newmarckt, 2 Esling, 3 Marsperg, Pogo∣nocke, and 5 Saxenfelt, all upon the Savus; which arising in this Countrey, runneth through the very middle of it, and after falleth into the Danow. 6 Laibach, seated on a small River of the same name, by Ptolemie called Pamportum, but by Pliny Nauportus: famous in old Mythologie for the trans∣port

of the ship called Argo,* 1.42 wherein Jason and his Comrades brought the Golden Fleece; who coming out of Pontus on the Euxine Sea, took their course up the Danow, so into the Savus, then into this town, hence carryed over land into the Adriatick, from thence sayling into Greece, where they first began the undertaking. 7 Goritz called antiently Noreja, or seated in the place where Noreja stood, is situate on the River Lisontio, an Italian water, which not far off falleth into the Adriatick. A town of so much note, that antiently it was an Earldome, and in the division of the Estate of Meinard Earl of Tirol (to whom it formerly belonged) it was given to Albert his second sonne, with the style and title of Earl of Goritz continuing in his house till the yeare 1500, when on the death of Leonard the last Earle hereof, it descended upon Maximilian the first, as next heire unto it.

The first Inhabitants of both these Provinces of Kruin, and Karnten, were the Carni, of Pliny and other Antients, who make them part of Venetia, the tenth Region of Italy: but afterwards in the distribution of the Roman Provinces cast into Noricum, and made a member of the Diocese of the Western Illyricum, but subject or subordinate rather to the Praefectus Praetorio of Italy. From them not onely the Alpes adjoining had the name of Carnicae; but these two Countries had the names by which now they goe. United of long time in the persons of the Dukes of Karnten, of whom the first mentioned upon good record was Henry sonne to Berchthold a Noble man of Bavaria, in the time of the Emperour Otho the third; by whom advanced unto this honour and estate; disposed of in suc∣ceeding times at the will of the Emperours, and given from one family unto another as their fancies served them. Not fixed in any house, till it came to Henry the sonne of Engelbert, President or Prefect of Histria: in which family it continued under this Henry and his brother Englebert, Ʋlric the first, Henry the second, Herman and Ʋlrick the second, the last Prince hereof: who being old and with∣out children sold his estate herein to Ostocar King of Bohemia and Duke of Austria: by whom these Countries were surrendred unto Rodolphus of Habspurg, on the conclusion of the peace which was made between them. And though Rodolphus gave Carinthia to Mainard Earl of Tirol, (in right of whose daughter Elizabeth, Albert the sonne of Rodolph was possessed of Austria) on the death of Henry the sonne of Mainard without issue male, it fell (according to the contract) unto Albert the Short eldest sonne of Albert and Grandchild of Rodolphus: continuing ever since in that family, though not alwayes in the chief house of the Dukes of Austria.

TIROLIS is bounded on the East with Friuly and Marca Trevigiana; on the West with the Grisons, and some part of Switzerland; on the North with Bavaria; and the South with Lombardie. Exten∣ded over the greatest part of the Alpes Rhaeticae, and some part of the Juliae: yet intermixt with many rich and fruitfull valleys, those specially which lye on the bankes of the Inn and the River of Adise. Nor are the hils so void of profit unto the Inhabitants, but that they afford good store of metals digged out of them; especially of Brasse and Silver, which last have yeelded to the Archduke 230000 Crowns yearly.

Towns of most note 1 Oenipus, or Inspruch, seated on the Inn or Oenus, which gave denomina∣tion to the second branch of the house of Austria, descended from Ferdinand, the second sonne of the Emperour Ferdinand: the house of Gratz issuing from Charles the third sonne of that Emper∣our. Most memorable for the hasty flight of Charles the fift, upon the news that Duke Maurice whom he had lately made Electour of Saxonie, was coming against him with his Forces: which so terrified him, that he fled away by torch-light, with some few of his followers, the residue of his Court (most of which were persons of great eminency) trudging in the dark on foot, with the Black Guard and the Skullerie: the Town being many times the Residence of the Dukes of Austria, who have here a very Royall and magnificent Palace. And to say truth, the town deserveth to be so honoured; amongst pleasant Meadows, spacious cornfields, and shady mountaines sweetly seated: the houses fairly built of stone, enriched by the Courts of Judicature here setled for all the Countrey, and provided of a gallant Armorie. 2 Trent (Tridentum it is called in Latine) situate in the confines of Germany and Italy; for which cause the Inhabitants speak both languages. Built on the bankes of the River Athesis or Adice; honoured with an Episcopall See, but made more fa∣mous by the Councell which was there begun by Pope Paul the third, anno 1545. against the Luthe∣rans: For 22 yeares together before their meeting, dashed by one Pope and intimated by another, advanced by Charles the fift upon worldly Policies, and for as worldly policies retarded by the Court of Rome for 18 years after this first Convention of it, at sundry times, assembled, suspended, and dissolved. And finally when fixed here seriously by Pope Pius the fourth, anno 1562. managed with so much art and cunning by the Papall partie, that nothing was determined among the Prelates, but what had formerly been resolved on, in the Roman Conclave, and certified accordingly by especiall Posts: occasioning that most bitter jest of one of the Hungarians Bishops who was present at it, that the Holy Ghost was sent unto them in a Cloak-bag from Rome. The effects of which Councell, so artificially carryed on by the strength of wit, I cannot better describe then in the words of the History of it, which are as followeth.

This Councell, desired and procured by godly men to re-unite the Church which began to be divided, hath so established the Schism, and made the parties so obstinate, that the discords are irreconcileable. And being managed by Princes for Reforma∣tion of Ecclesiasticall Discipline, hath caused the greatest deformation that ever was since Christianity did begin: and hoped for by the Bishops themselves to regain the Episcopall Authority, for the most part usurped by the Pope, hath made them lose it altogether, bringing them into greater servitude. On the contrary, feared and avoided by the See of Rome, as a potent meanes to moderate the exorbitant power thereof, mounted from small beginnings by divers degrees, to

an unlimitted excesse; it hath so established and confirmed the same over that part which remai∣ned subject unto it,* 1.43 that it was never so great, nor soundly rooted.

So far the words of the History. The next of note is, 3 Falkenstein, remarkable for mines of Brasse; as 4 Hal upon the Inn for Salt-witches; and 5 Schwas for the richer mines of Silver. 6. Malk, near the head of the River At••esis. 7 Pollen, upon the borders of Italy, by the people whereof called Folgiano, and Bolsano. 8 Tirol, an ancient Castle, the first seat of the Earls or Governours hereof, and giving name for that reason, to the Country adjoyning.

The Earls hereof, were at the first no other then Provinciall Officers; when made Proprietaries, I am yet to seek. The first of whom we have any certainty was Mainard, Earl of Tirol and Goritz, who dyed in the yeer 1258, leaving his Earldomes to that Mainard, who by Rodolfus Habspurgensis was en∣feoffed with the Dukedome of Karnten. But Henry the sonne of this last Mainard, dying without issue male, his daughter Margaret, by the consent of all her people, setled her estate therein on the sonnes of Albert, called the Short: continuing ever since in the house of Austria, though sometimes made the portion and inheritance of the younger Princes. By Ferdinand the first, it was given in A∣pennage to his 2^d son Ferdinand surnamed of Inspruch for that reason: who by marrying with Philippina a Burgers daughter of Augsburg, so displeased his Brethren, that to buy his peace of them, and enjoy his own content with her, it was finally agreed upon amongst them all, that Tirol should not de∣scend upon his Children of that venter. In pursuance whereof, after his decease, Tirol fell to the house of Gratz: his eldest son Charles being made Marquesse of Burgh, and Andrew his youngest Car∣dinall of Brixia.

The Armes of these Earls when distinct from the house of Austria, were Argent, an Eagle Sable, membred Or. Those of Carinthia, united for a time unto them (as before was noted) being Argent, three Lions Leopards Sable.

Thus have we seen by what means all these Provinces belonging unto severall Lords, became united and incorporated into one estate. Besides which, there was added to it by Rodolph of Habspurg, all the Vpper Elsats, the Castle and Territory of Hapspurg it self, with many fair Estates amongst the Switzers, by Albert the Short, the Country of Sungow, and by his sonnes the Advocateship of Friberg, or the Country of Brisgow. So that these Princes are undoubtedly the greatest for power and patri∣mony of any in Germany; and would be of a great revenue, if the ill neighbour-hood of the Turkes did not put them to continuall charges, and make the borders of the Country to be thinly planted, and not very thorowly manured. Howsoever, it is thought that they may yeild yeerly two millions of Crowns and upwards to the Arch-dukes Coffers.

The Armes of these Princes are Gules, a Fesse Argent, assumed by Marquesse Leopold at the siege of Acon, or Ptolemais in the Holy land; because his holy Armour being covered with blood, his Belt onely remained white. The Armes thereof in former times having been six larkes Or, in a field Azure, supposed to have been taken by the first Marquesses, because they possessed those six Provinces, for defence of which the tenth Legion called Alauda, had been fixed at Vienna.

And now we are to take our leave of the Roman Empire, which we shall meet withall no more till we come to Hungary; the Countries on the north side of Danubius, and the East side of the Rhene, being almost assoone abandoned, as conquered by them. So that in our survey of these northern Countries, we are not like to finde such matter of Antiquity as we had before, but must content our selves both with Towns and Villages of a later date, and a lesse continuance. In which we shall begin with those Countries which lie on the other side of Rhene, bordering on the Estates of Cleve∣land and the Bishop-electors; and ••o proceed on Eastward till we come to the furthest parts of Germany, and the confines of Hungary; afterwards turning to the North till we meet with Denmark, which is the next of all to be considered.

9 VETERAVIA.

VETERAVIA, or WETERAW, is bounded on the West with the Bishoprick of Colen, on the East with Frankenland; on the North with Hassia, and Westphalen, and on the South with the Lower Palatinate. It containeth a combination of many small Estates, which being joyned in a common league for defence of each other, for the preservation of their Lawes, Liberties, and Religion, are called the Confederation of Weteraw. The Principall of the States which are thus confederated, are the Earls of 1 Nassaw; 2 Hanaw; and 3 Stolms; 4 the Lord of Licht••berg; and the Imperiali Cities of 5 Friberg; and 6 Wetzelaer.

The County of Nassaw lyeth at the foot of the Mountains which divide Hassia from Engern and Westphalen, anciently called Melibocus, a branch of the long ridge of Mountains which were called Abnobi. Chief Townes hereof, are 1 Nassaw, situate on the south side of the River Lou, not farre from the fall of it into the Rhene; the first seat, and honourary Title of this famous fami∣ly, and still in the possession of the Princes of Orange, the first branch hereof. 2 Dillingbourg, the usuall seat of the Earls of Nassaw, before their setling in the Low Countries; hence named the Earls of Nassaw of the house of Dillingberg, to difference them from others of the same Family. 2 Catrezelbogen, in Latine, Catti Meliboci, which shewes the name to be compounded of the Catti, anciently possessed of these parts of Germany, and the mountainous parts of Melibocus, then inhabited by them. The possession of this town much controverted between the Earls of Nassaw, and

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

〈1 page duplicate〉〈1 page duplicate〉

the Lantgraves of Hessen.* 1.44 But finally, surrendred by Count William of Nassaw (father of Wili•••••• Prince of Orange) unto Philip the Lantgrave, in the time of Charles the fift, for the summe 600000 Crowns: the house of Nassaw notwithstanding retaining it amongst their Titles. 3. Herborn, a small University or Schola Illustris, founded of late by the Earls of Nassaw: in which Piscator was Divi∣nity Reader, and Alstedius (both famous in their times) professour for the Arts and Sciences. 4 Idstein, lying south to Catzenelbogen; and 5. Wisbad, directly south of Idstein, betwixt that and the Meine; these have the title and possessions of the second branch of this Family. 6. Weilborough on the Lou, not far from Wetzelver, which gives Title to the third branch of this house, called the Earls of Nassaw in Sarbruck and Weilborough.

As for the Princes of the house of Nassaw, they are very ancient: Otho of Nassaw being made Earl of Guelderland in the yeer 1079. Another Otho of this house, but proceeding from a different branch of it, dying anno 1190. the founder of the present Family of the Princes of Orange; and of the house of Wisbad and Idstein, out of which descended Adolphus Earl of Nassaw chosen Emperour, in the yeer 1292. By the marriage of Engelbert the sixt Earl of this house of Dillingberg, with Mary daughter of Philip, Lord of Breda in Brabant; they came first to be possessed of Estates in the Netherlands: and by the marriage of Henry, great Grand-child of this Engelbert, with Claude of Chalons, they got the Prin∣cipality of Orange in France. A family as much honoured for the personall merit of the Princes of it, as any other in Europe: of whom we have already given a Catalogue, in the description and story of Provence.

Bordering on Franconia, or Frankenland, lyeth the County of HANAW, so called from the Chief town of it: in which the places of most note, are 1 Hanaw it self, in Latine called Hanovia, ho∣noured with a Schola illustris also; and much inriched by the trade of Printing, with which they use to furnish annually the Marts of Frankefort, distant from hence about ten Dutch miles. 2. Pfaffenhofen, of no note formerly, but like to be remembred in the stories of succeeding times for the great de∣feat there given to the Duke of Lorrain, July 31. 1633. who lost his whole Forces, all his Ordi∣nance, Ammunition, and baggage; and which was worst of all, his Country, taken in part from him by the Conquering Swedes, who followed him close into his home; but wholly by the French King upon that advantage. 3 Lichteberg, which gives title to a second branch of the house of Hanaw, called the Lord of Lichteberg. A family of good esteeme, since the time that Otho of Hanaw was ennobled with the title of Earl thereof, which was about the yeer 1392. before that Princes of the Empire; and after that advanced unto greater fortunes, by the addition of the Barony of Minzeberg, in the person of Philip the first Earl of the County of Rheineck, in the person of another Philip the third of that name, great Grand-child of the former Philip; and finally, of the Lordship and estate of Lichteberg, accrewing to this house by the marriage of a third Philip, the youngest sonne of Reynard the third Earl hereof, with Anne the daughter and heir of Ludovick, Lord of Lichteberg; the title and possession of the second branch of the house of Hanaw, called Lords of Lichteberg, and Hocsenstein, and Earls of Bitsch; this last being an estate in Lorrain, accrewing to them by the marriage of a fourth Philip, (the fift in name and order of the house of Lichteberg) with Margaret, sole daughter and heir of Ludovick the last Earl thereof.

Betwixt the Counties of Nassaw, and Hanaw, on both sides of the River Lou, lies the Earl∣dome of SOLMS, the first Earl whereof (of whom there is any good Constat) was Henry, honoured with this title, anno 1220. But being I finde them in the Catalogue of the Counts Imperiall made be∣fore that time, I must conclude them to be ancienter then the date aforesaid; though that sufficient to ennoble a far greater Family. By the marriage of Conrade the ninth from Henry first with Eliza∣beth one of the daughters of William of Nassaw Prince of Orange, and after with the widow of the Earl of Egmond, they came to be of such Authority amongst the Netherlands, as to be priviledged with a place and suffrage in the Councell of the States Generall: there settled at the present in their greatest honour, especially since the marriage of Henry of Nassaw Prince of Orange with a daughter of Earl Conrade by his second wife; the mother of William of Nassaw, now Prince of Orange, and husband to the Princesse Mary, the eldest daughter of Great Britain. But besides their Estates there, they are possessed in this tract of 1 Branufels, which gives title to the first branch of the house of Solms. 2 Croneberg, the possession of the second branch of this Family; and 3 Solms, on the north side of the Lou, the root of both.

Of the Imperiall Cities in this Confederation, the first is Friberg, called for distinction sake, Friberg in Wederaw, to difference it from another Town of that name in Brisgow: situate in the midle of deli∣cious and most fruitfull elds: and memorable for the stout resistance which it made to Adolphus of Nassaw, at that time Emperour: who when he could not get it by force, or famine, obtained it by fraud; and put to death no lesse then 40 of chief Nobility, whom he found in the Castle. So ha∣ted for that bloody fact, that he was shortly after deprived of the Empire, and slain in fight by Albert of Austria his Competitor. The second of the two is Wetzelaer, seated on the Lou, where it meets with the Dille, which rising neer Dillengberg, a town of the Earl of Nassawes, doth here lose its name into the greater. A town Imperiall, confederate with Frideberg, and the Princes before mentioned, for maintaining their common liberties, and the Religion publickly professed amongst them, being that of the Reformed Churches of Calvins Platform.

10. FRANCONIA.* 1.45

FRANCONIA or FRANKENLAND, is bounded on the East with the Vpper Palatinate, and part of Voitland; on the West with the Confederates of Wederaw, and part of the Rhene; on the north with Hassia, and Thuringia, and on the south with the Palatinate of the Rhene, and some part of Schwaben, so called from the French, Franci, or Francones, in whose possession it was, when they were first known unto the Romans; the Residence of their Dukes or Princes in this noble Province, appropriating the name unto it. Called also Francia Orientalis, to difference it from the Realm of France, which lay more towards the West.

The Country on the out-parts overgrown wholly in a manner with woods and forrests, and environed almost with Mountains, parts of the old Hercinian Wolds; is within, pleasant, plain, and fruitfull; sufficiently plentifull both of corn and wines, but abundantly well stored with Rape, and Licoras, and yeilding good pasture for Cattell: so that we may compare it to a fine piece of Cloth, wrought about with a course list; or an excellent fine piece of Lawn, with a canvasse Selvage.

Chief Rivers of it, are 1 The Main, or Moenus, which running thorow the midst of it, is re∣ceived into the Rhene below Frankfort: 2 The Sala, whence the adjoyning French had the name of Salii; and Conrade, Emperour of the Germans, the surname of Salicus. 3 Radiantis; 4 Sinna; 5 Tu∣bero; 6 Aestus, &c.

The People of it are ingenious, patient of labour, strong of body, and very industrious, not suf∣fering any to be idle that can earn his living of what sort soever. The off-spring of the ancient French, who having over-mastered Gaul, and the parts adjoyning, left here the seminary of their strength, and a stock of their antient Princes: Marcomir, brother of Pharamond the first King of the French, governing in these parts as Duke, and leaving the estate and title unto his posterity. The catalogue of which Princes, take in order thus:

The PRINCES of the FRANKES, and DUKES of FRANCONIA, of the old FRENCH Race.

• A. Ch.
• 326 1 Genebaldus, the son of Dagobert, descended from the old Regal stock of the Sicambri, united with other Dutch nations about 60 or 70 yeers before in the name of Frankes, ha∣ving subdued those parts which lay towards the River Moenus: became the first Prince of the Eastern Frankes, or Lord of Francia Orientalis.
• 356 2 Dagobert, the sonne of Genebaldus, who added the District of Triers unto his Estates.
• 377 3 Clodovaeus, or Ludovicus, the sonne of Dagobert.
• 398 4 Marcomir, the sonne of Clodovaeus, who extended his Dominion Eastwards towards Bavaria and Bohemia.
• 402 5 Pharamund, or Waramund, the sonne of Marcomir, the first of this line which took unto himself the title of King of the French: on the assuming whereof, (aiming at mat∣ters of more importance) he left Franconia or East-France, with the Title of Duke to his brother Marcomir.
• 419 6 Marcomir, the brother of Pharamund.
• 423 7 Prunmesser, by some called Priamus, the son of Marcomir.
• 435 8 Genebaldus II. the son of Prunmesser.
• 455 9 Sunno, the son of Genebald the second.
• 478 10 Clodomirus, or Luitomarus, the son of Sunno.
• 515 11 Hygobaldus, the son of Clodomir, who became a Christian, and added Wormes and Mentz unto his Estates.
• 541 12 Helenus, by some called Hermericus, a Christian also, who passing over the Rhene, sub∣dued that tract bordering betwixt Triers and Lorrain, which the Dutch call We∣sterich.
• 571 13 Gotofridus, the son of Helenus, a Christian also, but not able to perswade his people to the same belief.
• 595 14 Genebaldus III. the son of Gotofrede.
• 615 15 Clodomir II. the son of Genebald the third.
• 638 16 Heribert, the Nephew of Clodomir the second.
• 668 17 Clodovaeus, or Clovis II. the Cousin-german of Heribert.
• 680 18 Gosbertus, the son of Clovis the second.
• 706 19 Gosbertus II. the son of Gosbert the first.
• 720 20 Hetavus, the son of Gosbert the second, the last Duke of Franconia of this line. Who dying

• without issue male, anno 740. bequeathed it at his death to Pepin, who afterwards was King of France, Father of Charles the great; according to a former contract made between those Princes: and Charles no sooner had it in his possession, but he bestowed the greatest part of it on Burchard the first Bishop of Wurtzburg, anno 752. made Bishop of that City by Boniface, Arch-bishop of Mentz. (the first Apostle of this People) but a yeer before. The Bishops of Wurtzburg by this grant were possessed hereof, as long as any of the house of Charls the Great did possesse the Empire. But his posterity failing in the person of Conrade, anno 910. Otho the first (who next but one succeeded Conrade) invested Conrade, husband to Luitgardis his daughter, with this Country, giving him withall the title of Duke of Francony. Four Princes of this house possessed it: that is to say, this Conrade surnamed Salicus, and after him three Henries, father, son and nephew, successively enjoying the Imperiall dignity, by the name of Henry the third, fourth, and fift. This Henry, the last Prince of the male line of Conrade, dying without issue, Franconia fell to Frederick Barbarossa, Duke of Schwaben, as next heir to Henry by the Lady Agnes his Sister, married to Frederick the Antient Duke of Schwaben, the grand-father of Barbarossa: But that house being also extinct in the person of Conradine, anno 1268. and no one heir pretending to the rights thereof; the Bishops of Wurtzburg challenged it on the former grant: content to let some great ones have a part of the spoil, that he and his successours might enjoy the rest. By means whereof it came to be divided betwixt the Bishops of Wurtzburg, Bamberg, Mentz, the Electour Palatine of the Rhene, (for antiently the Palatinate and the Bishoprick of Mentz were but parts of Franken∣land) the Marquesse of Onolsbach, the Earls of Swartzenberg, Henneberg, and Hohenloe, and as many of the Free or Imperiall Cities, as are seated in it. Thus every one did gather sticks when the great Oak fell: the title of Duke of Francony remaining not∣withstanding to the Bishops of Wurtzburg.

1. WVRTZBVRB, the Metropolis of Franconia, the seat and residence of the Bishop who is Titulary Duke hereof, is situate on the Mein, or Moenus, in a pleasant plain environed with Meadowes, gar∣dens, and fruitfull mountains; and very well fenced with walls, trenches, bulwarks, and other Arts of modern fortification: well peopled, and for the most part handsomely and neatly built. Passing over the Bridge built of free stone on many large and spacious Arches, you come unto a fair and pompous (though ancient) Castle; the ordinary dwelling of the Bishop: and yet so strong that the many vain attempts of the Boores and Citizens, apt to pick quarrells with their Prince, made it thought impregnable; to which the situation of it on the top of an hill, added some advantage, but it proved ••erwise when besieged by the King of Sweden, anno 1631. who after a short, but stout resistance, took it by assault. Other townes of most note which belong to the Bishops of Wurtzburg, are 2 Forchein, where it is said that Pontius Pilate was born. 3 Gemand, at the meeting of the Meine, and the Sal, or Sala; 4 Chronac; 5 Staphelstein; 6 Hockstad, of which little memorable.

But to return unto the Bishop as chief Lord of all; he is called in the refined Latine of these times, Herbipolitanus, but commonly Wurtziburgensis; differing in sound, but not in sense: For Wurtz∣burg is no other then a town of Worts, situate amongst plants and gardens, as before is said; and Her∣bipolis, made up out of severall languages, doth signifie no more then a City of Herbs. By whom the Episcopall See was here first erected, and how the Bishops hereof came to be intituled unto their Estates, hath been shewn already. The manner how the new Bishop is admitted, and the old in∣terred, may be worth our knowledge. On the decease of the former Bishop, the Lord Elect attended with a great train of horse is to make his entrance. Assoone as coming within the Gates, he alights off his horse, and putteth off his robes, and being attired in a poor and despicable habit, begirt about with a rope, bare-headed also, & bare-footed, he is conducted by the Earls of Henneberg, Custel, Wortheim, and Reineck, to S. Saviours Church, being his Cathedrall. The Dean and Canons there meeting him, ask him what he would have: to which he modestly replyeth, that though unworthy, he is come to discharge the office unto which he is called. Then the Dean thus, I admit thee in the name of this whole Chapter, committing to thy care this Church of Saint Saviours, and the Dukedome thereunto belonging, in the name of the Father, Son, and holy Ghost. Which done, he putteth on his Episcopall habi. ••yeth Masse, and from thence passeth to his Castle, where he gives entertainment to all the Company. The living Bishop thus invested, proceed we next unto the buriall of the dead, whose body being embow∣elled, is kept in the Chappell of the Castle, his heart preserved in a vessell of glasse. The next day he is carried to the Monastery of Saint James, holding a Crozier Staffe in his right hand, and a sword in his left; buried with which the next day after, in the Church of S. Saviour. As for the Revenues of the Bishop, they must needs be great; the Bishop hereof, in the time of Charles the fift, compounding for his peace with Albert, Marquesse of Brandenbourg, at the price of 220000 Crownes in ready mo∣ney, and entring into bond to pay all his debts, which amounted to 350000 Crownes in ready mo∣ney, and entring into bond to pay all his debts, which amounted to 350000 Crowns more: by which we may partly guess at the richnesse of his Exchequer, and partly at the greatness of his Intrado.

2. The second great Lord of Franconie is the Bishop of BAMBERG, a City seated on the Mein, not far from Wurtzburg: the little River Regnite falling there into it; supposed by Mercator to be the Granionarium of Ptolemy, and to have took this new name from the hill Baba (so called from Baba,

daughter of Otho Duke of Saxon, and w••••e of A••bert 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Earl hereof) upon which it is situate: the right name being Babemberg (remember that B••g in Dutch signifieth an Hill) and contractedly Bamberg. A City delectably seated amongst mountaines and pleasant gardens, and in a soil ex∣ceeding fruitfull of all necessaries, and yeelding Liquorice in great plenty: the birth-place of Joachimus Camerarius, one of the great lights of Germany, and a See Episcopall, the Bishop of which is exempt from the power of his Metropolitan, subject immediately to the Pope, and Lord of many fair towns and territories in this Countrey; but much diminished since the time of Charles the fift; the Bishop thereof then being, giving to Marquesse Albert above mentioned for a cessation from arms, anno 1530. no lesse then 60 of his Lordships (most of which fall unto the share of the Marquesse of Onaldsbach) besides the tutelage or Guardianship of his Wards and Clients. Of those which are remaining in the hands of the Bishops, the principall are 1 Gragingliac, 2 Schleistat.

3. The third great Lord to be considered is the Marquesse of Onaldsbach or Ansbach, who is Ma∣ster of no small part of this Countrey; but his Estate (as those of the other German Princes) con∣fused and intermixt with his neighbours. His chief Townes, 1 Onaldsbach or Ansbach, the usuall residence of these Marquesses, and the birth-place of most of their children. 2 Hailbrun, on the edge of Wirtenberg; walled in about in the yeare 1085. and honoured with some publick Schools there founded by Marquesse George Frederick, anno 1582. 3 Pleinfelt, not far from Nuremberg. Such places as they hold in Voiteland, we shall meet with them there.

These Marquesses are of the puissant family of Brandenbourg, by whom this fair estate was wrested from the Female heirs of Wolframius, the last Lord hereof: the first who did enjoy this Estate and Title being Marquesse George Frederick the sonne of Albert Marquesse and Elector of Brandenbourg called the Achilles of Germany; the Father of Albert the first Duke of Prussia, and of George, the first Mar∣quesse of Jagendorf; and Grandfather of that Marquesse Albert, who in the dayes of Charles the Fift so harassed this Countrey. But his male-issue by Casimir his eldest sonne failing in that Albert, anno 1557. it returned to the Electorall house, and by Sigismund, a late Electour was given to Joachim Ernestus, one of his younger brethren; who by the Princes of the Vnion for defence of the Palatinate was made chief Commander of their Forces, anno 1620. A charge in which it was sup∣posed that he carryed himself neither so faithfully nor so valiantly, as he should have done, being much condemned for suffering Spinola with his Army to passe by unfought with, when hee had all advantages that could be wished for, to impede his march: the greatest part of the Palatinate being lost immediately upon that neglect: and by degrees the rest of the Vnited Provinces, either taken off from their engagement, or ruined for adhering to it with too great a constancie. To him succeeded his son Christian now possessed hereof.

As for the other secular Princes which have any considerable estates in this Countrey, they are the Earls of Henneberg, Hohenloe, Rheineck, Castell, Wortheim, Horpach, and Swartzenbourg, together with the Lords of Lemburg, and Rheichisberg; all of them named so from the chiefe town of their Estates, and all those townes enriched with some suitable territorie. Of these the Earles of Henneberg, Rheineck, Castell, and Wortheim, are Homagers to the Bishop of Wurtzburg, and are to doe him service at his Inthronization: the Earldome of Rheineck being now united to that of Hanow, as was shewn before; and that of Henneberg most famous in that one of the Earles hereof was Father of that incredible increase of children (as many as there be dayes in the yeares) produced at one birth by the Lady Margaret his wife, sister of William Earle of Holland and King of the Romans. A Family of as great Antiquity as most in Germany, fetching their Pedegree as high as to Charles the Great, without help of the Heralds. But they of greatest power and parentage amongst them, are the Earls of SCHWARTZENBVRG, deriving themselves from one Witikindus, of the house of Saxony: who fighting for his Countrey against the French, anno 779. was taken prisoner, carried into France, and there baptized at the perswasion of Lewis the Godly, sonne of Charles the Great, Witikindus his sonne and successour, being baptized at the same time also by the name of Charles, was the first Earl of Swartzenburg, a Castle of his owne building on the edge of Turingia, anno 796. whose posterity doe still hold the same, but much improved in their Estates by marriages and other accrewments. A race of Princes which have yeelded many of great influence in the affairs of Germany: amongst them Gunther Earl of Schwartzenburg, elected Emperour of the Romans against Charles the fourth, by Rodolph Electour Palatine, Ericus Duke of Saxony, Ludovick Marquesse of Brandenburg, and Henry Archbishop of Mentz. By which last solemnly inaugurated at Aken (or Aquisgrane) anno 1349. But being unworthily poysoned by his Competitour, though he dyed not of it, yet he was made so weak and unfit for action, that he was forced to surrender his pretentions to his mortall enemy, receiving in compensation for his charges 22000 marks in silver, and some towns in Turingia.

Of the Imperiall Cities, which share amongst them the remainders of Frankenlandt, the principall are 1 Frankford on the Meine, so called from its situation on the River Meine, to difference it from Frankford in the Countrey of Brandenburg; Divided by the River into two parts, joined to∣gether by a bridge of stone, the lesser part, situate on the right hand shore of the River, being cal∣led Saxen-hausen, the greater part, properly called Frank-ford, seated on the other; both under one Magistrate, and both together making up a fair, rich, populous, and well traded town; of great both riches and repute, by reason of the famous Marts here held in the midst of Lent and September yearly; and the Election of the Emperour or King of the Romans as occasion is. The City of a round form, compassed with a double wall, beautified with some walkes without the town on the

bankes of the River amongst Vineyards, meadowes and sweet groves: called thus, as some say, from Francus the sonne of Marcomie, supposed to be the founder of it; or a Francorum vado, as the Ford of the Francks, before the building of the bridge. 2 Schweinfort, on the Meine also, in a fruitfull soil. 3 Rotenburg on the River Tuber. 4 Winsheim. Here is also the town of 5 Koburg, which belongeth to the house of Saxony, and gives title unto some of the younger Princes of it, called from hence Dukes of Saxen-koburg. And hereto may be added 6 the fair City of Nurenburg, con∣ceived by most to be within the Vpper Palatinate: but by the Emperor Maximilian made a member of the Circle of Franconie, in regard most of the Estates and possessions of it lie within this Countrey. Of which indeed they have so plentifull a share, that when Maurice Electour of Saxony, and his con∣federates had driven Charles the fift out of Germany, Marquesse Albert before mentioned (whose sword was his best Revenue) picking a quarrell with this City, burnt no lesse then an hundred Villages belonging to it, 70 Manours and Farmhouses appertaining to the wealthier Citizens, 3000 Acres of their Woods: and after all this havock made of their estate, compelled them to compound with him for 200000 Crownes in Money, and six peeces of Ordinance. But being the City it selfe seems rather to belong to the other Palatinate, wee shall there meet with it.

Amongst these Prelates, Princes and Imperiall Cities is the great Dukedome of Franconia, at this time divided; the title still remaining in the Bishop of Wurtzburg, and some part of the Countrey: but both the Countrey and the title of Duke of Francony, not long since otherwise disposed of. For the Swedes having taken Wurtzburg anno 1631. as before is said, together with the City of Bamberg, and all the Towns and Territories appertaining to them, conferred them upon Bernard Duke of Saxon-Weymer, with the style and title of Duke of Franconia. Inaugurated therein in the Cathedrall Church of Wurtzburg, July 19. 1633. the Nobility and Gentry of the Countrey doing homage to him, and all the Magistrates and Officers of the severall Cities taking the oaths of Allegiance: the new Duke also making Oath, that he would carefully maintain them in their rights and Priviledges. In the solemnities of which day, the first great Gun discharged in the way of triumph, broke in the going off without any hurt done but the wounding of one souldier onely. An omen that all this solemn Act would prove but a Pageant, and break in pieces at the first giving fire unto it. And so accordingly it did: the victory at Norlingen, which followed not long after this, putting the Bi∣shops once more into their possessions, and leaving nothing to the new Duke but an hungry title. And therefore leaving both the old and new Titular Dukes, wee will here adde the Catalogue of those who were Dukes indeed, and had together with the title the full possession of the Countrey.

DVKES of FRANCONIA of the DVTCH or GERMAN RACE.

• 974 1 Conradus surnamed Salicus, created Duke of Franconia by Otho the first, whose daughter Luitgardis he had marryed: after the death of Henry the second, elected Emperour by the name of Conrade the second, anno 1025.
• 1040 2 Henry the sonne of Conrade, Duke of Franconia, and Emperour by the name of Henry the third.
• 1056 3 Henry II. of Franconia, and IV. of the Empire.
• 1106 4 Henry III. of Franconia, and the V. of the Empire.
• 1125 5 Frederick (surnamed) Barbarossa Duke of Schwaben, Nephew of Frederick the Antient, Duke of Swevia, and of Agnes his wife, the sister and next heir of Henry; succeeded in the Empire after the death of Conrade the third his Uncle, anno 1153.
• 1190 6 Frederick the second sonne of Barbarossa II. Duke of Franconia and Schwaben.
• 7 Conrade II. brother of Frederick the second, succeeded in both Estates.
• 8 Philip the younger brother of Conrade, succeeded in both Dukedomes after his decease; and on the death of Henry the sixt his eldest brother, was elected Emperour, anno 1198.
• 1207 9 Frederick III. of Franconia, and the V. of Suevia, sonne of the Emperour Henry the sixt, whom hee succeeded in the Kingdome of Naples, and Sicil, anno 1202. and on the death of Otho the fourth, anno 1212. was elected Emperour, of that name the second.
• 1250 10 Conrade III. of Franconie, the II. of Schwaben, and the IV. of the Empire, the son of Frederick the third, whom he succeeded in al his Titles and Estates.
• 1254 11 Conradine sonne of Conrade the third, Duke of Franconia and Schwaben; dispossessed of his Kingdomes of Naples and Sicil by Manfred, the Base Brother of his Father; and finally beheaded by Charles of Anjou, who succeeded Manfred in those Kingdomes, anno 1268. After whose death this royall house being quite extinguished; the Bishops of Wurtz∣burg did again resume the title of Dukes of Franconia; content to let some of the greater Lords and Prelates which lived neer unto him, to share in the possession of it, as before was noted.

11. WIRTENBERG,* 1.46 and 12. BADEN.

These I have joined together though distinct Estates, because both of them taken out of the great Dukedome of Schwaben, erected both aabout one time, and lying very close in a round together: bounded upon the East and South with the Schwaben properly so called; on the North with the lower Palatinate; on the West with the Rhene, and that part of Schawben which is called brisgow par∣ted asunder by the Mountainous ridge of hils called Schwartzwald; Wirtenberg lying on the East side thereof, and Baden betwixt it and the Rhene.

And first for WIRTENBERG, the air thereof is very healthy, neither too hot in Summer, nor too cold in Winter: the soil thereof near Swartzenwald lying on the West, and the Alps of Swe∣via, on the South, of it self barren and unprofitable; but in some places by the industrie of the Plough∣man, made to yeild good corn. But in the middle parts thereof which lye towards the Neccar, little inferiour for fruitfulnesse both of corn and wine, unto any in Germanie; besides some silver mines near Wiltberg, and about Puellach, a small Town, such abundance of brasse, that the Foundation of the houses seem to be laid upon it.

It took this name from the Castle of Wirtenberg, the first seat of the Princes of it, as that did from the Intuergi, inhabiting the Dutch side of the Rhene; or the Virthungi, as Beatus Rhenanus thinketh men∣tioned by Trebellius Gellio in the life of Aurelianus, to which the word Berg being added for a termina∣tion, made it first Tuergin-berg, or Virthung-berg, and after Wirtenberg.

Places of most importance in it, are 1 Stutgard, the Dukes seat, a fair, rich, and populous town, and the chief of the Dukedome; seated in a pleasant and fruitfull Plaine not farre from the Neccar, yeilding a quantity of wine almost incredible. 2 Tubingen, on both sides of the Neccar, united into one with a fair stone Bridge. A Town well built, situate in a very rich soil, and finally adorned with an Universitie here founded by Eberhard the first Duke of Wirtenberg, anno 1477. in which Leo∣nardu•• Fuchsius that great Herbarist and Restaurator of Physick, was once a Professour of that Facultie. 3 Constat, upon the Neccar also, not far from which on the top of an hill, stands the old Castle of Wirtenberg before mentioned. 4 Wietberg, of great esteem for its Mines of silver. 5 Archingen, in∣habited chiefly by Jews. 6 Schorndorf upon the Reems, much resorted to by reason of the hot baths there; as is also 7 Nownburg, on the Entz. 8 Heidenhein, 9 Grieningen, 10 Marbach, of which little memorable. There are also within the limits of this Dukedom many Towns Imperiall, as 1 Wimp∣sen, and 2 Haibrum, on the Neccar. 3 Gepping, upon the river Vils. 4 Weil, 5 Reutling, on the Neccar also, made Imperiall by Frederick the 2. anno 1240. otherwise of no great note but for the Paper mils. 6 Esling.

The first Inhabitants hereof, were the Charitni of Ptolemie, and part of the Intuergi spoken of before, made subject with the rest of these parts to the Almains, after to the French, and finally a member of the great Dukedom of Schwaben. From which dismembred in the time of Henry 4. after the dangerous war raised against him by Duke Rodolphus, advanced by the practise of Pope Hildebrand to the Throne Imperiall; it came to have Princes of its own: the first Earl being Conrade in the year 1100, by the grace and favour of the said Emp. Henry. Increased by the addition of the Earldom of Montbelguard and many other accrewments it was made a Dukedom in the person of Eberhard the 6. by Maximilian the 1. anno 1495. The Earls and Dukes whereof follow thus in order:

The EARLS and DUKES of WIRTENBERG.

• 1 Conrade the first Earl
• 2 Vlrick, son of Conrade.
• 3 John son of Vlrick.
• 4 Lewis son of John.
• 5 Henry son of Lewis.
• 6 Eberhard son of Henry.
• 7 Vlrick II. son of Eberhard.
• 8 Eberhard II. son of Vlrick.
• 1325 9 Vlrick III. son of Eberhard.
• 1344 10 Eberhard III. son of Vlric.
• 1392 11 Vlric IV. son of Eberhard.
• 12 Eberhard IV. son of Vlric.
• 1417 13 Eberhard V. son of Eberhard the 4. by his marriage with Henrica, or Henriette, daughter of Henry Earl of Montbelguard, added that Earldom to his house.
• 1419 14 Lewis or Ludovick II. son of Eberhard the 5.
• 1456 15 Eberhard VI. son of Lewis, Founder of the Universitie of Tubingen, created by Maxi∣milian the 1. the first Duke of Wirtenberg, anno 1495. He deceased without issue, anno 1496.
• ...

• 1496 16 Eberhard VII. son of Vlric, the younger brother of Lewis the 2. succeeded on the death of Eberhard his Cousin German.
• 1504 17 Henry the brother of Eberhard the 7.
• 1519 18 Vlric V. son of Henry the 2. expulsed out of his Dukedom by Charls the 5. for the sack of Reutling an Imperiall Citie; and his Estate conferred on Ferdinand of Austria, the bro∣ther of Charls; but after 15 years exile, restored to his Dukedom by Philip Lantgrave of Hassia. He reformed Religion, and liberally endowed the Universitie of Tu∣bingen.
• 1550 19 Christopher the son of Vlric the 5. a follower of his Fathers steps in Reformation of the Church, and Advancement of Learning.
• 1568 20 Ludevick or Lewis III. son of Christopher.
• 21 Frederick son of George Earl of Montbelgard the brother of Vlric the 5. made Knight of the Garter by Queen Elizabeth, anno 1597.
• 22 John-Frederick son of Frederick the 1.
• 23 John-Eberard, eldest son of the former Duke, anno 1649.

The Revenues of this Duke are supposed to be equall unto those of the Electors Palatine, spoken of before; and were it not for the silver mines in Saxonle, little inferiour to those of that Duke. But for provisions of war, (excepting Powder only) he is meanly furnished. A main defect considering the ill terms he stands in with the Imperiall Cities, betwixt whom and the house of Wirtenberg, there have been alwayes open wars, or secret jealousies.

His Arms are Or, 3 Attires of a Stag born Palie-barrie, Sable.

As for the Marquisate of BADEN, lying on the West side of Schwartzenwald, betwixt it & the Rhene, it is for the most part, except towards those Wolds, a very pleasant and fruitfull Countrie; and much of the same nature, with the rest of Wirtenberg, so called from Baden, a neat Town, where the Mar∣quesse keeps his seat in Winter: so named from the hot Baths there, as is also Baden (called for di∣stinction sake, the Vpper Baden) amongst the Switzers: in which respect the Citie of Bath in Somerset∣shire, had antiently the name of Caer-Baden also. Of these Baths it is supposed that there are in this Citie at the least 300. profitable for many diseases and exulcerate sores, drawing a great resort of peo∣ple from the neighbouring Countries. This is the chief Town of this Marquisate, from whence the Princes have the Title of Marquesses of Baden. The next to this is 2 Durlach, or Turlach, which gives title to a second branch of this house, called sometimes Marquesses of Durlach only, but com∣monly the Marquesses of Baden-Durlach. 3 Liebenzel, amongst the hils of Schwartzenwald, famous for hot medicinall Springs. 4 Lichtall, remarkable for a Monasterie, the buriall place of the first Marques∣ses. 5 Gerspach, in the very heart of that Mountainous tract. 6 Pfortheim, adjoyning to the Wood Hagenscheis, a branch of Schwartzenwald. 7 Rotelen, 8 Badenwile, and 9 Sufenburg, all seated in the Vp∣per-Baden, being that part hereof which lies next to Brisgow. 10 Milberg, beautified with a fair Castle, the usuall retiring place of these Princes in the heats of Summer.

This Marquisate being also taken out of the great Dukedom of Schwaben was founded in the person of Herman, of Veronae in Italie, who deserving well of the Emperour Henry the 5. was by him settled in some Lands about these parts, anno 1120. and after marrying with the daughter of an Earl of Ba∣den was by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa created the first Marquesse of Baden, anno 1155. The Estate was after much increased by the addition of the Earldome of Hochberg, and the Appendixes thereof, in Schwaben; into which Christopher the 13. Marquesse hereof, succeeded on the death of his Cousin Philip the last Earl of Hochberg; both Princes descending originally from two brothers: of which the eldest in right of the Lady Judith his wife, was Earl of Hochberg; the second by the favour of the said Frederick Barbarossa, was made Marquesse of Baden. They were Masters also of many fair Estates in the Lower Palatinate, which the Palatines of the Rhene (as was there said) are since possessed of. Other particulars shall be shewn (if occasion be) in the ensuing Catalogue of

The MARQUESSES of BADEN.

• 1253 1 Herman the first Marquesse.
• 2 Herman II.
• 3 Herman III.
• 4 Herman IV.
• 1281 5 Rodulph, son of Herman 4.
• 1295 6 Herman V. son of Rodolph.
• 7 Rodolph II. son of Herman the 5.
• 1356 8 Frederick, son of Rodolph the 2.
• 9 Rodolph III. son of Frederick.
• 1372 10 Barnard, son of Rodolph.
• 1431 11 James son of Barnard.
• 1453 12 Charls son of James; the first of these Marquesses which was pos∣sessed of the Countie of Spanheim in the Lower Palatinate, descend∣ing on this house by Matild wife of Rodolp the 2.
• 1475 13 Christopher son of Charls, who after the death of Philip the last Mar∣quesse of Hochberg, succeeded also in that estate.
• 1515 14 Barnard son of Christ••ph. his brother Ernest succeeding in that of Hochberg.
• ...

• 15 Christopher II.* 1.47 son of Barnard, his elder brother Philibert, and Philip son of Philebert dying in the life of Barnard.
• 16 Edward son of Christopher, intending the sale of his Estates to pay his debts, was forci∣bly deprived of all by
• 17 Ernest Marquesse of Hochberg, nephew of Ernest above mentioned; who by that means not only preserved the Marquisate of Baden, but united that of Hochberg again unto it; and removed his ordinarie seat to Durlach.
• 18 George, brother of Ernest, Marquesse of Baden and Hochberg.
• 19 Frederick, the son of George born in the year 1594. succeeded his Father in both Estates; and (if living) hath a sonne called also Frederick, to enjoy them after him.

NORTHGOIA, OR The UPPER PALATINATE.

The Countrie of NORTHGOIA, so called from the Northern situation of it in regard of Bava∣ria, is sometimes also called the Palatinate of Bavaria, because anciently belonging to that Estate; but generally Ober Psalts, or the Vpper Palatinate, to difference it from the Lower. It is bounded on the East with Bohemia, on the West with Franconia, and part of Schwaben; on the North with Voiteland; and on the South with Bavaria. The Countrie for the most part somewhat rough and mountainous, rich principally in mines of iron, which it yeeldeth in most places, and some of silver about Amberg, extended from Haimbourg to the edge of Bohemia 80 miles, and from the hill Felchtelberg in the edge of Voiteland to Weisenberg near the banks of the Danow 68 miles.

Observable things touching this Province, are chiefly two. First that out of the Mountain Felchtelberg before mentioned, arise 4 Rivers running to the four quarters of the world; that is to say, the Eger towards the East, the Mein or Moenus towards the West, the Sala or Saltza to the North, and the Nab Nabus to the South, so that it may be probably thought to be the highest hill in all Germanie. 2 That in the Southwest corner of it are two little Rivers, the one called Abnul which falleth into the Da∣now, and the other Rednitz which runs into the Mein, and finally into the Rhene: between the heads whereof, being not much distant, Charls the Great once began to dig a Channel for making a passage out of the Rhene into the Danow. In which work he employed many thousand men: but partly by excesse of rain, and partly by some strange affrightments (all which they did in the day being undone in the night) he was fain to desist. Some parts of the intended water-course are to be seen near Was∣senburg, spoken of before, which standeth in the middle way betwixt both Rivers.

Chief places of this Country which belong to the Electorall Familie, are 1 Amberg, on the River Vils, enriched chiefly by the commoditie of iron digged out of the neighbouring hils, and here fashioned into all sorts of Vtensils, and thence conveyed in great abundance to the parts adjoining: but prouder of its mines of silver then those veins of iron, affording to the Princes Coffers 60000 Crowns yearly. 2 Monheim, in the midst of a fruitfull valley, near a wood of Juniper. 3 Newburg, upon the River Swartzach, which gives title to the second branch of the Palatine house, called the Count Palatines of Newburg; competitours with the Marquesse of Brandenbourg for the Dukedom of Cleveland. 4 Kelhaim, at thee meeting of the Danow, with the river Almul. 5 Cham, on the edge of Bohemia, near the river Regen, which passing thence falleth into the Danow near the Citie of Regens∣berg. 6 Castell, where the Electors for the most part hold their Residence, when they are in this Coun∣try. 7 Awerbach, 8 Saltsbach, 9 Weiden, 10 Newmarcki.

There are also in this Country some towns belonging to the Lantgraves of Luchtenberg, one of the four old Lantgraves of the Empire: the other three being Duringen, Hassia, and Alsatia: so called from Luchtenberg an old Castle, situate on a loftie hill not far from Pfriemd, the chief town and ordi∣nary seat of these Lantgraves, seated on the river Nab, 2 Gronsfelden, 3 Schonhuffen, an ordinary passe and baiting-place in the way from Prague to Nurenberg.

But the chief Citie of this Country, and perhaps of Germanie, is Nurenberg it self, Norimbega in the modern, but Noricum in the ancient Latine. So called from an ancient Castle called Castrum Noricum, the ruines of which are still remaining encompassed with a deep but drie ditch, now of no use nor ornament to the Citie at all; but reverenced for its antiquity as the mother of Nurenberg. The Ca∣stle said by some to be built in the time of Claudius Caesar; more probably by some of the Norici, who terrified with the Invasion of Attila, in the decline and waine of the Roman Empire, relinquished Bavaria, where before they dwelt, and passed over the Danow, there to provide themselves of a safer dwelling. Conquered by the Bavarians, it became together with their Conquerours, subject to the French: in the time of Lewis the 3. it became Imperiall, and was walled and fortified during the reign of Charls the 4. From that time it encreased so fast both in wealth and beauty, that it is counted the greatest and wealthiest City in all this Continent, there being reckoned in it 11 stone bridges for passage over the river Pegnits, which runneth through it; 12 Conduits of fresh water, 13 common Baths, 116 publick Wels, and 128 Streets. Of figure square, environed with a triple wall of 8 miles

in circuit,* 1.48 and plentifully stored with all sorts of Ammunition. The Marquesses of Brandenburg in for∣mer times were the Burgraves of it, an office of great power and jurisdiction; but sold for a good sum of mony by Frederick the 3. anno 1414. Albert, his son attempting to recover the old office again, be∣sieged the town, having no lesse then 17 Princes on his side, and yet could not force it. That for an Argument of its strength. A proof and evidence of the wealth of it we have seen before, in that great havock made of their Towns and Villages, and the great ransome they were put to by another Albert, spoken of in Franconia. And it adds much unto the commendation of the people, that this great wealth is gotten by their indefatigable industrie: the town being situate on a barren and sandie soil, and destitute of those helps which commonly a navigable. River brings into a City: those great pos∣sessions which belong to the State hereof, being gotten out of the fire, as the saying is, by their con∣tinuall working of iron and other manufactures; occasioning a resort hither of Merchants from all parts of Germanie. Other Towns of chief note within this Palatinate, are 1 Altorf, where the Nuren∣bergers Founded an University for the study of all Arts and Sciences, anno 1575. 2 Erspruck, a great Town and well seated, belonging to the State of Nurenberg also. 3 Eisted (Aichstadium in the Latine) an Episcopall See, situate on the River Almul. 4 Wassenburg, an Imperiall City on the borders of Schwaben. Here was also in this Province (if not still remaining) the town of Winsberg, memorable for the piety and gallantry of the women of it. For the Town being besieged and distressed by the Emperour Conrade the 3. for siding against him with the Guelfs then Dukes of Bavaria, no other con∣ditions could be gotten at the surrendrie of it, but that the women might have leave to depart in safety, and carry all their Jewels with them. Which being obtained they took their husbands on their backs, and so left the Town: and by that noble act so moved the affections and compassion of the angry Prince, that he spared the Town, and gave them all a generall pardon. It is said by some, that the odious names of Guelfs and Gibelines (with which the peace of Christendome was so long distracted) took their beginning at this siege: the first so called from Guelfo, brother of Henry the Proud, Duke of Bavaria, in whose cause they fought; the other from Veibling, (the French and Itali∣ans speak it Gueibling) a Town of Frankenland, in which that Emperour was born. Another origi∣nall hereof we had in our description of the State of Florence: but I take this to be the more proba∣ble of the two, though neither certain.

The ancient inhabitants here were the Narisci of Tacitus. Afterwards some of the Norici fearfull or grown impatient of the Roman yoak, came over the Danubius to them, and built that famous Castle called Castrum Noricum, where now stands Nurenberg. Overpowered by the Boji, and uniting with them in the name of Bojarians they followed the fortunes of Bavaria, till the year 1339. when Ludovick the Emperour and Duke of Bavaria, on the partition of the estate betwixt him and Rodolphus his elder brother, relinquished it for ever to the house of the Palatines. Returned for the present to the Dukes of Bavaria, on whom conferred together with the Electorall dignity by the Emperour Ferdinand the 2. in recompense of the great service don him by Maximilian the now Duke thereof, in the war of Bohemia, and the great charge he had been at in the reduction of that Kingdome to the house of Austria. How long it will continue thus is known only to God the disposer of all things. Yet neither the Bavarians formerly, nor the Palatines since have been so fully Masters of it, but that the Landgrave of Luchetenberg and the Citie of Nurenberg have put in for a share.

The Arms of which great and puissant Citie are Azure, an Harpie displayed, crowned, cri∣ned, and armed, Or.

13. The KINGDOM of BOHEMIA.

The Kingdom of BOHEMIA, containing Bohemia it self with the incorporate Provinces, is boun∣ded on the East with Poland and Hungarie; on the West with the Vpper Palatinate, Voiteland, and Mis∣nia; on the North with the Marquisate of Brandenberg, and some part of Misnia; and on the South with Austria and Bavaria. It comprehends in it besides Bohemia it self, the Marquisate of Moravia, with the Dukedoms of Silesia and Lusatia.

1 BOHEMIA, encompassed about with woodie Mountains, part of the Hercynian, is bounded on the East with Moravia, on the West with the Vpper Palatinate, and Voiteland; on the North with Misnia, Lusatia, and some part of Silesia; on the South with parts of Bavaria and Austria. It took this name from the Bemi, or Boiemi, the old Inhabitants hereof, of whom more anon: and containing in com∣passe about 550 English miles.

The soil is indifferently fruitfull, and enriched with mines of all sorts, except of gold. Tinne they have here in good plenty, the mines whereof were first found out by a Cornish man, banished out of England, anno 1240. which discovery of Tinne in these parts, was, as saith my Author, in magnam ja∣cturam Richardi Comitis Cornubiae, (he meaneth that Richard which was afterwards King of the Romans:) and no marvail, for in those times there was no Tinne in all Europe, but in England. Wood they have here good store; and in some of their Forrests a Beast called Lomie, which hath hanging under its neck a bladder full of scalding water; with which, when she is hunted, she so tortureth the Dogs, that she easily escapeth them. Of corn they have sufficient for their own use, and sometimes also an increase above their spending, wherewith they do supply their neighbours of the Vpper Palatinate:

but they want wine, the Air here being too sharp and piercing to produce a good Vintage. And it yeelds also store of Saffron no where to be bettered; with plenty of medicinable drugs.

The principall Rivers hereof, are 1 the Elb, or Albis, having here its spring; of whose course we have spoken elsewhere, 2 Egra, 3 the Muldaw or Muldavius, and 4 the Warts; all three exonerating themselves into the Elb, which runneth through the midst of the Country.

The Kingdome is not (as others) divided into Counties and Provinces; but into the Territories and possessions of severall Lords; who have great authority and command over their Vassalls. The figure of the whole in a manner, Circular, the Diameter whereof reacheth every way some 200 miles: containing in that compasse 700 Cities, walled Townes and Castles; and (as some say) 30000 Villages. Inhabited by a people given to drink and gluttony; and yet valiant, and with sense of honour: this last belonging to the Nobility and Gentry; the former to the common people; but more moderately then most others of the German Nations. All of them, Princes or Plebeians, rich, poor, noble and base, use the Sclavonian language, as their mother tongue.

The chief Bohemian Captain that ever I read of, was Zisca; who in eleven battels fought in the defence of the Hussites, against the Pope and his confederates; prevailed and went away victorious: insomuch, that at his death he willed the Bohemians to flea him, and make a drumme of his skin; per∣swading himself, if they so did, they could never be overcome. A fancie like to that of Scipio African, and Vortimer, King of Britain, spoken of before. Scholars of most note, John of Hus, and Hierome of Prague, two eminent Divines, of whom more anon.

The Christian faith was first here preached by one Borsinous, anno 900, or thereabouts: Borzivoius, the 8 Duke from Crocus was the first Christian Prince; and next to him Wenceslaus the second. This last most cruelly murdered by Boleslaus, his brother, at the instigation of Drahomira, an obstinate Heathen, mother to them both: who having caused the Ministers of the Lord to be butchered, and their bodies to lie unburied for two years together, was swallowed, coach and all, in that very place where their bodies lay. Confirmed by this prodigy, they continued constant in the Faith to this very day; though not without the intermixture of some notable vanity. For one Picardus coming out of the Low-countries, drew a great sort of men and women unto him, pretending to bring them to the same state of perfection, that Adam was in before his fall; from whence they were called Picards, and Adamites. They had no respect unto marriage; yet could they not accompany any woman, untill the man coming to Adam, said unto him; Father Adam, I am inflamed towards this woman: and Adam made answer, Increase and multiply. They lived in an Island which they called Pa∣radise, and went stark naked; but they continued not long: for Zisca hearing of them, entred their fooles Paradise, and put them all to the sword, anno 1416. But to make amends for this folly, they were exceeding zealous of the Reformation. For much about the same time the works of Wickliffe were brought into Bohemia, by a certain scholar who had been Student in the University of Oxford; which hapning into the hands of John Husse, and Hierome of Prague, two men whereof the Country may worthily boast, wrought in their hearts a desire to reforme the Church: A businesse which they prosecuted so earnestly, that being summoned to the Councell of Constance, they were there con∣demned for Hereticks, and burned, anno 1414. yet had their doctrine such deep root in the hearts of the people, that it could never be destroyed by the Tyrannies of war or persecutions (though both were used) to this very day, (multitudes of the Professours of it living in this Kingdome under the names of Calistini, and Sub utraque, as before is said) though perfected by the writings of Luther, Me∣lanchthon, Calvin, and such other of the Protestant Doctors as travelled in the work of Refor∣mation.

The first Inhabitants hereof, of whom there is any good record, were the Benni, whom Pomponius Mela placeth in this tract, with the addition of Gens Magna: By Tacitus they are called Boiemi, who makes them the descendents of those Boii (a Gallick nation) who, to avoid the servitude which they feared from Rome, put themselves into these Hercynian deserts; which from them was called Bolohemum, and by which name it occurs in Velleius Paterculus. And though the Marcomanni first, and the Sclaves and Croatians afterwards became masters of it; these last continuing their possession to this very day: yet it retaineth still the name of Bohemia, amongst the Latines; as that of Bohemerland amongst the Dutch.

Places of most importance in it, are 1 Budweis, (conceived to be the Marobodurum of Ptolemy) a town towards Austria. 2 Augst, neer the head of the Elb. 3 Tabor, a strong Town built by Zisca, to be a retreat for the Hussites. 4 Jaromir; and 5 Molmuck, both upon the Elb. 6. Littomissell, an Episcopall See, bordering on Moravia. 7 Pilsen, the last town of this Kingdome which yeilded to the prevailing Imperialists, in the late long war about that Crown: and then also betrayed to Count Tilly for a some of money, by some of the Souldiers of Count Mansfield, who was then ab∣sent, and had so long defended it against the Enemy. 8 Elbogen, much esteemed for the hot medici∣nable Bathes, situate on the River Egra. 9 Egra, so called of the same River, off which (neer to the borders of the Vpper Palatinate) it is strongly situate: a large fair City, containing three miles in compasse; Imperiall once, but sold by the Emperour Ludovicus Bavdrus to John, King of Bohemia for 400000 marks of Silver: in compasse lesse, for sweetnesse of the place, elegancy of the build∣ings, pleasantnesse of site, and richnesse of soil, superiour far to Prague it self. 10 Prague, the Metropolis of the Kingdome, situate in the middest thereof, on the River Muldaw: consisting of four severall Townes, each of which hath its severall Customes, Lawes, and Magistrates. The principall is called the Old Town, adorned with many goodly buildings; a spacious Market-place, and a stare∣ly

Counsell-house: the second called the New Town, separated from the Old, by a Ditch of great depth, and widenesse. The third, called the Little Town, is divided from the Old, by the River Mul∣daw, joyned to it by a beautifull Bridge consisting of 24 Arches: and in this part thereof is the hill Rachine; on the sides of which are many fair and stately houses belonging to the Nobility, over-look∣ed by the strong Castle of S. Wenceslaus (situate on the top thereof) a magnificent Palace, wherein the Bohemian Kings, and the later Emperours have kept their Residence. The fourth town is that of the Jewes, who have here five Synagogues, and live according to their own Law. The whole City ra∣ther large then fair, the streets being in winter very dirty, of ill smell in the summer; the build∣ings for the most part of clay and timber, clap up together without Art, and of little beauty. And though incompassed with walls and Ditches, it is conceived to be but an open town (so poor and weak are the defences) insomuch that whosoever is master of the Field, will be master of the City also. And yet besides the honour of being the Royall Seat; it hath also of long time been an Arch∣bishops See, and by Charles the fourth Emperour, and King of Bohemia made an University. Neer unto this town was fought that memorable battell, between the Duke of Bavaria, and Count Buc∣quoy, Lieutenant for the Emperour Ferdinand the second, with 50000 men on the one side; and Frederick newly elected King of Bohemia, with the Prince of Anhalt, the Count of Thurne, and 30000 men on the other side. It was fought on the eight of November, stylo novo, wherein (such was the un∣searchable will of God) the victory fell unto the Imperials: the young Prince of Anhalt, Thurne, and Saxon Weimar, with divers others, being taken prisoner; the Bohemian Ordinance all surprised, Prague forced to yeeld unto the enemy, and King Frederick with the Queen, compelled to flie unto Silesia: a most lamentable and unfortunate losse, not to this people onely, but to the whole cause of Re∣formed Religion: yet is it not unworthy of our observation that this great battell was fought upon a Sunday, the 8 of November, about the time of the morning Prayer: in the Gospell appointed for which day (being the 23 after Trinity Sunday) is that famous passage, Reddite CAESARI, quae sunt CAESARIS, i. e. Render unto Caesar, the things which are Caesars; which seemed to judge the quar∣rell on the Emperours side.

But whether of the two Pretendents had the juster Cause, may best be seen by convassing the Re∣cords of that State and Nation (for the successe of War is no standing Rule for measuring the equity, and justice of the causes of it: by which it will be clearly seen, that since the erecting of this King∣dome by the Sclaves or Croatians, it hath been evermore disposed at the will of the Emperour, or by election of the States and People. But I intend not at the present to dispute that point, but only to lay down the story of the Kings and People, as in other places; since the first coming of the Sclavi. A Nation not known by that name till the time of Justinian; at what time they inhabited on the banks of the Ister, but on the further side thereof, opposite to Illyricum and Thrace, imperiall Provinces. Grown famous by their good successes against that Empire, their name was taken up by the rest of the Sarmatians of Europe; who either wanting room, or not liking of their colder Countries, passed on more Westwards: and by degrees possessed themselves of those parts of Germany, which formerly had been inhabited by the Almans, Burgundians, and Boiarians; but were then either quite forsaken, or but ill inhabited by the drawing down of those people to the Roman Provinces, which they better liked. Divided at, or after their coming thus far west, into four main bodies; that is to say, the Winithi, possessed of the (now) Marquisates of Brandenbourg, Misnia, and Lusatia, as also of the Durke∣domes of Mecklenburg and Pomerania; the Moravians, inhabiting in Moravia, the Lower Austria, and the Vpper Hungary; the Poles, possessed of Poland, and the Dukedome of Silesia; and finally the Bohemian Sclaves, confined within the limits of that Kingdome onely. Under what forme of Government they lived at their first coming hither, is not certainly known: but being setled in these Countries of Poland and Bohemia: it was not long before they were erected into severall Kingdomes, occasioned by the coming of a new body of Sclaves, Croatians, and others of those scattered Nations, under the conduct of Zechius, a great Prince amongst them, who about the yeer 640. together with his bro∣ther Leches was banished Croatia for a murther. And being very acceptable to the Sclaves of Bohemia, who looked upon him as a Prince of their own Original extraction, one of the same Language, Lawes or Customes that themselves were of, they admitted him to be their Chief, or supreme Governour, by what soever name he was called at first: in honour and memory of whom, the Bohemians in their own language doe call themselves Zechians. After his death, the State relapsed again into a confused Anarchie, till the yeer 670. at what time not respecting the Progeny of Zechius, the founder of their Common-wealth and first estate, they fastned upon Crocus, a man of good esteem amongst them, and elected him to be their Duke. Crocus vir justus, & magnae apud Bohemos opinionis Princeps electus est, as Ber∣tholdus telleth us. Crocus being dead, the Bohemians elected Libussa, his youngest daughter; and of her government soon wearied, they made choice of Primislaus for their Prince, and made him husband to Libussa. A man taken from the Plough (as their stories tell us) to espouse the Princesse: it being or∣dered and agre•••• on by her many Suiters, that he (whosoever he was) before whom an horse pur∣posely let loose did first make a stand, should be the Husband of the Lady, and have the government of the State. The Horse first makes a stand before Primislaus, being then at plough (having perhaps some Mare in his Teeme▪) and he accordingly is received and admitted their Prince. These with the other Dukes from the time of Crocus the first Legislator of the Bohemians, take in order thus.

The DUKES of BOHEMIA.

• 1 Crocus, the Law-giver or Lycurgus of Bohemia.
• 2 Libussa, youngest daughter to Crocus, with Primislaus her husband (a second Quinctius) Founder of Prague.
• 3 Neramislaus, sonne of Primislaus and Libussa.
• 4 Mnoatha, one of the sonnes of Neramislaus, Cotemporary with Charls the Great.
• 5 Voricius, sonne of Mnatha.
• 6 Wenceslaus.
• 7 Bela.
• 8 Nastricius sonne of Bela.
• 9 Bozzivoius, the first Christian Prince of the Bohemians: Contemporarie with the Em∣perour Arnulph.
• 10 Sbitignaeus, sonne to Bozzivoius.
• 11 Vladislaus, brother to Sbitignaeus.
• 12 Wenceslaus II. surnamed the Saint, slaine by his brother Boleslaus.
• 13 Boleslaus, a wicked and ungodly Prince.
• 14 Boleslaus II. sonne of the former, a great advancer of Christianty amongst hi•• people.
• 15 Boleslaus III. one of the sonnes of Boleslaus the second.
• 16 Jaromir, sonne to Boleslaus the third.
• 17 Vdalricus, brother of Boleslaus the third, and Uncle of Jaromir.
• 18 Predislaus, sonne to Vdalricus.
• 19 Sbitignaeus II. sonne to Predislaus.
• 1061 20 Vratislaus, brother of Sbitignaeus, whom for his manifold deferts, the Emperour Henry the 4. created the first King of Bohemia, anno 1608. whose Successors take thus out of Bertholdus and Dubravius.

The KINGS and DUKES of BOHEMIA.

• A. Ch.
• 1086 1 Vratislaus, the brother of Spitignaeus, Duke of Bohemia, was by Henry the 4. at Metz crea∣ted King.
• 2 Conrade, brother to Vratislaus, notwithstanding that his brother had 3 sons, was elected Duke of Bohemia.
• 3 Brecislaus, son to Vratislaus, the two sons of Conrade being rejected, is by the Bohemians chosen Duke.
• 1100 4 Borivorius the 4. son of Brecislaus, is chosen by the Bohemians, his eldest brothers then all living.
• 1109 5 Sutopulcus, Cousin german to Borivorius, by the consent and favour of the people, depo∣sed Borivorius, and caused himself to be elected in his place.
• 6 Vladislaus II. brother to Borivorius, preferred by the people to the throne, before Otho the brother, and Henry the son of Sutopulcus, the last Prince.
• 7 Sobeslaus, brother to Vladislaus, promoted to the State before the sonne of Vla∣dislaus.
• 1159 8 Vladislaus III. son of Vladislaus the 2. (the four sons of Sobeslaus omitted) is chosen and crowned the second King of Bohemia by Frederick the Emperour, but deposed by the States, because he was not by them formerly elected, according to their priviledges and customs.
• 9 Vldericus the third son of Sobeslaus, his elder brethren yet living, was by the people elect∣ed in the room of Vladislaus and his son Frederick: whom the Emperour Frederick had by force established in the throne.
• 10 Sobeslaus II. second son to Sobeslaus, was by Frederick above named expelled; and he al∣so by the Bohemians.
• 11 Conrade, Grandchild to Otho the brother of Sutopulcus, elected by the Bohemiam in place of Frederick: between which two Princes there was continuall war.
• 12 Wenceslaus, Uncle unto Conrade, and son of Otho aforesaid, was preferred before many nearer the succession. Him Primislaus expelled; but fearing his return, quitted Prague.
• 13 Henry Bishop of Prague, a stranger to the bloud, was by a generall consent elected Duke.
• 14 Vladislaus IV. brother to Primislaus the son of Wenceslaus, being put by, succeeded Hen∣ry, and soon after resigned.
• ...

• 1199 15 Primislaus, elected by the Bohemians, and by the Emperour Philip, crowned the 3. King of Bohemia at Mentz, was brother to Vladi••laus the 4.
• 1248 16 Ottocarus, notwithstanding that Winceslaus his elder brother had been crowned in his Fa∣thers life time, was acknowledged King. He was slain in battle by Rodolphus the Em∣perour.
• 1278 17 Wences••aus II. son to Ottocarus.
• 1284 18 Wenceslaus III. sonne to Wenceslaus the last of the Bohemian Princes of the ma∣sculine race.
• 1304 19 Rodolphus, son to the Emperour Albertus, is by the potencie of his Father, and the ele∣ction of the States seated on the Throne, being otherwise a stranger to the bloud-royall of Bohemia.
• 1305 20 Henry Duke of Carinthia, husband to Anne the second daughter of Wenceslaus the 2. is chosen by the Bohemians: but being weary of his Government, they elect John Earl of Luxenbourg. Finally, Henry was murdered by one of his Ne∣phews.
• 1311 21 John Earl of Luxenbourg, sonne to Henry the 7. Emperour and husband to Eliza∣beth youngest daughter to Wenceslaus the 2. is elected, the Lady Anne yet living.
• 1346 22 Charls sonne to John, and Emperour of that name the 4. the Author of the Golden Bull.
• 1362 23 Wenceslaus IV. Emperour, also in whose time the troubles of the Hussites, and the va∣lour of Zisca was famous.
• 1418 24 Sigismund, brother to Wenceslaus, maketh himself King by force, and at his death com∣mendeth Albertus Duke of Austria, the huband of his daughter Elizabeth, unto the States of the Kingdom.
• 1437 25 Albertus Duke of Austria elected upon the commendation of Sigismund by the Bohemi∣an Lords.
• 1440 26 Ladislaus, son to Albert, who being the brother of two sisters, commended yet one George Pogibrachius unto the States as fittest to succeed him.
• 1458 27 George Pogibrachius, neither by affinity or consanguinity of the bloud, succeeded. And he though he had three sons, yet for the benefit of his Country, he advised the No∣bles after his death to elect their King from Poland.
• 1471 28 Ladislaus II. son to Casimire King of Polvnd, and to Elizabeth, the younger daughter of Albert Duke of Austria, the issue of Anne the elder sister still living; elected King of Bohemia.
• 1516 29 Ludovicus son to Ladislaus, elected and crowned by the means of his Father, then living, King of Hungary also.
• 1526 30 Ferdinand, Archduke of Austria, brother to Charls the 5. and husband to Anne sister to Ludovicus, by his letters reversall, acknowledged that he was chosen King of Bohemia not of any right, but of meer free-will, according to the liberties of that King∣dome.
• 1565 31 Maximilian eldest son of Ferdinand, was in his Fathers life time, and at his suit, elected King, anno 1540. into which he actually succeeded on his Fathers death.
• 1575 32 Rodolphus Emperour of Germanie, and eldest son to Maximilian, elected King.
• 1608 33 Matthias brother to Rodolphus, was at the joint suit of them both, nominated and ap∣pointed King of Bohemia by the generall consent of the States, during his brothers life time, anno viz. 1608. which denomination they both protest in their letters re∣versall, should not be to the prejudice of the liberties and ancient customs of that kingdom.
• 1618 34 Ferdinand II. Archduke of Austria, of the house of Grats, was by Matthias adopted for his son, and declared Successour to the Crown of Bohemia, but never formally and le∣gally elected: for which cause amongst others, he was by the States rejected in like case as Vladislaus the 3. had formerly been.
• 1619 35 Frederick Electour Palatine, the strongest German Prince of the Calvinists, and most potent by his great alliances; was elected King of Bohemia, and crowned at Prague, together with his wife, on the 5 day of November. This Prince derived his descent from the Lady Sophia, sister to Ladislaus the 2. King of Poland and Bohemia; and married Eli∣zabeth, daughter to James King of Great Britain, and Anne of Denmark, which Anne descended from the Lady Anno daughter of Albertus of Austria, and elder sister to Elizabeth, mother to Ladislaus the 2. above named; from whom the claim of Au∣stria is derived.
• 1621 35 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. elected King of Bohemia during the life both of his Father and of Frederick, the Prince Elect••ur also; after whose death he succeeded in this kingdome both in right and fact; King of Hungarie also, Archduke of Austria, and Emperour of Germanie, now living, anno 1648. more moderate in his Coun∣sels then his Father Ferdinand, and more inclinable to peace; (though honoured with a more signall victorie against the Swedes in the battell of Norlingen, then his

• Father was in all his life;)* 1.49 which the Conclusions made at Munster are sufficient proof of.

Of the Revenues, Arms, and other things which concern this Kingdom, we shall speak here∣after, when we have took a view of the rest of the Provinces which are incorporated into it.

2 MORAVIA is bounded on the East with Hungarie, on the West with Bohemia, on the North with Silesia, and on the South with the lower Austria, and the river Teia: fenced on the West by the Woods and Mountains of Bohemia, parts of the Hireynian Forrest; on the North by some spurs or branches of it called Ascibu••gius by Ptolemie, on the two other sides open like an half moon, or se∣mi-circle. The most fruitfull place of corn in all Germanie, and hath no small store of Frankincense, which contrarie to the nature of it, groweth not on a tree, but out of the earth: and that too (which addes much to the miracle, if Dubravius do report it rightly) in the shape and figure of those parts which men and women do most endevour to conceal.

The former inhabitants of this Province were the Marcomanni, and part of the Quadi, against whom, when M. Antonius the Emperour made war, he had unawares run himself into such a straight that his army was environed with Mountains one way, and enemies the other. To this (as cala∣mities seldom go alone) was added the extraordinary heat and drought then being. To the Emperor thus put to his plunges, came the Captain of his Guard, telling him that he had in his army a legion of Christians (Melitens he calleth them) which by prayer to their own God could obtain any thing. The Emperour sendeth for them, desiring them to make supplication for the Army; which they did, and God almighty that never turneth a deaf ear to the prayers of his servants, when they are either for his glory, the Churches, or their own good, scattered and vanquished the Quadi with thundershot and artillery from heaven, and refreshed the faint and dying Romans with many a gentle and pleasing showre. This miracle purchased to that legion the surname of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, i. e. the thunderer; and induced the Emperour to honour men of that holy profession, and to make an end of the fourth persecution, A. Ch. 174. Thus Xiphilinus hath it in his Dion; which coming from the pen of an Heathen, as his Author was, is of more credit in a matter of such concernment un to Christianity then if it had proceeded from Socrates, Sozomen, or any other Ecclesiasticall Writer.

Places of most note herein, are 1 Olmunts, on the River Marck (or Mora) the chief town of the Countrie, and a small Universitie, near which out of the hill Odenberg bordering on Silesia, spring∣eth the great river of Odera, whose course we have before described. 2 Brinn, on the river Schwats, the seat of the ancient Marquesses. 3 Radisch, and 4 Cremser, both upon the Marck or Mora. 5 Zwaim on the Teia; 6 Niclasberg (Mons Nicolai in the Latine) bordering on the Lower Austria. 7 Iglaw, 8 Newberg, 9 Weiskorchem, 10 Boserlitz, of which little memorable. 11 Gradisco, near to which (and to this place onely) the Frankincense is found to grow in the shape and forme before mentioned.

The old Inhabitants hereof (as before is said) were the Marcomanni and the Quadi; after them that Tribe or Nation of the Sclaves, who from their habitation on the river Mora, called themselves Moravians, and the Country which they dwelt in by the name of Moravia (the Dutch call it Merhe∣ren.) Extended at that time over all the Lower Austria, to the banks of the Danow on the South, and as far as to the river Tibiscus•• (over spreading a great part of the Vppet Hungarie) towards the East. Governed at the first by their own Kings, the first, whose name occurs, being Raslai, in the time of the Emperour Lewis the Godly, by whom taken Prisoner, and his Realm made Tributarie to the Em∣pire. After him succeeded Harmodurus, and then Suantopulcus, in whose time the Moravians and other Nations of the Sclaves, received the Gospel, by the preaching of Cyril and Methodius two Grecian Do∣ctours: officiating all divine services in the Sclavonian or vulgar Language. For which being af∣ter called in question by one of the Popes, they re••••rned no other answer then this (and enough in that) Omnis Spiritus laudet Dominum. It is written that every thing which hath breath should praise the Lord. Suantobegius son to Suantopuleus, succeeded next, deposed or rather beaten out of his Countrie by the Emperour Arnulph, for denying the accustomed tribute. A Prince of great spirit, and of as great command, having at one time under him, not Moravia only, according to the largest limits, but Silesia, Bohemia, and Polonia also. Arnulph not able otherwise to effect his purpose, cal∣led in the Hungarians (though at that time Pagans) by whose help the Moravian was subdued, and his Kingdom shattered into pieces; seised on by the Hungarians, Poles, and other Nations: and final∣ly reduced to the present limits. Afterwards it was made a Marquisate, (but by whom we finde not) one of the Marquesses hereof being Jodocus Barbatus, elected Emperour anno 1410. After whose death Sigismund his next heir, Emperour and King of Bohemia, gave it to his son-in-law Albert Duke of Austria, anno 1417. who in the end succeeded him in all his Estates, since which time it hath alwayes gone along with the Crown of Bohemia.

The Arms of the old Dukes or Princes of it, were Azure, an Eagle chequered Or and Gules, membred and langued of the same.

2 SILESIA, (or SCHLESI, as the Dutch call it, is bounded on the East with Poland, on the West with Lusati••a, on the North with Brandenburg, and on the South with Moravia. Wholly encompassed with Mountaines, except towards the North; which lets in a sharp aire upon

them:* 1.50 the midland parts being full of Woods, but withall of Mineralls.

Chief Cities are Jagendorse, or Jegerndorse, of late the Patrimony of John Georgius of the family of Brandenbourg, commonly called the Marquesse of Jagendorse. The lands and Estates in his possession, first given by Ladislaus King of Bohemia, to George surnamed Pius, one of the sonnes of Frederick of Brandenbourg, the first Marquesse of Auspach of this house, for the many good services hee had done him. But his posterity being extinct, they fell to the said John Georgius, brother to Sigismund the Ele∣ctour: proscribed by Ferdinand the second, for adhering to the partie of Frederick Prince Elector Pala∣tine: A Prince of great note and activenesse, in the beginning of the late German & Bohemian wars. 2 Mun∣sterberg, which gives the title of Duke to the posterity of George Pogebraccio, once King of Bohemia ad∣vanced by him unto this honor and a fair Estate. 3 Glatz or Gletz, the last Town of Bohemia, which held out for Frederick the Electour against that Emperour. 4 Glogaw, a strong Town on the River Odera. 5 Niess, on a River so named, an Episcopall See. 6 Breslaw, in Latine Vratislavia, so called from Vra∣tislaus, the founder of it, once one of the Dukes of this Province, by whose procurement it was made an Episcopall See, anno 970, or thereabouts. It is situate on the River Odera, all the water wherein could not save it from being burnt down to the ground, anno 1341. but it was presently reedified with fair Free strone, and is now one of the prettiest Cities (for the bignesse of it) in all Ger∣many: fair, populous, and well contrived with open and even streets; the chief of the Countrey. 7 Op∣polen, on the Odera also, well fortified both by Art and nature, barricadoed by the River on the West, and on the East with good out-workes, strong walls, and a fair Castle. 8 Straten, 9 Reichenbach, both made Townes of war, since the beginning of the Bohemian troubles.

There are also within this Province the two Seigneuries of Priguitz, and Crossen, so called from the chief Towns thereof, belonging to the Electour of Brandenbourg: the two Dukedomes of Oswitz and Zator, appertaining to the Crown of Poland: as also the Dukedome of Lignitz, and Sue inits, all of them bearing the names of their principall Towns; of which two last, Sueinits is in the immediate possession of the Kings of Bohemia, and Lignitz hath a Duke of its own, but an Homager and Tributary of that King.

The first two Inhabitants hereof were the Marsigni, Burii, Gothini, and some part of the Quadi. In the partition of the Eastern parts of Germany amongst the Sclaves, laid unto the Dukedome or King∣dome of Poland; continuing part thereof till the time of Vladislaus the second, who being driven out of his Kingdome by his brethren, was by the mediation of Frederick Barbarossa, estated in this Countrey, to be held under the Soveraignty of the Kings of Poland. Divided betwixt his three sons, and afterwards subdivided amongst their posterities according to the ill custome of Germany, it be∣came broke at last into fourteen Dukedomes, of 1 Breslaw, 2 Oppolen, 3 Ratibor, 4 Cessin, 5 Bethom, 6 Glogaw, 7 Segan, 8 Olents, 9 Steinaw, 10 Falkenbourg, 11 Sweinits, 12 Lignitz, 13 Oswits••, and 14 Zator. Of all which onely the two last doe remain to Poland; the five first being made subject to the Kings of Bohemia, by Wenceslaus the second, the five next by King John of Luxenbourg; Lignitz remaining in the possession of a Proprietary Duke (as before was said) and Sweinits given to Charles the fourth Emperour and King of Bohemia, by the will and Testament of Boleslaus the last Duke: all Schlesi by this means, (except the two Dukedomes of Oswitz and Zator) being added to the Crown of Bohemia: of which it is rather an incorporate then a subject Province.

4. LVSATIA, by the Dutch called Lausnitz is bounded on the East with Silesia, on the West with Misnia, on the North with Brandenbourg, and on the South with Bohemia. The countrey rough and full of Woods, yet plentifull enough of corn, and of such fruits as naturally arise out of the earth: So populous and thick set with people, that though it be but a little Province, it is able to arme 20000 Foot, as good as any in Germany. Most commonly it is divided into the Higher and the Lower; the first confining on Bohemia, the last on Brandenburg.

Places of most note in the higher Lausnitz, are 1 Bautsen, (Badissinum the Latines call it) the first Town attempted and taken in by the Duke of Saxony, when he took upon him the execution of the Emper∣ors Bann, against Frederick Elector Palatine, then newly chosen King of Bohemia: The poor Prince in the mean time in an ill condition, the Saxon being the head of the Lutheran; and the Bavarian chief of the Popish partie, arming both against him: So jealous are both sides of the active and rest∣lesse Calvinian spirit; as to leave no means unassaied for the suppressing of it. Seated it is upon the Spre, and for the most part is the seat of the Governour for the King of Bohemia. 2 Gorlitz, upon the River Nisse, which gave the title of Duke to John brother of Sigismund Emperour and King of Bohe∣mia, and Father of Elizabeth the last Dutchesse of Luxembourg, before it fell into the hands of the Dukes o•• Burgundie. A fine neat Town, well frequented, and strongly fortified: founded about the yeare 1231. and not long after so consumed by a mercilesse fire, anno 1301. ut ne unica domus remanse∣rit, as my Authour hath it, that there was not one house left of the old foundation. But it was presently rebuilt in a more beautifull form, and more strong materialls, then before it was: both publick and private buildings very neat and elegant. 3 Zittaw, on the same River bordering on Bohemia. 4 Lauben, 5 Lubben, 6 Camitz, of which little memorable, but that together with the for∣mer they make up those six townes which are confederate together in a stricter league, for their mu∣tuall defence and preservation, but under the protection, and with the approbation of the Kings of Bohemia. Then in the LOWER Lusatia there is 7 Sprenberg, so named from its situation on the River Spre, which runneth through the whole Countrie, and in antient times was called Sue∣vus, supposed by some (and not improbably) either to give name to the Suevians, or to take it

from them;* 1.51 that potent Nation, inhabiting originally betwixt this and the Elb. 6 Trabeli upon the Nisse. Cotthuse upon the Spre, or Suevus, which together with some part of the Lower Lusatia be∣longs unto the Marquesses of Brandenbourg.

The first Inhabitants hereof are by some supposed (and but supposed) to be the So∣nones of Tacitus; in the partition of these parts of Germany amongst the Selaves, made sub∣ject to the Winithi, or Venedi, the greatest and most spreading Nation of all these People. When, and by whom first made a Marquisate, I am not able to say for certain; but sure I am it hath beene very much given to the change of Masters. It had first a Marquesse of its own. Conrade the Marquesse hereof, who dyed in the yeare 1156. being by the Emperour Henry the fift made Marquesse of Misnia, added it unto that Estate: remaining for some time united to it. After, being seized on by the Poles, it was sold by Frederick the second, Marquesse and Electour of Brandenbourg: who keeping Co••thouse and some other Townes bordering next upon him, in his own possession, surrendered the rest on composition to George King of Bohemia: claiming it from a Grant made by Henry the fourth to Ʋ∣ratislaus the first Bohemian King, anno 1087. A grant on which no possession followed, unlesse it were the Homage and acknowledgement of the Princes of it, holding it afterwards of that Crown, as the Lord in chief.

Thus have we brought these four Provinces into the power and Possession of the Kings of Bohe∣mia: remaining still distinct in their Laws and Governments (as severall limbs of the great body of the Sclaves, made up into one Estate) though joined together in the person of one supreme Go∣vernour: who is severally admitted and acknowledged by each Province distinctly, for it selfe; and not by any one of them in the name of the rest. Out of all which so laid together, there may be raised the summe of three millions of Crowns yearly, for the Kings Revenues, towards the defrayment of all charges.

The Armes of this Kingdom are Mars, a Lyon with a forked tail, Luna, crowned Sol. Which Arms were first given by Frederick Barbarossa to Ʋladislaus the third, made by him King of Bohemia, in re∣gard of the good service hee had done him at the siege of Millain. And though Ʋladislaus was de∣posed by the States of that Kingdome, because never formally and legally elected by them: yet his successours keep those Armes to this very day.

14. BRANDENBOVR.

The Marquisate of BRANDENBOƲRG, is bounded on the East with the Kingdome of Po∣land; on the West with Mecklenbourg and the Dukedome of Lunebourg on the North with Pomerania, and on the South with Misnia, Lusatia, and Silesia; so called from Brandenbourg the chief Town of it, and because once the Marches of the Empire against the Sclaves, divided afterwards into the Old, the New, and the Middle Marches, according as they were extended further towards Poland by little and little, as the Emperours were able to get ground of those potent people.

The Countrey containeth in length from East to West 60 Dutch or 240 Italian miles, and is of correspondent breadth; the whole compasse making up 540 miles of the last accompt. Within which tract are comprehended 55 Cities or walled Townes, 80 Townes of trade, Mark-stecken, or Market Townes, as they commonly call them; 38 Castles or Mansion-houses of Noblemen, 17 Mo∣nasteries, and 10 Parkes well stored with beasts of game: the Countrey otherwise (considering the extent thereof) but thinly inhabited, nor well provided of necessaries, excepting corn, of which these North-East Countreys afford very great plenty.

1 ALTEMARK, or the OLD MARCK, so called because the antient Marches of the Empire against the Sclaves, lyeth betwixt Lawenbourg and the Elb, with which it is bounded on the East. Chief Townes thereof, 1 Tangermond, on the Elb, where it receives the River Tonagra, or Augra, honoured sometimes with the Residence of Charles the fourth. 2 Stendall, the chief of these Old Mar∣ches. 3 Soltwedel, divided into two Townes, the old and the new. 4 Gurdeleben, fortified with the strong Castle of Eishimpe. 5 Osterberg. 6 Senhun••en, said by some but falsely to be so called from the Senones, whom they would make the old Inhabitants of this Country (by all good Writers made to be originally a Gallick Nation.) 7 Werb, of which little memorable.

In the MIDDLE-MARCHES or ƲPPER MARCH, lying betwixt the Elb and the River Odera; the Towns of most note are 1 Butzaw, a Commendatarie of the Templars in former times. 2 Spandaw upon the Spre, a well fortified peece. 3 Oderburg, called so from that River, on which it is situate: remarkable for a strong Castle built by Marquesse Albert the second, at which all passen∣gers by water, are to pay their Toll. 4 Brandenbourg on the River Havel, a Bishops See, the Seat of the Lords Marchers in former times, taking name from hence. By some said to be built by Brennus Cap∣tain of the Gaules; more truely by one Brando a Prince of the Franconians, anno Ch. 140. 5 Frankefort (for distinction sake named) ad Oderam, on which River situate; the soil about it being so plenti∣fully stored with Corn and Wines, that it is not easie to affirm whether Bacchus or Ceres bee most enamoured of it. It was made an Ʋniversitie by Marquesse Joachim, anno 1506. and is also a flourishing and famous Emporie, though not comparable to that of the other Franckefort seated on the Meine. 6 Berlin, the ordinary Residence of the Marquesse situate on the River Spre, (or Suevus) which ri∣sing in Lusatia falleth into the Albis. 7 Havelbourg on the River Havel, a Bishops See, who acknow∣ledgeth the Archbishop of Magdebourg for his Metropolitan.

3. In the NEWMARCK, extending from Odera to the borders of Poland; and called so, because last conquered, and added to the account of the German Empire, there is Custrine, a very strong and defensible town, seated on the two Rivers Warts and Odera; fortified with great charge by John, sonne of Marquesse Joachim, and by him intended for his seat. 2 Sunnerberg; and 3 Landsberg, both upon the Wa••t. 4 Soldin, in former times the chief of this Marck. 5 Berlinch, or New Berlin: and 6 Falkenberg, a strong town, and fortified with as strong a Castle towards Pomerania.

The first inhabitants of this Country, were the Varini and Naithones, part of the great nation of the Suevians: and after them, the Helvoldi, Wilini, Beirani, and other Tribes of the Winithi, the grea∣test nation of the Sclaves, who possessed themselves of it. But Brandenbourg being wonne from them by the Emperour Henry the first, anno 920. (at what time the Gospell was first preached amongst them) the Country hereabouts was given by him to Sigifride, Earl of Ringelheim, (eldest sonne of Theodorick the second Earl of Oldenburg) a valiant Gentleman, with the title of Marquesse, or Lord Marcher, anno 927. conditioned that he should defend those Marches (the old Marck, as they now call it) against the Sclaves. These Marquesses at the first Officiary, and at the appointment of the Empe∣rour, and to him accomptable. Sigard the fourth from Sigefride, governing here for Otho the third, was the first Electour of these Marquesses; and Eudo the second of that name, and third from Sigard, the last that held this honour at the Emperours pleasure: that dignity after his decease being made Hereditary in the person of Albert of Anhalt, surnamed Vrsus, by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, which Albert having very much enlarged his border by the conquest and extermination of the Sclaves, caused their unpeopled Country to be planted with new Dutch Colonies out of Holland, Zealand, Flanders, and those parts of the Netherlands. The house of this Albert being extinct in John the fourth, it was given by the Emperour Lewis of Bavaria, to Lewis his sonne; by Otho, the brother of that Lewis, sold for 200000 Ducats unto Charles the fourth, by Sigismund, the son of Charles to Iodocus, Marquesse of Moravia: but afterwards being redeemed again, it was by the said Sigismund conferred on Frederick Burgrave of Nurenberg, in recompense of his faithfull service in the wars of Hungary and Bohemia. In his posterity it remaineth, but much increased in power and patrimony, by the addi∣tions of the Dukedome of Prussia, Cleve, Gulick, and Berg, the Marquisates of Auspach and Iagendorfe; the Earldome of Marck in Wesiphalen, now a part of Cleveland; the Lordships of Prignits and Crossen in Silesia, the towns of Hoff, and Colmebach in Voiteland, with the County of Rapin, and the town and territory of Cothus in the Lower Lusatia. Insomuch that this is now the most powerfull Family in all Germany. The Marquesses hereof from Albert, the son of Vrse, follow in this order.

The MARQUESSES of BRANDENBVRG.

• A. Ch.
• 927 1 Sigifride, Earl of Ringelheim, made the first Marquesse of this border, by the Emperour Henry the first.
• 2 Gero, by the appointment of Otho the first.
• 3 Bruno, Earl of Within, created Marquesse hereof by the same Emperour.
• 4 Hugh, the son of Bruno, by the favour of Otho the third.
• 5 Sigard, the brother of Hugh, made by the same Emperour, the first Marquesse E∣lector.
• 6 Theodorick, the son of Sigard, outed of his command by Mistivoius, one of the Princes of the Sclaves, named Obotriti.
• 7 Vdo, Earl of Soltwedel (the Sclaves being beaten and expulsed) created Marquesse and E∣lector by Conrade the second.
• 8 Vdo II. son of Vdo the first, proscribed by Henry the fourth for joyning with Rodulph Duke of Schwaben in the war against him.
• 9 Primislaus, King of the Obotriti (the Ancestour of the Dukes of Mecklinbourg) advanced unto these honours by the said Henry the fourth, and by him held unto his death. After which, made hereditary by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, in the person of Albert of Anhalt, the son of Vrsus.
• 1152 10 Albert of Anhalt, the first Hereditary Marquesse; father of Barnard, who was created Elector and Duke of Saxony, in the place of Henry surnamed the Lyon, by the Emperour Frede∣rick Barbarossa.
• 11 Otho, son of Albert.
• 12 Otho II. son of Otho the first.
• 13 Albert II. brother of Otho the second.
• 14 John, son of Albert the second.
• 15 John II. son of John the first.
• 16 Conrade, brother of John the second.
• 17 John III. son of Conrade.
• 18 Waldemar, brother of John the third.
• 19 Waldemar II. Nephew of Waldemar the first by his brother Henry.
• 20 John IV. brother of Waldemar the second, the last Marquesse of the house of Anhalt; the Marquisate escheating to the Empire for want of heires.
• ...

• 21 Lewis of Bavaria created Marquesse and Elector of Brandenbourg by his 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the Empe∣rour Lewis of Bavaria, on the said escheat.
• 22 Lewis II. surnamed the Roman, on the resignation of his brother succeeds in the Marqui∣sate and Electorall dignity.
• 23 Otho, brother to Lewis the first and second, who sold the Marquisate, and Electorall dig∣nity to Charles the fourth.
• 24 Wenceslaus, son of Charles the fourth, afterwards King of Bohemia, and Emperour of the Romans.
• 25 Sigismund, brother of Wenceslaus, Emperour of the Romans, King of Hungary and Bohemia, Earl of Luxenbourg; who sold this Marquisate to Iodocus, Marquesse of Moravia; and having afterwards redeemed it, conferred the same on
• 1417 26 Frederick Burgrave of Nurenberg, solemnly invested herein at the Councell of Constance, anno 1414. for which investiture he paid unto the Emperour the summe of 400000 Crownes.
• 1440 27 Frederick II. son of Frederick the first, to whom the Emperour Frederick the third gave the Dukedome of Pomeren.
• 1470 28 Albert, brother of Frederick the second, called the Achilles of Germany, relinquished to Bu∣geslaus the 10^th. the possession of Pomeren, but his successours ever since have retained the Title, and kept on foot their pretentions to it. From Frederick his second son, descen∣ded Albert, the first Duke of Prussia, Frederick the first Marquesse of Auspach, George the first Marquesse of Jagendorfe, and Albert called the Alcibiades of Germany, who so harassed Franconia in the dayes of Charles the fift.
• 1486 29 John, son of Albert.
• 1499 30 Joachim, son of John, who founded the University of Frankford, anno 1506. and authori∣zed the Reformation of Religion in his time begun.
• 1535 31 Joachim II son of Joachim the first.
• 1571 32 John-George, son of Jocahim the second.
• 33 Joachim-Frederick, son of John-George.
• 34 John Sigismund, son of Joachim Frederick, who had to wife the Lady Anne, daughter of Albert-Frederick, the second Duke of Prussia, and of Mary Eleanor his wife, eldest daugh∣ter of William the first, Duke of Cleve, Gulick, &c.
• 1620 35 George-William, sonne of John Sigismund, and the Lady Anne, claiming in her right, the Dukedomes of Cleve, Gulick, and Berg, the Earldomes of Marck, and Ravenspurg, and the seigneury of Ravenstein; which he possessed a while, divided with his cousin Volf∣gangus Palatine of Newberg, son of Magdalen the younger sister of Mary Eleanor. But fal∣ling out about their partage, the Palatine of Newberg called in the Spaniard; and this Marquesse the Confederate States of the Netherlands; who have hitherto shared the most part betwixt them. After the death of Bugeslaus the last Duke of Pomerania, he was to have succeeded also in that estate, then possessed by the Swedes. Of the agreement made between them, and the great accrewment thereby following to the house of Brandenburg, we shall speak more there.
• 36 Frederick-William, son of George-William, now Elector of Brandenbourg.

The Religion of this Country, is for the most part according to the form and doctrine of Luther: first introduced and authorised by Marquesse Joachim the first. In which estate it continued till the breach betwixt the present Elector, and the Palatine of Newberg. At which time the Palatine having married a daughter of Bavaria, the most potent Prince of the Popish party, reconciled himself to the Church of Rome, the better to assure himself of the aid of Spain: and this Elector having married a sister of Frederick the fift, Elector Palatine, the most potent Prince of the Calvinians, declared himself to be of that party and opinion, the better to assure himself of the aids of Holland, anno 1614. But when, on the perswasions of his wife, he set out an edict for suppressing the Lutheran formes, and au∣thorising the Calvinian onely throughout his dominions, (which was the yeer 1615) the people of this Marquisate rose in Armes against him: the difference being thus composed, that the Lutheran formes onely should be used in the Churches of Brandenburg, for the contentation of the people: and the Marquesse have the exercise of his new Religion, for himself, his Lady, and those of their opinion, in his private Chappells.

The Territories of this Family, are the greatest as before is said, of any in Germany; but a great part of it is very barren, and his subjects in those parts as poor as the Country: much of his new accessions yeilding little but the titles onely. So that neither in Revenue or Power he is able to keep rank with the Duke of Saxony: his ordinary Revenue hardly amounting at the utmost to 200000l. per annum, which is but half of the receipts of the Duke of Saxony.

The Armes hereof are Argent, an Eagle Gules, membred and beaked Or.

15 POMERANIA.* 1.52

POMERANIA is bounded on the East with Prussia, from which parted by the River Wesel or Vistula; on the west with Mecklenburg, divided from it by the River Bartze; on the North with the Baltick Sea, extended on the Coast hereof for the space of 200 English miles, and on the South with the Marquisate of Brandenbourg, so named from the Pomortzi, or Pomerani, a nation of the Sclaves, to whose share it fell; or from the situation of it on the Sea shore, as the word in the Sclavonian doth seeme to import.

The Country is for the most part plain, abundantly fruitfull in Corn, carried hence to Dantzig, and transported thence to all parts of Christendome, in their times of scarcity, yeilding also good store of pasturage, and great heards of Cattell; with plenty of butter, cheese, honey, and some reasonable quantities of flax. Populous, and those people of strong constitution, as living under a sharp, and piercing air. The whole divided into the Continent, and the Ilands; the Continent into the Vpper Pomeren, bordering upon Mecklenburg, extended from the Bartze, to the River Odera; the Lower reaching from the Odera, to the borders of Prussia.

Chief places in the UPPER, are 1 Barth, at the mouth of the River Bartze, taking name from thence, a well traded town, and many times the seat of the Dukes of this hithermost Pomeren. 2 Wolgast, upon the Baltick sea, over against the Isle of Vsedom, the chief of this part of Pomeren, from whence the Dukes hereof are called the Dukes of Pomeren-Wolgast: the first town taken in by Gusta∣vus Adolphus King of Sweden, in his famous war for relief of Germany, anno 1630. 3 Straelsund, a town of great trading, and much resort, seated upon the same sea also, opposite to the Isle of Rugen; a town of great name in the course of the German Warres. 4 Grispswald, on the same sea, betwixt Wolgast and Straelsund, made an University, anno 1456. 5 Anclaw, upon the River Pone. 6 Tribsca, situate on a lake out of which the said River hath its course.

Then in the LOWER Pomeren, there is Camin, an Episcopall See, situate on the Baltick shore, over against the Isle of Wollin. 8 Colberg, a strong town on the same shore also, at the fall of the Per∣sant into the Sea. 9 Costin, the last Sea-town of this tract, lying towards Prussia. 10 Stargard, on the Ina, more within the land; as is also 11 Griffenberg upon the Rega; and 12 Stetin, on the Odera, once a poor fisher-town, now the Metropolis of this part of the Country, rising to this greatnesse (af∣ter the embracing of Christianity) by the fall of Wineta, formerly the chief Mart-town of all these parts. The ordinary seat of the Dukes of the Lower Pomerania, the Dukes of Pomeren of Stetin, as for distinction sake they are used to call them.

The Ilands hereunto pertaining, are those of Rugen, Wallin, Vsidom, touched upon before; but now more punctually to be handled. That of most note is RVGEN, over against Straelsund, from which divided onely by a narrow street. In length seven Dutch miles, and as much in breadth; so that the compasse of it, if it were exactly round, would amount to 20 German, or an hundred Italian miles: and yet once bigger then it is, but in the year 1309, by the force of an outrageous tempest, a great part of it lying towards the South-east, as far as to the Ile of Buden (then conjunct hereto) was torne away, and sunk so deep into the bottome of the Sea, that now the greatest ships that be sail over it. The Iland plentifull of Corn, the Granary of Straelsund, as they call it com∣monly; and reasonably well stored with Cattell: full of Bayes, Creeks, and winding shores, with many and vast Promentories thrusting into the Sea; which gives them great increase of fishing. An∣tiently it belonged to the Crown of Denmark, till given by Waldemar the third to Bugislaus and Barnimus, Dukes of Pomeren; continuing ever since part of that estate. The chief town of it is called Berga, situate in the midst of the Iland, but not containing above 400 Families; others of lesse note and estimation, being 2 Sugart, 3 Vick, 4 Bingst, &c. small towns compared with Villages upon the Continent, but the best they have. And yet so populous is the Iland, that they are able to arme 7000 good fighting men, if there be occasion.

The second of the three, in repute and bignesse is that of Wollin, situate over against Camin, so called from Wollin the chief town (Julinum it is called in Latine) made an Episcopall See by Wartislaus, the first Christian Prince of this nation, upon the sackage of this City he removed to Camin. A town which once so flourished in Traffick, that it gave place to none but Constantinople; the Russians, Danes, Saxons, Vandals, &c. having here their particular streets. But being miserably sacked by Waldemar, King of Danemark, anno 1170. most of the trade hereof was removed to Lubeck, since which time it never could come neer its former glories. The last in reputation is that of VSEDOM, seated betwixt both, not far from Wolgaft; so called from Vsedom, the chief town in it, of which little observable. All three the habitation of the antient Rugii, who under Odoacer, King of the Heruli, subverted the Western Empire, conquered Italy, and made themselves masters of it, till subdued by the Gothes. Those which remained in these Ilands became after subject to the Sclaves, and had once Kings of their own: the first whose name occurs in story, being Crito, the son of Ratze, a puissant Prince, extending his Dominions into Holst, Ditmarsh, and the City of Lubeck, which he built; about the year 1100, afterwards beautified and inlarged by Adolph the second Earl of Holst; by some esteemed the Founder of it. But his issue male failing in the yeer 1326, it fell by compact made between them, to the Dukes of Pomeren, to whom these Islands ever since have continued subject.

And as for Pomeren it self the old Inhabitants thereof were part of the Rugii before mentioned, the Reudigni, Longi-nani, and Longi-Diduni, with parts of the Heruli and Burgundians: into whose void roomes the Pomortzi and other Tribes of the Winithi, (the most potent Nation of the Sclaves) did in fine succeed; extending their Dominion to the bankes of the Vistula, which to difference it from Pomeren, was called Pomerella. But that part of it being given by Mestovinus the last Prince thereof dying without issue, anno 1295. to Primislaus Duke of Poland: the name and power of the Princes or Dukes of Pomerania, became confined within the bounds before laid downe. The first Prince of it whom we meet with on good record, was one Barnimus, of the noble Gryphonian family, anno 933. whose Grandson Suantiboru••, commanded over all this tract. But his Dominions being parted betwixt his sonnes, Bugislaus who had Pomerella, retained the language and old customs of the Sclavonians, Wartislaus, who possessed the residue, conformed himself to the Laws and Language of the Saxons; the Countrey by that means accounted for a part of Germany: added unto the Empire and accompt thereof in the time of Frederick Barbarossa, by whom Bugislaus and Casimir, sonnes of Wartislaus were made Princes of the Empire, and Dukes of Pomeren. The Estate being after∣wards divided betwixt Bugislaus and Otho, sonnes of Barnimus the first, and the house of Otho fail∣ing in the person of Otho the third; that part hereof was given by the Emperour Frederick the third, to Frederick the second, Marquesse and Electour of Brandenburg: the cause of much contention a∣mongst these Marquesses and the other house of the Dukes of Pomeren; but thus agreed upon at last, that both Princes should continue the Armes and title, the possession of it to be yeelded to the Duke of Pomeren, on the failing of whose issue male, it should descend upon the heirs of the house of Bran∣denburg. The succession of these Princes followeth in this order.

The DVKES of POMERANIA.

• 1 Wartislaus the first Christian Prince of the Pomeranians, baptized by Otho Bishop of Bam∣berg, anno 1124.
• 11••8 2 Bugislaus sonne of Wartislaus created by Frederick Barbarossa, the first Duke of Po∣meren.
• 1188 3 Bugislaus II. sonne of Bugislaus, planted the void parts of Pomeren with Saxon Colo∣nies.
• 1282 4 Barnimus sonne of Bogeslaus the second, after whose death Pomeren was divided into two Principalities.

DUKES of Wolgast.

• 1277 5 Bugislaus II. sonne of Barnimus.
• 1319 6 VVartislaus sonne to Bugislaus.
• 1326 7 Barnimus II.
• 1365 8 VVartislaus II.
• 1394 9 Barnimus III.
• 1405 10 VVartislaus III.
• 1456 11 Ericus sonne of VVartislaus.

DUKES of Stetin.

• 1277 1 Otho Duke of Pomeren Stetin.
• 1345 2 Casimir sonne of Otho.
• 1368 3 Casimir II. sonne of Casimir.
• 1374 4 Suartiborus brother of Casimir.
• 1413 5 Casimir III. sonne of Suantiborus.
• 1433 6 Joachim sonne of Casimir.
• 1451 7 Otho III. son of Joachim, dyed with∣out issue, anno 1464.
• 12 Bugislaus III. commonly called the tenth, the younger Princes of both houses making up the tale, succeeded Otho the third in that part of Pomeren, uniting so the whole into one estate.
• 1523 13 George sonne of Bugislaus the tenth.
• 1531 14 Philip sonne of George, in whose time the Reformation made by Luther was admitted into Pomerania.
• 1583 15 Bugislaus IV. but the 13. in the Dutch accompt, sonne of Philip his younger brother, Er∣nestus Ludovicus having that of Stetin for his share.
• 16 Bugislaus V. and 14 sonne of Bugislaus the fourth born in the year 1580. succeeded in Pomeren of VVolgast; as Philip Julius son of Ernestus Ludovicus did in that of Stetin. After whose death Bogislaus became Lord of all Pomerania, in a fair way to have lost all to the prevailing Imperialists, had not the timely coming in of the King of Sweden stop∣ped their violent Progresse. But Bogislaus dying without issue in the time of the war, and in him the male issue of the house of Bugislaus the tenth being quite extinguished George VVilliam Marquesse and Electour of Brandenbourg put in his claime for the Estate, according to the compact and agreement spoken of before. Betwixt whom and the Swedes (who under colour of aiding the last Duke had possessed themselves of all the strong places in the Countrey) it was accorded and concluded at the Treaty of Munster that all the Higher Pomerania, with the Isles of Rugen and VVollin, and the town of Stetin; should from thencefourth belong to the Crown of Sweden▪

• the Lower Pomeren to be enjoyed by the house of Brandenbourg,* 1.53 so long as the male issue lasteth; on default whereof that also to be added unto that Crown; the Armes and Titles to be used by both promiscuously. And in regard the Marquesse of Bran∣denbourg was to part with the Vpper Pomeren for the contentation of the Swedes, (with∣out which no firm peace could be made in Germany) it was also there agreed upon, that the temporall estates of the Bishopricks of Halberstade, Minden, and Camine, toge∣ther with that of Magdeburg (after the decease of the present Bishop) should be for ever added to the possessions of that house; the Marquesses and Electors of it to bee thenceforth entituled Dukes of Magdeburg, Princes of Halberstad and Minden. But what will be the issue of these conclusions futures time must shew.

The Armes of Pomeran, are A Gryphon.

16. MECKLENBOVRG.

The Dukedome of MECKLENBVRG, is bounded on the East with Pomerania, on the West with Holstein, a Province of the Kingdome of Danemark; on the North with the Baltick Sea, and on the South with Brandenbourg, and Saxen-lawenburg. So called from Mecklenburg, or Megalopolis, (both names in severall languages of the Dutch and Greeks signifying a great City) a great town of that name here being in the time of the Heruli and the Vandals (the old Inhabitants of these parts) whose chief City it was, but on their leaving of this Countrey, decayed to nothing. The Countrey of the same nature as Pomerania, and was rich in corn.

Places of most importance in it are 1 VVismar, a noted Port on a Creek or Bay of the Baltick Sea; raised out of the ruines of old Mecklenburg before mentioned, about the year 1240. the Haven hereof capable of the greatest vessels, to which it gives a safe and assured Station, whence the name of VVismar; the word signifying in the Sclavonian language idem ac certum mare (as my Author hath it) as much as a quiet or safe Sea. Now one of the Hanse Towns, and being it lies conveniently for the use of the Swedes, alloted to that Crown by the treaty of Munster, the Duke of Mecklenburg being in recompense there∣of to have the temporaries of the Bishopricks of Swerin, and Ratzenburg. 2 Swerin, seated upon the South side of the Lake so named, an Episcopall See, and honoured with giving the title of a Baronie to the Dukes of Mecklenburg. 3 Malcaw, first walled by Niclot, Prince of the Vandals, anno 1270. 4 Ratzenburg, an Episcopall See, spoken of before. 5 Rostoch, the next in reputation of all the H••••se towns, to Lubeck and Dantsick. Large, rich, and much frequented by all sorts of Merchants, in compasse almost six English miles, situate on the River VVarn neer the fall thereof into the Baltick. Ho∣noured with an University here founded by John Duke of Mecklenburg, an. 1419. the first Professors in it being brought from Erdford in Saxony. 6 Stargard, which once gave the title of Duke to the younger Princes of this house. 7 Sarentine, memorable for a Nunnery there founded by Duke Magnus the se∣cond. 8 La••, built and fortified by Duke Henry the second, as an out-work to Rostock, which he had lately bought of Christopher then King of Denmark. 9 Sternberg, of which little memorable. 10 Fridland, on the edge of Pomeren not far from Stargard, which gave the title of Duke to Albert of Wallenstein, after that called Duke of Fridland, that eminent and prosperous Commander of the Im∣periall Forces, in the late war of Germany: but miserably murdered after all his services by command of the Emperour. 11 Fitchtell, both pleasantly and strongly seated on the edge of a Lake. 12 Dam∣min, a strong Town on the Marches of Brandenburg.

The antient Inhabitants of this Country were the Vandals, with the rest of the Heruli, and Burgundi∣ans. But the Burgundians being reckoned as a part of the Vandals were not much took notice of (till their irruptions on the borders of the Roman Empire made them more considerable) the Princes of these Nations using no other title then Kings of the Heruli and Vandals. Of these the first is said to be one Anthyrius sonne of an Amazonian Lady, who learned his first rudiments of warfare under Alexander the Great. Out of his loins descended a long race of Kings, amongst whom Rhadaguis••, who toge∣ther with Alarick the Goth, invaded Italy, (I know not by what warrant) is accounted one. Gunderick the seventeenth of these Kings, weary of so cold a dwelling, passed towards the South, and having harassed Gaul and Spain, shipped himself over the Straits of Gibralter, and erected the Kingdome of the Vandals in Africk; whose successors we shall meet with there. By Vitalaus the youngest sonne of Gensericus the sonne of Gunderick, the line of these Princes is continued, who after mingling with the Obotriti, and other of the Sclaves, succeeding into the void places of the Vandals, left off the title of Kings of the Vandals, and called themselves Kings of the Heruli and Obotriti: continuing it to Pri∣bislaus or Primislaus the second, who wrote himself Pribislaus Dei gratia Herulorum, Wagriorum, Circi∣panorum, Palumborum, Obotritorum, Kissinorum, Vandalorumque Rex. Making herein a generall muster of those tribes of the Sclaves and Heruli, which remained under his command. But he being vanqui∣shed by Henry surnamed the Lyon, Duke of Saxony and Bavaria, the title of King was laid aside; his successours contenting themselves with that of Princes. Divided betwixt Henry and Niclot, the Ne∣phews of Pribislaus by his sonne Henry into two Estates, Henry assuming to himselfe the title of Prince of the Obotriti, and Niclot, that of Prince of the Vandals. But the posterity of Niclot failing in VVilliam the last of that line, anno 1430. his title with the lands thereunto belonging, fel to Henry the fat, the fourth Duke of Mecklenbourg, to which honour Albert and John the sonnes of Henry the fourth,

descended from the elder house, had been advanced by the Emperour Charles the fourth at Prague, Anno 1348. The succession of which family from Pribislaus take in order thus.

The PRINCES of the HERVLI, and DUKES of MECKLENBVRG.

• 1158 1 Pribislaus the last King, and first Prince of the Heruli, after their subjection to the Sax∣ons; restored to this title and his former estate by the bountifull conquerrers, to be held under the right and homage of the house of Saxony.
• 1179 2 Henry sonne of Pribislaus, baptized with all his people in his fathers life time, by the per∣swasion of Henry Duke of Saxony and Bavaria; by whom restored to their E∣states.
• 3 Henry II. sonne of the former Henry; dividing the estate with his brother Niclot.
• 1228 4 John surnamed the Divine, so called because created Doctor of Divinity in the U∣niversity of Paris, whither he was sent by his Father to learn good Arts.
• 1260 5 Henry III. surnamed of Hierusalem, because of his expedition thither against the Sa∣racens.
• 1302 6 Henry IV. surnamed the Lyon, for his valour and undaunted constancie.
• 1319 7 Albert and John the sonnes of Henry going to Prague with a Princely train, to attend on the Emperour Charles the fourth, were by him created Princes of the Empire, and Dukes of Mecklenberg, anno 1348.
• 1380 8 Magnus sonne of Albert.
• 1384 9 John sonne of Magnus, the founder of the University of Rostock, anno 1419.
• 1423 10 Henry V. surnamed the Fat, who on the death of William the last Prince of the Vandals, succeeded into his Estate.
• 1447 11 Magnus II. sonne of Henry, founder of the Cathedrall Church of Rostock.
• 1503 12 Albert II. sonne of Magnus the second.
• 1547 13 John-Albert sonne of Albert the second, endowed the University of Rostock with the lands of some dissolved Monasteries and authorised in his Estates, the Reformamation of Religion begun by Luther.
• 1578 14 John III. sonne of John-Albert.
• 1592 15 Adolph-Frederick, and John-Albert, sonnes of John the third, dispossessed hereof by the Em∣our Fernand the second, anno 1528. their Estates with the title of Duke of Mecklen∣berg, being conferred on Albert of Wallenstein Duke of Fridland. Who had not long enjoyed the Title, when Gustavus Adolphus King of Sweden, the Assertor of the liber∣ties of Germany, restored it to the proper owners. The heirs to whose Estates is Gustavus Adolphus, the onely sonne and heir of John-Albert, the other of those two being without issue.

17. The DUKEDOME of SAXONIE.

The Dukedome of SAXONIE reckoning in the Estates and Provinces united to it, and now in possession of those Dukes, is bounded on the East with a part of Bohemia, Lusatia, and some part of Brandenbourg, on the West with Hassia, on the North with the Dukedome of Brunswick, and on the South with Franconia, and some parts of Bohemia. So called because the Patrimony and pos∣session of the Dukes of Saxonie, who since the proscription and deprivation of Duke Henry sur∣named the Lyon, anno 1180. in some or other of these Countries have had their fixed seat and ha∣bitation. It containeth the distinct Provinces of 1 Turingia, 2 Misnia, 3 Voiteland, and 4 Saxony pro∣perly and specially so called.

1 TVRINGIA, is bounded on the East with Misnia, and a part of the River Saltza; on the West with Hassia; on the North with the Wood Hartz, and Saxony specially so called; on the South with the mountainous Forrest of Duringer-Wald, by which parted from Frankenland. So cal∣led from the Turingians, the antient Inhabitants hereof, communicating their name to the place they dwelt in.

The Countrey environed round about with woody mountaines, but within those mountains plain and pleasant, fruitfull in Corn, and very plentifull of Woods, which yeelds great profit to the people; not without some Mines of Gold and Silver, and rich pits of Salt: able to furnish out a feast, but for wine onely, which is the greatest want hereof. The whole length of it is not above 120 miles, and the breadth not more. Yet is so populous and well planted, that there are said to be in it 12 Earldomes, and as many Abbies, 144 Cities, and as many market Towns, 150 Castles, and 2000 Villages.

The principall of these are 1. Jene, on the River Saltza, bordering upon Misnia, an University chiefly of Physitians, founded in the year 1555. by the sonnes of John-Frederick the Electour, taken prisoner and deprived by Charles the fift. 2 Erdford on the River Gers, out of which are cut so many

Channels,* 1.54 that every street hath almost the benefit of it. A rich, populous, and well built City, ac∣counted amongst the best of Germany; and made an University in the time of the Emperour Wence∣slaus, anno 1392. Many times burnt, but still reviving like the Phoenix out of the ashes into greater glory. At first immediately subject to the Archbishop and Electour of Mentz, but having freed themselves from him, they have since governed themselves as a free Estate, and one of the Hansetowns; not subject to the Duke of Saxony as their Lord, but their Patron and good neighbour onely. 3. Mulhuisen, and 4 Noorthuisen, two Imperiall Cities, but not else observable. 5 Smalcald, famous for the league here made, anno 1530. between all the Princes and Cities, which maintained the do∣ctrine of Luther: into which first entred John Frederick the Duke of Saxon, and his sonne; Ernest, and Francis, Dukes of Luneburg; Philip the Lantgrave, George Marquesse of Brandenbourg, the Cities of Strasburg, Nurenberg, Heilbrune, Ruteling, Vlmes, Lindaw, Constance, Mening, and Campedune. After∣ward anno 1535. there entred into it Barnimus, and Philip, Princes of Pomeren, Vlrick Duke of Wirten∣berg, Robert Prince of Bipont, William Earl of Nassaw, George, and Joachim, Earls of Anhalt; the Cities of Franckford, Hamborough, Auspurg, Hannolder; and not long after the Palsgrave, and the King of Dane∣mark. By which famous confederacy, Luther not onely kept his head on his shoulders; but the Re∣ligion by him reformed, grew to that strength, that no force or policy could ever root it up. 2 Kale or Hale, where Philip the Lantgrave was treacherously taken prisoner, as you shall hear anon. 5 Wiemar, a town which together with the Castle of Gotha, were assigned for the estate and maintenance of that re∣ligious, though unfortunate Prince, Iohn Frederick Duke of Saxony, after this discomfiture and imprison∣ment by Charles the fift: The ordinary seat of the Dukes of Saxon Weimar, who live here in a stately and magnificent Castle made of polished stone: most artificially contrived, and beautified with Or∣chards, Gardens, and other pleasures, but made more pleasant by the watering of the River Ilma, upon which it standeth. 6 Gotha, upon the River Lonn, said by Rithaimerus to bee built by the Gothes, and by them thus named. A place not long since of great importance, and fortified with a very strong Castle called Grimmensten, which being made the retiring place of one Grunbachius, and other seditious persons under the protection of John Frederick one of the sonnes of the deprived Ele∣ctor; was taken after a long siege by Augustus the Elector of Saxony, (to whom the strength of this peece being in the hands of the injured family, was a very great eye-sore) and by command of the ••••states of the Empire in the Diet at Regensberg, anno 1567. demolished and levelled with the ground.

The old Inhabitants hereof were the Chasnari of Tacitus, and after them the Turingi, who with the Heruli, under the conduct of Odoacer conquered Italy; called by some Turcilingi, by others sup∣posed to be the Tyrangetae of Ptolemie. Not heard of in this Countrey till the reign of Childerick the fourth King of the French; then taking up the whole Provinces of Hassia and Turingia under one Bissinus their King. Their Armes at that time, and long after, Azure, a Lion Barrie Argent and Gules, armed and Crowned Or. Being overcome at the great battell of Zulph neere Colen, where they joined with the Almans they became subject to the French; afterwards added to the Empire by Henry the first. William the sonne of the Emperour Otho the first, being Archbishop of Mentz, by the permission of his Father held the City of Erdford and all the rest of Turingia, which hee lef•• unto his successours in that See: governed by their Vidames, and Provinciall Officers till the time of Conradus Salicus, when Ludovicus Barbatus one of these Vidames, (or Vicedomini) made himselfe the Proprietarie of it, and left the same unto his children after his decease. But in the time of Conrade the second, the issue of this Ludovicus either failing or dispossessed, it was by that Emperour conferred upon Lewis of Orleans, sonne to a sister of his Emperesse: the title of Lantgrave being given to them of this family, for their greater honour. Under eight Princes of this line, whereof five successively had the name of Lewis, this Estate continued next, falling to Herman a brother of the fift Lewis, then to a sixt Lewis, and last of all to Henry the brother of that Lewis, whom the male issue failed: having continued for the space of 252 years. To please all parties interessed in the succession, the Estate before entire was divided into two parts or Provinces. Of which this now called Duringen or Turingia was alloted to Henry Marquesse of Misnia, sonne of Judith the daughter of Herman: the Western part hereof, with the title of the Lantgravedome of Hessen, adjudged to Henry Duke of Bra∣bant in right, of Sophia his wife daughter of Lewis the sixth. In the description of which Countries we shall hear more of them.

2 MISNIA or Meissen is bounded on the East with Lusatia, on the West with Duringen, on the North with Saxonie, specially so called, and some part of Brandenburg; on the South with Voiteland and some part of Bohemia. The Countrey once overspread with woods and full of bogs, rendring the air unwholesome, and the soyl unprofitable: both rectified by the care and industry of the peo∣ple; now yeelding some mines of silver, and great plenty both of corn and pasturage: well watered with the Rivers Sala, Plisses, Elster, and Musda.

Places of most observation in it, are 1 Dresden, seated on the Albis, having continually on her wals and Bulwarkes, 150 Pieces of Ordinance; a stable of the Dukes, in which are 128 horses of service; and a Magazin, out of which 30000 Horse and Foot, may be armed at a dayes warning.

The Town it self situate on both sides of the River, by which divided into the old Towne and the new, joined into one by a bridge of 800 paces in length: the Countrey round about it very rich and pleasant; able to sustain great multitudes, for that cause made the ordinary seat of the Dukes of Saxony, who have here a strong and stately Castle. 2 Naumburg, 3 Mersburg, two Episcopall Sees.

4 Lipsique,* 1.55 as famous an University for Thilosophers, as Jene is for Physitians. It seemeth the Scholars and Citizens will not suffer their Beer to perish, of which here is so much drunk and exported, that the very custome of it due unto the Duke, amounts to 20000 pounds yearly; yet is this town of no more then two Churches; but wealthy, populous, and built for the most part of fair free stone; honoured with the Courts of Justice for all the Countrey. Though seated on the meeting of Pleiss, Parde, Elster, three Rivers, which lie almost on all sides of it; yet it is not strong: having been thrice taken by the Imperialists in lesse then two yeares, during the late German wars. Sufficiently famous (if for nothing else) for the great battell fought neere it betwixt the late King of Sweden and the Count of Tilly: the honour whereof falling to the Swedes and Saxons (with the death of 15000 of both sides, and all the losse of all the baggage, Armes and Ammunition of the Imperialls) treed all these parts of Germany from that civill and spirituall bondage, which was intended by the Emper∣our to be put upon them. 5 Mulsberg on the Elb, where John Frederick the Electour, was discom∣fited by Charles the fift. 6 Meissen, on the west side of the same River in a hilly and uneven ground, built by the Emperour Henry the first for defence of the Empire against the Sclaves: a Bishops See, and the first seat of the Marquesses of the Countrey; both which together with the Burgrave of the Town had their Palaces or Mansion-houses standing close together on the top of an hill, over∣looking both the Town and Countrey. From this Town the whole Province had the name of Me∣issen. 7 Friberg, neere the Mountaines of Bohemia, rich in mines of Silver. 8 Roclite, not far from which are rich Mines of tinne, discovered first in these parts by a Cornish-man spoken of before.

The first Inhabitants hereof were the Hermanduri and Suardones, subdued or outed by the Sorabi, a great Tribe of the Sclaves surnamed Winithi: first conquered by the Emperour Henry the first, who built the strong Town of Meissen to keep them under, and to impede the neighbouring Sclaves from any incroachments on the Empire. Being thus added to the Empire and account of Germany, it was a while governed by such Officers as by the Emperours were appointed to guard these Marches: the first Proprietarie Marquesse being one Echard, sonne of the Earl of Oostland, (descended from a younger sonne of Witikind, the last King of the Saxons) by the munificence of Otho the third, not made hereditary till the time of Henry the fift, who gave it in Fee to Conrade, Marquesse of Landsberg and Lusatia: whose Nephew Theodorick, by his sonne Otho surnamed the Rich, marryed Judith daugh∣ter of Herman Lantgrave of Duringen, by which match Duringen accrewed to the house of Meissen, Henry their sonne succeeding in both Estates. To this Henry succeeded Albert his sonne, and after him successively foure Fredericks, the last whereof by the Emperour Sigismund was created Ele∣ctour and Duke of Saxony, in whose posterity these honours and Estates doe as yet continue.

VOITELAND is bounded on the East with Bohemia, on the West with Frankenland; on the North with Misnia or Meissen, on the South with the Vpper Palatinate. So called, as some, from the Iuites or Vites (some of that people who together with the Saxons and Angles, conquered Britaine) of whom it had the name of Viteland, that is to say, the land or Countrey of the Vites. But being I finde not that the Saxons did spread so far Eastward, I rather think that this name was given it by the Sclaves, who finding it deserted, or but thinly peopled at their coming thither, might call it by the name of Voidland; from which the Alteration unto Voitland is both plaine and obvious. It is the smallest Province of all Germany, and never of such repute as to have any particular Prince as most others had, but alwayes reckoned as an accessory to some greater Estate. Nor hath it any Town or Cities, of great estimation: the chief of those which are, being 1 Olnits, 2 Worda, 3 Cornah, 4 Schneberg, neer the mountaines called Studetae by Ptolemie, famed for silver mines. 5 Gotzberg, 6 Culmbach, 7 Hoffe•• not much remarkable but onely for the Princes of it of the house of Brandenburg, called formerly Curia Pegniana.

The antient Inhabitants hereof were parts of the Nertereates and Danduti, succeeded to by the French and Sclaves, as they severally descended southwards into warmer Countries. Possessed and planted by the Sclaves it obtained this name. But being a small Nation, and a small Estate, it never had the honour of a particular Prince; but did most probably belong to the Lords of Meissen, upon which it bordereth, and now in their right to the Dukes of Saxony. But so that the Duke of Saxony is not the sole Lord hereof: the Marquesses of Ansbach of the house of Brandenbourg, possessing the towns of Hoffe and Colmbach, and some other parts of it; the Patrimony at the present of Christian, sonne of Joachim Ernest the late Marquesse of Ansbach, who now enjoyeth them with the title of the Marquesse of Colmbach.

SAXONIE specially so called, and sometime for distinction sake OBER SACHSEN, or the Vpper Saxonie, is bounded on the East with the Marquisate of Brandenbourg; on the West with Hassia; on the North with the Dukedome of Brunswick; on the South with Misnia. The air here∣of somewhat sharp, but healthy: the soil in the Southwest parts hilly and uneven, chiefly rich in Minerals; elsewhere sufficiently fruitfull. Divided into four Estates, that is to say, the Earldome of 1 Mansfield, 2 the Principate of Anbalt, 3 Bishoprick of Magdeburg, and 4 Saxonie it selfe: this last onely subject immediately to the Duke; the rest acknowledging his superiority, have their proper Lords.

1 Most Westwards towards Duringen and Hassia, lyeth the Earldome of MANSFEILD, so called from Mansfeild, once the the chief Town of it on the River Wieper. The other towns of note in it are 2 Isleben, betwixt the Rivers Sala and Wieper, supposed to be so called from the Goddesse

Isis, who after the death of her husband (as is said by Tacitus) visited these parts: now the Metropo∣lis of the Earldome, and the seat of Justice for the whole, setled here by Earl Voldradus, anno 1448. famous to all posterity for the birth and death of Martin Luther, born here in the yeer 1483. and here deceasing in the house of the Earl of Mansfield, anno 1546. Of whom, and the successe of his Reformation, as we have spoken much already, so we shall speak more, as occasion is, in the course of this work. 3 Wieper, (or Wypra) so called of the River on which it standeth. 4 Quernfurt, 5 Ro∣tenburg, 6 Alstad, 7 Helderung, bought of the Earls of Houstein. Some who delineate the Pedegree of these Earls of Mansfield, fetch it as high as from one of King Arthurs Knights of the Round Table, born at Mansfield in Nottinghamshire; who setling himself in Germany, gave that name to his house: a Military Originall, and very suitable to such an active and warlike Family. But those which doe not soar so high fetch them no further then from Burchard the fift, Earl of Quernfort, and Burgrave of Magdeburg, who following Frederick Barbarossa into the Holy Land deceased at Antioch, anno 1189. His Nephew Burchard, by a sonne of the same name, was the first of this Family that had the title of Earl of Mansfield, about the yeer 1250. continued ever since unto his Posterity (but under some acknowledgments to the Electors of Saxony.) Of these the most eminent, were Voldradus, one of the Councell of Estate to the Emperour Sigismund, anno 1411. a great improver of the Patrimony of the Earls hereof; 2 John-George, Lord Deputy or Lieutenant of Saxony under Duke Augustus. 3 Peter-Ernest, Governour of Luxembourg under Charles the fift, and Philip the second, by whom much exercised and employed in their wars with France. 4 Albert, a constant friend of Luthers, and a faithfull follower of John-Frederick the deprived Electour, in whose quarrell being outed of his estate, he retired to Magdeberg, which he most gallantly defended against the Emperour. And 5 Er∣nestus, Nephew of that Albert by his son John, so famous for the war which he maintained in most parts of Germany against Ferdinand the second, in behalf of Frederick Prince Elector Palatine, and the States of Bohemia, with so great constancy and courage.

East of the Earldome of Mansfield lyeth the Principate of ANHALT, much shaded, if not too much overgrown with woods; parts of the old Hercinian forrest, whence it had the name; Hol in Dutch, signifying a wood or forrest; and the Princes of this house created to this dignity by the stile of Principes Harciniae in Anhalt: Chief townes of it are, 1 Bernberg, the Dynastie and usuall title of this house, before they were created Princes of Anhalt. 2 Ballenstede, part of the antient Patri∣mony of the first Princes hereof. 3 Dessaw, the birth-place of some, and the buriall-place of others of this Family, beautified with a strong Castle built by Prince Albert the second, anno 1341. 4 Ser∣vest, the usuall place of the Princes residence. 5 Coeten, a well fortified place, in vain besieged by the joynt forces of the Arch-bishop of Magdeburg, and the Earl of Schwartzenwold.

We went as high as the Round Table for the Earls of Mansfield, but we must goe as high as the Ark for the Princes of Anhalt; some fetching them from Askenaz, the son of Gomer, and nephew of Japhet, from whom, and no other this Aseanian Family (for by that name it is called) are to fetch their Pedegree. But to content our selves with more sober thoughts, certain it is, that this Fa∣mily is of the old Saxon race, setled in these parts by Theodorik, King of Mets, or Austrasia, who gave the Towns of Ascandt and Ballenstede, with the lands adjoyning, to one Bernwald, or Berntho∣bald, a noble Saxon, anno 524. From which town and Castle of Ascandt, afterwards rased to the ground by Pepin, King of the French, anno 747. most probable it is that they took their name. From this Bernwald, or Bernthobald, by a long line of Princes, descended Albert the seventh of Anhalt, surnamed Vrsus, created Marquesse of Brandenburg by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, anno 1152. the Father of that Barnard, who by the Munificence and bounty of the same Emperour was created Duke of Saxony, in the roome of Duke Henry, surnamed the Lion, anno 1180. becoming so the Stemme of the two greatest Princes in all the Empire. Henry the second, son of this Barnard, was by the same Emperour, not long after, made Prince of Anhalt, the first of all this ancient and illustri∣ous Family which had been honoured with that title, continuing in his race to this very day; the two Electorates of Saxony and Brandenbourg, being mean while translated unto other Families. The most considerable of which Princes, though all men of Eminence, were 1 Rodolph, Generall of the forces of the Emperour Maximilian the first against the Venetians, whom he twice overcame in battell. 2 George the Divine, a great Reformer of the Church by his diligent preaching; whose Sermons and other Tractates (learned for the times he lived in) are still extant. 3 Christian, born in the yeer 1568. Commander of the Forces of Frederick, Prince Elector Palatine, in the wars of Bohemia.

North of the Principality of Anhalt, lyeth the Bishoprick of MAGDEBVRG, so called of Magdeburg the chief City; by some called Meydburg, and Meydenburg; whence by a Greek name Parthe∣nopolis, and Virginopolis, by a mungrell word made of Greek and Latine. A City seated on the Elb, di∣vided into three parts, but all strongly fortified; begirt with high walls, deep ditches, and almost unconquerable Bulwarks: yet very beautifull withall (before the last desolation of it) of elegant buildings, fair streets, and magnificent Temples: Built in the form of a Crescent, by the Emperour Otho the first, the founder of it, who having translated hither the Archiepiscopall See, for the greater honour of the place, built the Cathedrall of Saint Maurice, where his wife lies buried, anno 948. testi∣fied by the inscription to be daughter of Edmund, King of England. A town which hath long flourished in a great deal of glory, and tasted of as much affliction as any other in Germany. For re∣fusing to receive the Interim, it was out-lawed by the Emperour Charles the fifth, and given to him that could first take it. It was first hereupon attempted by the Duke of Meglenberg; but he was in

a Camisado taken Prisoner,* 1.56 his Army routed, his Nobles made captive, and 260 horse brought into the City. Next, it was besieged by Duke Maurice of Saxonie, who, on honourable termes, was after a long siege received into it, anno 1550. when it had stood on his own guard the space of three yeers. Which long opposition of one town, taught the German Princes what constancy could doe; it held up the coals of Rebellion in Germany, and indeed proved to be the fire which burned the Emperours Trophies. For here Duke Maurice coming acquainted with Baron Hedeck, hatched that confederacy, by which not long after this great Emperour was driven out of Germany. At last it yeilded to Duke Maurice, under the protection of whose successours it hath since enjoyed a long course of felicity, till the yeer 1631 in which most miserably burnt and sacked by the Earl of Tilly: of whom it is observed, that after that fact he never prospered, being shortly after totally routed at the battell of Leipsick, and wounded to the death not long after that, neer the River Leck. Other places of note in this Bishoprick, are, 2 Wormsted, beautified with a fair Castle, not far from Magdeburg, the ordinary seat, or retiring place of the Bishop. 3. Grabatz, upon the River Struma, 4 Mockern, on the same River. 5 Barleben, beneath Meydberg on the Elb. 6 Lunburg, betwixt the Elb and the Struma; not much observable.

The Archiepiscopall See being translated hither from Valersleve and Vrese, (places too obscure for so great a dignity) by Otho the first; and by him endowed with great Revenues, and a goodly territory round about it: the Arch-bishop hereof was also by his procurement made the Primate of Germany; acknowledged so by all but the Bishop of Saltzburg, and the three Spirituall Electors. For the Admini∣stration of Justice in matters Criminall and Civill, the said Otho did ordain an Officer whom they called the Burgrave, conferring that office first on Gero, Marquesse of Lusatia. Through many hands it came at last to Burchard, Lord of Quernfort, and the Earls of Mansfield; many of which en∣joyed this honour: setled at last by the Emperour Rodolphus of Habspurg, on the Dukes of Saxony, who by this means came to have great command and influence on the whole Estate. The Archbishops notwithstanding continued Lords of it, and the whole territory or district adjoyning to it, till the Reformation of Religion: when the Revenues separated from the jurisdiction were given to Lay Princes (for the most part of the house of Brandenbourg) with the title of Administrator. Finally, by the Pacification made at Munster, this fair estate is to be setled for ever on the Electors of that house to be possessed by them, and their Heires and Successours, by the title of the Dukes of Magdeburg; the bet∣ter to content them for the concession which they made to the Crown of Sweden, of a great part of their right and title to the Dukedome of Pomeren.

SAXONIE most specially so called, the fourth and last part of this Division, stretcheth it self along the Elb betwixt Magdeburg and Meisson; of the same nature, in regard both of soil and air, as is said before. Places of most importance in it, are 1 Torge, or Torgow, by some placed in Misnia, but by Mercator in this Province. Built on the west side of the Elb, in form Orbicular, and falling every way from the sides of a mountain, beautified with a stately and pleasant Castle, belonging to the Elector of Saxony, who is Lord hereof, built by John-Frederick the Elector, anno 1535. Near to the City, is a Lake of a mile in compasse; for which the Citizens pay yeerly to the Duke 500 Guldens. 2 Warlitz upon the Elb, once a Commandery of the Templars. 3 Weisenberck, lying towards Brunswick. 4 Kemberg, on the west side of the Elb. 5 Bitterfelt, betwixt the Elb and the Mulda; and 6 Witten∣berg, on the Elb, in an open plain, but strongly fenced with walls, ramparts, and deep ditches. The chief beauty of it lyeth in one fair street, extending the whole length of the City; in the midst whereof is the Cathedrall Church, a large Market-place, and the common Councell-house. In for∣mer times the seats of the Dukes Electors, till the Electorall dignity was conferred on the house of Meis∣sen, who liking better their own Country, kept their Courts at Dresden: But so, that Wittenberg is still acknowledged for the head City of the Electorate; and was made an University for Divines by Duke Frederick, anno 1508. It was called Wittenberg, as some conjecture, from Wittikindus, once Lord of Saxony, when the extent thereof was greatest: famous for the sepulchres of Luther and Me∣lanchthon, but chiefly for that here were the walls of Popery broken down, and the reformation of the Church begun, by the zeal and diligence of Martin Luther; the story of which reformation so by him begun, I shall here sub-joyn: This Luther, as before is said, was born at Isleben, in the Country of Mansfield, and student first at Magdeburg, but at the establishing of the University of Witten∣berg, chosen to be one of the Professours of Divinity there. It happened in the yeer 1516, that Pope Leo having need of money, sent about his Jubilees and Pardons, against the abuses of which, Luther inveighed both privately and publickly, by word and writing. This spark grew at last to so great a coal, that it fired the Papall Monarchy. Of the success of his endevours we have spoke already. We shall look here upon the difficulties which the Cause passed through, before it could be blessed with a publick settlement. Concerning which, we are to know, that the Princes of Germany, and many of the Free Cities had embraced his doctrine, and in the Imperiall Chamber at Spires, solemn∣ly professed they would defend it to the death: hence were they first called Protestants. Nor stayed they there, but made a solemn League and Combination at Smalcald, spoken of before, for defence thereof, and of each other in the exercise and profession of it. Yet was not this Reformation so easily established. Christ had foretold, that Fathers should be against their Sonnes, and Brothers against Brothers for the truths sake; neither doe we ever finde in any story, that the true Religion was in∣troduced, or Religion corrupted about to be amended, without warre and bloud-shed. Charles the Em∣perour whetted on by the Popes of Rome had long born a grudge against the Reformation; but especi∣ally

against the confederacy of Smalcald. After long heart burning on either side, they broke out into open war••e, which at first succeeded luckily with the Princes. But there being an equality of command between John Frederick the Elector of Saxony, and Philip the Lantgrave of Hassia, one some∣times not approving; other whiles thwarting the others projects; the end proved not answerable. Besides, the politick Emperour alwayes eschewed all occasions of battell, and by this delay wearied out this Army of the Princes; which without performing any notable exploit, disbanded it self: every man hastning home to defend his own. The Duke of Saxony had most cause to hasten home∣ward. For in his absence, his cousin Maurice forgetting the education he had under him, and how formerly the Duke had conquered for him, and estated him in the Province of Misnia; combined himself with the Emperour, and invaded his unckles County. But the Duke Electour, not onely recovered his own, but subdued all the Estates, in which he had formerly placed his ungratefull and ambitious kinsman. The Emperour all this while was not idle, but waited advantage to encounter the Duke, which at last he found nigh unto Mulberg, where the Duke was hearing a Sermon. The Emperour giveth the Alarum; the Duke startling from his religious exercise, seeketh to order his men but in vain. For they supposing the Emperour to be nearer with all his forces, then indeed he was, adde the wings of fear to the feet of cowardise, and flie away: yet did the Duke with a few resolute Gentlemen, as well as they could, make head against the enemy, till most of them were slain, and the Duke himself taken Prisoner. The morrow after this overthrow, he was condemned to lose his Head; but pardoned at last on condition that he should ransomlesse set free Marquesse Albert of Bran∣denbourg, renounce his dignity of the Electorship, resigne up all his inheritance, with the like harsh Articles. It was also urged, that he should alter his Religion: but that he so constantly denyed, that it was omitted. For his after maintenance, there were rendred back unto him, the towns of Wey∣mar, and Goth, from the former of which, his Posterity are now called Dukes of Saxon-Weymar: After this Victory the Emperour fraudulently intrapped the Lantgrave: then marched he against the Cities, in all which he prevailed, restored the Masse, and drave them to hard composition for their liberties. It was thought, that in this war the Emperour got 1600000 Crowns, and 500 peeces of Ordinance. The Imprisonment of the Lantgrave, contrary to the Emperours promise, was the chief thing which overthrew his good fortune. For Duke Maurice having pawned his word, and given unto the Lantgraves children his Bond, for the safe return of their Father; found himself much wronged and grieved: therefore consulting with Baron Hedeck, he entred league with the French King, associ∣ated himself with Marquesse Albert of Brandenbourg, suddenly surprised Auspurg; and by the terrour which his haste brought with it, forced the Emperour to flie from Inspruch; and the Fathers to break up the Councell of Trent. The Emperour now brought low, easily hearkned to an honourable Composition, which not long after was concluded: the Cities recovering their Priviledges, free passage being given to the Reformation, and all things else reduced to the same state they were in before the wars; the restoring of John-Frederick to his Dukedom and Electorship excepted only. So did this Duke Maurice both overthrow the liberty of his Country, and restore it: so was the work of Reformation by his means depressed, by the same again revived and established stronger then ever. Thus we see that of the Poet verified:

—Vel nemo, vel qui mihi vulnera fecit, Solus Achillaeo tollere more potest.

None but the man which did his Country wound, Achilles-like, could heal and make it sound.

It is observed by some, that the deprivation of John Frederick, and the advancement of Maurice fell out very happily for the confirming of the Reformation then contended for. First, in regard of John Frederick, whose Christian patience and Magnanimity during the whole time of his imprisonment, ad∣ded great reputation to the cause for which he he suffered: 2 In respect of Duke Maurice, who was a man of far greater parts to advance the work, and every way as zealous in pursuance of it as the other was: And 3 In relation to the children of the deprived Duke, men not to be relied on in a matter of such weight and moment: insomuch, as it was said of him after his decease, Quod filios reliquerit sui dissimillimos. But to return unto my story. The doctrine of Luther thus setled in Ger∣many, and being so agreeable to the Word of God, was quickly propagated over all Christendome: the reasons of which, next unto the Almighty power of the most High, may be principally six: 1 The diligence and assiduity of preaching in City, and Village; 2 The publishing of books of Piety, and Christian Religian; 3 The translations of the Scriptures, into the vulgar languages, whereby the simple might discern good from bad, the muddy doctrine of Rome, from the clear water of life, 4 The education of youth, especially in Catechismes, which contained the whole body of Christian reli∣gion; which once well planted in their mindes, was irradicable; 5 The continuall offers of dispu∣tations with the adverse party, in a publick audience; which being denyed, gave assurance of the truth, and soundnesse of the one side, as of the falshood and weaknesse of the other; 6 Their com∣piling of Martyrologies, and Histories of the Church; which cannot but work an admirable confirma∣tion of Faith, and constancy in the hearers and readers. There is one only policy wanting, namely, the calling of a generall Synod, to compose the differences of the reformed Church, about the Sacra∣ment, and Predestination; which would certainly strengthen their own cause, and weaken the enemies,

whose chief hopes are,* 1.57 that the present disagreements will arme party against party, to their own destruction. But God grant that their hopes may be frustrated, and we will say with the Poet,

—Haemanus Trojam erigent? Parvas habet spes Troja, si tales habet.

Shall these small jarres restore the ruin'd Pope? Small hope he hath, if this be all his hope.

But it is time we should proceed to the story of Saxony; the ancient inhabitants of which tract were the Longobardi, or Lombards of Magdeburg; and part of the Cherusci about Mansteld, and Wirten∣berg. Overcome by the prevailing Saxons, they became part of their name and Country, which in the full extent thereof was once far greater then now it is: containing all the Countries betwixt the Rhene and the River Eydore, in the Cimbrick Chersonesse; and from the River Saltza to the German and Baltick Oceans. These, said by some to be a People of Asia, and there called the Sacae; who finding that small territory (now a part of Persia) too narrow for them, forsook their Coun∣try, and at last fixed themselves in the Cimbrick Chersonesse; where they first took the names of Pasaeasons (or Sac-sons) that is to say, the ••ons of the Sacae. The improbality of this we have there disputed. Omitting therefore that and the like Originations of them, I conceive them (for my part) to be naturall Germans; some tribe of that most populous and potent people of the Suevi; but for the reason of the name, let every man enjoy the pleasure of his own opinion. Certain I am that in Ptolemies time they were possessed of those parts beyond the Elb, & thence extended to the Ey∣dore, part of which tract is now known by the name of Holstein; and were accounted in that time to be no new-comers. Afterwards as they grew in number, they inlarged their quarters, and passing over the Elb in the time of the latter Roman Emperours, possessed themselves of the void places which were left by the French, then busied in the conquest of more fruitfull Countries; communi∣cating their name to all the Nations which they overcame, as the French had formerly done before them. So that in fine, they took up the now Dukedomes of Holstein, Lunenbourg, and Brunswick, the Bishopricks of Bremen, Verda, Hildersheim, Halberstad, and Magdeburg; the old Marches of Branden∣bourg, the Earldome of Mansfield, Wesiphalen, both Friselands, Overyssell, with as much of Guelderland and Holland, as lay on that side of the Rhene. By which account the present Electorall Family hath not one foot of the old Saxony in their possession: the seat and Patrimony of the Electors being re∣moved into other Countries, upon the alterations and changes which have hapned in that estate: the name and title of Saxony being given to the Country about Wittenberg for no other reason, but because it was the chief seat of the Duke Electors. But to proceed, a stout and valiant Nation questi∣onless they were, the Conquerors of the Isle of Britain, & the last people of the Germans, which yeilded up their Country unto Charles the great; by whose means gained unto the Gospell, anno 785. Their last King was called Wittichindus, from whom descend the Kings of France, since the time of Hugh Capet; the regent Kings of Denmark, of the house of Old••nberg; the Dukes of Burgundy and Sa∣voy; the Marquesses of Montferrat; besides many other noble and illustrious Families, though of lesser note: The male issue of Wittikinde (whom Charles the great created, taking the first Duke of Saxony) determining in the person of Otho the third, Emperour of Germany, it was by him conferred on Barnard Lord of Lunenburg (but the precise time thereof I finde not:) and on the forfeiture in∣curred by his posterity, in the person of Duke Henry the Proud, bestowed by Frederick Barbarossa up∣on Barnard of Anhalt, anno 1180. whose issue in the right line failing, it was finally estated by the Emperour Sigismund on Frederick Landgrave of Turingia, and Ma••quesse of Misnia, anno 1423. In his Family it hath since continued, but not without a manifest breach in the course of the succession: which hapned when John-Frederick being deprived of the Electorall dignity and estate; his cousin Duke Maurice was invested in them by Charles the fift. And because these translations of States be not ordinary, I will briefly relate the Ceremonies thereat used, as I have collected them out of Sleiden. There were at Wittenberg scaffolds erected, on which sate the Emperour, and the Princes Electors in their Robes. On the back side of the State were placed the Trumpeters; right against it s••andeth Duke Maurice with two bands of horsmen. The first in a full careere run their horses up to the pa∣vilion: out of the second issued Henry Duke of Brunswick, Wolfang Prince of Bipont, and Albert Duke of Bavier. These when they had in like manner coursed their horses about, alighted, ascended to the Throne, and humbly requested the Emperour, that for the common good he would advance Duke Maurice to the Electorship. He consulted with the Electors, made answer by the Bishop of Mentz, that he was content; so Duke Maurice would in person come and desire it. Then came forth Duke Mau∣rice, with the whole troup; before him were born ten ensignes bearing the Armes of as many Regions, wherein he desired to be invested. When he came before the throne, he kneeled down on his knees, and humbly desired the Emperor to bestow on him the Electorship of Saxony, and all the lands of John-Frederick, late Elector. His Petition was granted. Then the Bishop of Mentz read unto him the Oath by which the Electors are bound unto the Empire: which Oath, when Duke Maurice had taken, the Emperour delivered unto him a Sword, which was a signe of his perfect investiture. Duke Maurice, now the Elector of Saxony, arose, gave the Emperour thanks, promised his fidelity, made obeysance, and took his place amongst the Electors. This solemnity was on the 24 day of Feb. anno 1548. This said, it is high time that we should proceed unto the Catalogue of

The DVKES of SAXONIE.* 1.58

• 785 1 Witikind the last King of the Saxons vanquished and created the first Duke by Charles the Great.
• 825 2 Bruno the brother of Witikind.
• 843 3 Luitulphus sonne of Bruno.
• 855 4 Bruno II. sonne of Luitulphus.
• 8••6 5 Otho brother of Bruno the second.
• 916 6 Henry surnamed the Fowler, sonne of Otho; Emperour of the Romans and King of Germany.
• 938 7 Otho II. Duke of Saxonie and Emperour called Otho I.
• 974 8 Otho III. Duke of Saxonie and Emperour called Otho II.
• 984 9 Otho IV. Duke of Saxonie and Emperour called Otho III.
• 10 Barnard Lord of Lunenburg created Duke of Saxonie, and the first Electour by Otho the third, who was the last Duke of the race of Witikind.
• 1021 11 Barnard II sonne of Barnard the first.
• 1063 12 Ordulphus sonne of Barnard the second.
• 1073 13 Magnus sonne of Ordulphus, who taking part with Rodulphus of Schwaben against Henry the fourth, was taken prisoner and deprived.
• 14 Lotharius Earl of Querdfort, created Duke of Saxonie by Henry the fourth. He was also Em∣perour of the Romans.
• 1125 15 Henry Guelph, surnamed the Proud, Duke of Bavaria, the husband of Gertrude daughter of Lotharius, by whom created Duke Electour.
• 1139 16 Henry II. surnamed the Lyon, Duke of Saxonie and Bavaria, son of Henry the Proud by his first wife Walfildis the daughter of Magnus, proscribed and outed of his Estates by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa. After which this great Estate being parcelled and divided into many parts, the title of the Duke Electour of Saxonie, was given by the said Emperour to
• 1180 17 Barnard of Anhalt sonne of Albert Marquesse of Brandenbourg, and grandchilde of Elica, the daughter of Duke Magnus, to whom for his seat and habitation the Em∣perour Courade the third gave the City of Wittenberg; the head, since that time, of this Electorate.
• 1212 18 Albert sonne of Barnard; from whom the Dukes of Lawenburg doe derive their Pe∣degree.
• 1273 19 Albert II. sonne of Albert the first.
• 1327 20 Rodolph sonne of Albert the second.
• 1356 21 Rodolph II. sonne of Rodolph the first.
• 1373 22 Wenceslaus sonne of Rodolph the second.
• 1389 23 Rodolph III. sonne of Wenceslaus.
• 1419 24 Albert III. brother of Rodolph the third, the last Electour of Saxonie of the house of Anhalt.
• 1423 25 Frederick Lantgrave of Duringen, and Marquesse of Misnia, (on the failing of the house of Anhalt, anno 1422) created Duke of Saxonie by the Emperour Sigismund, the house of Lawenburg pretermitted, for want of putting in their claim.
• 1428 26 Frederick II. sonne of Frederick the first.
• 1464 27 Ernest sonne of Frederick the second.
• 1486 28 Frederick III. sonne of Ernest.
• 1525 29 John brother to Frederick the third.
• 1532 30 John-Frederick sonne of John the first; a great advancer of the Reformation of Religion, im∣prisoned, and deprived of his Electorship by Charles the fift.
• 1547 31 Maurice descended from Albert the brother of Ernest, created Duke Elector by Charles the fift, whom after wards he drave out of Germany; and was slain in the battell of Sif∣fridhuse, against Marquesse Albert of Brandenbourg.
• 1553 32 Augustus brother of Maurice.
• 1586 33 Christian sonne of Augustus.
• 34 Christian II. sonne of Christian the first.
• 35 John-George brother of Christian the second, who first sided with the Emperour Ferdinand the second against the Elector Palatine, and after with the King of Sweden against the Emperour.

The Revenues of this Duke are thought to be the greatest of any one Prince of Germanie (the Imperial familie excepted) amounting at the least to 400000 l. per annum, though in multitude of Vassals, and greatnesse of territorie, he come short of some of them. And to make up this sum (or perhaps a greater) it is conceived that the profit which ariseth to him out of silver mines, is no lesse then 130000 yearly; the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 laid on Beer in Leipsich onely, a City but of two Parish Churches (by which

conjecture at the rest) being farmed at 20000 l per annum.* 1.59 Then hath he the tenthes of all sorts of encrease, as of corn, wine, &c. the Salt-houses at Hall, and some other places, very fair lands belonging unto his domain; and besides a standing and perpetuall tax laid upon the Subject, towards the main∣tenance of the war against the Turke: granted at first in times of danger and hostility; but gathered ever since in the time of peace (as to that Enemie) under colour of being ready and prepared against him. According to the quantity of his Intrado so he keeps his State, well served and better atten∣ded, then any other of the Electors: there being at one time in the Court of Christian, the Father of the present Duke, three Dukes, three Earles, and five Barons of other Nations (besides the Nobility of his own) all Pensioners and Servants to him: one of the Princes of Anhalt, and one of the Earls of Mansfeild, both Homagers unto the Saxon, being two of the number.

The Armes of Saxonie are Barre-wise of six pieces Sable and Or, a Bend flowred Vert. Which Bend was added to the Coat by the Emperour Frederick Barbarossa, when he confirmed Barnard of A••halt in his Dukedom. For Barnard desiring of the Emperor to have some difference added to the Ducal coat (being before onely Barry Sable and Or) to distinguish him and his successours from those of the former house: the Emperour tooke a Chaplet of Rue, which hee had then upon his head, and threw it crosse his Buckler or Eschocheon of Armes, which was presently painted on the same.

18 BRUNSWICK, and 19 LVNENBVRG.

The Dukedome of BRVNSWICK and LVNENBOVRG, being both originally taken out of the great Dukedome of Saxonie, extracted both from the same root, and many times united in the person of the same one Prince, shall bee joined together in the story, though severed in the Chorographie or Description of them: bounded on the East with Magdeburg and Brandenburg; on the West with Westphalia; on the North with Denmark, on the South with Duringen and Hassia. The Air in all parts hereof very cold and comfortlesse, but sound and healthfull: the soil towards the old Marches of Brandenburg but meanly fertile, towards Duringen and Hassia mountainous and woodie; in other parts very plentifull of corn, and well provided also of such other commodities, as usually doe grow in those colder climates.

But to take the Chorographie of them severally, BRVNSWICK is bounded on the East with the Diocese of Magdeburg and the Earldom of Mansfeild, on the West with Westphalen; on the North with Lunenburg, on the South with Hassia and Turingia. So called from Brunswick the chief City, and the head of this Dukedome.

Places of most importance in it, are 1 Goslar, upon the River Gose, whence it had the name; Of a poore Village made a City by Henry the first, much beautified and enlarged by Henry the third, who founded here two Churches and a stately Palace. Now one of the Imperiall Cities. 2 Helmstat in the middle way betwixt Brunswick and Magdeburg, first fortified by Charles, sonne of Charles the Great, for a bridle to the neighbouring Sclaves: and being after given to the Abbats of Werda, was by them sold to William the Duke of Brunswick. Quedelnberg built also by Henry the first, much in∣creased fince by the neighbourhood of a very rich Nunnerie, the Abbes••e whereof had formerly the priviledges of a Prince of the Empire. 4 Hildesheim, an antient City, honoured with an Episcopall See by Charles the Great, at the first conversion of the Saxons. 5 Grubenhagen, which gave title to a younger branch of the house of Brunswick; a principality and a member of the Empire. 6 Hannover, on the River Leine, well built, very strongly fortified, and not meanly traded. 7 Brunswick upon the River Onacter which passeth through it, passed over by many handsome bridges, the Metropolis of the antient Saxoni••, and at this time the chief of this Dukedome; though of it self Imperiall, and one of the Hanse. The City of a Quadrangular form, seated in the midst of a plain very fruitfull of corn; in compasse about two Dutch, or eight English miles; somewhat larger then Nurenberg, and lesse then Erdford; containing in that compasse not above twelve Churches, whereof two have steeples cover∣ed with lead, a third with brasse, all the rest with tile. Rich, populous, and strongly fortified, on some sides with a double, on others with a treble wall; within which wals are five Cities, distin∣guished by priviledges, but united by Laws. The whole first built by Bruno sonne to Ludolphus Duke of Saxonie, and Uncle to the Emperour Henry the first, about the year 861. from whence it had the name of Brunswick, or Brunonis Vicus, by the more elegant Latinists, Brunopolis. 8 Hamelen, on the East side of the Weser or Visurgis, encompassed with a deep moat, (occasioned by a stream cut out of the River) round about which are divers fortifications and placed with Ordinance. Nigh unto this town is the mountain called also Hamelen, unto which the Peed-piper (as they call him) led the children of Halberstade, where they all sunk, and were never more seen; but of this story more here∣after, when we come to Transylvania. 2 Wolfehaiten, or Wolfenbuttell, where the Duke doth keep his Court: For though Brunswick giveth him his title, yet will it not yeeld him any obedience, but reputeth herselfe among the Hansetownes; for which cause there have been great warres between the Dukes, and the Citizens. 3 Halber••iade, a Bishops See; the late Bishop (or Administratour of the Bishoprick) being Christian Duke of Brunsaick, that noble young souldier, who had vowed his life and fortune to the service of Elizabeth Queen of Bohemia; created by King James one of the Knights of the Garter. A Bishoprick of great revenew, and a very large territorie, since the alteration of Re∣ligion, given with the title of Administrator to the sonnes of Brunswick, but now by the conclusions

at Munster assigned over to the Electour of Brandenburg, with the title of Prince of Halberstade,* 1.60 the fa∣milie of Brunswick being to be recompensed with an alternate succession in the Bishoprick of Osnaburg, and some other additionals.

The Dukedome of LVNENBOVRG hath on the East the Old Marches of Brandenbourg, on the West the Diocese of Bremen, a part of Westphalia; on the North the Elb, and on the South the Duke∣dome of Brunswick. So called from Lunenbourg the chiefe City, once the seat of the Dukes.

Places of most observation in it are 1 Lunenbourg it self, situate on the River Elvenaw, an Imperiall City and one of the principall of the Hanse; so called from the Moon here worshipped in the times of Idolatry. Of a round form, and seated in a pleasant valley; but with mountains near it; on one of which called Calberg is a very strong Castle, of right belonging to the Duke, but in the power of the Citizens, who without this Fort could not be master of their Liberties. The wals about it are of earth, high and broad, and the Ditches deep; the buildings generally fair (for the most part of brick) the chief whereof is the Common-Councell house; the streets broad and long with two spaci∣ous Market-places, but of no very pleasing smell: the whole about a mile and an halfe in length, half a mile in breadth; containing six Parish Churches. But the thing most considerable in it is the Fountaine of Salt, (the greatest riches of this City) and the house in which the Salt is boiled, con∣taining 52 rooms, and in each room 8 leaden pans in which are boiled dayly 8 tuns of salt, every tun being sold for 8 Flemmish shillings bought by the Hamburgers, Lubeckers, and other Merchants, some part of the profits of it belonging to the Duke, some to the City, the rest to the Adventurers who employ their stocks on it. 2 Cella the seat of the Duke of Lunenburg. 3 Gethern of no great bignesse or estimati∣on, but for a strong Castle of the Dukes. 4 Oldendorp, situate betwixt the Venaw and the River Esca, me∣morable for the great battell fought neer it, anno 1633. betwixt the Imperialists and the Swedes; the honour and benefit whereof fell unto the Swedes, who killed upon the place 5000 of the Enemie, besides such as were found dead in the fields and high wayes, all covered over with dead bodies; took 1500 of them prisoners, and got into their hands 13 pieces of Ordinance, good store of Am∣munition, and three mules laden with silver for the pay of the Army: the reputation of this victory drawing in Hammelen, and other places of importance which stood out before. 5 Verda, an Episcopall See, but made a Lay-fee as most other Bishopricks amongst the Lutherans; the profits thereof being re∣ceived commonly by a sonne of Danemark with the title of Administrator, and lastly by the treaty of Munster, appropriated for ever to the Crown of Sweden; the Kings whereof to be entituled Dukes of Verden. 7 Rotenburg, the chief seat of the Bishops of Verda.

Northwest of Lunenburg, on both sides of the Elb, lyeth the Countrey and Seigneurie of LA∣WENBVRG; so called from Lawenburg, (Lawburgum) a Town and Castle built on the further side of the Albis, by Barnard of Anhalt, the first Duke of Saxonie of that family: which being razed by Duke Henry the Lyon, was again reedified and given by Albert the sonne of Barnard to his second son John, from whom the Dukes of Saxonie commonly called Dukes of Saxen-Lawenburg doe derive themselves: Who being pretermitted by the Emperour Sigismund at the death of Albert the third, the last of the direct line of Barnard, have since contented themselves with their antient Patrimonie. O∣ther towns observable in this Signeurie, next unto Lawenburg it self, are 2 Erdenburg, a well fortified peece, opposite to Lawenburg, on the hither side of the Elb. 3 Raceburg, the sepulture of this noble family. 4 Moeln, the cause of much contention betwixt the Lords hereof and the town of Hamburg, who pretend a title thereunto.

But to return again to Brunswick and Lunenbourg; the antient Inhabitants of these Dukedomes were the Duglubini of Ta••itus, with some parts of the Chauci and Cherusci: these last of most fame for the blow they gave to Quintilius Varus, Lieutenant in G••rmanie after Drusus for Augustus Caesar, who be∣having himselfe with great insolency towards the Natives, was set upon by these Cherusci and their confederates, under the conduct of Arminius a great Prince amongst them; himselfe slain, and his whole Army consisting of three Legions, miserably cut off, and despightfully used: which losse, and the shame thereof so distracted the Emperour (not formerly accustomed to the like misfortunes) that he was many times observed to tear his beard, knock his head against the posts, and cry out in the bitternesse of his passion, Redde mihi legiones Quintili Varo. Having long time after this main∣tained their liberty (for the Romans kept themselves from that time forwards on the French side of the Rhene) they were at last subdued by the Saxons, continuing part of that great Dukedom till the proscription of Henry surnamed the Lyon, spoken of before; whose reconciliation being made, by meanes of Henry the second of England, whose daughter Maud hee had formerly mar∣ried, the Emperor Barbarossa restored to him again the Cities of Brunswick and Lunenburg with their severall Territories: of which his two sons Henry and William were first created Earles, then Dukes, the one of Brunswick, and the other of Lunenbourg, by the Emperour Frederick the second. Which honours and Estates doe still remain unto their Posterities. Before I come to the successions of which Princes, I shall crave leave to speak of the Originall of the Guelfian Familie, Dukes at the same time of Bavaria and Saxonie; of which they are at this time the sole remainder. A Family derived from one Guelphus (whence it had the name) the son of Isenberdus Earl of Altorf in Schwaben: whose wife cal∣led Jermintrudis, having accused a poor woman of Adultery, and caused her to be grievously punished, for having 12 children at a birth; was afterwards delivered of the like number, & all of them sons. Her husband being absent at the time of her delivery, she commanded the Nurse to kill 11 of them; fearing (it seems) the like shame and punishment, as by her instigation was inflicted on the other woman. The Nurse going to perform this ungodly command, was met by the old Earl then returning home∣wards: who asked her what she had in her Apron, she made answer Whelps; he desired to see them,

shee denyed him.* 1.61 Angrie at this refusall he opened her Apron, and there found eleven of his owne sonnes, pretty sweet babes, and of most promising countenances. Examining the matter he found out the truth, and enjoyning the old Trot to be secret in it, he put the children out to Nurse; six years expired, the Earl invited to a Feast most of his own and his Ladies kindred, and attiring the young boyes all alike, presented them unto their Mother. Who suspecting by the number of them, what the matter was, confessed her offence, is pardoned by the good old Earl, and carefully educates her children: Whom the Father commanded to be called by the name of Guelpes, alluding to the Whelpes or Puppies, which the Nurse told him she had in her Apron. From the eldest of these Guelphs or Guelpes succeeded that Henry Guelph sonne of Robert Earl of Altorf, whom Conrade the second made Duke of Bavaria; many of whose posterity enjoyed that Dukedome: increased at last by the additi∣on of the Dukedome of Saxonie in the person of Duke Henry surnamed the Proud, Father of Henry cal∣led the Lyon, and Grandfather of Henry and William the first Dukes of Brunswick and Lunenburg, whose succession followeth in this Order.

The DVKES of BRUNSWICK and LVNENBVRG.

• 1 Henry surnamed the Lyon, the last Duke of Saxony, and the first of this Title.
• Brunswick Lunenburg.
• 1195 2 Henry first Earl after Duke of Brun∣swick.
• 1213 3 Otho sonne of William Duke of Lunenburg; after the death of Henry Duke of Brun∣swick also.
• 1252 4 Albert sonne of Otho.
• 1279 5 Albert II. sonne of Albert.
• 1318 6 Otho II. sonne of Albert the second.
• 1334 7 Magnus sonne of Albert II. on the failing of the other house, enjoyed both Estates.
• 1368 8 Magnus II. son of Magnus the first.
• 1373 9 Henry II. sonne of Magnus the second.
• 1416 10 William son of Henry.
• 1482 11 William II. son of William.
• 1503 12 Henry II. son of Will. the second.
• 1514 13 Henry III. son of Henry the second.
• 1568 14 Julius son of Henry the third.
• 1589 15 Henry IV. son of Julius, who married the Lady Elizabeth, sister to Anne Queen of England.
• 16 Frederick Vlric son of Flizabeth of Danemark and Henry Julius.
• 1634 17 Augustus, son of Henry Duke of Lu∣nenbourg, succeeded on the death of Fredenick Vlrick, and the failer of the house of Brunswick in him, in this Dukedome.
• 1195 2 William first Earl, after Duke of Lunenburg.
• 1252 4 John sonne of Otho.
• 1261 5 Otho II. sonne of John.
• 1330 6 Otho III. sonne of Otho the second.
• 10 Barnard brother of Magnus the se∣cond.
• 1434 11 Frederick II. son of Barnard
• 1478 12 Otho III. son of Frederick.
• 1514 13 Henry III. son of Otho the third.
• 1532 14 Otho IV. son of Henry the third.
• 15 Ernest the brother of Otho succeeded in his brothers life time; sur∣rendring his Estate for an An∣nuall pension.
• 1546 16 Henry IV. son of Ernest.
• 1590 17 Ernest II. son of Henry the fourth.
• 18 Wolf••angus, the brother of Henry the fourth, and Uncle of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the second, now Duke of Lu∣nenbourg, anno 1648.

The Armes of these Dukedomes were first the same, that is to say, Gules, two Lyons Or, Armed Azure, which Arms they tooke by reason of their extraction from the Kings of England, then Dukes of Normandie; retained to this day by the Dukes of Brun••wick without any Addition. But those of Lunenbourg have added three Coates more unto it: the whole bearing being quarterly 1 Gules, two Lyons Or, Armed Azure; 2 Azure, Seme of Hearts Gules, a Lyon Azure, Armed, and Crowned Or, 3 Azure, a Lyon Argent, Crowned Gules, and 4 Gules, within a Border Componie Or, and Azure; a Ly∣on of the second, Armed of the third.

HASSIA.

HASSIA, is bounded on the North with Brunswick, on the South with Veteravia, or the State of Wideraw; on the East with Saxonie; on the West with Westphalia. So called from the Hessi, who having vanquished the Chatti, the old Inhabitants of this Countrey, possessed themselves of it.

The Christian faith was first preached here by Boniface or Winifred, an English Saxon, (afterwards Archbishop of Mentz) anno 730 or thereabouts. Of whom I find this memorable Apophthegm, that in old times there were Golden Prelates and wooden Chalices, but in his time wooden Prelates and Golden Chal••ces. Not much unlike to which I have read another, but of later date, viz. that once the Christians had blinde Churches and lightsome hearts, but now they have lightsome Churches and blinde hearts.

The Countrey is very fruitfull of corn, and affordeth good 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for the feeding of Cattell,

of which they have great droves and heards in many places; with great abundance of Stags, and other Deer for the pleasures of hunting harboured in the woods hereof, with which in many parts of it it is very much shaded. It breedeth also on the Downes good store of sheep, enriched with the finest fleece of any in Germany; the Staple commodity of this Country: and in the moun∣tainous parts hereof there want not rich Mines of brasse, lead, and other metals, which yeild great profit to the people.

Chief towns herein, are 1 Allendorf on the VVeser, (or Visnegis) of much esteeme for the springs or fountaines of Salt which are thereabouts. 2 Frislar, upon the Eder, well walled, and situate in a fruitfull and pleasant soil; belonging to the Archbishop and Elector of Mentz, but in regard of the convenient situation of it, much aimed at, many times attempted, and sometimes forcibly pos∣sessed, both by the Lantgraves of Hassia, and Dukes of Saxony. 3 Fuld, on a River of that name, remarkable for the Monastery there founded by Boniface, Archbishop of Mentz, by the name of Saint Saviours, the Abbot, which is a Prince of the Empire, Chancellour of the Emperesse, and Lord of a goodly territory in this Country, called from hence Stift Fuld. 4 Frankenberg, on the Eder also, so called from the French, who incamped there in their wars against the Saxons; first founded by Theodorick the French King, anno 520. but much enlarged by Charles the Great, about the yeer 804. 5 Eschewege, on the brow of an hill neer the River VVert, of great trading for the woad, of which the fields ad∣joyning yeild a rich increase. Being destroyed by the Hungarians, it was re-edified and enlarged by the Emperour Henry the second: and having suffered much misery in the long war between Adolph, Archbishop of Mentz, and the Lantgraves of Hassia, it fell at last into the possession of the Lantgrave, anno 1387. 6 Melsingen, on the River Fuld. 7 Darmsiad, lately, if not at the present, the seat and inheritance of Count Ludovick of the younger house of the Lantgraves, taken Prisoner by Count Mansfield, anno 1622. and his whole Country exposed unto spoil and rapine; because (besides many other ill offices) he was the chief perswader of the Princes of the Vnion to disband their forces, provided for defence of themselves and the Palatinate, and to reconcile themselves to the Emperour. 8 Marpurg, the seat of the second house of the Lantgraves, descending from that Philip, who was Lantgrave in the time of Charles the fift, whom he so valiantly withstood: pleasantly seated on the Lon, amongst Viny downes, and shady Mountains; honoured with an University founded here by Lewis, Bishop of Munster, anno 1426. and beautified with a magnificent Castle (the ordinary dwel∣ling of those Princes) situate on an high hill somewhat out of the Town: which gives it a very gallant prospect over the Town and Country. 9 Geisen, a Town belonging to the Lantgraves of Cassels, and a small University also. 10 Dietz, upon the River Lon, belonging also to the house of Cassels. 11 Cassels, the chief town and ordinary residence of the Lantgraves of the elder house, who are hence sometimes called the Lantgraves of Cassels: commodiously seated in a pleasant and fruit∣full soil, and well fortified with strong earthen walls, and deep ditches; but the houses in it of no great beauty, being composed for the most part of wood, thatch and clay.

Within the limits of this Province is the County of WALDECK, not subject to the Lantgraves of Hassia, though included within the limits of it before laid down, taking up the Western parts thereof where it meets with Westphalia; in figure very neer a square, each side of which is of the length of six ordinary Dutch, or 24 English miles. The soil much of the same nature with the rest of Hassia, save that it hath some veines of Quick-silver, and inexhaustible mines of Coal, which the other wanteth; these last in greatest plenty about Veldung, and the strong Castle of Eisenburg, two of the best townes and places of it. Others of chief note, 3 Waldeck it self on the River Eder, the first seat of the Earls hereof, who have here an ancient Castle, from whence the whole Country takes its name. 4 Mengerhuse, in a fair Castle whereof live the present Earls. 5 Witterberg, in a pleasant and fruitfull Soil, betwixt the Rivers Twist and Abra. 6 Corbach, famous in the times of Albertus Magnus for its golden Mines, yeilding great profit to these Earls. The Pedegree of whom is fetched from one Witichinde Earl of Snalenberg, whom Charles the Great made Advocate or Patron of the Church of Paderborn in Westphalia, being an Office in these times of great jurisdiction. By Witichind the second one of his Successours, this office was surrendred into the hands of the Chapter, for the summe of 300 marks in silver; and to cut off all further claimes, Henry, the nephew of this Witichind, by his son Otho, was by the Chapter gratified with the town of Waldeck, of which he was the first Earl: whose nephew Henry surnamed Ferreus, subdued Corbach, anno 1366. and added it to his Estate. By a third Henry, grandchild of this Ferreus, or man of Iron, this Earldom formerly held in fee of the Church of Paderborn, was first put under the patronage and protection of the Lantgraves of Hassia, anno 1428. as it continueth to this day; the Earls hereof content with their own estates, and more addicted to the Book, then unto the Sword, have acted little in the wars to improve their fortunes.

The antient inhabitants of the whole, both Waldeck and the rest of Hassia, and also of the Coun∣ty of Nassaw in Veteravia, neer unto adjoyning, were the Catti, or Chatti mentioned by the Antients: first conquered (after the withdrawing of the Roman forces) by the Hessi; and both subdued not long after by the Thuringians. Subject unto the Lantgraves of Duringen till the death of Henry, the last of the male issue of Lewis of O••leans. In the division of whose estate the Western moiety of Du∣ringen fell to the share of Henry, Duke of Brabant, one of the Competitours, who leaving the title of Lantgrave of Duringen to the Marquesse of Misnia; took to himself the title of the Lantgrave of Hessen, in memory of the Hessi, spoken of before. Of his successours the most puissant was that Philip, who

in the time of Charles the fift much swayed the affaires of Germany, anno 1520. he discomfited King Ferdinand, and restored Vlrick to the Dukedome of Wirtenberg, anno 1530. he united all the Protestant Princes, and Cities of Germany in a common league at Smalcald; for the defence of the Protestant Re∣ligion, anno 1545. he undertook the cause of Goslaria against the Duke of Brunswick, whom in a set battell he took prisoner, together with his son, and possessed his Country, anno 1548. he united all the Princes and Cities of Germany, in an offensive and a defensive league against Charles the fifth, but that war succeeded not prosperously. For the Duke of Saxony his perpetuall Confederate, being taken prisoner, he submitted himself to the Emperour at Kale or Hale in Duringen: his sons-in-law, Duke Maurice, the Marquesse of Brandenbourg, and Wolfang Prince of Deuxponts, having given their bonds for his return. The conditions of his pardon were, first, that he should dismantle all his townes, except Cassell; 2 That he should yeeld up unto the Emperour all his munition; 3 That he should pay unto the Emperour 150000 Crownes. The same night he was by the Duke of Alva invited to supper, his sons-in-law of Saxony and Brandenbourg accompanying him. After supper he was con∣trary to the Lawes of Hospitality, and the Emperours exact promise, detained prisoner. The fallacy stood thus. In the Emperours compact with the three Princes, the words were, that the Lantgrave should be kept, Nicht in einig gefengknes, that is, Not in anyprison: which the Emperours Secretary by a small dash of his pen, turned into, Nicht in ewig gefengknes, that is, Not in everlasting prison. Well, in prison he staid five years, which being expired, he was again set at large by Duke Maurice, the over∣thrower and restorer of the German liberty. The residue of these Lantgraves in their severall times, occur in the ensuing Catalogue of

The LANTGRAVES of HASSIA.

• 1263 1 Henry of Brabant, son of Henry, Duke of Brabant, and Sophia his wife, daughter of Lewis the sixt, Lantgrave of Thuringia, after a nine years warre betwixt him and the Mar∣quesse of Misnia divided the estate, and took unto himself the title of Lantgrave of Hessen.
• 1308 2 Otho and John, sons of Henry.
• 1323 3 Henry II. and Lewis, sons of Otho.
• 1376 4 Herman, the son of Lewis.
• 1414 5 Lewis II. son of Herman, surnamed the Milde.
• 1458 6 Lewis III. son of Lewis the Milde.
• 7 William, the eldest son of Lewis the third, dispossessed of his Estate by
• 8 William II. his youngest brother.
• 1509 9 Philip, the famous Lantgrave spoken of before, son of William the second.
• 1567 10 William III. eldest son of Philip, succeeded in one moiety of the estate and resided at Cassiles: the other moiety being divided betwixt his brethren Ludowick of Marpurg, and George of Darmstad, father of Ludowick of Darmstad before mentioned.
• 1590 11 Maurice, eldest son of William the third.
• 12 William IV. son of Maurice, now living, 1648.

The Armes of these Lantgraves are Azure, a Lyon Barry of eight pieces, Arg. and Gules, Crowned Or.

WESTPHALIA.

WESTPHALIA is bounded on the East with Hassia, Brunswick, and part of Lunenberg: on the West with the Bishoprick of Coleu, Cleveland, Overyssell, West and East-Friseland, and the German Oce∣an; on the North with the Elb, and the Dukedome of Holstein; and on the South with Weteravia, and some part of Hassia.

It was thus called of the Westphali, a tribe or division of the Saxons, distinguished heretofore in∣to the Transalbinos, inhabiting in the County of Holstein, now a part of Danemark; the Jostphali, betwixt the Elb, the Ocean, with the River of Saltza, and the Weser; taking up the Bishopricks of Breme, Verden, Hildesheim, Halberstat and Meydburg, with the Dukedomes of Lunenburg and Brunswick; the Angrivarians, taking up the north-west part of the modern Westphalen, betwixt the Bishoprick of Breme, and the Earldome of Colen: and finally, the Westphali, or Western-Saxons, inhabiting the rest of the modern Westphalen with the Earldomes of Mark, Berg, Zulphen, the seigneury of Over-yssell, and some parts of Guelderland and Holland: But the Saxons being subjugated by the power of the French, and severall new estates erected out of that old stock: the remnant of the Westphali and Angrivarians, the Bishoprick of Breme being added unto the accompt, were comprehended and united in the name of WESTPHALEN.

The soil, according to the severall parts of it, is of different natures, the parts adjoyning to the Weser being desert, and barren, those towards the Earldomes of Mark and Bergen, mountainous and full of woods; the Bishoprick of Bremen, except towards the Elb, full of dry sands, heaths, and un∣fruitfull thickets, like the wilde parts of Windsor Forrest betwixt Stanes and Fernham. In other parts exceeding plentifull of corn, and of excellent pasturage, stored with great plenty of wilde fruits, and

(by reason of the many woods) abundance of Akorns:* 1.62 with infinite herds of swine (which they breed up with those naturall helps) of so good a relish, that a Gammon of Wesiphalian Bacon, is reckoned for a principall dish at a great mans Table.

The old inhabitants hereof were the Chauci Majores about Bremen, the Chanani, Angrivarii, and Bructeri inhabiting about Munster, Osuaburg, and so towards the land of Colen; and part of the Che∣rusci (before spoken of) taking up those parts which lie nearest unto Brunswick and Lunenbourg. All of them vanquished by Drusus, the son-in-law of Augusius, but soon restored to their former liber∣ty, by the great overthrow given by the Cherusci and their associates to Quintilius Varus. After∣wards uniting into one name with the French, they expulsed the Romans out of Gaul: leaving their forsaken, and ill-inhabited seats to be taken up by the Saxons; with whom the remainders of them did incorporate themselves both in name and nation. Of that great body it continued a conside∣rable Member (both when a Kingdome and a Dukedome) till the proscription and deprivation of Duke Henry the Lyon, at what time the parts beyond the Weser were usurped by Barnard, Bishop of Paderborn; those betwixt the Weser, and the Rhene by Philip, Archbishop of Colen, whose successours still hold the title of Dukes of Westphalen: the Bishopricks of Breme, Munster, Paderborn, and Mindaw, having been formerly endowed with goodly territories, had some accrewments also out of this Estate: every one catching hold of that which lay nearest to him. But not to make too many subdivisions of it, we will divide it onely into these. two parts, VVestphalen specially so called, and 2 the Bishoprick of Bremen.

In VVESTPHALEN specially so called, which is that part hereof which lyeth next to Cleveland, the places of most observation are, 1 Geseke, a town of good repute; 2 Brala, a village of great beauty; 3 Arusberg; and 4 Fredeborch, honoured with the title of Prefectures; 5 VVa∣denborch; 6 Homberg, lording it over fair and spacious territories. All which, with two Lord∣ships, and eight Prefectures more, dispersed in the Dukedome of Engern, and County of Surland, be∣long unto the Bishop of Colen, the titulary Duke of VVestphalen, and Angrivaria, (Engern) as he stiles himself. 7 Mountabour, (perhaps Mont-Tabor) seated in that part hereof, which is called VVe∣sterwald; a town of consequence belonging to the Elector of Triers. 8 Rhenen; 9 Schamlat; and 10 Beekem, reasonable good towns, all of the Bishoprick of Munster. 11 Munster it self, famous for the Treaty, and conclusions made upon that treaty, for the peace of Germany, seated upon the River Ems, and so called from a Monastery, here founded by Charles the great, which gave begin∣ning to the Town; supposed to be that Mediolanium, which Ptolemy placeth in this tract, a beauti∣full, and well fortified City, and the See of a Bishop, who is also the Temporall Lord of it. Famous for the wofull Tragedies here acted by a lawlesse crew of Anabaptists, who chose themselves a King (that famous Taylor, John of Leiden) whom they called King of Sion, as they named the City New Jerusalem; proclaimed a community both of goods and women, cut off the heads of all that opposed their doings: and after many fanatick and desperate actions by the care and industry of the Bishop and his confederates brought to condigne punishment. The Story is to be seen at large in Sleidan, and some modern pamphlets, wherein as in a Mirrour, we may plainly see the face of the present times. 12 Osnaburg, first built, as some say, by Julius Caesar; as others by the Earls of Engern; but neither so ancient as the one, nor of so late a standing as the others make it; here be∣ing an Episcopall See founded by Charles the Great, who gave it all the priviledges of an Ʋniversity. Liberally endowed at the first erection of the same, and since so well improved, both in Power, and Patrimony, that an alternate succession in it by the Dukes of Brunswick hath been concluded on in the Treaty of Munster, as a fit compensation for the Bishoprick of Halberstad (otherwise disposed of by that Treaty) of late enjoyed wholly by that Family. 13 Quakenberg, on the River Hase, 14 VVarendorp; and 15 VVildshusen, towns of that Bishoprick. 16 Paderborn, an Episcopall See also, founded by Charles the Great, at the first conversion of the Saxons; more ancient then strong, yet more strong then beautifull. 17 Ringelenstein; and 18 Ossendorf, belonging to the Bishop of Paderborn. 19 Minden, upon the VVeser, another of the Episcopall Sees founded by Charles the Great, and by him liberally endowed with a goodly Patrimony: converted to lay-uses since the Reforma∣tion, under colour of Administration of the goods of the Bishoprick; and now by the conclusions at Munster setled for ever on the Electors of Brandenbourg, with the title of Prince of Minden. 20 Rinte∣lin, a strong town, conveniently seated on the Weser, not far from Minden, to the Bishop whereof it doth belong.

Hitherto one would think that Westphalen had formerly been a part of Saint Peters Patrimony belonging wholly to the Clergy; but there are some Free Cities, and secular Princes which have shares therein, as 1 VVarburg, a neat town, but seated on an uneven piece of ground neer the Ri∣ver Dimula, a town which tradeth much in good Ale, brewed here, and sold in all parts of the Country: heretofore a County of it self under the Earls hereof, now governed in the nature of a Free Estate, and reckoned an Imperiall City. 2 Brakel, accompted of as Imperiall also. 3 Herv••r∣den, a town of good strength and note, governed by its own Lawes and Magistrates, under the pro∣tection of Colen. 4 Lemgow, belonging heretofore to the Earls of Lippe, but by them so well pri∣viledged and enfranchised, that now it governeth it self as a Free Estate. Here is also 5 The town and County of Ravensburg, belonging anciently to the Dukes of Cleve, and now in the rights of that house to the Elector of Brandenbourg: As also 6 the Town and County of Lippe, lying on the west side of the VVeser; the Pedegree of the Earls whereof some fetch from that Sp. Manlius, who de∣fended

the Roman Capitol against the Gau••s,* 1.63 (they might as well derive it from the Geese which preser∣ved that Capitol:) others with greater modestie look no higher for it then to the times of Charls the Great, one of the noble Families of the antient Saxons. Some other Lords and Earls here are; but these most considerable: all of them Homagers of the Empire, but their acknowledgments hereof little more then titular; though not long since in danger of performing more reall services: the Empe∣rour Ferdinand the 2. after the surprize of H••lstein, and some part of Danemark, anno 1627. gaining so far upon this Countrie, that had not the King of Sweden come in so seasonably he had made himself absolute master of it; and by the opportunity of the situation of it on the back of the Netherlands forced the Vnited States to some great extremities. As for the title of Duke of Westphalen and Engern, it hath been long used (as before was said) by the Bishops of Colen: as also (but with better right) by the house of Lawenburg, descended from the antient Electorall Familie, writing themselves in that regard Dukes of Saxonie, Wes••phalen, and Angravaria or Engern.

2 The Bishoprick of BREME lyeth on the other side of the Weser, extending as far as to the Elb, and the German Ocean. So called of 1 Breme the principall Citie ••eated on the Weser, there broad and navigable; the Citie by that means well traded, populous, and rich, beautified with fair and even streets, and very strongly fortified against all Invasions both by Art and Nature; the town be∣ing so seated amongst Fenns, occasioned by the overflowings of the River, that it may be easily drow∣ned on all sides to keep off an Enemie: adorned with a spacious Market-place, a fair Counsell-house, and a large Cathedrall, the See of the Arch-bishop, who is the temporall Lord of the town and territo∣rie. Other Towns of especiall note are 2 Osenbridge, not far from Breme, from whence great quan∣titie of linnen is brought yearly to England and other places. 3 Arusten on the Weser also. 4 Oteren∣berg, on the river Bolla, not far from the fall thereof into the Ocean. 5 Buxtertrude, on the Elb, not far from Hamburg, but on the hither side of the water. 6 Stode, Stadt, or Stadium, seated on the River Zuinghe, near the fall thereof into the Elb, accompted the antientest town in all Saxonie, and one of the first which was enrolled amongst the Hanse, and by especiall priviledge had the pre-emption of all the Rhenish wine that passed by them, and the right also of coining money. But being over-topped by the power and trade of Hamburg, (5 Dutch miles from it) it grew at length so poor, and in such decay, that their yearly Revenues came but to 90l. per annum, so that they were fain to sell their pri∣viledges to the Town of Hamburg, and put themselves under the protection of the Bishops of Breme: Revived again upon the comming thither of the English Merchants, who finding some hard measure from the Hamburgers fixed their Staple here: by means whereof the Citizens in short time grew ex∣ceeding wealthy: the buildings fair and beautifull, the town strongly fortified. Situate in a place so easily overwhelmed with water, that the people in ostentation of their strength and securitie used to have Ordinance of stone planted over their Gates. But the late German wars have made them sen∣sible of their folly: when notwithstanding their new works and an English Garrison under Sir Charls Morgan, they were compelled to submit themselves to the Earl of Tilly, anno 1627. recovered after by the Swedes in the course of their victories.

As for the Bishoprick of Bremen it was first founded by Charls the Great in the person of Willibode an English Saxon, one of the first Preachers of the Gospel in these parts of this Country. The town be∣fore that time a poor Village only, being made an Archiepiscopall See, and the Metropolitan of all the Churches of the North, quickly grew up into esteem, as the Bishops did in power and Patrimonie, till they became Lords of all this tract. Governed since the Reformation of Religion, by Lay-Bishops or Ad∣minisirators of the Rents of the Bishoprick, which under that title they inverted to their proper use. And now of late by the Conclusions made at Munster setled as an inheritance on the Crown of Sweden to be enjoyed together with the Bishoprick of Verda, by the Kings thereof with the title of Dukes of Breme and Verden: the antient liberties of those Cities formerly granted by their Bishops, being still preserved.

EAST-FRISELAND.

EAST-FRISELAND is bounded on the East with the River Weser, by which parted from Westphalen; on the West with the River Ems which parteth it from Groyningen and the rest of West-Friseland; on the North with the German Ocean, and on the South with the Earldom of Mark, a part of Cleveland. So called from the Frisu, who casting out the old inhabitants possessed themselves of it, and called it by their own name Friseland: divided by the Ems or Amisus, into the Western spoken of amongst the Netherlands, and the Eastern or East-Friseland in which now we are.

The nature of the soil we shall see anon when we come to the subdivisions of it. Chief Rivers, besides those of Ems, and 2 Weser, spoken of elsewhere, 3 Juda, which falleth into a great Bay o•• Arm of the Ocean, called from hence Die Jadie. 4 Dalliart, on which standeth the Citie of Emdeu; 5 Delm, and 6 Honta, neighboured by Delmenhorst and Oldenborch, towns of this Countrie. The whole divided into 1 the Countie of Emden, or East-Friseland properly so called, and 2 the Earldom of Oldenburg.

1 EAST-FRISELAND specially so called, hath on the West the River Ems, on the North the Ocean, on the East and South the Earldom of Oldenbourg; called also the Countie of

EMDEN,* 1.64 from the fair Town of Emden, the chief Citie of it. The soil hereof is very fruitfull both in corn and ••asturage, sending great store of Oxen, Horses, Wool, Swine, Butter, Cheese, and all sorts of Grain into other Countries; all of them excellent in their kind, not easily to be bettered (if equalled) in any place whatsoever. Chief towns herein are 1 Emden, so called from the Ems, on which it is situate: D••llaert a smal River falling here into it: a noted and wel traded town, beautified with a Haven so deep & large, that the greatest ships with ful sail are admitted into it. The people rich, affirmed to have 60 ships of 100 tuns apeece, and 600 lesser Barks of their own, besides 700 Busses and Fisher boats, maintained for the most part, by their Herring-fishing on the Coast of England. The buildings generally fair, both private and publick, especially the Church, the Town-Hall, and Earls Palace. This last a strong and stately Castle, situate at the mouth of the Haven, and on all sides com∣passed by the Sea, and yet not strong enough to preserve the Townsmen in their due obedience: who about 50 years agoe, taking advantage of the absence of their Earl, kept him out of their Town, because he seemed not to approve the Calvinian humor; and have since governed in the nature of a Com∣mon-wealth confederate with the States of the Vnited Provinces, for their better establishment and support. So easily is Religion made a mask to disguise Rebellion. 2 Auricts, by some called Anseling, seated in the Inlands, rich, and well walled, of great resort by reason of the pleasure of Hunting, afforded very li∣berally in the Forrests and Woods adjoining; drawing hither the Nobilitie and Gentrie in great abundance. 3 Esen, on the Sea shore, which gives the title of an Earl to the Lord thereof, as doth also 4 Jevere, situate on the West of the River Jada, but both Earls subject to the Earl of East-Frise∣land. 5 Vredeburg (that is to say, the Free Village) so called from some Immunities granted by the Earls, possessed a while by those of Brunswick, who fenced and garrisoned it for themselves, but in the end recovered by Ezard the 2. Earl. 6 Broick, the seat and proper Government of the Ancestors of these Earls: from whence the parts adjoining are called Broickmerland. 7 Norden, another Praefe∣cture or Captain-ship of the said Ancestors. 8 Dunort, a strong Castle and retiring place of the Earls. 9 Linghen, upon the Ems, a strong town well fortified and as well garrisoned, belonging to the King of Spain as Vicar to the Empire over all Friseland, even to Ditmersh and the confines of Danemark. A dignitie procured by Maximilian, Grandfather to Charls the 5. of the Emperour Frederick the 3. in right whereof, the King of Spain as heir of the House of Burgundie, hath some preheminence over Emden, of little use to him since the falling off of the Belgick Provinces. More towns of note I find not in it, but of Castles, stately dwelling houses, and well built Villages, an incredible number, standing so thick that in many places they join together: some of them being withall so large, so well peopled, and of streets so spacious that they may compare with many Cities in Germanie, of the which the most City-like is named Leere.

The ancient Inhabitants hereof were the Chauci Minores, described by Plinie to be so barbarous a people, and so destitute of all necessarie provision for the life of man, that they had no drinke but rain water, preserved in great troughs before the doors of their Cottages. These outed or subdued by the Frisons, a neighbouring people possessing North-Holland, the District of Vtrecht, with the Coun∣tries of Groyning and West-Friseland: who having once passed over the Ems, extended their Domini∣ons as far as Danemark. Governed by Kings, but intermingled with and overpowered by the Saxons, till the time of Charls the Great, by whom the last King Roboald overcome in fight was perswaded to receive the Sacrament of holy Baptisme. But being told that his friends and kinsfolks were in hell, because no Christians: Neither will I (said he) be of that profession, for I love to be amongst my kindred. After this Friseland was a Member of the French kingdom, till the erecting of the Earldom of Holland by Charls the Bald, anno 893. at which time all Friseland on the West side of the Ems was conferred upon him: possessed, but not with out much war and bloudshed, by his Successours; the Frisons ever and anon rebelling against them, and killing divers of them in the open field. Those parts of it on the other side of the Ems, remained unto the German Empire, governed by Deputies, Lieutenants, and Provinciall Earls, accomptable to the Emperours for their Administration, till the year 1453 in which Vlrick Governor hereof for the Emperor Frederick, having got the Town of Emden out of the hands of the Hamburgers, was made Earl of East-Friseland, transmitting the Estate and title unto his posterity.

EARLS of EAST-FRISELAND.

• 1453 1 Vlrieus son of Enno, the son of Ezardus, Captains or Governours for the Empire in Broick and Norden, made the first Earl of East-Friseland by the Emperour Frederick.
• 1466 2 Ezard the son of Vlrick, who got Vreburg from the Citizens of Brunswick.
• 1528 3 Enno the son of Ezard, who regained Greetzil, formerly usurped by the Dukes of Guelders.
• 1540 4 Ezard II. sonne of Enno, who married Katharine daughter to Gustavus the first of Sweden.
• 5 Enno II. son of Ezard the 2. and the Lady Katharine.
• 1586 6 Rudolphus Christianus son of Enno the 2. who being well affected to the Lutheran formes, (first introduced in the time of Enno the 1.) was by a Calvinian partie grown up in Emden, dispossessed of that Citie, anno 1592.
• 1608 7 Enno Ludovicus, son of Rudolphus Christianus, succeeded in this Earldom on the death of his Father, and is still living for ought I can hear unto the contrary.

The Arms of the Earls of East-Friseland, are Azure, Semi of Billets Argent, 2 Lyons Or.

2. The Earldom of OLDENBOVRG,* 1.65 containeth that part of this Country which lyeth on the West side of the Weser, betwixt the Bishoprick of Munster and East-Friseland, specially so called; and so extending Northwards to the German Ocean. So called from Oldenbourg the chief Citie of it, and the head of this Earldom.

The soil hereof exceeding rich but in pastures specially, which breed them in time Herds of Cattel; and furnish not this Country only, but some of their German neighbours, and many of the more Northern Nations with Horses, Beeves, Sheep, Swine, Butter, Cheese. Here is also good store of Pulse, Barley, and Oats, plenty of fruits and trees of all sorts. Large woods, and those well stored with Venison, which yeeld unto the Gentry the delights of hunting. But the air cold and foggie in some extremitie, especially in Winter, and near the Sea.

Chief towns hereof are, 1 Oldenborch on the River Honta, repaired if not built by Otho the Great, who founded the Church of S. John Baptist: A town of no great state or beautie, the houses generally of clay, but the Castle (the dwelling place of the Earls) of well hewn stones; of an Orbicular form with deep ditches of water, the Town and Castle both being strongly fortified. 2 Delmenhorst, on the river Dehm, a strong place and of great importance, built in the year 1247. by Otho brother of Earl Christian the 2. and having been 65 years in possession of the Bishops of Munster, was suddenly sur∣prised on Palm Sunday morning by Anthony Earl of Oldenburg, anno 1547. continuing ever since part of this estate. 3 Beck-husen, on a River which falleth not far off into the great Bay or Arm of the Sea, which is called Die Jade. 4 E••uarten, 5 Ovelgard, both seated in a long Languet or Demy-Iland, betwixt the said Die Jade, and the River Weser, called Butiada, both taken, and the last well fortified by John Earl of Oldenborch, anno 1520. belonging formerly to the Prefecture of East Friseland, but ne∣ver brought under the command of the Earls thereof. 6 Westerberg, the chief town, of a spa••ious ter∣ritorie. 7 Vrieiade, a strong piece, on the river Jade, built by Earl Christiern, one of the younger branches of the house of Oldenburg, about the year 1400. 8 Mellum, 9 Jadele, places of principall importance, the one on the river Jade, the other near the Ocean. Here is also within this Earldom the Province of Amerlander, supposed by some to have been the seat of the Ambrones, who accompa∣nyed the Cimbri and Teutones in their expedition towards the Roman Provinces, and were slain by Marius.

As for the Earls of Oldenburg, they derive themselves from Walpert one of the Nephews of Witi∣kindus, the last King and first Duke of the Saxons, who having built a strong Castle on the borders of Bremen in honour of his wife Alteburg, (whom hedearly loved) called it Alteburgum, so called by the Latinists to this day, by the Germans Oldenborch, about the year 850. But his male issue failing in Frederick the 7. Earl, it came to one Elimar, the son of Haio, a Noble man of the Frisian bloud, who had married Richsa, the daughter of John, the fift Earl of this Familie. From him in a direct line descended Christian or Christiern, eldest son of Theodorick, who being fortunately advanced to the Crown of Danemark, anno 1448. lest his estate in this Earldome (but reserving the title, according to the fashion of Germanie) to his brother Gerrard; the better to take him off from his pretentions to the Dukedom of Sleswick, and the Earldom of Holst, in which he did pretend a share. The Pa∣trimonie of it much improved by the addition of the Countries of Rustingen, Oystingen, and Wanger land, all lying on the German Sea, bequeathed by the last will and testament of the Lady Marie Countesse of Jevere in East Friseland, to John Earl of Oldenburg, the third from Gerrard. The Succession of these Earls, in regard the Royall line of Danemark, and by consequence of Great Britain is descended from them, I have here subjoined, in this ensuing Catalogue of

The EARLS of OLDENBOVRG.

• 850 1 Walpert, of the race of Witikind, the first Earl of Oldenburg.
• 856 2 Theodorick, the son of Walpert.
• 3 Theodorick II. son of Theodorick the 1.
• 4 Otho son of Theodorick the 2.
• 5 John, the son of Otho, accompanied the Emperour Henry the 2. in his wars against the Greeks and Saracens, anno 1007.
• 6 Huno surnamed the Glorious, son of John.
• 7 Frederick, son of Huno, fortunate in his wars against the Frisians, the last of the male line of this house.
• 8 Elimarus, the son of Haio, a Noble man of the Frisian bloud, and of Richsa his wife, the daughter of John the fift Earl.
• 1120 9 Elimarus II. the son of Elimar the 1.
• 10 Christianus, son of Elimar the 2. surnamed the Couragious, or the Warlike, a professed ene∣my of Henry the Lyon Duke of Saxonie, from whom he tooke the Citie of Breme.
• 11 Maurice, the son of Christian, an associate of Arnulph Earl of Holstein, in his wars with Danemark.
• 12 Christian II. son of Maurice.
• 13 John II. son of Christian the 2.
• 14 John III. son of John the 2.
• ...

• 15 Courade,* 1.66 the son of John the 3.
• 16 Christian III. son of Conrade, a student in Colen, where initiated into holy Orders, which he relinquished much against the will of his brother Maurice, on the death of his Father.
• 17 Theodorick, son of Christian the 3. the first Farl of Delmenhorst of this line, which fell to him by the death of Nicholas Archbishop of Breme, descended from a younger son of John the 2.
• 1440 18 Christian IV. son of Theodorick, and of Heduigis sister and heir of Gerrard and Adolphus Dukes of Sleswick and Earls of Holstein, elected on the commendation of his Uncle Adolphus to the Crown of Danemark, anno 1448.
• 1448 19 Gerrard the brother of Christian the 4. a Prince of an unquiet spirit, alwayes in wars, and alwayes worsted; he lost the Town of Delmenhorst to the Bishop of Munster.
• 1500 20 John IV. son of Gerrard, repaired the ruines of his Estate, and setled the distractions of it in the time of his Father, being then in exile; and after very much enlarged it by the reduction of Butiada.
• 1526 21 Antonie, the son of John the 4. by a sudden surprise recovered D••lmenhorst from the Bi∣shop of Munster, anno 1547. which he strongly fortified.
• 1573 22 John V. son of Antonie, enlarged this Earldome with the Provinces of Fustingen, Oystin∣gen, and Wangerland, bequeathed to him by the last will of the Countene of Jevere in East Friseland.
• 23 Anthome II. brother of John the 5. in whose life time he was Earl of Delmenhorst, and after his death of Oldenburg also: still living, anno 1649. for ought I can learn un∣to the contrary.

And thus we see the present estate of Germanie, distracted and divided amongst many Princes, Pre∣lates and Incorporate Towns, the chief of which are herein mentioned and described. But besides these there are many others of lesse note, and smaller Territories, which yet are absolute and free: inso∣much, that in one dayes riding, a Traveller may twice or thrice meet with divers lawes, and divers coins; every free Prince and free Citie (whose laws the Emperours are sworn to keep inviolable) ha∣ving power to make what lawes, and coin what money they will. And hence in the censure of Kingdoms, the King of Spain is said to be Rex hominum, because of his Subjects reasonable obedience; the King of France, Rex Asinorum, because of their infinite taxes and impositions; the King of Eng∣land, Rex Diabolorum, because of his Subjects often insurrections against, and depositions of their Prin∣ces: but the Emperour of Germanie, is called Rex Regum, because there is such a number of Reguli, or Free Princes which live under his command; or rather at their owne command, (for they do even what they list) as the Emperour Maximilian the first, well noted.

And to say truth, the publick Government hereof is nothing lesse then Monarchicall: the Empe∣rour being accompted amongst the Princes but as the chief Officer of the Empire, not reckoned of by Bodin and others of our great Statists and Civilians, as an absolute Monarch; such as the Kings of England, France, and Spain, are confessed to be. For the priviledges of the Free Cities being made perpetuall, the great Estates hereditarie, and the Empire eligible: the Emperours were brought at last to such low condition, as to be made accomptable to the States of the Empire: who if they be per∣swaded in their consciences, or but think they be so, that he is likely by his mal-administration to de∣stroy the Empire, or that he will not heark••n unto good advise, ab Electorum Collegio Caesarea majes••a•••• privari potest (as my Author hath it) he may be deprived by the Electors, and a more sit and able man chosen into the place: and that too as the Emperour Jodocus Barbatus hath declared in one of his Constitutions, anno 1410, sine infidelitatis vel Rebelli••nis crimine, without incurring the crimes of treason or disloyaltie. So that the supreme power and majestie of the Empire seems to reside especially and con∣tractedly in the Electorall Colledge; diffusedly in the Imperial Diets, by way of execution in the Cham∣ber of Spires, and other the supreme Courts of the severall Circles. But that which makes that 〈◊〉〈◊〉 which they call the Empire, is the Assembly of the Prelates, Princes and Commissioners of the Free Cities in their Diets or Parliaments, the Emperour presiding in them: whom he that saw adorned in his roall R••bes with the Imperiall Crown and Scepter, with the titles of Caesar and Augustus given at every word, would think that the whole action did take life from him. Whereas indeed he hath not so much priviledge as a negative voice, but is to put in execution such Decrees and Sanctions as these ••states assembled have thought fit to make; not able to doe any Act by his own authority, which may speak him Emperour. But on the other side the Princes take power unto themselves, of ma∣king laws for, and impo••ing taxes on their subjects: of raising war upon one another or against a third, and doing many other Acts of supreme authoritie which in the Emperour would be counted matters of mal-administration. Such points as these, together with the appointing of Judges and the like chief Magistrates (as they relate unto the Empire) are not to be concluded of but in generall Diets, which may be summoned by or without the Emperour, as occasion serveth. And to this weakning of the majestie and power Imperiall, the neighbouring Princes have afforded their best assi∣stance; jealous of their own interesse and decrease of power, if that vast body so well limbed 〈◊〉〈◊〉 be strongly jointed, and all the severall Members of it united under the command of one Supre•••• head. Clear proof whereof we have in those solemn leagues and confederations made in their se∣verall

times against Charls the 5. and the late Emperour Ferdinand the 2. as soon as they began to be in some possibilitie of setling the Imperiall majestie in its proper splendour, and bringing down the Princes to a lower pitch.

As for the Forces of the Empire, for by that name we are to measure the abilities and power of Germanie, we may discern them by those Levies which have been raised upon particular occasions, or by the joint consent of the Free Estates assembled in the Imperiall Diets. First for particular Levies made by private persons, we find 12000 Foot and 8000 Horse raised by the Prince Palatine of Zwey∣bruck for aid of the French Hugonots against their King; and on the other side no fewer then 7000 Horse under the conduct of the Duke of Aumal, and the Earl of Mansfield for the service of that King against the Hugonots. And as for Levies made by consent of the States, we find that Charls the 5. had under his Ensigns at Vienna, 90000 Foot and 35000 Horse; Maximilian the 2. at Javerin in Hungarie, 34000 Horse, and full 100000 Foot; and finally that in the war betwixt Charls the 5. and the Protestant Princes there were no lesse then 150000 men on both sides; which numbers no one Countrie in Europe is able to equall. In a word, it is generally conceived that the Empire is able to raise 200000 Horse and Foot, with Arms, Canon and Ammunition of all sorts, proportionable; which the in∣stances before brought do most plainly evidence.

Touching the Revenue of the Empire, I find them estimated by Boterus, and some others since at seven millions of Crowns yearly. Which may be true enough, taking the Kingdoms of Hungarie and Bohemia, with the hereditary Estates of Austria into the accompt. But since they are not so uni∣ted unto the Empire, but they may at some time or other be disjoined again, no reason they should come into the reckoning, unlesse it be as the Revenue of the Emperour, though not of the Empire. But as for the Revenue of the Empire it self, taken abstractedly from the personall and patrimoniall Estate of the Emperour, whosoever he be; it can amount to no such sum: the tribute paid by the Free or Imperiall Cities (at least 60 in number) amounting to no more per annum then 15000 Florent or 1500l. English; and what is that but like a Pepper corn for a quit-rent in that mighty Continent. By this we may conjecture what the rest may come to. And though in the way of saving charges (which may be reckoned as a part of his income also) the Princes and Free Cities be bound to aid him in the time of war against the Turk with 3842 Horse and 16200 Foot, which he may challenge without troubling the Diets for it: yet war is such a great devourer, that if the Diets doe not grant him grea∣ter helps, he is like to be but a sorry gainer by the undertaking; besides the smalnesse of those forces considered with the numbers they are able to raise, and the puissance of the enemie whom they are to encounter.

Finally for the Arms of the Empire, they are Sol, an Eagle displayed with two heads, Saturn, ar∣med and crowned Mars: the two heads signifying (as some think) the Eastern and the Western Em∣pires. Cuspinian a learned German conceives rather that these Arms are two Eagles conjoined, and not one Eagle with two heads: and that they were taken up by the German Nation in memorie of the three Legions of Quintilius Varus discomfited by them; at what time they seised on two of the Roman Eagles (the Militarie Ensign of that people) the third being cast into the Fennes by the Standard bearer. But whether it be one or two, certain it is that the one head is quite pulled off; and the whole bo∣die quite stripped of all its Feathers, the Imperiall dignitie being little more then titular, dispoiled and stript of all Authority appertaining to it.

There are in Germanie Archbishops 6. Bishops 34. Universities 21. Viz.

• 1 Colen.
• 2 Triers.
• 3 Ments.
• 4 Heidelberg.
• 5 Tubingen.
• 6 Ingolstade.
• 7 Viennae.
• 8 Herborn.
• 9 Hanaw.
• 10 Wirtenberg.
• 11 Friberg.
• 12 Altorf.
• 13 Prague.
• 14 Olmunts.
• 15 Frankford.
• 16 Rostock.
• 17 Gripswald.
• 18 Jene.
• 19 Lipsique.
• 20 Wittenberg.
• 21 Marpurg.

And so much for GERMANIE.

OF DENMARK.

THE Kingdome of DENMARK or DENEMARK, reckoning in the additions of the Dukedom of Holstein and the great continent of Norway with the Isles thereof, now all united and incorporated into one Estate; is boun∣ded on the East with the Baltick Sea, and some part of Sweden; on the West with the main Western Ocean; on the North-east with a part of Sweden; full North with the main Frozen Seas; and on the South with Germanie, from which di∣vided on the South-west by the River Albis; and on the South-east by the Trave; a little Isthmus or neck of Land uniting it to that Continent.

It tooke this name from the Danes, of long times the Inhabitants and Pos∣sessours of it; so called quasi Danorum tractus sive Regio, (as Mercator hath it,) because the Countrie of that people: but rather quasi Danorum limes, the bounds or marches of the Danes, bordering close upon the Dutch, from whom it had the name of Danemarch.

As for the situation of it in regard of the Heavens, it lieth partly in the Northern temperate Zone, and partly within the Artick Circle, extending from the middle Parallel of the tenth Clime, or 55. de∣gree of Latitude, where it joineth with Germanie, as far as the 71 degree, where it hath no other bound but the Frozen Ocean. By which accompt the longest day in the most Southern parts hereof is 17 hours and a quarter, but in the parts extremely North, they have no night for two whole months, three weeks, one day, and some seven hours over, as on the other side no day for the like quantitie of time, when the Sun is most remote from them in the other Tropick. The air hereof by consequence must be sharp and bitter, even in the very warmest places: Of which and of the na∣ture of the soile wee shall speak more punctually in the Description and Survey of the severall parts.

The Inhabitants generally are of good stature, clear of complexion, well coloured, for the most part healthfull and long-lived: for though they eat and drink beyond measure, they have good di∣gestions. In manners very severe, craftie and provident in the managing of their Affairs; but proud withall, and (as the Historian said of another person) omnium quae dixerant fecerantve ostentatores, great Vaunters of whatsoever they do or say, highly opinionated of their own actions, and peremptorie in maintaining their own opinions: Religious observers of their words and contracts, and strict in executing justice, especially in punishing of Theeves and Pirats: Such of them as do follow the wars prove reasonable good Souldiers both by Sea and I and; but fitter for the Sea then field-service: the Magistrate wise rather by experience then studie: though they love learning, and easily attain all languages which they give their minds to: the old men covetous, the young men thriftie, and the Mer∣chant ambitious: the Nobilitie and Gentrie are generally of as antient families as most in Christen∣dom, here being some of those houses still remaining, which were present at the pacification made betwixt Charls the Cr••at and Hemingus King of the Danes: and which addes much unto their honour, they keep their bl••ud unmixt from marriages with the Vulgar sort, and reckon it for an high dis∣grace to change their Arms, or make any addition thereunto. The women are fair, discreet and com∣teous,

and know well how to govern their housholds;* 1.67 exceeding fruitfull in bearing Children, but delivered of them with great difficultie. Both S••xes speake the Dutch or German, common (but with some difference in the pronunciation) to all the Northern Nations in Norwey and Swethland.

The Christian faith was first preached to those of Holstein (the next neighbouring Countrey unto Germany) by S. A••garius Bishop of Bremen, the generall Apostle of those Northern parts, in the yeare 826. Lewis the Godly then being Emperour of the West. In whose time Harald King of Denmark be∣ing expulsed his Kingdomes by the sonnes of Godfrey or Gottri••••s, was baptized at Mentz with a great number of that people which attended on him, by the hands of Ebbo Archbishop of Rhemes, em∣ployed by the Emperour in that service: the conversion of the whole Nation following not long af∣ter, by the power and diligence of the Emperour Otho the first, assisted by the Ministery of one Poppo the first Bishop of Arthusen, Sueno, or Swain, then reigning amongst the Danes. The Norwegians came not in till after, converted in the reign of Olaus the third, anno 1055 or thereabouts: the English assisting in the work, and the good King so zealous in it, that hee was canonized a Saint, after his decease. Relapsing for the most part to their antient Gentilisme, they were finally regained unto Chri∣stianity, by the means of Pope Adrian the fourth, an English man, about the yeare 1156. before his assu∣ming of the Popedom called Nicolaus Breakspeare. But by whomsoever first converted, the Popes of Rome would needs pretend some power and jurisdiction over them, which when they began to exer∣cise with too much authority, Waldemar the third is said to have returned this answer, Naturam habe∣mus a deo, Regnum a subditis, Divitias a Parentibus, Religionem a Romana Ecclesia, quam si nobis invides re∣nunciamus per praesentes, that is to say, We hold our life from God, our Crown from our subjects, our Riches from our Ancestors, our Religion from the Church of Rome; which if we envy us, we do here remit it by these presents. But this renunciation though then threatened, was not made till afterwards: when the whole masse of Popery was abolished by King Frederick the first, using therein the Ministery of John Bugenhage a Divine of Pomeren; by whom reformed according to the doctrine of the Lutho∣ran Churches.

As for the Government of the Church since that Reformation, it continueth as before it was, by Arch∣bishops and Bishops in number as before, but much abridged of their Revenues, and a great part of their power. For Frederick, though he found it necessary to remove the old Bishops, (not one of which would be perswaded to the change of Religion) yet he substituted others in their places: allowing them a convenient maintenance, with a power of Presidence in al Church-Assemblies, where they are to take the advice of other Presbyters along with them; and out of such Assemblies to receive complaints, to pro∣vide remedie against scandals, and to order all matters, as peculiar Inspectors, which concerne the Church. So that in all the Kings Dominions there are two Archbishops, and thirteen Bishops: that is to say, the Archbishop of Londen, the Bishops of Roschilt, Odensee, Ripen, Wiborch, Arth••son, Sleswick, and Hadersleue, for the Kingdome of Denmark; the Archbishop of Nidrosi••, the Bishops of Bergen, Anslo, Stuffanger, and Hammar, for the Realm of Norwey; and the Bishops of Holor and Schul∣hel, for the Isle of Iseland: the Churches of Holstein, (formerly under the Bishops of Ham∣burg and Lubeck) being governed by Super-intendents as the rest of the Lutherans.

The whole body of the estate (as appears by this) confifteth chiefly of three members; viz. 1 the Dukedome of Holstein, containing Wagerland, Ditmarsh, Stormaria and Holstein specially so called: 2 the Kingdome of Denmark comprehending both Juitlands, part of Scandio, and the Hemodes or Baltick Islands: and 3 the Kingdom of Norwey, consisting of Norwey it self, and the Islands of the Northern Ocean. Which parts we shall survey in order, as before laid downe, premising first a word or two of the Cimbrick Chersonese, in which the Dukedome of Holstein, and the two I••••••lands are con∣tained.

The CIMBRICK CHERSONESE.

The CIMBRICK CHERSONESE, hath on the East the Baltick Sea; on the West the main German O∣cean; on the North the narrow Strait of Fretum which they call the Sunde; on the South-west the great river of Albis; on the South-east the small River of Trave; betwixt which is the neck or I••thmus which unites it to Germante. I know that some contract it into narrower bounds, and limit it upon the South with the river Eydore: but I have drawn it down to the E••ve and the Trave, which give it more resem∣blance to the Chersonese or Demy-Island then the other doth▪ diffenting in this point from the common opinion. It had the name of Chersonesus 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a terra & insula, it being the same with a Pe∣ninsula in the Latine: of which name there were five most famous, that is to say, 1 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in Greece, which is now called Morea; 2 Thracia Chersonesus in Thra••••, near the Sea Propontis; 3 ••aurica Gherso∣nesus in the ••uxine Sea, now a part of T••rtarie; 4 Aure•• Chersonesus in India, which we now call Ma••••∣ca; of all which we shall speak in their proper places) and 5 Cimbric•• Chersonesus, where now we are. This ••ast so called from the Cimbri, the first inhabitants hereof, originally descended from Gomer the sonne of Japhet, thence called Gomerii, and Cimmeri••, by contraction Cimbri•• Leaving the plains of Phrygia, as too narrow for them, they sought out new dwellings, and are said to have first dwelt in the banks of Palus 〈◊〉〈◊〉, where they gave name to Bosphorus Cimmerius, there being. Being overcome by the Scythians, they removed their seats more Northward into a Countrey bounded, ac∣cording to Plutarch, by the great Ocean, on the one side; and the forest of Her••••in, on the other; with∣in

in which bounds is the Peninsula or countrey where we now are.* 1.68 They were a people of extraordinary big stature, having blew and red eyes, and lived most upon theft: so that for their sakes, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Germans called all theeves Cimbers. It hapned that the Ocean over∣flowing a great part of their Countrey, compelled them to seek new seats: whereupon in great multitudes abandoning their dwellings, they petitioned the Romans, then lording over a great part of the World, for some place to settle in. This request being denyed, they proceeded in another manner, winning with their swords, what their Petitions could not obtain. Manlius, Sillanus, and Cepio, all Roman Consuls perished by them; so that now (saith Florus) Actum esset de Imperio Romano nisi ille seculo Marius contigisset: for he, as we have elsewhere told you, utterly overthrew them. The next Inhabitans hereof were the Saxons, Iuites, and Angles, upon whose removall into Brittaine the greatest part of it was peopled by the Danes, who still possesse it.

It containeth in length about 100 Italian miles, and 80 of the same miles in the breadth; and com∣prehendeth in that tract or extent of ground, 30 walled townes, 6 Episcopall Sees, (besides those of Hamburg and Lubeck, which are under the Archbishop of Bremen) and 20 Royall Castles and Pa∣laces, as well for the reception of the Nobles and great men of the Countrey, as the private retire∣ments of the King. The soil naturally more fit for pasturage then tillage; feeding such multitudes of Oxen, that from hence no fewer then 50000 are sent yearly to Germanie. Divided at the present into the Dukedome of Holstein, and the Province of Iuitland.

1. HOLSTEIN.

The Dukedome of HOLSTEIN taketh up the Southern part of the Cimbrick Chersonese where it joins to Germanie, extending as far North, as the River Eydore, which divides it from Juitland. So called from the Dutch word Holt, which signifies a Wood or Forrest, according to the nature of it; the Countrey being low, marishie and full of Woods, as it continueth to this day. It contains in it these foure Provinces, 1 Wagerland, 2 Stormarsh, 3 Ditmarsh, and 4 Holst, or Holstein specially so called.

1. WAGERLAND is that part of Holstein which lies on the South East of this Chersonese, bounded on the East with Mecklenbourg and the Baltick sea; on the West with Holstein specially so called; on the North with the Sea Baltick also; on the South withsome part of Mecklenbourg. So called from the Wagrii, a Tribe or Nation of the Sclaves who possessed this tract; from whence the name of Wagria in our Latine writers.

Chief townes hereof are 1 Lubeck, pleasantly seated on the confluence of the Trave and the Bill••w, neer the fall thereof into the Baltick from which distant five Italian miles. The River capable of ships of a thousand Tun, which commonly they unlade at Tremuren, the Port Towne to the City, seated upon the very brink of the Sea, where the united Rivers have their fall into it, it was first built by Adolph the second Earl of Holstein, anno 1143. but so well priviledged by him and his next successours, that in short time it bid defiance to its founders, (the cause of many differences betwixt it and those Princes) and was made a Dukedome of it selfe. By Frederick the first it was united to the Empire, after whose death they chose themselves another Duke, who having governed them five years was subdued by the Danes, and the City made subject to that Kingdome; remaining so till delivered by the Emperour Frederick the second. By whom being once again infranchised, it became Imperiall: af∣terwards listed amongst the Hansetownes, and the first in estimation of all the company, having above 600 ships of all sorts (some of a thousand Tun and and upwards) which belong unto it. But be∣ing their Trade is for the most part on the Baltick Seas, which are generally free from Pirats, they are most of them built for burden, and are slow of sail, and little serviceable, if at all, for a fight at Sea. But to return unto the City, it is built upon all the sides of a rising hill, on the top whereof stand∣eth the Church of Saint Marie, (once the Cathedrall of the City, for it was Episcopall) whence is a de∣scent to all the gates of the City, affording to the Eye a most pleasing prospect. The buildings very beautifull, and all of brick, the streets streight and even; the Churches (ten in number) in good repair, adorned with excellent imagerie, and much admired even by skilfull workmen: and unto every private house a pipe of water is conveyed from the publick Conduit; according to the pattern whereof it hath been observed that the Condu••ts were first made in London, and other places. In a word, there is not any City of Germany, or the more Northern Countries, which can equallize it either for the beau∣ty and uniformity of the houses, the pleasant gardens, fair streets, delightfull walks without the wals, or for the Citizens themselves, who are much commended for their civilitie to strangers, and strict execution of justice without partiality. The whole in compasse about six miles, fortified with a dou∣ble wall, deep ditches, and unfordable Rivers. 2 Segeberg on the River Trave, four Dutch miles from Lubeck, and near the head of that River. 3 Oldeslo on the same River, in the midst betwixt both. 4 Gronneb••rg, and 5 Newkirk on the Baltick shore: and 6 Stendorp more within the land, neer the edge of a lake out of which runs the River Suentin.

Southwest of Wagerland lieth STORMARSH, betwixt the Elb and two lesse Rivers called the Billen and the Store; from which last and the marishnesse of the situation, or from that River and the Marfi, once the Inhabitants hereof, comes the name of Storemarsh. Places of most importance are

1 Crempe,* 1.69 on a little River so named, which falls not far off into the Store, and both together not much further into the Elb. A town well fortified by Christian the fourth, and reckoned one of the Keies of the Kingdom; as well appears by the resistance which it made to the Duke of Fri••land, against whom it held out 13 months, and yeelded at the last upon good conditions, anno 1628. 2 Tychenberg, (Tychopolis my Author cals it) a Dutch mile from Crempe, but on the very bank of the river Elb, where it receives the Rhin, a small River upon which it is seated: first built and after very well fortified by Christiern the fourth, of purpose to command the Elb, and put a stronger bridle in the mouths of the Hamburgers, anno 1603. now held to be the strongest peece of all his Dominions; the onely Town of all this Dukedome, which yeelded not to the prevailing Imperialists in their late wars against the Danes, anno 1628. 3 Bredenberg a strong town, belonging to the Rantzoves, one of the best pieces of the Kingdome; remarkable for the stout resistance which it made to Wallenstein, (Duke of Fridland) in the war aforesaid: who at last taking it by assault put all the souldiers to the sword. 4 Pippenberg, another strong place, and of very great consequence. 5 Jetzebo, on the River Store. 6 Gluck-Stude, up∣on a Creek or Bay of the German Ocean, repaired and fortified by the said Christiern the fourth (who much delighted in the place) to command the passage up the Elb. 7 Store. 8 Hamburg upon the Billen, where it falls into the Elb; an antient City built in the time of the Saxons, repaired by Charles the Great, and walled by the Emperour Henry the fourth. Accounted since that time an Imperiall City, and made one of the Hanse on the first incorporating of those Towns. Which notwithstanding on a controversie arising about that time, betwixt the Earl of Holstein and the people hereof, it was ad∣judged to belong to the Earles of Holst, and that determination ratified by Charles the fourth, anno 1374. In pursuance whereof the Hamburgers took the Oath of Allegeance to Christiern Earl of Ol∣denburg, the first King of Denmark of that house, as Earl of Holst; acknowledging him and his suc∣cessours for their lawfull Lords: though since they have endeavoured to shake off that yoak, pre∣suming very much on their power at Sea, and the assistance which they are assured of upon all occa∣sions from the rest of the Hansetownes. As for the Town it selfe it is seated in a large plain, with fat and rich pastures round about it: well fortified by art and nature: the Haven being shut up with a strong iron chain. The buildings for the most part of brick, but more beautifull then well contrived, and the streets somewhat of the narrowest. The publick str••ctures very fair, especially the Coun∣sell house adorned with the Statua's of the nine Worthies carved with very great Art; the Exchange or meeting place for Merchants, and nine large Churches. The Citizens generally rich, masters of many as great ships as sail on the Ocean, some of them 1200 tun in burden; which bring in great profit besides the great resort of Merchants and their Factors from most places else: sometimes the Staple town for the Cloth of England, removed on some discontents to Stode, and from thence to Holland. It is observed that there was in this town at one time 177 Brewers, and but 40 Bakers, nor more then one Lawyer and one Physitian. The reason of which dispropo••tion was, that a Cup of Nimis was their only Physick; their differences sooner ended over a Can then by order of Law; and Bread being accounted but a binder, and so not to be used but in case of necessity.

Betwixt the Rivers Store and Eydore, coasting along the German Ocean lies the Province of DIT∣MARSH, most properly called Tuitschmarsh, from the marishnesse of the ground and the Dutch In∣habitants, or from a mixture of those people with the Marsi spoken of before. The people being naturally of the Saxon race, retain much of the stomach and animosity of the Antient Saxons: never brought under the command of the Earles of Holst (as Wagerland and Storemarsh were) till Holst it selfe was joined to the Crown of Denmark. And though it was aliened from the Empire by Fre∣derick the third, and given in Fee to Christiern Earl of Oldenburg, the first King of that house, anno 1474. yet would they not submit unto his authority; but held it out against him and some of his succes∣sours, whom in the year 1500 they vanquished in the open field; till broken and made subject by the valour and good fortune of King Frederick the second, anno 1559. Chief places in it are 1 Mel∣dorp upon the Ocean, the chief Town of the Province; the Inhabitants of which are so wealthy, that many of them cover their houses with copper. 2 Lond••n, opposite to a Peninsula or Demi-Island called Elderstede, on the West side whereof it standeth. 3 Heininckste, and 4 Tellinckste; of which nothing memorable.

And as for HOLSTEIN it selfe, the fourth and last member of this Estate, though the first in power and reputation, it taketh up the Inland parts betwixt Storemarsh and Juitland, save that it hath an outlet into the Baltick, on the Northwest of Wagerland. Chiefe places in the which are 1 Kyel (Chilonium in Latine) seated upon a navigable Arm of the Baltick Sea, parting Wagerland from the Dukedome of Sleswick: a Town well traded, and having a capacious haven, seldome without good store of shipping from Germany, Lifeland, Sweden, and the rest of Denmark. 2 Rendesberg, the best fortified peece in all this Province. 3 Niemunster, on the Northwest of the Sore, not farre from the head of it. 4 Wilstre, on a small River so called. 5 Bramstede, 6 Borsholm, not much observable: but for a Monastery in which Henry one of the Earles hereof (of a younger house) turned Monk and dyed, anno 1241.

The antient Inhabitants of this and the other three, were the Saxons, Sigalones, and Subalingii, placed here by Ptolemie; whom I conceive to be no other then some Tribes of the Cimbri, of whom this Chersonese took name. The two last passing into the name of the first, and in the declination of the Roman Empire marching over the Elb, and spreading all along the Coasts of the German Ocean, molested with their piracies and depredations, the shores of Britain. Known by that means unto the

Britains,* 1.70 they were invited to assist them against the Scots: which action with the aid of the Juites and Angli, (Inhabitants together with them of the Cimbrick Chersonese) they performed so honestly, as to make themselves masters of the best part of the Island. Such as remained behinde not being a∣ble to defend their owne against the Sclaves, were fain to quit the parts lying next to Mecklenburg: which being peopled by the Wagrii, tooke the name of VVagerland. But the Saxons being vanquished by Charles the Great, these on the North side of the Elb, became a part of the great Dukedome of Saxonie; and so continued till dismembred by Lotharius both Duke and Emperour: who gave the proper Holst (or Holstein specially so called) with the Province of Storemarsh to Adolph Earl of Schaum∣burg, who had deserved well of him in his wars, with the title of Earl of Holstein, anno 1114. By Adolph the second his successour, who having made a full conquest of it, caused it to be planted with Colonies of Dutch or Germans, from Holland, VVes••phalen, and Friseland; by which meanes the name of Sclaves was at last worn out. By G••rrard the fift the Dukedome of Sleswick, was also con∣ferred upon him by the bountie of Margaret Queen of Denmark, in whose wars he served. Adolph the last Earle of this house dying without issue, the whole Estate fell on Christiern, sonne of Theodo∣rick Earl of Olderburg and Heduigis his wife, sister and heir to Adolph before mentioned: who being called to the Crown of Denmark, compounded with his brother Gerrard for the summe of 50000 Markes; and having gotten Ditmarsh also of the Emperour Frederick the third, prevailed so farre as to have the whole Estate erected into a Dukedome, Anno 1474. to bee held by him and his successours of the sacred Empire. Which said, we will next adde the Catalogue of

The EARLES and DUKES of HOLSTEIN.

• 1114 1 Adolph of Schomberg, by Lotharius Emperour and Duke of Saxonie made the first Earle of Holstein.
• 1137 2 Adolph II. sonne of Adolph the first.
• 1164 3 Adolph III. sonne of Adolph the second, vanquished by Canutus King of the Danes, lost him∣self and his Countrey.
• 1232 4 Adolph IV. in his fathers life time recovered his estate from Waldemar the successour of Canutus, overcome by him in a well-fought field, anno 1226. his father then pri∣soner to the Danes.
• 1261 5 Gerrard the second sonne of Adolph the fourth, his elder brother John making choice of Wagerland, succeeded in Holstein.
• 1281 6 Henry the sonne of Gerrard, the first that set up a custome-house at Hamburg, for receipt of his tols and taxes.
• 1310 7 Gerrard II. sonne of Henry, slain treacherously by the Danes.
• 1339 8 Henry II. sonne of Gerrard the second.
• 1381 9 Gerrard III. sonne of Henry the second created the first Duke of Sleswick by Queen Marga∣ret of Denmark.
• 1404 10 Henry III. sonne of Gerrard the third.
• 1427 11 Adolphus V. commonly called the XII. (those of the younger houses being reckoned in) the last Earl of this house.
• 1459 12 Christiern of Oldenburg, King of Denmark, Sweden, and Norwey, sonne of Theodorick Earl of Oldenburg and his wife Heduigis, sister of Henry, and Adolphus the two last Earls, succeeded in the Earldome of Holstein, inlarged with the addition of Ditmarsh, and erected into a Dukedome by the Emperor Frederick the third, anno 1474. But seeing that Otho Earle of Schemberg, pretended a right unto the whole as the next heir male, according to the constitutions of the Empire of which it was holden; and Gerrard the brother of Christiern put in for his share, according to the ill custome of Germanie, of which it was then counted part, he was faine to buy his peace of both: giving to Otho 43000 Florens in ready money, with the Townes of Pinnenberg, Haltzburg, and Bramstede, the antient possessions of the Earles of Schomberg, and 50000 markes to his brother Ger∣rard, besides his whole interest in the Earldome of Oldenbourg, as before was said. By this meanes Holstein was united to the Crown of Denmark, the Kings whereof as Dukes of Holst, being counted Princes of the Empire; but neither send unto the ••i••ts, nor contribute any thing at all to the pub∣lick taxes, nor acknowledge any kinde of subjection to it, more then meerly titularie. Onely it was ordained at the request of the subjects, when first they were incorporated into that Kingdom, that in case of any grievance or unjust sentence in the ordinary courts of justice, wherein they found no remedie in the supreme councell of the Province, it might be lawfull for them to appeale to the Im∣periall Chamber, as they had done formerly. Which as it was granted to content them at the present time, on sufficient caution, so hath it seldome or never been put in practise: the very grant or priviledge (if such it were) being in a manner worn out of memory. But since this uniting of the two Estates, the title of Duke of Holstein, and a good part of the Countrey, was given unto A••••lphus, brother of Christiern the third (created by Queen Elizabeth one of the Knights of the Garter anno 1560) who governed it interchangeably with the King in their severall turns: after whose death, and the death of all his children dying without issue male, the title of it was conferred on Vlrick son of Fre∣derick the second, and brother of Christiern the fourth, created Knight of the Ga••••er by King James, anno 16••5.

JVITLAND.* 1.71

IVITLAND, containeth all the rest of the Cimbrick Chersonese, divided from the Dukedom of Holst by the River Eydore, the antient boundarie betwixt the Saxons and the Danes: but principally by a long trench and wall from one Sea to the other, of such breadth that a chariot or two horse∣men a breast might ride upon it. First built in imitation of the Picts wall in England, by Godfrey King of Danemark in the time of Charles the Great: either to hinder the dayly incursions of the Sax∣ons, as some; or to stop the current of the victories of the said Charles, as others thinke. The tract whereof, still very easie to be seene, is called Dennewerck, (or the Danes work) to this very day.

It was so called from the Juites, who together with the Angli, and neighbouring Saxons, made a conquest of the best part of Britain. The Countrey so abounding in Cattell, that it sendeth yeerly into Germany 50000 Oxen, besides great store of Butter, Cheese, Tallow, Hides and Horses; divi∣ded commonly into North-Juitland, dnd South-Juitland, or Juitland specially so called, and the Duke∣dome of Sleswick.

SOVTH-IVITLAND, or the Dukedome of SLESWICK, is that part of the Cimbrian Chersonese which lies next to Holstein: called South-Juitland from the Southern situation of it, and Sles∣wick from the chief Town of it, and the head of this Dukedome. The Countrey for the most part plaine, little swelled with mountaines: the fields whereof doe interchangeably yeeld both fish and corn. For during one three years they sow it constantly, and reap the fruits of it: and for the next three, let the Pooles overflow the land, to the end the fish may eat up the grasse (whom they catch as often as they please) and the mudde which is left behinde inricheth the soil. But besides their Pooles, they have also on the Baltick shores many goodly Bayes not onely commodious for Mer∣chants, but well stored with fish, and with Salmons specially.

Chief Townes herein are 1 Flensburg, seated amongst very high Mountains on the shore of the Bal∣tick Sea, where there is a Port so deep, so safe, and so commodious, that all the Inhabitants thereof in a manner may lade and unlade their ships close to their houses. 2 Husem, upon the German Ocean, nor farre from the mouth of the River Edore. 3 Hadersleve, a Bishop See, if not rather some towne or manour of the Bishops of Sleswick, situate on a Navigable inlet of the Baltick Sea, wherewith it it is almost incompassed; beautified with the fair Castle of Hansburg, begun by John the eldest son of king Christiern the first, then Duke of Holst; but finished by Frederick the second King of Denmark. 4 Lon∣denberg in the Peninsula called Eldersted••, over against De Sorants, an Island of the German Ocean. 5 Stern∣berg, the ordinary residence of the Governor for the King of Denmark. 6 Gottorp a strong Fort or Castle of the Duke of Sleswicks, at the end of a large Bay or Inlet of the Baltick also: remarkable for the Toll-booth, or custom-house there erected, at which there is Toll paid one yeare with another for 50000 Oxen, sent out of North-Juitland into Germ••nie. 7 Sleswick originally by the Danes called Hey∣debui, built as they say by Hethe a Queen of that Nation; but by the Saxons called Sleswick, as the town upon the River Slea, there running into the Baltick, and giving to the Towne a fair and commodious Haven. This of long time hath been accounted the chief Town of this Province, honoured with an Episcopall See, and being made the head of the Dukedome, so giving name unto the whole. A Dukedome first erected by King Henry of Denmark, who gave it to Waldemar great Grandchilde of Abel a former King, an. 1280. to be held by him under the right & soveraignty of the Kings thereof. But the male-issue failing it returned to the Crown, and was by Margaret Queen of Denmark, confer∣rred on Gerrard Earl of Holstein, as before was said, anno 1386. Repenting afterwards of that Act, shee extorted it out of the hands of the Widow of Gerrard; again recovered by the valour and good fortune of his sonne Adolphus. After whose death, it fell together with Holstein upon Christiern of Oldenburg, King of Danemark, as before related: by whom incorporated with that Crown: never since aliened, but assigned sometimes in portion for the younger Princes; the Patrimony at this time of the sonnes of Alexander, surnamed of Sunderburg, (the place of his Nativity) son of John, one of the younger sonnes of King Christiern the third.

NORTH-IVITLAND, the most Northern part of all the Chersonese, hath on the South the Dukedome of Sleswick, but on all other parts the Sea. Divided commonly according to the num∣ber of the Bishopricks into four Dioceses, or Districts, that is to say,

1 The Diocese of RIP or Ripen, bordering next to Sleswick, and containeth 30 Praefectures or Herets (as they use to call them) seven Cities or walled Townes, and ten Castles. The Chief of which are 1 Ripen the Episcopall See, situate neer the German Ocean. 2 Koldins on a Creek of the Baltick Sea, where Dorothy the Dowager of Christiern the third, built a publick School, (one of my Authors cals it an University).

2 The Diocese of ARTHVSEN lying on the North of Ripen, but more towards the Baltick, con∣taineth 31 Herets or Prefectures, seven Cities or walled Townes, and five Castles. The chief where∣of are 1 Arthusen the Episcopall See, seated on the Baltick, enjoying a commodious Port, and well frequented, the first Bishop hereof being that Coppo, who converted this nation; Christianitie and Episcoparie going for the most part hand in hand together. Schunderburg, on the South of Arthusen.

3 Kalloe, a strong Castle of the Kings seated in the inmost part of a large Bay occasioned by the Promontorie, or Cape of Hillenis, extending hence two Dutch miles to the high hill of Ellemanberg. Opposite whereunto, and pertaining to this Jurisdiction, lie the Ilands of 1 Samsoe, 2 Hiolm, 3 Tuen, 4 Hia••nce (perha••s Gern••) 5 Hilgenes, and others.

3 The Diocese of WIBORCH, on the north of Arthusen, containeth sixteen Herets, the Ilands of 1 Jegen, 2 Hansholm, 3 Ostholm, 4 Cifland, 5 Egholm, and 6 Bodum: three Cities, or walled Townes, and as many Castles: the principall of which are 1. Wiborch, the Episcopall See, an In∣land City, but situate on a water which ••unneth into the Bay of Limford. The ordinary seat of Judicature, for both the Juitlands; for all Causes as well Criminall, or Civill: the Court continually sitting from one day to another, unlesse perhaps the Judges doe sometimes adjourne it for their own refreshments.

4. The Diocese of BVRGLAVE, or Vandalia, lying furthest north, is commonly subdivided into four parts or members; that is to say, 1. Thyland, lying south of the Bay of Limford, on the Baltick side, whose chief town is 1 ••lborch, the ordinary seat and residence of the Bishop of Vandalia, from hence many times stiled Alburgensis, situate on the Bay aforesaid, which opening into the Bal∣tick Sea extendeth thorow the ma••n land Westwards, almost as far as the German Ocean. 2 Morsee, lying on the Ocean, and containing three Prefectures, or Herets, the town of Nicopen, the Castle of Lunstod, and the Isle o•• Agerce. 3 Hanheret, on the northwest of the Bay of Limford, containing four Herets, the town of Thysiad, where Christiern the third founded a publick School, or such ano∣ther University as that of Kolding; the Castle of Orumne, and the Ilands of Oland and Oxcholm. There is in this part also, the high Rock called Skaringelint, a noted Sea-mark; fitly serving to give no∣tice to the Sayler of the Quicksands which lie underneath it, and about this Coast. 4 Vensyssell, Ven∣filia, or Wenslie, that is (as Mercator doth expound it) Vandalorum sedes, the seat of the Vandals, taketh up all the rest of the north of Juitland, containing six Prefectures, the Ilands of Groysholm, 2 Hartz∣holm, and 3 Tydsholm; three towns, and one Castle, the most remarkable of which is Schagen, with the most northerly point of all this Chersonese. In this part is a very high mountain called Mount Alberg, in which are found some marks and remainders of the ancient Gyants, as the inhabitants be∣lieve, and report accordingly.

The Inhabitants of both Juitlands in the time of Ptolemy, and before, were the Cobandi, Chali, Phun∣dusii, Charudes, and in the most northern tracts the Cimbri, of whom the four first were but Tribes or Nations. These moving towards the South in that great expedition against Spain made by the neighbouring Vandals on the Roman Empire, occasioned the Juites and Angli to inlarge or shift their dwellings: each taking up the parts which lay nearest to them, The Juites, or Gutae, being a people of Scandia, and there placed by Ptolemy, took up the nothern parts hereof from them, named Juit∣land: the other being a people of the Suevi, dwelling on the south of the Elb, possessed them of those parts which lay next the Saxons their old friends and confederates, (their chief town being Sleswick) where Angelen, now an obscure village, once of greater note, doth preserve their me∣mory. But these uniting with the Saxons, in the conquest of Britain, and leaving none behind which were fit for action, or not enough to keep possession of the Country against new Invaders, gave opportunity to the Danes to come in upon them. By whom these Countries being conquered, as far as to the River Eydore, were planted by Colonies of Danes, and made a part of that King∣dome: of whom we shall say more in the close of all: first, taking a survey of the Bal∣tick Ilands, and such Provinces on the main land of Scandia, as properly make up the Kingdome of Denmark.

2 The BALTICK ILANDS.

The BALTICK ILANDS are in number 35. and are so called, because they lie dispersed in the Baltick Ocean. At this day it is called by the Germans▪ De Oost zee; antiently by some, Mare Sue∣vicum; by Pomponius Mela, Sinus Codanus; by Strabo, Sinus Venedicus; but generally, Mare Balticum: because the great Peninsula of Scandia, within which it is, was by some Writers of the middle and darker times, called Balthia. It beginneth at the narrow passage called the Sound; and interlacing the Countries of Denmark, Sweden, Germany, and Poland, extendeth even to Livonia, and Lituania. The reasons why this sea being so large, doth not ebbe and flow, are 1 the narrownesse of the strait, by which the Ocean is let into it; and 2 the Northern situation of it, whereby the Celestiall Influ∣ences have lesse power upon it. The principall of this great shole of Ilands, are 1 Seland, 2 Fui∣nen, or Fionia. 3 Langeland, 4 Lawland, 5 Falstre, 6 Azze, 7 Alen, 8 Tosinge, 9 Wheen, 10 Fimera, and 11 Bornholim. Some others of lesse note we shall onely name, and so passe them over.

1 SELAND, the greatest Iland of the Baltick Seas, is situate neer the main land of Scandia, from which parted by a narrow Strait or Fretum, not above a Dutch mile in breadth, commonly called by the name of the Sundt, or Sound. A Straight thorow which all ships that have any trading to, or from the Baltick, must of necessity take their course; all other passages being barred up with impassable Rocks; or otherwise prohibited by the Kings of Denmark, upon forfeiture of all their goods. So that being the onely safe passage which these Seas afford, one may sometimes see two

or three hundred Ships in a day passe thorow it: all which pay a toll, or imposition to the King, ac∣cording to their bils of lading. And to secure this passage, and command all Passengers, there are two strong Castles: the one in Scandia called Helsinbourg, whereof more anon; the other in this Iland which is called Croneberg. But before we come unto this Castle, we must view the other parts of the Iland, being in length two dayes journey, and almost as much in breadth: the soil so fer∣tile, that without any manuring or charge at all, it yeildeth plenty of all necessaries for the life of man. It was anciently called Codonania, and containeth in it 15 Cities or walled Townes, and 12 Royall Castles. The principall whereof, are 1 Hassen, or Hafnia, the Metropolis of the Ilands; by the Dutch called Copenhagen, or the Haven of Merchants, situate near the Sea, with an handsome Port: the Isle of Amager which lyeth on the East-side of the Town, making a very safe road for all kindes of shipping. The town of an orbicular forme, and reasonably well fortified; but the buil∣dings mean, for the most part of clay and timber, onely to be commended for a spacious Market∣place. Yet herein as the chief town of all the Kingdome, and situate in the heart of these domini∣ons, is the Palace Royall, built of Free stone, in form of a Quadrangle, but of no great beauty or magnificence. Most memorable for the Vniversity here founded by Henry or Ericus the ninth, but perfected by King Christiern the first, by whom, and the succeeding Princes liberally endowed. 2 Fre∣dericksburg, amongst woods of Beech, built for a place of pleasure by Frederick the second, where the King hath a fine House, and a little Park, in which (amongst other forein Beasts are) some fal∣low Deer transported hither out of England in the 24 year of Queen Elizabeth. 3 Roschild, not wal∣led, but counted for a City, as a See Episcopall, the Bishops whereof have anciently had the honour of Crowning, and inaugurating the Kings of Danemark. In the Cathedrall Church whereof are to be seen the Tombs of many of the Danish Kings; some of them very fair and sumptuous, the most mean, and ordinary. 4 Sore, of old times beautified with a goodly Monastery, the Revenues whereof at the alteration of Religion, were converted to the maintenance of a Free-Schoole, built here by Fre∣derick the first. But in the yeer 1623 Christiern the fourth, adding hereunto the Revenues of two other dissolved Monasteries, the one in the Ile of Lawland, and the other in Juitland, founded here a new Vniversity, for the greater supply of learned Ministers for the Churches of Denmark and Nor∣way (which before could not be provided for out of Copenhagen) and furnished it with men of emi∣nence in all Arts and Sciences, for its first Professours. 5 Elsinure, or Helsingore, a village onely, but much frequented by Sea-faring men, as their ships passe by the Sound, upon which it is. Near unto which is 6, the strong and magnificent Castle of Croneberg, built with incredible charge and paine•• by King Frederick the second, the foundation of it being laid on huge stones sunk into the Sea, and so fastned together, that no storme or tempest, how violent soever, is able to shake it. Well forti∣fied as well as founded, and mixt of a Palace, and a Fort, being since the first building of it the most constant residence of the Kings of Danemark: who from hence may easily discern each ship which sailes thorow the Sundt, each of which addeth more or lesse unto his Revenues. A profitable and pleasing prospect. By the Commodity of this, and the opposite Castle, the King doth not one∣ly secure his Customes, but very much strengthen his Estate: the Castles being so near, and the Str••it so narrow, that by the addition of some few Ships, he may keep the greatest Navy that is from passing by him.

Unto the Government and Jurisdiction of this Iland belong many others, the principall where∣of are 1 Amigria, or Amagger, which helpes to make up the Port, or Road of Copenhagen, spoken of be∣fore, planted with Hollanders brought hither by the procurement of Christiern the second. 2 Mund, or Moem-land, the chief town whereof is called Stegoe. 3 Huene, or WHEEN, a little South of Croneberg Castle; a Dutch mile in length, but not quite so broad: remarkable onely for the studies of that famous Astronomer Tycho Brahe, to whom Frederick the second gave this Iland, that living in a private and solitary place, removed from all company but his own Family onely, he might with more convenience attend his Books. At this day most observable for the Castle of Vrano∣polis, or Vrenbourg, in which the greatest part of his Mathematicall instruments are preserved in safety.

III. FIONIA, or FVINEN, the second Iland of accompt in all the Baltick, is situate be∣twixt Seland, and Juitland; from which last parted by a Strait called Middelfar Sundt, so narrow, and of so small a Sea, that the Iland and the Chersonese seemed joyned together. A Country of a pleasant and delightfull situation, and as fruitfull withall; containing twelve Dutch miles in length, and four in breadth, and therein 24 Herets or Prefectures, 16 Townes, and six Royall Castles, be∣sides many goodly Villages, and Gentlemens houses. The chief whereof are 1 Odensee, or Othen∣sche (called in Latine Othonia) an Episcopall See founded here at the first conversion of this people, by Otho the great, whence it had the name. The town not large, but beautified with two fair Churches, the one dedicated to Saint Canut, the other to Saint Francis, situate in the midst of the Iland, from which the residue of the Towns are almost equally distant, and so commodiously seated for trade and Merchandise, as they doe not onely traffick in the Baltick Sea, but in Sweden, Norway, Russia, Flanders, and Germany. 2 Nibourch, 3 Faborch, 4 Suiborck, 5 Middelfar, whence the street so named: 6 Bogens, and 7 Kertominde; all seated on some Haven, or convenient Greek: the prin∣cipall of the Castles being 1 Newbourg, 2 Hagenschow, 3 Eschebourg, 4 Hinsgagell; 5 the Court of Rugard. In this Iland not far from the Castle of Hagenschow is the mountain Ochenberg, where John Ranzovius, anno 1530. discomfited the great Army of Christopher, the Brother of Anthony, Earl

of Oldenburg,* 1.72 coming in those unsetled times to invade the Kingdome, under colour of restoring Christiern the second, formerly deposed: in which fight the Earls of Hoye and Tecklebourg were both slain in the place, and the Kingdome after that in quiet from the like pretenders.

South of Fionia, and under the Government hereof, are about 90 lesser Ilands, most of them inha∣bited; the chief of which are

IV. LANGELAND, seven Dutch miles in length, in which, besides many Villages and Gen∣tlemens houses, we have the town of Raidkeping, and the Castle of Franeker.

V. LALAND disjoyned from Selandt, by a little narrow strait called Gronesundt; so plentifull of corn and Chesnuts, that ships full fraighted with them, are sent yeerly hence. An Iland, which besides many Castles, Villages, and Mansion houses of the Gentry, hath five good Towns, viz. 1 Nystadt, 2 Nasco, 3 Togrop, 4 Richus, and 5 Mariboane, in which last antiently was a very rich Monastery, the Revenues whereof are now employed for the endowment of the new Vniversity of Sora, founded by Christiern the fourth, as before was noted.

VI. FALSTRE, four German miles in length, affording plenty of corn yearly to some neigh∣bouring Ilands; chief towns wherein are, 1 Nicopen, which for the elegancy of the place, and pleasantnesse of the situation, is called the Naples of Danemark. 2 Stabecopon, from whence there is the ordinary passage into Germany, seven Dutch miles hence.

VII. TVSINGE, not far from Suiborch, or Swineburg a town of Fionia, a Dutch mile in length, situate in a dangerous and troublesome sea; from whence is no safe passage either to Selandt, Fuinen, or Juitland, though much distant from neither. Chief places in it are, 1 Ascens, towards Juit∣land, 2 Niburg, towards Selandt, and 3 the Court of Keltorp, belonging to the noble Family of Resencrantz.

VIII. FIMERA, or FEMEREN, a fruitfull and well-peopled Iland, having in it the townes of 1 Derborch, 2 Stabul, and 3 Piettersborn: A place of great importance to the Crown of Denmark, not so much in danger of being made subject to the Imperialists by the taking of Holstein, and both Juitlands; as by planting a strong Garrison in this small Iland: and therefore with all diligence recovered by the King again, and better fortified then before against all invasions, anno 1628. Of the remaining Ilands which pertain unto Fionia, we finde the names of 1 Aroe, 2 Romso, 3 Endelo, 4 Ebelo, 5 Boko, 6 Brando, 7 Zoroe, 8 Agernis, 9 Hellenis, 10 Jerdo, 11 Birkolm; of which nothing memorable.

Amongst these Ilands, but not subordinate to Fionia, are

IX. ARIA, belonging to the Dukedome of Sleswick, consisting of three parishes, some Gen∣tlemens houses, and the Town and Castle of Koping, supposed to be the habitation of the Arii, spoken of by Tacitus, but a Colony rather of them, as I suppose. And not far off,

X. ALSEN, another little Iland, but of more repute, called in Latine, Elysia; opposite to the Gulf, or Bay of Flensburg, in the Dukedome of Sleswick, to which it also appertaineth. Well sto∣red with Beasts for profit, and Game for pleasure; so populous, that some thousands of men may be easily and suddenly raised in it, consisting of 13 Parishes, and four Townes, that is to say, 1 Gammelgard, 2 Osterholm, 3 Norborch, and 4 the good town and Castle of Sunderburg, one of the ordinary residences of the Dukes of Sleswick, and honoured with the birth of many of the Princes of the Royall Family. Some think it was the habitation antiently of the Elysii, spoken of by Tacitus, and by him placed next unto the Angli. But being the Angli in those times dwelt about the Elb, I rather think, that when some Colonies of the Angli seated themselves in the Cimbrick Chersonese, as before was said; some of the Arii and Elysii might goe along for company, and plant themselves neer them in these Ilands.

XI. BORNHOLM, the last of all the Baltick which belong to Denmark, is situate more East∣ward, opposite to that part of Scandia, which is called Blecking, betwixt it and Pomeren. An Isle of excellent pasturage, breeding plenty of Cattell, wherewith as also with butter, cheese, wool, hides, and some store of fruits, they supply the want of some of their neighbours; besides good quantities of powdered Beef, and Mutton, which they barrell up, and sell to Mariners. It containeth many good Towne, and wealthy Villages; the chief whereof is Bornholm, which gives name to the Iland. Both Town and Iland pawned by some former Kings unto those of Lubeck; from whom redeemed by King Frederick the second, for a great summe of money, after it had been in their possession about 50 years.

These Ilands in the time of Pomponius Mela, were by one general name called the Hemodes, in number reckoned to be seven; the residue either not inhabited, or not taken notice of, are no where men∣tioned in the Ancients. Of these seven, the greatest and best peopled, was called Codonania (supposed to be Selandt) in which the said Author placeth the Teutoni. By Ptolemy it is called Scandia Minor, with reference to the great Peninsula of Scandia, supposed by him to be an Iland. From this, or

from the sea adjoyning,* 1.73 called Sinus Codanus, the people of these Ilands, and the next Eastern Con∣tinent took the name of Danes: spreading their name afterwards, as they did their Conquests, of which more anon. In the mean time we must crosse over the Sound, and take notice of such other parts of this Kingdome, as lie on the other side thereof in the vast Continent, or Demi-Iland (which you will) of Scandia: of which somewhat must be first premised, in regard, not onely some parts of Denmark, but the whole Kingdome of Norway (the northern Ilands excepted) are contained in it.

SCANDIA.

SCANDIA, by Plinie and Solinus called Scandivania, by Jornandos Scanzia, hath on the East that Bay or branch of the Baltick, which is called the Finnisch and Bodner Seas, on the North and West the main Ocean, on the South, where it points towards Germany, the Baltick, or Oost-Zee, as the Dutch call it: joyned to the main Continent of Sarmatia by an Jsthmus, or neck of land, at the bottome of the Bodner See, not far from Wardhuys. In regard of so great Seas on all parts thereof, it was generally by the Antients thought to be an Iland, but incompertae magnitudinis, of an unknown greatnesse, as both Pytheas, and Xen phon Lampsacenus doe affirme it in Pliny: by one of which it is called Basilia, by the other Baltia, from whence the name of Baltick to the Sea adjoyning. But later Navigations, and experience have confuted that opinion, by which it is found to be no Iland, but a part of the Continent, and a great one too, containing the whole Kingdome of Norway, the greatest part of the Kingdome of Sweden, and some part of Denmark: that part hereof which belongs to Denmark, situate in the South-east of this great Peninsula, and divided into the three Pro∣vinces, of Hallandia, Scania, and Blescida; and in them 23 Herets or Prefectures, and fifteene Cities.

1. HALLANDIA or HALLANDT, hath on the East the wilde woods which part it from Gothland, in the West the intervening Sea betwixt it and Juitland, on the North Sweden properly and specially so called, on the South Scania, or Schonen. A Country which for the healthfulnesse of the Air, pliantnesse of the soil, commodiousnesse of Havens, plenty of fish, pleasure of hunting, for inexha••stible mines of Brasse and Lead, (with some veines of Silver) frequency of well-peopled Townes and Villages, and civility of the Inhabitants, not inferiour to any. Places of most im∣portance in it, are 1 Laholm, 2 Halmstad, 3 Falkendorch, all of them on the Sea, at the mouth of navigable streams, whose names I finde not: 4 Warburg, upon the Sea side also, but fortified with a very strong Castle on the top of an hill. Taken and garrisoned by the Swedes, anno 1569, and not without great difficulty recovered by the Danes again, anno 1569.

II. SCANIA, or SCHONEN, hath on the East, Blescida, or Blecking; on the West, the Sound, running along the shore hereof for the space of twenty German miles; on the North, Hallandt; on the South, the Baltick, or Oost Zee. The Country of the same nature with Hallandt, as before described; the Character of that pertaining to all the three: this having over and above, as peculiar to it, that the Sea shores are stored with such sholes of Herrings, that sometimes Ships are scarce able with winde and oar to break through them, and row off the Harbour. It is in length 72 miles, 48 in breadth. Chief towns, in which are 1 Lunden, an Archbishops See, the Metropolitan of Den∣mark & Norway, advanced unto that honor by the means and mediation of Ericus the first, who pur∣posely made a journey to Rome to effect that businesse: the Church of Denmark being before that time subject to the Archbishops of Breme. This was about the yeer 1100. It is situate somewhat with∣in the land; but the Cathedrall easily discernible by Mariners as they sail along. The City mean, and were it not for the Cathedrall of no beauty at all. But that indeed affirmed to be a work of much magnificence and Art, especially for the Clock, the Diall, and some outward adjuncts. For in the Diall couriously set out with divers colours, are to be seen distinctly, the year, moneth, week-day, and hour of every day throughout the year; with the Feasts, both moveable and fixed, together with the mo∣tion of the Sun and Moon, and their passage through each degree of the Zodiack Then for the Clock, it is so framed by Artificiall Engines, that whensoever it is to strike, two horse-men encounter one ano∣ther, giving as many blowes apiece, as the Bell sounds hours: and on the opening of a dore, there appears a Theatre, the Virgin Mary on a Throne with Christ in her armes, and the three Kings or Magi (with their severall trains) marching in order, doing humble reverence, and presenting se∣verally their gifts; two Trumpeters sounding all the while to adorne the Pompe of that procession. 2 Malmoge, or Elbogen, (called by both names) at the very Southern point hereof, just opposite to Coppenhagen in Seland, a well traded Port: the birth-place of Gaspar ••artholinus, otherwise called Malmogius Danus, that great Mathematician; supposed to the be Author of the Clock and Dial, before described. 3 Trelleberg, on the north of Elbogen. 4 Landiscron, on the Sea-side, of great strength and consequence. 5 Helsemburg, a mean town, but fortified with an impr••gnable Castle, just oppo∣site to Helsinare, and Croneberg in Selandt, the other of the two keyes which openeth into the Sound. 6 Radneby, a frontire town bordering on Verendia, a Province of Swethland. 7 Christiania, or Chri∣stendorp, a strong piece built by Christiern the fourth, anno 1604. compassed by the Sea, and fortified by Fens and Marshes, thought to be impregnable.

III. BLESCIA or BLECKING, is bounded on the East and South with the Baltick Sea, on the North with Verendia a Province of Swethland; on the West with Scania or Sconen: more mountainous and barren then either, but yet partaking somewhat of the former character, which we had of Hal∣landt. Chief Townes hereof are 1 Vsted, on the mouth of a River falling into the Baltick. 2 Christen∣berg, in Latine Christianopolis, on the borders of Swethland, raised out of the ground by Christiern the fourth, to defend his kingdome on that side, anno 1604. not long after by a warlike stratagem surprised by the Swedes, in the late war betwixt those kingdomes, in the year 1611. destroyed and dispeopled by that Nation, who looked upon it as a dangerous and unpleasing object, but since re∣paired and replenished. 3 Abuys, upon the River which divides the Kingdomes, not far from Christenberg.

The antient Inhabitants hereof were the Gutae and Dauciones, taking up the South parts of this great Peninsula. Meridionalia tenent Gutae & Dauciones, as we finde in Ptolemie Geogr. l. 2. c. 11. which in all probability must be meant of these three Provinces. Of these the Gutes passing over into the Cim∣brick Chersone••e, possessed themselves of the North parts of it, since from them called Juitland. The rest uniting with the people of those many Islands which lye together in the Bay or Gulph Codanus (now the Baltick Sea) took the name of Danes: and not from Dan, I know not what King thereof above a thou∣sand years before the birth of our Saviour. First taken notice of by that name in Jornandes de Rebus Ge∣ti••is, who lived about the time of Justinian the first, about which time, or not long after it is conceived that they made themselves masters of so much of the Cimbrick Chersonese, as had been formerly possessed by the Juites and Angli, whose forsaken or ill-peopled seats they possessed themselves of. After this we hear little of them till the time of Charles the Great, living in a confused estate, sometimes made subject to the Norwegians, sometimes to the Swedes, but alwayes without Law and order, till by their King Godfrey or Gotricu•• they were regulated by Laws, and reduced to an orderly kinde of life, anno 797. About this time they first began to infest the Coasts of England, invaded Friseland with a Fleet of 200 sayl, and had much weakened and indangered the great Empire of France, if the un∣seasonable death of Godfrey, and the quarrels which arose about the succession after his decease, had not kept them off. Their affaires at home being againe well setled, they employed their whole Forces against England, as the weaker Enemy, over which they tyrannised 250 yeares, and reigned 28, under three Kings of that Nation. Outed of that, and the terrour of their name being over, they have been most busied with their neighbours of Sweden and Germanie: improving their estate, but rather by marriages and civill contracts then by force of Armes, with the addition of the king∣dome of Norwey, and the Dukedome of Holstein; their pretentions to, and for a time the possession of the Crown of Sweden, getting them nothing in conclusion but blows and losses. So that we have no more to doe then to summe up a catalogue of the kings hereof, till the uniting of the two Crowns of Denmark and Norwey; leaving the rest that follow to another place.

The KINGS of DENMARK.

• ...A. Ch.
• 797 1 Gotricus the first Legislator of the Danes, and the establisher of their Kingdome, a prudent and valiant Prince.
• 2 Olaus son of Gotricus or Godfrey.
• 3 Henningus son of Olaus.
• 873 4 Siward son to a daughter of Godfrey by the King of Norwey.
• 5 Regnier son of Siward.
• 6 Siward II.
• 7 Ericus or Henricus baptized at Mentz, at the same time with his brother Harald, reco∣vered the kingdom to his house (of which they had been outed by the race of Godfrey.)
• 8 Canutus the son of Ericus the heathenish son of a Christian and pious Father.
• 880 9 Froto the son of Canutus, a professed Christian.
• 886 10 Gormo (our English writers call him Gormund) son of Froto.
• 889 11 Harald the son of Gormo, or Gormond.
• 900 12 Gormo II. son of Harald, an enemie of the Christian Faith.
• 927 13 Harald II. son of Gormo the second, a good Christian.
• 975 14 Sueno or Swain, son of Harald, at first a great Enemy of the Gospell, an Usurper of the throne in his Fathers life time, and a great scourge unto the English. Outed of his Estate by Ericus of Swethland, he received the Gospell, regained his Kingdome, and established Christianity in this kingdome, his war on England still continuing.
• 1010 15 Olaus the eldest son of Swaine, King of Denmark and Norwey.
• 1020 16 Canutus brother of Olaus, the first King of England of the Danes, succeeded his brother in the kingdomes of Denmark and Norwey, to which hee added also the Crowne of Sweden.
• 1037 17 Canutus III. sonne of Canutus the second, the last king of England, of the race of the Danes.
• 18 Magnus son of Olaus King of Norwey.
• ...

• 1051 19 Sueno II.* 1.74 sisters son of Canutus the second, by Vlfo an English Duke.
• 1074 20 Harald III. base son of Sueno the second.
• 21 Canutus IV. another of the base sons of Sueno, murdered at the Altar in the Church of Ottensee in the Isle of Fionia; afterwards canonized a Saint.
• 1088 22 Olaus II. another of the base sons of Swain.
• 1096 23 Ericus II. another of the base sons of Swain, the founder of the Archiepiscopall See of Lunden.
• 1102 24 Harald IV. base son of Henry or Ericus the second.
• 1133 25 Nicolas another of the base sons of Swain.
• 1135 26 Ericus III. another of the base sons of Ericus the second.
• 1140 27 Ericus IV. commonly called the fifth (some of the younger houses being reckoned in) nephew of Ericus the second.
• 1150 28 Sueno III. son of Ericus the third, and Canutus the fifth, Grandchild of Nicolas, both kings: the first raigning in Scandia, the other in Juitland: both dead without issue, Canutus being slain by Sueno, and he by Waldemar.
• 1157 29 Waldemar son of Canutus, the lawfull son of Ericus the second, after the interposition of so many Bastards, succeded at the last in the throne of his Fathers. By his means the Rugians and Vandals imbraced the Gospell.
• 1185 30 Canutus V. sonne of Waldemar.
• 1203 31 Waldemar II. brother of Canutus and Duke of Sleswick.
• 1243 32 Ericus V. called the VII. son of Waldemar the second, slain by the practises and treason of his brother Abel.
• 1251 33 Abel brother of Ericus, slain by the Paisants of Friseland.
• 1252 34 Christopher brother of Abel and Ericus.
• 1260 35 Ericus VI. (VIII) son of Christopher.
• 1287 36 Ericus VII. (IX) younger son of Ericus, supplanted his elder brother Christopher.
• 1327 37 Christopher II. eldest son of Ericuss, first dispossessed of his birth-right by his brother E∣ricus; after whose death, he succeeded in the Crown, by the help of his halfe Brother the Earl of Holst.
• 1334 38 Waldemar III. son of Christopher the second, against whom and his eucrochments, the Sea towns, commonly called the Hanse, did first confederate, and vanquished him in many battels.
• 1376 39 Margaret daughter and heir of Waldemar the third, marryed with Aquin king of Norway, so uniting the Kingdoms: of whom and their successours we shall speak hereafter; when we have tooke a view also of the kingdome of Norwey and the Appendixes thereof.

NORWEY.

NORWEY is bounded on the East with Swethland, from which parted by a perpetuall ridge of rough and wilde mountaines, called the Dofrine hills; on all other parts by the Sea▪ that is to say, by that frozen Sea upon the North, the German Norwegian Ocean upon the West; and on the South with the Danish Sea, interposing betwixt it and the Cimbrick Chersonese; in breadth from Schagen the most northern point of Juitland to Congell, the most Southerly town of Norwey, no lesse then 250 miles.

It is called Norwey, quasi tractus seu via Septentrionalis, from the Northern situation of it; containing in length 1300 miles, in breadth not above halfe so much: inhabited by a people given to hospi∣tality, plain dealing, and abhorring theft. Antiently they were great warriers, and became terri∣ble to all the more Southerne Nations; by whom called Normans, (that is to say Homines Boreales or Northmen, as Willielmus Gemiticensis rightly hath it): being at that time a mixture of all the Northern, Nations together, or of the Norwegians and Swethlanders a part from the Danes whose steps they followed in their frequent or rather continuall Piracies, on the Coasts of England, France, and Ireland. By Helmoldus in the same sense they are called Nordluidi, a name made into Latine, out of the Dutch word Nord, and the French word leiu, signifying men of a Northern place or Nation.

Of the position of it in regard of the Heavens we have spoke already; but more particularly it reacheth from the first Parallel of the twelfth Clime, where the Pole is elevated 58 degrees 26 mi∣nutes, as far as to the 71 degree of latitude. By which accompt the longest day in the Southern point is but 18 houres; whereas at Wardbuys, being situate furthest North of all this Countrey, they have no night for almost three whole moneths together.

The Countrey for the most part rocky, mountainous and barren, full of vast woods, extreme cold, and but ill inhabited. In the best parts thereof if affords little corn; and in the most northern none at all: in so much that the common sort of people are fain to use dryed fish (that which we com∣monly call stock-fish in stead of bread. But the better (that is, the richer sort) buy corn of such Mer∣chants as come to traffick with them. Their chief commodities are stock fish, rich furres, train-oyle, pitch, and tackling for ships, as masts, cables, deal-bords and the like; which the inhabitants exchange

for corn, wine, fruits, beer, and other necessaries for mans life. The Countrey is exceedingly trou∣bled with certain little beasts, which they call ••••mmers. They are about the bignesse of a field mouse, and are by the inhabitants said to drop out of the clouds in tempestuous weather. They devoure like the Locusts, every green thing on the earth; and at a certain time dye all in heaps (as it were) together: and with their stench so poison the air, that the poor people are long after troubled with the Jaundies, and with a giddinesse in the head. But these beasts come not so often to infect the land, as the Whales doe to terrifie and molest the shores, the Western Seas being very deep, and therefore a fit habitation for those great Leviathans: against whose violence and surie, the Mariners and peo∣pel of the Seacoast have found a Remedie, which is by casting out some water intermixed with the oyl of Castor, the smell whereof doth force them to retire immediately. Without this helpe there were no fishing on these Coasts, which is the greatest Staple commodity (besides materials for shipping) which the Countrey yeeldeth.

The Towns here, are exceeding thin, and in them the houses for the most part very poore and miserable, commonly pa••ched up of durt and hurdles, not much unlike our ordinary Cottage houses in the Fen-Countreys. Distributed into five Prefectures or Governments, according to the number of the Castles which command the same. Of these,

1 The first most towards the South is the Castle of BOHVS, to which are subject the townes of 1 Marstrand, seated in a Demi Island begirt with Rocks, of most note for the infinite quantity of be∣rings caught hereabouts. 2 Congel, upon the Sea, a town of Merchandise, opposite to Schagen in Den∣mark. 3 Oddewald.

2 AGGERHVIS, the second of the five Royall Castles, hath under its command the townes of 1 Anslo, or Asloia, on a Bay or Gullet opposite to Juitland, an Episcopall See, and of most esteeme of all the Countrey, by reason of the Courts of Judicature which are therein held. 2 Tonsberg or Koning••∣berg, that is to say, the Kings or the Kingly Mountain, formerly a retiring place of the Kings of Norwey. 3 Fredrichstrad, built by one of the Fredericks, Kings of Danemark. 4 Schin or Schon, remarkable for its Mines of iron and copper. 5 Saltzburg, 6 Hammar the greater, and 7 Hammar the lesse, divided by the interposing of the Bay called Sinus Moesianus, in former times the See of a Bishop, since removed to Astoia, or rather thereunto united in these later times, as many poore Bishopricks bee in Ireland.

3 BEGGER-HVSE is the third Castle of command herein. Subordinate whereunto are 1 Bergen, the principall Town of the countrey, an Episcopall See, and the ordinary residence of the Governour for the Kings of Denmark; situate amongst high mountaines at the bottome of a deep Creek or ar•• of the Ocean called Carmesunt; a noted Port, and much resorted to by Merchants of most foraine Nations; bringing in corn, meat, bread, beer, wine, and Aqua vitae, to supply the naturall wants and defects hereof; and in exchange transporting hence fish, furres, cordage, and other materials for ship∣ping. In which regard accounted formerly one of the four chief staple Townes of the Dutch Mer∣chants of the Hanse: the other three being London in England, Novagrod in Muscovie, and Bruges in Flanders. But of late time this Bergen hath lost most of its trade, removed hence to Wardhuis, neerer un∣to Muscovie: as the great town of Novogrod, by reason of the change of navigation through the Bal∣tick into the Northern passage, hath given way to S. Nicolas; and Bruges was deprived of her traf∣fick by Antwerp, from whence it is removed to Amsterdam. For the Hollanders, by blocking up the ha∣ven, but especially by keeping Bergen ap Zome, have such a command over the river, that no vessell can passe or repasse without their licence. 2 Staffanger; an Episcopall See also, but not else observable.

4 The Castle of TRVND-HEIM, is the fourth, situate in the Town of Trondheim, formerly called Tronden, and in Latine, Ni••rosia, the See of an Archbishop who is the Metropolitan of Norwey. A beautifull City heretofore, but since the subjection of this Countrey unto the Danes, reduced to a Burrough: so called of the River Nider, upon which it is seated, and Rosa the name then of the principall Church; which in time gave place to the Cathedrall, for greatnesse and neatnesse of the fa∣brick all of polished stone, not giving place to any in Europe; about the year 1530 much defaced with fire, which began at the Altar, the damage done by it being estimated at 7000 Crowns. A great summe of money in those times, and so poore a countrey. So that by casting up our reckoning, wee finde in Norwey one Archbishop and four Bishops, that is to say, the Archbishop of Trundheim or Ni∣drosia, the Bishops of Bergen, Anslo, Staffanger and Hammar: Of the same power, jurisdiction, and re∣venue, since the Reformation, as those of Denmark: whereof, and of the first conversion of this people to the Christian Faith, we have spoke already.

5 The fifth and last Castle which commands this contrey is that of WARDHVYS, so cal∣led of the town of Wardhuys, as that is from the Isle Ward, in which it is seated. A small Ca∣stle, and the town in former times but mean and poore, situate in the extreme North point of all this Kingdom: but in those times accounted (as it easily might) for the chief of this Prefecture, and honored in the summer time with the seat and residence of the Governour, retiring more Southwards in the winter, at what time by reason of the extremity of the cold, and long absence of the Sun for

months together (the Town lying within the Artick Circle) it is hardly habitable.* 1.75 But of late times it is much improved both in wealth and building; by reason of the removall of the English trading from Novogrod, near the Baltick Sea, to the Town of St. Nicolas not far hence, drawing by that means the trade of Muscovie and Norwey more neere together. So that now it is not onely use∣full unto the Danes, in regard that it somewhat aweth the neighbouring Lappians, and command∣eth the Natives; for that cause fortified very strongly by King Frederick the second, but made very profitable to him also by the resort of Dutch and English, who must of necessity touch at it (if they make no stay here) in their way to Muscovie. Other Townes in these two last Prefectures are not worth looking after.

And so much for the Continent or mainland of Norwey; let us next look upon the Islands in the Nor∣thern Ocean, which belong unto it.

The ISLANDS in the NORTHERN OCEAN.

The NORTHERN SEA so named from its northern situation, is by some called Mare Scy∣thicum, because it coasted along the shores of Scythia; by Juvenal; called Oceanus glacialis, because often frozen: by Pliny in the same sense Mare Amalchium, the word in the Scythick Language signifying frozen, or congealed; by the Russes or Moscovites, Myrmanskoy More; by the Cimbrians in their tongue, Mari morusa, that is to say, the dead Sea, because of the slownesse of its motion, often clogged with ice; and in the same sense, mare pigrum by Tacitus. This sacitus doth best describe it, from whom take it thus. Trans Suenes Mare aliud pigrum & prope immotum, &c. Beyond the Swedes, there is another Sea, so slow and almost immoveable, that many think it to be the bounds which compasse the whole world. Some are perswaded that the sound of the Sun is heard, as he ariseth out of this sea; and that many shapes of gods are seen, and the beams of his head, Illuc usque (& fama vera) tantum na∣tura, At this sea (the report is credible) is the end of nature and the world. The English were the first of all civill people, who adventured to open and discover the passages of it, under the conduct of Richard Chancellour, arriving by this way in Russia, anno 1553. and tracing out the way with others of that Nation, together with the Flemings, Hollanders, and some townes of the Hanse have since fol∣lowed. Of which more in Muscovie. The principal Islands dispersedin it are Groenland, 2 Iseland, 3 Freez∣land, belonging to the Crown of Norwey, to be surveyed at the present; Nova Zemla, and Sir Hugh Willoughbies Island, appertaining (if to any) to the Knez, or great Duke of Muscovie: of which more hereafter.

1. ISELAND, is situate under the Artick Circle, in length 144 German miles, 65 in breadth▪ 80 called from the aboundance of ice in it and about it, frozen continually for the space of 8 months, and so vehemently chilled with Northern windes, that it yeeldeth neither corn nor trees except Ju∣niper onely: yet there is grasse in such aboundance, that the people are of opinion, that if they doe not sometimes keep their Cattell from feeding, they are in danger to surfeit and dye with fulnesse. Beasts for labour here are both Horses and Oxen; the Oxen and Kine without hornes, but the sheep not so: and they have also here a fine breed of little dogges, knowne amongst us by the name of Iseland dogges, the delight of Ladies; as also white Faulcons, and white Ravens, Eagles with white tailes, with Hares and Beares of the same colour. By reason of their want of corn the people eat stock-fish (as in Norwey) in stead of bread, yet notwithstanding by reason of the benefit of the sea and accesse of strangers, they have all things necessary brought unto them, (even to wood and timber) of which the richer sort make use: giving the Merchant in return, sometimes the flesh of Beeves and Mutton, but ordinarily butter, skinnes, horses, hawkes, brimstone, but fish especially, the staple com∣modity of the countrey. Of which they have such plenty and of so good condition, that a peice of Iseland Ling is counted with us as a fit dish for a Noblemans table.

The people for the most part are of a plain and simple nature, living (as in the Golden Age) on that which nature gives them without help of Art; more then that of making cheese and butter: the mountaines serving them for Townes, and the Rivers for drink, and lodging all under one roof with their horses and oxen. They use neither Physick nor Physitians, yet live so long (and probably the longer for it) that many of them attain to the age of 150 yeares and more. The women are exceeding faire, but they know not how to attire themselves; nor is there any difference in apparrell betwixt the Sexes, so that it is not easie to know one from another. Few of them but have some familiar Spirit to doe them service: and notwithstanding the endeavour of their Ministers to purge them from this impietie, yet it is so graffed in them that they cannot leave it.

It is observable that notwithstanding the cold condition of this Island, yet in many places it is full of heats and fire under the ground: which by the Antiperistasis of the cold air, stopping the pores of the earth, and taking from it the liberty of evaporation, doth burn more vehemently: insomuch that here are three high mountaines, whose tops are alwayes covered with snow, and yet continually burning. The names of them are Hecle, Helge, and La-Croix, but the first the principall; by some called Heclefort, which sometimes casts out fire, sometimes flaming water, then black ashes, and pumice stones in so great aboundance; that it darkeneth the Sun, and makes the countrey for six miles round about to bee uninhabited. Stranger things are not spoken of Aetna, then of these three mountaines: and here the superstitious people have the same opinion which they have in Sicil: that

underneath must needs be hell,* 1.76 and the habitations of the damned. But to judicious men the natu∣rall reason of these flames is plain and obvious, occasioned by those veins of ••rimstone (great quan∣tity whereof they send into ••oraine parts) on which the foundation of the hils is laid: here being many Bathes and fountaines of hot water, which have Sulphure swimming at the toppe.

At the first planting of this Island, the people did not trouble themselves with building Towns, but every one seated himselfe where he thought convenient; dwelling in cels and cavernes digged in the bottome of the rocks. By meanes whereof the inland parts have not many houses: but the sea coasts since the coming of so many strangers to them, begin to be built in many places; the build∣ings for the most part being of timber roofed with flags, with an hole on the sides of the roofe to let in the light. So that we are not to expect many fine townes or Cities: the principall of them which are, being 1 Hal•• in the North, and 2 Schalholt in the southern part; both Bishops Sees, having petty School••s, consisting of 24 scholars a peece, to whom the Latine tongue is taught at the charge of the Bishops. 3 Haffenfordt, an Haven town, where under Tents the Dutch Merchants barter their com∣modities: and 4 Bed••••ede, a Castle, the ordinary residence of the Governour for the Kings of Den∣mark.

It hath been generally conceived that this Island is that Thule, which the Poets so often speak of; as, Tibi serviat ultima Thule, in Virgil; Nec sit terris ultima Thule, in Seneca the Tragedian: nor did there want some reason to perswade them to this opinion; this being indeed the furthest part of the old known world. But greater reasons are against it. For when Solinus saith, multae sunt circa Britanni∣cum insulae, equibus Thule ultima; I hope Thule must be one of the British Isles. And when▪ Tacitus saith of Agricola, in••ulas quas Orcadas vocant domuit, despecta est & Thule; I am sure that Iseland is so far from being kenned at any one of the Orcades, that it is at least eight degrees distant. So that Thule must be sought for in another place, and where that is hath beene shewed already. And as for Iseland it was so farre from being known unto the Antients, that it was hardly known unto those of Norwey, till the yeare 874. when some of the Norwegians driven out of their countrey by Harald the first, who first suppressing the many Petite Kings of the Norwegians, made many of them secke new dwellings, of which some few arrived here: where finding roome enough to plant in, and no great losse (if any) by the change of their dwelling, they invited many of their friends and countreymen to come unto them. Anno 1070 they were converted to the Gospell, by some Preachers sent hither from Adelbert the Archbishop of Breme. By whose perswasion and procurement they founded two Episcopall Sees; ad∣ding thereto in tract of time eight Religious houses: that is to say, the Monasteries of Pingore, Reme∣st••de, Modur, and Monkeni••re, under the Government and jurisdiction of the Bishop of Hallar; and those of Vedey, Pernebar, Kirc••ebar, and Skirde, under the Bishop of Scha••holt. In the year 1260. it was first brought under the Crown of Norwey, following since that the fortunes of it in all changes both of Church and State: made subject with it to the Kings of Denmark: together with it reformed in matters of Religion, according to the confession of Ausbourg: retaining still their Bishops with a limited power, and turning the Revenues of their Monasteries unto other uses, as there they did, according to the will and pleasure of their Lords of Denmark.

II. Southwest of Iseland lies another, and as cold an Isle, commonly called by the name of FREEZELAND, from the continuall Frosts unto which it is subject. By the Latines it is called Frizlandia, to distinguish it from Frisia or Friseland in Germany. Situate under the North frigid zone, but not so much within the Arctick as Iseland is: the longest day here in the height of sum∣mer not exceeding 20 houres: and yet the soyl so cold and barren, that it beareth neither corn, nor srunit; the Inhabitants living most on fish, which as it is their onely food, so is it also their chief commoditie wherewith to entertain or invite the Merchant. And hereof there is such aboundance caught upon their coasts, that they are never without the company of Hansemen, Scots, Hollanders, Danes, and English; by which last so frequented in these later times, that it hath beene called by some the Western England. For quantity it is somewhat bigger then Iseland, but by reason of the bitter air, and the defects above mentioned, very thinly inhabited. The chief Town of it is called Freezeland, by the name of the Island; situate on the Eastern shore of it. Besides which there are some others set down in the maps, as 2 Samescot, 3 Andefort, 4 Sorund; but not much observable. West∣ward hereof, as Zieglerus (and out of him Maginus) telleth us, is a lesse Island called Icaria, giving the name of Marc Icarium to the Sea adjoining: so called (by his mistake or translation of the Fable) from 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the son of Daedal••s a King of Scotland, who did once (but no body knows when) Lord it over these Islands.

III. GROENLAND, so called, as some say, from the greennesse of it in the Summer; as others say, by Antiphrasis, because never greene by reason of the sharpnesse of winter. But the former E∣tym••l••gie is more agreeable to the state of the Countrey. For though it be continually covered with snow, except in June, July, and August, (insomuch that though the people bee alwayes clad with Furres and skinnes, yet they feel no heat) yet in those months it is exceeding fresh and green, and af∣ford's good pasturage. It is situate for the greatest part within the Arctick, between the 65 and 77 degrees of Northern Latitude: so that the longest day in the southern part is 21 houres and an halfe; and in the most northern they have no night for three months and two weeks. The known length of it is affirmed to be 600 miles, and may be much longer then so for ought that any body

knows there being no perfect discovery made of it hitherto,* 1.77 though much frequented by the English, and Hollanders (two great Sea-faring Nations) for the benefit of Whale-fishing, much there in use. Their chief commodities are Fish, white Bears, wilde Deer, and some store of Cattell there bred upon their pastures, but housed for the most part all the Winter: the greatest part of the people dwelling in Caves, and delighting in Negromancy, to which more wilfully addicted then those in Iseland, because lesse acquainted with the Gospell.

Places of most importance in it are 1 Saint Thomas, (in which there is a Monastery of Dominion Friers) seated in the north-east part of the Iland; concerning which Mereator speaks of one thing which is very observable: relating, that it is not farre from a flaming, or burning mountain, seated upon hot scalding springs, conveyed by pipes of stone into the M••nastery, and serving both as a stove to warm them, and for a fire to boyle their Victuals. The walls of the Monastery built of Pumice stones cast out of that Mountain, which being tempered with the water of those burning springs, doth make a glutinous substance serving in stead of Lime, and as long dura∣ble. The Gardens of the Convent, in regard of this heat, flourish all the yeer with hearbs, and sweet-smelling flowers: and the adjoyning Sea for the same reason being never frozen, affords good plenty of Fish and Fowl the whole year about, not onely for the Monkes, but the neighbouring Ilanders: so farre, and to this purpose he. The second Towne of note, is Ilva, not farre from this Monastery: And 3 Munderpre, on the South-east point. Others, as in a Country not well discovered, we have little notice of; though it be neer 300 yeere•• since Nicolas Zeni, a Venetian, cast by tempest on the coast of Freeze-land, and by the King thereof employed upon new discoveries, anno 1380. first made it known to us of Europe; immediately on that discovery possessed by the NORWEGIANS, and made a Member of that Crown.

As for the NORWEGIANS themselves, now their fellow-subjects, they were first known in the time of Ptolemy, by the name of Chedini, possessing then the western parts of Scandia. Uniting with their neighbours, both Danes and Swethlanders, they became better known in the flourishing times of the French Empire, by the name of Normans, first called 10 by Egi••••ha∣tus in his History of the life of Charles the Great, infesting then the Sea-coasts of France, and Belgium. Under this name they fell so heavily on the French, especially in the times of Charles the Simple; that they extorted from him that goodly Country, since of them called Normandy; conferred on Rollo, first Duke thereof, anno 912. whose successours much increased their glory by the conquest of England, as some private adventurers of them did by the con∣quest of the Kingdomes of Naples, Sicil, and Antioch. Afterwards setling on their own bot∣tome, every one of these northern nations acting by it self, they were called Norwegians: sometimes, as formerly commanding over all three Kingdomes, subject successively to each; but most an end governed by their own Kings, till their finall subjugation by the Danes. And as a Nation acting solely, and by it self, they subdued Ireland, under the conduct of Turgesius, who tyrannized there for a time; as also all the Orcades, and the Ile of Man, sold, or surrendred by them, upon good conditions to the English and Scots, who by those titles still possesse them. The Catalogue of their Kings, leaving out all those of the darker times (parallel to our Brute, and the first Scottish Fergus) as meerly fabulous, we will begin with King Suibdagerus, who was King of all the three Kingdomes; and at his death divided them again amongst his three sons; whose successours Munster thus reckoned.

The KINGS of NORWAY.

• 1 Suibdagerus.
• 2 Haddingus.
• 3 Hetharius.
• 4 Collerus.
• 5 Frogerus.
• 6 Gotarus.
• 7 Rotherus.
• 8 Helga.
• 9 Hasmunus.
• 10 Reginaldus.
• 11 Gumaraus.
• 12 Osmundus.
• 13 Olaus.
• 14 Osmundus II. not long after whose time, anno scil. 800. the Normans began their irruptions.
• 15 Aquinus.
• 16 Haraldus.
• 17 Olaus II.
• 18 Sueno, King of Danemark by Birth, and of Norway by Conquest.
• 19 Olaus III. son of Swaine, or Sueno, suc∣ceeded in the Realmes of Denmark and Norway; Canutus his younger brother being King of England. In this Kings time the Norwegians first received the Gospell.
• 20 Canutus, King of England, succeeded his brother Olaus in the Kingdomes of Denmark and Norway, to which he also added the Crown of Sweden.
• ...

• 21 Sueno II. by whom the Kingdome was restored to the Norwegians.
• 22 Canutus II.
• 23 Magnus.
• 24 Harald II.
• 25 Magnus II. King of Sweden, and Norway.
• 1326 26 Magnus III. King of Sweden, and Norway, intending the Crown of Sweden for Ericus his eldest sonne, conferred that of Norway on Haquin, or Aquinus his second sonne.
• 1359 27 Aquinus, King of Norway, younger sonne of Magnus the third, married with Margaret, eldest daughter of Waldemar the third, King of Denmark; so uniting the Kingdomes. And though Olaus the onely son of this bed died young, without any issue; yet the Danes having once got footing in Norway, so assured themselves of it, that they have ever since pos∣sessed it as a subject Kingome: keeping the Natives so poor and low, that they are not able to as∣sert their former liberties; and not permitting them to use any shipping, so much as for transpor∣ting their own commodities, for fear they should grow wealthy and strong at Sea. Besides, the strong Garrisons maintained in most parts of the Country, keep it in such an absolute awe, that they dare not stir against the Danes, if their stomachs served them. So that now Norway being made subject to the Crown of Denmark, or both made fellow-subjects to the same King: we must next look upon these Kings, not as Kings of each, distinct and separate from the other; but as they are in fact and title.

The KINGS of DENMARK, and NORWAY.

• 1376 1 Haquin, or Aquinus, King of Denmark, and Norway; of this last by descent, of the other by marriage.
• 1380 2 Olaus, son of Aquinus and Margaret.
• 1383 3 Margaret, wife of Aquinus, mother of Olaus, and daughter of Waldemar the third, after the death of her sonne, (in whose time she governed as his Guardian) took upon her the Kingdome in her own right; not onely keeping Norway in the state she found it, but adding unto Denmark the Crown of Sweden, won by the vanquish∣ment of Albert, Duke of Mecklenburg, then King thereof. A gallant and magnanimous Lady, the Semiramis of Germany.
• 1411 4 Ericus, Duke of Pomeren, and Knight of the Garter, sonne of the Lady Mary, Dut∣chesse of Pomeren, daughter of Ingelburgis, the sister of Margaret; by whom adopted for her Heir; succeeded after her decease in all the three Kingdomes; outed of all before his death, by a strong Faction made against him, and his estates confer∣red on
• 1439 5 Christopher, Count Palatine of the Rhene, and Duke of Bavaria, (but in title onely) the sonne of Margaret, sister of Ericus, chosen by the joynt consent of all the States of these Kingdomes. After whose death, (without issue) the Danes considering the great advantage they had gotten by the addition of Norway; pitched upon Adolphus, Duke of Sleswick, and Earl of Holst, for the next successour; that they might get in those Estates to their Kingdome also. Who excusing himself, by reason of his Age, and want of Children, commended to them Christiern, Earl of Oldenburg, his kinsman, and next heir, who was chose according.
• 1448 6 Christiern, Earl of Oldenburg, upon the commendation of his Uncle Adolfus, chosen King of Danemark, and Norway, succeeded his said Uncle in the Estates of Holst, and Sleswick, continuing since united unto that Crown; and added also thereunto by conquest, the Kingdome of Sweden.
• 1482 7 John, son of Christiern, succeeded in all three Kingdomes; Knight of the Order of the Garter.
• 1514 8 Christiern II. son of John, King of Denmark, Norway, and Sweden, which last he held un∣der with great cruelty; hated, by reason of his Tyranny towards all sorts of peo∣ple, and outed of his Kingdomes by his Uncle Frederick, anno 1522. by whom at last taken, and kept in prison till he dyed, anno 1559.
• 1523 9 Frederick, brother of John, and Uncle of Christiern the second, chosen King of Den∣mark, and Norway, on the abdication of his Nephew, reformed Religion in both Kingdomes, according to the Confession of Ausbourg.
• 1535 10 Christiern III. suppressed with great trouble the party formed against him in behalf of Christiern the second, perfected the Reformation begun in the time of his Father, and was a great Benefactour to the University of Copenhagen.
• 1559 11 Frederick II. sonne of Christiern the third, subdued Ditmarsh, before unconquered by the

• ... Danes, or the Earls of Holst, and added it unto that Dukedome, both being uni∣ted to that Crown, though held of the Empire; Knight of the Garter.
• 1588 12 Christien IV. sonne of Frederick the second, brother of Anne Queen of Great Bri∣tain, and Knight of the Garter; engaging in a warre against the Emperour Fer∣dinand the second for the liberty of Germany, was suddenly beat out of all the Cimbrick Chersonese by the prevailing Imperialists; but compounded the businesse upon very good termes, and was restored to all his own; Knight of the Gatter.
• 1648 13 Frederick, son of Christiern the fourth, his elder brethren being all dead without issue, succeeded in the Crowns of Denmark, and Norway.

Having thus mustered up the Kings of these severall Kingdomes, taken distinctly, and conjunct, we must next look upon the way of their coming to their Regall throne, their forme of Govern∣ment, together with the powerablenesse and revenues incident unto it. As for the manner of their coming to the Regall Throne, the Danes pretend the Kingdome to be Elective, and not Hereditary: yet so as they have alwayes set the eldest sonne on the throne of his Father; unlesse some extraordinary occasion have disposed it otherwise. But they that look upon their Stories in the former times can see no such matter: the Kingdome going generally in the way of Succession, unlesse by Faction, or some popular and powerfull Pretender hath interloped, as oftentimes hath hapned in such other Estates, as are hereditary, meerly without claim, or colour of Election. 'Tis true, that the male issue ••ailing in Olaus, the son of Margaret, and the Princes which pretended by the Females after her de∣cease, not being of sufficient power to assert their titles: the Kingdome was transferred to the house of Oldenburg, who held it on no other ground then by that of election. Which being an ex∣traordinary case, is to make no Precedent, though seconded by the outing of King Christiern the se∣cond, and the advancement of Frederick unto that Estate: being acts of violence and force, and justified onely by the false Topick of successe. But whosoever lost by the hand, the Danes got well by it; King Frederick taking up the Crown upon such conditions as have made him and his succes∣sours little more then T••tulary. For he was fain to swear at his Coronation, that he would put none of the Nobility to death, or banishment, but by the judgement of the Senate; that the great men should have power of Life and Death over their Tenants, or Vassals; that no Appeal should lie from them to the Kings Tribunall, nor the King be partaker of the Confiscations; nor finally, advance any to Commands and Honours, but by consent of his Great Councell. Which Oath being also taken by his Successours, made Bodinus say, Non tam re ipsa quam appellatione Reges esse; that they were onely Kings in Title, but not Kings indeed. Yet in regard that the Nobility (so they call their Gentry) have but small Estates, none of them above the degree of Knights, (except onely the Prin∣ces of the Blood) and that degree conferred by the King alone, it is not often found that they have dared to crosse, or oppose their King, but when some of the Royall Family (out of private ends) have concurred with them in it: as in the case of Christiern the second deposed by the people, but those people headed, and set on by his Uncle Frederick, who had an eye upon the Crown.

As for the Senate, or Great Councell spoken of before, it consists wholly of men chosen out of the Nobility, (who are to prove their Gentry by a long descent) seldome exceeding the number of 28. to each of which, there is allowed a convenient Salary, with some fair Castle in the Country for his retirements during his being of that bodie: his whole estate being freed also for that time from all publick payments. Without their counsell and advice, the King is neither to determine of Peace or War, or to enter into any new Leagues, or Confederacies, nor impose any Tax upon the Sub∣ject: and unto them, and the King joyntly, is the last Appeal: such being the constitution of this Estate, that all Causes and Controversies are first decided in the Prefecture or Heret (184 in number) where they first arise; from whence it is Iswfull to appeal to the Judge of the Province, from him to the Chancellour of the Kingdome, and finally to the King and Councell. By the Lawes of Waldemar the first who first reduced the Lawes into set form, and writing, the Bishops were to sit with this Councell in all causes of moment: discharged from that employment by King Christiern the third, by whom it also was ordained, that the Clergy should not sell any of the Church-lands without leave of the King.

The Forces which this King or Kingdome are to raise, may best be seen by some of their particular undertakings: those specially of Christiern the second, who at the request of Henry the second of France, sent a Navy of an hundred sail into Scotland against the English, and therein no fewer then 10000 Souldiers; and of Frederick then Duke of Holst, who in hi•• war against this Christiern, (whose removall from the Crown he had then projected) brought 80000 men into the field, to make good his quarrell. And questionlesse, considering the many Po••ts and Ilands that this Crown is Master of both within the Baltick, and without, it cannot be but he may suddenly raise a strong power at Sea: And then considering that each of the Nobility which are here numerous enough, is bound to find•• a certain number of Horse upon all occasions; as are those also who hold lands of the Kings which the Danes call Verle••ninge; it will accordingly be concluded that they are able to make good Levies for a sudden service, especially in defence of their own dominions.

The Revenue of this King consisteth principally in the great impost, laid upon all ships which passe through the Sound: the greatnesse whereof may easily be conjectured at by the multitude of ships which of necessity must passe by it in the trade of the Baltick, though of late somwhat lessened of what it was, since the English found ••ut, and frequented the Northern passage into Muscovia. There are

also some Crown-lands; and a great yearly Tell made of the Catell, which passe into Germany; as also of the fish transported into other Countries. And yet it is conceived that the Treasures of this King are not very great, partly because there is no other important commodity, but fish, to draw Merchants thither: and partly that there is not any one Town of any great Traffick in all his Realmes for the entertaining of commerce.

The chief Order of Knighthood in it, is that of the Elephant, instituted by Frederick the second, Their bad••e, a Collar powdred with Elephants towred, supporting the Kings Armes, and having at the end the picture of the Virgin Mary.

The Armes hereof are Quarterly, 1 Or, three Lyons passant Vert, crowned of the first, for the Kingdome of Denmark: and secondly Gules, a Lyon Rampant Or, Crowned and Armed of the first, in his pawes a Dansk hatchet Argent, for the Kingdome of Norway. What Armes belong to him as Duke of Holst, and Sleswick, I am yet to seek.

There are in Denmark Archbishops 2. Bishops 13. Universities 2. Viz. Copenhagen. Sore.

And so much for the Kingdome of DENMARK.

OF SWETHLAND.

SWETHLAND is bounded on the East with Muscovie, on the West with the Dofrine hils which divide it from Norway; on the North with the great Frozen Ocean, spoken of before; on the South with Denmark, Liefland, and the Baltick Sea. So called from the Sueci, Suethans, or Su••thidi, and the word Land added for a termination; of which more hereafter.

It is in length from Stockholm unto the borders of Lapland, above a 1000 Italian miles; and in breadth from Stockholm, lying on the Bodner Sea, to the borders of Denmark, about twenty good dayes journey on horse-back: insomuch as they which have travelled the length and breadth of it on this side of Lapland and the Gulf, account it little lesse then all Italy and France together: but taking in Lapland, and the Provinces on the other side of the Gulf, bigger then both by the quantity of 900 miles.

The situation of it in regard of the heavenly bodies, is the same with Norway, under the same Pa∣rallels and Degrees; but of so different a temper, both for soil and air, as if disposed of under seve∣verall and long distant Climes. For the Aire here is very pure, but not so sharp, and insupportable, as it is in Norway: though in some places where the Moores and Waters setle for want of care to open and cleanse the water-courses, they have great fogges and mists which doe somewhat putrefie it: And for the soil; it is more fertile then any of the other Northern Provinces: so that besides those necessa∣ries which they keep for themselves, they usually transport into other Countries store of Malt and Barley; together with great quantities of Brasse, Lead, Steel, Copper, Iron, the hides of Goats, Bucks, Oxen, and costly surres. They have also some Mines of Silver not mixt with any other me∣tall▪ plenty of fish in their Lakes and Rivers; abundance of Pine-trees, Firre, Oaks, both for ships and houses; yeilding besides, among the woods, good store of Ta••re, and Honey, and some other necessaries. But hereof we shall speak more punctually in the severall Provinces.

The principall mountains of this Country are the Dofrine hils, a vast and continuall ridge of mountaines which divide it from Norway. And though they want not Rivers fit for common uses; yet partly by reason of their great frosts and flakes of Ice, partly by reason of the falling of trees which lie crosse their Channels; they have not many Navigable, or of any great fame. The principall of such as be, are 1 Meler, at the mouth whereof stands the City of Stockholm: 2 Lusen, 3 Dalecarlie, giving name to the Province so called, or as denominated from it. And of the Lakes, whereof here are exceeding many, that of most note is the lake of Werett which receiving it into 24 Rivers dis∣burdneth it self at one mouth into the Baltick, with such noise and fury, that they call it commonly the Devils head.

The people are naturally strong and active, provident, patient, and industrious; hospitable towards strangers, whom they entertain with great humanity: so healthy, that if they doe not shorten their dayes by excesse and riot, they live commonly to 140 years of age; and so laborious, that a Begger is not seen amongst them: exceeding apt to learn as well Tongues and Sciences, as the Arts Mechanicall:

every man in a manner being his own Artificer,* 1.78 without imploying Smith, Mason, Carpenter, or any of other manuall trades: very valiant both on foot and horse back, which their long wars against the Danes, and their late wars in Germany, have given good proof of. Their women are discreet and mo∣dest, free from that intemperance which these Northern parts are subject to. Both sexes use a corrupt ••utch, common to all three Northerne kingdoms: except in Finland, and the Provinces on the other side of the Bodner sea, where they partake somewhat of the Muscovite or Russian lan∣guage.

The Christian Religion was first planted amongst them by the care and diligence of Ansgarius Arch∣bishop of Br••me, the Apostle general of the North; corrupt with Popish superstitions, it was reformed, accor∣ding to the Augustane Confession, in the time of Gustavus Ericus, the first of the present Royall familie; sol∣licited thereunto by one Petre Ne••icius a Lutheran Divine, and Lawrence the Archdeacon of Strengnes; but chiefly moved (as others say) by a desire to appropriate to himselfe the goods of the Church. And this appeares to have had some strong influence upon him in it, in that he presently seised upon what he pleased; and made a Law that Bishops should enjoy no more then the King thought fit: yet having pretty well lessened their ••evenues, he was content they should remain as formerly both in power and number, reserving to himselfe and his successours the nomination of the persons; but so as the appro∣bation of the Clergy (in a kinde of election) doth usually goe along with the Kings appoint∣ment.

The Bishops are in number seven, that is to say, 1 of Lin••open, containing in his Diocese 226 Pa∣rishes; 2 of Vexime, under whom are 210. 3 of Scara, ruling over the same number of Churches; 4 of Strengnes, under whom are an hundred onely; 5 of Aboe, the greatest for extent of all, as com∣prehending under it 500 Parishes; 6 of Wiburg, and 7 of Habsey, whose Dioceses for the most part lye out of the bounds of Sweden, in Muscovie, Livonia, and some other of the out parts of Poland: all of them under the Archbishop of Vpsal, as their Metropolitan, whose Diocese extending into Lap∣land and Finmarch, containeth 171 Parish Churches. By which accompt there are in all the king∣dome of Swethland, but 1417 Parishes; but many of them of a thousand or eight hundred families: the people being dispersed in Forrests and other places, where they have store of timber to build them houses, and store of pasturage for their Cattell; which is the reason why they have not so many great townes, nor so well inhabited, as is usuall in far lesser Countries: As for the Authority of these Bishops, they still retaine their voice in Parliament, and with them so many of the inferiour Clergie, as are from every Socken, (a certain number of Parishes like our Rurall Deaneries) deputed to appeare there in the name of the Church: the affaires whereof the Bishops do direct and order aswell in as out of pub∣lick meetings, according to the Ecclesiasticall Constitutions formerly established; and if any great occasion be, they may either advise with their Consistorials, or call a Diocesan Synod, (as they thinke most fit) and therein make such Lawes and Canons, as they conceive to be most proper for their owne edification.

The whole kingdom is divided into two parts, the one lying on the East, the other on the West side of the Bay or Gulf or Bodner, called Sinus Bodicus in Latine, being a large and spacious branch of the Baltick Sea extending from the most southernly point of Gothland as farre as to Lapland on the north. According to which division we have the Provinces of 1 Gothland and 2 Sweden, lying on the West side of the Gulfe; 3 Lapland, shutting it up upon the North, 4 Bodia or Bodden, and 5 Finland, on the East side thereof; and 6 the Swedish Islands, where it mingleth with the rest of the Baltick.

1. GOTHLAND.

GOTHLAND, is bounded on the East with the Bodner Sea, on the West with the Mountains which divide it from Norwey, and so much of Denmark as lies in the same continent with it; on the North with Sweden; on the south with the sea Baltick. So called either from the Gothes, whose origi∣nall Countrey it is commonly affirmed to be; or quasi goot landt, from the goodnesse and fertility of the soyl (G••ot landia, quae Germanice Terra bona sonat (as Maginus out of Munster hath it) the soyl•• being very fruitfull for corne and cattell, affording plenty of Mines, with great store of fish, and generally a better conditioned Countrey then any of the rest of these Northern Re∣gions.

It is divided commonly into Ostrogoth, or East Gothland; Westergoth, divided from the former by the great lake of Wer••t spoken of before; and South Gothland, subdivided into Smalandia, Tuiscia, and Verendia. Chief townes whereof in Ostrogoth, are 1 Lincopen, a Bishops See; 2 Lodus••, adorned with a very fair Haven: in Westergoth, 3 Scara on the lake Weret, a Bishops See also; 4 Elseburg on the We∣stern sea, betwixt Denmark and Norwey; a place of consequence; and flankerd with two very strong Castles in the parts adjoining, the one called Croneberg, and the other Goldberg. 5 Tragualle, remark∣able for iron workes, occasioned by the mines adjoining. And finally in South Gothland, there is 6 Vexim, or V••xio, another of the Episcopall Sees: 7 Walburg, a reasonable fair Town, with a strong Castle. 8 Rottenby, and 9 Elch••lm in Verendia, neer the confines of Denmark, 10 Colmar, a noted and well traded Port on the Baltick Sea, beautified with a Castle not inferiour to that of Millain; and so well fortified throughout, that at the taking of it by Christiern the fourth of Denmark, anno 1611▪ there were found mounted on the Workes 108 brasse peeces of Ordinance, six

men of war to guard the Haven,* 1.79 with all manner of Ammunition in proportion to them.

The first Inhabitants of these south parts of Scandia, are commonly affirmed to have beene the GOTHES, whom Jornandes in his Book de Rebus G••ticis, makes to have issued out of this countrey, and to plant themselves on the north bankes of the Ister, nere the Euxine sea, some time before the Trojan war: ascribing to them whatsoever is reported in old writers of the antient Scythians, as their encounter with Vexoris or Sesostris the King of Egypt, the Act and achievements of the Amazons, their congresse with Alexander the Great in his Persian war, and the like to these. In which Jornandes be∣ing himself a Goth, is no more to be credited, then Geofrie of Monmouth a Welchman, in the storie of Brute and his successours, to whom he doth ascribe the taking and sack of Rome under the conduct of Brennus, whom he makes to be the brother of Belinus a King of Britain. Most probable it is that they were originally a Dutch or German people, part of the great Nation of the Suevi, called by Ta∣citus the Gothones, inhabiting in his time (as it is conceived) in the land of Prussia. Who finding their own countrey too narrow for them might passe over the Baltick into the next adjoining Regi∣ons: and not well liking that cold clime might afterwards in some good numbers goe to seek new dwellings, and at left seat themselves on the bankes of Ister, where Jornandes found them. That they were Dutch originally, besides the generall name of the Gothones or Gothes, and those of Ostro∣gothes, and Wisigothes, into which they were afterwards divided; the particular names of Alaric, Theodorick, Riccared, (the names of their Kings and Captains) seem to me to evidence. That they were once seated in this Countrie doth appeare as plainly 1 by the name of Gothland here still remaining; 2 by the title of Rex Gothorum, which the Kings of Swethland keep in the Royall style; and 3 by some inscriptions in antient unknown Characters engraven on the rocks neere Scara in the Continent, and Wisby in the Isle of Gothland, supposed by learned men to be some monument of that people. And finally that their fixt dwellings, when first known by this name amongst the Romans, was on the north side of the Ister; is evident by the testimony of all antient Writers, from the time of An∣tonius Caracalla, with whom they had some tumultuarie skirmishes in his way towards Persia; till their violent irruption into Italie and the Western Provinces: most famous in this intervall for a great fight with Decius the Roman Emperour, whom they overcame and slew in battell, anno 253. In the time of Valens and Volentinian the Roman Emperours a quarrell being grown amongst them, managed by Phritigernes and Athanaricus the leaders of the opposite factions, Phritigernes over throwne in fight 〈◊〉〈◊〉 recourse to Valens, from whom he received such succours, that giving his adversary another day it, he obtained the victory. Whereupon Phritige••nes and his partie received the Gospell, but in∣termixt and corrupt with the leaven of Arianism, by the practise of Valens, who sent them none but A∣rian teachers, to whom and their faction in the Church, he was wholly addicted. Afterwards the whole Nation being driven over the Ister by the barbarous Huns, they obtained of Valens the out parts of Thrace for an habitation, on condition they should serve under the pay of the Emperour, and become Christians: the cause that Arianism overspread the whole Nation generally, which had before infected but one partie onely. Vlphilas a devout and learned man, was their first Bishop; who for their bet∣ter edification in the way of godlinesse, invented the Gothick Characters, and translated the Scriptures in∣to that language: in the studie whereof they so well profited, that many of them in the time of their first conversion, suffered death for it at the hands of Athanaricus, and were counted Martyrs. Burdned by Valens, and denyed their accustomed pay, they harasse and depopulate the rest of Thrace, march∣ing towards Constantinople: en countred in the way by Valens, whom they overcame, and killed, af∣ter all his favours. Vanquished by Theodosius the succeeding Emperour in many battels, they became good neighbours, inlarging their bounds with his leave and license as far as Pannonia, and grown into such estimation with him that Ricimir and Franita, two of that Nation, did obtaine the Consul∣ship: not to say any thing of that exorbitant power and favour which Gainas had attained unto in the Court it selfe. Made insolent by so great honours, and apt to pick quarrels with their Patrons, they invaded Italy in two great bodies, consisting of no fewer then 200000 fighting men: the first whereof under the conduct of Rhadaguisus, was discomfited and cut in pieces by Stilico Lieutenant to Honorius the Western Emperour, at Fesulae in the straits of the Appennone: the other by his treachery permitted to passe, sacked Rome, and subdued the most part of Italy, under the leading of Alaricus. He dying immediately after this great victory, left the fruits of it to his son Athaulfus, who marry∣ing with Golla Placidia, the Emperours sister, relinquished Italy, and had all Gaul Narbonnoise, and a great part of Hispania Tarraconensis assigned unto him: where he erected the kingdome of the Wisi-Gothes, or Western Gothes, possessed of Spain and Tingitana, for the space of 300 years, and upward, when they lost that kingdome to the Moores, as hath there been said. In the meane time the Gothes which were left in their owne countries, distinguished from these by the name of Ostro-Gothes by rea∣son of their more Eastern situation, kept themselves in quiet, first subdued by the Huns, and when by Wilamer, freed from that subjection, not intermedling or attempting any thing against the Em∣pire, till called by Zeno Emperour of Constantinople into Italie, against Odoacer and the Heruli, who had then subdued it. Which action they managed with so much prudence and good fortune by their King Theodorick, that they vanquished Odoacer, possessed Italie, and held it above 60 yeares, when broken in many set battels by Belisarius and Narses, Lieutenants for the Emperour Justinian, their Kingdome and name there came unto an end.

As for the Kings of the Gothes, we have a succession of them in Jornandes, from Berig, who first conducted them out of Scandia towards the East, till the going of Theodorick into Italie: but made

up with so little probalitie,* 1.80 that I dare give no more credit to it then to the stories of Brute, Dan, ••ergus, or the Lady Scota Ph••raohs daughter. Such of whom there is any certaine knowledge and succession are these few that follow.

The KINGS of the GOTHES.

• 344 1 Athanaricus king of the Gothes, in the time of Constantius and Constans the sons of Constan∣tine the Great.
• 357 2 Alaricus, the first of that name in the time of Constantius.
• 3 Phritigernes King of the Gothes in the time of Valens, the first Christian Prince among the Gothes.
• 370 4 Athanaricus II. in the time of the Emperours Valens, Gratian and Valentinian the second, under whom the Gothes were first setled on this side of the Ister.
• 379 5 Rhadaguisus, who in the time of Honorius, first led the Gothes into Italie, slain at the bat∣tell of Fesulae.
• 410 6 Alaricus II. who pursuing the war of Italy, sacked Rome, subdued Naples, and the most of Italy.
• 412 7 Athaulfus the son of Alarick the second, who first erected the Kingdom of the Wisigothes in Gaul and Spain, continuing there for the space of 300 yeares and upwards: the present Kings of Spain coming from this stock.
• 417 8 Athalaricus King of the Gothes remaining in the East, at the departure of Rhadaguise and Alaricus distinguished from their plantations by the name of Ostrogothes: vanquished by Attila, they became subject to the Huns, in the time of Theodosius the second, and Valentinian the third, Emperour of the East and West.
• 9 Wilamir, one of the bloud Royall of the Gothes, taking advantage of some quarrels a∣mongst the sons of Attila, shooke off that yoke, and recovered the kingdom of the Gothes; in the time of the Emperour Marcianus.
• 10 Theodomir son of Winithar, and brother of Wilamir in the time of Leo Emperour of Constantinople.
• 11 Theodorick son of Theodomir, kept at Constantinople in his youth as a Pledge or Hostage 〈◊〉〈◊〉 for his Father, where he was instructed in all the Greeke and Roman learning, are made the adopted son (as is said by Sealiger) of the Emperour Zeno: by whom hee was sent into Italy against Odoacer and the Heruli erecting there the kingdome of the Ostrogothes, which continued till the reign of Justinian, when destroyed by Belisarius and Narses as before is said•• the name of Gothes in Italy being thus extinct, but their bloud intermixt with the best Italian. The summe of their whole story, for varieties sake take thus out of Du Bartas.

The warlike Goth which whilom issued forth From the cold frozen Islands of the North, Incamp'd by Vistula, but th' Air almost Being there as cold as in the Baltick coast, He with victorious Armes Sclavonia gaines, The Transilvanian and Valachian plaines. Then flies to Thracia, and then leaving Greeks, Greedy of spoile, foure times he bravely seeks To pluck from Rome, then Mars his Minion, The plumes which she from all the world had won: Guided by Rhadaguise, and Alarick, Bold Vindimarus and Theodorick. Thence flies to France; from whence expulst, his Legions Rest ever since upon the Spanish Regions.

The Armes of these Kings are said to have been Or, three Ravens with displayed wings Purple, membred Gules. And let this suffice for the Originall, successes, and finall period of the Gothes; re∣served by me unto this place, because most commonly conceived to be their originall countrey; at least the place out of which they issued, when they first moved towards the East to seeke new dwellings.

SWEDEN.

SWEDEN is bounded on the East with the Bodner Sea, on the West with the Dofrine hils, which part it from Norwey; on the North with Lapland, on the South with Gotland. So called from the Suethaus or Su••thidi, the old Inhabitants hereof, of whom more anon. A countrey sufficiently fruitfull, but for the goodnesse of the soil inferiour to Gothland, and not so well planted or inha∣bited as that is, by reason of the vast Woods which they will not suffer to be destroyed, and the

greatnesse of some mar••••hes hitherto undrained:* 1.81 but might be made as rich and fertile, it the people would, as appeareth by that plenty of corn growing amongst the Woods, though much hindered by their shade and thicknesse both from Sunne and raine. But for the character of this Countrey we had it formerly, when we spake of Swethland in the generall; relating specially to this as the prin∣cipall part.

And as the largest and principall part of this great body it containes in it many Provinces, and subdivisions, as namely 1 Vpland, 2 Snderman, 3 Noricia, 4 Westman, 5 Dalecarle, 6 Wermelund, 7 Cop∣perdale, 8 Gestricia, 9 Helsingen, 10 Middelphat, 11 Angerman, bordering on Lapland, the furthest of these Provinces towards the North. Many of which have no Townes or Cities of any greatnesse or beauty, the people living thin, and scattered, where they have wood for building, pasturage for their Beasts, and elbow roome enough for themselves and their Cattell. Of these the principall are 1 Vpsal, an Archbishops See, and an Vniversitie, situate not far from the Bay of Bodner: beautified with a large Cathedrall, wherein many of the antient Kings of Swethland are interred. From this City the Countrey hereabouts is styled Archiepiscopatus Vpsalensis. 2 Holm, by the Inhabitants called Stock∣holm, by the Russians Stecolne, the Royall seat of the Kings, a noted and well traded Port, and the chief of the kingdome: exceeding strong both by Art and Nature, as being situate in the Marishes like Venice, at the mouth of the Lake, or River of Meler, the passage to it out of the Bay, being very narrow and by consequence easily defended, and yet so deep withall, that the greatest ships of bur∣den may saile up to the City: the Port within the Strait being so safe and capacious, that it is able to receive at one time 300 sail, which usually ride there without any Anchour. The Castle of this City is conceived to be one of the strongest holds in the world, fortified for the more assurance of it with 400 brasse peeces, many of which are double Canons. 3 Nicopen, a Sea town on the same Bay also. These three are in that part hereof which is called Vpland. Then there is 4 Strengnes, an Episcopall See; and 5 Telge, on the lake of Meler, in the Province of Suderman; the title and estate of Charles father of Gustavus Adolphus late King of Sweden, before his getting of the Crown cal∣led Duke of Suderman. Next in the Province of Westman, there are 6 Arbogen, on the West side of the said Lake of Meler; and 7 Arose, rich in silver mines; out of which are made the best Dollars of Sweden: the mines here being so rich and profitable, that out of every fifteen pound weight of silver, the workmen draw a pound weight of gold. 8 Helsinge, upon the Bay of Bodner in the Province of Hel∣singen, taking name from hence. 9 Ozebo, or Ourbou, a strong piece in Nerisia; and 10 Lesinger, on the Bay of Bodner, one of the furthest North of Sweden, distinctly and specially so called.

LAPLAND.

LAPLAND, the most Northern part of all Scandia, hath on the East Russia, on the West the Province or Prefecture of Wardhuys, in the kingdome of Norwey; on the North the main frozen Ocean, and on the South Bodia or Bodden on both sides of the Bay so called.

It is named thus originally from the Lappi or Lappones, the Inhabitants of it; as they are from their blockish behaviour; the word Lappon signifying the same with ineptus or insulsus in Latine, for such they are: rude, barbarous, and without the knowledge of Arts or Letters, as also without corn and houses, or any certain habitations, (except onely in Finmarch) feeding for the most part on fish, and the flesh of wild beasts, with the skins whereof sowed together they hide their naked∣nesse. Generally they are meer Idolaters, giving divine honour all day following to that living creature whatsoever it be, which they see at their first setting out in the morning: great Sorcerers, and abhor∣ring the sight of strangers, whom till of late they used to flee from, at their first approach; but within few yeares past beginning to be more sociable and familiar. In a word, they are the true descendants of the Antient Finni (possessed in old times of all that tract which lyeth betweene the Bay of Finland and the Frozen Ocean) whose naturall rudenesse and barbaritie, unmixt with the con∣ditions of more civill people, they doe still retain.

It is divided into the Eastern and the Western Lapland. The former appertaining to the Knez or Great Duke of Muscovie, by which people the Inhabitants are called Dikiloppi, or the wild Lappians; is sub∣divided into Biarmia and Corelia, of which if there be any thing in them worth taking notice of, wee shall there speake more. The latter doth belong to the Crown of Sweden, subdivided into 2 parts also, that is to say, Finmarch, and 2 Scricfinnia.

1 FINMARCH, being that part hereof which lyeth next to Norwey, is the more populous of the two, the people for the most part idolatrous, but by the neighbourhood of the Norwegians, and resort of strangers unto Wardhuys, and the parts adjoining, somewhat civilized; and in the borders of both king∣doms savouring of Religion, possessed of sheds or sorry houses, & those houses reduced to parishes, under the jurisdiction of the Archbishop of Vpsal, the chiefe of which, (if there be any chief amongst them) are named 1 Samman, and 2 Hielso. Called Finmarch, as the antient bounds and Marches of the Finni (of whom more anon) and therefore erroneously by Maginus made a part of the kingdom of Norwey.

2 SCRICFINNIA lyeth between Finmarch and Russia, the name derived from the Finni, a great people of Scandia, and Scriken a Dutch word signifying leaping, sliding or bounding, for such is their gate. An ••tymologie not much inprobable, in that the wooden-soled shoes with sharp bottomes, which

they used for their more speedy sliding over the yee,* 1.82 of which this countrey is full, are by the Ger∣mans (who also use them) called Scri••eshoe••ne or sliding-shoes. The ancient Writers call this peo∣ple Scrictofinni.

These are indeed the naturall and proper Laplanders; and unto these the former character doth of right belong. Of stature very low, little more then Pigmeys, but strong and active, well skilled in Archerie, and patient of cold and labour. Much given to hunting of wild beasts whom they kill with their bowes, devoure the flesh, and cloath themselves with their skins, which they tie at the top of their heads, and leave no place open but for the sight, giving thereby occasion unto some to write, that they are hairie all over like kine or horses. Such Deere (whereof they have great plenty) as they take unkilled, they make to draw in little carts, as they shift their Quarters. But having served them for a while they are killed at last, though perhaps for nothing but their skinnes; a certaine number of which they pay yeerly to the King of Sweden in the way of tribute. Three companies of these Laplanders, so clad and armed as aforesaid, came into Germanie in the year 1630 to serve Gu∣stavus in those wars; looked on with admiration by all spectators.

Townes we must look for none here, where no houses be: and yet there are some sheds and cabbins on the Sea shore; which Mariners having made for their refreshment when they came on land, have bestowed some names on, and possibly in time may become good townes, now not worth the naming.

BODIA.

BODIA, BODEN, or BODNER, is situate on the South of Scricfinnia, betwixt it and the Bay or Gulfe hence named; extending southwards on the West side of it till it joines to Sweden, and on the East side till it meet with the Province of Finland. Hence the division of this countrey, into the Eastern, Northern, and Western Bodden; with reference to the situation of it on the Bay aforesaid. The countrey not very plentifull of grain or fruites, but full of great variety of wilde beasts, whose rich skins yeeld great profit unto the Inhabitants; and by reason of the commodious situation on all sides of the Bay, well stored with Fish. Antiently it was part of the possessions of the Finni, but how or whence it had the name of Bodia, or Bodden, or Bodner, I am yet to learn. But whence soever it had the name, certain I am, that from hence the Gulfe adjoining, is called Sinus Bodicus, Bodner Zee, by the Dutch or Germans.

Chief Townes here in are 1 Barkara, in West Bodden betwixt the Bay and a great navigable lake; 2 Gernia, a well traded Emporie at the very bottom of the Bay in North Bodden; 3 Helsingeliac, more North then that, towards the borders of Lapland, and 4 Kerldby, in East Bodden, on the bank of the Gulfe, conveniently seated for a town of Trade.

3. FINLAND.

FINLAND hath on the North, Bodia; on the South, the Baltick Sea, or Mare Suevicum: on the East, Sinus Finnicus; on the West, Sinus Bodicus. It is by Munster thought to be called Finland, quasi fine land; quod pulchrior & amaenior sit Suecia, because it is a more fine and pleasing countrey than Sweden it selfe. But indeed it is so called from the Finni, or Fenni; a potent Nation who have here dwelt; whose character is thus framed by Tacitus: Finnis mira feritas, foeda paupertas, non arma, non equi, non penates, victui herbae, vestitui pelles, cubile humus, sola in sagittis spes. The Finnes, saith he, are wonderfully barbarous, miserably poore, without Armes, Horse, or Household Goods: Herbs their food, the ground their bed, and the skins of beasts their best apparell, armed onely with their Arrowes, and in them their hopes. A Character which agreeth every way with our present Finlan∣ders, especially those of Scricfinnia, and some parts of Finmarchia, who are not so well reclaimed to ci∣vility, as the other are; but very different from that which Jornandes gives them, who living within 400 yeares after Tacitus, before they had much (if any) entercourse with forein Nations, tel∣leth us of them that they were Scanziae Cultoribus omnibus mitiores, more tractable and civill then any of the Inhabitants of Scandia, not excepting the Suethidi themselves. If so, they did deserve to live in so good a Countrey, more plentifull and plaine then Sweden, and neither so hilly nor so moorish.

The principall place in it are 1. Abo, an Archbishops See, situate on the most Southern point of it, shooting into the Baltick. 2 Wiburg, a Bishops See also, whose jurisdiction for the most part is without this Province, on some part of Russia; all Finland being in the Diocese of the Bishop of Abo. A town conveniently seated at the bottome of the Bay or Gulfe of Finland (called Sinus Fin∣nicus in Latine) which divides this Countrey from Livonia: well fortified as the chief Bulwarke of this Kingdome against the Moscovite; and so well garrisoned withall, that the keeping of this town, and Rivallia in the borders of Liefland, doe cost the king of Sweden 100000 Dollars yearly. 3. Vdden, on a point or Promontorie of the same Gulfe opposite to Narve, another Garrison of this king, in Liefland. 4 Verma upon the Bodner Zee, 5 Cronaburg, more within the land, at the efflux of a River out of the Lake called Puente, 6 Deckala, on the banks of the great Lake called Ho••ela. 7 Varta, more northwards towards Lapland: of which last four I finde not any thing observable in the way of story.

6 The SWEDISH ISLANDS.

And now at last I come to the Swedish Islands, here and there interspersed in the Baltick Seas, be∣twixt the Isle of Bornholm which belongs to Denmark, and Liefland or Livonia, appertaining to the King of Poland; the principall of which are 1 Gothia, or the Isle of Gothland; and 2 Insulae Vlandae, or the Isles of Oelandt.

1. GOTHIA, or the Isle of GOTHLAND, is situate over against Colmar, a strong town in the Continent of Gothland; in length 18 Dutch miles, and five in breadth. Of a rich soile, but more fit for past••rage then till age, yeelding great heards of Cattell, store of game for hunting, plenty of fish, excellent marble, and aboundance of pitch, which it sends forth to other Countreys. There are in it 18 large and wealthy Villages; besides the Haven town of Wisbich, heretofore rich, and of very geeat trading, as much frequented by the Merchant as most in Europe, but now much decayed, and neither so well peopled, nor so rich as formerly. The trade removed hither from Wollin of Pome∣••ania (destroyed by Waldemar the first of Denmark, anno 1170) made it flourish mightily: the greatest traffick of the Baltick being managed here: but after that by reason of the long and continuall wars betwixt Denmark and Swethland for the possession of this Isle, it became unsafe; the Factorie was transferred unto other places. For being conveniently seated to annoy the Swedes, the Danes have much contended for it, and sometimes possessed it; but at the present is in the hand of the Swethlander. By some conceived to be the Eningia spoken of by Pliny.

2 OELAND, or the Isles of Vlande, so called in the plurall number because there are many of them, of which this the principall, is situate over against Ab••, the chief City of Finland. Of no great note, but that it is commodiously seated to invade or annoy this kingdome; and there∣fore very well fortified, and as strongly garrisoned: here being the good towns of 1 Viburg, 2 Vames, and 3 the strong Castle of Castrolm.

Besides which Countreys here described, the King of Sweden is possessed of the strong townes of Narve and Rivallia, and Pernow in Liefland; of Kexholm or Hexholm in Corelia, a Province of Russia; with very fair and ample territories appertaining to them: subdued and added to this Crown by John the second, anno 1581. except Rivallia, which voluntarily submitted to Ericus the second King of this pre∣sent Race, anno 1561. But being these Townes and Territories are not within the bounds of Swethland; we shall deferre all further discourse thereof, to a place more proper.

The first Inhabitants of this kingdome, besides the Gothes and Finni, spoken of already, were the Sitones, and Suiones, mentioned in Tacitus; together with the Phavonae, the Phiraesi, and the Levoni, whom we finde in Ptolemie, placed by him in the East and middle of this great Peninsula. Which being the generall names of some mighty Nations, are by Jornandes branched into lesser tribes, of the Suethans, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, Vagoth, Bergio, Hallin, Liothida, Athelni••, Gaurigoth, Raumaricae, Rauragnicii, Grannii, Aganziae, 〈◊〉〈◊〉, Arochitamii, Enagerae, Othingi, and divers others by him named. But from what root the name of Sweden, Swedes, or Swethland, by which the chief Province of it, the people generally, and the whole kingdome is now called, is not yet agreed on, nor spoken of at all by Munster or Crantzius, which two, (but specially the last) have written purposely of this people. Gaspar Peucerus deriveth them from the Sucvi, who antiently inhabited in the North parts of Germanie beyond the Albis; from whom the Baltick sea was called Mare Suevicum: which people hee conceiveth to have beene driven by the Gothes and Daci into this countrey, and by the change of one letter onely to be called Sueci. But this hath no good ground to stand on, though I meet with many others which are more improbable. For when they left those colder countreys, they fell into these parts which are still called Suevia (the Schwaben of the modern Dutch) where we finde them in the time of Caesar. And after, in fatali illa gen∣tium commigratione, when almost all the Northern Nations did shift their seats, we finde such of them as had staid behinde, to have accompanied the Vandals in their on-fals into Gaul and Spain. Of any expedition of theirs crosse the Baltick seas, ne••gry quidem, nothing to be found in more antient Authors. We must therefore reserve the originall of this people either to the Suiones, or the Suethidi, or per∣haps to both: both being antiently setled in these Northern Regions. Of the Suiones wee read in the booke of Tacitus inscribed De Moribus Germanorum; by whom reported to be strong in men, ar∣mour, and shipping: and that they were inhabitants of Scandia, appeares by two circumstances in that Authour. 1 That the people were not permitted to weare weapons, quia subitos hostium incursus prohibet Oceanus, because the Ocean was to them a sufficient Rampart; which could not be affirmed of the antient Suevians, but agreeth very well with the situation of this present Countrey, defended by the baltick, and vast Northern Ocean, from the sudden assaults of any enemy. 2. Because the Sea which hemmed in that people was conceived to be the utmost bound of the World; trans Suiones 〈◊〉〈◊〉, quo cingi claudique terrarum orbis fines, as his words there are: which wee know to hold good of this Countrey. Adde unto these this passage of the old Annals of the Emperour Lewis the second, where it is told us of the Danes, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 patria apud Suiones exulabant, that they were banished into the countrey of the Su••ones, which cannot so well be understood of any place as of this Sweden; being next neighbour unto Denmark. And 4 that this people both by Munster and Crantzius, are as well called Suiones as Su••••i or Sue••i: which sheweth what they conceived of their true Originall. Then for

the Suethans or the 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whom Jornandes speaks of in his book De••ebus G••tici••, they are by him placed in the Isle of Scandia (for such this great 〈◊〉〈◊〉 was estee••ed to be by most antient writers.) Now that these Suethidi are no other then the present Suethlanders appeareth 1. by the propinquity of the names; 2 In that he maketh the Finni and Finnaithae, the next neighbours to them; and 3 in that they are affirmed by the same Authour, to have furnished the Romans with rich Furs, and the skins o•• wilde Beasts, with which commodities this countrey is aboundantly well stored. Now to which of these two Nations, either the Suiones or the Suethidi, those of Sweden are most endebted for their originall, will (I conceive) be no great controversie: the Suethans, and Suethidi of Jornandes, be∣ing no other then a tribe of the Suiones, though the greatest and most powerfull of all those triles: placed therefore in the front to command the rest, and so most like to give the name unto the whole.

Their government was antiently under Kings, affirmed so to be by Tacitus, who telleth us also that they were absolute and free, nullis exceptionibus, non precario jure regnandi, not bound in C••venant with their people, nor holding their Estates at the will of the Subject. But their Historians have gone for Antiquity hereof beyond the story of Brute or the Trojan warre, (beyond which very few of that strain have dared to pretend) as high as unto Magog the son of Japhet; reigning here within 90 years after the flood. But letting passe these dreams and dotages of the Monkish times, certain it is, that some∣times they were under the Danes, sometimes under the Norwegians, sometimes had distinct Kings of their owne, and finally sometimes were comprehended with the Danes and Norwegians, under the ge∣nerall name of Normans, conducted by one King or Captain upon forain actions. Omitting there∣fore the succession of their former kings, of whose very being there is cause to make great question; we will begin our Catalogue of them with Jermanicus, who entertained Harald King of Denmark, and his brother Regenfride, driven out of that kingdome by Gottricus or Godfrey, the Contemporary of Charlemagne, of whose successours Munster giveth us more certainty.

The KINGS of SWEDEN.

• 1 Jermanicus.
• 2 Frotho.
• 3 Herotus.
• 4 Sorlus.
• 5 Biornus.
• 6 Wichsertus.
• 7 Ericus.
• 8 Ostenus.
• 9 Sturbiornus.
• 10 Ericus II.
• 11 Olaus.
• 12 Edmundus.
• 13 Stinkalis.
• 14 Halsienus.
• 15 Animander.
• 16 Aquinus.
• 17 Magnus.
• 1150 18 Sherco 13.
• 1160 19 Carolus 8.
• 1168 20 Canutus 54.
• 1222 21 Ericus III. 27.
• 1249 22 Bingerius 2.
• 1251 23 Waldemarus 26.
• 1277 24 Mognus II. 13.
• 1290 25 Birgerius II. 23.
• 1313 26 Magnus III. son to Ericus the brother of Byrgerius was also chosen King of Norwey.
• 1326 27 Magnus IV. King of Sweden and Norwey, which last he gave in his life time to Hayvin or Aquinus his second son, and after the death of Ericus his eldest son (his designed suc∣cessour in this Crown) was outed of this kingdome by the practise of
• 1463 28 Albert Duke of Mecklenburg, son of Euphemia the sister of Magnus the fourth; to the preju∣dice of Aquinus king of Denmark and Norwey, made King of Sweden, on that quarrell vanquished by Margaret Queen of Denmark and Norwey, widow of Aquinus, anno 1387. to whom desirous of liberty he resigned his Kingdom, and dyed in his own coun∣trey, anno 1407.
• 1387 29 Margaret Queen of Denmark, Sweden, and Norwey, the Semiramis of Germany, having united the three Kingdomes under her command, caused an Act of State to be passed in Colmar, a chiefe town of Swethland, for the perpetuation of this union unto her successours; the Lawes and Priviledges of each Kingdome continuing as be∣fore they were.
• 1411 30 Ericus IV. Duke of Pomeren, adopted by Margaret, of whose sister Ingelburgis he was descen∣ded, was in her life time chosen King of the three Kingdomes, into which he succeeds actually after her decease; but outed of them all by a strong faction raised against him, anno 1439. he dyed in a private estate in Pomeren, anno 1559.
• 1439 31 Christopher Count Palatine and Duke of Bavier (in title only) son of the Lady Margaret sister of Ericus succeeded in all three Kingdomes. After whose death the Swethlan∣ders being weary of the Danish Government, broke the agreement made at Colmar for the uniting of the three Kingdomes under one Prince, and chose one Carolus Ca∣••utus to be their King, anno 1448.
• 1448 32 Carolus Canutus, one of the meanest of the Nobility, and not long pleasing to the great ones: whose displeasure when he had incurred and feared the consequents there∣of, hee gathereth together all the treasure he could, fled unto Dantzick, and there ended his dayes.
• 1455 33 Christiern King of Denmark and Norwey, called in by a party of the Swedes, and crowned King of Swethland; but outed againe under colour that he had not kept conditions with them: the kingdome governed after that (for a time) by Marshals.
• ...

• 1458 34 John King of Denmark and Norwey, the sonne of Christiern, received king by the Swedes, then overpowered by the Muscovite: but their turne being served they expelled him againe; returning to their former government under Marshals. Of which Marshals (descended from Steno Stur, the Uncle of Carolus Canutus by his Mothers side) there were three in number; viz. Steno, 2 Suanto, and 3 Steno Stur the se∣cond, of which the two first dyed naturall deaths, and the last being by Christiern the second slaine in battell, this kingdom was again possessed by the Danes.
• 1519 35 Christiern II. King of all three kingdome, used his victory so cruelly here, and his sub∣jects so insolently at home; that here he was outed by Gustavus Ericus, and driven out of Denmark by his Uncle Frederick.
• 1523 36 Gustavus Ericus descended from the antient race of the kings of Sweden, having vanquished and expelled the Danes, was on the merit of that action chosen king of Swethland; which still continueth in his house.
• 1561 37 Ericus V. sonne to Gustavus 8.
• 1569 38 John II. brother of Ericus, marryed Catharine the sister of Sigismund the second, king of Poland.
• 1593 39 Sigismund the sonne of John the second, in the life time of his Father chosen king of Poland, anno 1586. but was dispossessed of the Crown of Sweden, (after a long warre) by his Uncle Charles.
• 1607 40 Charles II. Duke of Suderman, the youngest son of Gustavus Ericus, and brother of John and Eric, the two former Kings, first governed here as Viceroy for his Nephew Si∣gismund; but having an aime upon the Crowne (to which he found the Lutherans not very favourable) hee raised up a Calvinian partie within that Realm, accor∣ding to whose principles he began first to with draw his obedience from his naturall Prince, and afterwards to assume the Government to himselfe: speeding so well in his designe, that after a long war he forced his Nephew to desist from all fur∣ther enterprises, and made himself king, anno 1607.
• 1611 41 Gustavus Adolphus sonne of Charles having setled his affaires in Sweden, and made peace with the king of Denmarke, with whom his father was in warre at the time of his death; fell first upon his Cousin Sigismund the King of ••oland, from whom hee tooke many places of importance in Prussia and Livonia, and in pur∣suance of that warre was made Knight of the Garter. Afterwards having set∣led a truce with him, hee passed into Germanie, then in great danger of be∣ing absolutely inthralled to the house of Ausiria. In which hee prospered so beyond all expectation, that in one yeare hee passed over the ••lb, the Rh••ne, and the Danow (which no Conquerour ever did before): and having twice vanquished the Imperialists led by Ti••y, and restored many of the German Prin∣ces unto their estates; was in the current of his victories slaine in the battell of Lutzen, Novemb. 1632. his body royally conveyed to Swethland and there interred.
• 1632 42 Christina sole daughter of Gustavus, of the age of seven yeares, acknowledged Queen of Sweden; the estate governed by the Counsails of the Nobility. After a long warre with variable successe in Germanie, they came at last to this Ac∣cord in the treaty of Munster, that shee and her successours Kings and Queens of Swethland, should peaceably enjoy all the Higher Pomeren, with the Isles of Rugia, Wollm, and the Towne of Stetin in Lower Pomerland; the Towne and Port of Wismar in the Dukedome of Mecklenburg; and the whole Bishoprick of Bremen and Verden, and the Prefecture of the Towne of Wilchusen; with the title of Dukes of Brem••n, Pomeren, and Verden, Princes of Rugia, and Lorde of Wismar; and by those titles have a place, as Princes of the Empire, in all Diets and As∣semblies which concerne the publick. By which agreement (if it hold) the Swedes have not onely got a good footing in Germanie, a strong influence upon all the Counsels of the Empire, a dore open for more forces (if occasion bee) and a free passage into the Western Ocean, which be∣fore they wanted: but may in time prove absolute Masters of the Baltick sea, and make the Ham∣burgers, those of Lubeck, and possibly the Kings of Denmark and the Empire it selfe, be at their de∣votion.

But leaving these things to the doubtfull issue of contingencie, let us next looke upon the forces and Revenues of the Crowne of Sweden, before the time of Gustavus Adolphus, or as hee found it at his succession to that Crowne. For though the Swedes pretend their Kingdome to be elective, especially since the failing of the Royall line in Magnus the fourth and Alb••rt of Mecklenbourg; yet still the eldest son, or next heir succeedeth, unlesse put by, by faction and strong hand, as in the case of Sigismund, and his Uncle Charles. Which Charles so ordered his affaires that having engaged the kingdome in a warre agains his Nephew, hee was sollicited at the last to accept of the Crowne: to which he would by no meanes yeeld till a Law was made for the entail∣ing of the same for ever unto his posterity, whether male or female, as an Hereditary Crown, But whether Hereditary or Elective, the King once setled in the Throne is an absolute Monarch: ha∣ving not onely power to levie taxes on his subjects, as hee seeth occasion, as five, six, seven, eight dollars, or more yearely, upon every housholder, according to the Proportion of his estate;

but also to grant a certaine number of Paisants unto such as hee meanes to favour, to bee as 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and va••sals to him, according to his well deserving. And whereas in the constitution of this Government every Parish hath a Landsman or Consul to decide the controversies of the same; as every Territorie hath its Vicount, and each Province his Lamen: there lyeth an Appeal from the Land••man unto the Vicount, and from the Vicount to the Lamen; who if they bee supposed not to judge uprightly, then the Appeale lies unto the Counsell, and from the Counsell of Estate to the King himselfe, (in whom is fixed the Soveraignty and DERNIER RESORT) and not unto the King and Counsell, as before in Denmark.

The Forces of this King are either by Sea, or Land. By Sea, hee is Commander wholly of Bodner, and hath a great power in all the rest of the Baltick: being able to set out 70 good Men of Warre; as John the second did in the yeare 1578. seven of which were good Gal∣lions; and all the rest did carry above 50 cast peeces of all sorts; besides many other good Vessels fit for service. And if a Navie of this size will not serve the turne, hee is not onely fur∣nished with timber, cordage, and all other necessaries for the building of Ships, and with good store of Ordinance and Ammunition for present use; but is able to raise upon a sudden 6000 Mariners, and upon little warning as many more: all which hee entertaineth at no o∣ther charges in a manner then to finde them victuals, insomuch as John the second before mentioned did use to say, that that which cost the King of Spaine a Million of Crownes, cost not him 10000 Dollars.

For his Land-forces, they may best be estimated by the Trained Bands, (as wee may call them) in every Province: there being in all 3•• Vexill••s (or Ensignes) of Foot constantly trained and mustered in the severall Provinces; each Vexille comprehending 600 or 700 men, amounting in the totall to 20000 Foot, all in a manner Musketiers, ready to march whensoever the Kings occasion shall so require. And then for Horse there are eleven Cornets in continuall readinesse, for Sweden, and Gothland, and two for Finland, maintained at the charges of those Countries, to whi••h the King may adde at his owne charges, as many more as hee pleaseth. And for an instance of what this King is able to doe, without putting his estates in hazard by drayning them too drye of men to make good his kingdome; wee finde that John the second in his Navie of 70 Ships spoken of before, had above 18000 Land-souldiers, besides Mariners: And in the Army which Gustavus Adolphus the late King brought into Germanie, there were mustered no ••ewer at one time then 12000 Horse, and 34000 Foot, all Finnes, and Swethlanders. For the accommo∣dating of which Armies with Artillerie, and the like Engines of war, it is thought that the kings here∣of are masters of 8000 great peeces, for the most part brasse, with Mortar peeces and Granadoes in pro∣portion to them.

But that which makes his Land forces most considerable is their hardnesse in enduring the ex∣tremities of winde and weather, insomuch that it is usuall with th••m to stand Centinell a whole Winters night of 18 houres long without being relieved: their exact Discipline, and obedience to their Commanders, and finally their indefatigable industry in making their owne sh••es, Apparrels, stockes for Muskets, and all other necessaries. Which doth not onely make them fit to endure any labour which is put upon them in the warres; but keepes them from idle∣nesse, and the pride of Mutinies, the ordinary effect in great Armies of sloth and ease. Nor doe they want incouragement on the Kings part neither; who first, gives to every souldier vi∣ctuals, which hee accompts not in their pay, and that according to his obedience and desert; 2. If a souldier be taken Prisoner, him the King doth usually redeem at his owne charges: and 3 if a souldiers horse be slain under him, the King supplyeth him with another: which makes the souldiers (very sensible of such obligations) exceedingly conformable unto his commands, how dan∣gerous soever they may seem to be.

Finally as for his Revenues they must needes bee great, there being foure wayes allowed him to amasse his treasures. First the Revenues of the Church, consisting before the Reformation of seven Bishopricks and sixty Monasteries, which enjoyed very great possessions; all seized on by Gustavus Ericus, and by him incorporate to the Crowne; excepting onely what is given back to maintaine the Bishops. 2 Mines, which are here of all metalls in very great plenty, except of Gold and Silver, which they have more sparingly; the tenth whereof in all places belongs to the King, and yeelds him such a fair Intrado, that in the yeare 1578. the Kings part out of two or three Mixes of Copper onely amounted to 30000 Dollars. 3 Tenths, out of all increase, as Rie, Wheat, Barley, Fish, Oxen, Skinnes, and the like commodities; the summe whereof though not certainly knowne (because the increase is so uncertaine) yet it was once compu∣ted that the tenth of the Oxen onely came in one yeare to 18000 Dollars, besides provision for his houshold. 4 And lastly, Customes imposed on Merchandise, and paid in all his Haven Townes for all commodities imported, or exported of what sort soever. Be••d••s all which hee hath his Contributions in all times of warre, power of imposing taxes (though moderately used) as his necessities require: and on the marriage of a daughter, the kingdome is to provide her portion, which of late times hath beene fixed at the certaine summe of 100000 Dollars, besides Plate and M••veables. Out of which severall Items to summe up the totall, it was observed that in the yeare 1578. King John the second, (all charges ordinary and extraordinary being first deducted) did lay up in his Treasurie no lesse then 700000 Dollars: which was a vast summe for those times, considering especially the great charge which the King had been at that yeare, in fur∣nishing

a Navie of 70 sayle, and raising 18000 Land-souldiers, (besides Horse) for defence of his Realme against the Danes. And yet it is conceived by some knowing men that his Re∣venues would be much greater then they are, if hee did employ strangers to worke the mines, which the Natives doe not husband to the best advantage; and yet are fearfull to discover them to other Nations, upon some jealousies which they are naturally addicted to: or if hee would turne Merchant, and in his owne ships send out Corn and Cordage with Masts and Timber fit for building, and in them bring back salt and other necessaries, which his kingdome wants, setting them at a farre lesse price then now they goe at, and yet gaining very greatly by it too.

The Armes of this Kingdome are Azure, three Crownes, Or.

There are in Swethland Archbishops 2. Bishops 8. Universities but one, viz. Vpsal.

And thus much for SWETHLAND.

OF RUSSIA.

RUSSIA is bounded on the East by Tartarie, on the West with Livonia, and Fin∣land, from which divided by great Mountains, and the River Poln; on the North by the Frozen Ocean, and some part of Lapland; and on the South by Lituania, a Province of the Kingdom of Poland, and the Grim Tartars inhabiting on the Banks of Palus Maeotis and the Euxine Sea. It standeth partly in Europe and partly in Asia, the River Tanais or Don running through it: the common boundarie of those great and noted parts of the world.

It was thus called from the Rossi or Russi, a people of Mount Taurus or Taurica Chersonesus (if not both) who in the declining times of the Greek Em∣pire, possessed themselves of some parts of it, and being the prevailing people imposed their name on all the rest. Called also Russia Alba, to distinguish it from Russia Nigra a Province of Poland, quod incolae omnium gentium ipsius imperio subjectarum (as one observes discoursing of the affairs hereof) vestibus albis & Pileis plerunque utantur: because the Inhabitants use to wear white caps and vestments. And why not thus; sithence the people of Margiana and Sogdiana in Asia have the name of Jeselbasse, only be∣cause they wear green turbants, as the word importeth? Finally it is called Moscovie, from Moscovie the chief Province of it, as that denominated from the Moschi, of whom more anon.

In reference to the heavenly bodies it is said by some to be situate betwixt the 8. and 20. Climates, the longest day in the Southern parts being but 16 hours and an half, and almost 22 hours and an half in the Northern parts. But this is to be understood only of the Province of Moscovie, properly and specially so called, and not of the whole Empire of the Moscovite, according to the bounds before laid down. For taking in the Northern Provinces belonging to it, as East Lapland, Candora, and Petzora, lying within the Arctick Circle, the longest day in Summer wil be ful 6 months (for so long do those Countries see no night at all:) which is a mighty disproportion from the length of the lon∣gest day in the most Southern parts, being but 16 houres and an half, as before is said. And by this rule we are to take the dimensions also. For though some make the length hereof from North to South, that is to say, from Cala in the North to Astrachan near the Caspian Sea, to be no more then 2260 Versts, or 3690 Italian miles: yet they confess that reckoning forwards from Tromschua the furthest point of Petzora, the full length thereof will be nigh so much more. And for the breadth, reckoning from Narve on the Bay of Finland (now in possession of the Swedes) to the Province of Severia in the East, it amounteth to 4400 Versis, or 3300 Italian miles; each Verst being estimated at three quarters of an English mile. Which mighty Territorie, if it were peopled answerably to some other parts of the world, would either make it too great for one Prince to hold, or make that Prince too great and puissant for all his neighbours.

The people, as is commonly reported of them, are very perfidious, crafty and deceitful in all their bargains, false-dealers with all they have to do with, making no reckoning of their promises, and studying nothing more then wayes to evade their Contracts. Vices so generally known and noted in them, that when they are to deal with strangers, they dissemble their Countrie, and pretend to

be of other Nations: for fear lest no bodie should trust them. Destitute of humane affections, and so unnaturall that the father insults on the son, and he again over his father and mother: So malicious one towards another, that you shall have a man hide some of his own goods in the house of some man whom he hateth, and then accuse him for the stealth of them. They are exceedingly given to drink, insomuch that all heady and intoxicating drinks are by Law prohibited: and two or three dayes only in a year allowed them to be drunk in. For the most part they are strong of body, swift of foot, of a square proportion, broad, short, and thick; grey-eyed, broad-bearded, and generally furnished with prominent paunches. The Commons live in miserable subjection to the Nobles; and they again in as great slavery to the Duke or Emperour; to whom no man of all the vulgar dares im∣mediately exhibit a Petition, or make known his grievances: nay the mean Lords and Officers are squeamish in this kinde, and but on great submission, will not commend unto the Duke a poor mans cause. They are altogether unlearned, even the Priests meanly indoctrinated; it being cautionated by the great Duke that there be no Schools, lest there should be any Schol••rs but himself: so that the people use to work commonly on the Lords day, holding it fit only to be kept by Gentlemen; and to say in a difficult question, God and our Great Duke know all this: and in other talk, All we enjoy health and life, all from our Great Duke. According to whose pleasure every man is prescribed what habit he shall wear, both for matter and fashion suitable unto their condition. In the time of my Au∣thor, their habit was a long Garment without plaits, which hung down to their heels, commonly of white or blew, with very strait sleeves: on their legs wearing buskins up as high as the calf, for the most part red, high at the heels, and beset with nails of iron. The stuffe and trimming of this dresse is the only difference betwixt the Noble and the Paisant. The women are attired also much after this manner, but if great and Noble, suffered to set forth themselves with store of pearls and precious stones, which hang so thick about their ears, that they do almost pul their ears from their heads. A second marriage is conceived no blemish in point of chastitie, but the third condemns them of incontinence: na∣turally subject enough to the lusts of the flesh, but private and fearful to offend; if once lascivious, then most intolerably wanton. It is the fashion of these women to love that husband best which beareth them most; and to think themselves neither loved nor regarded, unlesse they be two or three times a day well favouredly swadled. The Author of the Treasurie of times, telleth a story of a German Shoomaker, who travelling into this Country, and here marrying a widow, used her with all kind∣nesse that a woman could (as he thought) desire; yet did not she seem contented. At last learning where the fault was, and that his not beating her, was the cause of her pensivenesse; he took such a vein in cudgelling her sides, that in the end, the Ha••gman was fain to break his neck for his labour.

They use the Sclavonian language, but so corrupt and mixt with other languages that they and the Sclavonians understand not one anothers meaning, but by circumstance only: yet in Jugaria (out of which the Hungarians are thought to have issued) they speak a corrupt Hungarian; and in Petzora and the Countrie of the Cz••remissians, they have a language to themselves distinct from others.

They first received the Christian Faith in the year 987. or as some say, anno 942. by the preaching and ministerie of the Greeks, sent hither by the Patriarch of Constantinople: of which Church they are constant followers both for rites and doctrine, but not without some superstitions of their own su∣peradded to them, viz. not coming near a Crosse, Church, or Monasterie, but they kneel down, and make the sign of the Crosse, saying, Mil••y Hispodi, i. e. Lord have mercy upon us; not entring into any Church untill washed and bathe. They bear a deadly hatred to the Jews, whom they suffer not to live amongst them; and so great friendship unto a Calfe, that they hold it a great offence to kil one, or to eat his flesh. Their Church is governed by 18 Bishops, and 2 Metropolitans, al of them subordinate to their Archbi∣shop or Patriarch, as he in former times to the Constanti••opolitan; by whom he used to be confirmed. But about an hundred years agoe they withdrew themselves from that subjection; the Patriarch being nominated by the Great Duke, and consecrated by two or three of his own Suffragans. Without the counsell and advice of this Patriarch, the Emperour or Great Duke doth nothing of any moment. The Bishops are all chosen out of the Monastick or Regular Clergy; which makes the Monks, (being all of the Order of S. Basil) to live very religiously in hope to be advanced to the Episcopall dignity. And for the Secular Clergy, or Parochiall Priests, there is not much required of them but to say their Masses (which being in their own language they may easily do,) and to read now and then one of S. Chry∣sostoms Homilies, translated heretofore for the use of those Churches: after the death of their first ••lves not permitted to marry, in other things little differing from the rest of the people. Once in the year it is lawfull and usuall with them to hold a Synod, at which the Patriarch hath his Crozier or Pastorall staffe carried before him, as the Popes Legate hath the Crosse; where they make Constitutions for the publick government, and the regulating of Divine matters, most punctually and carefully ob∣served by the Prince himself.

As followers of the Greek Church (but so as to be counted a Church distinct) they differ much both from the Romish and Reformed: 1 Denying the Holy Ghost to proceed from the Father and the Son. 2 Denying Purgatory, but praying for the dead. 3 Beleeving that holy men enjoy not the presence of God before the resurrection. 4 Communicating in both kinds; but using leavened bread, and ming∣ling warm water with wine, which both together they distribute with a spoon. 5 Receiving chil∣dren of 7 years old to the Sacrament of the Eucharist, because then they begin to sin. 6 Forbidding extream unction, confirmation, and fourth marriages. 7 Admitting none to Orders but such as are mar∣ried, and yet prohibiting marriage to them that are actually in Orders. 8 Rejecting carved Images, but admitting the painted. 9 Observing 4 Lents in the year. 10 Reputing it unlawfull to fast on

Saturday; or to eat blood or any thing that hath been strangled according to the first Councell holden at Hierusalem. 11 And finally dissolving marriage by divorcement, upon every slight occasion or conceived pleasure. Which diversitie betwixt the Romanists and this people in point of Religion, hath bred such a difference betwixt them in point of Affection, and made them so ill conceited of one another: that it a M••scovite be known or but suspected to have conversed with any of the Church of Rome, he is accounted to be a polluted person, and must be solemnly purged and purified before he be admitted to partake of the blessed Sacrament.

In matters of war the people are indifferent able, as being almost in continuall broils with their Neighbours: and have a custome that when they goe to the Wars every Souldier giveth to the Em∣perour or Great Duke a piece of money, which at the end of the war he receiveth again; and by that means the number of the slain is exactly known. At their funerals they use to put a penny into the mouth of the partie deceased, a pair of shoes on his feet, and a Letter in his hand, directed (such is their superstition) to S. Nicholas, whom they deem to be the Porter of Heaven: an opinion doubtlesse very prejudiciall to the Popes and S. Peters prerogatives.

This Country is not so populous as spatious. The Eastern parts are vexed with the Tartars; who like Esops dog, will neither dwell there themselves, nor suffer the Muscovites to plant Colonies in them: the Western parts are almost as much molested by the Sweden and Polonian Kings; the Southern by the Turks and Precopenses; and the Northern by the coldnesse of the air, which is of such vehemen∣cie, that water thrown up into the air, will turn to ice before it fall to the ground. The better to resist the extremity of this cold, not only the clothes of this people, but their very houses are lined with thick Furs. Every Gentleman or man of note hath in his dwelling-house a stove or hot-house, in which they keep, as it were, to thaw themselves. Such as travell on the way, use often to rub their nose or ears with snow or ice, to settle and recall the motive spirits into those parts, which otherwise they would be in danger to lose: the ignorance of which preventing Chirurgery, was not the least cause▪ that in the year 1598, of 70000 Turks, which made an inrode into Muscovie, 40000 were frozen to death. By reason of these extremities of frosts and cold, it is the custome of this people, to lay the bodies of their dead all the winter long on heaps in the Belfrees of their Churches; where they lie without putrefying or any ill favour, till the end of March; at what time the air beginning to wax warm and the earth to be fit for digging, each familie looks out their dead bodies, and takes care to bury them. This excesse of cold in the air, gave occasion to Castilian in his Aulicus, wittily and not incongruously to faign, that if two men being somewhat distant, talk together in the winter, their words will be so frozen that they cannot be heard: but if the parties in the spring return to the same place, their words will melt in the same order that they were frozen and spoken, and be plain∣ly understood. Such is their winter, neither is their summer lesse miraculous. For the huge Seas of ice, which in a manner covered the whole surface of the Country, are at the first approach of the Sun suddainly dissolved, the waters quickly dryed up, and the earth dressed in her holy-day apparell: such a mature growth of fruits, such flourishing of hearbs, such chirping of birds, as if here were a perpe∣tuall spring. The reason of which strange and suddain alteration is conceived to be the long lying of the snow on the face of the earth, keeping it from the rigour of the winter frosts: which being dis∣solved by the Sun in the beginning of the spring, doth so throughly drench and soke the ground (being of a light and sandie mold) and consequently make it the more penetrable by the beams of the Sun, shining hotly on it; that it forceth in a manner the Herbs and Plants to shoot forth in great plen∣ty, and that too in a shorter time then can be imagined.

The whole Countrie generally is very much over-spread with Woods, parts of the great Hercynian Forrest, heretofore over-running all the North, and still more visible here then in other places: ei∣ther by reason of the idlenesse of the people, naturally given to sloath and ease; or for that the Coun∣try is not populous enough to overcome them; or that there is already ground enough for tillage to supply their necessary uses. For here do grow the goodliest and tallest trees of the world, through which by reason of their thicknesse, the brightnesse of the Sun-beams can hardly pierce: affording shelter to great multitudes of Cattle, but of wild beasts especially, whose skins are better then their bodies; as Bears, Marterns, Zibellines, Wolves, black Foxes, whose skins are of very great estimation. Of the timber of these trees are squared all necessaries both for Forts and Houses; the Fortifications in this Countrie being made of huge Beams fastened together, (the chinks filled with earth) not ea∣sily shaken by batterie, though much subject to fire. And out of them issueth an unspeakable quan∣titie of Pitch and Rozin, which are hence distilled: besides an everlasting fountain of wax and hony; the Fees, without the Midwifrie of the Art of men, building their Hives or houses in the hollow trees. Concerning this there goeth a story (reported and beleeved for a certain truth) of a Country∣man, who accidentally had slipped down into a great hollow tree, where he stood up to the brest in honey, continuing there two dayes without other sustenance: at the end whereof a Bear coming to partake of the bootie, he laid hold of his legs and so terrified him with his cries, that he made him leap out with the man at his heels. The Countrie yeildeth also great store of Flax and Hemp, which is transported yearly into other Countries; and would make them very excellent cordage, if the people had any skill in manufactures or Mechanicall Arts: and in some places rich pastures, and such store of Corn, that therewith they do furnish Lapland, and the North parts of Sweden. Fish they have also in good plentie, which they salt and drie, and either vent it to the Merchant, or lay it up in store for their Forts and Families. By which accompt it will appear that the principall commodi∣ties which they send abroad, are rich Furs, Flax, Hemp, Whales grease, Honey, Wax, Pitch, Rozin,

〈◊〉〈◊〉, Filberds, and the like: which either the Dutch and English buy of them at the Port of S. 〈◊〉〈◊〉, or the Armenians at Astrachan near the Caspian Sea: giving them in return, Cloth, Silks, Tape∣stry, and some other Merchandise, transported to the value of 500000 Rubbles yearly. Particu∣larly of Wax 50000 poad (every poad containing 40 English pounds) of tallow 100000 poad, 100000 〈◊〉〈◊〉, 100 ships laden with Flax and Hemp; the rest of their Commodities proportionably in the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of my Author: since whose time the trade hereof hath been much increased.

This Country not improperly may be called (as by some it is) the Mother of Rivers. The chief of which are 1 the Don, called Tanais by the old Geographers, and by them thought to be the only Boundarie betwixt Europe and Asia; the Northern parts of this Country being then unknown. It disburtheneth it self into Falus Maeotis, and hath its fountain not out of the Riphean Mountains, as was thought of old, but out of a great Lake called Iwanowesero in the Forrest of Okonitzkilies, or Jepha∣pinolies, some 20 English miles from the Citie of Tulla, and having run a great way Eastward turneth back again, and then proceedeth Southwards towards the Maeotis, as was said before. 2 Borysthenes, now called Nieper, whose spring was unknown unto Herodotus, but now discovered to be near Dnie∣perk, a Village of Moscovie (specially so called) in the Forrest of Wolkonskie. Whence passing South, and running by the Town of Smolensko, it receiveth many other Rivers, and amongst them that of Dosna, (by the ancient Writers called Hipani) notwithstanding whose muddy waters, it still retains its naturall clearnesse, and so falls into the Euxine Sea. 3 Taruntus (so called by Ptolemie) or Duina the lesse (to difference it from Duina the greater) which rising not far from the head of Borysthenes, out of the Lake of Duina, and washing the wals of Riga the chief Town of Livonia, loseth it self in the Baltick Sea. 4 Dfina, or Dwine (commonly called Duina the greater) so called from the meeting of two rivers, the Juch and the Sachan (whereof more hereafter) of which that of the longest course, not known unto the ancients, hath its head in the Province of Permia, and its fall into the Frozen or Northern Ocean, at the Port of S. Nicholas. 5 Occa, or Ocyne, rising in the Territorie of Misceneck, and making all the Countrie fruitfull through which it passeth, emptieth it self into the Volga. 6 Volga, by Ptoloenie called Rha, by the Tartars, Edill; which riseth 25 Dutch miles from Mosco towards Lituania, and fetching a great compasse in and out, after it hath swallowed up many lesser Rivers, dis∣chargeth it self with 70 mouths into the Caspian Sea, now called Mer di Bachu: Here are besides these Rivers many notable Lakes, as those of Duina and Volga, out of which the said two Rivers issue; that called Ilmen, not far from Novogrod the Great, 80 Italian miles in compasse; that of Ladoga 100 Dutch miles in length and 60 in bredth, in which are many pleasant Islands; and that called Bideloyesero (Lacus Albus in Latine) about 12 German miles long, and as many broad, into which 360 Rivers are said to discharge their streams; in the midst whereof is a very strong Castle, said to be impregnable: in which the Great Duke keeps the most part of his treasure, and into which he doth withdraw in the times of danger and sedition.

As for the Mountains of this Country, here are the Montes Amadoci, Riphaei, and Hyperborei, so much talked of, and so little known among the Ancients. A continuall and craggie chain of hils run∣ing crosse Sarmatia Europaea? South and North, and thence Eastwards into Asiatica. Beginning not far from the fall of Borysthenes into the Euxine, they extend directly towards the North, and are there cal∣led Montes Amadoci. Afterwards bending for a long space towards the North-east, they are called Riphaei; and then passing on directly East, by reason of their Northernly situation, called Hyperbo∣rei. And though Sir Walter Raleigh say, I know not on what authority, that there are no Riphean Mountains in Rerum natura: yet Mercator placeth them in this tract, and telleth us that in regard of their being alwayes covered with ice and snow, they are hardly passable, calling these and the said Hyperborei (in his Europa) by the name of Gingulum terrae, or the Girdle of the Earth, a great part where∣of (though known in divers places by different names) they do seem to compasse.

It is divided for the better Government hereof into four parts (by them termed Chetfords) and those governed by four Lieutenants not resident upon their charges, but attending on the Emperors person wheresoever he goeth, and there holding their Courts, but specially at Mosco, the prime seat of the Empire: where from their Vnder-Deputies they receive the complaints of their Provinces, and inform the Emperours Counsell of the businesse, and from them again receive instructions for Refor∣mation. But as to the Chorographie of it, it is divided into the Provinces of Moscovie specially so called, 2 Novogrod the Great, 3 Smolensko, 4 Mosaiskie, 5 Plescow, 6 Corelia, 7 Biarmia, 8 Petzora, 9 Condora, 10 Ob∣dora, 11 Jugra, 12 Severia, 13 Permia, 14 Rhezan, 15 Wiathka, 16 Casan, 17 Astrachan, 18 Novogordia inferior, 19 the Mordwits, 20 Worotine, 21 Tuvir, 22 Wolodomir, 23 Dwina, and 24 the Russian Islands. Others of lesse note (of which there is no want) are reduced to these. In my Descriptions whereof I shall not be so exact and punctuall as I have been hitherto: the Countrie not being much travelled by Strangers, nor any of the Natives suffered to goe into forein Nations, or permitted (out of jealousies of State) to hold discourse with the Ambassadours of neighbouring Princes, but only in the Emperours hearing. By means whereof the Chorographie of this vast Empire is come but lamely to our hands, though the Power, Politie, and Revenues of it, being points discernible by the Ministers of other Princes, and by the course and conduct of their affairs, are as well known as those of lesse di∣stance. Which said, we will first begin with Moscovie, the prevailing Province, that which gives name to this whole Empire; with reference to which the situation and position of the rest of the Provin∣ces is set forth unto us in our Authors.

1. MVSCOVIE.* 1.83

1 MVSCOVIE, specially so called, is seated in the very center of this Estate, and so more fit to 〈◊〉〈◊〉 the affaires thereof: the largest Province of the whole, extending from East to West 600 Dutch or 2400 English miles: so populous with all, that besides 30000 Boiares, or Gentlemen bound to serve on Horseback at their owne charges (like the Turkes Timariots) the Great Duke is able to raise 70000 Foot (which is a great matter for a Countrey so little cultivated).

The s••yle hereof is stiffe and clammie, but might be made more profitable then it is, were it well manured; or ploughed and ordered as it is in all other Countries. For here, and in most parts else of this large Dominion, the people are accustomed to sow no more of their land then what they digge with the spade, or can break up with a stick very sharply pointed, whereof they carry great numbers in∣to the field, that when one breaks they may use another.

Chief places in this Province are 1 Mosco, the Imperiall seat and the See of the Patriarch, so called of the River Mosco upon which it is situate. Exceedingly improved both in state and beauty, since the time that Daniel the fourth Lord of Moscovie, removed the seat Royall hither, from Valodomire, where before it was: insomuch that it was once growne to nine miles in compasse; containing then 41500 families; but being fired by the Tartar, anno 1571. (at what time there were burnt 800000 persons) it is reduced to five miles only, the houses for the most part of wood and d••rt, the streets very miry; without either Ditch, Wall, or Rampart to defend it against an Enemy. In steed whereof there are two Castles, in the out parts of it, the one called Kitagorod, the other Bolsigerod, envi••oned with the River M••••co, and another water called Neglinna, which here fals into it. It con∣taines 16 Churches, most of them of the same materials as the houses are: and the Palace of the great. Duke situate in the midst hereof, (which for the greatnesse of it may be thought a little City) fortified with 17 Towns, 3 Bulwarks, and a continuall Garrison (if the great Duke be there) of 25000 men ••or the guard of his person. 2 Sloboda, a Bishops See, North-east to Mosco, on the banks of one of the greatest Rivers which fall into the Volga. 3 Ruschow, the title of a Dukedome, fortified with a Castle of wood (of which stuffe most of the fortresses of this countrey are made) situate 23 leagues from Mosco towards the west, on the banks of the Volga; which hath its fountain in the territorie and precincts hereof. 4 Ja••••∣slave, on the Volga also, a town and Castle; distant about 46 Dutch miles from Mosco; formerly the Estate and patrimony of the second sons of the Great Duke, but united to the Royall Domaine, by John Wasui∣wick, and by him added also to the style Imperiall. It is also one of the Sees Episcopall. 5 Rustow, the See of one of the two Metropolitans situate in a fruitfullsoyl, well stored with fish, and yeelding good plenty of falt. One of the antientest Principalities of all this Empire, and held accustomably by the second sonne of the Great Duke, as a state distinct: but conquered by John Vasilwick, anno 1565. and added to the style and Patrimony of the Great Duke himselfe, the younger sons being from thence forth put off with pensions. 6 Vologda, a Bishops See, situate in a fenny and woodie Countrey, very strong by nature, and beautified with one of the strongest Castles of all this Estate, where the Great Duke cloth sometimes lay a part of his treasure: that part especially which is raised of the English and Dutch Merchandise, wich being landed at the Port of St. Nicolas, is first brought hither, where having paid a new toll or custome, it goeth on to Mosco. Betwixt this City and that of Yaroslave before mentioned, for the space of an hundred English miles, where stood in former times 50 goodly Villages, (some of them of a mile in length) the Countrey in a manner is left wholly desolate, and without Inhabitants; abandoned by the people by reason of the insupportable pressures which were laid upon them.

2 SMOLENSKO. 3 MOSAISKI. 4 PLESCOW.

The Dukedome of SMOLENSKO, is situate on the course of the River Nieper, or Borysthenes, full of many thick Forrests, from whence they carry a great number of rich skins yeerly. Places of most observation in it, are 1 Smolensko situate on the Nieper, a Bishops See, about 80 Polonian miles from Mo••co, begirt on every side with mountaines and spacious Woods. A large town and of great esteem in these parts of the Empire; and giving name unto this Province; which heretofore was governed in a free condition under the patronage and protection of the Kings of Poland in the time of Alexander a late king thereof by Basilius the Great Duke conquered, and added unto this Estate. Taken by the ••olarders, in the yeare 1610. after a long siege of two yeares, with the slaughter of 200000 Muscovites, and the losse of many of the besiegers; but restored again to Michael Fedrovitius the Great Duke, on the ma∣king of the peace between them. 2 Biela, a principality of it selfe, having the honour of a Ca∣stle, and reckoned in the usuall style of the Knez or Emperour.

3 MOSAISKI, hath in length 350 Italian miles, and as much in breadth so called from Mosai∣th••••, the chief town hereof, and a Bishops See, taken together with the territory or Province apper∣taining to it, from Alexander King of Poland, by John the Great Duke, father of Basilius before menti∣oned.

4 P••••SCOW or PSKOW, containes in length 350 Italian miles, in breadth 230 or thereabouts, 〈…〉〈…〉 from Plescow or Pskow, the chief City of it, and a Bishops See; great, powerfull, and well

walled about,* 1.84 the onely walled City of all this Empire. So large within the wals, that when it was be∣sieged by Stephen king of POLAND, there were in it for defence thereof 70000 Foot, and 7000 Horse, besides the naturall Inhabitants of it; which in all ordinary computation must be many more. It belonged formerly to the Poles, in right of the Dukedome of Lituania; taken from them by Basiaus the Great Duke of Muscovie, anno 1509; by whom and his successours used in the Royall style.

5 NOVOGORD.

5 NOVOGORD or NOVOGROD is one of the largest Provinces or Dukedomes in all Rus∣sia; bordering on Livonia, towards Sinus Finnicus, or the Gulfe of Finland: a colder Countrey and lesse fruitfull then that of Mascovie, because situate somewhat further North: the longest summer day in Mosco not being above 18 houres, whereas in Novogrod the chief City hereof, it is very neer 20. By consequence the winter nights being of that length, must make the air exceeding cold, and the soile as comfortlesse. Here is in this Province the great lake Ilinen, spoken of before, 80 Italian miles in compasse; as also that called Ladoga, before also mentioned.

Townes of most estimation in it are 1 Novogred it selfe, the wealthiest and goodliest City of all the North, affirmed to be in greatnesse not inferiour to Rome, called therefore Novogrod the great (to dif∣ference it from another of the same name near unto Valodomir:) an Archbishops See, and one of the foure Mart-townes of the Haense-Merchants, resorted to from all parts for the trade of Muscovie, brought thither by land, and thence transported through the Baltick to most parts of Christendome. So confi∣dent in those times of their power and strength, that they used to say, that men could doe nothing against God and them: but found the contrary when taken from the Crown of Poland by the Great Duke of Mu∣scovie. The trade thereof since much decayed, by the finding out of the North-East passage to the Port of St. Nicolas, where the English and Dutch Merchants barter with the Muscovite. Yet still it keeps the reputation of the principall City, situate on the River Naf, which the Dutch call Ny; the buildings for the most part of wood and clay: distant from Mosco 120 Dutch miles, and about 200 from the main body of the Baltick, betwixt which and this City lyeth the whole Bay of Finland, the entrances where∣of upon the Dwina, which leads toward Novogrod are fortified with the strong townes and Garrisons of Narve, and Rivallia, both in the hands of the king of Sweden, which is another great hinderance to the trade of this town. 2 Narve, on the North banke of Dwina, where it falls into the Bay of Finland, or Sinus Finnicus, in the Province or Territorie of Wichidaw, heretofore reckoned of as a part of Livonia, but being taken by Basilius the Great Duke, with the rest of this Coun∣trey, and the towne of Novogrod it selfe, anno 1477. it was impregnably fortified by the care of his sonne Vasaliwich, who for a reward unto the Architect being a Polonian, put out both his e••es, to disable him from building the like againe. But having left all the natives in their own habitations, with∣out abating either their strength or number, the Towne and Castle not long after was betrayed to the king of Sweden, who still holds it. 3 Pozow or Pozovia, and 4 Volocoluc, two strong peeces, situate in the borders against the Polanders. 5 Vo••sco, besieged by Stephen king of Poland, with an Army of 100000 men, forced to retire without taking it, with the losse of many of his best Captaines and com∣mon souldiers. It is distant from Novogrod 28 Dutch miles, the countrey about it called Volsk, where they say for certaine that all Cattell which are brought thither of what haire or colour soever they be, upon a little stay there become all white. The people of this tract have a language (or some Di••∣lect rather) peculiar onely to themselves. 6 Juvanogrod, a strong Castle not far from Vobsco, 40 miles from Novogrod; a frontire Castle against the Swedes garrisoned in Narve, to repulse whose inrodes it was built.

In this Countrey and not far from the Town of Novogrod, was fought that memorable battell be∣twixt the Sarmatians, and their Slaves. For when the Asiatick Scythians went to plant themselves in Media, and the parts adjoining; some of the Sarmatians, then Inhabitants of this tract, went along for company. Their long stay, caused their wives, despairing of their return, to comfort themselves with their slaves, both at bed and board, to whom they brought a lustie increase of youths: who be∣ing well grown, and hearing that the Sarmatians were upon their coming back, joined together against them: the slaves to retain that wealth and freedome which they were possessed of; the women for fear of the displeasure of their husbands, and the young men for defence of their Fathers and Mothers. With joint forces they goe out to meet them, before their entrie into the Countrey; neither are the Masters slow in their advance, hoping to take them unprovided. At Novogrod they have the first sight of each o∣ther. The Masters scorning to defile their swords on so ignoble an Enemy, assault them with whips, and by the terrour thereof got a signall victory. In memory of which battell the people of that City have ever since stamped their money with the figure of an Horseman shaking a whip in his hands: And it is the custome over all Muscovie, that the maids in the time of wooing, send such a whip, curiously wrought by her own hands, to that Suiter whom she resolves on for her husband, in token of her fu∣ture subjection to him. But of this more hereafter in another place.

6 CORELIA.* 1.85 7 BIARMIA.

6. Sixty Dutch miles from Novogrod lyeth the Province called Corelia, extending Northwards as far as to a branch of the Frozen Sea, where the longest day is 20 houres and an halfe: the nights propor∣tionable in the winter make it cold and barren. It bordereth on the East of Finland from which part∣ed by a long and rough ridge of Mountaines. By reason of which situation betwixt two great Princes, the people are inforced to pay tribute to both; though properly the subjects of the Great Duke of Moscovie. Chief townes whereof are Kexholm, or Hexolm, in the hands of the Swedes; and 2 Corelnberg, the chief town of the Province, belonging with the rest of the Countrey unto the Mosco∣vite. By some this Province is made a part of the Eastern Lapland; but I think erroneously: the people having some good Towns; and savouring of some humanity, neither of which are known or heard of a∣mongst the Laplanders. 3 Nordenberg on the mouth of a lake, which by the River called Warfuga, emp∣tyeth it selfe into the Bay of S. Nicolas.

On the North side of that branch or Arme of the Frozen Ocean, which bounds Corelia, lyeth the Westerne part of Lapland, which by a proper name is called BIARMIA, the coun∣trey of the Dikiloppi or wilde Lappians, as the Moscovites call them, to whose Duke or Emperour they are subject. We had their Character before when we were in Swethland; nor shall we need to repeat it here: as barbarous and rude as the worst sort of those mentioned in Scricfinnia, and as idolatrous as they: but more (if more may be) inclined to lustfulnesse then the others. In the winter Solstice, when the Sun entreth into Capricorn, they have night for three whole months together: during which time lurking in their Caves, they have leisure to consult with the Prince of Darknesse, being very great Sorcerers, able (as some affirm) to raise Windes, Clouds, Tempests, and doe many strange things. Towns here are none. Some sheds and Cabbins on the Sea costs; patched up by Saylers, for their recep∣tion and refreshment as they came on land, and named according to their fancies; but not here con∣siderable.

8 PETZORA. 9 JVGRIA. 10 OBDORA. 11 CONDORA.

Opposite to Biarmia, or East-Lapland, on the other side of the Bay leading towards the Port of S. Ni∣colas, lyeth a large Promontorie or Headland stretching out farre into the North, beyond the Arctick; com∣prehending in it foure Provinces of the Russian Empire: that is to say, Petzora, Jugria, Obdora, and Condora; belonging formerly to the Tartars, but wonne from them of late years by the Russian Empe∣rors, extending by that means their territories to the River Ob, but not a whit improving them in power or patrimonie. Howsoever somewhat must be said of them, because parts of this great body which we are to diffect.

1 PETZORA, so called from a River of that name, is fenced on every side by mountaines and unpassable rocks; extending Northwards to the Sea, and crossed with a vast chain of hils, part of the Hyperborei spoken of before: so high, that a certain man having travelled in the ascent of them 17 dayes together, is said to have returned back again, despairing to attaine the top of them, covered in the winter time with perpetuall snowes, in the summer with as scorching heats, by the continuall lying of the Sun on all parts thereof. The people are of a plain and simple nature, and received the Russian faith and Empire at one time together, anno 1518. The chief town of it 1 Petzora, or Pechora, at the fall of that River into the Sea; a small town, but having three Churches in it: the people where∣of though otherwise sufficiently simple, as before is said, do in the summer time catch Partrich, Ducks, Swans, Geese, and other fowle, which they salt and lay by till the winter, and then live upon them. So good a Tutor is the Belly, that the Poet did not unfitly give it the titles of Artis Magister, and Ingenit largitor venter; whereof this may serve for one example.

7 CONDORA lyeth on the North of Petzora, more neere the Pole, by consequence a colder Countrey, and of worse condition, in one half of the Countrey being continuall day, and the other halfe as long a night. The people universally Idolaters, worshipping some Images (or Idols) in the shape of a man, others in that of Beares, Wolves, &c. which they adorn with the richest furs they can get, and hide them in their Caves for feare of the Russes: who if they chance to light upon them, as they hunt those parts for Sables, Fexes, and Bevers, take away their furres, and bestow greater heat upon them in fires. The chief Town hereof is Pustozrea over against Nova Zemla, on or neer the great lake called Ozera, whence it hath the name; situate in the 68 Degree of Northern Latitude, 50 minutes over.

10 Obdora, so called from the River Ob, on both sides of whose bankes it lyeth, is the most North-Eastern Province of all these Dominions: wonne to the obedience of the Russes in the reign of Theo∣a••re the sonne of John Great Duke of Mo••covie. At what time the people had no Cities, lived in Hoords or C••••pantes, eat the Beasts they tooke, knew no corn nor bread. They were then very good Archers,

sharpening their Arrows with fish Bones;* 1.86 with which bones and the sinews of the Beasts they sowed Furs together for their Clothing, which they wear inward in the winter, outward in the summer, co∣vering their houses with Elke-skinnes. By this Theodore were some Castles built on the Rivers side, to which he sent condemned persons, and brought it into the form of a petit kingdome. But his sonne Boris built Tooma the chief Town hereof, with divers other Towns on both sides of the water, not worth naming here. But notwithstanding this subjection to the Moscovite they continue still in their Idolatry, worshipping an antient Idol, in form of an old woman, holding in each Arm a Childe, and a third at her feet, called by them Zlatu Babu, or the Golden old wife, to which they offer pretious Furs, sacrifice Harts, and therewith doe consult touching things to come. But some accompt this for a Fable, or a meere mistake.

11 JVGRIA or JVHAR, lyeth also on the Northern Seas, but more south then either of the other; betwixt Petzore or Pechora, and the Province of Dwina: the longest day in summer being not above 21 houres, or not fully that. The people for the most part Idolaters, and worship the same Images as doe those of Obdora: affirmed by some to be the Progenitors of the present Hungari∣ans, who coming out of this Countrey over-ran all Pannonia, and there fixed their dwellings. For proof of which it is affirmed that they speak the old Hungarian languages; not used but in this coun∣trey, and the North parts of Hungarie betwixt Danubius, and Tibiscus. Which more learned men affirm to be the Iazygian, the language of the Iazyges who antiently possessed that countrey in the times of the Romans. But leaving this dispute to another place, certaine it is that they are subject to the Mo∣scovite, but so poore and miserable a people, that they have few townes and not many houses; and so bare of money, that in stead thereof they pay Furs for tribute to their Emperour.

12 SEVERIA. 13 PERMIA. 14 RHEZAN.

12 SEVERIA, or SIBIOR as the Moscovites called it, lieth in a long tract on the bankes of the River Ob or Oby, south of Obdoza, and the rest of the foure last Provinces. The Countrey very fruitfull, and abounding with all things necessary, notwithstanding that there be great Deserts, and some Forrests also; but those Forrests well stored with black Foxes, Ermines, Sables, and the like wilde beasts, which yeeld more profit by their rich Furs, then any more fertile Countrey doth by its Corn and fruites. In somuch that in the yeare 1589. there were collected out of this Province only in the way of tribute for the Emperour, 466 timber of Sables, (every Timber containing 40 skins) five Timber of Martrons, 180 Cases of Black Foxes, (every Case containing 40 skins) besides other com∣modities. The woods also doe afford good plenty of Hony, and the plaines of Herbage; well wa∣tered with the River Sem, which falleth into the Desna, and both together into that of the Nieper or Borysthenes. There are in it many Townes and Castles, the principall whereof are 1 Sibier, on the West side of the River Ob, which gives name to the Province; 2 Branki; not far from the great For∣rest from hence named. 3 Starodus, 4 Potuvolo, and 5 Czeznigo.

The people hereof by reason of their continuall skirmishes with the neighbouring Tartars, are the most warlike Nation of all the Russes: heretofore governed by a Duke or Prince of their owne, who at the first acknowledged no Superiour; but afterwards was severally and successively Tribu∣tary to the Lituanians, the Polanders, and the Moscovite, and finally the last Duke being falsly accused of treason, was outed of his estate by Basilius the Great Duke, who added it to the rest of his Dominions, as it hath continued ever since.

13 PERMIA is situate on the South-west of Sibior or Severia, a large Province, distant 250 ••utch miles from Mosco, so called from Perm, or Permia, the chiefe towne hereof, situate on the River Vi••chore or Vistorna: the second Town of note is called Sicwiarskey. The people (as also those of Si∣••ior) are of the Moscovite Religion, and live most by hunting wilde beasts, whose flesh they eat, and make good merchandise of their skins, many of which they pay yearly to the great Duke in way of tribute, who makes a good commodity of them, selling them to the Merchant at excessive rates. They have no corn of their own growth, nor will they buy any elsewhere; but in stead of bread eat the flesh of Stags dryed and prepared in the Sun: speaking a language of their own, different from the rest of the Russes; and in stead of Horses and Oxen make use of great dogs and stags, whom they train up to draw their sleds from one place to another. There is good store of woods amongst them; but they want C••dars; and they have paid dearly for that want. For John Vasiliwich meaning to pick a quarrell with them, sent to them for certain loads of Cedar wood, whereof he knew there grew none in their Countrey; and upon word returned that they had no such wood, hee fined them at 12060 Rubbles.

14 RHEZAN, a great and goodly Province, is situate betwixt the River Tanais, and that of 〈◊〉〈◊〉: the most fruitfull Countrey of all Russia, and (if report be true) of the whole world also: it being credibly affirmed that one graine of corn doth bring forth six eares; the stalks hereof grow∣ing so thick, that an horse can hardly passe through them, or a Quaile flie out of them, but with very much difficulty. Here is also great plenty of fruits, better then are to be found elsewhere in Russia, together with good store of Honey, fish, fowl, and other commodities; besides Ermins, Bevers and the

like,* 1.87 common in these Countries. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Tulla, famous for the fountain or spring head of the River Tanais, which ariseth near it. 2 Colluga, well garrisoned for fear of the Crim ••a••ar 3 Corsna, a Bishops See, as is also 4 Rhezan, the principall of the Province which it giveth name to, seated upon the banks of the River O••que. A Country populous and well-planted, affording to the Great Duke 15000 Boyares, or Gentlemen which serve on horseback, and betwixt 30 and 40000 foot.

15 WIATHKA, 16 CASAN, 17 ASTRACHAN.

15 Southeast of Rhezan beyond the banks of the River Kamme, and about 150 Dutch miles from Mosco, lyeth the Province called WIATHKA, fennie and barren, but well stored with fish and honey, and wild beasts good plenty. Heretofore subject to the Tartars, and then the receptacle or retreat of all fugitive servants, here very gladly entertained: but the Tartarians being expulsed, it was made subject by Basilius to the Dukes of Moscovie I do not read of any Towns which should be here, which makes me think that they do stil retain so much of the Tartar with them, as to live in Hoords and Companies without any fixt dwellings: or at the best, in scattered houses, not hitherto united into Towns and Villages: except it be the Town of Wiathka it self, built since the subjection of it to the Moscovite, and made a Garrison to defend these out-parts of this Empire against the incursions of the Tartars.

16 CASAN, a kingdome formerly of Tartaria Deserta, lyeth on the Southeast of Wiathka; the most Civill people of the Tartars, but owing much of that civilitie to their conversation with the Moscovites, (though none of the civillest themselves) tilling their lands and building houses where they may with safety. For although the soil hereof be tolerably fruitfull, and fit for habitation, yet the Countrie for the most part is desolate and ill inhabited, partly by reason of some vast deserts lying betwixt the Cities of Casan and Astrachan; but principally in regard of the Crim Tartar, who will not suffer the Moscovite to plant it with Colonies of his own people, nor the Natives to live there in quiet, except only in the Western parts, where protected by Garrisons. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Casan upon the River Volga, which gives name to the Kingdom; since the subjection of this people to the great Duke, and their conversion to the faith, made a Bishops See. 2 Surick upon the River Sure, in the middle of the vast deserts betwixt Casan and Astrachan; built by Basilius the Great Duke for a stage or resting place for Merchants and Travellers, that there they might repose them∣selves without fear of the Tartars. The people hereof had once a King of their own, as before was said, the last of which named Chelealcesk, submitted himself unto Basilius the Great Duke and became tributarie: but afterwards revolting, he was vanquished by John Vasiliwich, anno 1553. and this king∣dom thereupon united to the Empire of Russia; the Emperours since that time writing themselves Czar Kasanski, or King of Casan: And possible enough it is that Basilius who first made it tributarie, might from hence take the name of Basilius Casan, according to the custome of the ancient Romans.

Under the Government hereof are the Czeremissi, a people that live in great Forrests without any houses, living for the most part of honey and the flesh of wild beasts, with the skins of which they are apparelled. Their language different from the rest, swift of foot, and very good Archers, carry∣ing their Bows in their hands continually, and practising their children so timely in it, that they give them nothing to eat (after such an age) untill they can hit a white which is set before them.

17 ASTRACHAN lyeth also South-east of Casan, more near unto the Caspian Seas; parted from Casan by those deserts spoken of before, but situate on the same branch of the River Volga: which having run a course of 2000 Italian miles, dischargeth it self into this Sea with no lesse then 70 mouths or channels. It took this name from Astrachan the chief town hereof, situate about 20 Ita∣lian miles from the fall of one of those 70 mouths or channels into the Caspian: by the commodious∣nesse whereof it is one of the best towns of trade in all these dominions, the Armenian Merchants com∣ing hither, and bartering their silks and manufactures for the furs and other naturall commodities of the Russes or Moscovites. A Kingdome formerly, but a kingdome of lesse esteem then that of Casan; conquered (together with it) by Basilius the Great Duke, anno 1494, and by him made Christian. But afterwards revolting they were more absolutely subdued by John Vasiliwich, who brought into the field against them no sewer then 120000 horse, and 20000 foot, (enough to over-run a farre greater Countrie) and yet had hardly got the better but for the terrour of his great Ordnance, which the others wanted. Upon that victorie it was made a Member of the Empire of Russia; the Emperour whereof hath since flyled himself the King of Astrachan.

18 NOVOGORDIA INFERIOR,* 1.88 19 The MORDWITS.

But it is now time we return towards Europe, out of which we have wandred up and down in the skirts of Asia, in tracing out the severall Provinces of this Empire, since our first crossing over the Bay of Grandvie, or Saint Nicolas, into the Countrie of Petzora. But in our way we must first take a view of the Dukedom of Novogrod the Lower, so called to difference it from Novogrod (surnamed the Great) spoken of before: situate almost in the midst betwixt Casan and Mosco, distant from the last 100 P••lo∣nian miles, and 60 miles from the borders of the other; every Polonian mile being reckoned at four Italian. The Countrie generally very rich both for tillage and pasturage; inferiour unto none in all this estate but Rhezan and Wolodomir only. So called from Novogrod the chief town, situate at the con∣fluence of the Ock and Volga; besides which it hath the neighbourhood of a very great Lake, which storeth it plentifully with fish. A Citie of great esteem in all this Empire, partly for the great num∣ber of houses in which not easily equalled by any other, partly for an impregnable Castle, cut out of the main Rock with incredible charges in the time of Basilius the Great Duke; but principally for a stately and magnificent Temple, built above 1600 years agoe, in imitation (or emulation, as some say) of the famous Church of S. Sophia in Constantinople. To this Town the story of the Scythian or Sarmatian slaves ought in my mind•• to be ascribed, though commonly reported of the other Novogrod in the West parts of this Empire. My reason is, because it is not likely that the Sarmatians dwelling on the borders of the Baltick Sea, should crosse all this Country to join with the Asiatick Scythians so remote from them in a needlesse war: which those of this tract might well do, as near neighbours to them, if not of the same Nation or extraction with them.

Subject to the Estate hereof are the Mordwit Tartars, lying on the South, betwixt the Volga and the Don or Tanais where it beginneth to return Westwards towards the Euxine. A people much of the same nature with the Czeremissois, but that they have some Villages, & scattered houses, which the others either want or else care not for. Idolaters for the most part (and the rest Mahometans) carrying their Idols in their Carts wheresoever they goe: worshipping that beast all day, which they first see in the morning, and swearing by it for that day, as their chiefest deitie.

20 WOROTINE, 21 TUVER, 22 WOLODOMIR.

And now again we are in Europe, where the Great Duke hath almost as many Titles as Towns with Territorie: four of them (besides some before) either situate in the Province of Moscovie, or else so intermingled with the Towns thereof, that they may easily be taken (or mistaken) for members of it. The principall are,

20 WOROTIN, seated on the West side of the River Ocque, a distinct Dukedom of it self, so called from Worotin the chief Citie of it, built upon that River, about 3 Dutch miles from Colluga in the Province of Rhezan, lying on the further bank thereof; beautified with a strong Castle, and a pleasant soil. The 2 Misceneck, the next Town of note, remarkable for the head of the River Ocque, which ariseth in the fields thereof.

21 TVVER or OTVVER, as some call it, is a large and goodly Country lying along the banks of the River Volga: so populous that it is said to contain 40000 Boidres, or Gentlemen sit to serve on horseback, and double that number of the common or inferiour sort. It gives the title of a Duke to the Russian Emperour, and is so called from Twerde the chief Town thereof, and a Bishops See; affirmed to be a fairer and more stately Citie then Mosco it self, from which distant 36 Dutch miles.

22 WOLODOMIR is one of the most fruitfull Countries in all Russia, not paralleld by many Countries in the world; the soil here (if all be true, which is said of it) yeilding such an increase that many times the husbandman hath twenty and sometimes twenty five for one. It gives the title of a Duke to the Russian Emperour, and hath precedencie before Moscovie in the style Imperiall. So called from Wolodomir the chief Citie of it, and a Bishops See, and that so named from the Founder, who probably was the same Valadomir (one of the first Kings of the Russes) who married Helena the daughter of Nicephorus Phocas, Emperour of Constantinople. The Citie situate 36 Polonian miles on the East of Mosco, anciently the chief seat and residence of the Oreat Duke; and so continued till the time of John the son of Daniel, who first translated it to Mosco, that from thence he might more easily confront and oppose the Tartars, with whose irruptions and invasions both he and his predecessours had long been troubled. Under the government hereof is the City of Susdali, of great esteem and very well peopled as long as the Royall seat remained at Wolodomir, betwixt which and Rostow it is seated.

After it tell into decay, and being once destroyed by the Tartars, could never since recover 〈…〉〈…〉 lustre; having now little to uphold its reputation, but a Bishops See.

23 DWINA.

2•• DWINA, so called from the chief Town, situate on the confluence of two Rivers Juch, and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, whence it hath the name: Dwine in the language of that Countrie signifying two, (as twan doth with us amongst Countrie-people.) A Countrie of a great extent, but exceeding barren, which ••akes the Village•• hereof to stand very thin; the Towns (considering the great compasse of it) to be very ••ew; and the Inhabitants for the most part to live upon dried fish and the flesh of wild beast••; which they have no want of. The chief commoditie is in salt, with which they use to furnish the neighbouring Provinces, and provide such necessaries for themselves as they stand in need of. Chief Towns hereof are 1 Dwine, spoken of before, situate in the midst of the Province, on the meeting of the said two Rivers, which here united into one stream, take the name of Dwine, or Duina the grea∣ter, known by that name untill its fall into the Northern Ocean, in the Bay of Grandu••e. 2 Sagan, so called of the River (one of the two which makes the Dwine) upon which it is seated. 3 Colnagro, 4 Pinnegue, two strong Castles.

Unto this Province (because I know not else how to dispose of them) I must reduce these four Towns following; that is to say, 1 Vstiug, a Bishops See, situate on the western side of the River, over against the Town of Dwine, and in a Country so ill furnished with necessaries, that the people eat dryed fish in stead of bread; but have salt enough to season it from those of Dwine. 2 Gargapoll, a Bishops See also, on the same side of the River that Dwina is of. 3 S. Nicolas, a well known Port, and a Bishops See; situate at the influexe of Duina, into the Gulfe of Granvicus, or the Bay of S. Nicolas, from hence denominated. A Town much traded since the discovery of the North-east passage by the English, and the removal of theirs and the Dutch traffique from Novogrod hither; from hence dispersed with more case and speed into all the parts of this vast Empire. 4 S. Michael, on the Sea side, commonly called Archangell, a Town of great trade, by the English specially, who have of late here fixed their Staple, to the great enriching of the Place: by reason whereof the English Merchants have not onely great privi∣ledges and immunities (as the Authors of so great a benefit unto this Estate) not granted to others: but the whole Nation have found better and more noble entertainment from them then any others have received. The cause of which was primarily the great opinion which their Emperours had of Queen Elizabeth, who held very good correspondence with them; continued ever since by mutuall Ambassies on both sides; and secondly the conformable behaviour of the English themselves, so ac∣ceptable to those Barbarians (both Prince and People) that when John Vas••li••ich nailed the hat of ano∣ther forein Embassad••r to his head for his too much perversenesse, he used our Sir Thomas Smith with all kindnesse imaginable. Another time when the Jesuite Possevine began to perswade with him to ap∣prove of the Religion of the Church of Rome: upon the information of the English Embassadour that the Pope was a proud Prelate, and would make Princes kisse his feet; he grew into such a rage that the Jesuite was afraid he would have beat out his brains. But to return again to the Port of S. Nicolas, it is so called from an Abbie there built unto that Saint, the tutelarie Saint and locall Patron of the Nation. Which said, I will set sail from this Port to the Russian Islands; and see what may be said of them to our present purpose.

24 The RUSSIAN Islands.

The RVSSIAN ISLANDS are but two; both of them in the Northern or Frozen Ocean, on the Coasts of this Country; that is to say, 1 Sir Hugh Willoughbies Island, and Nova Zemla; both subject (if to any) to the Knez or great Duke of Moscovie.

1 WILLOVGHBIES ISLAND was so called from Sir Hugh Willoughbie, because he first discovered it, anno 1553 and was hereabouts found frozen to death the next year following. For being employed by the Merchants of London in the time of King Edward the 6. to find out a new way to Moscovie, Cathaie, and China; he proceeded so far as to this Island (situate almost opposite to the Bay of S. Nicolas:) where the weather proved so extreme, and the Frosts so vehement; that his ship was set last in the ice, and all his people, with himself, frozen to death; in which condition they were found the next year after, with an exact description of their voyage and fortunes. Notwithstand∣ing which disastrous beginning, the enterprise was pursued by some noble Adventurers, as Jenkin∣son, Burroughs, Pet. Jackman, and others of the English Nation: who opened the way as far as to the River Ob, (the East boundar of Russia) but by reason of the length of the way, the vast floting Islands of Ice, and perpetuall nights, for many months together in winter, could advance no further.

2 NOVA ZEMLA, situate on the East of Willoughbies Island opposite to Pustozera in Condora beformentioned, was first discovered by such Adventurers as followed Willoughbies design. Famous for nothing but a race of short-statured men, not above four foot high, a degree above the height of Pyg∣mies:

not yet so far discovered as to know any thing thereof, but by the relation of the Russes, who affirm the Inhabitants to have neither Religion nor Civilitie, nor the prescripts of any Law; but that they worshiped the Sun, Moon, and Northern Star, to which they offer an yearly Sacrifice of their Deer: that the Island is woodie, desert, and not easie for travell, having in it neither green bough nor grasse; yet harbouring great store of Bears and such ravenous and dangerous beasts. Found experimentally true by William Barrentson and his Associates, employed by the Hollanders for this dis∣coverie, anno 1594. and 1596. in which last year, after many dreadfull combats with huge flakes of ice, they were forced to winter in this Island, where they built an house as well to preserve themselves from being buried in snow, as from being devoured by the Bears (some of them 13 foot in length:) which with the losse of two of their company devoured by those Savage creatures, they at last effected; some of them coming home in safety the October following. And though they seemed to give some hope that a way might be found unto Cathaie on the North of this Island, (themselves ha∣ving gone as far North as the 81 degree of Latitude, within 9 of the Pole:) yet it is generally concei∣ved that the undertaking is unprofitable, the successe impossible.

And so I leave it to return to the storie of Russia, called anciently by the name of Sarmatia Europaea, but known no further Northwards then the head of Tanais. And for Sarmatia Europaea, it was boun∣ded in the time of Ptolemie, by the Baltick Sea, and some Terra Incognita, on the North; the Jazyges Metanastae (now Transilvania and the Vpper Hungarie) upon the South: the River Vistula or Wexel (which divided it from Germanie) upon the West; and the Tanais upon the East. Beyond that all along the banks of the Euxine Sea, to the Mare Caspium, and as far North as any Conqueror had gone; it was called Sarmatia Asiatica: the Countries further Eastward being then called Scythia. By which accompt as Russia containeth not all Sarmatia Europaea, of which Prussia, and the rest of the incorpo∣rate Provinces of Poland, passeth for a part; so neither is it totally comprehended in it, extending beyond Tanais into Asiatica. The ancient Inhabitants called by a generall name Sarmatae, by the Greeks, Saur••matae; were subdivided (for so much of this part of it as was then made known) into the Agathyrsi, Butheni, Pagiritae, dwelling in the North; the Osdi, Alauni, Roxolani, &c. dwelling in the South. Amongst many other barbarous Nations, these were some of the principall. And from these Roxolani, as the principall of all the rest, Matthias a Michou, a learned Polander, doth derive the originall of the Rosses (which we now call Russians:) seconded herein by the more learned Bochartus, who proveth out of ancient Authors that the Inhabitants of Taurica Chersonesus, (from which the pas∣sage into this Countrie is both short and easie) have been formerly called Rhos. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Tauros vocari gentes Rhos, as he saith from Tsetzes. Which Rhos, or Rhossi first mingling with the Ala∣ni, a Sarmatian people, might get the name of Roxolani; and afterwards possessing the more Northern Countries, or mingling with the Rossi of Mount Taurus (from whom those of Taurica descended) in their enterprises on Constantinople and the parts adjoining; return to their old name of Rossi. The Rhossi, or Russians, were then the first Lords of this Country generally; the Moscovites possessours of a Province only: so called from the Moschi spoken of by Lucan in his Pharsalia; and placed by Pli∣nie near the head of the River Phasis, which rising from the Armenian Mountains, fals into the Euxine. Derived no doubt from Mesech (or Mosoch as the Ancients called him) the son of Japhet planted origi∣nally in the North and North-east of Syria, on the Confines of Cholcis and Armenia, where Plinie as before is said, hath fixed the Moschi, and where there is a long chain of hils, which most of the old Writers call Montes Moschici. But to return unto the Rossi, we hear not of them by this name till the time of Michael the third Emperour of Constantinople, in whose reign they infested the Euxine Sea, and had the boldnesse to attempt the Imperiall Citie, anno 864. said by Cedrenus and some others of the Eastern Writers to be a people of Mount Taurus, (next neighbours to Mesoch or the Moschi.) Fail∣ing in their attempt upon Constantinople, and not willing to goe home again, they spread themselves with their consederates and associates in this expedition, upon the North-west banks of the Euxine Seas, enlarging their bounds Northwards with lesse opposition, then they were likely to have done on the Southern parts: Constantinople being once again in vain attempted in the reigns of Constantine the 7. and Henricus Auceps. Converted to the Christian Faith, or growing into better termes with the Eastern Emperours, Helena daughter of Nicephorus Phoeas, is married to Valadomirus one of their Kings; from that time forwards turning their forces on the Polanders and their weak neighbours; save that, provoked by the death of one of their Countrie, slain accidently at Constantinople in a private quarrell, they made another fruitlesse journey against that Citie, in the time of Michael Calaphates. Enlarging their estate to the West and South, they became masters of a great part of Sarmatia Europaea, Lituania, Podolia, Nigra Russia, and other Provinces now subject to the Crown of Poland; being then parts of their Estate. Anno 1240. the Tartars, under the conduct of Bathu, or Baydo, son of Occata Chan, broke in upon them and subdued them: the Countrie before this entire, under one sole King, being broken afterwards into divers per it and inferiour Governments, according to the will and pleasure of the insolent Victors. The principall of these (descended from the former Kings) were Lords of Vo∣lodomir, Mosco, and some other Cities; held by them with no other Title then Lords of Moscovie; and for that Tributarie to the Tartars, as were all the rest. Under this thraldome they long groaned, till the Tartarian•• being divided amongst themselves, and grown lesse terrible to their neighbours, were outed of their power and command here, by the valour of John, son of Basilius the 2. who thereupon changed the Title of Lord into that of Duke, and after into that of Great Duke, as his fortunes thri∣ved. Yet not so great, but that he was contented to be an Homager of the Tartars: it being finally

agreed on at the end of their wars, that the Tartars should relinquish all their Holds in the Country; and on the other side, that once every year within the Castle of Mosco, the Great Duke standing on foot should feed the horse of the Crim Tartar with oats out of his own cap. This Homage was by Basilius changed to a Tribute of Furres, which being also denyed by his Successours (as they grew in power) occasioned the long warres betwixt the Nations: the Tartars alwayes pressing on them by sudden inroades, sometimes by Armies of no lesse then 200000 fighting men. But notwithstanding all their power, and the friendship of the Turk to boot, the Mo∣scovite is not onely able to assert his Soveraignty, but hath also wrested from them many goodly Provinces.

As for the Princes of this Country I shall not trouble my self (as I see some doe) in tra∣cing a Succession of them as farre as from the times of Augustus Caesar: when neither the Rossi, nor the Moschi had here any footing. We will therefore goe no higher then the time of George, whose daughter Anne I finde to have been marryed to Henry the first of France. From whom in a direct line descended another George, with whom we doe intend to begin our Catalogue, as being the last King of the Russes before the coming of the Tartars: Who wisely yeelding to the storme, waved the title of King, contented only with the title of Lord of Mascovie, the first seat of that power and Soveraigntie, which he transmitted afterwards to his posteritie: affecting for that cause the title of Dukes of Moscovie, (though all the conquered Townes and Territo∣ries have their place also in his style) as much as that of Emperour of Russia. Which some of them have assumed also, since the time of Basilius, who styled himself Basilius by the Grace of God Emperour and Lord of Russia, Great Duke of Volodomir, Moscovie, Novogrod the great, Plescow, Smolensko, Tuver, Jugar, Wiathka, Bulgar, &c. Lord and great Prince of the Lower Novogrod, Czernigow, Rhezan, Wologda, Rsow, Biele, Rostow, Yarossane, Poloskie, Bielloziere, Vdore, Obdora, Condora, &c. King of Casan and Astrachan. But leaving them unto their swel∣ling and Voluminous title, (little inferiour unto that of the Kings of Spain) let us next look on the succession from the time aforesaid, of

The LORDS of MOSCOVIE.

• A. Ch.
• 1 George, the last King of the Russes and first Lord of Mosco.
• 2 Iaceslaus.
• 3 Alexander.
• 4 Daniel.
• 5 John
• 6 John II.
• 7 Basilius.
• 8 Demetrius.
• 9 Georgius II.
• 10 Basilius II.

The Great DUKES.

• 1 John the first Great Duke, who strooke off the Tartarian bondage.
• 2 Basilius Gasan wonne the Provinces of Severia, Roseovia, and Smolensko.
• 3 John Basilius conquered Livonia, and Lituania; both which his successour
• 1548 4 Johannes Basiliades, or Wasiliwich, lost in his age: though in his youth he had subdued the Noyhacensian Tartars to his Empire; and vanquished Selim, Emperour of the Turks, anno 1569. With this King the English first began to confederate.
• 583 5 Theodorus Johannides, the last of the old Royall line of Moscovie.
• 598 6 Boris Theodorus, brother to the wife of the last Great Duke, partly by the last will of his Predecessour, partly by practising with the people, obtained the Empire; but being an unmercifull Tyrant was dispossessed by the Polanders, coming in favour of one
• 1605 7 Demetrius pretending himself to be the son of John Vasiliwich, (and generally believed to be so) preserved in a Monasterie from the tyrannie of Boris, in hatred of whom he was brought in by the Polander, by whose aid he overcame the Tyrant, and rooted out his Familie, and was with great joy crowned Emperour in the Citie of Mosco. But the Russian Lords disdaining to have a Prince imposed on them from Poland, rose in arms against him, and at last vanquished and slew him in the open field, his wife a noble Polonian Ladie, sent poorly home, and the Polanders beaten out of the Country.
• 1606 8 Basil Juanniwich, surnamed Sniskius, the chief of the Conspiratours, was by the rest of his faction chosen Cnez, or Emperour; and held the State with great trouble, till the year 1610. when
• 1610 9 Demetrius II. another pretender to the State, as the son of John Vasiliwich also, in oppo∣sition unto Sniskius set up by a stronger faction, gave occasion to the Polander to work upon this distemper; by whom Sniskius was taken prisoner, Demetrius slain, Smo∣lensko and other great Towns subdued; and Vladislaus Prince of Poland recom∣mended to the Russians to be chosen Emperour. But the Russes loth to fall

• under the power of the Polander, and wearie of their own Confusions, made choice at last, of
• 1615 10 Michael Fedrovitz, son of Theodore the Patriarch of Mosco, who at last setled this vast Empire, and managed it in a more constant way of peace with the Turk, Tartar, Polonian, and Swethlander, then any of his Predecessours had done before him.
• 1646 11 Alexius Michoilywitz (or the son of Michael) succeeded his Father in the Empire, troubled at first with some distempers in the State (as in all other Countries about that time) but now quietly setled, anno 1648.

The Formalities with which these great Emperours are invested or setled in the Throne, are not many nor stately: such as they be, There afford you out of the history of the life of Johannes Basilia∣des, written in Latine by Paulus Oderbornius. On the 2. of June, anno 1583. Theodorus Johannides went towards the Temple of S. Michael, being the principall Church in all Mosco: the streets all covered with flowers, the doores of the Citizens crowned with Garlands; the air echroing with the noise of Flutes and Trumpets, and the people so crowding to behold their Prince, that had not the Guard with naked swords forced a passage through them, it had been impossible for him to have gone on. Being now come to the Church door, the Lords of the Countrie (Cneses they there call them) went out to meet him: and the Archbishop of Mosco clad in his pontificalibus, when he was come into the Church, imbraced him. The pavement of the Church was hidden with Tapestry, and the stals adorned with costly hangings. The Great Duke sate down in his Throne, being attired in a garment of silk, but∣toned down with golden buttons: on his head he wore a purple cap, spangled with rich jewels, and on his fingers abundance of rings. Being thus seated, the Patriarch made a prayer to God, to bless him, his people and his government; which was seconded by the joyfull shouts and acclamations of his Subjects: amongst whom no small store of silver mony was ••lung by the Treasurer, and so they returned to the Palace.

The Government of this Countrie is meerly Tyrannicall, the Emperour being absolute Lord of the lives, lands and goods of all his Subjects: all of them, the noble as well as the base, subscribing them∣selves in their Petitions to him, by the name of Keloptery, that is, Slaves. Whereupon Mahomet a Tur∣kish Bashaw was used to say, that his Master and the Moscovite were the two most absolute Princes in all the world. First, for their goods, when any Embassadour returns home, the Great Duke takes from him all the presents which he hath received, giving him perhaps some small reward, perhaps none at all: and as for lands they passe not from father to son but as l••e confirms it. But more particular∣ly (besides the case of Permia spoken of before) John Vasiliwich sent a command to Mosco to provide a Coal-pack of live Fleas for a medicine; and when the Citizens returned answer that it was impossible, he fined them at 700 Rubbles for their disobedience. Another time he laid a mulct of 300000 Rubbles upon his Nobilitie, because he had no good sport in his hunting; which they again extorted from the common people: and under colour of want, commanded from some Bishops and Monasteries the sum of 100000 Rubbles, from some 50000, more or lesse from others, according unto their re∣renues. And it is usuall with the best of them to cause the Boiares (or Gentlemen which serve on horse-back) to pretend themselves robbed, that he may send unto the Citie to find out the Felon; and on a non est inventus, fine them at discretion, sometimes 8000, sometimes 10000, and sometimes 20000 Rubbles. Then for their lives, there is a storie, that Vasiliwich having found that one of his Secretaries had received a Goose stuffed full of silver for a Bribe, caused him to be brought into the Market-place of Mosco: where without any legall triall he commanded the Executioner first to cut off his legs about the shins, and then his arms about the elbows (still asking the miserable man how he liked Goose-flesh) and in the end to cut off his head in similitude of a Goose ready for the spit. And that they may the better preserve this power, the Great Dukes seldome shew themselves unto the peo∣ple, but in apparell of inestimable value, joining the ornaments of a Bishop unto the majestie of a King, by wearing a Mitre on their heads shining with Diamonds and rich stones: and when they wear it not on their heads, they place it before the chair of state, (over which are the images of Christ and the bles∣sed Virgin) holding in his hands a most rich Crozier staffe, and all their fingers full of rings. And upon solemn festivals and entertainments, the Great Chamber is beset with Cubboards of plate of infi∣nite value, filled with men cloathed with cloth of gold to the very foot; all of them seeming to be men of the chief Nobility, but many times being no other then the gravest and portliest Citizens of Mosco richly apparelled for the time out of the Emperours Wardrobe; which to such as do not un∣derstand the fraud, look like so many Princes, and causeth no small wonder at his magnificence. So that the people seeing him in such royall state, and knowing no more then what they are taught at home, reverence him as slaves, not subjects, and look upon him rather as a God then a King.

Having so absolute a command on their lives and goods, it will be easily supposed that he may raise what forces, and amasse what treasures he hath a minde to. First, for his Forces, it is said that he is able to raise 300000 Horse, if occasion be: and that he may come near that number it is more then pro∣bable, in that John Vasiliwich in his war against those of Astrachan, had actually 120000 Horse; and that a great part of the Country is in the hands of the Boiares, bound by their Tenure to serve with horse whensoever he pleaseth. And that there are 110 men chosen by the Emperour, and by him enfeoffed with lands (during pleasure only,) which for these lands they are to find 65000 horse with all things necessary for the wars; and those in a continuall readinesse, fit for present action. Then for such horse as he himself doth keep in continuall pay, there is not fewer then 25000 which attend

him as a Guard to his person; all of them well experienced men, and fit for service: which added to the 65000 spoken of before, makes up a standing bodie of 90000. Had he foot answerable unto this proportion of horse, there were no dealing with him; but therein his Militia is defective: Vasi∣liwich to his great Armie of 120000 horse having but 20000 foot; the foot-men which he hath in con∣tinuall pay, amounting to 12000 only, farre short of such a standing bodie of horse, as before we spake of. And this defect hath been the reason why the Polanders with far lesse armies have prevailed against them: the Great Duke not being able with all his power to hinder King Stephen of Poland from taking Villocolne or besieging Plescow (though his Armie was not above 60000 both in horse and foot) for want of standing bonds of foot to make good his ground. Generally both horse and foot are very obedient to their Captains and superiour Officers, patiently enduring all discommodities of cold, rain, and hunger; (in that regard fitter to keep a Fortresse then serve in field;) and so regardlesse of their lives in the day of battle, that they will rather lose them then either yeeld themselves Pri∣soners, or demand Quarter.

For his revenues, they may be what he will himself, considering (besides his extraordinary power of oppressing his subjects before mentioned) the many ordinary wayes he hath of amassing treasure, as viz. the forestalling of homebred commodities, and ingrossing the forein; selling them at what price he li••t, and hindering all men else from trade, till his owne be sold; provision of rent-corn, and victu∣all, raised in some years to 200000 Rubbles, rent-wood, and Hay to 30000; pol-money to 400000, cu∣stoms on Merchandise to 800000. By which and other means of collecting moneys, and the Domain of his Crown, though he raise vast sums; yet it is thought, that his houshold charges being deduct∣ed, there remaineth not towards all other expences, three millions of Rubbles, every Rubble being as much as an English Mark.

The Arms are Sable, a Portall open of two leaves and as many Degrees, Or.

There are in RVSSIA

• Patriarch 1.
• Archbishops 2.
• Bishops 18.

And so much for RVSSIA.

OF POLAND.

POLAND is bounded on the East with Russia, and the Crim Tartar, from whom parted by the River Borysthenes; on the West with Germanie; on the North with the Baltick Sea, and some part of Russia; on the South with the Carpathian Mountaines, which divide it from Hungarie and Walachia.

It is an Aggregate body, consisting of many distinct Provinces united into one Estate; of which Poland being the predominant hath given name to the rest called all together the Realm of POLAND: and that so named from Pole, which in the Sclavonian language (the common language of the Coun∣trey) fignifieth plaine, because but little swelled with hills. Of figure round, in compasse 2600 miles; situate under the eight and twelfth Climates; so that the longest day in the southern parts is but 16 houres, and about 18 houres in the parts most North.

The Countrey plaine, but full of woods, which serve to rectifie the Aire, being naturally so cold that they have neither Wine nor Grapes: in stead whereof they use that kinde of drink called Ale; in former times the usuall Beverage of England, and this Countrey onely. Barley they have, and Pulse in such aboundant measure, that no small quantities of each are transported yearly: nor yeeld they any thing at all to Denmarke or Hungarie for their plenty of Cattell. But of this more in our de∣scription of the severall Provinces.

The people are very industrious, and studious of all Languages, especially of the Latine to which they are so devoted, that there is scarse a mean man, who is notable in some measure to expresse himselfe in it. According to their abilities rather prodigall then truely liberall; and good soul∣diers generally. The Peasants live in miserable servitude unto their Lords; the Lords in such equa∣lity of estate amongst themselves, that none of them (excepting the greater Princes exceedeth 25000 Ducats of yearly rent. Proud in their garb, costly in their Apparell, impatient in their humours, and delicate in diet: these last conditions common to the women also, who are for the most part in∣differently fair, and rather wittie then well spoken. But this being the peculiar Character of the Polander properly so called, is not perhaps communicable to the people of the rest of the Provinces, whom we shall speak of severall in their proper places.

The Christian faith was first planted in this Kingdome at severall times, and by severall persons, according to the different parts of which it confisteth: in Poland specially so called, in the time of their Prince Miecislaus sonne of Nemomislus, anno 963. in Livonia, by the Preaching of one Meinardus, anno 1200. or thereabouts; in Lituania not untill the yeare 1386. at the admission of Jagello to the Crown of Poland, and then done (as some say) by Thomas of Walden, (or Waldensis) an English Frier. In Samogitia and Volhinia, at the same time with Lituania. In the rest at other times, and on other occasions, yet so that in many places of it, Idolatry was never totally rooted out, the seeds and practise whereof in many points still remaine amongst them. Corrupted by the superstitions of the Church of Rome, a Reformation was endevoured at such time as John of Has flourished in Bohemia, the next neighbouring kingdome: but by the rigour of Ladislaus the sixth, then King thereof, assisted by his

〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Noblemen, at that time hindered. Afterwards in the time of Luther, some who had stu∣died at 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and Wittenberg, (Universities of Saxonie) brought his opinions home with them in∣to the Province or Poland; as some Dutch Merchants (with the rest of their Commodities) did in∣to Dantz••••k, the chief Towne of Prussia, anno 1525. from whence it spread it selfe over most part of that Country. According as it was favoured or disliked, by the Palatines, Chastellans, and other great men of the Realm; so was its entertainment either good or bad: the Grecians in the mean time taking opportunity, to winne some parts of it to their side; and confirm others in it, who being origi∣nally members of the Church of Greece, because originally converted by the Bishops thereof, did still continue in conformitie and obedience to it. In the end by reason of the over great liberty of the Nobi∣lity and people, and want of power in the King to controul their doings, every man took up what Re∣l••gion he best liked; some following the Augustane Confession, others the Helvetian, others adhering as tenaciously to the Church of Rome; and some inclining to new Sects, or rather to old Heresi••s under new disguises, have brought in such a miscellanie or Babel of Religions into this estate, (Jesuites, Luth••rans, Calvn••sis, Socinians, Arians, Anabaptists, and indeed what not, being here all tolerated) that at last it grew into a By-word, that if any man had lost his Religion hee might finde it in Poland, or else 〈◊〉〈◊〉 it to be vanished. A By-word afterwards applyed unto Amsterdam; communicable since unto other places: Libertas Prophetandi, or the Libertie of Prophecying being now as much allowed of in some parts of Christendome, as Libertas opinandi, was in Rome under Nervas Government; ubi & sen∣t••re quaevelis, & quae sentias l••qui liceat, when as a man might thinke as hee listed of the publick, and speak what he thought. But whether this be such a Rara temporum felicitas, such a felicitie of these our times, as Tacitus conceived the other to be of those; future times will shew.

But to return againe to Poland, notwithstanding this mixture of Religions, yet that most publickly allowed and countenanced is the Religion authorised by the Church of Rome: asserted here by the zeal of the Kings unto that cause, and the great power of the Bishops, who seeing how those of their Order have sp••d in Germanie and other places, under colour of Reformation of some things amisse, have hi∣therto upheld the Ecclesiasticall Estate in the same forme they found it. The Government of the Church as formerly, by 3 Archbishops, and 19 Bishops: who challenge a jurisdiction over all the kingdome, ••ut exercise it upon those onely who submit unto them: those who embrace the Doctrines of Lu∣ther or Calvin, following the formes of Government by them established, as others doe some new ones of their owne devising. And for those Provinces and people which lie towards Greece, or were parts heretofore of the Russian Empire, and still hold a Communion with those Churches; they have Arch∣bishops and Bishops of their owne Religion; that is to say, the Archbishops of Vilne and Lemburg, the Bishops of Polozko, Luzko, Pinsko, Volodomire, Presmil, and Kiovia. Yet amongst all these dif∣ferent Churches and formes of Government there is this conformitie, that whensoever the Gospell is read openly in the Congregation, the Nobility and Gentrie use to draw their swords (according to an antient custom which they had among them) signifying their readinesse to defend it against all op∣posers. Which reason doubtlesse gave beginning to the standing up at the Creed and Gospell, in the primitive times; retained still in the Church of England: whereby we doe declare how prepared and resolute we are to defend the same; though some of late, holding it for a Relick of Popery, with greater nicety then wisdome, have refused to doe it.

Chief Rivers of this Kingdome are 1 Vistula or Wixel, the antient Boundary betwixt Germany and Sarmatia Europaea, which rising in the Carpathian Mountaines, passeth by Cracovia the chief City of Po∣land, and dividing Prussia from Pomerella falleth into the Baltick sea not far from Dantzick; and is navigable for the space of 400 miles, of old called Vandalis. 2 Warta, which runneth through the lesser Poland; 3 Duina the lesse, watering Livonia: and 4 Borysthenes or Nieper passing through Podolia, both spoken of before when we were in Russia. 5 Niester by Ptolemie called Tyras, which falleth in∣to the Euxine Sea, having first parted Podolia from Moldavia. 6 Jugra, by some called the lesser Ta∣nais, arising in Lituania, and falling into the more noted Tanais, which is now called Don. Of lesse note there are, 1 Reuben or Reuhon, 2 Chronu•• now called Pregel, 3 Bogh, said by some to bee the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of the Antients. 4 Minnael, 5 Niemen, the Maeander of these Northern parts. 9 Winde, a Livonian river falling into the Baltick. Mountains of note here are not many, the Countreys for the most part being plain and Champain: and those which be are rather boundaries betwixt this and some other Kingdome, then proper unto this alone. The chief of which are those called Sarmatici, di∣viding G••rmany from Sarmatia Europaea, by Solinus named Sevo, by Ptolemie the Carpathian Mountains; the boundary at this time betwixt Poland and Hungary.

The common metes and Land-markes being thus laid down, we will next take a view of those se∣verall Provinces of which this kingdome doth consist, being ten in number: that is to say, 1 Livonia, 2 Samogitia, 3 Lituania, 4 Prussia, 5 Poland, specially so called, 6 Mollovia, 7 Podlassia, 8 Rus∣sia Nigra, 9 Voltinia, and 10 Pod••lia: all of them (except the proper Poland) within Sarma∣tia Europaea.

1 LIVONIA.

1 LIVONIA or LIEFLAND is bounded on the East with the Empire of Russia, on the West with the Baltick Sea; on the North with the Gulf or Bay of Finland, on the South with Samogitia, and Lituania. Extended in length along the shore of the Baltick for the space of 125 Dutch or 500 Italian miles, & 40

Dutch or 160 Italian miles in breadth:* 1.89 and called thus perhaps from the Lenovi, a people of Germany, inhabiting not far from the River Vistula.

The countrey for the most part plaine, without any mountaines, furnished with corn and fruits in so great aboundance, that they send part thereof into other countries: and yet there is much ground untilled in it, by reason of the bogs and marishes which are very frequent. Here is also store of wax, honey, and pitch, but they have neither oyl nor wine; the want of which last is supplyed by Meth. Of tame beasts fit for mans service they are well provided; as also of such whose skins are of more value with the Merchant, then their flesh at the market; as Ermins, Sables, Castors, others of that kinde; besides good store of game for hunting, the countrey having in it many large woods, parts of the Hercynian. And as for Rivers there are few countries which have more, watered by the Winde, the Beck, the Dwine, the Ruho; all of them falling into the Baltick; many great Lakes, whereof the chiefe is that of Beybas, 45 miles long, and full of fish.

The people are much given to gluttonie and drunkennesse, especially in rich mens houses where it is to be had: for the paisant lives in want enough, meere slaves to their tyrannicall Landlords, who spend in riot and excesse, what these get by drudgerie. And when at any time the poore wretch leaves his Landlord to mend his condition with some other, the Lord if he can overtake him will cut off his foot, to make sure of him for the future. They are a mixture of many Nations, as the Fstones, which are the naturall Inhabitants, (derived from the Estii, a Dutch people, spoken of by Ptolemie) of which Nation are almost all the Paisants; the Moscovites, Swedes, Danes, Dutch, and Polanders, inter∣mingled with them, comming in upon severall conquest, and planting themselves in the best parts of it, in which they still Lord it over the Native, but the Dutch especially for long time Masters of the whole.

The Christian Faith was first here planted by Meinardus of Lubeck imployed herein (in the time of Frederick the first) at the perswasion of some Dutch Merchants who traded hither, by the Archbishop of Breme, by whom made the first Bishop of the Livonians. The Church hereof at this time governed by the Archbishop of Riga, the Bishops of Derpt, As••lia, Oesel, Curland, and Rivallia, in those parts which remaine subject to the Polander, where the Religion of the Church of Rome is onely counte∣nanced. Such parts of it that are under the Swedes or Danes are for the most part of the Lutheran pro∣fession; planted with colonies of that people. But the Estones, or originall Inhabitants, as they have a language: so they have a Religion by themselves also; mixt of the Christian and the Pagan: ex∣tremely well affected unto their Priests, to whom they present salt, candles, and fruites, when they come to them for their blessings; great lovers of Confession, esteemers of holy water, and diligent fre∣quenters of their Churches: but so extremely ignorant in all points of Religion, that there is hardly one in a village that can say his Pater-noster. When they bury any of their dead, every one drinketh an health to him, and powreth his part upon him when his turne comes to drink, putting into the grave with him an hatch••t, wine, meat, and a little money for his voyage. And in some places they are wholly idolatrous (if not converted very lately by the care of the Jesuites) some of them wor∣shipping the Sun, other stocks and stones, and some Serpents also. The language of the Countrey is for the most part the High Dutch (being the language of those Nations who first lorded over them) the Estones having generally a peculiar language, which none of the others un∣derstand.

It was divided formerly into the Provinces of Curland, Eastland, Semigall, Virland, Harland, and Let∣tenland; but these six, since the conquest of it by the ••••landers, are reduced to three: Harland, and Vir∣land, being united unto Estland, and Semigallia unto Curland.

Chief places in Estland are 1 Rivalle, a Bishops See, and well traded Port, situate on the Gulf of Fin∣l••nd; a town belonging to the Swede, the keeping whereof and of Viburg, on the borders of Moscovie stand him yearly in 100000 Dollars. 2 Habsay, or Habses, (Asilia in Latine) a Bishops See, and 3 Pernow, a well fortified place, belonging to the Swethlander also, ever since the conquest of these parts of the countrey by John the second. Places of great importance to the Crowne of Sweden; as all other pieces of this nature are, which standing in an Enemies Countrey not onely do defend our own, but offend our adversaries. For they are not onely dores to open a further passage into their territories, whensoever we shall see occasion; but whilest the Enemie is besieging thereof, or otherwise busyed in recovering them into his power, our owne state is preserved in quiet, and time may yeeld fit op∣portunity to relieve them, if they be distressed, without wasting any part of our proper countreys Of which nature was Calais when it was in the hands of the English; the Garrisons which the Spaniards and Portugu••ze have in Afric and India: the charge of keeping them being sufficiently defrayed (if the charge prove greater then the income, as sometimes it doth) by the advantages they give unto him which hath them. 4 Velin, a strong Town, and fortified with an impregnable Castle, betrayed by the Dutch Garrison, at that time in it, together with William of Furstenberg the great Master, into the hands of John Basilius the great Duke of Moscovie: who still holds it. 5 Derpt or Derbren, (in Latine Tupatum) a Bi∣shops See; situate on the Beck, or Einbeck betwixt two Lakes, in the midst of the Province; and taken at the same time by the Moscovite; who transporting the Livonians into other places, planted thos•• parts with Colonies of his own people. 6 Tornest, a Castle of great strength, taken then also by the Russ••s: but being recovered by the Polander, was blown up with Gun-powder, that it might no more come into the hands of the Enemy. Hitherto nothing of this Countrey which belongs to the Polander; these that follow doe, that is to say 7 Borcholm, the seat and residence of the Bishop of Rivalle, since the taking of that Town by the Swedes. 8 Weisenberg, incommodiously seated betwixt

two ill neighbours, Narve, and Rivalle, but serving very well to prohibit the incursions of those Gar∣risons further into the Countrey. 9 Werneber, in that part of Fstland, which is called Odinpen, and Wittenstein in that part thereof which is named Jervia.

In LETTENLAND, lying in the midst betwixt Estland and Curland, the places of most note are 1 Rita, (the people call it Rig) seated on the mouth of the River Dwina, falling there into the Baltick; first built, and planted at the charges of the Merchants of Breme; after that the Archbishops See, the ordinary residence of the great Master, and the chiefe City of the whole Province of Livonia. A town well fortified according to modern Rules of fortification, with a strong wall, large Bulwarks, double ditches, Palisadoes; and well provided of all manner of Ammunition: a famous Emporie, of great resort by forein Merchants, who carry hence Pitch, Wax, Hempe, Flax, and such other com∣modities. Governed (notwithstanding their subjection to the King of Poland) by their own Laws; and such stout defenders of their liberties, that they will by no means admit of any foreiner to have command of the City; obedient in all other things to the will of that King. 2 Dunamund, an impregnable fortresse, two Dutch miles from Riga, well garrisoned by Polanders, who here take toll of all forein Merchants. 3 Blokaws, a Garrison of the Kings betwixt Riga and Dunamund, where the Merchants are toll••d over again. 4 Winden, more within the land, on the River so called. 5 Wol∣mar, upon the River Treiden. 6 Kokenhan, a strong Towne on the banks of the Dwina. This Coun∣trey belongs wholly to the King of Poland, and stood firm for him in the war made by Charles Duke of Suderman, against his Nephew Sigismund King of Poland and Sweden, when almost all Eastland had submitted to him.

CVRLAND, the third and last member of this division, containing Semigallia also, lieth south of Lettenland, and north of Samogitia and Lituania: an entire Dukedome of it selfe, but holden un∣der the Soveraignty and homage of the kings of Poland. Places of most importance in it, are 1 Can∣den, 2 Goldingen, 3 Kies, (the Dutch call it Wenden) the seat of the Great Master of the Teutonick order in times past; now most frequented as the place of Parliament or Generall Assemblie for affaires which concern the publick. 4 Dubin, 5 Grubin, on the Sea side, but of no trade at all. 6 Halenpot. And then in Semigall, 7 Mitow, the Court and residence of the Dukes of Curland, 8 Selborch, 9 Bassembourg, 10 Do∣belin. No town in all this Dukedome of any trading, though lying for a great space all along the Baltick; because none of them furnished with commodious Havens. A Dukedome first begun in the person of Gothardus Ketler, (of one of the noble families of Danemark) the last Great Master of the Dutch Knights in this Countrey: who in the year 1562 surrendering his order and the whole pos∣session of Livonia to Sigismund Augustus King of Poland, received back again for him and his heirs for ever, the Dukedome of Curland and Semigall, to be held by them of that Crown: the Nobility of these Countreys doing then presently their homage and allegiance to him, as their Hereditary Prince. Since which time the Princes of this house have continued Feudataries unto Poland, but not reckoned as parts or members of the body thereof; not coming to the Diets, nor liable to the publick charges, nor having any thing to doe in the Kings Election: in a word, rather honourable Neighbours of the Kings of Poland, then subjects to them. The present Duke like to be much increased in estate and power, if the now Marquesse of Brandenbourg (whose sister is his mother) should depart without issue: For by that means there will be added to this house the great Dukedome of Prussia, those of Cleve and Gulick, together with such other Countries possessed now by that Marquesse, as he holds by descent from the Heires Generall of those Dukedomes: which makes him cast an eye already upon those Estates.

There belong also to Livonia some few Islands situate in the Baltick Sea, that is to say, 1 Osilia, 2 Dogeden, 3 Mona, 4 Wormse, 5 Wrangen, and 6 Kien. Of which the foure last doe belong to the King of Polands Dacuden, Dogeden King of Swethland; and Osilia or Oesel to the Dane. This last the chiefe of all the six, distant from the maine land of Livonia 12 Dutch miles, 14 of the same miles in length, halfe as much in breadth: the chiefe Towns thereof being Osel, a Bishops See, which gives name to the Island, 2 Sunberg. The Island made subject to the Danes by Magnus, brother of Frederick the se∣cond king of Denmark, who being chosen Administratour of the Bishoprick of Derpt, in Estland, made himself master of this Island, and some other peeces; which, dying without issue, he bequeathed to the King his brother, anno 1580.

As for Livonia it selfe, it was first under the Levoni and Estii two German Nations, from whom the Countrey had the name of Livonia, the people of Estlanders or Fstones. Distracted into many petit principalities, it was made acquainted with the Christian Faith by the care of the Merchants of Bre∣men, as before was said. Meinard their first Bishop being dead, and Bertold his successour slaine by such of the people as had not yet received the Gospell: the knights of the Port-glaive, and the sword were sent hither to defend the Preachers and their Doctrine by force of Arms. Finding themselves too weak to effect the businesse, they united with the order of Dutch Knights in Prussia, to whom from that time forwards they became subordinate; the Great Master of Livonia, acknowledging him of Prussia for his Superiour. These Knights continued Masters of it, without contradiction till the year 1557. (embracing in the meane time the opinions of Luther, anno 1528) when quarrelling with the Archbishop of Riga, of the house of Brandenbourg, because he would not adhere unto their opini∣ons; who to secure his own estate was forced to put Riga into the hands of the Polanders. After∣wards being overlaid by the Moscovite, who had taken from them almost all their Countrey, they

were faine to put themselves under the protection of Sigismund Augustus King of Poland,* 1.90 anno 1559 But William of Furstenburg the Great Master being betrayed by his own Mercenaries into the hands of the Moscovite: Gothardus his successour (following the example of Albert the Great Master of Prussia) transacted with the said Sigismund for the whole estate: which he surrendered to his use in the Ca∣stle of Riga, March 5. anno 1562. together with his Crosse the seale of the Order, the Charters and Grants of many of the Popes and Emperours which concerned the same; as also the Keies of the City and Castle of Riga, the Office of great Master, the rights of coynage, and all the powers and priviledges appertaining to it: receiving back again from Ratzevill the Kings Commissioner, the Duke∣dom of Curland, to him and to his Heirs for ever as before is said. By this transaction the Kings of Pole became masters of Liefland, more absolutely setled in it after a long war betwixt Steven King of Po∣land, and John Vasiliwick the Great Duke of Moscovie, who in the end surrendered all his claim therein to the said Steven and his successours, anno 1582. reserving onely some few Townes on the Easterne borders: the Danes and Swethlanders taking occasion by these troubles to impatronize themselves of Narve, Rivallia, Osel, and some other pieces.

2 SAMOGITIA.

2 SAMOGITIA is a small Province wedged in betwixt Livonia and Lituania, having Livo∣nia on the North, Lituania on the East and South, and the Baltick Sea upon the West: in length extending 50 miles from East to West, but not of answerable breadth. It is so called from the low∣nesse of the situation (the word Samogits in the language of the Inhabitants signifying terram infe∣riorem or the Lowlands) by the Moscovite in the same sense called Samotzkasemla. This lownesse of the situation makes it very watery and almost continually frozen; but withall it hath many forrests which yeeld unto the people aboundance of honey, better, more pleasing to the tast, and lesse mixt with wax then in other places.

The people are supposed to be of the Saxon race, of good stature, well-set, bold and apt for war; but withall, boysterous, rude and barbarous: Christians in generall, but many who doe still retaine their old Idolatries: nourishing amongst them a kinde of foure-footed Serpents, about three handfuls in length, which they worship as their Household gods, attending them with fear and reverence when they call them out to their repast; and if any mischance happen to any of the familie, it is imputed pre∣sently to some want of due observation of these ugly creatures. Naturally inclined to Divinations, Charmes, and Sorceries, and frequently abused (as for the most part such people are) by diabolicall il∣lusions. Nay they which professe the name of CHRIST are so ill instructed, that they use to marry many wives, without confideration of bloud or parentage: it being ordinary for a man to marry with his brothers widow, & not unusuall to marry the Relict of their fathers, (a fornication not so much as heard of in St. Pauls time, amongst the Gentiles). They have some customes also, as unprofitable, as these are heathenish; breaking up their land, as they doe in Moscovie, with spades or sticks. And when one of their Governors observing the husbandrie of other Nations, had brought them to the use of the plough, it fortuned that for two or three yeares, either by the indisposition of the weather or some other accident, they had not so much corn as they used to have. Which want the people attri∣bating to the use of the plough, nec quicquam aliud in causa esse putantes, and not beleeving that there was any other cause of it, grew so much incensed, that the Governour fearing some sedition like to fol∣low on it, was forced to leave them to the old way which before they went. An humour like that of the present Irish in ploughing with their Horses tayles, spoken of before. So pertinacious for the most part are ignorant and superstitious people in standing to their antient customes, though absurd and hurtfull.

Townes they have few, their houses for the generality being poore and low, covered with straw or du••t, with an hole open in the roofe to let in the light. The principall of those they have, (but rather Villages then Towns) are 1 Bigla near the head of the River Swiete, 2 Linkaw, of which no∣thing memorable.

This Province hath alwayes followed the fortunes of Lituania; subject, when that was so, to the kings of Russia; converted when that was, to the Christian Faith; and finally united with it to the Crown of Poland.

3 LITVANIA.

LITVANIA hath on the East the Empire of Russia, on the West Prussia, Massovia, and Poland; on the North, Livonia, and Samogitia, and on the South Volhinia and Podolia. So called from Lituus the ceremoniall staffe, used antiently by the Augures in their divinations: to which the Inhabitants hereof being very much addicted before their receiving of the Gospell, were called Lituani. But this is but conjecturall onely. Yet rather thus then that it should be peopled by some banished Italians, first named Italia, then Litalia, and after by a most unlikely corruption come to Lituania, as Maithias a Michou would fain have it.

The Countrey for the most part full of Mcores, Forrests, some great Lakes, like a Sea for bignesse, and many navigable Rivers: which frozen over in the Winter make the wayes more travellable at

that time of the yeare,* 1.91 then they are in summer. The air in most places exceeding cold, which makes their Wheat (whereof they have some aboundance) to be seldome ripe; and other fruites of the Earth to come slowly forward. Their forrests yeeld them Bugles, Ermins, Sables, Deere, wilde Horses, plenty of Honey, Wax, and Pitch; but their breed of cattell is lesse here, and of smaller sta∣ture then it is in Germany. These Forrests also are the storehouse out of which the English and Hol∣landers furnish themselves with timber both for ships and building; returning to them in exchange salt, wine, and other necessaries which are wanting here.

The people antiently had Fire and Serpents for their Gods, nourishing the last in their houses, and keeping the other continually burning: the Priests and Ministers of the Temples alwayes adding fewell, that it might not faile. The Vestall fire not kept more carefully at Rome, nor with greater ceremonie. To this God whom they called Dishpan, or the Lord of the Smoke, they used to sacrifice young pullets; to the other their Cocks: the seed of this Idolatrie is implanted in them, that it is said, that in a Village of the kings called Lovaniski, not soure miles from Vilna, their chief City, they doe to this day worship Serpents. Converted with their Prince Jagello to the Christian faith, an. 1386. they yet retained such customes as are inconsistent with Christianity: marying and unmarying when and as often as they please; no bond being so soone cancelled as that of Matrimony. For a maried man to use the body of an harlot is accounted (as indeed it is) an opprobrious crime; but for the wife to have her Stallions and Adulterers is a thing so ordinary and unblameable, that the husbands call them their Co-adjutors, and prize them far above the rest of their Acquaintance. The common people in a miserable servitude unto their Lords, pillaged and beaten by them upon any occasion; yet must not come before them with an empty hand. And if any of them have committed a crime de∣serving death, he must hang himself assoon as the sentence is signified to him, or else is beaten and tor∣mented in so cruell manner, that death at last is looked on as a better life.

The countrey is divided into ten parts or Provinces, subject unto the jurisdiction of so many Pa∣latines, that is to say, the Palatine of 1 Vilna, 2 Trock, 3 Minsko, 4 Novogrod, 5 Brestia, 6 Volhinia, 7 Kiovia, 8 Mi••slaw, 9 Vitebsco, 10 Polotzkie. But Novogrod and Polotskie being conquered by the Great Duke of Moscovie, and added unto that estate; and Volhinia reckoned (of late times) for a di∣stinct Province of it selfe, not depending of it: the remaining number is but seven; most of them taking names from their principall Townes. The chief of those, and others which deserve place here, are 1 Vilna a Bishops See, equall in bignesse to Cracow, the chief City of Poland; so called of the River Vil and Viln, upon which it is seated; built there in the year 1305 by one Godemin, a great Prince of these parts: well-walled, but the gates thereof open night and day; large, rich, and well frequented by forein Merchants; especially by those that drive the trade of Moscovie, who have here their Hall; one of the chief ornaments of the City. They have in it also some Churches built of stone (but the most of wood) the principall whereof is the Monastery of S. Bernard, which is a very comely structure. The Natives call this Town Vilenski; the Dutch, Die Wilde. Situate in the very heart of the countrey, the longest day in summer being here 16 houres and halfe a quarter; whereas in the most southern parts of the countrey it is but 16, and in the most northern not fully 18. 2 Kiovia, or Kiof, situate on the Nieper or Borysthenes, where the River Desna fals into it: hereto∣fore a beautifull and most stately City, having in it above 300 faire Churches, of which some remain unto this day; the ruines of the rest to be traced out amongst shrubs and bushes, the receptacles of wilde beasts. The seat at that time of the Metropolitan of the Russian Empire, containing also under his jurisdiction the countries of Walachia in Dacia, and Nigra Russia in Poland. But being destroyed by Bathu or Boydo the Tartarian, in the conquest of these parts by that people; it never could come neer its former lustre; yet still it holds the reputation of a Bishops See, acknowledging the Patri∣arch of Mosco for his Metropolitan; and consequently of the Communion of the Greek Churches, not of that of Rome. 3 Grodua, on the River Chronus, the chiefe Town of the Palatinate of Trock, memo∣rable for the death of Stephen King of Poland. 4 Grumwold, more memorable for the great defeat given neer it by Jagello the Duke of Lituania and King of Poland to the numerous Army of the Dutch Knights invading this Province: so confident of their successe in the undertaking, that they brought with them aboundance of chains and torches; with the one to lead captive the Nobles of Poland, and with the other to fire their Cities. But Jagello, then newly made a Christian, putting his confidence in God, with an Army of untrained souldiers so tamed their pride, that he slew 40000 of them; never recovered of that blow whilest their Order stood. 5 Ponsko, in the Palatinate of Brest; 6 Klow, reck∣oned a countrey of it selfe; and 7 Strissin fortified with a Castle, both under the Palatine of Mieslaw. The rest of the chief Towns may be known by the Palatinates, which they give their names to; but not else observable.

The antient Inhabitants hereof were the Aorsi, Pagarini, Savari, tribes of the Sarmatae Europaei. United into this name of Lituanians, they became subject to the Kings of Russia; till the breaking of that kingdome by the Tartars. At what time Erdizvill then their Prince, (but an Homager and Tributary to the Ru••sians) with drew himselfe from their command: as did also many others of the conquered Provinces. Afterwards Mi••doch, one of the Dukes or Princes of it, being made a Christian, was by Pope Innocent the third honoured with the title of a King, but returning againe unto his vomit, he lost that title. In the end anno 1386. J••gello Duke of Lituania, marying with Heduigis Queen of Poland, was upon three conditions chosen King of that Realm. 1 That he should immediately re∣ceive the Christian faith. 2 That he should draw all his subjects to the same beliefe; and 3 that hee should unite this Dukedome to the Crown of Poland. Of these the two first were performed with∣out

any delay;* 1.92 though the second not without some difficulty; the people being obstinate in their old Idolatry, especially in the religious conceit they had of high trees; which to cut down was held both unsafe and impious. Not to be weaned from this conceit till by the authority of the King their lostiest trees were felled, and their Woods grubbed up: which when they saw done without any danger to the Prince; or any of those whom he employed in that service, Regis mandato & autoritati cedere caperunt, they then began to hearken unto his commands, and generally received the Gospell, and were Baptized. In the last point there was a longer time of deliberation. For the Princes of the house of Jag••llo, loth to deprive themselves of their Patrimoniall estate, which was hereditary unto their po∣sterity; and to subject it to the election of the Polanders, in which it was possible the Princes of their family might be pretermitted: deferred the accomplishment hereof from one day to another, un∣der colour that the Lituanians would revolt, if they went about it. But Sigismund Augustus, in whose person the male issue of Jagello failed, foreseeing what divisions might ensue after his decease, and fear∣ing that the Moscovites would renew their old pretentions; united it unto the Crown: ordaining that the Bishops, Palatines, and a certain number of the Chastellans by him established, should have their place and suffrage in the great Councell of Poland: power in the choosing of the King, and all other priviledges which the naturall Polonians have. Since that accounted a chief Member of that Body Politicke: subject to those corruptions, changes, and innovations in matters of Religion, which have been predominant in the other; excepting those parts onely which relate to the Church of Greece or Mosco, adhering pertenaciously to the rites thereof.

4 VOLHINIA.

VOLHINIA, by some accounted one of the Palatinates of Lituania; (as once it was) but by others a distinct Province of it selfe, is bounded on the North and East with Lituania, on the South with Podolia, and on the West with Russia Nigra, and Podlassia. So called, as Maginus is of opi∣nion, from the Volgari, who dwelling on the banks of the River Volga, came afterwards into this coun∣trey calling it Volgaria, whence by degrees it came unto Volhonia, and at last to Volhinia. But this con∣jecture is improbable and of no good grounds.

The countrey yeelds good plenty both of grain and fruits, Pooles which abound with very good fish, Forrests which doe afford them store of game and honey; and much good pasturage for their cattell. The people of the same nature with the Lituanians, but more strong, and warlike, and better weaned from their old superstitions and heathenish customes, then the others are. Of the same lan∣guage and Religion with those of Russia, to which, together with the rest of Lituania, it did once be∣long: It is divided commonly into three parts or Provinces, all taking name from the three princi∣pall Cities of it; that is to say, 1 Luzke, in Latine called Luceozia, a towne of above 1000 families, where 127 onely, in the time of my Authour were of the Romish Religion; the residue being Rus∣sians, Grecians, and some Armenians; the seat & residence of two Bishops, of which one being of the Com∣munion of the Church of Rome, is of the Province of the Archbishop of Lemburg in Russia Nigra: but they which are of the Communion of the Church of Greece, have also a Bishop of their owne, who acknowledgeth the Patriarch of Mosco for his Metropolitan. 2 Valodomir, a Bishop See also, of the same condition. 3 Keromenze, which (as the rest) hath under it many fair Towns and Castles, besides large Villages. The whole once part of Lituania, as before was said; but of late dismembred from it, and united to the Crown of Poland, as a State distinct. But so, that the greatest part of it is immediately sub∣ject to the Duke of Ostrogoye, who is said to have 4000 Feudataries in this Countrey, the greatest Prince of those who hold Communion with the Church of Greece, in the whole Realm of Poland.

5 PODOLIA.

PODOLIA hath on the North Volhinia, part of Lituania, and the great Empire of Russia, on the South Moldavia, from which parted by the River Tyras, now called Niester: on the West Russia Ni∣gra: extending Eastward through vast uninhabited countries, as far as to the Euxine Sea. The reason of the name I finde no where guessed at, the people for the most part of the same nature with the Rus∣sians, to whose Empire it formerly belonged.

The Country generally so fertile, that the husbandman is accustomed to reap an hundred for one, in regard it bears at one ploughing for three years together: the countreyman being put to no further trouble, then at the end of the first and second yeares, to shake the corn a little, as he reaps or loads it, that which so falls serving as seed for the next yeare following. The meadow grounds so strange∣ly rich, and luxuriant, and the grass so high, that a man can hardly see the heads or horns of his Cattell: of so swift a growth, that in three days it will cover a rod which is throwne into it, and in few more so hide a plough, that it is not an easie work to finde it. If these things seeme beyond beliefe, let Maginus who reporteth them, bear the blame thereof: though better take it on his word then goe so far to disprove him. And yet which addes much unto the miracle, the ground in most places so hard and stony, that there need six yoke of Oxen to break it up, to the great toyle both of the Cattell and the men. It is also said that in this countrey there are great flocks of sheep, many

heads of Oxen,* 1.93 abundance of wild beasts, and great store of honey. And yet for all this plenty and abundance of all things necessarie, the Country for the most part, especially towards the East, is but meanly inhabited; by reason of the frequent incursions of the Tartars bordering next unto it. Who have so wasted it in times past, and thereby so discouraged the people from building, planting, and all other works of peace and husbandrie, that in so large and rich a Countrie, there is nothing to be seen but some scattered houses, few Villages, and not above from Towns of note, viz. 1 Or••zakow, at the influx of the Borysthenes or Nieper into the Euxine sea. 2 Vaszow, at the fall of the River Bog into that of Nieper. 3 Braclaw, more high upon the Bog. 4 Camienecz, on the borders of Russia nigra, built by some divine hand as it were amongst the precipices of high and inaccessible Rocks; and so well fortified withall, that it is impregnable; as is apparent by the many and great repulses, which the Turks, Tartarians, and Valachians, have received before it, with much shame and losse. 2 Lemburg, remarkable for the sawces or salt-meats, which they send thence into other Countries.

6 RUSSIA NIGRA.

RVSSIA NIGRA hath on the East Volhinia, Podolia, and Moldavia; on the West Mazo••ia and Poland, specially so called; on the North Lituania, and Podlassia; and on the South the Sarmati∣an on Carpathian Mountains. It is called also Roxolania from the Roxolani, a chief people of Sarma••••a Europaea, and by some Ruthenia: but generally Russia, from the Rossi spoken of before, in the Empire of Russia, who spread themselves over all these parts. Some hold that it was first called Rosseia which signifieth in the Sclavonian language a scattered Nation, or a Nation disseminated, and dispersed into many parts; and that this was the name generally of all that spake the Sclavonian tongue, and fol∣lowed the religion and ••ites of the Church of Greece: extended from the frozen Seas to the Adriatique, and from the Euxine to the Baltick. This and a greater tract of ground I grant to have been hereto∣fore possessed by divers Nations under the name of Sclavonians; a very considerable part of Germany and P••land being conquered by them. But for the name of Russia, given at first to all the Russian Em∣pire, distinguished now into Russia Alba, and Russia Nigra, I adhere unto my former Vote: conceiving that it came from the Rossi, an Armenian people, inhabiting about Mount Taurus, who in the year 864 or there abouts, attempted the taking of Constantinople, and after placed themselves on the Northern banks of the Euxine, getting ground of the Sclavonians to the North and East, till they had made themselves masters of all Russia Alba, Lituania, Volhinia, Podolia, and this Russia Nigra. Distinguished from the former by the adjunct of Nigra, after the destruction of that great Empire by the coming in of the Tar∣tars, either from the colour of their garments, or their black and more southernly complexion. In which regard called also Russia Meridionalis, or the Southern Russia.

The Country is generally fruitfull, abounding in Horses, Oxen, Sheep, Sables, and Foxes: such store of Bees that they breed not only in Hives and hollow trees, but in Rocks and Caves. Well wa∣tred both with Pools and Rivers, affording them great plenty of fish; more naturally spawning here then in other places, insomuch that if a Pond be digged, and spring accordingly, the fish will breed therein of their own accord without being brought from other waters. The greatest want hereof is wine, either supplyed with Mede, or from other places. And it is said, that in the Terri∣torie of Cheline the branches of the Pine trees left upon the ground for three years together, will be converted into stone.

The people are generally valiant, and so strong of bodie, that they use Bows of 12 foot long. Being formerly governed by Dukes, they doe but ill brook the name of King; which much induced the Kings of Poland to send Colonies of naturall Polonians into most parts of the Countrie, insomuch as most of the Knights and Gentrie of it are of that extraction, and follow the religion of the Church of Rome: the Paisants and originall inhabitants of it being more generally affected to the Rites and doctrines of the Church of Greece.

Places of most importance in it are, 1 Chelme, in the Territorie whereof it is affirmed, that the branches of Pine trees left upon the ground for three years together, are converted to stone. 2 Pre∣misten, 3 Halitz, 4 Belzo, 5 Grodeck, and 6 Leopolis, by the Natives called Lemburg, built by one Leo a Moscovite, a Town of great traffique, and an Archbishops See, who is of the Religion of the Church of Rome. But the Patriarch of Mosco hath here also an Archbishop of his own ordaining, there being Churches both in the Citie it self, and all Russia generally (as before was said) which are of the com∣munion of the Church of Greece. There are also in this Citie some Armenian Merchants who have a Church, a Bishop, and some Priests of their own religion.

Of the affairs of this Province, and how it was a part once of the Russian Empire, hath been said already. Dismembred from it by the Tartars, it had a while Dukes or Provinciall Governours, sub∣ject and tributarie unto those Barbarians: as had also Podolia, its next neighbour. Both conque∣red by the Polander, were for a time kept under by strong hand, and the power of Garrisons. But be∣ing upon all occasions apt to revolt, by reason of the hard hand which the Kings held over them, (by whom treated rather like slaves then subjects) they were assured unto the State by giving them the same liberties and immunities both for the Nobilitie and the Commons, which the naturall Polonians had; and by that means made fellow-members of that Common-wealth. The Act of Ladislaus the 6. the son of Jagello, imitating therein the ancient Romans, who much augmented their forces, and assu∣red their Estate, by communicating the freedome of Rome, and the priviledges of Latium to many of

〈…〉〈…〉.

7 MASSOVIA.

MASSOVIA is bounded on the East with Lituania, on the West with 〈◊〉〈◊〉 specially so called, on the North with Prussia and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, on the South with Russia Nigra or 〈◊〉〈◊〉. So called 〈…〉〈…〉 one of the Dukes hereof; who in the year 1045. being vanquished by Casi••••••e Duke of Poland, 〈◊〉〈◊〉 into ••••ussia and there unfortunately dyed.

The Countrie large, and for the most part full of woods, where they finde store of Bug••••s and wild 〈◊〉〈◊〉 The people strong, valiant, and couragious in war: differing little from the 〈◊〉〈◊〉 in speech, manners, or apparell; save that they use a kinde of whistling, which the others do not. The principall Towns of it, are 1 Marschow, the chief of the Province, and heretofore the residence of the Duke or Prince, remarkable for the best M••de or Metheglin. 2 Egr••d Czirko, 3 Poltouvoski, 4 Gadz••ck, 5 Lozara, 6 Dro••e, the seat of a Palatine, but not else observable.

This Province was once subject to Princes of its own, not subject or subordinate unto any Superi∣our. Of which number that Masso was one, from whom named Massovia. In the years 1246. and 1260. being strangely wasted and distressed by Mind••y Duke of Lituania; they were fain to put themselves under the power of the Polander: by whom made the portion of the second son of that Kingdom. But John and Stamslaus the two last Dukes hereof, dying without issue, it returned unto the Kings of Poland, by whom incorporate to that Crown, and priviledged in the election of the King, and all matters which concern the publick, as all others of the Polonians are, anno 1526.

8 PODLASSIA.

Podlassia is bounded on the East with Volhinia, on the West with Prussia▪ on the North with Li∣tuania, and on the South with Massovia, and Russia nigra. The reason of the name I know not. The Coun∣trie not much differeing from those before, the people a mixt generation of Russes, Moscovites, and Po∣l••nians; partake a little of the manners and garbe of those severall Nations from which they lineally are descended.

Places of most importance in it, are 1 Bielsko, 2 Brunsko, 3 Suras, all of them having fair and ample Territories. 4 Tykdiskin, strongly fortified and well garrisoned, as being the place where the Kings Treasures are kept. 5 Knyssin, beautified with a royall Palace and a pleasant Park, wherein are store of wilde beasts for hunting, and fish-ponds very well replenished. 6 Narew, 7 Vasilkow, and 8 Augustow, a very strong Town, built and well fortified by Sigismund Augustus, and by him thus na∣med, anno 1569. at what time he dismembred this Province from Lituania, to which before it apper∣tained; uniting it forever to the Crown of Poland.

9 PRUSSIA.

PRVSSIA is bounded on the East with Lituania, and Podlassia; on the west with Pomerania; on the North with the Baltick Sea; and on the South with Poland and Massovia. Called first Borussia from the Borussi, who subdued it (of whom more anon) which by an easie alteration was changed into Prussia, by which name still called.

The Countrie is extended all along the Baltick Sea, from the Citie of Dantzick in the west, to La∣bian on the mouth of the Maillank East, for the space of 50 Polish miles; and from Torune bordering on Massovia, to Memel in the confines of Lituania, 58 miles of the same measure. The air thereof very mild and temperate, the soil both profitable and pleasant; full of Lakes and Rivers stored with fish, plentifull of corn and other necessaries, and well clad with Forrests which yeeld them game for hun∣ting, rich skins for profit, and abundance of honey. Of which last they make Mede for their own use (their ordinarie drinke where there is no wine) and fell the rest unto the Merchant. But the com∣moditie wherein they doe excell their neighbours, is their plentie of Amber, which is the juice of a stone which groweth like a Corall in a Mountain of these Baltick Seas, covered quite with water, and shunned by Mariners 3 leagues off for fear of Shipwrack: the Mountaine reasonable large, about 50 yards high of English measure. And when any tempest riseth in these Northern Seas, especially in September and December, the liquor by violence thereof is rent from the rock, and cast into divers Ha∣vens and on divers Coasts of this Countrie, and sometimes upon those of Sweden and Pomerania: the people leaping into the Sea when it rageth most, whence they take up first some store of weeds, after that this Liquor; which being taken out of the water hardneth like to Corall. Besides the beau∣ty hereof and the quality it hath of attracting straws and iron, as the Adamant doth, burning like pitch, and others of this nature; it is excellent good for stopping bloud, all kinde of Agues, falling-sicknesse, dropsies, stone, colick, weaknesse of stomach, head-ach, and the yellow jaundise.

The people,* 1.94 especially the Gentrie, descend from the Germans, and retain much of their nature having more art and industry then the other Polonians, and being more tenacious of their ancient cu∣••omes. Idolaters for long time together, converted first unto the Faith, in the time of the Emperor Frederick the 2. by whose setting on they were subdued by the order of the Dutch Knights, anno 1215. and either wonne or forced to the Christian Faith. As Christians, governed since the first plantation of the Gospell by the Bishops of Culm, Warme, Samb••a, and Pomesan, suffragans to the Archbishop of Guesna: under whom those parts of it doe still continue, which have not yet forsaken the Church of Rome: the Lutherans, Calvinians, and other separate Congregations distinct from them, having their own forms both of doctrine and discipline.

Few Provinces of the North are better watered then this is, both for Lakes and Rivers: some of the Lakes 7 Dutch miles in compasse, and well stored with fish; the Rivers 12 in number, that is to say, 1 The Vistula, 2 Chronus, 3 Nogat, 4 Elbing, 5 Vasera, 6 Passaria, 7 Alla, 8 Pregel, 9 Ossa, 10 Drebmez, 11 Lica, and 12 Lavia, all plentifully stored with fish; besides a large Sea coast both for trade and fishing, no small commoditie to the Natives.

The Country formerly divided into twelve Dukedomes, (so they called the parts and fractions of it) was by the industrie of the Dutch Knights so adorned and beautified (after they had once brought it under their obedience) that there were no fewer then 72 Castles and 62 good Towns of their foun∣dation. Which number being much increased in these later times, hath made it the most flourishing part of the whole kingdom of Poland. But the Order of these Knights being suppressed in this Coun∣trie by an agreement betwixt Sigismund the first King of Poland, and Albert of Brandenbourg, the last great Master of the Order; both Towns and Countrie are divided between the successours of the said Alber•• as Dukes of Prussia, and of the said Sigismund as Kings of Pole; the Dukedoms or divisions of Hogerland Warme, Galmadia, Micklow, Calmigeria, with the Citie of Mariemberg, the Soveraignty of Dantzick, and Melvin, with the whole Countrie of Pomerella lying on the West side of the Vistula, being allotted to the King; the residue containing the divisions of Schalavonia, Sambia, Natangia, Nadravia, Ba••vnia. Sudavia, and Pomesama, (except the City and Territorie of Mar••emberg) to the Dukes o•• Prussia.

Chief Towns belonging to the Duke, are 1 Mimel, a well frequented Port, the Mart town for the commodities of Lituania, which are brought hither, and here bought by the forein Merchant: part of this Province interposing betwixt Lituania and the Baltick. 2 Coningsberg, as the Dutch; Regim••m, as the Fre••ch; and Mons Regius, as the Latines call it, situate in the Province of Sambia, at the bottome of a Gul••e or Bay, where the Pregel falleth into the Baltick Sea, built by the Dutch Knights in the year 1260, and made an Universitie by Albert the first Duke hereof, 1525. the seat and principall residen••e of his succeslours: as also of the Bishops of Sambia, in Latine called Sambienses, by the name of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Province. 3 Mubneburg, founded by the Dutch Knights, anno 1279. 4 Brandenburg, on the South side of that bay, but more near the Sea; built, as I gueste, by some of the great Masters of that familie 5 Ragmtz, the furthest town of note towards Litua••ia. 6 Angersburg, in Sclavenia, as was also Ragnitz. 7 Nordenburg in Ba••tonia. 8 Ottelburg in Galmdia, of which little memorable. 9 Marienwerder, the fur∣thest of the Dukes estate towards the Vistula, and the ordinary residence of the Bishop of Pomesan. Besides which there are reckoned in this division, 80 good towns more, and about 54 Castles, though not of much observation in the course of storie.

Chief towns pertaining to the King are 1 Braunsberg, upon a Bay of the Baltick Sea, which they call Frisch Haffe; a town of good trade by reason of the commodious Haven; and the ordinarie re∣sidence of the Bishop of Warmia. 2 Frawenburg, on the same Bay, not far from Braunsburg. 3 Elbing, on the same Bay, not far from a fair and fishfull Lake, well traded, rich, and full of very wealthie Merchants. 4 Ressel, the chief town of the Diocese and Dukedome of Warmie. 5 Strasburg, in Mich∣low, confining on Poland specially so called; at the siege whereof by Gustavus Adolphus King of Swe∣den, anno 1628. Elias Tripe, one of the Engineers of that King, found out the use of Leather Ordinance, which afterwards did that King great service in his wars of Germany. 6 Culm, on the River Vistula, a Bishops See. 7 Mariemburg, on the Nogat, built by the Dutch Knights, anno 1302. and made the seat of the Great Masters of their Order, translated first from Ptolemais or Acon in Syria, to the citie of Venice; from thence to Marpurg, and at last to this place by Sifride the twelfth Great Master of it: whose con∣stant residence in this town, occasioned the Bishop of Culm to remove thither also. A very fair and well-built citie, the chief of those which do belong to the King of Poland: by whom so well garri∣soned and furnished with such store of victualls, ammunition, and all other necessaries, that it wa•• thought able to hold out for a six years siege. But it proved otherwise when besieged by the King of Sweden, who took it in lesse space then so many months; on the setling of a peace betwixt the Crowns rendred again unto the King of Poland. Beneath this town down towards the Baltick is a pleasant Island made by the Nagot and the Wixell, for the fertilitie of the soil, and the great numbe•• of houses, villages, and people, not equalled (for the muchnesse of it) in all this Countrie. 8 Ne••∣burg, on the west side of the Vistula or Wixel, in the Countrie called Pomerella, once part of Pomerania but given by Swantibore Duke of Pomeren, anno 1107. to Bugeslaus his second son; whose posterity enjoyed it till the year 1295. when Mestevin the 2. dying without issue male, gave it to Primislaus Duke of the Polonians, whose successours have ever since enjoyed it by that donation. 9 Dirschaw or Darsaw, (in Latine, Darsovia) a well fortified Town and of great importance, on the same side of the River, and the same Countrie of Pomerella. 10 Dantzick, in Latine called Dantiscum, and sometimes Geda∣num, situate on the same side of the River also, a fair and well-built Citie, the houses for the 〈◊〉〈◊〉

part of brick, and the rest of stone; raised with great beauty and magnificence six or seven floores high: beautified with a fair Councell-house for affairs of State, and many publick gardens for dis∣port and exercise. It consisteth of three Cities governed by as many Senates; the one called Fur∣stat or the fore-Citie, the second Altstat or the old Citie, and the third Reichstat or the Emperours Citie: but all encompassed with one wall, and governed by one chief Senate or Common-Councel chosen out of all three. A Bishops See, and the second in esteem and rank of all the Hanse towns; of so great trade and such a noted Granarie of all sorts of corn issued from hence to supply the wants of all other Countries, that 1000 measures of wheat (besides other commodities in proportion) are here dayly sold. Heretofore it was reckoned as Imperiall, but now esteemed a Free-Estate, ac∣knowledging the Kings of Poland for their Protectours; to whom they allow many customes upon their merchandise, and permit his Officers to abide there for receiving of them. The first town in the Kingdome of Poland which gave entrance to the doctrines of Luther, anno 1525. but in so tumultuous a manner, that they that favoured his opinions, deposed the old Common-Councell men and created new ones of their own, prophaned the Churches, robbed them of their ornaments, and shamefully abused the Priests, and Religious persons, abolished the Masse, and altered all things at their pleasure. But by the coming of the King they grew somewhat quieter: Having one Convent of Black Friers, and two of Nuns, who still enjoy the exercise of their Religion. 11 Melvin, a noted Port Town and of great resort, especially by the English Merchants, who had here their Staple for the Bal∣tick. A small, but fair and well-built Citie, and fortified with a very good wall: governed like Dan••k, after the manner of a Free Estate or Common-wealth, under the patronage and protection of the Kings of Poland.

The ancient inhabitants hereof were the Venedi, the most potent Nation of this tract, exten∣ded all along the coast of the Baltick, from them by Ptolemie called Sinus Venedicus, containing un∣der them the Gythones, Phinni, Sulanes, Phrungudiones, Avarini; and more within the land, the Sudi∣ni, and Galindae, whose name the Dukedome or Province of Galindia, doth still retaine. But great and potent though they were, they were subdued by the Borussi, inhabiting at the foot of the Riphean Mountaines; who weary of their own cold and barren dwellings, removed into the Western parts, and vanquishing the Venedi and those other Nations, possessed themselves of this Country, which they called Borussia; now by us named Prussia. By Venedus one of their Princes, having 12 sons in all, it was divided into 12 Provinces or Dukedomes, one for every son, continuing by that means distracted into divers petit principalities, till the coming of the Marian or Dutch Knights, sent hither by Frederick the 2. anno 1215. by whom the Provinces or Dukedomes of Su∣davia, Michlow, and the greatest part of Nadravia, were laid waste and desolate, the rest submit∣ted to their power and received the Gospel. After this it continued change of Masters, they revolted to the King of Poland, to whom they offered their obedience: seconded by the yeeld∣ing up of Mariemberg, with many other Towns and Castles sold to King Casimir by the Garrison Souldiers, anno 1457. for 476000 Florens. But the Knights disdaining to be so dealt withall, and refusing to swear allegiance to the Kings of Poland, they brake out into open war; managed with variable successe on both sides; Ludovicus the then Great Master, being so successefull at the first that he once beat the King out of the field, routed his whole Armie, slew 30000 of his men upon the place, and took 136 of his chief Nobilitie: not vanquished at last but by the treachery and rebellion of his own people. In the end wearied and worn out on both sides by continuall wars, Albert of Bran∣denbourg then Great Master, having for 14 years together couragiously maintained the honour of his Order, and for the 4 last years importuned in vain the assistance of the Emperour and Princes of Germanie, began to think of some expedient to compound the businesse. Being inclined to Luthers doctrines, and willing to advance himself unto this Estate, he secretly practised with Sigismund the first of Poland, to end the war to the advantage of both parties. By whom at last it was agreed that Albert should relinquish his Order, and surrender all Prussia into the hands of the King; that the King pos∣sessing the Western parts with the town of Mariemberg, and the soveraignty of Dansk and Melvin, should invest Albert with the title of Duke of Prussia, estating on him and the heirs of his bodie, the whole Eastern Moietie, containing the Provinces or Dukedoms before specified; and finally, that Al∣bert and his heirs should hold the said Estate as Homagers to the Crown of Poland, taking place in all Assemblies at the Kings right hand. According to this agreement, anno 1525. Albert, attired in the compleat Habit of Master of the Dutch Order, presents himself humbly on his knees before King Sigis∣mund at Cracow, the King then sitting on his Throne. The King raising him from the ground, cau∣sed him to put off those robes and attire himself in a Ducall Habit; which done an instrument was read and published, whereby the King conferred upon him and the heirs of his body the Dukedome of Prussia, to be held of him and his successours Kings of Poland. An act at which the whole Order were extremely incensed, but they could not help it; and thereupon retired into Germanie, where there were some good lands left to maintain such of them as had no mind to quit that militarie honour: lea∣ving their old Estates in Prussia to the King, and the Duke; whose successors have hitherto enjoyed their part of it with the Title of

DUKES of PRUSSIA.* 1.95

• 1525 1 Albert Brandenbourg, son of Frederick Marquesse of Onalsbach, or Ansbach, created Master of the Order by the Emperour Maximilian, anno 1511. and the first Duke of Prussia by Sigismund the first of Poland, anno 1525. founded the Universitie of Coningsberg, anno 1544.
• 1563 2 Albert Frederick, son of Albert the first Duke, marryed Mary Eleanor daughter of William Duke of Cleve, Gulick, Berg, &c.
• 3 Anne, Eldest daughter of Duke Albert Frederick Dutchesse of Prussia, brought the Estate in marriage to
• 4 John Sigismund, Marquesse and Elector of Brandenburg confirmed therein by Sigismund the 3. of Poland, pretending an Escheat thereof for want of heirs males of the bodie of Albert the first Duke.
• 5 George William, Marquesse and Elector of Brandenburg, and Duke of Prussia in right of the Lady Anne his mother; and of Cleve, Gulick, Berg, &c. by descent from Mary Eleanor his Grandmother.
• 6 Frederick William, son of George William, Marquesse and Elector of Brandenburg, Duke of Prussia, Cleve, Gulick, and Berg; of whose investiture in the Dukedome of Pomeren, and other large and goodly Signeuries, we have spoke elsewhere.

As for the Government of this Province, standing thus divided, that of the Duke is more Monar∣chicall then that of the King; the one being absolute and uncontrollable in his Estates, the other sub∣ject to the great Councell of Poland. If any difference grow between them, Delegates appointed by the King, but taking a new Oath to doe equall justice, either at Mariemberg or Elbing, do compound the businesse: who together with some others of the Dukes nomination, receive all Appeals, in which the Duke is interessed as one of the parties.

The Revenues of this Dukedome are thought to be 120000 Ducats yearly.

The Armes thereof are Argent, an Eagle Vert, Membred and Crowned Or, langued Gules.

10 POLAND.

POLAND properly and specially so called, is bounded on the East with Massovia, Podlassia, and Lituania; on the West with Silesia, and the Marquisate of Brandenburg; on the North with Prussia, and on the South with the Sarmatian or Carpathian Mountains, which divide it from Hungarie. It is in length 480 Italian miles, 300 of the same miles in breadth; and took this name (as afore is said) from the word Pole, signifying as much as plain; the Countrie being plain and levell, little swelled with hils.

The Air hereof is pure and healthy, but sharp and cold; the Countrie plain, shaded with thick dark woods, parts of the Hercynian, full of wild beasts for hunting, and of Bees for honey, which they have here in great abundance: together with such plenty of grain, but of Rie especially, by rea∣son of the continuall breaking up of new grounds gained out of the Forrests, that it may be called the Granarie or Store-house of the Western parts of Europe; sent down the Wixel unto Dantzick, and thence transported by the Merchant into other Countries, according to their severall wants.

The Character of the people we have had before; adding now only that in matters of war they are stout and resolute; so forwards in giving the charge and pursuit of the enemie, that John Vasi∣••wich the Great Duke of Moscovie, comparing them with the Souldiers of his own Dominions, was wont to say, that the Moscovites wanted a spur to drive them forwards; and the Polanders had need of a bridle to hold them back. Their language is the Sclavonian tongue; most generally spoken also in the rest of the Provinces, but with some difference in the dialect, or pronunciation.

It is divided commonly into two parts, the Greater and the Lesser Poland. The Greater lying wholly on the Western side of the Wixel, and so accounted anciently as part of Germanie, contains 9 divisi∣ons, under the jurisdiction of the 9 Palatines of 1 Posna, 2 Kalisch, 3 Siradia, 4 Lancitia, 5 Vratislaw, 6 Brestus, 7 Rava, 8 Ploczko, and 9 Dobrzin: each of them so called from some Town of note. The chief whereof, and of the rest contained in them, are 1 Posna, a Bishops See, and the principall of the Greater Poland, seated amongst hills on the River Warta; built of free-stone, with very large Suburbs beyond the River: but much subject unto inundations, which adde much strength unto the place: of great resort by reason of the Marts or Fairs holden twice a year. 2 Koscien, situate amongst Marishes and ••ortified with a double wall. 3 Ostresow, bordering on Silesia, begirt with woods. 4 Guesna, the antientest town of Poland, founded by Lechus their first Prince, the seat of him and his successours till removed to Cracow, situate in Kalisch, and by old prescription, the first place for the inaugurati∣on of the Kings of Pole: in regard that here Prince Bo••••slaus the first King received the Regall Diadem

at the hands of Otho the third. The town well-walled, and the See of the Archbishop, who is the Primate of the kingdome, by antient priviledge the Popes Legat for all Sarmatia Europaea, and in the absence of the King or interregnums the Vicar Generall of the kingdome, having power to summon the Diets, to conclude and publish their Decrees. 5 Petrocow, a walled Town, in the Palatinate or di∣vision of Siradia, situate in a moorish soyle; the place in former times of the Generall Diets, since re∣moved to Warsaw. 6 Viadislaw on the Wixel or Vistulae, a Bishops See. 7 Bedost, a walled Town on the Bard, a navigable River, conveying the Merchandise of these parts into the Vistula. 8 Kruswick in Bresty, built of wood, standing on a great Lake named Gopla in the Castle whereof Popielus the second Duke of Poland, was after a strange manner devoured with Rats, swarming out of the Lake. 9 Ploczko, upon the Vistula, a walled Town, and a Bishops See, with a Castle to it; and 10 Mlawa, bor∣dering on the Dukedome of Prussia.

The LESSER Poland lying on the South of the Greater, and divided by the River Wixel, com∣prehendeth onely three divisions, under the Government of the Palatines of Craco••, 2 Sendomir, and Lublin. Principall Cities of the which are 1 Craco••, upon the Wixel, (called in Latine Cracovia) a Bishops See, the chief of all the kingdome, and the seat of the Prince, and the Sepulture of the for∣mer Kings. By Ptolemie called Carodunum; fortified with a double wall (of the old fashion) a deep ditch, the Castle of Vanel situate on the top of an high rock; and beautified with an University•• or generall study of good Arts and Sciences. The buildings 〈◊〉〈◊〉 more faire then elsewhere in Poland, of free stone, and foure stories high, but for the most part covered with Shingles, or tiles of wood: in the midst a large market-place of form quadrangular; and in the middle of that the Common-councell house, about which are many shops of Merchants. On one side of it standeth the Cathedrall Church; and on the East-side of the City, the Palace Royall, high seated on an hill over looking both the Town and Countrey, fair and well built, of form somewhat neere a Quadrangle; but lying open to the South without any buildings above the wall; affording thereby to the Gallery, being on the North side of the Castle the more excellent prospect. 2 Lelow, a walled towne with a Castle, on the River Bialo. 3 Sendomir, a walled town with a Castle also, seated on a hill, under which the Vi∣stula or Wixel. 4 Wislicza, a walled town amongst Marishes, encompassed with the River Nid. 5 Lub∣lin, a walled town, but more strongly fortified by the marishes and wates, with which environed: re∣markable for three yearly Marts, drawing hither Merchants from most parts adjoining, as also Mo∣scovites, Armenians, Turkes, and Grecians: the Jews, inhabiting the greatest part of the suburbs, have here their Synagogue; making the Town, especially at time of those Marts, a medley of all Nations and Religions. 6 Casimir, on the Wixel, so named from the founder of it, a King of Poland.

The old Inhabitants of this countrey, were the Arii, Helverone, Elysii, and the Naharvali, parts of the Suevi Lygii spoken of by Tacitus; all of them lying on the Dutch side of the Wixel, by conse∣quence, within the bounds of the antient Germanie: the people of all the rest of the Provinces before described, being of the Sarmatian race, next neighbours to the Germans, and not much unlike them in persons, customes, or conditions. But these dispersed and scattered Nations of Sarmatia Europaea, be∣ing united in the common name of Sclaves, part of them setled in that part which we now call Po∣land, at that time reckoned and accompted of as a part of Germanie. The time of their first comming hither, and the manner of their government when first setled here, is not very well known. But for the first it is most certain, that it was some time, and that not long after the death of Mauritius the Eastern Emperour: and for the next it is as certain, that on the coming of Lechus, a Croatian, who fled his countrey for a murder, with his brother Zechius, they setled into a more constant form of Go∣vernment, then before they did. For Lechus seeing his brothers good successe in Bohemia, where the Sclaves received him for their Prince; passed into Poland, the next Province, and was as cheerfully re∣ceived by the Sclaves thereof: who looked upon him as a Prince of their own extraction, and with∣out quarrell or competition submitted themselves to his commands, anno 650. or thereabouts. Of this there is good constat amongst our Authours. But neither the names or number of his succes∣sours doe occur in story, till the time of Crocus, the founder of Cracovia, the chief City of Poland, and the Legislator of this people. After this the succession of their Princes and the successe of their affairs, becomes more certain: the Estate hereof being much improved, by the conquest of many Sarmatian countreys, all which together constitute and make up the kingdome of Poland, so called from this predominating and prevailing Province. The summe of their affaires is this. The posterity of Cro∣••us failing in Popielus the second, Piastus is elected Duke, the Princes from that time forwards, be∣coming Elective, but alwayes with respect to the next of bloud. In the time of Mi••cislaus son of Nemomystus they received the Gospell, anno 963. Boleslaus the son of Miecislaus, was the first who had the title of King conferred upon him by the Emperour Otho the third, about the yeare 1001. relin∣quished by Vladislaus the first, and not resumed againe till the time of Primislaus, Duke of Posna, anno 1300. after which perpetuall. In the person of this Primislaus, Pemerella is united to the state of Po∣land, anno 1295. in that of Jagello, or Vladislaus the fifth, the great Dukedome of Lituania; incorpo∣rated into this body as a Member of it, in the time of Sigismund Augustus. By Vladislaus the sixt, son of Jagello, Podolia and Russia Nigra, are also added; by Sigismund the first Prussia, and Massovia; Podlas∣sia by Sigismund Augustus, who also tooke Volhinia out of Lituania: by Stephen, the actuall possession of the greatest part of Livonia; by Sigismund the third a title to the Crown of Sweden. The Princes follow in this Order.

DUKES and KINGS of POLAND.

• A. Ch.
• 649 1 Lechus of Croatia the first Duke; whose posterity failing, twelve Palatines were chosen to direct affairs, and the state became Aristocraticall.
• 2 Crocus, the Legislator of Poland.
• 3 Lechus II. son of Crocus.
• 4 Venda the daughter of Crocus, and sister of Lectius the second.
• 5 Lescus the first.
• 6 Lescus II.
• 7 Lescus III. Contemporarie with Charles the great.
• 8 Popielus son of Lescus the third.
• 9 Popielus II. devoured in most horrid manner by rats and mice, together with his wife and children, the last of the posterity or house of Crocus.
• 800 10 Piastus the first Duke elected.
• 11 Zemovitus son of Piastus.
• 12 Lescus IV. son of Zemovitus.
• 13 Nemomyslus son of Lescus the fourth.
• 14 Miecislaus son of Nemomyslus, the first Christian Prince of the Polonians, founded the Bi∣shopricks of Cracow and Guesna.
• 1000 15 Boleslaus son of Miecislaus the first, who had the title of King conferred on him by Otho the third.
• 1025 16 Miecislaus II. sonne of Boleslaus.
• 1041 17 Casimir son of Miecislaus.
• 1059 18 Boleslaus II. son of Casmir, deposed and died an Exile in Hungary.
• 1082 19 Vladislaus brother of Boleslaus, the second, abandoned the title of King only and used that of Prince or Duke.
• 1003 20 Boleslaus III. son of Vladislaus.
• 1140 21 Vladislaus II. son of Boleslaus the third, outed by his Brethren, and at last estated in Sile∣sia; united formerly to Poland from the time of Lechus.
• 1146 22 Boleslaus IV. brother of Vladislaus the second.
• 1174 23 Miecislaus III. brother of Boleslaus and Vladislaus, deposed by his brother Casimir.
• 1178 24 Casimir II. brother of the three last Princes.
• 1195 25 Lescus V. son of Casimir the second deposed by Miecislaus the third.
• 1203 26 Vladislaus III. son of Miecislaus the third deposed by Lescus the fift; who again seised on the Estate.
• 1243 27 Boleslaus V. surnamed Pudicus.
• 1280 28 Lescus VI. surnamed Niger, the adopted son of Boleslaus and his Cousen German once remo∣ved; after whose death, anno 1289. the estate being distracted into many fations, was for some time without a Prince: setled at last on
• 1295 29 Primislaus surnamed Postbumus, who againe assumed the name of King, continued ever since by his successours.
• 1296 30 Vladislaus surnamed Locticus, brother of Lescus Niger, outed by Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, anno 1300. after whose death, anno 1306. he resumed the estate.
• 1333 31 Casimir III. surnamed the Great, son of Vladislaus the fourth, the first establisher of the kingdom, after all those troublesd, yed without issue.
• 1371 32 Lewis king of Hungary son of Charles King of Hungary by Elizabeth the sister of Casimir.
• 1383 33 Heduigis the youngest daughter of Lewis, her elder sister Mary succeeding in the Realm of Hungary, chosen Queen of Poland, marryed to Jagello Duke of Lituania, Christened and called Vladislaus the fift.
• 1386 34 Valdislaus V. Duke of Lituania, elected King upon his marriage with Queene He∣duigis.
• 1435 35 Vladislaus VI. son of Jagello, or Vladislaus the fift, by Sephia daughter of the Duke of Kio∣via. He was King of Hungary also, slaine at the battell of Varna by Amurath the se∣cond King of the Turkes without issue.
• 1447 36 Casimir IV. brother of Vladislaus, first brought the Knights of Prussia, under his com∣mand; Knight of the order of Garter.
• 1493 37 John Albert the second sonne of Casimir, his elder Brother Vladislaus being pretermitted on his accepting of the Crowns of Hungarie and Bohemia.
• 1502 38 Alexander the third son of Casimir.
• 1507 39 Sigismund the fourth sonne of Casimir his elder Brethren dying without issue; sup∣pressed the Order of the Dutch Knights in Prussia; and added part thereof unto his estate.
• 1548 40 Sigismund II. surnamed Augustus the last of the male issue of Jagello.
• 1574 41 Henry Duke of Aniou, son of Henry the second French King, chosen on the death of Sigis∣mund

• Augustus, the onely Stranger to the bloud in all this Catalogue. On the death of his brother Charles the ninth, he departed secretly into France, where he succeeded by the name of Henry the third.
• 1579 42 Stephen Bathor Vaivod of Transylvania, having marryed Anne sister of Sigismund the se∣cond, is elected King; he united Livonia to the Crown, and had a great hand up∣on the Moscovite.
• 1587 43 Sigismund III. son of John King of Swethland and Catharine his wife another of the sisters of Sigismund the second King of Poland and Sweden. He valiautly opposed Osman the Great Turke invading his Dominions with an Army 300000.
• 1633 44 Vladislaus VII. eldest son of Sigismund the third; after whose death the kingdom was ex∣tremely embroyled by factions, especially by the mutinous and seditious Cosaques; not fully setled by the election of
• 1648 45 Casimir V. Brother of Vladislaus the seventh now king of Poland, anno 1648.

The Government of this kingdome is nothing lesse then Monarchicall. For though the first Dukes hereof were absolute Princes, and ruled after a Despoticall manner; having power not onely of the estates of their subjects, but of life and death, without formalities of Law: yet when they once be∣came elective, they lost much of that power, which decayed so by little and little, that at the last the King is counted little better then a Royall shadow: Stat magni nominis umbra, in the Poets language. A diminution which began first in the times of Lewis of Hungarie, and Jagello of Lituania, who to gaine the succession to the kingdome contrary to Law, the one for his daughter, the other for his sonne, departed with many of their Royalties and Prerogatives to buy the voices of the Nobility. Since which time the Nobilitie in all their elections have so limited and restrained the Kings authority, and enlarged their own: that without their consent in Counsell, he may neither make war nor treat of peace, nor impose taxes, nor alienate any of his Demeanes: nor do any thing of importance which concernes the Publick: in so much as Boterus a great Statesman doth expressely say, that the Go∣vernment of Poland doth rather seem an Aristoratie then a Monarchie, a Common-wealth rather then a Kingdome. Besides the King not onely takes a solemn Oath at his Coronation to confirme all the rights and Priviledges, which have been granted to the Subject by his Predecessours: but addes this clause, quod si Sacramentum meum violavero, incolae Regni nullam nobis obedientiam praestare tene∣buntur, that if he violate this Oath, his Subjects shall not be obliged to yeeld him any obedience. Which as Bodinus well observeth, doth rather savour of the condition of a Prince of the Senate, then of the Majestie of a King; respected accordingly by the great ones, who looke not on him as their King, but their elder Brother, (or perhaps not that) and reckon his Decrees but of three dayes lasting. Which notwithstanding the King once chosen and inthroned, hath sole power in many things, without consulting with the Senate, as viz. in assembling Diets, choosing the secular Counsellers, disposing absolutely of his Vassals, and the Revenues of the Crown to what use he pleaseth; being ••ole Judge of the Nobility in Criminall causes; which is a strong bridle to raine them in with. By which, and either uniting himself unto the Clergy, or the well-forming of his party amongst the No∣••••lity, hee may doe many things not allowable in strictnesse of Law: the power and influence which he hath in the publick Government, being proportionable to the strength of his wit and Brain.

And here it is to be observed, that none but the Clergie and Nobilitie have any suffrage in the election of the King: that is to say, the 26 Palatines, and 60 Chastellans, with the four Marshals, and some o∣thers of the principall Officers of State, in behalf of the Nobility; and the Archb••shops and Bi∣shops in the name of the Clergie: but of the Commons none at all. Which is the reason why there is so much care taken to preserve the priviledges of the two first Orders; without obtaining any immu∣ties for reliefe of the third: most miserably oppressed on all sides, rather as Bondmen then Tenants in respect of their Lords, and not so much subjects, as plain slaves in regard of the King: whereof somewhat hath before been noted. Nor are the common people excluded onely out of these electi∣ons, but have no place nor vote in the Counsell of State, or in any of the Generall Diets: the first con∣sisting onely of the Prelates, Palatines, Chastellans, and principall Officers, spoken of before, the nomina∣ting of which pertaineth to the King alone, the other aggregated of all persons of those severall Or∣ders, and the Delegates of each Province and principall City sent thither for the rest of the Nobility, whom they represent. Yet notwithstanding this exclusion of the Commons from this Common-Counsell, they there concludes of all matters of publick interesse, not properly determinable by the great Counsell or Coun••ell of State; in which perhaps (especially in the case of taxes) the Commons may be more con∣cerned then any other.

The Forces of this Kingdome or Common-wealth relate unto Land-service onely. For though they have a large Sea coast upon the Baltick; yet the Danes, Swedes, and Hanse-townes, having got the start of them, keep them from doing much at Sea. And for Land-forces they consist of Horse especially, whereof they are able to raise eightscore thousand, (that is to say, 100000 out of Poland, and 60 or 70000 out of Lituania: of which one halfe at least are thought to be fit for action. And this seemes probable enough in regard of those great bodies of Horse, which Stephen and Sigismund the third had against the Mo••covite; whereof the one had 40000 and the other 30000 (besides draught horses, very well appointed. But for their Foot, they are not at so good a passe, their Infanterie be∣••ng for the most part Germans or Hungarians; whom they hire for money; of which two Nations

king Stephen, in his enterprise upon Livonia, had no lesse then 16000 to convey his Ordinance. Upon confidence of this great number of Horse, and their readinesse to serve upon all occasions, the Polan∣ders bear themselves so high, that they neither fear the power of a forein Enemie, nor regard the for∣tifying of their Towns, or the building of Fortresses on their Frontires: boasting that they are able to defend their countrey, without such helps, against any Nation whatsoever, and trusting more to a Castle of bones, (as was courageously said by Savage an English Gentleman) then to a Castle of stones. And for the raising of these Horse, the Gentlemen of the Countrey are bound by their tenure, (like the Turkes Timariots) not onely to serve in person for defence of the Realm, but to maintaine a cer∣tain number of Horse in continuall readinesse; especially in those parts which lie next the Tartar, where their numbers are exceeding great, and with whom many times they join to afflict and harasse their own countrey, though in pay against them. Of these some serve in the manner of our men of armes, some like unto our light horse, others like the Tartars. And these they call commonly by the name of Cosacques (or Adventurers): a race of men trained up to steal, wast and depopulate, where∣soever they come; having little but their swords to live by; a murderous and wicked people, chiefly in their drunkennesse, and that not onely towards strangers, but their naturall Countreymen. The cause of that sedition which for some yeares past, hath more depopulated and distracted that flou∣rishing kingdome, then all the Armies of the Turkes.

As for the Revenues of this king, they are computed at 600000 Crowns per annum, drawn chiefly out of Salt and some Mines of Silver: the profits arising from the Demeasnes of the Crown, being for the most part given away in pensions and gratuities, to the Palatines, Chastellans, and other great men of the Realm, to make them the more pliant to his desires. Most of which sum is put up yearly in his Coffers, or expended in the purchase of estates for his younger sons; his daughters being marryed at the pub∣lick charge, and the expenses of his houshold defrayed by the Lituanians and most part of Poland, for the time that he remains amongst them. Nor doe the wars at any time exhaust his Treasure, in which case by decree of the Di••ts he is inabled to lay impositions and taxes upon the people, levied in the way of Excise, or upon their lands, which doe amount to such a sum, that by means hereof king Stephen maintained war three yeares against the Moscovite, without expending any thing of his own Revenue.

Chief Orders of Knighthood in this kingdome, are

1 The Marian or Dutch Knights, instituted under the wals of Acon or Ptolemais in the Holy land; in a Church whereof dedicated to the blessed Virgin, their Order was first allowed; from thence called Equites Mariani. The institution was in the year 1190. The first great Master, Henry Walpot. The Christians being beaten out of Syria, they first removed to Venice, and from thence to Marpurg in Hassia, where and in some other parts of Germanie, they were endowed with fair Revenues, from which named Equites Teutonici, or the Dutch Knights sent into Prussia by the Emperour Frederick the second, anno 1239. or called, in as some say, by the Moscovite against the Prussians; they fixed their seat at Mariemberg, under Sigefride, the second Great Master, anno 1340. or thereabouts. In the time of Ludovicus the 18 Great Master they were forced to submit to Casimir the fourth of Poland, anno 1450. the occasion of the long war betwixt them and the Polanders, continuing all the time of Albert of Brandenbourg, the 24 and last Great Master in this Countrey, who surrendered his order (as before said) to Sigismund the first by whom he was created the first Duke of Prussia. Such of the Knights as disrelished this action, retired into Germanie, where they chose one Walter Croneberg master of the Order: the title afterwards conferred upon Maximilian one of the younger sons of Maxmilian the se∣cond; but the Order sensibly decaying, and all this time of little estimation in the world.

2 Of the Portylaine, or Sword-bearers (Ensiferi in Latine) confirmed by Pope Innocent the third, by whom sent into Livonia to defend the Preachers of the Gospell against the Infidels, at the first conver∣sion of that countrey. Being too weak to effect that businesse, they united themselves with the Dutch Knights by the Popes authority; and in stead of Knights of the sword, were called Knights of the Crosse. Separated from it in the time of Vnivus their Great Master, anno 1541. the Dutch Knights being then dispossessed of Prussia, and these inclining wholly to the opinions of Luther, they a while sub∣sisted of themselves; what became of them afterwards, and how the Order was extinguished, hath been shewen already in Livonia.

The Armes of this kingdome are quarterly, 1 Gules, an Eagle Argent, crowned and Armed, Or, for the Realm of Poland; and 2 Gules, a Chevalier armed Cap a pea, advancing his sword Argent, mounted on a barbed Courser of the second for the Dukedome of Lituania.

There are in the whole Realm of Poland.

• Of the Romish Church Archbishops 3. Bishops 19.
• Of the Greek Church Archbishops 2. Bishops 6.

Universities 4. viz.

• Cracow
• Vilna
• Dantzick.
• Regimont.

And so much for POLAND.

THE CARPATHIAN MOUNTAINS.

IN our way from Poland unto Hungarie (whither now we goe) wee must of necessity passe over the CARPATHIAN MOUNTAINS, the ancient boundarie of Sarmatia Europaea, from the rest of Europe. A long and craggie ledge of hils, which beginning near the Citie of Pres∣burg, and the borders of Austria, passe on in a continuall course till they come to the very Euxine Sea, and by that means not only divide Hungary from Poland specially so called; but parting Transylvania and Moldavia two Dacian Regions, from Russia Nigra, and Podolia, Provinces of the Polonian Kingdom. By Ptolemie in his second Book, they are called Montes Sar∣matici (Sarmaticae Rupes by Solinus) because disterminating the Sarmatian Nations (who possessed the mos part of it) from Germanie, and the more Southern parts of Europe: and in his third booke, by one name Carpates, or Mons Carpatus, so called (as some think from) the Greek word 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying Fruit, from the fruitfulnesse of it, compared with other Mountaines in those Northerne Countries. At the present known by divers names, according to the Provinces and people which it passeth by. By the Dutch generally called Wurtzgarten, (or a Garden of Herbs) which alludeth to the name of Carpatus: by the Hungars, Tarchzall. Betwixt Moravia and Hungaria where it is at the high∣est, it is called in the Sclavonian tongue, by the name of Tatri; in the German Schneberg: where it parteth Transylavania from Russia Nigra, the Rosses call it Biescid; and the Dutch men, Crapack. A chaine of hils of more length then fame: not much observable in storie but for the shut∣ting up the Hungari, Sclaves, and others of those Northern Nations, which afterward invaded the Roman Provinces; nor of much notice at the present, but for giving an Originall to many of the principall Rivers, which water the Countries lying on both sides of it. And therefore having nothing more to detain us here, we will passe them over, and descend into the Plains of Hungarie,

OF HUNGARIE.

HVNGARIE is bounded on the East with Transylvania, and Walachia; on the West with Stiria, Austria, and Moravia; on the North with the Carpathian Moun∣tains which divide it from Poland; and on the South with Sclavonia, and some part of Dacia. Extended in length from Presburg along the Danow, to the bor∣ders of Transylvania, for the space of 300 English miles, and 190 of the same miles in breadth. The reason of the name we shall have anon

It lyeth in the Northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the 7. and 9. Climates, so that the longest Summers day in the Southern parts, is but 15 houres and an half, and not above 16 houres in the parts most North: taking up all that tract of ground on the North side of Danubius possessed by the Iazy∣ges Metanasiae, a Sarmatian people, and part also of Panonnia Superior, and Pannonia Inferior, both on the South of that River.

But being it passeth generally under the name of Pannonia, we are to know that the Romans having made themselves Masters of all Pannonia, divided it into four Provinces, part of the Diocese of Illyri••um Occidentale: that is to say, Pannonia Superior, bordering on Noricum, and containing part of the Higher Austria, and the most Western parts of the present Hungarie, on the South side of the Danow. 2 Pan∣nonia Inferior, containing the Eastern parts of Hungarie on the same side of the River. 3 Valeria, anci∣ently part of Pannonia Superior, comprehending Stiria or Stiermark in the Archdukedome of Austria. And 4 Savia, so called of the River Savus, anciently part of Pannonia Inferior, now called Windesch∣land, one of the Provinces or Subdivisions of Sclavonia. But the name of Pannonia falling with the Roman Empire, and this Countrie being fallen into the hands of other Masters, it took a new name from the Nations who possessed themselves of it, and was called Hungaria, quasi Hunni-Avaria, by a mixt name made of the Hunni and Avares, two Scythian Nations, who either successively or conjunctly were possessed thereof; or from the Hungari, another race of Scythians, mentioned by Jornandes in his Book De Rebus Geticis, drawn into this Countrie by the Emperour Arnulph to aid him in his war against Suantobogius King of the Moravians. This last I look on as most probable; the first as more probable then that of Aventine and others of our later Writers; who finding a poor Province in the most North-east point of the Russian Empire called Jugra; (and by them Jugaria) would have the name of Hungarie to be thence derived.

The people are strong of body, and rude of behaviour, respecting neither the liberall Arts, nor mechanick Trades. The greatest aspersion is the name of a coward, which cannot be wiped off with∣out the killing of a Turk; after which they are priviledged to wear a feather, and by the number of their feathers to shew how many Turks they have slain in battell. They desire wars, and like no trade better, being naturally slothfull (like the Irish) and therefore best approve of that course of life, whereby they may rather live upon other mens labour, then take pains for their living. Extremely covetous; yet having rather desire then art to enrich themselves, permitting the Dutch to ingrosse all their trading, and manage such commodities as the Country yeeldeth: which is the cause (seconded

by the oppressions of the Turk and the Austrian Princes under whom they are) that none of them rise to any considerable wealth. And for such as have estates in land they grow every day more poor then others. For though the Females be excluded from inheriting their fathers possessions (to whom they give no portion but new Cloaths on the wedding day) yet being the sons do equally inherit the Estate (as such who hold in Gavelkinde do here in England) it must needs be that by so many divi∣sions and subdivisions, the greatest patrimonie that is, will be brought to nothing. Both Sexes in the way of their education are inured to hardnesse, not suffered to lie in beds till the night of their marriage.

The Christian faith was first planted here in the time of Stephen, surnamed the Saint, the first King of this Country, invited thereunto by the speciall means and procurement of the Emperour Henry the 2. giving him upon that condition his sister Gisla in marriage; and through the preaching and industrie of Albert Archbishop of Prague, anno 1016. or thereabouts. Since which time Christianitie hath continued here without interruption, (defended gallantly and couragiously against the Turks) but broken into fractions and subdivisions among themselves, some pertinaciously adhering to the Church of Rome, some following the doctrine of Luther, others that of Calvin; and some, new fan∣cies and opinions disavowed by all the rest: yet all these different parties doe agree in this to punish adulterie and fornication with no lesse a punishment then death: the father forcing his daughter, the husband his wife, and the brother his sisters to the place of their Execution.

The language generally here spoken of is a kinde of Sclavonian, differing in dialect from the P••les: but in the parts adjoyning to Germanie, the Dutch is spoken; as the old Iazygian is betwixt Danubius and Tibiscus, the ancient seat of the Iazyges Metanastae.

The soil is wonderfull fruitfull, yeelding corn and fruits in great abundance; the grasse in some places (as in the Isle of Comara) exceeding the height of a man: which doth breed such a number of cattle, that this Country alone, is thought to be able to feed all Europe with flesh. They yearly send into Germany and Sclavonia, 80000 Oxen: they have Deere, Partridge, Pheasant in such superfluitie that any man that will may kill them; which in other places is utterly prohibited, these creatures being reserved as game for Gentlemen. For at that great insurrection of the Boores in Germany (before the end of which, 50000 of them were slain in fight) their chief demands were, that they might choose 〈…〉〈…〉 2 That they might pay no tythes but of corn. 3 That they might be free from the power of 〈◊〉〈◊〉. 4 That wood, timber, and fewell might be common. 5 And especially, That they might hunt and hauk in all times and places. The other commodities of the Countrie are 〈◊〉〈◊〉 Silver, (whereof they have some very rich veins; as also of Tin, Lead, Iron,) good store of Fish, Copper, Wine, this last as good as that of Candie.

The worthiest Scholar that ever this Kingdome produced, was S. Hierome, a worthy Father of the Latine Church▪ born in Stridon. The most worthy of all their Souldiers, were Johannes Huniades, who so valia thy resisted the incursions of the Turks, and slew of them 50000 at the battle at Maxon. And 2. Matthias Corvinus, his sonne, afterward King of Hungary, of whom thus Adrian out of a Poet:

—Patriae decus, unica stirpis Gloria, Pannonicae caedis fortissimus ult••r.

His Countries pride, the glory of his race, Revenger of th' Hungarians late disgrace.

The principall Rivers are 1 Danubius, spoken of before, when we were in Germanie. 2 Savus, which rising in Carniola; 3 Dravus, which rising in Carinthia; and 4 Tibiscus, which rising in the Car∣pathian Mountains, pay their tribute to Danubius: of which Tibiscus the Hungarians use to say, that two parts are water and the third fish. Besides which and some others of inferiour note, there is the fa∣mous Lake called Balaton (by the Dutch Platse) 40 Italian miles in length▪ but of breadth unequall: in some places being ten miles broad, and in some but three. There be also many medicinall waters, and more hot Baths then any one Country hath in Europe: some waters also of a strange Nature: whereof some falling on the ground is turned to stone; others (about the Town of Smolnice) which falling into Ditches make a kinde of mud, out of which tried and melted they make very good Cop∣per; and some again which flow in winter, and freeze in Summer; and near unto Bis••••ice or Mensol, a spring or fountain out of which cometh a green water, whereof they make Solder for their Gold.

Principall Mountains of this Countrie are 1 Carpatus, the Sarmatian or Carpathian Mountains spo∣ken of before. 2 Matzan, near the Citie Agria, covered with rich ulns. 3 E••dol, omnium amplissimus, the largest of the three, saith the Atlas minor. Which words if true, must needs be understood of the height of this Mountain, but neither of the length or breadth; in both which without question it comes short of Carpatus.

The Country is commonly divided into the Vpper Hungarie, and the Lower; the Vpper lying on the North of the River Danow, out of the bounds and territories of the Roman Empire: the Lower lying on the South of that River, and comprehending all Pannonia Inferior, and part of Superior, two Ro∣man Provinces. The Vpper again subdivided (before the coming in of the Turks) into 32 Counties or Juridicall resorts, that is to say, 24 on the West side of Tibiscus (or the Tisse) and 8 on the East side

of it: the Lower (at the same time) into 18 onely: of which 10 were betwixt the Danow and the River Dravus: and the other six betwixt the Danow and the Savus. But this Division and the Sub∣divisions depending on it, being since the coming in of the Turkes almost out of use; we will now look upon it as it stand•• divided at the present betwixt the Emperour as King of Hungarie, by a mixt title of descent and election; and the Great Turk as Lord of the most part of it by Arms and conquest, two parts of three at least being forced into his possession.

Chief places in the Emperours part, are 1 Sabaria, antiently the Metropolis of Pannonia Superior; the birth-place of St. Martin Bishop of Tours; now of lesse accompt; by the Hungarians called Kimaro∣rubath. Others conceive it to be that which the Dutch call Leibnits. 2 Stridon, the Sidron of Ptolemie, in the confines of Hungary and Dalmatia, by the common people called Strigman. A town of good repute till destroyed by the Gothes, but after made of more esteem by the birth of St. Hierom, one of the foure chief Fathers of the Latine Church; and for all parts of humane learning, nothing in∣feriour to the best of the Grecian Sages. 3 Agria, a Bishops See; 4 Nitri, a Bishops See also on the River Boch; 5 Sopran (Sopronium in Latine) on the borders of Austria. 6 Komara, a strong peece in an Island of the same name, made by the Circling of the Danow: oft-times attempted by the Turk, but in vaine at al tin••es. 7 Presburg, on the edge of Austria also, but on the North side of the ri∣ver, the Carnuntum of Antoninas: but by the moderne Latines called Posonium: seated in a pleasant healthfull countrey on the River Lyet, whose waters the Danow there receiveth, in the suburbs where∣of on the top of an high Mountaine standeth a goodly Castle, the ordinary residence of the Emper∣ours as Kings of Hungary. For though it be a little City, and not very beautifull, yet being safe by the neighbourhood of Austria, it hath been made the Metropolis of this kingdome, since the losse of Buda. Before the wals hereof dyed Count Dampierri, one of the chief Commanders of Ferdi∣nand the second, in the wars of Hungary and Bohemia. 8 Gran, by the Latines called Strigonium, took by the Turks, anno 1534. and lost again, anno 1595. at what time Sir Thomas Arundell of Wardour Castle in Wiltshire, carryed himselfe so gallantly by forcing the Water-tower, and taking thence with his owne hands the Turkish Banner, that the Emperour Rodulphus created him a Count of the Empire, and King James afterwards ma•••• him Lord Arundell of Wordour. It is seated on the Danow, but opposite to the mouth of the Cran, which arising in the Vpper Hungary doth there end its courses, hence the name of Gran: honour••d also, of long time, with the See of an Archbishop, who is the Primate of the kingdome. 9 〈◊〉〈◊〉, on the meeting of the Danow with the River Rab, coming out of the Lower Hungary, whence the modern Dutch name; by Antonine called Arabon, by the French Jovarine, by our present Latinisis Jaurinum. Memorable h••retofore for being the boundarie of the two Pannonia's, In∣terior, and Super••or, hereabouts divided: of late most principally for a strong fortresse against the Turkes, by whom once taken anno 1594. but not long after againe recovered by the industrie of Monseiur••de Vandre-Court a French Gentleman. 10. Newsol, or Newhensel, a strong town in the higher Hungary, not far from the spring head of the River Gran, which in the year 1621. proved fatall to that great Commander the Count of Bucqu••y, who at the siege hereof (the Towne being then in rebellion against Ferdinand the second Emperour and King of Hungary) lost his life. For going privately to view some places of advantage for a generall assault, hee fell into an Ambush of Hun∣garians, who suddenly set upon him, discomfitted his small party, killed first his horse under him, and at last himselfe, having in that skirmish received sixteen wounds. Slain with him at the same time also Torquato an Italian Prince, Count Verdugo a Spanish Earl, and one of the Gouragas of the house of Mantua. 11 Altenbourg, 12 Tockay, both of them very strong by nature, as 13 Castell-Novo is by the helps of Art.

Places of most importance in the Turkes possession, are 1 Buda, by the Dutch called Hoffen, supposed by some to be the Curta of Ptolemie, by others the Abrincum of Antoninus; and to have tooke the name of Buda, either from Buda the brother of Attila, said to be the refounder of it; or from the Budini a Scythian people mentioned in Herodotus. Unevenly seated amongst hils, on the southern shore of the Danow, but in the most fruitfull part of all the Countrey; exceedingly well fortified, adorned with many buildings both private and publick; and furnished with some medicinall Bathes, which owe much of their pomp and sumptuousnesse to their new Masters the Turkes, who tooke it from the Christians August 20. anno 1526. Solyman the Magnificent then present at the taking of it. Before that time the Seat Royall of the Kings of Hungary, and the chief City of the Kingdome; as now the seat of the chief Bassa or Lord Lievtenant for the Grand Signeur. 2 Alba Regalis, by the Dutch called Stul-Weisenburg, betwixt the Danow and the Dravus, strongly but unwholesomely seated in the midst of an inaccessible marish joined to the firm land by three broad Causeys blocked up at the ends with three great Bulwarkes; but for all the strong situation of it taken by the Turkes, an. 1543. before that time, the usuall place both for the Coronation and interment of the Kings of Hungary, 3 Volve, on the Danow, taken in the same year also. 4 Fiefe-kirken, in Latine called Quinque Ecclesiae, from five Churches in it; a Bishops See, conceived to be the Tentiburgium of Antoninus; tooke by the Turkes, anno 1566. and giving them a great command on the River Dravus, upon which it is seated. 5 Sirmisch, betwixt the Danow and the Saw, or Savus, now noted for a vein of the best wines, but otherwise of no estimation at the present, though heretofore of most accompt in all this Province, the Metropolis (as I conceive) of Pannonia inferior; the seat of the Praefectus Praetorio Il∣lyrici, before the division of the Empire, honoured with the personall residence of many of the Emperours, and made in those respects, the Stage of many great and memorable actions. For here Vetranio, or Bretanio as others call him, tooke on himselfe the Purple Robe, and was declared Em∣perour

by the Illyrian souldiers, lying here in Garrison; here being deserted by his own souldiers, he submitted himselfe unto Constantius the son of Constantine the Great; here Gratian the Emperour sonne of Valentinian the first was born: and finally here was held a Councell against Photinus, Bi∣shop of this City, who held that CHRIST had no existence of God the Father, till he was con∣ceived and born of the Virgin; which Tenent being contrary as well to that of the Arian as the Orthodox Prelates, was here condemned by both parties in the time of the said Constantius (who was there in person) an. 356. 6 Zigoth, a strong towne, situate in a marish ground on the North side of the Dra, taken by Solyman the Magnificent, anno 1566. who there ended his dayes, 7 Keresture, nigh unto which anno 1596. Mahomet the third gave the Christians so great an overthrow, that if hee had pursued his victory, it is thought that hee had finished the conquest of Hungarie. 8 Mursa, upon the confluence of the Dra and the Danow, as remarkable in the stories of elder times; as 9 Belgrade on the confluence of the Saw and the Danow, hath been in the later. This last a town of divers names, first called Taururum, or Taurunum, after Alba Graeca, by the Dutch accordingly Greichs Wessenburg, by the French and modern Latinists, Belgrade and Belgradum, from the beautifull situation of it, hem∣med in upon the North with the Danow, on the East with the Saw; on the other sides defended with strong wals, deep ditches, and impregnable Ramparts; belonging antiently to the De∣spots of Servia, by whom consigned over to Sigismund King of Hungary, as best able to keep it, the Despots being satisfied with lands and territories of a better value. The Bulwark heretofore of Christendome against the Turkes, who received before it many great and notable repulses, (of which the most memorable were those of Amurath the second and Mahomet surnamed the Great) taken at last to the great losse and shame of the Christian world, not succouring the defendants in convenient time, by Solyman the Magnificent, anno 1520. Then on the North side of the River in the upper Hun∣gary, there is 10 Pesth, over against Buda, on the River Danow. 11 Vaccia, on the same River, a Bishops See. 12 Colocza, an Archbishops See, on the same River also. 13 Zegedin, on the West side of the River Tibiscus. 14 Temeswar, on the East of that River towards Transilvania, the ordinary residence of a Turkish Bassa. 15 Gyula, a strong Town on the borders of Transilvania, betrayed by Nicolas Keresken Governour hereof in the last yeare of Solyman, on promise of some great reward. But Selimus the son of Solyman caused him to be put into a barrell stuck full of nailes, with the points turned inwards, and so to be tumbled up and down till hee (most miserably) dyed: there being on the barrell this inscription written; viz. Here receive the reward of thy Avarice and treason, Gyula thou soldest for gold; if thou be not faithfull to Maximilian thy naturall Lord, neither wilt thou be true to me. 16 Singidon, on the South of Gyula, betwixt which and Belgrade are the fields of Maron, memo∣rable for the slaughter of 50000 Turkes slaine here in battell, under the fortunate conduct of John Huniades.

The first Inhabitants of this countrey on the North side of the Danow, and the West of the Tisse, or Tibiscus, were the Iazyges Metanastae; and on the East fide of the Tisse, the Daci; known, but not conquered by the Romans: on the South of the Danow the Pannones (by some called the Poeones) subdivided into the Azuli, Latovici, Werciani, Jassit, Oseriates, and some others inhabiting the West parts thereof, or Pannonia Superior; and the Ercuneales, Breuci, Aravisci, and Scordisci dwelling in the Eastern parts, or Pannonia Inferior. First conquered by the Romans: anno V. C. 719. L. Corni∣ficius, and Sext. Pompeius, being Consuls; but many times rebelling and not fully subdued, till 40 yeares after, the insurrection of Bato being then crushed by Augustus Caesar, and there by the whole Province setled in obedience: divided first into two parts or Provinces, Superior and Inferior; out of which Savia and Valeria were after taken, as before is noted. Under the Romans it continued till subdued by the Hunnes, a people not heard of in the time of the Roman greatnesse, unlesse we take them as some doe for the Chuni of Ptolemie. But being those Chuni are placed by him be∣twixt the Bastarnae and the Roxolani, on the Southwest of Borysthenes, I see not how to fit that dwel∣ling unto the Huns: who were shut up within the Fenns of Palus Maeotis: and by all the writers of those times accompted for a Nation not so much as heard of when they first set footing into Europe. Letting that passe therefore as an improbable and ill-grounded conjecture, certain it is that from the Fenn-Countreys of Asia on the other side of the Tanais, they came first into Europe: living in their owne countrey a poore and miserable life, till God thought fit to make use of them as a scourge to chastise the Christians of the West, then grown luxurious and almost incorrigible by too much felicity; and to that end miraculously opened them a passage, never found before. For having neither minde nor meaning to invade the Roman Empire, which possibly they had not heard of; nor knowing how to clear themselves of that uncomfortable countrey in which they dwelt. it pleased the great disposer of all things, by following an Hart or Stagge which they had in chase to shew them a safe passage into Europe, through the Fenns of Maeotis; which before they thought to be unpassable. The report made by those Hunters at their coming back of the rich and pleasant land which they had so fortunately discovered, invited the chief heads of their Clans, with all the severall Rascalities depending on them, to flock into Europe: into which they fell so suddenly and unexpectedly, that they forced the Gothes, then dwelling on the North side of the Ister, to flie over that River, and supplicate to the Emperour Valens for new habitations. This hapened in the year 373. Athanaricus the second, or Ermanaricus (as Jornandes calls him) being then King of the Gothes, and Balamir Captain of Huns. Fleshed with this victory Balamir or Balhember (as Sigibert cals him) takes the name of King, anno 386. or thereabouts: and following the course of the Ister towards this Pannonia, which he had an aim at; found a great Armie raised on the other side of the

River, of purpose to encounter with him: commanded by Detricus Generall for the Roman Empire, and Macrinus (or Matrinus) commander in chief of the Pannonians. Both Generals, presuming too much on the depth and widenesse of the River, and knowing well that the Hunns had neither boat nor ship to passe them over, betooke themselves unto their rest, with too much security. But the Hunns to the number of 100000 having crossed the River upon bladders, fell on the Quarters of the Romans, whom they slew like sheep. Macrinus after this fought two battels with them, in the first whereof he was victorious, there being lost on both sides about 30000 men, but in the second being slaine, and his Army routed, the Hunnes possessed themselves of both Pannonias; buying this victory with the losse of 40000 men, in the year 401. Balamir being dead, Bleda and Attila his sonnes succeeded, anno 436▪ and Bleda dying also in the yeare 450. left Attila sole king of the Hunnes, that great scourge of the Christian world: who having first wasted Illyricum and Thrace, compelled the Emperour Theo∣dosius the second, to buy his peace of him at the price of 6000 pound weight of gold, and an yeerly tribute. Invited afterwards by Gensericus king of the Vandals in Afric to war upon the Gothes of Spain, (out of which Countrey they had driven him) he forced his way through all the Nations betwixt him and Gaul; and beating down all the Towns and Fortresses on the River Rhene that side of the Roman Empire, entered that Province in the reign of the third Valentinian: divided at that time be∣twixt the Romans, French, Burgundians, and the Gothes of Spain, discomfited by Aetius, and the kings of those Nations then ••n league against him, in that famous battell nere Tholouse spoken of before (with the losse of 18000 of his men) he went back by the way of Italy, where hee sacked Aqui∣lcia, Millaine, Vincontia, Pavie; and not without much difficulty was diverted from the spoil of Rome, by the intercession of Pope Leo: committing in all places such unspeakable cruelties, that he was alwayes after called (as he styled himselfe) Malleus orbis & Flagellum dei. Returning home he picked a quarrell with Marcianus the Eastern Emperour, as if the tribute promised him by Theodosius had not been well paid. But being pacified for the present, and mindefull of his former project upon the Gothes, he re∣solved once againe to try his fortune with that people, and was againe defeated by them under the conduct of Thorismund, the third King of the Visigothes, or Gothes of Spain, and so returned ingloriously to his countrey. Chaoked after with his own bloud, violently breaking out at his nosethrils, on his wedding night; he left Pannonia to his sons named Hernac, Aladurius, and Chaba: who disagreeing a∣monst themselve▪ about the kingdome, gave an advantage to the Gothes, then possessed of Dacia; to make themselves masters of this also, scarce thorough warm in their new estates, when sent by Zeno the Emperour into Italy against Odoacer where they finally setled. After this time we hear no more of the Gothes in Pannonia; or any where of the Hunnes at all, unlesse acting under the Avares, or joining with them in the name of Hunn-Avaria, as some think they did.

The Countrey being thus left to the next Invader, was presently possessed by the Longoboards, said to be originally of Scandia, and there called Winnili, (and of the Winniloth in Scandia, Jornandes speak∣eth) afterwards ob long as barbas, Long••bardi. But concerning this last name, take along with you this old wives tale recited, but not approved of by Paulus Diaconus. The Vandals warring upon the Winnili, went unto Goddan (he should rather have said Woden) to sue for the victory: which the Winnili hearing, wrought by countermine; and sent Gambata the mother of their King Aiou, on the like businesse to Frea Goddans wife. So it was, that Goddan had promised the Vandals, that they should be victorious, whom he saw first in the morning: whereupon Frea willing to please Gambata, and not loving, as it seemeth, the sight of men, gave order, that all the women of the Winnili, parting their hair, bringing one halfe over one cheek, the other over the other, and tying both under their chin, should appear betimes before the window the next morning. This they did, and she shewing them to her husband, he demanded of her, Qui sunt isti Longobardi? Hence the occasion of the name. And like enough they might be called so from the length of their beards; though otherwise the whole tale be vain and foolish. Compelled by scarcity of victuals to seek new habitations, they seised first on the Island Rugia, and the adjacent Countries; setled about the time of Cornelius Tacitus in those parts of Germany, which now make up the Bishopricks of Meydburg and Halberstat. Afterwards finding that countrey too narrow f••r them, they left their dwellings there, and fel next upon some parts of Poland; next on this Pannonia: and at last having tarryed in Pannonia 42 years or thereabouts, at the solicitation of Narses (provoked by many indignities from the Empresse Sophia the wife of Justinus the second) anno 568. under the lead∣ing of their King Alboinus, they went into Italy, and there fixt their kingdom, at the end of 200 yeares overthrown by the power of Charles the Great, the most mighty Monarch of the West. Of their kings before their coming into this countrey, I shall only make mention of Lamissus, their third king, and of him this story. Agilmund the second King of the Lombards, one morning went a hunting. As he was ••iding by a fish-pond, he spyed seven children sprawling for life, which one, as saith Pautus Diaconus, (it may be many harlots) had been delivered of, and most barbarously thrown into the water. The King amazed at this spectacle, put his bore-speare or hunting-pole among them. One of the children hand-fasted the spear, and the King softly drawing back his hand, wafted the child to the shore. This boy he named Lamissus, from Lama, which in their language signifieth a fish-pond. He was in the Kings Court carefully brought up, where there appeared in him such tokens of vertue and courage, that after the death of Agilmond, he was by the Lombards chosen to succeed him. This Lamissus together with his predecessours, and successours, we finde thus recorded.

The LONGOBARDIAN KINGS.

• A. C.
• 383 1 Aiou, 10
• 393 2 Agilmond, 33
• 426 3 Lawissus, 3
• 429 4 Labe, vel, Lethe, 40
• 469 5 Hildehoc, 4
• 473 6 Godohoc, 12
• 485 7 Dophon, vel, Claffo, 5
• 490 8 Thamus, 10
• 500 9 Vacon, 18
• 518 10 Valcharius, 7
• 525 11 Adoinus, who first brought the Lango∣bards into Hungarie, anno 1526.
• 543 12 Alboinus, who in the year 568. by the solicitation of Narses went into Italy, and erected there the Longobardian Kingdome; which 206 years after was destroyed by the puissance of Charles the Great.

The History of this people is epitomized by Du Bartas thus:

The Lombard strong who was in Scowland nurst, On Rugeland and Livonia seised first. Then having well reveng'd on the Bulgarian The death of Agilmond; the bold Barbarian Surprised Poland: thence anon he presses In Danows streams to rinse his amber tresses. When he straight after had surrendred The double-named Isters flowry bed, To scarre-fac'd Hunnes: he hunteth furiously The rest of Gaules from wealthy Insubrie. There reigns 200 years, triumphing so, That Royall Tesin might compare with Po: Which after fell in Frenchmens hands again, Wonne by the sword of worthy Charlemain.

The Longobards having thus left the Stage the Avares entred. Some say the Avarini of Ptolemie, a Sarmatian people, but most probably, (as Nicetas) a people of Scythia, inhabiting about Palus Maeo∣tis. They first began to stirre in the reign of Tiberius the 2. (driven by the Turks their next neigh∣bours to passe further Westwards) and gave that Emperours forces a great overthrow at the mouth of Danubius. Tiberius notwithstanding did somewhat quiet them: but he being dead they took heart again, and with great courage warred upon Mauritius, his next successour. Their King at that time called Caganus, we may English it Cham; as not being the proper name of any one, but the com∣mon Attribute of all their Chiefs. This Caganus made his first wars upon the Turks, which people were about that time first made known to the Inhabitants of Europe; and with the help of the re∣mainder of the Hunnes, invaded and possessed Pannonia, vanquishing both the Emperours Forces and the Gothes and Gepidae, who had still kept some footing in it, and on the departure of the Lombards were of no small power; the name of Gothes being swallowed up in that of the Gepidae, though not quite extinct. After this blow, Mauritius raised a second war, but more with an intent to revenge himself on his own souldiers, which had formerly offended him, then with hope of prevailing against the enemy; Comentiolus, according to the Emperours directions, betrayeth his Army, 12000 of them were slain, and the rest taken. Caganus an heroick and mercifull Conquerour, offers to ran∣some them for 8s. 6d. a peece, (for so much was that nummus, or 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 which he demanded for them.) When the Emperour, as much loving his gold as hating his Souldiers, had denyed that condi∣tion, he offered them all for one nummus, and after for half a one; but being also here unsatisfied, he put them all to the sword. For this cause the rest of his Souldiers not long after made Phocas one of the Centurions Emperour; and he most barbarously stewed the Emperour in his own broath, putting him, his wife, friends, and children to the sword. After this we find mention of them in the time of Phocas and Heraclius, forraging Thrace to the very walls of Constantinople; afterwards setled in Pannonia, and part of Noricum, containing now the Vpper Hungarie, and some part of Austria, divided from the Boiarians by the River Ems. Possessed hereof till the time of Charls the Great, by whom after a war of eight years, they were utterly subdued and driven out of these parts, their Countrie being peopled with new Dutch Colonies, the remainders of them forced to betake themselves into Transylvania, or that part of Hungarie which lyeth beyond the river Tibiscus, where subject for a time to Suantobogius King of the Moravians, in whose overthrow by the Hungarians they were so broken, that their name was never after heard of.

And so we come to the Hungarians, the last and principall Actors on the Stage of this Kingdome, the givers of the present name: before whose coming into this Countrie, it had no other name then that of Pannonia, for ought I can finde, in any Authors of those times. A Scythian people, as the Huns, and Avares were, by Jornandes called the Hungari; first known in Europe by their acts in the time of the Emperour Arnulphus, when wandring in Sarmatia Europ••a without any certain abode, they were

by him called into this Countrie against Suantobogius King of the Moravians before mentioned, from whom they took Transylvania, and so much of the modern Hungarie as lyeth on both sides of Tibisous, inhabited at that time by the Sclaves, and some scattered remnants of the Avares, whom they killed up or forced to seek new habitations, planting themselves in those places which they took from them; now the Vpper Hungarie. In the right of Lemis the 4. successour to Arnulphus, they passed over the Danow and subdued Pannonia, dismembring it from the Empire and name of Germanie: after that ranging with unmercifull cruelty over all Germanie, Italie, Greece, Sclavonia, Dacia: till broken by the ••orces of the Dutch Emperours, and mollified by the softnesse of the Christian Religion, they be∣came more quiet. Their Government at the first was under Dukes; Stephen the 4. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 his re∣ceiving of the Gospell, being honoured with the title of King; enjoyed by his successours to this ve∣ry day. In the time of Ladislaus surnamed the Saint, Dalmatia and Groatia were added to the Crown of Hungarie, bequeathed to him by his sister Zelomira, the widow of the last King. In that of Bela the 4. the ••artarians to the number of 500000 fighting men brake into this Country, and like a violent whirlwinde carryed all before them; anno 1248. tyrannizing here for 3 years space, committing mercilesse massacres, and making horrible spoils wheresoever they came. In that of Stephen the 4. Mysia, and Bulgaria were made tributarie. By the daughters of Bela and Stephen, both the 4. of those names, the houses of Naples and Bohemia came to claim the Kingdome of Hungarie; as Lewis the 1. by Elizabeth his mother, sister of Casimir the 2. did the Kingdome of Poland. The rest of their affairs shall be briefly touched at in the following Catalogue of

The DUKES and KINGS of HUNGARIE.

• A. Ch.
• 1 Cusala, the first Duke (or Captain) of the Hungari, subdued Transylvania, and the Vpper Hungarie, and passed over the Danow, slain in his wars against the Dutch then possessed of Pannonia.
• 2 Toxus, subdued Pannonia, or the Lower Hungarie.
• 3 Gersa, son of Toxus.
• 1000 4 Stephen the fourth Duke and first King of Hungarie.
• 1039 5 Peter, surnamed the Alman, nephew of Stephen, deposed by Andrew and Bela, sons of La∣dislaus son of Geisa the 1. and brother of Stephen the first King.
• 1047 6 Andrew eldest son of that Ladislaus.
• 1059 7 Bela, the brother of Andrew.
• 1062 8 Solomon, the son of Andrew, expelled his Kingdome by
• 1075 9 Geisa II. son of Bela.
• 1078 10 Ladislaus, surnamed the Saint, brother of Geisa the 2.
• 1096 11 Coloman, son of Geisa the 2.
• 1114 12 Stephen II. son of Coloman.
• 1132 13 Bela II. nephew of Geisa the 2. by his son Almus.
• 1142 14 Geisa III. son of Bela the 2.
• 1162 15 Stephen III. son of Geisa the 3.
• 1172 16 Bela III. brother of Stephen the 3.
• 1191 17 Emaricus son of Bela the 3.
• 1201 18 Ladislaus II. son of Emaricus, reigned but 6 months, being slain by treason, very young, and without issue.
• 1201 19 Andrew II. son of Bela the 3. and brother of Emarious.
• 1236 20 Bela IV. son of Andrew the 2.
• 1271 21 Stephen IV. son of Bela the 4.
• 1273 22 Ladislaus III. son of Stephen the 4.
• 1290 23 Andrew III. nephew to Bela the 4. by his brother Stephen.
• 1302 24 Charles, surnamed Martel, son of Charles King of Naples by Marie daughter to Stephen the 4. against whom was chosen Wenceslaus King of Bohemia, son of King Wenceslaus the 2. and Anne his wife, daughter of Bela the 4. and after three years Otho of Bavaria, de∣scended from Elizabeth, another of the daughters of Bela the 4. chosen also by a fa∣ction against Wenceslaus: but Wenceslaus surrendring his claim to Otho, and Otho not long after forced to renounce his title; Charles Martell remained King of the whole.
• 1343 25 Ludovicus, nephew to Charles Martell by his son Carlcobert, succeeded King of Poland also, in right of Elizabeth his mother, sister of Casimir the 2.
• 1383 26 Charls II. King of Naples, descended from Charles of Naples, and Marie daughter of Stephen the 4. before mentioned; by their son John of Durazzo, one of the younger brothers of Charles Martell, poisoned after a short reign by the Widow of the former King to make way for her daughter to the Crown.
• 1387 27 Sigismund Emperour, King of Bohemia and Duke of Luxembourg; in right of Marie his wife,

• eldest daughter of Lewis or Ludovicus, her younger sister Eduigis being Queen of Po∣land.
• 1438 28 Albert of Austria, Emperour and King of Hungarie, and Bohemia, in right of Elizabeth his wife the daughter of Sigismund.
• 1440 29 Ladislaus, or Vladislaus son of Jagello King of Poland in the minoritie of Ladislaus the son of Albert, chosen King of Hungarie, unfortunately slain at the battle of Varna, with 30000 of his people: and perhaps his perjury might deserve it. For having made and sworne a truce with the Turke; the Popes Legate upon a seeming advantage, absolved him of his oath, and drew him into the field. At the beginning the Chri∣stians had the better. But at the last Amurath the 2. against whom they fought, lif∣ting up his eyes to heaven, and desiring Christ to look upon the perfidious dealing wherewith his followers had dishonoured him: re-encouraged his men, and so got the victorie.
• 1444 30 Ladislaus V. King of Bohemia, the son of Albert by Elizabeth, daughter of Sigismund and Mary.
• 1458 31 Matthias Corvinus, son of the famous Huniades, after the death of Ladislaus the 5. chosen King of Hungarie.
• 1491 32 Vladislaus II. or Ladislaus VI. son of Casimir the 4. of Poland, and of Elizabeth the daughter of Albert, succeeded in the Kingdoms of Hungarie and Bohemia, his 3 younger brothers successively in that of Poland.
• 1517 33 Ludovicus II. King of Hungarie and Bohemia, both born and dead before the ordinary course of nature: in the 21 year of his age, and the 10. of his reign, unfortunately drawn into the field to encounter Solyman the Magnificent, one of the hardiest Cap∣tains in his time. The battle was fought at a Village called Mogac••z or Mugaee, just betwixt Belgrade and Buda: in which 19000 of the Hungarians were slain, and the young King drowned in the flight. A most lamentable discomfiture. Lewis thus dead, John Sepusio Vaivod, or Governour of Transylvama, was by the States chosen King of of Hungarie. But Ferdinand Archduke of Austria, and brother unto Charles the 5. chal∣lenged the Kingdome in right of Anne his wife, daughter and sister to Vladislaus and Lewis King of Hungarie and Bohemia. On this pretence he invaded the Kingdom, and drove out John his competitour, who to recover his right, called Solyman the Mag∣nificent into the Country, who took so fast footing in it, that his successours could never since be removed.
• 1527 34 John de Sepusio, Vaivod of Transylvania, chosen King upon the death of Ludovicus II. outed by Ferdinand of Austria, restored by Solyman the great Turk, died anno 1540.
• 1540 35 Ferdinand of Austria, elected King of Bohemia in respect to the Lady Anne his wife, sister of Ludovicus the 2. anno 1527. did in the same right lay claim to the Crown of Hun∣garie; chosen to which by a partie prepared for him: he was alwayes in contention with John de Sepusio; each of them acknowledged King by their severall factions: but by both sides received on the death of John.
• 1562 36 Maximilian Emperour, King of Hungarie and Bohemia, Archduke of Anstria, son of Fer∣dinand.
• 1572 37 Rodolphus Emperour, &c. son of Maximilian.
• 1608 38 Matthias, brother of Rodolphus, afterwards Emperour.
• 1618 39 Ferdinand II. of Gratz, next heir unto Matthias of the house of Austria, afterwards Empe∣rour &c. against whom a partie of Hungarians called in Bethlem Gabor, Prince of Transylvania, whom they elected for their King, intending (as they said) to crown him also. But the affairs of Bohemia going on the Emperours side, Gabor relin∣quished his pretentions and hearkned to a peace betwixt them.
• 1625 40 Ferdinand III. son of Ferdinand the 2. chosen and crowned King in the life of his Father, and in the year 1627. King of Bohemia also, succeeding after him in the Empire and now living, anno 1648.

This Kingdome doth pretend it self to be Elective, and to have speciall priviledges indulged them by their former Princes; and anciently indeed it was so in both respects, the last especially: King An∣drew giving authoritie to his Prelates, Peers, and other people, Vt sine nota alicujus infidelitatis, &c. that without any imputation of disloyaltie, they might contradict, oppose, and resist their King if he did any thing in violation of their Laws and sanctions. But both their libertie of Elections, and pre∣tence of Priviledges have been so shaken and restrained by their Kings of the house of Austria, that the Elections are become a matter of formalitie only, their Priviledges depending wholly on the Princes pleasure: now grown too potent for them to contend withall, unless they should betray their Coun∣try into the hands of the Turk. To which some of them have expressed some strong inclinations, the oppressions laid upon them by the Austrian familie, being deemed unsufferable.

The forces of this Kingdome when it was entire, may best be seen by those great Armies which they have brought into the field against the Turk. By whom two parts of three being since subdued, that which remains must not be thought able to answer the proportion of former times; though they have done more then could reasonably be expected from it. For at the battell of Keresiure, anno 1596.

there were 6000 Hungarian horse, and 10000 foot, of this Nation only; besides those of Germanie and Transylvania: and the next year, notwithstanding the discomfiture of that Armie, they raised no lesse then 20000 horse and foot, on the noise of some preparations among the Turks. 'Tis true; their 〈◊〉〈◊〉 are commonly but meanly armed; the defect wherein is rather to be imputed to the Prince then un∣to the people: who can but bring their bodies (which is all they have) for defence of their Country. And for their horse, (whom they call Heiducks) maintained in continuall readinesse at the charge of the Nobilitie and principall Gentrie; they are next Coufins to the Cosacques, almost as mischievous as they, and hold as strict intelligence with the Turks as those doe with the Tartars.

The chief Revenues of this Kingdome come from the silver mines, out of which is yearly raised about a million and an halfe of Guldens. Maximilian the 2. made it up two millions by seizing on the lands of Cathedrall and Collegiate Churches, and assigning annuall pensions to the Bishops, Canons, and other Religious persons. Most of which summe comes clearly to the Emperours Cofers, the Presidiary Soul∣diers being paid with Contribution money raised upon the Countrie: and the Lieutenant Generall, whose entertainment comes to 30000 Dollars yearly, defrayed upon their purses also.

The chief Order of Knighthood in this Kingdome was that of the Dragon, instituted by Sigismund Em∣perour and King hereof, at such time as by the Councell of Constance, against John of Hus and Hierome of Prague, and by the sharpnesse of his sword proved upon their followers, he had cast down (as he conceived) the Dragon of Heresie and Schisme. But the device proved of no long continuance, expiring almost with the Author.

The Arms of Attila the Hunn, once the King of this Countrie by the name of Pannonia, are said to have been Gules, a Falcon displayed Or, membred and crowned Argent. But the Arms of the King∣dome at this time, are Barre-wise of 8 pieces Gules and Argent.

There are in HƲNGARIE Archbishops 2 Bishops 13.

And so much for HƲNGARIE.

OF SCLAVONIA.

SCLAVONIA is bounded on the East with Servia, Macedonia, and Epirus, from which parted by the River Drinus, and a line drawne from thence unto the Adriatick; on the West with Carniola in Germanie and Histria, in the Signeurie of Venice, from which last divided by the River Arsia; on the North with Hungarie, on the South, with the Adriatick Sea. So cal∣led from the Sclaves or Sclavi a Darmatian people, of whom more anon.

It containes in length from Arsia, to the River Drinus, according to Plinies computation 800 Italian miles; the greatest breadth being 325 of the same miles. But others reckon the length of it at no more then 480 miles, who may be reconciled with Plinie, by supposing this, that these last measure in a strait and direct line from River to River; and that Pliny coasted by the Creekes and reaches of the Adriatick. Situate in the Northern temperate Zone, betwixt the middle Parallels of the sixth and seventh Climates: so that the longest day in summer is about 15 houres and an halfe.

The Countrie is generally fruitfull of all those commodities, which are found in Italy, to which little inferiour: yeelding not onely wine and oyle in very good plenty, but good store of Cattell, and of wilde beasts of pleasure no want at all; some rich veins also of gold and silver. The nor∣thern parts are mountainous, cold, for the most part lying under snowes, not capable of wine, or any the like productions which require much heat. But even these mountainous parts afford very good pasturage, and breed a wealthy race of sheep which bring forth young twice a yeare and are shorn four times. Nor doth the Sea coasts come behinde in advancing the profit of the people, not onely yeelding store of fish, but the benefit of many excellent and convenient Havens.

The people are courageous, proud, stubborn and untractable, of strong bodies, and able consti∣tutions, fit for workes of drudgerie, and so employed by the Venetians, when first brought under their command: who using them in all servile offices both at home and abroad, occasioned the neighbouring Nations to call their Villaines or Bond-servants, as they of Venice did, by the name of Sclaves; that being originally as to this people, the name not of their condition, but of their An∣cestors and Countrey.

The Christian faith was first here planted, I mean in reference to this people, who doe now in∣habit it, about the time of Charles the Bald, Emperour of the West, anno 877. Sueropilus being the first of their Kings who embraced the Gospell. But lying in the mid way of Greece and Italy, the Reli∣gion of the Church of Rome, and that of the Greeke Church are both allowed of: that of the Greeks being as prevalent in the East parts hereof, as that of Rome is in the Western: The Turkish and Mahometan prevailing in those Towns and Territories under their obedience. But though they bee not of one Religion, they are all of one Language; which is the old Sarmatian (or Sclavonian) tongue, generally spoken in the Empire of Rulsia, Livonia, Poland, Silesia, Bohemia, Moravia, some part of Hun∣gary, Histria, Sclavonia, where we now are, Dacia, Epirus, Georgia, Mengrelia, (both in Asia) and by

all the Captaines,* 1.96 Officers, and other souldiers of the Turkish Empire: the language generally spreading over all those Countreys, which either were Sarmatian in their first originall, or made theirs by conquest under the united name of Sclaves, or otherwise intermixt with them by the necessity of commerce and trade, or dispatch of their common businesses. Insomuch as taking in the subdivisions of the Provinces and Countreys before specified, it is affirmed by Gesner a right learned man that there are no fewer then 60 Nations which have the Sclavonian tongue for their Vulgar lan∣guage.

Chief Mountaines in this Countrey are those called Scardonici (from Scardona, one of the best towns of Illyris) dividing Dalmatia in the midst, and extending along the Coasts therof; by Ptolemie called Ardium. Of Rivers those of special note amongst the Antients, were 1 Titius, now Varietha, separating Illyris from Dalmatia; 2 Arsia, now Arsa, the utmost bound upon the West; which as 3 Drinus is upon the East: of which the first falleth into that Bay of the Adriatick, which is called Golfo di Quevero, (〈◊〉〈◊〉 Flanaticus by the Antients) the other into the Saw or Savus, somewhat west of Belgrade. 4 Narso, now Narento, running not far from Epidaurus.

The Boundaries and Landmarkes being thus set out, I should proceed to the division of the countrey as now it standeth. But I must first look on it as it stood in the time of the Romans: in whose time that part of the whole Province which lay from the whole River Arsia to the Titius, was named Laburnia, and Illyris; that from the Titius to the Drinus was called Dalmatia. But the Illyrians being the stouter and more warlike people, and such as created greatest troubles to the Romans; it pleased the Conquerours when they had fully subdued both Nations, to call the whole countrey by the name of Illyricum: and not so onely, but to extend this name over all their Provinces (the Diccese of Thrace excepted) which lay between the Alpes and the Euxine Sea; the Adriatick and the Danow: for to farre the Jurisdiction of the Praefectus Praetorio of Illyricum, did at first extend. Huic Praefecto (saith Zosimus) Constantinus ejus institutor Macedones attribuit, Thessalos, Cretenses, Graeciam, & circumjacentes insu∣l••s, Epirum utranque, Illyricos, Dacos, Triballos, & Pannonios, Valeriam usque & Mysiam superiorem. And that all these did then passe by the name of Illyricum, appeareth as well by that of Pollio in the life of Claudius the second, expressely saying Illyricum, Thracus, Mysos, Dacos, Dalmatias & Pannonias continebat; as by that of Socrates the Historian, who lib. 32. cap, 20. calleth Sirmium the chief town of Pannonia Inferior, & lib. 5. cap. 6. Thessalonica, the chief City of Macedon, urbes Illyricas, or Illyrian Cities. By which ac∣compt Illyricum in the largest extent of that name contained no lesse then 18 Provinces of the Roman Empire; that is to say, 1 Noricum Mediterraneum, 2 Noricum Ripense, 3 Pannonia Superior, 4 Pannonia In∣ferior, 5 Valeria, 6 Savia, 7 Dalmatia, 8 Moesia superior, 9 Dardania, 10 Dacia Mediterranea, 11 Dacia, Ripensis, 12 Macedonia, 13 Thessaly, 14 Achaia, 15 Crete, 16 Epirus Vetus, 17 Epirus Nova, and 18 Pre∣velitana. These 18 Provinces being cast or made up into three Dioceses, viz. the Diocese of Illyricum, specially so called, containing the seven first; 2 the Diocese of Macedon, containing the seven last; and 3 the Diocese of Dacia, comprehending the other four: were governed by the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyricum, who had first his chief seat and residence at Sirmium before mentioned. But in the division of the Empire betwixt the sonnes of Theodosius the Great, into the Eastern and the Western: the Diocese of Illyricum specially so called (after that named Illyricum Occidentale) was laid unto the Western Empire, under the Governance of the Praefectus Praetorio of Italy, and thereupon the seat or residence of the Praetorto Praefectus for Illyricum, removed from Sirmium unto Thessalonica. So that now we are to looke upon Illyricum in a stricter notion, as a Diocese of the Western Empirre, containing the seven Pro∣vinces before specified, whereof both Noricums, both Pannonias, and Valeria (if at least Stiermarch be that Valeria, as some say it is) have been described already in their proper places. There now remaine onely Savia and Dalmatia to be spoken of: the first containing all those parts of this countrey lying on both sides of the Savus (whence it had the names); the last, those parts hereof which lie towards the Sea, known by the antient name of Dalmatia, the Region of Illyris properly so called, being added to it. But as new Lords give new laws, so they give new names. The countrey being divided by the Sclavi into two Kingdomes, viz. of Croatia and Dalmatia: of which the first contained the Province of Savia, the last took up the whole Province of Dalmatia bounded as before, but keeping the name of Sclavonia to it selfe alone, being indeed the onely Province in which the name and memory of the Sclavi, is retained amongst us. Afterwards as it came to be divided (as at last it was) betwixt the Kings of Hungary and the State of Venice: we finde it subdivided into these six parts; that is to say 1 Win∣dischland, 2 Croatia, 3 Bosnia, 4 Dalmatia, 5 Liburnia, or Contado di Zara, and 6 the Sclavonian Islands.

1 WINDISCHLAND.

WINDISCHLAND is bounded on the East with part of the Lower Hungary, from which se∣parated by a line drawne from St. Nicolas near the River Dravus to the town of Polega, standing on a little River which fals into the Savus on the West with Carniola, or Krain, a Province of the Arch∣dukedome of Austria: on the North with the River Dravus, on the South with Croatia. It is thus called by the Dutch as the Land or Countrie of the Winithi, or Vendi, the greatest Nation of the Sclaves, whom generally they call by the name of Windisch: and antiently for so much of it as lieth on the North of the Savus accounted part of Pannonia Inferior, as afterwards of the Province of Savia, till conquered by the Sclaves, and laid unto their possessions; from whom named Windischland, as before.

Places of most importance in it are 1 Windisch-greits,* 1.97 seated on the Dravus, the Vinundria and Vin∣d••mana of the Antients. 2 Sagona, neere unto the Savus. 3 Gradiska on the South, and 4 Zagabria, on the North of the same River: from which last a great part of this Countrey is called Comitatus Zagabriensis. 5 Novigrod, on the Savus also, but more neere to Germany. 6 Petrowya, situate at the foot of the mountaines, which are between the Savus and the Dravus, and divide Hungary from 〈◊〉〈◊〉 7 Siseg, or Sissakhen, (the Sissia of Pliny and Antoninus) situate on the Saw, over against Zagabria, where it receiveth the river Zulp, famous for the notable resistance which the Turks there found, anno 1593. Who hoping by the conquest of this Province to open a free passage into Germany, entred it with a puissant Army, (having in their way taken the Castle of Ostrowits and the strong Town of Wihits in Croatia) and sate down very strongly intrenched before this Town. But the town held it out most gallantly against all their batteries and assaults, till relieved by a power of Germans who came to succour them; by whom 8000 of the Turkes were slaine in the place, and most of the rest drowned in the River Savus, as they fled hastily, and (through that gre••t hast) blindely from the sword of the Conquerour.

This Province for the most part is under the Princes of the house of Austria, as Kings of Hungary, to which Crown it formerly belonged; those parts of it which lie next to Hungary, on the North and East, groaning under the tyranny and bondage of the Turkish Garrisons.

2 CROATIA.

CROATIA is bounded on the North with Windischland, from which parted by the River Vna, or Wana; on the East with Bosnia; on the South with L••bur••ia, or Contado di Zara; on the West with Carniola. The reason of the name I finde not amongst my Authours; but onely that it was imposed by the Sclaves at their first coming hither: who comprehended under this name all the Inland parts of Sclavonia, from the mountain Ardium to Pannonia, including Bosnia and Windischland, though distin∣guished afterwards.

The Countrey for the most part cold, mountainous and hilly, overspread by the branches of the Mountaines Baebii spoken of by Ptolemy; yet reasonably fruitfull, stored with all necessarie provisions for the life of man: and would yeeld more increase and profit both to Lord and Tenant, were it not for the ill neighbourhood of the Turk, to whose tyranny and oppressions it hath been, and is still ex∣posed. The people for the generall are held to be good souldiers, mentioned in our modern stories by the name of Crabats.

Chief Townes in it are 1 Masch or Mosth, bordering upon Germany, the Al••ta of the Antients. 2 O∣strowits, a strong Fort on the same Frontire; 3 Wihits, by the Dutch called Big••hen, by the Antients Funium, the Metropolis or chief Town of the Countrey, encompassed like an Island by the River Vna, and fortified with strong works by the help of Art: but taken by the Turk anno 1592. and all the souldiers in it cruelly murdered, contrary to the Articles agreed on at the surrend••ie. 4 Zeng, 5 Wac∣kat, 6 Tarnaw, 7 Modrisch, of which little memorable.

This Countrey with the rest included antiently under this name, was one of the two kingdomes of Sclavonia, the Princes whereof were usually entituled Kings of Croatia and Delmatia. In the yeare 1007. the Venetians having before possessed themselves of some Townes on the Sea side, first set footing there. How the whole Countrey of Sclavonia came to the Crown of Hungary, shall be shewn anon. Held, part of it in the right thereof, by the house of Austria; part of it by the Turkes in the way of conquest: the Venetians having now no share in it, for ought I can finde.

4 BOSNIA.

BOSNIA is bounded on the East with Servia a Province of Dacia: on the West with Croatia; on the North with the River Savus, and the East parts with the Lower Hungary; on the South with Dalmatia. So called as some think from the River Bosna, which runneth through it; as others, from the Bessi a people of Dacia, driven out of their Countrey by the Bulgari, and removing hither, by the change of a Vowell called Bossi, whence the Country Bosnia.

Places of most importance are in it 1 Iaitza, by the Latines called Iazyga, situate on the top of an high hil, at the bottom whereof almost encompassed with two rivers, which there uniting passe from thence unto the Savus. The Town by reason of the rocky praecipices of the Hil, the unfordablenesse of the Ri∣ver, and an inaccessible Castle, held to be impregnable: the Metropolis in former times of this petit kingdome, and the ordinary sepulture of the kings thereof. 2 Warbosoni, at this time the chief Town of the Countrey, but not walled about. 3 Cazach, the usuall residence or retiring place of the Bosnian Kings. 4 Schwanica, not much observable. 5 Dorobiza, the first town taken by Mahomet the great in his conquest of this Kingdome, as 6 Clyssa was the last; the unfortunate King Stephen being taken in it.

This Countrey antiently accounted of as a part of Croatia, together with it was united to the Crown of Hungary; under the Patronage and Homage whereof it was erected into a Kingdome: but the precise time when, I finde not. Some say, about the year 1420. If so, a Kingdome of late date, and a short continuance. For in the yeare 1464. Mahomet the Great, first Emperour of the Turkes,

having taken Constantinople,* 1.98 and almost all the rest of Greece, cast his eye upon it, suddenly surprised it: and having taken Stephen the last King hereof, most barbarously commanded him to be flead alive. After whose death this Kingdome was converted to a Province of the Turkish Empire, and go∣verned by one of the Bassas of it; as it still continueth.

4 DALMATIA.

DALMATIA is bounded on the East with Albania from which parted by the River Dris••, on the East with the Titius (now Variecha) which divides it from Liburnia, on the North with Bosnia, on the South with the Adriatick Sea. This only of all the Provinces of Sclavonia, retaineth its ancient name and bounds. So called from Dalminium the chief town hereof in the time of the Romans, from which the people were called Dalmatae, and the Countrie Dalmatia.

The Countrie in the time of the Romans was full of woods, and those woods of Robbers, who from thence issued out to make spoil and bootie. Dalmatae sub sylvis agunt, inde ad latrocinia promptissim, saith the Historian. And by the advantage of these woods, they intercepted and discomfited Gabin••••, one of Caesars Captaines, marching through their Countrie with 1000 horse and 15 Companies of foot towards Ma••edonia, to the aid of his Generall against Pompey. But their woods being destroyed they became more peaceable; and in stead of Robberies by Land, began to exercise themselves at Sea in the way of Merchandizing, to which their large Sea-coasts and commodious Havens served ex∣ceeding fitly.

Places of most consideration in it, 1 Sebenic on the Sea side, not far from the influx of Titius or Var••echa: by Ptolemie called Si••um, in whose time a Colonie of Roman Souldiers, sent hither by the Emperour Claudius. 2 Salona, a Roman Colonie also, one of the Juridicall Resorts for these parts of the Province, and the ordinarie Arsenall for their Navies. Renowned in ancient stories for the retreat of Dio••letian, a Native of this Countrie, who having governed the Roman Empire 20 years with much felicity, but a great deal of crueltie, deposed himself, and retired to this Citie, where he fol∣lowed the trade of a Gardener, working with his own hands and observing with great content the productions of nature. Insomuch that when Maximianus Herculius his associate (who at his per∣swasion had done the like) invited him to resume the Empire, he returned this answer, Vtinam possi∣tis visere olera nostris manibus plantata, &c. that if he would come unto Salona and see how well the Worts which he had planted with his own hands, did thrive and prosper, he would never trouble his head with Crowns, nor his hands with Scepters: a rare expression of a settled and contented minde. The name, and some of the ruines doe still remain to preserve the memorie of so remarkable a place. 3 Spalato, East of Sebenic, a Sea town, and an Archbishops See, who writes himself Primate of Dabna∣tia. Of note for many learned Prelates, but for none more then for Marcus Antonius de Dominis, who seeming to loath the Romish superstition, came for refuge in England, anno 1616. and having here both by preaching and writing laboured to overthrow the Church of Rome, upon I know not what pro∣jects, he declared himself to be of another mind, anno 1622. and returned again to Rome, where he writ as reproachfully of the Church of England. So that we may say of him, as Socrates in his Ecclesiasticall Historie saith of Ecebolius, who under Constantius, was a Christian; under Julian a Pa∣gan; and a Christian again under Jovinian: 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 So wavering and unconstant a turn-coat was Ecebolius, from his beginning to his end. But Ecebolius sped bet∣ter then Antonius did, he being received into the Church upon his repentance, but this infatuated man imprisoned in the Castle of Angelo, and his dead bodie burnt to Ashes. A just reward for so great le∣vity, and so grosse Apostasie, as he had shewed unto the world in his going hence. 4 Almissa, the Pi∣guritium of Ptol••mie, mounted on an high rock, and defended with an impregnable Castle. 5 Stagn••, upon the point of a long and spatious Chersonese, not far from which the River Naron (or Narento) falls into the Adriatick 6 Castle Novo, a strong Fortresse within the Gulfe of Catharo, now in possessi∣on of the Turks. 7 Antibari, on the further or Eastern side of the Bay, an Archbishops See; but that and the Sees of his Suffragan Bishops, being 7 in number, now in possession of the Turks. 8 Cath••••, on the same side of the Bay, by Ptolemie called Ascruvium, inhabited in his time by Roman Citizens; now a strong hold for the Venetians against the Turks, and giving name unto the Gulfe, which formerly called Sinus Rhizonis••us, from Rhizana (now Rhizius) situate at the bottome of it, is at this time cal∣led from this Town Golfo de Catharo. 9 Dolcigno, by Ptolemie called Vleinium, originally founded by the Colchians. 10 Scutari, more within the land, (the Scodra of Ptolemie and Antoninus) strongly sea∣ted on a steep Rock, memorable for the stout resistance which it made for a whole year, against the whole puissance of Mahomet the 2. battered for the most part of that time with 70 pieces of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of wondrous bignesse, especially that called the Princes piece, which carried a stone or bullet of 1220 l. weight; and taken at the last, anno 1578. Not far from this Town is the great Lake, called by S••••••∣bo, Labeates; now the Lake of Scutari, 130 miles in compasse, and environed on all sides with Moun∣tains, except towards the North, out of which issueth the Drinus, now called Driana, which partina Sclav••nia from Macedon and Servia, passeth into the Savus. 11 Alesio, the Lissus of Ptolemie, the furthest town of all Dalmatta, towards Greece: memorable for the Grave of Scanderbeg, who was buried her••∣whereof more hereafter. 12 Medon, raised out of the ruines of Dioclea, an ancient and famous Citie, the birth-place of the Great Emperour Diocletian, spoken of before. 13 Dalminium, once the Metro∣polis of this Province, situate on the River Drinus, first sacked by Marcius Figulus a Roman Consul, 〈◊〉〈◊〉

V. C. 689. and after,* 1.99 on a new revolt by one Nasi••a, spoken of by Strabo: not able after two such ruines to revive againe; nothing being now left of it, but the name and memorie.

Betwixt the Chersonese of Stagno and the Gulfe of Catharo, stands the town and territorie of Ragusi; not subject as all the rest are either to the Turk or to the Venetians, but governing themselves by their own Lawes and Magistrates as a Free-Commonwealth; paying only to the Turk 14000 Zechi••s yearly in way of tribute, and as much in Presents: discharged in that regard of Customes and Imp••sitions, in all his Dominions. It was anciently called Epidaurus (of which name there were two other Cities in Pelo∣ponnesus) but that town being razed by the Gothes, the Inhabitants (after their departure) not know∣ing where to retire themselves, built this in the place of it, at the foot of a steep Mountaine, enjoying a pleasant situation near the Sea with a little, but commodious port, forced out of the water by the art and industrie of work-men. The town well built, fortified with wals and a well furnished Ca∣stle; now an Archbishops See, and a noted Emporie, rich, and strong in shipping, commanding over a small and barren territorie within the land, and some pleasant Islands in the Sea. So that the riches of it proceed not from their Rents and Revenues rising out of the Earth, but by the benefit of their tra∣fique upon the Waters, secured therein by the protection of the Turk, without which they had fal∣len before this time into the hands of the Venetians; as on the other side preserved by the State of Ve∣nice, from being a prey to their Protectours. Of more wealth heretofore then they are at the present. At what time they traded to most parts of this Western world in those great Vessels which from hence were called Raguses, but corruptly Argosies: the last of which (their number lessening with their trade) they lent unto the King of Spain for the war of England, anno 1588. in which action it was lost and wracked on the Coast of Ireland.

5 CONTADO DIZARA.

CONTADODIZARA, or the Countrie of Zara, called anciently Liburnia, and Illyris spe∣cially so named, is bounded on the East with Dalmatia, on the West with Histria, on the North with Croatia, and on the South with the Adriatick Sea, or Golfe of Venice.

It took this latter name (the former being long discontinued) from Zara the chief town thereof the Jadera of Ptolemie and the ancients, a Roman Colonie at that time, now an Archbishops See, en∣joying a safe and large Port, situate on a low Chersonese thrusting out like a Promontorie into the Adri∣atick; belonging to the State of Venice, by whom well fenced and fortified against forein invasions. For the possession and command of this town, there have been great wars betwixt the Hungarians and the Venetians; to whom it seemeth to be of such importance, that being once taken by the Hungari∣ans, it was redeemed for 100000 Crowns, of Ladislaus King of Naples, pretending against Sigismund of Luxembourg to the Crown of Hungarie. In this town is the Church of S. John de Malvatia, which was built by a company of Saylors; who being in a tempest, made a vow, that if they escaped, they would consecrate a Temple to S. John de Malvatia, whose morter should be tempered with Malmsey; and accordingly they paid their vowes. Far lesse did another Master of a ship intend to perform his promise, though he spoke bigger; who in a like extremity of danger, promised our Lady to offer at her Altar a Candle as great as the main mast of his ship. For when one of his mates jogging him, told him he had promised an impossibilitie: Tush fool (replyed the Master) we must speak her fair in time of need; but if ever I come a shore, I will make her be content with a candle of eight to the pound. And in a like fit of devotion was he, who on the same occasion plainly told God, that he was no com∣mon begger, he never troubled him with prayers before; and if he would hear him that time, he would never trouble him again.

Other towns herein considerable, are 1 Albona, retaining still the old name (the Alvona of Ptole∣mie) situate near the River Arsia, the divider of this Province from Histria. 2 Flavona, or Flanona, situate against the Gulfe of Quernero, of old called Sinus Flanaticus, as before was noted: of ill report amongst Saylors for frequent tempests raised on every winde. 3 Zegna, by Ptolemie and Plinie called Senia, situate on a flat or levell. 4 Nona, of old called Aenona, compassed with the Sea. 5 Scrifia, now a poor Village in the place where stood the Argyrutum of Plinie. 6 Scardona, now a mean Vil∣lage also, heretofore of great note, and the Juridicall Resort for the whole Province: from whence the neighbouring Mountaines had the name of Scardonici: the bounds of this Country and Croatia.

The ancient name of this Country was Liburnia, as before is said, but extending more North∣wards beyond the Mountains of Ardium, or Scardonici; this and Dalmatia being then the Membra divi∣dentia of the whole Illyricum. The people hereof called by one generall name Liburni, were much gi∣ven to Piracies; and for their better speed therein, the Authors and Inventers of those swift vessels which were called Liburnicae, and Liburnae. Of which thus Horace:

Ibis Liburnis inter alta navium Amice propugnacula.

That is to say:

In a Liburnian shalt thou be Amongst the stoutest ships at Sea.

In imitation of which Vessels being swift and light, the Romans in the time of their wealth and pride invented a kinde of Chair or Litter, (such as those which we call Sedans) wherein they were carried on mens shoulders with such ease and pleasure, that they could not only sleep or read, but write in them also: the Porters or Bearers of them of this Nation commonly; from whence, or from the fashion of the Vessel which they did resemble, they were called Liburni. Of these thus Ju∣venal in his third Satyre:

Si vocat officium, turba cedente vehetur Dives, & ingenti curret super ora Liburno, Atque obiter leget, aut scribet, vel dormiet intus, Namque facit somnum clausa lectica fenestra.

Thus Englished by my honoured friend Sir Robert Stapleton, in his excellent translation of that harsh Satyrist.

When businesse cals, a crowd the rich man shuns, And o're mens heads in's huge Sedan he runs, Reads, writes, and sleeps within it as he goes, For sleep will come if he the curtains close.

Besides which office of Chair-carriers or Sedan-men, as we call them now, this people being, when once conquered, a servile Nation, furnished the Romans with those Beadels, whom they employed in calling the Citizens from the fields to their publick businesses, to which the same Poet alludeth, in the next Satyre, saying, Clamante Liburno, Currite, jam sedit, &c. But to proceed, the nearnesse of this Countrie to the Adriatick, occasioned the Bay of Quernero commonly called Sinus Flanaticus, to be sometimes named Sinus Liburnicus, the parts of Italie on the other side of it, to be called Regna Libur∣norum in the Poet Virgil, and gave the name of Liburnades to a shole of Islands lying on the coast hereof, 60 at least in number, as is said by Strabo. To which and other Islands of the Adriatick, we are now to hasten, leaving the storie of Illyricum to the close of all.

6 The SCLAVONIAN ISLANDS.

Along the Coasts of Sclavonia, lie a cluster of ISLANDS to the number of a thousand as is said by Plinie: most of which (if indeed so many) are but rocks, not Islands, or not inhabited at all, or of any note. The principall whereof, and such as deserve place here, are 1 the Liburnades before mentioned. 2 The Absyrtides. 3 The Isles of Ragusi. 4 Arbe. 5 Curzola. 6 Zara. 7 Lissa and Brazzia: the rest not worth the looking after, as to our designe: the whole number of the Inhabi∣tants reckoned in the totall to no more then 40000 persons.

1 The LIBVRNADES said by Strabo to be 60 in number, lie all along the Coast of Liburnia, or Contado di Zaro: the chief whereof are 1 ISSA, now called Pago, containing 100 miles in com∣passe, having a town of the same name; but in all that tract of ground not above 1500 inhabitants in the time of my Author, by reason of the sharp air, and great want of fewell. The Salt-pits here yeeld great commoditie, not only to the people themselves, but also to the State of Venice, supreme Lord hereof. 2 Tragurium, now Tran and Trahu, so called from the chief town hereof, built by those of Issa: so near the Continent that it seems to be a part thereof. By Mela it is named Tagu∣rium, with some little difference. 3 Pharus, so called from the Pharii, or Parii, of whom once a Colonie, long since come to ruine. It is now called Lezina, the greatest of all the Adriatick, as being 150 miles in compasse, and very fruitfull for the bignesse. It hath a town of the same name, which en∣joying a safe and spatious Harbour; unwalled and of no great beautie, but fortified with a strong Castle which commandeth both the Harbour and the shipping in it. The birth-place of Demetrius Pharius, so often mentioned in the stories of Greece and Rome.

2 The ABSYRTIDES are in number many, so called from the River Absyrtus, which there∣about falls into the Adriatick, according unto that of Lucan:

Ei cadit Adriacas spumans Absyrtus in undas.

Absyrtus foaming with his hast Into the Adria falls at last.

But whether that river were so called by the Colchians at their landing there, in memorie of Absyrtas the son of Aetas King of Colchis, whom they went to seek; or for some other reason, I determine not. Certain I am, it could not be so named from the scattering of his limbs hereabouts, by Medea his unnaturall sister, as is said by Plinie: that cruell fact being done on the shores of the Euxine: the place called Tomos afterwards upon that occasion. But for these Islands being in number many, as be∣fore was said, two only are of speciall note, that is to say, 1 Vegia, or Viglio, not far from Zegna on the firm land, containing in compasse betwixt 80 and 100 miles, and about 10000 Inhabitants, the most populous of all these Seas. It hath a town of the same name, with a very fair harbour: the Island by Plinie called Curieta, the chief towns of it in his time being Pfulfinium, and Curicum. 2 Absorus as Ptolemie, Absyrtium as Plinie calls it: in whose time it was one Island only, but now divided into two, by the Venetians, letting in the Sea betwixt them: the one of them is called Cherso, the other Osero: both joyned together by a Bridge made by the Venetians, and both together making up 140 miles in compasse; each of them having one town only, and that of the same name with the Island, the Inhabitants in both not exceeding 5000 persons. Stored with sufficiencie of corn, plentie of wine, and abundance of wood, great quantities whereof are sent yearly to Venice. They have also goodly heards of Cattle, and great flocks of sheep, affording by their flesh, wool, cheese, and butter, a good increase of profit to the owners of them.

3 The Islands of Ragusi, (for so I call them which belong to that Common-wealth) are but three in number: 1 Gravosa, a very pleasant place, full of Gardens of Oranges, Lemmons, and Pomegra∣nates. 2 Languste, environed about with very high Mountains, in which are the Ragusians Farms, made rich by the great charge and industrie of the severall Occupants, so as to yeeld them wine, oil, and most excellent fruits; which they receive more plentifully from a goodly Plain situate in the midst hereof, and naturally more fruitfull then the other parts. Near to this last Island is good fishing for Sprats: and in both an Art of making their trees to bring forth Oysters, by bending down their boughes, and staying them under the water with stones; so as in two years there are so many Oysters fastned unto them, as is strange to see, and in the third year they are very good meat. 3 Melida, ly∣ing betwixt Ragusi and the Isle of Curzola, by Plinie called Melita, and on that ground supposed by some to be that Island on which S. Paul did suffer shipwrack, Acts 29. But the name of Barbarous which the Text joynes to the Inhabitants of it, not proper to an Island betwixt Greece and Italie, in the times of S. Paul, and his landing there in Syracusa, an Haven of Sicil, so far from this, so near unto the other Melita, which is now called Malta; sufficiently refell this fancie, though otherwise not improbably grounded.

4 Of those which are known only by one single name, the chief are ARBE, so called in the time of Plinie from the best town of it; but by Ptolemie it is named Scardona. A pleasant Island, in com∣passe about 30 miles, and containing some 3000 Inhabitants, the only Haven-lesse Isle of all the Adri∣atick; but that defect abundantly recompensed by the naturall sweetnesse of the place. Which so enticed certaine dissolute Rovers of Austria, that they seised upon it, anno 1618. and had like to have occasioned an heavy war betwixt Ferdinand Archduke of the House of Gratz (not long after chosen King of the Romans) and the State of Venice, if Philip the 3. of Spain had not made up the breach.

5 CVRZOLA, by Ptolemie and Strabo called Corcyra, or Melaena, more rightly Corcyra Melaena, or Cor∣cyra Nigra, to difference it from Corcyra, now Corfu, in the Sea Ionian: the chief town of it being of the same name with the Island, was founded by the Gnidians of the Isle of Crete; sufficiently fruitfull, but of wine especially, 40 miles long, in compasse 90. and very populous for the bignesse; notwithstanding that the people being Sea-faring men, do much use the Seas and build many ships. In the year 1571. a little af∣ter the taking of Cyprus, and before the battel of Lepanto, it was invaded by Vluz Aly, Generall of the Tur∣kish Fleet, with a Navie of 60 Gallies: for fear of whom Contarenus the Venetian Governour, together with the Townsmen and Garrison Souldiers, abandoned Curzola, the chief town hereof. The silly women thus forsaken, and preferring death before dishonour, defended the walls; and with fire, stones, and such other weapons as they had, they beat off the enemie: till at the last a violent tempest forced the Turkish Generall to remove his Gallies further off to a place of safetie.

6 ZARA, LISSA, BRAZZIA, three small Isles, not otherwise memorable but for thei•• misfortunes, spoiled by the Turks at their departure from Curzola, who carryed thence 1600 Christians into cruell bondage. The rest I purposely omit, rather Rocks then Islands, barren and stonie for the most part, and not much inhabited.

The antient Inhabitants of Illyricum,* 1.100 in the full extent of it, comprehending Liburnia and Dal∣matia, were the Japodes bordering on Italy, the S••irtones or Scirtari confining upon Macedon; the Ma∣zae••, in the midst about Salona; the Peirustae lying towards Pannonia, the Derrii, Ceraunii, Daursii, Vardae, Sicul••tae, Sardiotae, and others of inferiour note: all making up the great and potent Nations of the Li∣burni and the Dalmatae; and comprehended generally in the name of Illyrians. Of these the Liburni∣an Illyrians, (Illyrici seu Liburni as they are indifferently called by Florus) were the first who felt the Forces of Rome: which growing State they had provoked by their frequent Piracies, but more by murdering the Ambassadours which were sent unto them to require satisfaction: Teuta their Queen, a proud and Imperious Dame, commanding execution to be done upon them. Warred upon by the Romans for so many injuries, under the conduct of Centimalus one of the Consuls, they were over∣thrown (as having more of the Pirate then the souldier in them) some of their chief Nobility exe∣cuted in revenge of the wrong done to the Ambassadours; an yearly tribute imposed on them, and the Queen deprived of the greatest part of her Kingdome, conferred by the Romans on Demetrius Pharius, one of their Confederats. But he proving unfaithfull to them in their war with Hannibal, and Gentius their last King who commanded over Illyricum, siding against them with Perseus King of Macedonia: Anicius the Praetor is sent with a sufficient Army to make an end of that work. Who used such dili∣gence therein, that Scordra the chief town of the Kingdome, was taken, and the King himselfe to∣gether with his wife and children made Prisoners; by consequence the whole war ended, ante∣quam geri Romae nunciaretur, before they knew at Rome that it was begun. The Liburnians after this became quiet subjects, the whole Countrey on taking of the Gentius being made a Pro∣vince of the Romans, anno V. C. 586. employed at Rome in many servile offices, as before was said: but them the Dalmatians began to cast off the yoke. But Dalminium their chiefe City being first sacked by Martius Figulus, and after by Nasica before mentioned; they continued quiet and obedient till the time of Augustus Caesar: when they againe rebelled at the instigation of one Batto, a man very potent with the people; who having ten years together maintained the liberty of his coun∣trey, at last broken and wearied by the forces of Germanicus and Tiberius he submitted himselfe unto the two Generals: who asking the reason of his revolt, were answered, because the Romans sent not shepheards to keep, but wolves to devoure their flockes. Thus finally conquered, it continued a Roman Pro∣vince till the coming of Odoacer into Italy, who brought it under his command; as the Gothes also did having vanquished him, and thereby made themselves Masters of Italy, and the rest of his pur∣chases: But the kingdome of the Gothes, being brought to an end by the good fortune of Justinian, and the valour of Belisarius and Narses, two of his Commanders (but very ill requited by him) Il∣lyricum became a part of the Eastern Empire: continuing under the power of the Grecian Emperours till the time of Phocas that bloudy Tyrant: when made a prey unto the Sclaves.

Of these though we have spoken before in severall places, as their fortunes and affaires have led us: yet being this is the onely countrey which preserves their name, we will here speake more exactly of them, then we have done hitherto; especially as to their manners, name and first Originall; and finally of their successes in this countrey. And first for their Originall, I take it for a thing past que∣stion that they were no other then naturall Sarmatians, inhabiting on the North of the River Ister, uniting themselves under this name, in their undertakings and attempts on the Eastern Empire; as the many Nations of Germany tooke the name of Frankes, and Almans, in their actions and achieve∣ments against the Western. But why they took this name rather then another, is not yet agreed on. Some fetch the originall of it from Slowo, which in the Sclavonian tongue signifieth a Speech or word, because they were all of one common language: others from Slawa, signifying in that language Fame or Glory, in regard of that great fame and honour which they had achieved by their successes on the Empire. But when I finde a potent Nation of the Winithi, Winuli, or Vendi, a Sarmatian peo∣ple called Sclavini by Jornandes, possessed in his time of the further shores of the River Ister, opposite to Illyricum and Thrace; and by that name wasting and forraging these Provinces, and other parts of that Empire in the time of Justinian, as we read in Procopius that they did: I see no reason why wee should looke further for the name of Sclaves then from these Sclavini. For having in the time of Pho∣c•• subdued this Countrey, and called it Sclavinia, or Sclavonia, after their own name: by that and other fortunate successes on the Eastern Empire, and the honour they had thereby gotten, they might very well induce the rest of the scattered tribes of the Sarmatians to unite together with them both in name and action, and try their fortunes in the conquest of the West of Europe, as these had done already on the East parts of it. In which designe they sped so well that they became Masters of al∣most all those countreys which lie betwixt the River Vistula, and the Euxine Sea; the Adriatick and the Baltick: communicating their language unto all the Provinces and Nations conquered by them; and to most their manners, rites, and customs. Their Government at first by Kings; but so that the succession seldom held in a Race or Family; and those that had the Throne did not long enjoy it. For having a Law amongst themselves, that hee who killed a Tyrant should succeed in his place: they had few Kings whom some or other would not vote to be a Tyrant, and then dispatch him out of the way that a greater Tyrant then himselfe (as it commonly happeneth in such cases) might pos∣sesse the Power. Insomuch that they had a new king almost every year, none of them for the space of an hundred yeares dying naturall deaths; and all that while the People (as it needs must be) most miserably torn in pe••ces by intestine wars. Not cured of this distemper, till the severall Tribes and Nations of them, (as Poles, Moravians, Bohemians, these here, and those of other Countries) had their severall Princes, succeeding one another in a Regular way. Their Religion Gentilism at the

first, for being originally Heathens, they worshipped such Gods as others of the Gentiles did; Jes∣san for Jupiter, Ladon for Pluto, Marzim for Mars, Zievane for Venus, and Nian for Diana. They had also a Goddesse called Pagode, to whom they prayed for fair weather, and a temperate Air. To their children they used to give no name, till they began to grow great, and then conducted them to the Temple of their Gods, where they cut off their first hair, and offered it as a pledge of their future service: at which solemnity they called together their friends and kinsfolk to make merry, with bankets, dancing, singing, and all kinde of sports: offering in sacrifice an Hog, and wine mixed with honey, somewhat like Metheglin.

But to returne unto the story, the Sclaves thus setled in this countrey (since called Sclavonia) continued absolute Masters of it under the Title of Kings of Croatia and Dalmatia, till the yeare 970. when growing unsufferable by their frequent Piracies, and having ravished or surprized a company of Venetian Ladies; they forced that State (as the Liburnians did the Romans) to make warre upon them: Which ended in the losse of Lezina and Curzela, two of their best Islands, and almost all the Sea townes on the Coast of the Adriatick; possessed for the most part since that time by the State of Venice: a tribute also of 100 Barrels of Wine, and a present to the Duke of 3000 Coney-skins, be∣ing laid upon them: Petro Vrseola being then Duke of Venice, and Marcomir, king of the Sclavoni∣ans. Afterwards Zelamirus the last king dying without issue, bequeathed the kingdome to his wife: and she as freely to her brother Ladislaus king of Hungarie, surnamed the Saint: the right hereof ac∣crewing by this means to the kings of Hungary; but the possession of a great part of it remaining to the State of Venice; the cause of much war and bloud she betwixt those Princes, till the Turk came to part the fray, and got the greatest part for himself, by their disagreements. Betwixt these three, Sclavonia at this time doth stand thus divided: the Venetians possessing the greatest part of the Islands and all the Sea Coasts from the River Arsia to the Bay of Catharo, (the City and Common-wealth of Ragusi, excepted onely); the house of Austria in the right of the Crown of Hungary, the Inland parts of Windischland and Croatia; and the Turks (who first set footing here in the reign of Maho∣met the second) the whole kingdome of Bosna, the Patronage of Ragusi, some towns in Windischland and Croatia, and all the residue of Dalmatia from the Bay of Catharo to Albania.

The Armes of Sclavonia were Argent, a Cardinalls Hat, the strings pendant, and platted in a true Loves knot, meeting in the Base, Gules.

There are in Sclavonia Archbishops 4. Bishops 26.

And thus much for SCLAVONIA.

OF DACIA.

DACIA is bounded on the East with the Euxine Sea, and some part of Thrace; on the West with Hungarie, and Sclavonia; on the North with Podolia and some other Members of the Realm of Poland; on the South with the rest of Thrace and Macedonia. So called from the Daci, who here first inhabited; in Strabo, better known by the name of the Davi, who proving, when first known to the Romans, an officious people, willingly putting themselves to service in hope of gain, occasioned the Romans in their Comoedies and common Speech, to call a Sycophant or Servant by the name of Davus.

It lyeth on both sides of the Danow, frontiring all along the Vpper and the Lower Hungarie and some part of Sclavonia: extended from the 7. Cli∣mate to the 10. so that the longest Summers day in the most Northern parts thereof is near 17 hours; and in the most Southern 15 hours 3 quarters.

By this accompt with reference to the other limits before laid down, it differeth much in situation and dimensions from the ancient Dacia described by Ptolemie: that lying wholly on the North side of the Danow, but taking in so much of the Vpper Hungarie as lyeth on the East side of Tibiscus: this comprehending all the rest of the ancient Dacia, with both the Mysias, and Dardania; and in a word, the whole Dacian Diocese in the largest extent thereof, the Province of Prevalitana excepted only: which though a Member of this Diocese, was no part of Dacia, but rather of Macedon or Albania. For the clearer understanding whereof we may please to know, that Dacia properly so called was si∣tuate on the Northside of Danubius, as before was said, extending as far Westward as the River Tibi∣se••us, where it frontired on the Iazyges Metanastae, inhabited by a militarie and valiant people, who many times, especially when the frost did favour them, passed over the River, and infested the Roman Provinces. And though repressed and made tributarie by Julius Caesar, yet they brake out again in the time of Augustus, who sending Lentulus against them with a puissant Armie, compelled them to retire on the other side of the River, planting the Southern banks thereof with strong towns and garrisons to restrain them from the like incursions for the time to come. By means whereof, Si Dacia tunc non v••cta, summota atque dilata est, saith the Historian; though Dacia was not overcome, yet it was remo∣ved somewhat further off, and the Provinces thereby secured from the attempts of that people. After this from the time of Cotiso, with whom Augustus had to deal, we find little of them till the reign of Decebalus their last King, a man both ready in advice and quick in execution. Against him, Domiti∣an made warre by Julianus his Lieutenant; who gave Decebalus a great overthrow; and had then ut∣terly vanquished him, if his wit had not better befriended him then his sword. For, fearing that the Romans making use of their victory, would enter and take possession of his Country: he pitched in the way a great number of s••akes in battell aray, putting on them the old Corslets of his Souldiers; which looking like so many men of Arms, frighted the enemy from approaching the Coun∣try. Trajane was the next that made war against him, and brought him to that exigent, that having

with much losse endured some few skirmishes,* 1.101 he yeelded himself, and is acknowledged a friend to the Senate and people of Rome. But being one of a high spirit, and born in a free air, he once again fell off from the Romans, but to his own destruction: for seeing by the valour of Trajane, his king∣dome conquered and his Palace taken and destroyed, he fell upon his own sword, and Dacia was made a Province of the Roman Empire. Lost in the time of Galienus, it was again recovered by Aurelianus, who finding how difficult aud chargeable the keeping of it was like to be, transplanted the Roman Colonies and the more civill sort of the Natives, on the other side of the River, placing them be∣twixt the two Mysias, (in some part of each) and calling the Countrie given to them by the name of Dacia, or New Dacia; leaving the Old unto the Gothes and others of the barbarous Nations, whose thorough-fare it was in all their enterprises and designs on the Roman Empire. Divided by Aurelianus into the two Provinces of Dacia Mediterranea, and Dacia Ripensis: this lying on the banks of the Da∣now, the other more within the land; which with the Provinces of Moesia superior, Dardania, Praevali∣tana, and part of Macedonia salutaris, made up the whole Diocese of Dacia in the times succeeding. Subject with that of Macedon to the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyricum, and consequently appertaining (after the division) to the Eastern Empire. And it continued in this state till the time of Justimian, who being a Native of this Countrie, subdued it from the command of that Praefect, and instituted both a Praefectus Praetorio for this Diocese only in Civill matters, and a Primate for the affairs of the Church; both setled in the Citie of Justiniana, of his own foundation: enlarging the jurisdiction of the first by the addition of some part of Macedonia Secunda, and Pannonia Secunda; and giving to the other all those preheminences which had been anciently enjoyed by the greater Patriarchs. But this new Institution was of no continuance. For first the Sclaves, and afterwards the Russians, Hungars, and Bulgarians, breaking over the Danow, dismembred it peece-meal from the Empire, and divided it under new names amongst themselves. Of which together with the nature of the soil and people, I shall speak anon: having first took a view of the Rivers, Hils, and other Land-marks, which are to be my chief guides in the Chorographie or description of them.

The Rivers then of most note are 1 The Danow, which here at Axium or Axiopolis a town of Bul∣garia, takes the name of Ister, continuing it from thence to its Aestuarium, where it falleth into the Euxine Sea, with 7 mouths or channels: that is to say, 1 Pence, 2 Naracustoma, 3 Calostoma, 4 Plen∣dostoma, 5 Spireostoma, 6 Boreostoma: the name of the last I find not amongst my Authors, quia languidissi∣mum ne•• perpetuum, as it is in Ptolemie. 2 Marulius, now called Marisch, 3 Termes, 4 Alluta, keeping its old name, 5 Hierasus, all of old Dacia, and all falling into the Danow or Ister; as do also Ciabrus, now Ibar, a River of Servia; and 6 Sucoma of Bulgaria, or the Lower Mysia. Chief Mountains of it, are 1 The Carpathian, 2 Scardus, 3 Ozbelus, whereof the first parteth it from Sarmatia Europaea, the second from Dalmatia, and the third from Macedon.

This said we will proceed to the description of the severall Provinces, which we have comprehen∣ded under this name of Dacia, that is to say, 1 Transylvania, 2 Moldavia, 3 Walachia, 4 Rascia, 5 Servia, 6 Bulgaria; the first four in Old Dacia, on the North side of the Danow; the two last in New Dacia, on the South thereof.

1 TRANSYLVANIA.

TRANSYLVANIA is bounded on the East with Moldavia, on the West with the Vpper Hun∣garie, on the North with Russia Nigra, a Province of the Realm of Poland, from which parted by the Carpathian Mountains; on the South with Rascia, and Walachia.

It took this name from the great Woods lying betwixt it and Hungarie, the name in Latine signi∣fying the Countrie beyond the woods. By the Dutch it is called Seven Burgen, from seven Castles or strong holds anciently built in it, to defend the Frontiers: Septemcastrensis in some Latine Authors, upon that occasion. But by the more elegant Latinists, it hath been named Pannodacia, as that part of Dacia, which either was inhabited by the Pannonians, or made subject to them.

The soil doth naturally abound with wine, corne, and fruit, of which it was so plentifull in the times of the Romans that the Emperour Trajan caused a piece of money to be coined, having the figure of Ceres, holding in the one hand a Cornu-copia, and in the other a plain Tablet with this in∣scription, Abundantia Daciae. Particularly besides great plenty of wheat and most excellent wines, it yeeldeth great store of Cherries, Damascens, Malacotoons, Musk-melons, not inferiour to those of Italie; as also Centaurie good store, and many other Medicinall plants; some mines of Gold and Silver, many of Iron, Brasse, and Copper; and not a few veins of Salt and Sulphur. Of Cattle such abun∣dance, that many times large Oxen, are sold for a Floren or halfe a Crown a peece; and a most nota∣ble breed of Horses: not to say any thing of that varietie of wild beasts which they have in their Woods and Forrests, and of all sorts of Fowl both for food and pleasure.

The people are much of the same nature with the Hungarians, to whom they have been a long time subject, but somewhat more stubborn and untractable, speak the same language that they do, with some difference in the Dialect only: converted at the same time to the Christian Faith, and under the same formes of Ecclesiasticall government. In former times they used to read, as the Jews doe, from the right hand to the left; but of late herein conform to the Western Nations, from whom they are generally descended.

For that the people of this Country are the progenie of the Saxons, is evident by the Saxon lan∣guage

yet in part retained.* 1.102 2 We finde that Charls the Great, like a politique Conquerour, placed man•• of that Nation here; weakning so their strength at home, and fortifying the bounds of his Emp•••••• And 3 by a storie recited by Versiegan, which we touched in our description of Brunswick; the whole narration is this. Halberstade was beyond credit troubled with Rats, which a Musician whom they called the Peed piper, undertaking for a great masse of money to destroy; they agree: hereupon he tuned his pipes, and all the Rats in the town dancing after them, are drowned in the next River. This done he asketh his pay, but is denyed; whereupon he striketh up a new fit of mirth: all the children male and female of the town follow him into the hill Hamelen, which presently closed again. The parents misse their children, and could never hear news of them; now of late some have found them in this Country, where I also leave them: only telling you this, that this marvellous accident is said to happen the 22 of July 1376. since which time it is said that the people of Halberstade per∣mit not any Drum, Pipe, or other Instrument to be sounded in that street: and established a Decree, that in all writings of Contract or Bargain, after the date of our Saviours Nativity, the date also of this their childrens transmigration should be added in rei memoriam. But though the Dutch or Saxons make up the main bodie of them, yet being conquered by the Hungars, they received many of their Colonies; and in the Northern parts there remain still some of the old Scythians planted there by Attila. Out of those Members is the bodie of this State composed, so strong and populous that it is conceived to be able to raise an Armie of 90000 men; and actually did arme 6000 horse and 12000 foot for the battell of Keresture, anno 1596. being more by 2000 then the whole Realm of Hungarie sent unto that service.

Chief Towns herein of the foundation of the Dutch or Saxons, are 1 Hermansted, in Latine, Herma∣nopolis (of old called Cibinium from the River Cibin on which it was situate) so named of one Herman the Founder of it; little inferior to Vienna for strength or greatnesse; well fortified both by Art and Nature. 2 Cronstad, in Latine called Corona, by some Brassovia, by others Stephanopolis, this last name given it by Stephen King of Hungarie, who repaired and beautified it. Situate on the borders of Wala∣chia, amongst fruitfull Mountains, remarkable for a fair Librarie, a kinde of Academie, and the most noted Emporie or Mart-town of all this Countrie: of great resort, especially in the time of their pub∣lick Fairs, by Turks, Arabians, Greeks, Armenians, Polanders, Walachians, and other Nations. 3 B••∣st••icium (by the Dutch called Noren) so called from the River Bistrice, which runneth through it: so pleasant and so sweet a town, that there is no durt or mire to be seen at any time; or if there be, the people presently swell up the River and so cleanse the streets. 4 Mediesus (by the Dutch, Meduish) so called, quasi Medius Consessus, because situate in the midst of the Countrie; a town almost as neat as Bistrice. 5 Segoswaria, or Schesburg, on the declivitie of an hill. 6 Zabesus or Laiz, once the chief town of the Saxons, but now much decayed; situate in a very deep Vallie, well fenced with waters, and those waters well stored with fish. 7 Clausenbourg, the Zeugma of Ptolemie, in Latine called Claudio∣polis, from Claudius the second Emperour, by whom reedified: at first a Colonie of the Saxons or Dutch only: but of late times the Hungarians coming in as strangers, were at last priviledged as Citizens, and inhabit it together with them. The town well seated in the middle of a pleasant Plain, encompas∣sed with an handsome wall, and beautified with elegant buildings. 8 Alba Julia, now Weisenberg, the Apulum of Ptolemie, situate on a small brook then called Apnus, (but now Oratas) whence it had the name. Built on the side of an Hill near the River Maruch (or Morusus,) over-looking a large and fruitfull Plain: heretofore a Bishops See, and the ordinary residence of the Prince or Vaivod of Transylvania; but now a Garrison of Hungarian Souldiers, holding it for the Emperour as King of Hungarie.

Chief towns belonging to the Hungarians, and by them inhabited, are 1 Varadin, much menti∣oned in the stories of these later times, since the Invasions of the Turks, situate on the borders of Hun∣garie. 2 Thorda, built in or near the place where stood the Salinae of Ptolemie, so called from the abundance of Salt-pits which were then about it. 3 Enguedine, by the Romans called Annium, from a Causey leading to it, raised by one Anuius, and from him so named; some fragments whereof are still remaining 4 Deva, remarkable for a vein of the best Wines. 5 Fenuschium, affording very pleasant wines also, not inferior to those of V••nusium in Italie. 6 Zilahi, 7 Gela, of which little memorable. 8 Millenbach, not far from which betwixt it and the Town of Bros, is a very strong for∣tresse, commanding a strait and narrow passage leading into this Countrie out of Hungarie.

In the North part hereof lyeth the Province called ZACVLEIA, inhabited by the Scyculi, or old brood of Seythians, brought hither by Attila, on his first conquest of this Countrie, and here still continuing. A people which have much in them of the ancient Hunn, and had heretofore a pecu∣liar language to themselves: but now they speak the Hungarian generally, differing in the Dialect only. But though, by the necessity of commerce and co-habitation, they are brought into the same language; they still retain their ancient customs, governed by their own Laws, and living after the same manner as the Switzers doe; each of their Cantons (seven in number) being absolute in and of it self, but all united with the Transylvanians, and with one another, for defence of the whole Coun∣try against the severall pretentions of the German and Turkish Emperours. And though they doe acknowledge some subjection to the Emperour as King of Hungarie, yet it is but what they list them∣selves: being anciently priviledged from all taxes, more then the paying of a Bull for every houshold at the Coronation of the new King, when and how oft soever it may chance to happen. Their Can∣t••ns, (Seds they call them,) are 1 Seps••, 2 Orbay, 3 Kisdy, 4 Czyk, 5 Gyrgio, or Vduarheli, 6 Marous Zeek, and 7 Aranias Zeek; so called from the chief town in each division. In former times no Noble∣man,

nor any one of better means and greater eminence then other, was known amongst them: but now of late that parity (or confusion rather) is grown out of credit, and some begin to over-top the rest both in power and title, as in other places.

The first Inhabitants of the old Dacia, whereof this Province was a part, were the Anarti, Taurisci, Rhatacensii, Cancoensii, the Burredensii, and Biephi, &c. first conquered by Lysimachus, the great and mightie King of Thrace, one of the renowned Captains of Alexander the Great, in token whereof, in∣numerable medals in the age of our Grand-fathers were found in this Countrie, having his Image on the one side, and this word Victoria on the other. How they were afterwards subdued by the Emperour Trajan, and quitted by Aurelianus, hath been shewn already. Being forsaken by the Romans it was won by the Goths, their constant dwelling, till forced over the Danow by the Hunnus, the next posses∣sours of this Countrie, the road or thorow-fare from that time of those barbarous Nations, which out of Asia made their inroads on the Europaeans. Having been successively subdued by the Sclaves and Rosses, this part hereof was conquered by Stephen the first King of Hungarie, surnamed the Saint, by whose perswasion and inducements, they received the Gospell. Governed after this time, as a mem∣ber of that Kingdome, by a Deputie whom they called the Vaivod of Transylvania, (the word Vaivod signifying as much as Praefectus Militiae, or a Lord Lieutenant;) a man by reason of the greatnesse of his place and power of most authoritie in that Kingdome. The names and succession of these Vaivods till the time of John Huniades, comes imperfectly to us; but after that more clear and constant in this order following.

The VAIVODS and PRINCES of TRANSYLVANIA.

• 1 John, surnamed Huniades, made Vaivod hereof by Vladislaus the 4. A man of great valour and renown, the great Defender of his Country against the Turks, whom he overthrew in many battels, especially in that of Marous, where he slew 50000 of them. He died about the year 1458.
• 2 Stephen, of the noble familie of Battori, Vaivod in the time of Matthias King of Hungarie, the son of Huniades.
• 3 John II. surnamed de Sepusio, after the death of Lewis the 2. chosen King of Hungarie, of whom before.
• 1526 4 Americus, Bishop of Veradium, made Vaivod by John de Sepusio, on his taking of the Crowne of Hungarie: treacherously murdered for not complying with the Turks, anno 1534.
• 1540 5 Stephen Maysat, a noble Hungarian but extremely ambitious, having not long after the death of Americus usurped the Vaivodship, was in the year 1540 confirmed in that dignitie.
• 1541 6 Stephen III. son of John de Sepusio the late King of Hungarie, by Solyman the Magnificent made Vaivod of Transylvania, being then an Infant, by whom deprived of his King∣dome of Hungarie not long before.
• 7 Stephen IV. surnamed Battori, made Vaivod by the Turk; and afterwards on the commen∣dation of Amurath the 3. chosen King of Poland.
• 1575 8 Christopher Battori brother of Stephen, on whose election unto Poland he succeeded here, and was the first who leaving the title of Vaivod, took that of Prince of Transyl∣vania.
• 9 Sigismund son of Christopher, shook off the Turkish bondage, defeated many of their Ar∣mies, and slew some of their Bassas (the Scanderberg of the times he lived in.) But not being able to hold out against so potent an adversarie, he resigned his estate to Rodolphus the Emperour; having for it in exchange the Dukedoms of Oppelen and Ratibor in Silesia, and an annuall pension of 50000 Joachims. But finding his pen∣sion ill paid, he made a new resignation of it to
• 1599 10 Andrew Battori, cousin of Sigismund, slain within the year by the Vaivod of Valachia. After whose death
• 1601 11 Rodolphus Emperour and King of Hungarie, is admitted Prince of Transylvania, on the second resignation of Sigismund: But his Souldiers behaving themselves with too great insolence, Sigismund was called back again, but never well setled.
• 1604 12 Justine Battori, surnamed Botscay, succeeded on the death of Sigismumd, by the power of the Turkes, by whose help he cleared the Country of the German Souldiers.
• 1608 13 Gabriel Battori, of the familie of the former Princes, succeeded by the favour of Achmet the Great Turk: after whose death so welcome to his neighbours and subjects.
• 1613 14 Bethlem Gabour, by the same Achmet, was made Prince of Transylvania, a professed ene∣mie of the house of Austria, but one that with a great deal of noise did them little hurt.
• ...

• 1630 15 Stephen Ragotzi,* 1.103 on the death of Bethlem Gabour, succeeded Prince by the power and favour of the Turks; under whose Clitentele and protection he doth still enjoy it, (as his predecessours did before him) against all pretentions of the Empire: as on the other side, defended by the Emperour and Crown of Poland from being made thrall unto the Turkes.

2 MOLDAVIA.

MOLDAVIA is bounded on the East with the Sea, on the West with Transylvania; on the North with the River Niester, the Tyras of Ptolemie and the Antients, by which parted from Podolia a Province of POLAND; and on the South with Walachia.

It is so called, as some say, quast Moetavia from its neernesse to the fens of Moeotis, or rather from the Hunnes and other people of those fennes, who possessed the same. Others conceive that it was at first called Maurdavia, i. e. nigrorum Davorum Regio, the countrey of the black Davi, (for by the name of Davi were the Dacians called, as we finde in Strabo and some others:) so named from their complexion or the colour of their Caps and other garments; as Nigra Russta, a neere neighbouring Province of the Realm of Poland, on the like occasion. But the more probable opinion (as I take it) is, that it tooke this name from the River Moldava which runneth through it; as the Moravians had that name from the River Morava.

The countrey is very fruitfull in corn, wine, grasse, and wood, but more used for pasturage then tillage, by reason of the great want of people to manure the land: by meanes whereof it affordeth great plenty of Beefe and Mutton, whereby they supply some parts of Poland, and the populous City of Constantinople. And these they issue out in so great a number, that the tenth penny exacted by the Prince or Vaivod, in the way of Custome, amounteth to 150000 Crownes per annum: and yet the Clergy and the ••entry are di••charged of this impost. But the maine trade of this Countrey is not driven by the Natives, the Port-townes being ••ull of Armenians, Jews, Hungarians, and Raguzian Merchants, who forestall the Markets, and barter all their corn and wine into Russia and Poland; their skins, wax, honey, powdered beefe, Pulse, and butter into Constantinople.

The countrey is in a manner round, the Diameter each way being neere upon 300 English miles: but so ill-inhabited by reason of the neighbourhood of the Turkes, Tartars, and Polonian Cosacks, that certain English Gentlemen having in the yeare 1609. travelled at least 240 miles in the countrey, could meet in all the way but nine townes and villages; and for an hundred miles together, the grasse so high that it rotted on the ground for want of Cattell to eat it, and of men to order it. So that we are not to expect in it many eminent Cities, or townes of note: though it afford two Arch∣bishops, and two Bishops Sees, followers (as all the rest of the people are) of the traditions and do∣ctrines of the Church of Greece.

The principall of those which be are 1 Occazoma, or Zucconia, the Vaivods seat, 2 Fucciania, 3 Fa∣zeling, of which little memorable: 4 Kotjim, a place of great strength on the borders of Poland: by some called Cochina, the ordinary magazeen of the countrey: 5 Iassy commonly called Yas, the chief Town for wealth and trade in all this Province: 6 Bender, Niester; on the Euxine Sea. 7 Polada neer the Danow, 8 Bialograd or Bologrove situate on or neer the river Tyras, now called a strong town against the Tartars and Polonians. 9 Kele, antiently called Achi••••eia, situate on the shores of the Euxine Sea, for the most part compassed round with the waters of it; and therefore said by Ptolemie to be an Island. 10 Ac Germen, of old called Asprocastron, & Moncastrum, a very strong Town in the same coast also: both taken by Baiazet the second Emperour of the Turkes, anno 1485. But these three Towns are not so properly in Moldavia, at least not in Moldavia properly so called, as in a little Province called Bessarabia, lying on the Euxine, formerly counted part thereof, till conquerred by the Turkes in the year aforesaid, it became a member of that Empire. A tract inhabited by the Bess•• in the times of Ptolemie, who being drivenout of their countrey by the Bulgarians, setled themselves (as some say) in that part of Sclavonia, which is now called Bosnia.

The whole Countrey following the fortune of Transylvania, and the rest of Dacia till the coming of the Sclaves and Rosses, was for a while accompted part of the Russian Empire; till the dismem∣bring of that Empire by the Tartars. After which time it was sometimes Homager to the Polanders, sometimes to the Hungarians, according as the V••ivods or Princes of it could finde best conditions. By Mahomet the Great it was made Tributary to the Turkes; but the Tribute at the first very light and easie, not above 2000 Crownes, per annum: that mighty Emperour, who aimed at more profitable conquests, being loth to spend his Forces on so poore a purchase, as the addition of this Province would have been unto him. But Baiazet his son, finding how fit it lay for the more absolute com∣mand of the Euxine Sea, tooke in that part hereof, which is called Bessarabia, reducing it into the form of a Turkish Province, anno 1485. as before was said, imposing on the rest an increase of the former tribute, and so left it unto the disposall of its naturall Princes. After which time the Vaivods fearing to be made Vassals to the Turkes, did many times rise in Armes against them; aided therein sometimes by the Hungarians, and sometimes by the Polander; which last pretended to the Soveraignty and chiefage of it. Bogdanus Vaivod hereof in the time of Selimus the second uniting himselfe more closely with the P••lo••ians; became thereby suspected by the Turkish Tyrant, who with a great power cha••ed him out of his countrey: and gave the same unto one John a Moldavian born, but bred up for

the most part in the Turkish Court (where he renounced his faith,* 1.104 and was circumcised) under the yeerly tribute of 60000 Crownes. But John the new made Vaivod was no sooner setled, but he re∣turned again to his first Religion, and for that cause grew lesse affected by the Turkes••: Which being observed by the then Vaivod of Valachia, he practised to obtain that dignity for his brother Peter, offering to double the said tribute; and to assist in subjugation of the Countrey. The Turk accep∣ting of these offers, compounds an Army of 70000 Valachians, 30000 Turkes, and 3000 Hungarians, with which they fall into Moldavia: and were so gallantly received by the noble Vaivod, that few of them escaped the slaughter. But being afterwards betrayed by his old friend Czarnieviche; and against faith given barbarously murdered by the Turkish Bassa: Moldavia fell into the hands of the Turkes, and was united to that Empire, an. 1574. the Vaivods from that time forwards, being nominated by the Turkish Emperours, and governing as substitutes and Lievtenants for and under them. And though Aaron one of the succeeding Vaivods did shake off this yoke, and confederated himself with Sigismund Prince of Transylvania, and Michael Vaivod of Valachia, for defence of themselves and their Estates against that Enemy; yet being afterwards supplanted by Roswan one of his own ambitious subjects, and that con∣federacie disjointed; it became subject first unto the Polonians by the power and practise of Zamoyskie, Chancellour of Poland; and then unto Rodolphus Emperour of Germany; and finally unto the Turke, as before it was. And though the Polanders have since made use of some opportunities in impo∣sing Vaivods on this countrey, in despite of the Turkes; yet was it commonly to their owne losse, little or no benefit to the Moldavians: and in the end drew the whole power of the Turkes upon them∣selves in the reign of Osman: never since intermedling in the affaires of this Province, but leaving them entirely to the Turkes disposing; who receive hence some yearly tribute, but have not hitherto obtained the entire possession of it, so long since aimed at by those Tyrants.

3 VALACHIA.

VALACHIA is bounded on the East with Moldavia and a branch of the Ister, or Danubius bending towards the North; on the West with Rascia; on the North with Transylvania, and some part of Moldavia, and on the South with the Danubius wholly, by which parted from Servia and Bulgaria. First called Flaccia, from one Flaccus, a Noble Roman, who on the conquest hereof in the time of Trajan, brought hither an Italian Colonie; afterwards by corruption Vlachia, and at last Valachia.

But the name of Flaccia or Vlachia, was at first of a more large extent, then it is at present; com∣prehending all Moldavia also: divided in those times by a ridge of Mountaines, into Cisalpina, and Tran alpinaa; the name of Moldavia, being afterwards appropriated to the one, and that of Valachia (properly and specially so called) unto the other. The people of both in token of their first ex∣traction, speak a corrupt Latine or Italian language: but in matters of Religion follow the dictates of the Greek Church, and obey the Patriarch of Constantinople; under whom all Ecclesiasticall affairs are governed by one Archhishop and two Bishops. In other things they partake generally of the rude∣nesse and barbarity of those Nations which have since subdued them; being a rough hewn people, hardly civilized, ignorant for the most part of letters and all liberall sciences: not weaned perfectly (in so long time of their possession of Christianity) from the superstitions of the Gentiles; swearing by Jupiter and Venus, marying, and unmarying at their pleasures; much given to magicall charms, and in∣cantations; and burying with their dead both clothes and victuals, for their relief in that long jour∣ney to the other world.

It is in length 500, in breadth 120 miles: the countrey for the most part plain, and very fertile; affording store of Cattell, a breed of excellent Horses, iron-mines, salt-pits, and all provisions ne∣cessarie to the life of man. Some vines they also have, and not few mines of gold and silver, more then for feare of the Turkes and other ill neighbours they dare discover: begirt about with woodie moun∣taines, which afford them fewell; and very well watered with the Rivers of Pruth, called antiently ••••rasus, 2 Stertius, 3 Fulmina, 4 Teln, 5 Alluta, all of them falling into 6 the Danow; which in this Province, at the influx of Fulmina takes the name of Ister: yet is it not (at the present) very popu∣lous, the spaciousnesse and fertilitie hereof considered; by reason of the ill neighbourhood of the Tartars, Turks, and Polonian Cossackes: their late long wars against those Nations and the Dutch, having much decreased their former numbers: with which they so abounded in the times foregoing, that the Vaivod of this countrey in the year 1473. was able upon little warning to bring 70000 men in∣to the field for a present service.

Places of most note herein are 1 Galatz on the influx of the River Pruth or Hierasus into the Da∣nubius, the waters of which River are so unwholesome, that it causeth the body to swell. 2 Trescor∣tum, not far from which they dig a bituminous earth, so refined and pure, that usually they make Candles of it instead of wax. 3 Prailaba, by some called Brailovia, the town of most trade in all this countrey; situate on the Danow, and defended with a very strong Castle fortified by Art, and Na∣ture, and furnished with a strong garrison of Turkes, as the key of this Province, opening the dore unto the rest. The town most cruelly destroyed and razed to the ground, with an incredible slaughter of the Inhabitants of all sexes, ages, for the spaces of four dayes together: by John the Vaivod of Moldavia spoken of before, at his first revolting from the Turkes: but the Castle in regard of the great strength of it, scarce attempted by him. 4 Teina, a Fortresse of great strength, but in the hands of the Turkes also. 5 Zorza, corruptly for San-Georgio, seated on the Danow, with an arm whereof the

Castle of it is encompassed, garrisoned by the Turkes, and by them held to be so strong and so safe a place, that at the taking of it by Sigismund the Prince of Transylvania, an. 1596. there were found in it 39 great peeces of Ordinance with such store of Armes and Ammunition as might well have served for a whole kingdome. 6 Tergovista, sometimes the chief City of the Province, and the ordinary resi∣dence of the Vaivod, till the taking of it by the Turkes: once beautified with a fair and famous Mo∣nastery, by the Turkes converted into a fortresse, environed with deep trenches, strong Bulwarks up∣on every quarter, and great store of Ordinance: but many times lost and got againe according to the changes and chance of war. 7 Bucaresta, about a dayes journey from Tergovista, seated on the Da∣now, remarkable for two bridges built neer unto it: the one of Boats, (the laying whereof took up no lesse then an whole moneths time) for the transporting of the Army of Sinan Bassa, against Sigismund Prince of Transylvania before mentioned: and broken down by the said Bassa in his flight, having bern worsted in all places by the Transylvanian. The other work of the Emperour Trajan in his warre against Decebalus King of Dacia, built all of stone, and laid on piles and Arches of a wonder∣full greatnesse; 24 piles or pillars whereof are yet remaining to the great admiration of all be∣holders. 8 Cebium, of old called Lycostomos, in vain besieged by the forces of Mahomet the Great, coming in person to subdue this petit Province. 9 Zarmizegethusa, the seat Royall of Decebalus king of Dacia, taken and destroyed by Trajan in his war against him: who causing it to be repaired and beautified more then formerly, gave it the priviledges of Rome, and the name of Vlpia Trajana; which it retained as long as Dacia was a Province of the Roman Empire. Now a small village called Vetzel. Some stones have been digged hereabouts up with this inscription, COLONIA VLPIATRA∣JANA, AVG. DACIE. ZARMIS: which cleerly shew as well the dignity and esteem, as the antiquity of the place before Trajans time.

This Province, as the rest of Dacia, on that side of the Danow, after the coming in of the Sclaves and Rosses, was under Princes of their own, whom they called (as those of Transylvania and Mol∣davia did) by the name of Vaivods. Protected by the Hungarian Kings they lived long in peace, till sensible of the approaching danger which the conquest of most part of Servia and Bulgaria by the Turkes, was like to bring them: the Vaivod of it in the time of Baiazet the first passed over the Danow with his Forces, and having done great spoil on the Turkish Territories, returned againe into his countrey. Rather provoked then weakened with which invasion, Baiazet comes into Valachia, over∣comes the Vaivod in a pitched field, compelling him to sue for peace, and to pay him tribute. But Baiazet being not long after taken Prisoner by Tamerlane, and the succession controverted amongst his sonnes, the imposed tribute was with-held; till Mabomet the fift King of the Turkes, having setled the affaires of that tottering State, anno 1417. enforced them to a new composition, and the payment of all former reckonings. The fortunate successes of Huniades in severall battels induced them once more to change their Masters, and to put themselves under the protection of the Hungarians, as they had been formerly, but they paid deere for it: their countrey being made the Thorow-fare of the Turkish forces in their attempts upon that Kingdome. But the Hungarians being vanquished at the battell of, Cassova by Amurath the second, the accustomed tribute was brought in, and the Turkes satisfied for the present, being then hardly put to it by the famous Scanderbeg. Not long after in the yeare 1462. Mahomet the Great undertooke the conquest of this Countrey, upon advertisement that Wla∣dus the then Vaivod of it intended to joine with the Hungarians in some war against him: and find∣ing how unprofitably he had spent his Forces in fighting against woods, mountaines, and a wasted countrey, he set up Dracala the younger brother of Wladus, to claim the Government, who making a party amongst the people, and having the Turk for his assistance and support, possessed himselfe of the estate, to be holden of him as a Vassall to the Turkish Empire. And it continued in this state, the Vaivods being after this at the Turkes appointment, and paying all exactions imposed upom them, till the revolt of Sigismund the Prince of Transylvania, anno 1595. at what time Michael the then Vai∣vod hereof, taking that opportunity to shake off this yoak, confederated with him and the Moldavian for their common safety. And though he held out longer against Turk and German then either of the other did; discomfited the Turkes by his own proper Forces at the battell of Nicopolis, vanquished the Transylvanians, and added that Province for a while unto this Estate, yet being at last outed of his countrey by the Polanders, and an other put into his place, he was shamefully slain in his own Tent by the privitie and consent of Basta, Lievtenant of Rodolphus Emperour, and King of Hungary. After whose death the countrey miserably distracted betwixt two Vaivods, the one placed by the Empe∣rour Rodolph, and the other by Mahomet the Grand Signieur; endured all the spoil and wrack which so calamitous a competition could bring upon it: till in the end the fortune of the Turkes prevailing, the Valachians were constrained to submit unto their disposall, and receive their Vaivods from that Court as they had done formerly; performing their accustomed duties, and paying such yearly tri∣bute is as laid upon them. Which notwithstanding partly by their owne naturall unquietnesse, and partly by the ambition of such persons as contend for that dignity; they have since been many times embroyled in wars; never so quietly composed, but that a new hope, or the artifices of the Turkish Ministers starts them into action. By meanes whereof when they have tired and spent them∣selves in their own combustions, they may in fine be fully conquered, and made the next addition to the Turkish Monarchie.

4 RASCIA.

RASCIA is bounded on the East with Valachia,* 1.105 on the West with Hungary; on the North with Transilvania, and on the South with the River Danow: encompassed on three sides with that River, and another now called Temes, by the Latines, Samus; and on the East divided from Valachia by the River Alluta: Called Rascia from the Rasciani, a Sclavonian people, whom Ortelius placeth in this tract; and from him Maginus.

Places of most importance in it are 1 Chrysonicum, an old town almost wholly ruinated, till for∣tified by the Turkes, anno 1449. who marking the convenient situation of it on the Banks of Danubius, opposite to the influx of the River Morava, and how commodiously it stood to command and an∣noy the Countrey; made it their first work to possesse themselves of it. 2 Bodon, upon the Danow also, a town of trade, memorable for the Marts or Fairs which are here held annually. 3 Zarnovia, 4 Co∣vin, 5 Novebarde, 6 Severin, not far from which, betwixt it and Bucaresta a Town of Valachia, are the remainders of Trajans bridge before mentioned. 7 Colombes, 8 Columbella.

These Rascians, as before is said, were a tribe of Scalves, setled in this countrey at the time of their first spreading in the East, and here continuing ever since in possession of it. Governed at first by their own Princes, whom by a name borrowed from the Grecians, they called their Despots: that being once the title of the heir apparent or designed successour of the Eastern Empire, as Caesar had been formerly in the Empire of Rome. But as the following Emperours did affect new titles, so that of Despot fell from one step to another, till given at last unto the Governours of Provinces, as the Despot of Epirus, Pelopennesus, &c. and in the end assumed by the severall Princes of Rascia, Servia, and Bulgaria. How this estate became united unto Servia, I am yet to seek: but sure I am it was united in the person of George, Despot of Servia, and as a part of his estate surprized by Amurath the second, who boasted his successe therein (in a speech made unto his souldiers at the siege of Belgrade) notwithstanding that he had to strive with hunger, thirst, labour, and desperation. So that depending as it did, on the fortune of Servia, we shall there hear more of it: here adding onely by the way, that at the time when Sigismund Prince of Transylzania had wonne so many noble victories against the Turkes, 10000 of these Rascians casting off that yoke, offered themselves unto his service: the onely memorable action which is told us of them since their subjection to the Turke; though that was onely the attempt of some private Adventurers, the whole Nation still continuing in obedience, as be∣fore they did.

And thus we see by whom the whole Province of old Dacia became in part possessed, and in part made tributary to the Turkes: the whole being so at their disposing, that before the Revolt of the three Provinces so often mentioned, it yeelded one way with another into the Treasury of the Grand Sig∣neur no lesse then a million of Ducats yearly. Knolles in his Turkish History doth report it so. And his Continuatour doth affirm, that Moldavia onely before the said revolt, did yearly yeeld unto the Turk a whole tun of gold, 2000 horses for service, 10000 great measures of wheat, with as much barley, and a wonderfull proportion of butter, honey, and other victuals, adding withall that the other two Provinces paid as much or more for their yearly tribute. After which rate the estimate made by Knolles may hold very good. But since the reduction of these Countries to their former obedience, the Turkes have been more moderate in their exactions then they were before, for feare of startling them to some new engagement, whom they have brought to this obedience and conformity with such a vast expence both of bloud and treasure, as would have purchased the best Kingdome of Christendom in the open market. In somuch that the ordinary tribute of Moldavia is now but 40000 Chequins, that for Valachia but 24000 of the same coyne: besides 1000 horses yearly sent from both. Such bribes and presents as are given by the Vaivods hereof, either to get or hold their places being Mer∣chantable ware, and wholly at the Turkes disposing, not being part of this Accompt. Which said we will passe over the Danow, and looke upon the other part of this Province, called Dacianova or New Dacia, containing after our accompt foure Provinces of the Roman Empire, that is to say, both Mysias, Scythia, and Dardania, besides the two Dacias, Mediterranea and Ripensis, interjected be∣twixt the two Mysias as before is said: all now reduced onely unto two of the Turkish Provinces, namely the Countries of Servia and Bulgaria.

5 SERVIA.

SERVIA is bounded on the East with Bulgaria, on the West with Bosnia, and some part of the Lower Hungary; on the North with the Danubius, by which parted from Rascia; on the South with Albania, and part of Macedon. It containeth all Mysia superior, and a great part of Dardania; and tooke this new name from the Servii, or Sorabi, a Sclavonian people, of whom more here∣after.

The Countrey very rich and fruitfull,* 1.106 before the conquest of it by the Turkes; well stored 〈◊〉〈◊〉 mines or gold, and silver, especially about Zerbenic, a strong town hereof. The people rude and 〈◊〉〈◊〉, and much given to wine; ralse of their promises and that upon slight occasions, ••o that there is but little trust to be laid upon them.

Chief Rivers of this Countrey are Colubra, and 2 Lim, falling into the Savus, 3 Ibar falling into 4 Morava, as that into the Danow over against Chrysoni••um, or Crusoveccia, a strong town of Rascia, Princi∣pall towns hereof 1 Nissa, the Nessum as I take it of Ptolemie; by whom said to be a City of the Dardanians, now the Metropoiis o•• this countrey, and the key thereof; besieged and taken by Amurath the third King of the Turks, anno 1367. 2 Vidina, by the Turkes called Kiratow, taken by ••eris Beg, in the beginning of Ba••azet the first; and ever since the seat of a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg or B••ssa of Temesw•••• 3 Crat••va, and 4 Zerbenic, rich in silver mines; a great temptation to the Turks to invade this Countrey. 5 Simand••••a, or Senderovia, by some called Spenderobe; by the Hungarians Zendrem, by the Turkes Se∣munder; situateon the Danow not far from Belgrade, and taken by Amurath the second, anno 1438. since governed by a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg of Buda. 6 Novegrad in the borders hereof, fortified with an impregnable Castle. 7 Stonibourg (in Latine Stonibrigadun) the ordinary seat of the anti••nt Despots. 8 Prisden, said by M••rcator to be the birth-place of the Emperour Justinian; most like to be Tauresium, a City of the Dardanians, mentioned by Procopius, who maketh it the birth-place of that Emperour, by whom repaired and fortified with four great Turrets, thence called Tetra∣••yrgon. But others (more probably) make him to be born at Lo••hrida, a town of Bulgaria; of which more hereafter. 9 Scopi, by Ptolemie called Scupi, and 10 Vlpianum, first built by T••rajan, whose fore∣name was Vlpius, afterwards re-edified by the said Justinian, and called Secunda Justiniana, (Justi∣niana Prima being in Balgaria) now a poore Village called Pirethy as Lazius; o•• Czanadre as Mar••us Niger is of opinion. 11 Rhae iaria, by Ptolemie for distinction sake, called Rhaetiaria Mysorum, then the chief City of the Moesians; of which now no ruines are remaining. 12 Raveniczen, the Vendenis of Ptolenae, but not else observable

The old Inhabitants of this Countrey, such as are most considerable in the story of it, were the Basiarne, the Dardani, and the Moesi: the Tricornesii, and Picensii, spoken of by Ptolemie, being ei••her branches of the Moesi, or else an obscure people not worth the looking after. Of these the Da••••anians were most antient, inhabiting neere Mount Haemus, on the borders of Macedon; a bar∣barous people, and perpetuall Enemies of that Crown, most mischievous in their attempts and designes against it, in the declining state thereof, making great and frequent inrodes into that wealthy Countrey, with the spoiles whereof they inriched themselves. Insomuch that Philip the Father of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 finding no other likely means to be rid of that trouble, negotiated with the Bastarnae a strong and hardie Nation that dwelt beyond the Danubius, to abandon their owne dwellings, and come to him with their wives and children, promising to assist them in rooting out the Dardanians, and give them possession of their Countrey. But Philip dying as the Bastarnae were in their march through Thrace, and no care taken by his sonne to pursue the businesse, they returned all home a∣gaine except 30000, which pierced into Dardania, and made their own fortunes as they could. This practi••e as it gave matter of quarrell to the Romans, against the Macedonian, so it occasioned Perseus the sonne o•• Philip, to make use of these Bastarnae against the Romans, at whose request 10000 horse and as many foot passed over the Danow under the conduct of Claudicus, a King amongst them. But find••ng that Perseus was too strait-laced to part with money for their pay, they returned againe; forraging the Countrey as they passed: but whether they passed over that River, or mingled them∣selves with the rest of their Nation, who upon Philips invitation had before come over, that I doe not find. How soever, coming by this means acquainted with the sweets of this Country, divers of them came over hither in the following times, incorporating with the Dardanians, or bordering neer them; in∣somuch as Tacitus for the most part joins them both together, either as the same, or a neighbouring Nation, first vanquished and added to the Roman Empire by Cn. Curio Scribonius, immediately upon the end of the civil wars, raised by Spartacus & the Fencers, or Gladiatores: the Mysians or the Moefi being broken at the same time also, an. V. C. 681. As for the Moesi being the last and greatest of these Nations, they were most probably a Colonie of the Mysians of the lesser Asia, antiently called Mysi, and the Country Mysia, as those Asians were; and as those Europeans are by the Greek writers generally, and by Florus and some others amongst the Latines: though after for distinction sake, Tacitus, Pliny, Virgil, and gene∣rally most Latine Authours give them the name of Moes••. A fierce and savage people they were held to be, Barbari barbarorum, as my Authour calleth them; more barbarous then commonly the Barbar••ans were: but for all that, subdued by M. Licinius Crassus in the time of Augustus Caesar, who overcame them in two battels, and after vanquished the Bastarnae and their King Deldo who hee killed in fight; the Countrey reckoned after that as a Roman Province. Continuing in this estate, till the fall of the Eastern Empire, it was subjected by the Sclavi or Sarmatians of Europe; and in the division of the spoile fell unto the Sorabi a Sclavonian people; contractedly called Sorbi, and at last Serbi, Servi, and the Countrey Servia. Reduced againe to the obedience of the Eastern Emper∣ours by Basilius Porphyrogenitus, an. Ch. 1000. or thereabouts; more absolutely conquered by John and Manuel Co••nenus, two of his successours: but so as they were suffered to live under their owne Princes, whom they called Despots, Homagers to the Empire, and depending on it. First set on by the Turkes in the time of Lazarus the Despot, from whom Amurath the first tooke the towne of Nissa, being the chief of all this Countrey: provoked thereto by the great forces which the Ser∣vians and Bulgarians had raised against him, for the siege of Adrianople. And though Lazarus ter∣rified

with this losse,* 1.107 made his peace with Amurath: yet after he brake out againe into open war, in which he was overcome and slaine in the plaines of Cossova, whereof more anon. To Lazaru•• succeeded. Stephen who quietly enjoyed his Dominions here; the Turkes being in the mean time em∣broyled in warre amongst themselves by the sonnes of Baiazet. But that difference being once composed, and Mahomet absolutely setled in his Fathers throne; the Turks begun again to pursue this quarrell: which George the son of Stephen compounded with Amurath the second, son of Mahomet, paying the Turk an yearly tribute, and giving him his daughter Mary for a wife or Concubine. But this alliance did not so well unite their affections, (though George did many ill Offices in regard thereof to his Christiun neighbours) nor so well settle his estate; but that Amurath in fine dispos∣sessed him first of Rascia, and afterwards of Servia also, for letting Huniades escape whom hee had in his power. And though Amurath was necessitated to restore Servia again, upon the peace made with Ʋladislaus the King of Hungary; yet Mahomet the Great, on the death of George, soone pos∣sessed himselfe of it. For Lazarus the youngest of Georges sonnes having deprived Stephen and George his elder Brethren (whose eyes Amurath had before put out to make them uncapable of the Government) of the principality; compelled them to seek to Mahomet for aid. But dying whilest these matters were in agitation, his widow put her selfe and her three sonnes Peter, John, and Mar∣tin, under the protection of the Hungarians; and by that meanes, but with much trouble and many difficulties (the blinde Brethren still solliciting the Turkes against her) held the State a while: till the people finding no assurance in that kinde of government, and weary of the dayly harmes they received from the Turkes, yeelded themselves absolutely to the power of Mahomet, about the yeare 1460. continuing ever since a Province of the Turkish Empire.

6 BULGARIA.

BƲLGARIA is bounded on the East with the Euxine Sea; on the West with Servia, on the North with the River Danow, which is here called Ister; on the South with Thrace. Called for∣merly by the name of Mysia inferior, as lying lower then the other on the course of that River; as Servia, lying up the water was called Mysia superior. Afterwards it was reckoned of as a part of Dacia, and in that notion was the Birth-place of Galerius, one of the Cesars in the Empire of Diocletian; born in this countrey neere the borders of Thrace; not far from the City of Sardica, who there∣fore in the Martyrologies of the middle times, was called by the name of Dacianus. Finally, it took this name from the Bulgars, a Seythian people, who in the yeare 566. possessed themselves of it.

The Countrey for the most part full of sharp and rugged hills, branches of the great Mountaine Haemus, which divides it from Thrace, and spred themselves over all this Province, in somuch that even the midlands of it are rough and stony; and though the lower parts have some plains and valleys, yet are they generally full of Woods and Deserts; the most unpleasant, and least peopled part of both the Dacias. The Inhabitants hereof in some conformity to the countrey, are patient of all toll and labour, and not easily tired; but nothing is more troublesome then their conversation: more full of courage, then of valour, their courage not proceeding by the rules of reason, but issuing onely out of brutishnesse, or a naturall fiercenesse.

Places of most note in it, are 1 Axium, or Axiopolis, on the bankes of Danubius, which from this town begins to take the name of Ister. It is now called Colonamich, of no great fame otherwise. 2 Di∣nogetia, by Antonine called Dinigutia, now Drimago, situate also on the Ister, opposite to the influxe of Hierasus, and the town of Galatz. 3 Mesembria, situate on the Euxine, and still retaining the old name; in Strabo, by some errour of the Transcribers called Menebria. 4 Marcianopolis, on the Ister or Danubius also, built by Trajan in honour of Marcia his sister, whence it had the name: in vain besieged by the Gothes, at their first irruptions on this countrey; and afterwards much mentioned in the stories of that warlike people; for many bickerings, and some great battels they had neere it with the Emperour Claudius, in one of which overthrowne by him wich a mighty slaughter. 5 Nicopolis (by the Turkes called Nigebol) built by the same Trajan on the Danow, at the fall of the River Iatre, at his returne from the conquest of Dacia, whence the occasion of the name; the word Nicopolis signifying the City of Victorie: sufficiently memorable for the founder of it, more for the many great battels fought neer unto it; whereof two the principall. The first, that of Sigismund the Emperour and King of Hungary, besieging it with an Army of 130000 Christians, in the time of Baiazet the first (whose Father Amurath had taken it from the King of Bulgaria) the issue of which siege was this, that Baiazet coming to raise the siege, obtained the victory with the loss of 60000 Turks: the army of the Christians being wholly routed, 20000 slain, all the rest almost taken prisoners; and the young Emperor forced to flie by Sea to Thrace, thence unto Constantinople, afterwards to Rhodes; and at last after 18 months absence to his Realm of Hungary: the other (as it were in revenge of this) was fought betwixt Michael Vaivod of Valachia, and the forces of Mahomet the third, over whom the Vaivod got a remarkable victory, and as the fruits thereof sacked the City it self, carrying thence great spoil and booty, and infinite multitudes of peo∣ple, with some whereof he made up his Army, sending the rest to inhabit and manure the void and desert places of his own Dominions. 6 Sophia, called Tibiscum in the time of Ptolemie, repaired by the Emperour Justinian, who gave it this name from a famous and magnificent Temple, founded and dedicated by him unto St. Sophia. The ordinary Residence for these late times of a Turkish Beglerbeg, who hath the chiefe command of Europe under the grand Signieur: once taken by Huniades, and by him at the command of Ʋladislaus King of Hungary, burnt unto the ground; but afterwards repaired and more strongly fortified, then it had beene formerly. 7 Varna, antiently called Dionysiopolis,

situate on the Euxine Sea, neer the borderes of Thrace: remarkable for the great defeat there given the Christians; the first flight of Huniades from the face of the Turkes, and the death of Vladislaus King of Hungary, spoken of before. 8 Sumium, 9 Pezechium, 10 Calacrium, 11 Galata, and 12 Ma∣cropolis; all taken by the Hungarians in their way to Varna, and lost againe upon the issue of that battell. 13 Silistria, at this time the chief City hereof, and the ordinary abode of a Turkish Bassa: delivered to Amurath the first, by Sasmenos, Prince or King of Bulgaria, out of a vaine hope to save thereby the rest of his countrey. 14 Parastlaba, or Perstlaba, the antient seat of the Kings of Bulgaria; till the taking of it by John Zimisces Emperour of Constantinople, by whom caused to be called Johan∣nopolis: but it soon lost that new name, and is now an ordinary village called P••retalaw. 15 Ter∣nova, the usuall seat or residence of the later Princes of this countrey, at the conquest of it by the Turkes. 16 Budina, once of great importance, and the chief of this countrey; but being taken by Huniades in the course of his victories, it was by him burnt downe to the ground, as having been the cause of much warre to the Christians there: supposed to be built in or neer the place, where once stood the old City of Oescus, the principall town of the Triballi, called therefore Oescus Tribal∣lorum; though some will have that City to be now called Blida. 17 Venuzina, a towne of great strength, and one of the first peeces taken by the Turkes. 18 Cossova, fatall to the Christians, who in the plaines hereof had two main defeates: the first by Amurath the first, who here discomfited Laza∣rus the Despot of Servia, and the greatest Army that the Christians ever raised against the Turkes: La∣zarus himselfe being slain in the fight, and Amurath himselfe shortly after the battell stabbed in the belly by one Miles Cobelitz a wounded and halfe dead souldier, as he was taking a view of the dead bodies which lay there in heaps. The last by Amurath the second to the famous Huniades, whom he here discomfited after a cruell fight continuing three dayes together; in which were slain 17000 Christians, and amongst them the greatest part of the Hungarian Nobility, Huniades put againe to flight, and forced to some extremities to preserve his life, the Turkes buying this great victory with the l••ise of 40000 men, as themselves confessed. The place in which these fields were fought, called the Plaines of Cossova, extendeth 20 miles in length, and 5 miles in breadth, incompassed round with pleasant mountaines in the form of a Theater; as if it were designed by Nature for a stage of action, 19 Dorostorum, by some of the Antients called Rhodostolon, the seat in P••olemies time of the first Le∣gion called Italica; afterwards one of the chief townes which the Rosses and Russians had in this countrey: from whom taken by John Zimisces the Eastern Emperour, decaying after that time by little and little, and now wholly ruinate. 20 Achrida the birth-place of Justinian, by whom beau∣tified and enlarged, and called Justiniana Prima: who raising the Diocese of Dacia into a Praefecture placed here a Primate for the affaires of the Church, (which honour it doth still retaine, the Bishop hereof being the Primate of all Dacia,) and a P••aefectus Praetorio, for affaires of State. But he being dead, the town returned to its old name, nov called L' Ochrida, contracted by William of Tyre to A••re; by the Turkes called Giustandill; a disti••ct Principate of it selfe in the time of Amurath the first, and by him made tributary at his first warre upon this countrey.

And here it is to be observed that those parts of this countrey which lie next to the Euxine Sea, had antiently the name of Pontus; a•• had some parts of Asia Minor which bordered on the same Sea also: and that the City of Tone as Ptolemie, or Tomos as Pliny calls it, to which Ovid was ba∣nished by Augustus Caesar, was a City of this Europaean Pontus, and not of the Persian, as hath been com∣monly conceived. For Tomi is by Ptolemie placed amongst the Cities of Moesia inferior, and by Ovid on the West or left side of the Euxine, and not upon the South thereof, as appeareth by these lines of his.

Cum maris Euxini positos ad laeva Tomitas Quaerere me laesi Principis ira jubet.

that is to say,

My wronged Princes wrath commands me bide At Tomos on the Euxines Western side.

The place at this day called Tomiswar, according to Coelius Calcagninus; but others would have it to be the same which is now named Kiovia, in the same tract also; not farre from which is said to be a Lake called to this day Owidow Jezcocoor, the Lake of Ovid. For what cause hither banished is not yet agreed on. Some say it was for the unlawfull pleasures which he enjoyed with Julia the Emperours daughter, whom he celebrates in his Amorum under the borrowed name of Corinna. Others imagine that he had seen Augustus himselfe unnaturally using the company of the same Julia, his daughter; for which the offended Prince exiled him: and that he alludeth hereunto in his book de Tristibus, saying, Cur aliquid vidi, cur noxia lumina feci, &c. A Crime, of which I dare not thinke that noble Emperor to be any way guilty. But certain it is, that whatsoever was the true reason of it, that which was openly pretended was the writing of those lascivious and inflammatory Books de Arte amandi, tending to the debauchment of youth, and corruption of manners: which he in divers places of his workes acknowledgeth for the cause thereof.

But to return unto the business of this country, the antient Inhabitants hereof were towards the East the Troglodytae dwelling neer the mouth or fall of the river Peuce into the Euxine or Black, Sea; the Peucini inhabiting on the very mouth of it, and in a little Island opposite thereunto called also Pence, now

Pizina, the Cribizi, Piarensii, and Dimensii: the Western parts being wholly taken up by the Triballi, the most potent Nation of them all: who onely had the happinesse to vanquish Philip King of the Maccdonians. For Philip having or pretending a quarrell against Mateas a King of the Sarmatians, entred his countrey, overthrew him in a set fight, carried with him great booties, and among other things 20000 Mares, for breed, which hee took in the battell: it being the custome of the Scythians and Sarmatians, to use Mares onely in the warres, because their not stopping in the midst of a race to pisse, could be no impediment to them in their flight. In his return homeward, these Triballi deny him passage through their countrey, unlesse they might partake of the spoiles. This being denyed, they fall from words to blowes, and next to a pitched field. In which fight Philip was wounded with an Arrow, which passing through his thigh nailed him to his saddle: his horse be∣ing galled with the wound falling down to the ground. Which the frighted Macedonians seeing, and supposing him dead, fled out of the field, leaving all their spoiles to the Triballi, as if they had been sent out only to be their Receivers. So true an observation is it, that the very life-bloud of an Army runnes chiefly in the veins of the Generall, or supreme Commander. Overtopped after this by the Moesi or mingled with them, they were first broken by the Romans under the conduct of Cn. Curio Scri∣bonius, spoken of before, the absolute Conquest of them and the rest of the Moesians being reserved for the times of Augustus Caesar. By him or his successours the whole countrey of the Moestans being cast into two Provinces, this part of it had the name of Moesia inferior, that ly∣ing Westward up the water being called Moesia superior, for distinctions sake. By the Em∣perour Aurelianus the Dacians being forced from the other side of the Danow by the barbarous Nati∣tions, or by him prudently removed to avoid their furie were planted here betwixt both the My∣sias, divided afterwards into two Provinces, taken out of the other, Mediterranea, and Ripensis: which with the help of the higher Mysia, Dardania, Prevalitana, and part of Macedonia Salutaris, made up the whole Diocese of Dacia, as before was said. The residue hereof now passing under the name of Bulgaria, was afterwards divided into two Provinces also, another Province being taken out of the East parts of the Lower Moesia, lying betwixt the River Phanissus, and the most northern branch of the Ister, which they called Scythia, because the Aroteres a Scythian people did once possess it: the Romans ambitiously affecting to be thought the Conquerrours of that unconquerable Nation. Successive∣ly by the Gothes and Hunnes was this countrey taken from the Romans; recovered againe in or before the time of Justinian who had here his Officers, subordinate to the Vicar or Lieutenant of Thrace, to which Diocese they properly belonged. But long they held not in that State; the Sclavonians first, and after the Bulgarians being masters of them. Of the first of these enough hath beene said elsewhere. These latter being a Scythian people inhabiting on the banks of the River Volga, were at first called Volgari, afterwards Bulgari: and though some conceive they had the name of Bulgarians from Bulgar the chief town of their Nation; but both uncertaine. In the time of the Emperour Ana∣stastus they made their first sally into the Provinces of the Empire, forraging Illyricum and Thrace: afterwards in the reign of Heraclius hired by Cosrhoes the Persian (with many other barbarous Na∣tions) to besiege Constantinople. In the reign of Constantine surnamed Pogonatus, conquering or casting out the Sclaves, they planted themselves in these Countries: compelling the Emperour to compound with them for a summe of money, from making any further inroad upon his Domini∣ons. From this time forwards we finde their Princes called by the name of Kings of the Bulgarians; the first of which after their setling in these parts was Trebellius or Trebellis, as some call him: the first Christian Prince of the Bulgarians; by whom Justinian the second was first restored unto the Empire, of which he had been outed by Absimarus; and afterwards well beaten by them, and forced to flie unto Constantinople on some breach between them. Growing into good termes with the Eastern Em∣perours, they aided them against the Saracens then besieging the Imperiall City; of whom they slew 22000 as they were forraging the countrey and in the time of Leo the fourth, called Porphyroge∣nitus, they became homagers to the Empire, by whose perswasin Telerichus King of the Bulgarians received the Sacrament of Baptisme, and thereupon was honoured by him with a wife of the Impe∣riall family, and the honourable title of a Patrician. Ater this time, the Kings hereof had many priviledges indulged them by the Constantinopolitans, not usually communicated unto other Princes, Viz. their Crown of gold, their tier or cap of silke, and their red shoes for their Regall; which were also the Imperiall ornaments. To these Kings also, and to these onely, did the Greek Emper∣ours allow the title of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as being meerly Imperiall. Other Kings they called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from the Latine word Reges. Insomuch that when Basilius Macedo had received letters from Pope Adrian the second, wherein Lewis the second the Western Emperour was called Basileus; he rased out that Imperiall attribute, and dispatched an embassie to Lewis, wherein he challenged it as his owne pe∣culiar Epithite. Some quarrells after falling out, Crunus the Bulgarian King, in the time of Nicepho∣rus successour to the Emperesse Irene, invadeth Thrace, taketh the City of Sardica, killeth that Emper∣our in his tent, and worsteth Michael (who succeeded) in the open field; Mesembira, a principall City of this Countrey being taken and ransacked by him. But Bogor of another temper, not onely did receive the Sacrament of Baptism, which many of his Predecessors had intermitted: but brought his subjects (who rebelled on the change of Religion, and thereupon were fought with and van∣quished by him) to the same faith also: gratified for that cause by Theodora the Emperesse, with some large accession unto his estate. After long warres betwixt the Bulgarians, and the following Emperours, the fortune of the Constantinopolitan did at last prevaile: Samuel King of the Bulgarians being overthrown, 15000 of his souldiers taken and deprived of sight; and the countrey conquer∣red

by Basilius the second,* 1.108 surnamed Porphyrogenitus, anno 1015. from that time tributary to the Empire: to which they did good service in the time of Conctantinus Ducas, using their help against the Vzi, a new swarm of Scythians passing over the Ister with an Army of 60000 fighting men, and wasting Macedon and Greece. The like did John another of the Kings thereof, aiding the Greeks against Latines, whom they overthrew with a very great slaughter; Baldwin the Emperour of the Latines in Constantinople being taken prisoner, sent in bonds to Ternova, and there cruelly murdered, an. 1206. Nor were they wanting to assist them against the Turkes, when they grew dangerous to that Empire by the taking of Adrianople: for the recovery whereof, they raised a great and puissant Army, un∣fortunately discomfited by the Forces of Amurath the first, an. 1366. Provoked with which invasion, Amurath having setled his affaires in Afia, with an Army of 30000 falleth into Bulgaria, takes divers places of importance, and prevailed so far, that Sasmenos the last Prince hereof, wrapping his winding sheet about him, to shew that he had deserved death, prostrates himselfe most abjectly at the tyrants feet, offering to put Sillistria (his strongest City) into his possession. For not performance of which offer, his countrey is againe invaded, most of it taken from him; permitted to enjoy the rest upon hard conditions, as ••assall and tributary to the Turk. But Bajazet, Amuraths successour not content herewith picked a quarrell with him, and made an absolute conquest of Bulgaria, converting it unto a Province of the Turkish Empire, anno 1396. In which state it hath ever since continued, governed by three Turkish Sansiacks under the Beglerbeg of Greece: the Sansiacks residing at Nicopolis, Sillistria, and Sophia, in which last the Beglerbeg himself doth sometimes reside.

There are in DACIA.

Archbishops. Bishops.

And so much for DACIA.

MOUNT HAEMUS.

BEfore we enter into Greece we must crosse MOUNT HAEMUS, a ridge of hils extending from the Euxine Sea to the Adriatick; and thereby separating Greece both from Dacia and Sclavonia. So high and subject to the weather, that Stratonicus an old Grecian did use to say, that for eight moneths of the yeare it was alwayes cold: for the other foure, winter. It was affirmed by some of the antient writers, that from one of the highest heads hereof, as well the Adriatick as the Euxine might have been discerned: the truth of which report upon very good rea∣son hath beene called in question. But out of doubt from some one top or Summit of it, there is so full a prospect into Thrace and Mace∣don, that from hence Perseus taking a survey of the site of these countreys; positis per abrupta Cadris, &c. as the story hath it, was able to make choice of the fittest places for Forts and Castles, whereby to lock up all the passages against his enemies the Romans. In the parts bor∣dering upon Thrace so rough and craggy, that it is not to be passed but at two places onely. Whereof one was made by the Emperour Trajan where is yet to be seen a mighty strong gate built of great square stone; by which the passage that way was either opened or shut at the pleasure of them, who had the keeping of the same; with a small force exceeding easily defended against puissant Armies. The other being situate neer a little River by the Bulgarians called Sal∣tiza, not altogether so strait and narrow as the other, but rising high, and full of broken rockes and dangerous precipices, is alike impassable, defensible at ease, and without any great danger: as was experimentally found by famous Huniades, when he attempted (but in vain) to have led his forces this way, for the siege of Adrianople. Those parts hereof which border upon Macedonia, though somewhat opener, are not much easier of ascent: the passages through the broken rocks and precipices being very difficult; and not easily mastered: insomuch that when Perseus the last King of Macedon had fortified the straights hereof against the Romans; non 〈◊〉〈◊〉 quisse aditum nisi è coelo venientibus videbatur, it was conceived (saith Florus) that there was no pas∣sage left for any forces, unlesse they fell immediately from the heavens themselves.

This great and rocky chaine of hils, as they were vehemently exposed to winde and weather, so were they destitute of those commodities, which were either comfortable or indeed meerly necessarie to the life of man: which made the passage over them in a manner impossible unto any Armies, but what were very patient both of cold and hunger. Yet were they not left desolate and void of people, especially in those sides hereof which lay next to Greece; but most especi∣ally in those parts which bordered or confined on Thrace: where the spurres and branches of the hils spreading farre and wide, and taking up a great part of the countrey; occasioned the Romans in the division of the Diocese of Thrace into severall Provinces, to call that part or Province of it which lay next to Moesia, by the name of Haemimontum, or Haemimontana, the principall Townes whereof were Adrianople, Vscudoma, and Anchialar; the principall Govern∣our hereof a Roman President. Where, by the way we take notice of an Errour in the common impressions of the Code, Lib. VII. Tit. 62. leg. 23. where we finde Haemi montem, for Haemimontum: the first being the name onely of the mountain; and the latter (which is there meant) of the Roman P••ovince.

But to return unto the Mountain, there is another of this name in Thessalie, mentioned (or mistook for this) by Servi••s in his notes on the first book of the Georgicks; in the top whereof was said to be the habitation of Mars, on the bottome the most pleasant valley of Tempe: so called from Haemus, the son of Bor••as and Orithya amongst the Poets. And possiblie to distinguish this from that of Thes∣salie, Ptolemie, and others call it Aemus, without the Aspirat, though it may well be, that there are others of this name, as that this is called in divers places, or in divers Authors, by other names: one part hereof being called Secmbrus by Aristotle, an other Se••minus by Thucydides, and by La••nicus the whole called Trasclus. The like may be observed at the present also, P••netus calling it by the name of Catena Mundi, a great part whereof it links together: Cuspinianus, Castegnazzo; Iazius, Kriviezne: the Italians, Mont Argentorato; the French, Monte de Castegnao; the Sclavonians, Cumaniza; and the Turks, Bal∣kan. Which I have therefore here observed for the Readers sake, that meeting any of these names in the stories either of the ancient or modern times, he may know what hils or mountains are inten∣ded by them. Which said I now passe on to Greece, the way being thus prepared and laid open to me.

OF GREECE.

GREECE in the presentlatitude and extent thereof; is bounded on the East with the Propontick, Hellespont, and Aegean Seas; on the West with the Adriatick; on the North with Mount Haemus, which parteth it from Bul∣garia, Servia, and some part of Illyricum; and on the South with the Sea Ionian: So that it is in a manner a Peninsula or Demy-Island, environed on three sides by the Sea; on the fourth only united to the rest of Europe.

But this is only in relation to the present extent hereof, the name be∣ing anciently restrained within narrower bounds. Confined at first to Attica and the parts adjoining; ab Isthmi angustiis Hellas incipit, as it is in Plinie: and took the name of Hellas from Hellen the son of Deucalion; as that of Greece or Graecia, from Graecus the son of Cecrops the first King of Athens. Communicated after∣wards to Peloponnesus, then to Thessalie also: and finally when the Macedonian Empire had inlarged it selfe over the petit Common-wealths and Estates hereof, it came to be communicated to that Coun∣trie also. The people for this cause known by divers names, by some Achivi, by others Myrmidones; sometimes Pelasgi, Danai, Argivi, &c. But the name whereby they are best known in sacred Writers, is that of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, so called from Hellas the more proper and genuine name of Greece, in the strictest noti∣on and acception. A name used frequently and familiarly in the Book of God, both absolutely to de∣note this Nation, as where it is said, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that the Greeks seek wisdome; 1 Cor. 1. 22. and relatively as in opposition to the Jews, the Barbarians, and the Hellenists, or Graecizing Jews. First with relation to the Jews, and then it signifieth the whole bodie of the Gentiles generally, of which the G••ecians were the most eminent and famous people; as 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, to the Jew first, and also to the Gentile, Rom. 11. 9, 10. Give none offence, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, neither to the Jews nor to the Gentiles, 1 Cor. 10. 32. and elsewhere frequently. In which and all other places of that kinde where the Anti∣••esis lyeth between the Jews and other Nations, we are to understand the Gentiles, the whole body of them; though many times our Translators, I know not why, render it literally the Greeks; as Rom. 1. 16. 10. 12. &c. Secondly with reference to all other Nations not so well versed in the learning and 〈◊〉〈◊〉 of that Age as the Grecians were, whom by a common name of scorn they called Barbarians: according unto that of Strabo, Barbarae sunt omnes Nationes praeter Graecos; the Romans themselves though then the great Lords of the World, being included in the reckoning. And so the word is taken, Rom. 1. 14. I am a debtour saith S. Paul, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, both to the Greeks and the Barbarians, to the wise and unwise: in which as well the Romans as those of other Nations, have the name of Barbarians. Last of all for the Graecizing Jews, whom the Vulgar Latine calleth Graecos, and our English Grecians; they were such of the Jews who living dispersed amongst the Gentiles, used the translation of the Septuagint, making that the Canon both for life and doctrine. Which difference betwixt them and the Jews in∣habiting in Judaea, who kept themselves unto the Scriptures in their mother-tongue, and used the He∣brew only in all sacred actions: occasioned many jars amongst them, which sometimes brake out in∣to

to open violence, insomuch as R. Eliezer brake into the Synagogue of the Alexandrians at Hierusalem, and therein committed many outrages. Of this unfriendlinesse between them, mention is made Act 6. 1. where it is said, that there arose a murmuring of the Grecians against the Hebrews, &c. In which place, though the English and Vulgar Latine use the name of Grecians, yet ought they more properly to be ren∣dred Hellenists, or Graecizing Jews, as in all other places, viz. Acts 9. 29. 11. 20. &c. where they are called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 and not 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, in the Greek Originals.

But to proceed to our description of the Country, we finde it situate in the Northern temperate Zone, under the fift and sixt Climats; the longest day being 15 hours: inhabited by a people which were once brave men of war, sound Scholars, addicted to the love of vertue and civill behaviour. A Nation once so excellent that their precepts and examples do still remain, as approved rules, and Tutors to instruct and direct the man that endeavoureth to be vertuous; famous for government, affectors o•• freedome, every way noble. For which vertues in themselves, and want of them in other, all their neighbours and remote Nations were by them scornfully called Barbarians: a name now most fit for the Grecians themselves, being an unconstant people, d••stitute of all learning, and the means to obtain it, Vmversities; uncivill, riotous, and so lazie, that for the most part, they endeavour their profit no further then their belly compels them, and so perfidious withall in all their dealings, especially towards the Western Christians, that it is grown into a Proverb amongst the Italians, Chi fida in Grego, sara in trigo, i. e. He that trusts to a Greek is sure to be cousened. When they meet at foasts or ban∣quets, they drink small draughts at the beginning, which by degrees they increase, till they come to the height of intemperancie: at which point when they are arrived, they keep no rule or order; whereas before to drink out of ones turn is accounted a point of incivility. Hence as I beleeve, sprung our by word As merry as a Greek, and the Latine word Graecari.

The women for the most part are brown-complexioned, exceedingly well favoured, and excessive∣ly amorous. Painting they use very much to keep themselves in grace with their husbands; for when they once grow wrinckled, they are put to all the drudgeries of the house. Both sexes gene∣rally in their habit and outward garb, apply themselves to the State under which they live: such as are subject to the Turk, conforming unto the dresse and fashions of the Turks, as those who live un∣der the Venetians, do to that of Venice.

The Christian Faith was first here planted by S. Paul, invited by the Spirit to come over into Ma∣cedonia, Acts 16. 12. passing from thence to Thessalonica, the chief Citie of Mygdonia, ch. 17. 1. from thence to Athens in Achaia, v. 16. then unto Corinth the Metropolis of Peloponnesus, ch. 18. 1. watering the greatest part of Greece with the dew of heaven; and planting Bishops in most Churches where he preached the Gospell, as Dionysius (the Areopagite) at Athens, Aristarchus at Thessalonica, Epaphroditus at Philippi, Silas at Corinth, and Titus in the Isle of Crete. The like he did in many other Countries also, accounted members of the Greek Church, though not of Greece: the name of the Greek Church extending over all the Provinces of the Eastern Empire, governed by the 4 Patriarchs, 1 Of Alexan∣dria, who presided over Egypt and Arabia. 2 Of Hierusalem, whose Patriarchate (erected only in re∣gard of our Saviours passion in that Citie, and the great opinion, which by that means accrewed unto it) confined within the bounds of Palestine. 3 Of Antioch, whose jurisdiction contained all Sy∣ria, Armenia, Cilicia, and the Isle of Cyprus, and whatsoever else was within the Diocese of the Orient. And 4 of Constantinople, to whose charge were committed all the other Provinces of the Greek Church, as Greece, Russia, Dacia, Sclavonia, part of Poland, and all the Islands in the Adriatick, Ionian, and Aegean Seas; together with all Asia Minor, and the Isles thereof, (except only the Provinces of Cilicia and Isauria) and the Countries lying on both sides of Pontus Euxinus, and Palus Maeotis. The reasons of the large increase of whose Jurisdiction, confined at first within the Diocese of Thrace, were 1 The reputation of being seated in the Imperiall Citie, which drew after it (by a Decree of the Councell of Chalcedon) all the Provinces of Asia Minor, (Cilicia and Isauria excepted only.) 2 The voluntary sub∣mission of the Grecians upon their separation of the Church of Rome, by which all Greece, Macedon, Epirus, the Isle of Crete, and all the Islands in the Aegean and Ionian Seas, which formerly had no superior but their own Primate, the Archbishop of Thessalonica; became subject unto them. 3 The diligence of the Patriarchs hereof, in converting by his Suffragan Bishops and other Ministers, the Russians, Bulgarians, and Sclavonians to the faith of Christ, which made those poeple to look upon Constantinople as their Mother-Church. And 4 the pietie and care of the later Patriarchs, in supply∣ing with new Pastors and Ministers, those parts and Provinces of the West, which being conquered by the Turk, had been forsaken by their old Clergie, and left like sheep without a shepheard.

And yet this Church though thus extended and enlarged in the outward members, is very much straitned and impaired at home: the Country being thinly peopled, and many of those people trai∣ned up from their infancie in the Mahometan Law. So that it is a greater wonder that there should be any remainders of Christianitie left amongst them, then that the open Professors of it should be so few: the tyrannie of the Turks on the one side, and the temptations of preferment upon the other, being rightly pondered. For who could look to find 20 Churches of Christians in Constantinople, the seat and ordinarie residence of the Turkish Emperours; or that in Salonichi, or Thessalonica, there should be 30 Christian Churches, and but three Turkish Mosquits; that the Primate of this Salonichi should have under him 10 suf••ragan Bishops, whereof he of Philippi hath no fewer then 150 Churches under his Jurisdiction; or finally that under the Metropolitans of Athens or Corinth, there should be as many So mercifull hath God dealt with this luxurious and perfidious people as not to take away their Candlestick, though he hath darkened and obscured the light hereof.

As for the Fathers of this Church, anciently and at this present held in most esteem, they were no other then such as had been Bishops of the greater Sees: that is to say, 1 S. Chrysostome, first a Reader of Antioch, afterwards Patriarch of Constantinople. 2 Basil, and the two Gregories, 3 Nyssen, and 4 Na∣zianzen, all in Asia Minor, this last of Constantinople also. 5, 6 The two Cyrils, the one Patriarch of Alexandria, the other of Hierusalem. 7 Epiphanius, Bishop of Salamis in the Isle of Cyprus. 8 Theodoret Bishop of Cyrus, &c. men of renown and precious memorie amongst them to this very day. From whose writings if they deviate in any materiall point of doctrine, it is in that of the Procession of the Holy Ghost, which they grant to be per Filium, but not a Filio. And though Clichthoraeus, Lombard, and other moderate men of the Church of Rome, doe grant the difference to be rather, in modo explicandi, quam in ipsa re; and that the Clause a Filioque, was added by the Romanists to the ancient Creeds, the Grecians not being privie nor consenting to it: yet so uncharitable is that Church towards these poore men languishing under the tyrannie of Turkish thraldome, as to persecute them with reproach and scorn, brand them for Schismaticks and Apostates, and solemnly to anathematize them, in Bulla Coenae, every Maundie Thursday. And it is a very hard measure to adde and anathematize too, as is right well observed by the late Lord Archbishop of Canterbury, in his notable discourse against the Jesuite. Other particular Tenets in which the Greek Church differeth from the Romish and Reformed (as in some points it doth from both) have been already specified in our Description of Russia, the Chur∣ches of the Greeks and Moscovites differeing in no materiall points, but 1 the manner of distributing the Sacrament; 2 the exacting of marriage by the Moscovite in the partie admitted unto Orders; 3 the frequent admiting of divorces upon light occasions; and 4 finally in being lesse strict in observing the Lent before Easter then in any of the other three. For whereas the Grecians account it a damna∣ble sin to eat flesh or fish which hath bloud in it, in any of their other Lents or times of abstinence, (they have in both Churches four in all) in that before Eas••er, which of all reason ought to be kept most punctually, the Laitie eat all sorts of fish without any exception; the bloud of some of which, as the Cuttle by name, is held to be a delicate food, and in great request.

The Language they spake was of their own, of which there were four Dialects, viz. 1 the Attick, 2 the Dorick, 3 the Aeolick, 4 the Ionick: besides the common phrase of speech most in use among them. A language of great fame for the liberall Arts, but more for so great a part of the holy Scripture, first delivered in it: and for the lofty sound, significant expressions, genuine suavitie, and happie composition of words, so excelling all others, that even in the flourishing of the Roman Empire, it so much overtopped the Latine, that the Histories of Rome it self (as of Polybius, Appian, Dion Cassius) were written in it. It was once also the generall language of Anatolia, some parts of Italie, Provence in France, and almost all the Islands of the Mediterranean. But now partly by the mu∣tilation of some words, and contraction of others; partly by confusion of the true sound of Vowels, Diphthongs, and Consonants, and the translating of the Accents; and finally, by the admixture of forein Nations, it is not only fallen from its naturall elegancie, but from its largenesse of extent. For it is now shut up within the limits of Greece, and the Sea-coasts of the lesser Asia, opposite unto it; and there not only much corrupted but almost quite devoured by the Turkish and Sclavonian tongues: but specially by that which they call Franco, a Mungrel language, composed of Italian, French, and some Spanish words, used as the ordinarie speech for commerce and intercourse betwixt Christians, Jews, Turks, and the Greeks themselves, who doe not understand, and much lesse speak the true ge∣nuine Greek. So that although they still retain for ordinarie dayes S. Chrysostoms Liturgie, and that of S. Basil for the Festivals: yet being both written in the ancient and learned Greek, they are no more understood by the Vulgar Grecian, then the Latine Service by the common and illiterate Papist.

The soil questionlesse is very fruitfull, and would yeeld great profit to the husbandman, if they would take pains in the tilling: but they, knowing nothing certainly to be their own, but all things subject to the Grand Signieur and his souldiers; neglect the tillage of their lands on the same grounds with those who said in the Poets Eclogues:

Impius haec tam culta novalia miles habebit? Barbarus has segetes? en queis consevimus arva!

Shall misbeleeving Turks these acres spoil, Which I manur'd with so much cost and toil? Shall they enjoy my care? See neighbours, see, For whom these goodly corn-fields tilled be!

The more naturall and certain commodities which they transport into other parts, are Wines, which in memory of the water which our Saviour turned into wine; and on the sixt day of January being that day whereon this miracle was wrought, they use to baptize: for which cause the Jews wil drinke none of them. They send also into other parts of the world, Oil, Copper, Vitrioll, some Gold and Silver, Velvet, Damasks, Turque Grograms, &c.

This Country hath formerly been famous for the brave Commanders, Miltiades, Aristides, and Themistocles of Athens, Lisander and Agesilaus of Sparta, Pelopidas and Epaminondas of Thebes, Aratus and Philopoemen of Achaia, Pyrrhus of Epirus, Philip of Macedon the subverter of the Grecian liber∣ty, and Alexander his son (to omit infinite others) the subverter of the Persian Monarchy. For the

divine Philosophers Plato,* 1.109 Socrates, Aristotle, and Theophrastus; for the most eminent Lawgivers, Solon, and Lycurgus; for the most exquisite Poets, Hesiodus, Homer, Sophocles, and Aristophanes; for the fa∣mous Historiographers, Xenophon the condisciple of Plato, Thu••ydides, Plutarch, and Herodotus; the elo∣quent Oratours, Aeschines, Demosthenes, and Isocrates; and lastly, for the authors and establishers of all bumane learning whatsoever, only the Mathematiques excepted.

The chief Rivers are 1 Cephisus, which arising in the Frontires of Epirus, disburtheneth it self in∣to the Aegean Sea. 2 Erigon, and 3 Alaicmon, which beginning their course in the more Northern parts of Macedon, end it in Thirmaicus Sinus. 4 Strymon in Mygdonia. 5 Athicus and Nisus in Thrace. 6 Stymphalus, where Hercules killed the Stymphalian birds. And 7 Ladon in Arcadia. 8 Inachus, whose daughter Io turned into a Heifer, was worshiped by the Egyptians under the name of Isis. 9 Achelous in Epirus, much celebrated by the ancient Poets, especially by Ovid in his Metamorphosis. As is also 10 Pe∣neus, the chief River of Thessalie, and there arising from Mount Pindus, and increased with the waters of many Rivers. Daphne the Nymph, whom Apollo is fabled to have loved, and turned into a Bay tree, lived near or on the banks of this River Peneus, and is therefore said to be his daughter Of lesse note

Populifer¹¹ Sperchius, & irrequietus¹² Enipeus ¹³ Apidanusque senex, lenisque¹⁴ Amphrysus, &¹⁵ Aeas.

That is to say:

Cool Sperchie, Enipeus that troubled ran, Smooth Amphryse, Aeas, and old Apidan.

The rest of lesse note, and the most eminent Mountains in each part hereof, shall be remembred in their places as we see occasion.

Thus much of the whole Countrie in grosse. And as for the division of it with reference to the State of the Roman Empire, it contained in a manner two whole Dioceses, viz. Thrace and Macedon: the first under the ••raefectus Praetorio Orientis, the latter (together with that of Dacia) under the Praefe∣ctus Praetorio for Illyricum. Of these the Diocese of Macedon lying wholly within the bounds of the modern Greece, contained the Provinces of Macedonia Prima. 2 Macedonia Secunda, or Salutaris, (now as in former times, called Albania.) 3 Epirus Nova, taking up the Countries of Phoeis, Locris, and so much of the Old Epirus as was on that side of the River Achelous. 4 Old Epirus, comprehending all the rest of that Countrie. 5 Thessalie, 6 Achaia, containing all Achaia and Peloponnesus, the Coun∣tries of Locris and Phocis excepted only. And 7 Crete or Candie, with the Isles adjoining. And for the Diocese of Thrace, it was divided into the Provinces of 1 Thrace, specially so called. 2 Europa, 3 Rhodope, 4 Haemi-montum, 5 Moesia Inferior, and 6 Scythia: of which the four first make up the bo∣die of Thrace, and shall there be spoken of: the two last being comprehended in the modern Dacia, have been described already in their proper places. But not to binde my self precisely unto this division, (though I shall look on this as occasion serveth) I shall consider Greece in the severall Pro∣vinces of 1 Peloponnesus, 2 Achaia, 3 Epirus, 4 Albania, 5 Macedon, 6 Thrace, 7 The Islands of the Pro∣pontick, 8 Aegean, and 9 the Ionian Seas, and 10 finally the Isle of Crete.

1 PELOPONNESUS.

PELOPONNESVS is bounded on the East with the Cretan, on the West the Adriatick or Ionian Seas; on the North-east with Sinus Saronicus, now Golfo di Engia; on the North-west with Sinus Corinthiacus, now G••lfo di Patras or Lepanto; and on the South with the Mediterranean. So that it is almost an Island, properly called a Peninsula, rounded with the Sea, except where it is tyed to the main land of Greece, by an Isthmus six miles in breadth, which the Grecians and Venetians fortified with a great wall and five Castles. This was called anciently Hexamilium, and was overthrown by Amurath the 2. who harassed and spoiled all the Country. It was afterwards in the year 1453. upon the ru∣mour of a war, built up again by the Venetians (who then had the greatest part of this country) in 15 dayes; there being for that time 30000 men imployed in the work. This wall extended from one Sea unto the other, which had it been as gallantly guarded as it was hastily made up, or as it was well fortified, had it been as well manned, might easily have resisted the Turks, untill more means had been thought on to defend it. Not lesse observable, but more fruitlesse was the design of some in the elder times to cut thorow this Isthmus and make a perfect Island of it. Attempted by Demetrius King of Macedon, Julius Caesar, and Caius Caligula, by none more eagerly pursued then the Emperour Nero, who to hearten on his souldiers, loath to attempt so fruitlesse an enterprise, took a spade in hand, and busily began the work. Yet at last the souldiers, being frighted with the bloud which abundantly broke forth; with the groans and roarings which they continually heard, and with the Hebgoblins and Furies, which were alway in their sight; perswaded the Emperour, now half out of the humour, to leave this and enjoin them some more profitable service: given over by the former Princes on the like discouragements. It is in compasse 600 miles, and was called at the first Aegialia, from Aegialus the first King of Sicyon; next Apia from Apis the fourth King; after that Sicy••nia

from Sicyon the nineteenth King thereof;* 1.110 and finally Peloponnesus from Pelops the son of Tantalus King of Phrygia, and 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, Insula; the word signifying as much as the Isle of Pelops. But it is now of late called Morea; and that, a Maurorum incursionibus, from the incursions of the Moores, as Mercator thinketh.

It is conceived to be the most pleasant Countrie of all Greece, abounding in all things necessarie for the life of man, and in such also as do serve for delicacie and contentment only: adorned with many goodly Plains, swelled with fruitfull Hils, well stored with Ports and Havens on all sides thereof. And though no Country in the world for the bignesse of it, hath suffered in the ruine of so many brave and stately Cities, yet is it still the most populous and best inhabited of all the Con∣tinent of Greece. Near the middle of it in Laconia is the Mount Taygetus, from the top whereof there was no Citie of note in all this Peninsula, but what might easily be seen. A most gallant pro∣spect. The whole divided commonly into these 7 Provinces, 1 Achaia propria, 2 Elis, 3 Messene, 4 Arcadia, Laconia, 6 Argolis, and 7 Corinthia.

1 ACHAIA PROPRIA is bounded on the East with Argolis and Corinthia, on the West with the Ionian Sea; on the North with Sinus Corinthiacus, or the Golfe of L••panto; on the South with Elis. So called from the Achaei, the Inhabitants of it; the adjunct propria, being added to difference it from Achaia in the Continent or main land of Greece.

Places of most consideration in it, are 1 Dyme, situate in the most Western point of it, on or near the Promontorie called Araxum, the town now called Chiarenza, and the Promontorie Cabo di Chiarenza. Not far from which is another Promontorie or head-land, of old called Antirrhium, because opposite to another in Aetolia, that was called Rhium, divided by a very narrow strait or fretum, which openeth into the Bay of Corinth; fortified on each side with a Castle for defence thereof, commonly called Dardanelli, and sometimes Castelli di Lepanto. 2 Aegium, where Jupiter is said to have been nursed by a Goat, whence it had the name: 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in Greek signifying a she Goat: once a strong town, now ruined and destroyed by the Turks, called at this day Vostiza, or Bostizan. 3 Aegira, once the chief Citie of all this tract, situate on a steep and inaccessible hill; now a small Village, called Xilocastro. 4 Olenus, so named from Olenus the son of Jupiter, and Anaxithea, now called Chaminisa. 5 Patrae, situate at the very mouth of the Golfe opposite to Lepanto, first called Ar••e, but being by one Patreus enlarged and walled, took the name of Patrae, which name it holdeth to this day, being still called Patras: the town of most note on the Bay of Corinth, called from hence Golfo di Patras. A town of good trade, and much frequented not long since by the English Merchants, who had here their Consul, called the Consul of Mera: but formerly more memorable for the death of S. Andrew the Apostle, who here suffered Martyrdom. 6 Pellene, distant from the Sea about 60 furlongs: the people whereof being constant to their old fashions of apparell, occasioned the Proverb of Pellenaea vestis, applyed to old cloaths out of fashion. Here were once also the two Cities of 7 Helice, and 8 Buris, sunk by the vi∣olence of a tempest into the bottome of the Sea, about the time of the battle of Leuctres. Not to say any thing of 9 Tritae and 10 Phera, two other towns hereof, of note, in the former times; so little now remaining of them, as if they had been sunk at the same time also.

But the chief town of all this Province, (if not a Province of it self) is that of Sicyon, situate not far from the Isthmus, in the most Eastern parts hereof, and giving to the territorie or adjoyning Country (as once unto the whole Peninsula) the name of Sicyonia. The territorie rich, especially in Olives and works of Iron; the Citie the most ancient of all Greece, built within little time of the generall flood and restauration of mankind: first called Aegialia, after Sicyonia, by the names of the first and nineteenth Kings hereof: by whom and their successours much adorned and beautified with Temples, Altars, Statues, and Images of their severall Gods: the ancientest Kingdome in the world, the Assyrian, and Aegyptian excepted only, and perhaps not those. It took beginning in the person of Aegialeus, within 150 years after the deluge, and 200 years before the death of Noah, continuing in a race of Princes who swayed the affairs of Peloponnesus, till overtopped by the growth and good for∣tune of the Kings of Argos. The names of whom, by reason of the undoubted antiquitie of this Kingdome, I shall here subjoin, in the ensuing Catalogue of

The KINGS of SICYON.

• A. M.
• 1860 1 Aegialeus
• 1910 2 Europs,
• 1950 3 Telchin,
• 1980 4 Apis,
• 2004 5 Telxion,
• 2055 6 Aegyras,
• 2089 7 Eurymachus,
• 2134 8 Leucidpus,
• 2187 9 Mesapus,
• 2234 10 Peratus.
• 2280 11 Plemnaeus,
• 2328 12 Orthoulis,
• 2391 13 Marathon,
• 2421 14 Marathus,
• 2441 15 Echyreus,
• 2496 16 Corax,
• 2526 17 Epopeus,
• 2561 18 Lamedon,
• 2601 19 Sicyon
• 2646 20 Polybus,
• 2686 21 Ianischus,
• 2728 22 Phestus,
• 2736 23 Adrastus,
• 2740 24 Polyphides,
• 2771 25 Pelasgus,
• 2791 26 Xeuxippus, the last King of Sicyon; after whose death A. M. 2812. the estate hereof was governed by the Priests of Apollo, seven

• of them successively one after another:* 1.111 the first five only years a piece; Amphictyon, who was the sixt, continuing 9 years in the Regencie, and Charidemus the last of them, ruling 18 years. After whose death, or departure, I know not which, A. M. 2844. the Heraclidae, who about that time returned in∣to Pel••ponnesus, made themselves Masters of this Country; there being no Kings of Sicyenia from this time forwards.

Of these Kings the most memorable were Aegialeus, and Apis, the first and fourth, from whom this Peninsula had the names of Apia, and Aegialia. Aegirus the 6. giving name and being to the Citie Aegi∣ra, spoken of before: Marathon the 13. of whom perhaps the famous fields of Marathon (in the other 〈◊〉〈◊〉 took denomination: Epopeus the 17. who founded a Temple to Minerva, and therein placed his own Monument or Tropheys: Sicyon the 19. the Founder of the Citie of Sicyon, or at least there∣pairer and enlarger of it: Pelasgus the 25. from whom perhaps the Grecians might be called Pelasgi, if not known formerly by that name. After this time, I finde no man of note who bare sway in Sicyon till the time of Aratus, the speciall ornament of this town (of which a Native) and one of the principall establishers of the Achaean Common-wealth against the Spartans and Macedonians; of which more hereafter in the generall History of Peloponnesus.

2 The Country of ELIS hath on the East Arcadia; on the West the Ionian Sea; on the North Acha••a prepria; on the South Messenia. The chief Cities are, 1 Elis, which gives name to the whole Pro∣vince. So called from Elisha the son of Javan, and grand-child of Japhet, who fixt himself in these parts of this Countrie, where he built this Citie, calling it by his own name; as his posteritie in ho∣nour of him did the Isles adjoynig; mentioned in the Propher Ezekiel, by the name of the Isles of Elisha Ch. 27. v. 7. Nigh to this Citie runneth the River Alpheus, of which we have spoken in 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and in this Citie reigned the King Augeas, the cleansing of whose Stable is accompted one of the won∣ders or twelve labours performed by Hercules. 2 Olympia, famous for the Statue of Jupiter Olympi••as, one of the 7 wonders, being in height 60 cubits; composed by that excellent workman Phidias, of gold and ivory. In honour of this Jupiter were the Olympick games instituted by Hercules, and cele∣brated on the Plains of this Citie, A. M. 2757. The exercises in them were for the most part bodily, as running in Chariots, running on foot, wrastling, fighting with the whorlbats, and the like. But so that there repaired thither also Orators, Poets, and Musicians, and all that thought themselves ex∣cellent in any laudable qualitie, to make triall of their severall abilities: the very Cryers who proclai∣med the Victories, contending which should cry loudest, and best play his part. The rewards given to the V••ctor were only Garlands of Palm, or such slight remembrances; and yet the Greeks no lesse esteem'd that small sign of conquest and honour, then the Romans did their most magnificent triumphs: those which were Conquerors herein being met by all the principall men of the Citie, in which, or un∣der which they lived, and a passage broken in the main wals thereof for their reception; as if the ordinarie Gates were not capable of so high an honour, or able to afford them entrance. Insomuch that when Diagoras had seen his three sons crowned for their severall victories, a friend of his came to him with this gratulation, Morere Diagoras, nunquam enim in Coelum ascensuruses, that is to say, Die now Diago••as, for thou shalt never goe to Heaven: as if no greater happinesse could befall the man either in this life or that to come, then that which he enjoyed already. The Judges and Presidents of these Games, were some of the Citizens of Elis, deputed to it; highly commended for their justice and in∣tegrity in pronouncing who best deserved, without partialitie. Of these thus Hora••e in his Odes:

Sunt quos Curriculo pulverem Olympicum Collegisse juvat; metaque fervidis Evitata rotis, Palmaque nobilis Terrarum Dominos evehit ad Deos. Quos Elea domum reducit Palma coelestes.

That is to say:

Some in Olympick dust take pride Their Chariots and themselves to hide; Whom the shunn'd mark, and Palm so priz'd, Like to the Gods hath eterniz'd. Such as like heavenly wights do come With an Elean Garland home.

But to proceed, after the death of Hercules, these games were discontinued for 430 years: at which time one Iphitus, warned so to doe by the Oracle of Apollo, renewed them; causing them to be solemnly exercised every fourth year: from which custom Olympias is sometimes taken for the space of 4 years; as cuincue annorum Olympiades, for 20 years. Varro reckoneth the times before the floud to be obscure; those before the Olympiads, and after the floud to be falulous; but those that followed these Olympiads to be Historicall. These Olympiads were of long time, even from the res••auration of them by Iphitus untill

the reign of the Emperour Theodosius;* 1.112 the Grecian Epoche, by which they reckoned their accompt: the first of them being placed in the year of the world, 3174. before the building of Rome 24 years; the last in the 440 year after Christs nativity. According to which reckoning this accompt conti∣nued for the space of 1214 years; the memorie of which remains, though the name of Olympia be not found in Peloponnesus: the town at this day called by the name of Sconri. 3 Pisa, whose people followed Nestor to the wars of Troy, and in their return were by tempest driven to the coasts of Italie, where they built the Citie Pisa in Tuscanie. 4 Tornese, a new Town, or the new name of some an∣cient City, from whence the adjoyning Promontorie of old called Chilonites, is now called Cabo di Tornese.

3 MESSENIA hath on the East Arcadia; on the North Elis; on the South and West, the Sea. It takes its name from the Metropolis Messene situate on Sinus Messeniacus, now called Golfo di Conro. 2 Pylos, where Nestor was King, now called Novarino, a desolate and poor village not worth the no∣ting. Of which thus Ovid speaking in the name of Penelope,

Nos Pylon, antiqui Neleia Nestoris arva, Misimus, incerta est reddita fama Pylo.

To Pylon, aged Nesiors seat, we sent; But could not hear from thence how matters went.

3 Medon, or Methone, seated in the most southern part of this Peninsula, from whence unto the Isthmus which joineth it to the rest of Greece, are reckoned 175 Italian miles; the ordinarie residence of the Turkish Zanziack, who hath the government of this whole Province of Morea under the Beglerbeg of Greece. 4 Corone or Coron, the chief town on the Bay of Messene, called from hence Golf di Coron, and the last which held out against the Turks for the State of Venice, once Lords of all the Sea-coasts of Peloponnesus. 5 Cyparissi, now called Arcudia from whence the Bay adjoyning hath the name of Golfo di Arcudia. Here is also the Promontorie called of old Coryphusium, now Calo Zanchio.

The people of this small Province had once a great sway in the whole Peninsula. At first confederate with the Spartans in so strict a league, that they mutually sent young Virgins to one another for their publick sacrifices: but afterwards Corrivals with them for the Supreme power. The Spartans at the last getting the upper hand of them, oppressed them with a miserable servitude. The occasion this. In the confines of this Countrie stood a Temple of Diana, common alike to the Messenians, Spartans, and Dores. It happened that some Spartan Virgins were by the Messenians here ravished; which abuse the Spartans pretended to be the ground of their warre: the true reason indeed being their covetous∣nesse of the sole Empire. This warre broke out three severall times. The first continued 20 years, in which space the Lacedaemonians fearing their absence would hinder the supply of young children in the Citie, sent a company of their ablest young men home to accompany their wives. Their off-spring were called, Parthenii, who coming to full growth, abandoned Sparta, sailed into Italie, and there built Taren••um. The second being of 23 years continuance, was raised and maintained by Aristomenes, one of the chief men of the Messenians; in which they prospered ••il Aristo••rates King of Arcadia, one of their confederates, revolted, to side with Lacedaemon. Then began they to decline, and Aristomenes was thrice taken prisoner, still miraculously escaping. His last imprisonment was in a Dungeon, where by chance espying a Fox devouring a dead body, he caught hold of her tail. The Fox running away, guided Aristomenes after, till the straitnesse of the hole by which he went out, made him leave his hold, and fall to scraping with his nails, which exercise he never left, till he had made the hole pas∣sable, and so escaped; and having a while upheld his falling Country, dyed in Rhodes. The third warre was like drops after a tempest. In which the Messenians being finally subdued, were forced to abandon their Country, or become slaves unto the Spartans who put them to all drudgeries and ser∣vile works, as they did the Helots, whom they accounted as their bondmen: and to this life some of them did apply themselves with such obsequiousnesse, that at last it grew into a Proverb, Messena ser∣vilior, that such a one was more servile, or more slavishly used then these poore Messenians. But the greatest part of them not brooking that heavy yoke, passed into Sicil, and there built the Citie of Messana. Others were planted in Naupactum, by the State of Athens; the rest dispersed up and down in all parts of Greece: few of them left in their own Countrie, till Epaminondas having vanquished the Lacedaemonias at the battell of Leuctres, restored them to their ancient possessions.

4 ARCADIA, hath on the East Laconia; on the West Elis and Messene; on the North Achaia propria; and on the South the Sea. This Country took its name from Arcas, the son of Jupiter and Calisto; but was formerly called Pelasgia: the people whereof thought themselves more ancient then the Moon.

Orta prius Luna, de se si creditur ipsi, Amagno tellus Arcade nomen habet.

The land of which great Areas took its name, Was ere the Moon, if we will credit Fame.

The chief Cities are 1 Mantinea, nigh unto which the Theban Army, consisting of 30000 foot, and 3000 horse, routed the Army of the Spartans, and Athenians; consisting of 25000 foot, and 2000 horse. In this battell Epaminondas that famous Leader, received his deaths wounds, and not long after dyed. At his last gasp one of his friends bemoaning his untimely death; Alas, said he, thou diest Epaminondas, and leavest behinde thee no children: Nay, replyed he, two daughters will I leave be∣hind me, the victory of Leuctra, and this other at Mantinea. It was afterwards called Antigonia in ho∣nour of Antigonus Tutor or Protector of Philip the father of Perseus King of Macedon; but by com∣mand of the Emperour Adrian restored to its old name again, and is now called Mantegna. 2 Megalo∣polis, the birth-place of Polybius that excellent Historian. The one half of it had sometimes the name of Orestia, from the lodging of Oresies in it; the whole now called Leontari, on what cause I know not. 3 Phialia, towards the Sea. 4 Psophis, so called from Psophis one of the sons of Lycaon, once King of this Countrie, slain by Jupiter. 5 Stymphalus, situate near a Lake and River of the same name, where Hercules slew the Stymphalian birds; so great in number and in body that they darkened the sun-beams, and terribly infested this little Province, till driven thence by Hercules. Here was also in this town a Temple dedicated to Minerva, from hence called Stymphalida. 6 Tegea, fa∣mous for the Temple of Pan, here worshipped, and from hence called Tegaeus: more for the war made upon the Tegeates, or people hereof by the Lacedaemonians: who thinking themselves assured of victorie, brought with them store of chains and fetters, wherewith to lead captive their conquered Enemies, but being overcome in battell, were themselves bound with them, and forced as slaves, to till the grounds of these Tegeates. Here is also in this Countrie the River Styx, whose water for the poisonous taste was called the water of Hell: by which Poets fain, that the Gods used to swear, as may be every where observed: and that what God soever swore by Styx falsly, he was banished from heaven; and prohibited Nectar for a 1000 years.

This Country for the fitnesse of it for pasturage and grazing hath made it the subject of many worthy and witty discourses, especially that of Sir Philip Sidney, of whom I cannot but make honou∣rable mention: a book which besides its excellent language, rare contrivances, and delectable stories, hath in it all the strains of Poesie,, comprehendeth the universall art of speaking; and to them which can discern and will observe, affordeth notable rules for demeanour, both private and publick. Which noble Gentleman, as he may worthily be called the English Heliodore, so the Ingenious Author of the History of Melintus and Ariana, may as deservedly be called the French Sidney.

5 LACONIA is bounded on the West with Arcadia, on the East and South with the Sea, on the North with Argolis. Called first Lelegia, from the Leleges, by Strabo said to be the first Inhabitants of it, afterwards Oebalia, from Oebalus a King of Lacedaemon; and finally Laconia, of the Lacones, who succeeded the Leleges in the possession hereof on their removall into the Islands of the lesser Asia. •• is by some Writers also called Hecatompolis, from the number of an hundred Cities which it once had in it.

The soil hereof exceeding rich, and the fields very spatious, yet for the most part not well tilled, in regard of the many hils and Mountainets which overthwart it. Well watered with the River Eu∣rotas, and memorable for many fair Bayes and Promontories: of which the principall are the Promon∣tories of Malea, and Taenaria, now called Cabo Malio, and Cabo Matapan: and of the Bayes, that called Golfo di Colochina, the Sinus Laconicus of the ancients; into which the River Eurotas, (now better known by the name of Vasilo Potamo, or the Kingly River) poures his gentle streams. The nature of the people we shall finde in Sparta.

Places of most observation in it, 1 Leuctres sitna••e on the Sea-side, near the Bay of Messeni; of which name were two others in Greece, the one in Arcadia, the other in Achaia, but this last most memo∣rable. 2 Amyclae, so called from Amyelas the third King of Sparta, by whom first founded; renowned afterwards for the birth of Castor and Pollux, the sons of Tyndarus; and of good note for being the foundresse of the Citie of Amyclae in Calabria Superior, at first a Colonie of this. 3 Thulana, nigh to which is the Lake of Lerna, where Hercules slew the Monster Hydra: and not far off Mount Taenarus neer the Pr〈◊〉〈◊〉 Taenaria, in which the Natives shew a Cave, beleeved in former times to be the descent into Hell, out of which the Poets fain that Cerberus was dragged by Hercules. 4 Salassia, where Antig••nus vanquished Cleomenes, the last King of Sparta. 5 Epidaurus (seated on the Bay named Golfo di Napoh) now called Malvasia; a town well built and very well peopled; remarkable for the sweet Wines called Malvesey, or Malmesey, sent from hence into all other parts in great abundance. 6 Sparta, so called from Sparta, the son or brother of Phoroneus the 2. King of Argos, the Founder of it: but afterwards beautified and inlarged by Lacedaemon the second King of this Countrie, it took that name also; promiscuously known by both in the best Authors. One of the Eyes of Greece, and a most famous Commonwealth, but at first governed by Kings, as most of the Greek Cities in anci∣ent times. Tyndarus, the father of Castor and Pollux, was once King hereof, after whose death and the death of the said famous brethren, Menelaus was admitted King of Sparta or Lacedaemon, in right of

Helena his wife, their sister. And though Nicostratus and Magapenthes, sons of Menelaus by another ven∣ter, succeeded after his decease; yet the Spartans soon rejected them and received Orestes the son of Agamemnon to be their King, marrying him to Hermione the daughter of Menelaus and Helena, and con∣sequently the neece of Tyndarus. Tisamenes the son of Orestes and Hermione, succeeded next, in whose time the Heraclidae or posteritie of Hercules returned into Greece, under the conduct of Temenus, Cte∣siphon, and Aristodemus, sons of Aristomachus: whereof the first possessed himselfe by force of Arms of the Citie of Argos, the second of Messene, and the third conquered the Citie and State of Sparta: which dying very shortly after••, he left unto his two sons, Eurysthenes and Procles; the roots of the two Royall families, which jointly and in common governed the affairs of Sparta: first absolutely as Soveraign Prinees, without any controll, afterwards at the direction of the Senate, and finally under the command and check of those popular Officers whom they called the Ephori. But because these Spartan Kings in each severall period, were for the most part men of action, and often mentioned in the Histories of the elder times: I will first make a Catalogue of them, and then subjoin such ob∣servations and remembrances, as I think most pertinent.

The KINGS of SPARTA Of the first Familie.

• A. M.
• 1 Eurotas the first King of Sparta, who gave name to the River Eurotas.
• 2 Lacedaemon brother of Eurotas, from whom the Citie of Sparta was called Lace∣daemon.
• 3 Amyclas son of Lacedaemon, the founder of Amyclae a Laconian Citie.
• 4 Argalus son of Amyclas.
• 5 Cynorta son of Argalus.
• 6 Oebalus sonne of Cynorta, from whom a part of this Country had the name of Oebalia.
• 7 Hippocoon son of Oebalus.
• 2700 8 Tyndarus brother of Hippocoon, in whose life he was King of Oebalia only.
• 9 Castor and Pollux, sons of Tyndarus, famous among the Argonautes.
• 2740 10 Menelaus and Helena his wife the daughter of Tyndarus, whose Rape occasioned the de∣struction of Troy.
• 2770 11 Nicostratus and Megapenthes sons of Menelaus by a former wife.
• 12 Orestes and Hermione his wife, daughter of Helena and Menelaus.
• 13 Tisamenes son of Orestes and Hermione, who being outed of Sparta by the Hera••lidae, reig∣ned in Achaia, and left his Kingdom there, unto his posteritie.

The KINGS of SPARTA Of the race of HERACLIDAE.

1 Aristodemus, the first King of the Race of Hercules; left the Kingdom jointly to his two sons,

A. M.			A. M.
2848	1	Eurysthenes	2848	1	Procles
2890	2	Agis from whom this line were called Agidae.		2	Euripon, from whom this line were called Eurypontidae.
2891	3	Echestratus		3	Prytanis
2926	4	Labetas.		4	Eunomus
2963	5	Dryssus		5	Polydectes
2992	6	Agesilaus	3076	6	Charilaus
3046	7	Archelaus	3140	7	Nicandrus
3096	8	Teleclus	3176	8	Theopompus
3136	9	Alcumenes		9	Archidamus
3173	10	Polydorus		10	Zeuxidamus
	11	Eurycrates		11	Anaxidamus
	12	Anaxandrus		12	Archidamus II.
	13	Eurycrates II.		13	Agasicles
	14	Leonidas		14	Ariston
	15	Anaxandrides		15	Demaratus
	16	Cleomenes	3447	16	Leotychides
	17	Leonidas II.	3478	17	Archidamus

3470	18	Plistarchus	3520	18	Agis
3471	19	Plisionax	3547	19	Agesilaus
3539	20	Pausanias	3588	20	Archidamus IV.
3553	21	Agesipolis	3611	21	Agis II.
3567	22	Cleombrotus		22	Eudamidas
3576	23	Agesipolis II.		23	Archidamus V.
3577	24	Cleomenes II.		24	Eudamidas II.
3611	25	Arius	3700	25	Agis III.
3655	26	Acrotatus		26	Eurydamidas the last King of the line of the Eurypoutidoe, slain by Cleomenes, the last of the other line also.
	27	Arius II.
	28	Leonidas III.
	29	Celombrotus II.
3714	30	Cleomenes III. the last of the line of the Agidoe; who having slain Eurydamidas the son of Agis the 3. substituted his own brother Epiclides in his place. But being himself shortly alter vanquisted by Antigonus of Macedonia, and forced to flie his Country with his wife and children: the Government of the Heraelidae ended after it had continued here for the space of 900 years or thereabouts.

Under these Kings the Government at first was 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, as Plutarch termeth it, sufficiently Monarchicall, if it were not more. Under Eunomus the fourth King of the second house, the people finding the reins of Government let loose, began to mutinie and grow too head-strong. To bridle whom, and to restrain the Kings withall, (should they prove exorbitant) Lycurgus the Protector of Charilaus the sixth King of that house, did ordain the Senate, committing to them the supreme power in matters civill, and leaving to the Kings the ordering of all militarie and sacred businesse. To curb the insolencies of this Senate, who quickly found their own strength, Theopompus the eighth King of that house, with the consent of Polydorus the tenth King of the other, instituted a new Magistracie chosen out of the Common-People, whom they called the Ephori, which grew in fine to such an height of pride and tyrannie, as not only to controll the Senators, but to censure, fine, imprison, depose, and mutually to kill their Kings, as the spirit of sedition moved them. So that the State of Lace∣doemon was at first a Monarchie under Kings; then an Aristocratie under the command of the Senate; next a Democratie under the Ephori; and finally by those popular Officers made so plain a Tyrannie, that Aristotle and Plato, two great Common-wealths-men who died before they had embrued their hands in the blood of their Kings, call it in plain terms 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 & 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, a most absolute ty∣rannie. What think you would these men have called it, had they lived to see Leonidas the 3. depo∣sed, and Agis the third of that name also most barbarously murdered by these popular Vil∣lains.

But being the foundation of this Common-wealth was first laid, and the good Laws and politique Constitutions by which it did so long subsist in great power and splendour, established by the wit and power of Lycurgus, as before was said: we are to know concerning him, that he was the son of Eunomus the fourth King of the second house, slain in a popular tumult by the common people. Who finding by this Essay that the people were become too head-strong for the Kings to govern, unlesse reduced to extreme bondage by their Kings, which he wished not neither: took the advan∣tage of the minoritie of Charilaus to new mould the Government: and what he could not doe by fair means to effect by Arms; forcing this Charilaus, though his Nephew, when he came to age, to flie for sanctuarie to the Temple of Juno. Having ordained what Laws he pleased, and setled such a form of government as himself best fancied: the better to decline the envie of so great a change, he got leave to travail; binding the people by an oath to observe all his laws untill his return: and being gone, commanded at his death, that his ashes should be cast into the Sea, lest being carryed back to Sparta, the people might conceive themselves released from their oath. By means whereof his Laws con∣tinued in force near 700 years, during which time that Common-wealth did flourish in all pro∣sperity: the particulars of which Institutions he that lists to see may finde them specified at large by Photareh in the life of Lycurgus. Suffice it that the Discipline was so sharp and strict, that many went into the wars for no other reason then on an hope to rid themselves from so hard a life: and that Diogenes returning hence to the Citie of Athens, gave out that he returned from men to women, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. And being asked in what part of Greece he had met with the compleatest men; made answer that he could no where meet with men, but that he had found some boyes amongst the Spartans. A Cynicall and rugged answer, but such as carryed a great deal of judgment in it; the Spartans being more stout and resolute in all their actions, and lesse effe∣minate in their lives then the rest of the Grecians. But besides the strictnesse of the discipline under which they lived, there was another thing which made them wish for wars abroad: namely, the little or no power which either the Kings or People had in civil matters and affairs of State, entirely left to the dis∣posing of the Senate and the power of the Ephori. So that the Kings having by the laws the command of their armies, were willing to engage in war upon all occasion; and the common people as desircus to attend them in such employments, as the Kings could wish. Upon these grounds the war is made a trade amongst them; beginning with the Helots a neighbouring people; then with the rest of the Lacenians; afterwards quarrelling the Messenians their old Confederates: all which they seve∣rally

subdued and made subject to them. In the warre which Xerxes made against the City of Athens, their King Leouid as the first, of the elder house, went forth to aid them: slain at the straights of Thermopyloe, courageously fighting for the liberty of Greece: and when it was thought fit to set upon the Persian Fleet, Eurybiades the Spartan Admirall did command in chief. In pursuit of the this war against the Persians, Pausanias and Agesilaus were of most renown: the first in helping the Athe∣nians to drive them out of Greece; the other in making war upon them in their own Dominions. Freed from the Persians they grow jealous of the State of Athens, whom they looked on as their Rivals in point of Soveraignty and glory. Hence the long warre betwixt these Cities called Bellam Peloponnesiacum, managed for the most part in Peloponnesus, from thence transferred into Sicil, and at last ended in the taking of Athens: the Government whereof they changed into an Aristocratie, under 30 Magistrates of their own appointment, commonly called the thirty tyrants. Proud of this fortunate successe their next quarrell was with the Boeotians, the conquered Athenians covertly, and the Persians openly assisting the enemy. Here their prosperity began to leave them. For be∣sides many small defeats, Epaminondas the Theban so discomsited them, at the overthrowes of Leu∣ctres and Maxtinea; that Sparta it selfe was in danger of utter ruine. Not long after happened the Holy warre chiefly undertooke against the Phocians, wherein also they made a party: but this warre being ended by King Philip, they scarce breathed more freedome, than he gave air to. But when Alexanders Captains fought for the Empire of their Master, all these flourishing Republiques were either totally swallowed into, or much defaced by the Kingdome of Macedon. The Lacedoemonians held the chief strongth of a Town to consist in the valour of the people, and therefore would never suffer Sparta to be walled, till the times immediately following the death of Alexander the Great: yet could not those fortifications then defend them from Antigonus Doson King of Macedon, who having vanquished Cleomenes King of Sparta, entred the Town, and was the first man that ever was re∣ceived into it as Conqueror: So much different were the present Spartans from the valour and courage of their ancestours Cleomenes being forced to forsake his countrey, and the race of the Heraclidoe failing in him, they became a prey to Machanidus and Nabis, two wicked Tyrants: from whom they were no sooner freed, but they were made subject (in a manner) to the power of Rome: and in the end the Town so weak and inconsiderable, that it was not able to resist the poorest enemy; now a small Burrough called Misithra. And so I leave them to the thoughts of their former glories, having now nothing dseto boast of, but the fame and memory of their actions in former times.

ARGOLIS, so called from the chief City Argos, is bounded on the South with Laconia, on the West with Corinthia, and Achaia Propria; on the East and North with the Sea. A territorie remarkable for a most excellent breed of Horses, and from thence called Hippium.

Places of most importance in it, 1 Argos, founded by Argus the fourth King of this countrey, and the chief of this Kingdome. Memorable as for other things, so 1 for the death of Pyrrhus King of Epirus, who having forced his entry into it, was here ignobly slaine after all his victories, by the hands of an old woman, throwing a Tyle at him from the top of an house. 2 For the long race of the Kings hereof, from Inachus the cotemporary of our Father Abraham, anno 2003. unto Acrisius their last King. Whose daughter Danae being shut up in a Tower of Brasse, was deflowred by Jupiter, to whom she bare the renowned Perseus, so memorised in antient Poets. But Perseus having by mis∣fortune slain his Grandfather the old King Acrisius, quitted the City of Argos as unlucky to him, and transferred the Kingdome to Mycenae, a City of his own foundation, and so better fancied: by means hereof, the second City of esteem in this little Province. Growing in small time unto so great riches, that it got the name of dites Mycenoe; as appeareth by Horace, in whom the Horses of Argos, and the wealth of Mycene are placed in one verse together;

Aptum dicis equis Argos, ditesque Mycenas.

For horses Argos is of fame, For wealth Mycenoe hath the name.

3 Troezen, situate on the Sinus Argolicus, now called Golfo di Engia, the Royall seat of Pytheus the fa∣ther of Theseus who was born herein: from whence the Town in Ovid hath sometime the name of Pytheia Troezen, and Theseus many times is called Troezenius Heros: as Hercules had the name of Tyrin∣thius Heros, from 4 Tyrinthia, another City of this Province, in which he was nursed. 5 Nemea, where Hercules slew the dreadfull Lyon which annoied this countrey. In honour of which noble Act were instituted in time following the Nemean Games, which continued of great same in Greece for many Ages. The Exercises were running with swift horses, whorlepats, running on foot, quoit∣ing, wrastling, darting, shooting. Some have referred the originall of these Games to one Opheltes a Lacedemonian; and in whose honour they conceive them instituted: and others fetch it higher from the war of Thebes. But this I take to be the more allowable opinion. 6 Epidaurus on the Sea side fa∣mous for the Temple of Aesculapius; and the cure of all sorts of diseases there, so called from Epidau∣rus the sonne of Argus the founder of it. Of the same name, but of a different situation from that be∣fore mentioned in Laconia: this being seated on the Bay called Golfo di Napoli, this on that of Engia. Once called Melissa, and Aenera, at that time an Island; but by an Earthquake laid unto the continent: now called Pigiada. 7 Niuplia, so called of Nauplius King of Euboea, and father of Palamedes, to

whom it antiently belonged. A station then, as now, for shipping, in that regard called Nauplia Navale, now Neapoli, or Neapolis, the richest and best traded in all this tract, giving name unto a large and capacious Bay now called Golso di Napoli, of old Sinus Argolicus; into which the famous River Inachus, having passed through the City of Argos doth disgorge it selfe; so called from Inachus, the Father of 10, and the originall and Progenitor of

The KINGS of ARGOS and MYCENAE.

• A. M.
• 2093 1 Inachus the supposed father of Io, from whom the Grecians are sometimes called by the name of Inachii.
• 2143 2 Phoroneus the son of Inachus and Melissa, from whom the said Io hath the name of Phoronis in the Poet.
• 2223 3 Apis the son of Jupiter and Niobe, the daughter of Phoroneus, who leaving Greece went into Fgypt, where he taught the people tillage, and was there worshipped afterwards in the form of an Oxe.
• 2238 4 Argus the son of Apis, and the founder of Argos, in whose time Agriculture was taken up amongst the Grecians; from him called Argivi.
• 2308 5 Criajus, by some Peirajus the son of Argus.
• 2363 6 Phorbas the sonne of Criajus, in whose time Atlas and Prometheus are said to flourish.
• 2397 7 Triopas the sonne of Phorbas, and the brother of another Pherbas, who planted himselfe in the Isle of Rhodes.
• 2443 8 Crotopus.
• 2464 9 Sthenelus outed of the Kingdom by
• 2475 10 Danaus the brother of Egyptus, by whom driven out of Egypt he was made King of Ar∣gos, by consent of the people: the Father of those many daughters got with child by Hercules. From him the Grecians are called often by the name of Danai.
• 2525 11 Lynceus son of Egyptus the brother of Danaus.
• 2556 12 Abas the son of Lynceus and Hypermnestra the daughter of Danaus.
• 2566 13 Pretus the son of Abas.
• 2606 14 Acrisius the brother of Pretus and the father of Danae, foretold by Oracle that hee should be slaine by a son of that daughter, shut her up in a brazen tower. But Ju∣piter having corrupted the Guards with Go'd, got the Ladies consent, by whom he had Perseus so renowned amongst the Poets and Historians of those elder times.
• 2637 15 Perseus the son of Jupiter and Danae exposed by his Grandfather to the Seas, miracu∣lously preserved, and grown into great fame by his brave exploits; restored Acri∣sius to his throne from which he had been deposed by his brother Pricus. But after having ignorantly and unfortunately slain the said Acrisius, he removed his seat un∣to Mycene; where he reigned together with his son Sthenelus.
• 1645 16 Eurystheus the son of Sthenelus, much spoken of for the difficult taskes which at the insti∣gation of Juno he imposed on Hercules, his foster-child, and the supposed son of Am∣phytryon his Cousen German.
• 2688 17 Atreuus and Thyestes, sons of Pelops, on the failing of the line of Perseus, succeeded in Argos and Mycenae: infamous for their murders and adultery; Thyestes abusing the bed of Atreus, and Atreus seasting him with the body of his own son; whence 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 in the Proverb.
• 2753 18 Agamemnon the son of Atreus, Commander of the Greeks at the war of Troy, in which action there ingaged 69 Kings of the Grecians, wasted over with a Navy of 1224 ships, killed at his coming home by Aegisthus, his Cousen German.
• 2768 19 Aegishus the son of Thyestes, having defiled Clitemnestra the wife of Agamemnon in the time of his absence, by her procurement murdered him at his coming home; and usurped the Kingdome.
• 2775 20 Orestes son of Agamemnon revenged his fathers death on Aegisthus and Clitemnestra, his owne Mother. After which falling mad, and restored againe unto his wits, hee married Hermione daughter of Menelaus and Helena, by whom he had the kingdome of Sparta also.
• 2803 21 Penthilus the son of Orestes, and the last King of this line, outed of his estate by the Dores and Heraclide; who made themselves Masters of all Peloponnesus, which they possessed untill the conquest of it by the Macodonians.

7 CORINTHIA is a little Region, lying towards the Isthmus or neck of land, which join∣eth Pelopennesus to the rest of Greece; betwixt Argolis and Achaia Propria. It containeth onely the ter∣ritory of the City of Corinth, not large, nor very fruitfull of those commodities which the rest of this Peninsula doth abound withall: as being mountainous and hilly, and by reason of the necernesse of the Sea, full of craggy rocks. The chief and indeed the onely Cities of note in it, 1 Genchrea, the

navall Road or station of ships for Corinth, mentioned Act. 19. 18. and Rom. 16. 1. in both Texts reckoned a distinct town from Corinth, as indeed it was. 2 Corinth it selfe, is commodiously situate for the command of all Greece, (had not the Inhabitants been more given to Merchandise then unto the warres) as being seated on the bottom of the neck or Isthmus, the Jonian Sea upon the West, and the Aegean on the West, washing the wals thereof, and giving it on each side a capacious Haven, in which regard called by Horace bimaris Corinthus. In compasse about eleven miles, for strength impregnable, for command as powerfull; mastering both Seas on which it stood, and cutting off all passage from one halfe of Greece to the other: to which last end the Castle called Acrocorin-thus, looking into both Seas, served exceeding fitly, and was therefore called one of the Fetters of Greece. The City, rich, well traded, and neatly built, most houses beautified with handsome pil∣lars from thence called Corinthian: more memorable for the wealth of the people, and the conveni∣ency of the situation, then for any notable exploits performed by them, or any great influence which they had on the States of Greece. But in regard of the wealth, greatnesse, and situation, ac∣counted by the Romans one of the three Cities which they held capable of the Empire; Carthage and Capua being the other two. In this City lived the famous or infamous whore, Thais, who exacted 10000 Drachmas for a single nights lodging: which made Demostbenes cry out, Non emam tanti poeni∣tore, and occasioned the old By-word,

Non cuivis homini contingit adire Corinthum,

'Tis not for every mans availe, Unto Corinth for to sayle.

Neer hereunto stood the Acrocorinthian mountaines, at the foot whereof the City, and on the top whereof the Castle called hence Acrocorinthus were seated; out of which flowed the famous foun∣tane named Pyrene, of old consecrated to the Muses; by Persius called Fons Caballinus, because faigned by the antient Poets to have been made by the horse Pegasus, dashing his foot against the rock. And on the other side hereof, in the very Isthmus were celebrated yearly the Isthmian games, ordained by Ineseus in the honour of Neptune, in imitation of the Olympick devised by Hercules in honour of Jupiter. The exercises much the same, and the reward no other then a Garland of Oaken bougbes; yet drawing yearly a great report of people to them: partly to exercise themselves, and behold the spcits, and partly to sacrifice to Neptune, who had hard by a famous Temple.

As for the fortunes of this City, it was at first called Ephyra, at that time a small and obscure place; but beautified and repaired by Corinthus the son of Pelops, tooke the name of Corinth, Governed by him and his posteritie till the coming of the Heraclidae into Peloponnesus: at what time one Aletes of the race of Hercules, possessed himself hereof, with the name of King, A. M. 2849. Twelve Princes of his line enjoyed it for the space of 220 yeares and upwards: when the house say∣ling in the person of Automanes, they were governed by temporary officers, like the Archontes of Athens. Continuing under this Government 124 years, the City was seised on by one Cypselus, A. M. 3294. who left it to his sonne Periander, one of the seven wisemen of Greece; counted a Tyrant in those times for no other reason, then that he had suppressed the popular government; after whose death, an. 3364. the City did recover its former liberty. In the bustles betwixt Athens aud Lacedaemon, and other the estates of Greece, for the superiority, it did little meddle: the aim of this people being wealth, not honour: not interessed in any action of renown in all those times; but in the sending of Timoleon to the aid of the Syracusans, against the Tyrant Diomysius, who did lord it over them. Subdued to∣gether with the rest by the Kings of Macedon; and with the rest restored to liberty by the power of Rome. Under whom growing still more rich, and withall more insolent, they abused certain Ro∣man Ambassadours. But irasci populo Romano nemo sapienter potest, as is said in Livie: which the Co∣rinthians found too true; the City being besieged, sacked, and burnt unto the ground by Lucius Mummius, a Roman Consul, an. V. C. 607. In the burning whereof there were consumed so many goodly Statuas of gold, silver, brasse, and other metals, that being melted into a Lump, they made up by that fatal chance, the so much estimated metal, called Aes Corinthium, more highly prized in Rome then Gold or Silver. Repaired again, it was of great esteem in the time of the Emperours, converted by S. Paul to the Christian Faith; and having flourished a long time in pride and pleasures, decayed by little and little, till it came to nothing, and is now a small Burrough called Crato.

Having thus spoken of the severall Estates of Peloponnesus, it resteth that we speak somewhat of the estate of the whole, varied according to the fortunes of those particulars, which had most influence on the same. The affaires hereof a long while swayed by the Kings of Sicyon, whence it had the name of Sicyonia, restrained afterwards to the territories of that City onely. But when the Kings of Argos came in place and power, it depended much upon their pleasures; from Apis the third king whereof (if not rather from Apis the fourth King of Sicyon) in the opinion of some Writers, it was named Apia. But Pelops the son of Tantalus King of Phrygia coming into Greece, and marrying Hippo∣damia daughter of Oenomaus King of Elis, became the most powerfull Prince of all this Peninsula, taking from him the name of Peloponnesus. The Kingdome of Mycene growing into power and credit, had the next turn in swaying the affaires hereof for a certain season; as after that the Dores, and the He∣raclide, possessed at once of Argos, Sporta, Corinth, and Messene. The Spartans getting the prehemlnence over all the rest, were the next who governed the affaires of it, and they held it long; having first

conquered Laconia, and subverted the estate of Messene; by means whereof, and by their fortunate suc∣cesse against the Persians, they became almost absolute in their commands, without any Competitor. But their power being broken by Pelopidas and Epaminondas in the Thehan war, the petit States hereof began to take heart again; & stand upon their own legs, as they did a while, till the Kings of Macedon succeed∣ing Alexander the Great, brought them once more under, and made them fellow-servants with their Spartan Masters. In the confusions which ensued in Macedon, amongst the Competitors for that King∣dome, Patras and Dime, two Cities of Achaia Propria, first united themselves in a strong league of a∣mity, at such time as Pyrrbus first went into Italy: into which confederacie the Cities of Tritaea and Pherae shortly after came, and not long after that, Aegira and the rest of Achaia Propria: their affaires first governed by two Praetors, with advice of the Senate, as afterwards by one alone with the like advice, of which Marcus Carinensis was the first, and Aratus of Sicyonia the second. The ground thus laid, and the reputation of this new Commonwealth increasing by the vertue of Aratus, the Epidaurians, Troe∣zenians, Argives, and Megarians became members of it: maintaining gallantly the liberties of Peloton∣nesus; till finally mastered by the Romans: the division of whose Empire it fell with all the rest of Greece, to the Constantinopolitans: and in the declining of their fortunes, when the Latines got possession of the Imperiall City, most of the Sea-coasts of it were alotted to the State of Venice: the inland parts formerly parcelled out amongst many Princes whom they called Despots, continuing as before they were; till all together made a prey to the Turkish Tyrants, Mahomet the Great, and Bajazet the second, by whom wholly conquered. For howsoever Thomas and Demetrius, Brethren of that unfortunate Prince Constantinus Palaologus, had fled hither at the taking of Constantinople; and were received and obeyed by those Petit Princes: yet being unable to hold out against the Conquerour, they became his tributaries. But falling out amongst themselves, and neglecting then to send in the tribute agreed upon, gave Mahomet the Great occasion to invade the Countrey, and under colour of aiding one bro∣ther against the other, to destroy them both, as he did accordingly: Demetrius being carryed Prisoner to Constantinople, and Thomas forced to abandon Pelopennesus, and flee to Italie, anno 3457. Such towns hereof as belonged unto the State of Venice followed the same fortune also in the time of Bajazet; by whom all taken at the last, and the whole Countrie brought under his obedience, anno 1500 or thereabouts. Governed ever since that time by a Turkish Zanziack, under the Beglerbeg of Greece, who hath his residence at Macedon, a Regiment of 1000 Horse to secure the Countrie, and 700000 Aspers (that is to say, 14000 Crowns) a year for his entertainment.

2 ACHAIA.

ACHAIA is bounded on the East with the Aegean Sea, on the West with Epirus; on the North with Thessalie, and on the South with Peloponnesus, and the Seas thereof. Called antiently Hellas from Helles the sonne of Deucalion: but whence it had the name of Achaia is not yet agreed on, though sure I am, that from hence the Inhabitants of it were called Achivi, (a name communicated after∣wards to all the Grecians) to difference them from the Achoei of Achaia Propria.

The countrey famous in the Authours of elder times more for the gallantry of the men, then any great goodnesse of their countrey: yet that sufficiently memorable for the hill Hymettus, swarm∣ing with Bees, plentifull of the sweetest honey; and rich in mines of excellent marble; as also for the River Cephisus, which runneth almost through the whole length hereof; divided into two main streams, of which the one is called Asopus, the other retaineth its first name. Upon the banks hereof stood the Temple of Themis, to which Deucalion did repair to be directed in the restauration of mankinde, as the Poets fable.

It was divided antiently into these seven parts, viz. 1 Attica, 2 Megaris, 3 Boeotia, 4 Phocis, 5 Lo∣cris, 6 Doris, and 7 Aetolia. A division now as much disused as the name of Achaia, changed by the Turkes into that of Levadia; of which more anon.

1 ATTICA hath on the West Megaris, and some part of Boeotia; on all other parts compassed with the Sea: so called from Athens the chief City. The soile for the most part very barren and craggy, yet by the armes and industry of the people made both rich, and famous; insomuch as the yearly revenues of the State of Athens were 1200 Talents. The money currant in this countrey was com∣monly stamped with an Oxe, whence came the By-word Bos in lingua, applyed to such Lawyers as were bribed to say nothing in their Clients cause: Not much unlike to which was the Proverb rising from the coin of Aegina (an Isle adjoining) stamped with the figure of a Snail, viz. Virtutem & sapientiam vincunt Testudines.

Places of most observation in it, 1 Philae, a strong Fortresse on the Borders of Boeotia, surprized by Thrasibulus and others of the banished Athenians, during the Government of the 30 Tyrants: the taking whereof was the first step towards their own and their countries libertie; which soone after followed. 2 Eleusis, on the borders of Megaris; almost impregnably fortified by the 30 Tyrants when they had the command of Athens, by whom designed for their retreat in all times of danger. But having withdrawn hither on the taking of Philae and Piraeus, by the Thrasybulians, they found strong wals a weak defence for so much wickednesse; being trained out as to a parlie, and so de∣prived of the place and their power together. It was first built by one Eleusius, who entertained Ceres as she was in quest of her daughter Proserpine: who to reward him taught him the use of Agri∣culture;

and he in honour of her built here a Temple. Hence Ceres in the Poets is called Eleusina, and her sacrifices sacra Eleusinia; and sometimes the City also, Cerealis Eleusis, so called by Ovid, in the 7 book of the Metamerphesis. 3 Rhamnus, upon the River Asous, famous for the Temple of Amphiaraus, and the Statua of the Goddesse Nemesis, hence called Rhamnusia in the Poets: this Nemesis or Rhamnu∣sia, being the Goddesse of indignation, punishing those who made themselves unworthy of their present fortunes. 4 Trichoritum, of more Antiquity, then fame. 5 Marathon, on the southside of the River Asopus, opposite to Rhamnus; of great note for the discomfiture given by Miltiades the Athenian to the numerous Army of Darius, consisting of 200000 Foot, and 10000 Horse: the Emulation of which noble victory startled such brave resolves in the brest of Themistocles. As memorable in the Poets of those elder times for the Marathonian Bull there slain by Theseus. 6 Pyroeus, the Port-Town to Athens, and the ordinary Station for their shipping; the Haven hereof being capable of 400 saile: distant from the City about two miles, but joined unto it by two long wals reaching from the one to the other, for securing the conveyance of their Merchandise to and from the Sea. The Port it self im∣pregnably fortified by the advice of Themistocles. But as these long walls were broken down by the command of the Spartans, when the City of Athens was taken by them: so were the fortifications of Pyraeus it self demolished by the command of Sylla, in his war against Mithridates King of Pontus, the better to keep under the Athenians. 7 Panormus, a Seat-Town also, and of very good trade, but not of such importance as the other was. 8 ATHENS, one of the eyes of Greece, and the chiefe of Attica, situate from the Sea two miles, as before was said: the Haven of Pyroeus serving it with all commodities, which came from other parts by shipping. First built by Cecreps the first King of it, by whom called Cecropia, A. M. 2409. repaired afterwards by Theseus, and furnished with good Lawes by Solon; and finally thus named from Minerva (whom the Greekes call Athene) to whom then dedicated, and in whose honour there were yearly kept some solemn Games called Panathencia. A City heretofore adorned with all those excellencies of strength and beauty, which Art or cost could adde unto it. Renowned, as for many things, so for three especially. 1 For the inviolable faith of the Citizens in all their Leagues, and most firm affection to their friends: so that Fides Attica grew in the end unto an Adage. 2 For the famous scholars which here taught and flourished: this being so happy a Nursery of the choicest wits, and so fitly seated for the Muses, that the very Natives be∣ing in other countries could sensibly perceive some want of that naturall vigour, which at home was resiant in their spirits. It a ut corpora istius gent is separata sent in alias Regiones, ingenia vero solis A the∣niensium muris clausa esse existimes, as Velleius hath it. Yea and to say the truth, it was a most famous University, from whose great Cistern, the Conduit-pipes of learning were dispersed over all the World. Yet did not learning so effeminate or soften the hearts of the People, but that 3 this one City yeelded more famous Captaines, then any in the World besides, not excepting Rome, Miltiades, Ari∣stides, Themistocles, Cimon, Pericles, Alcibiades, Phocion, and divers others of great name. Who though they were the men that both defended and enlarged this Common-wealth: yet were the people so ungratefull to them, or they so unfortunate in the end, that they either dyed abroad in banishment, or by some violent death at home. Themistocles the Champion of Greece, died an exile in Persia, Pho∣cion was slaine by the people; Demosthenes made himself away by poison; Pericles many times indan∣gered; Theseus their Founder first deposed, and then despitefully imprisoned: Aristides, Alcihiades, Ni∣cius, &c. banished for ten years by Ostracism: A form of punishment so called, because the name of the partie banished was writ on an Oyster-shell, and onely used toward such, who either began to grow too popular, or potent among the men of service. Which device, allowable in a Democratie, where the overmuch powerablenesse of one might hazard the liberty of all, was exercised in spight oftner, then desert. A Countrey-fellow meeting by chance with Aristides, desired him to write Aristides in his shell; and being asked, whether the man whose banishment he desired, had ever wronged him, replyed, No, he was onely sorry to heare folke call him a good man. We finde the like unfortunate end to most of the Romans, so redoubted in warre. Coriolanus was exiled, Camillus confined to Ardea, Scipio mur∣dered, with divers others: onely because their virtue had lifted them above the pitch of ordinary men. Ventidius was disgraced by Antony, Agricola poysoned, with the privity of Domitian; Corbulo, murdered by the command of Nero: all able men, yet living in an age, wherein it was not lawfull to be valiant. In later times it so hapned to Gonsalvo the Great Captain, who having conquered the king∣dome of Naples, driven the French beyond the mountains, and brought all the Italian Potentates to stand at the Spaniards devotion; was by his Master called home, where hee lived obscurely, though honoured after his decease with a solemne Funerall. Worse fared the Guise, and Biron in France; worse Essex and Dudley of Northumberland with us in England. Neither will I omit William Duke of Suffolk, who having served 34 yeares in our warres with France, and for 17 yeares together never coming home, at his return was quarrelled and basely murdered. It were almost an impiety to be silent of Joab, the bravest souldier and most fortunate Leader that ever fought the Lords battells: and yet he died at the hornes of the Altar. Whether it be that such men be born under an unhappy Planet; or that Courtiers, and such as have best opportunity to indeere men of warre unto their Soveraignes, know not the way of commending their great deserts; or that Envy the common Foe to vertue, be an hinderance to it; I am not able to determine. And yet it may be that Princes naturally are distrustfull of men of Action; and are not willing to make them greater, whose name is great enough already. And it may be the fault is in the souldiers themselves by an unsea∣sonable overvaluing of their own performances, as if the Prince or State were not able to reward or prize them: which was the cause of the death of Silius, in the time of Tiberiue, concerning which

Tacitus giveth us this good note, that over-merit in great Subjects is exceeding dangerous, and be∣gets hate in stead of favours. Eeneficia eo usque loet a sunt dum videntur exolvi posse; Vbi multum antever∣terunt, pro gratia edium redditur, saith that wise Historian.

But to look back againe on Athens, it was first built by Cecrops, the first King thereof; governed by him and his posterity with no lower title, for 400 yeares, as is apparent by this following Cata∣logue of

The KINGS of ATHENS.

• A. M.
• 2394 1 Cecrops, who first made Jupiter a God, and ordained sacrifices to be offered to him, as Pausanias writeth.
• 2444 2 Cranaus, outed of his Kingdome by
• 2453 3 Amphictyon the son of Deucalion, and Uncle to that Amphictyon, who first instituted the su∣preme Court of the Amphictyones, or Common-Councell of all Greece.
• 2463 4 Fricthonius the son of Vulcan.
• 2513 5 Pandion the Father of Progne and Philomela, so famous in the old Poets, of whom more hereafter.
• 2553 6 Eri••hthous whose daughter Orithya was ravished by Boreas King of Thrace.
• 2603 7 Cecrops Il. brother of Erichtheus.
• 2643 8 Pandion Il. son of Erichtheus.
• 2668 9 Aegeus son of Pandion the second, of whom the Aegean sea took name.
• 2706 10 Theseus the son of Aegeus and Companion of Hercules, vanquished the Minotaure in Crete, collected the people of Attica into a body, and incorporated them into the City of Athens, which he had beautified and enlarged.
• 2746 11 Mnestheus the son of Peteus Grandchild of Erichtheus, served with the other Greeke Princes at the war of Troy.
• 2769 12 Demophoon the son of Theseus, restored unto his Fathers throne on the death of Mae∣stheus.
• 2802 13 Oxyntes son or brother of Demophoon.
• 2814 14 Aphydas son of Oxyntes slaine by his brother.
• 2815 15 Thymades the last of the line of Erichtheus.
• 2823 16 Melanthius of Messene driven out of his own Kingdome by the Heraclide, obtained that of Athens.
• 2860 17 Codrus the son of Melanthius, the last King of Athens; who in the warres against the Pe∣lopennesians having Intelligence by an Oracle, that his Enemies should have the vi∣ctory, if they did not kill the Athenian King; attired himselfe like a common Begger, entred the Pelopenn••sian Camp, and there played such prancks, that at the last they were fain to kill him. Which when the Enemy understood, they thought themselves by this meanes deprived of all hopes of successe, and so broke up their Army, and departed homewards. For this the people of Athens did so honour his memory, that they thought no man worthy to succeed, as King; and therefore com∣mitted the managing of the Estate to Governours for term of life, whom they called Archontes: the first Archon being Medon the son of Codrus; not differing from the former Kings in point of power, but only in the manner of their admission: the former kings claiming the government by succession in right of bloud; and these Archontes holding by election onely: whose names here follow in this list of

The perpetuall ARCHONTES in the STATE of ATHENS.

• A. M.
• 2882 1 Medon the son of Codrus.
• 2902 2 Acastus the son of Medon.
• 2938 3 Archippus the son of Acasius.
• 2957 4 Thersippus the son of Archippus.
• 2998 5 Pherbas the son of Thersippus.
• 3029 6 Megacles the son of Phorbas.
• 3059 7 Diogenetus the son of Megacles.
• 3087 8 Phereclus the son of Diogenetus.
• 3106 9 Aritthon the son of Phereclus.
• 3126 10 Thespieus, in whose time began the Kingdom of Macedon.
• 3153 11 Agamestor.
• 3173 12 Aeschilus the son of Agamestor.

After whose death, an. mun. 3195. the Athenians weary of these Governous for term of life, as being lesse ob∣noxious to the check and censure of the people, chose themselves Officers or Archontes for ten years onely; at the end of which time they were to yeeld up their places, and make roome for others. But being a people greedy of Novelties, and desirous of change, they had onely seven of those De∣cenniall Archontes: their Officers from that time forwards being chosen annually: which Officers be∣ing nine in number, we may call most properly the Provost, the Chief Bishop, the Marshall, and the six Chief Justices, all chosen out of the Nobility: And so it held for the space of 170 yeares, till the time of Solon: who was the first which put the Supreme authority into the hands of the People; and gave the first hint unto that Democratie: which afterwards prevailed in Athens, by the helpe

of Pericles, who being one of the great Councell of the Areopagites, took from them a great part of their power in deciding Controversies and suites in Law, putting them over to the judgement of the common people. A Government so dearly loved by the Athenians, that in all the Cities which they conquered or restored to liberty, or wonne to their partie from the Spartans, they caused it to be admitted: as on the other side the Spartans introduced and confirmed the Aristocratie (their own loved Government) in all the places where they prospered. As for the Court of the Areepagites of much fame in Athens, it ••consisted from the first beginning 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 of such as had born some of the nine chief Offices; who being once admitted, held for term of life. First instituted in the time of Demophoon, the son of Theseus, and called by the name of Areopegites, either for that they held their Court in the street of Mars, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 mentioned, Act. 17. 22. or because Mars being accused for a Murder, did first plead before them. A Court which held in estimation under all these changes, and so continued till the time of the Roman Empire.

But to return againe to the story of Athens, in or about the later end of the li••e of Solon, Pisistra∣as altered the Free State and made himselfe the absolute Master of the City: but he once dead, the People regained their libertie, driving thence Hippias the sonne of Pisistratus; who hereupon fled for accour to Darius the Persian Monarch, occasioning by that meanes the first coming of the Persians into Greece. What successe the Persians had in Greece, these Histories of the times aboundantly inform us: Da••tus being vanquished by Miltiades, at Marathen; and Xerxes by Themistocles, at Salamis; yet did not Athens scape ••o cleare, but that it was taken by Xerxes, though indeed first abandoned, and voluntarily dismantled by the Athenians. When the Persians were retired homewards, the people of 〈◊〉〈◊〉 reedified their towne, and strongly fortified it with high and defensible wals: which done, they put their Fleet to Sea, and spoiled the coasts of Persia in all quarters; inriching their City with the spoiles, and enlarging their power and Dominion by the addition of many Islands and Sea townes. Hereby they grew unto that wealth and potency, that they were suspected by their weaker neighbours, and envied by their stronger, the Lacedoemonians especially: who fearing to lose their antient priority over Greece, but pretending the surprisall of Potidea a City of Thrace from the Corinthians, and some hard measure, by them shewed upon the Megarenses; made warre upon them. In the beginning of this warre, the Athenians not onely resisted the whole power of all Greece, confederate against them; but so exceedingly prospered, that the Spartans, sued for peace, and could not get it. But the scales of fortune turned. For after they had held out 28 yeares they were compelled to pluck down the Walls of their City, and submit themselves to the will and pleasure of the Spartans, now by the puissance and good fortune of Lysander, become their Masters: by whom the Government was changed, and an Aristocratie, (or rather Oligarchie) established un∣der 30 Magistrates, known commonly by the name of the 30 Tyrants; expelled not long after by the valour of Thrasibulus, and his Associates, as hath been touched upon before. Not long after the end of this warre, which the Historians call Bellum Peloponnesiacum, the Persians seeing how the Spartans, not having now the State of Athens to oppose them, began to work upon their Empire: furnished Conona Noble Athenian Gentleman with a Navy so well provided, that they overcame the Lacedemonians in a sight at Sea; and thereby put his Countrey-men into so good heart, that they once more reedified and repaired their Walls. Which work they had no sooner ended, but they made a partie in the warre called Bellum Sacrum; composed at the last by Ihilip of Macedon: who brought not onely the Thebans whom he came to aid, but the Athenians, Spartans, and the rest of the adverse partie under his command. A servitude from which they were never freed, till as well Macedon, as the rest became fellow-servants unto Rome. But though this brave City had then lost her power in point of Armes, yet she still kept her credit, as an University in point of Arts, Ori∣gen, Chrysostom, Basil, and Gregory Nyssen, men of renown and eminence in the Primitive times, are said to have studied at Athens: the like affirmed of Pope Joane, if the Tale be true, for the middle ages. And so it held as I conjecture, though not so eminently as before, till the year 1440. when taken by Mahomet the Great, who wondred much (as my Authour telleth) at the extreme beauty of the Castle, and the strength of the walls, not having lost in so long time, their former excellen∣cies. Since that it sensibly decayed, and is now an ordinary Burrough (by the Turkes called Selines) but still preserved the Reputation of an Episcopall See, the Bishop of it holding up the title of Athe∣••••sis.

2 MEGARIS is bounded on the East with Attica; on the West with the Bay of Corinth, on the North with Boeotia, and on the South with the Isthmus, and the Golf of Engia. So called from Me∣garis, the chief City.

This the least Province of all Greece, and not very fruitfull; the Countrey for the most part being hard and rocky. Not beautified with many Cities; the principall of those which were 1 Pega, or Pagoei, situate on the Bay of Corinth, and spoken of both by Pliny and Ptolemie; but not other∣wise memorable. 2 Megaris (now Megra) first built by Megareus the sonne of Apollo; and from him thus named. Remarkable in former times for a Sect of Philosophers, called from hence Secta Megarica, founded by one Euclide a Disciple of Socrates; of whom see Laertius. More memorable in the Poets for Nisus, once the King of this little Territorie: on whose head there is said to have grown a Purple Haire, on which the preservation of his life and Kingdome did depend. Which Jewell his daughter Scylla is said to have delivered unto King Minos her Fathers Enemy; on whom then besieging this City, upon the sight of him from an high Turret, shee became inamoured. But he rejecting her, and her Present both, after the taking of the City returned into Crete: which

the unhappy woman seeing, threw her self after him into the Sea, and was turned into the Bird cal∣led ••iris. I leave the moralizing of the Fable unto the Mythologists: observing only by the way, the antiquity of that politick practise, to love the treason and hate the Traitour. But the glories of this Citie did not ••nd with Nisus. For shaking off the Cretan yoke it became sui juris once again; and being conveniently seated on the very Isthmus, amounted to that height of prosperity that they con∣tended with the Athenians for the Island of Salamis▪ And in this war they so crushed the power and spi∣rit of Athens▪ by one fatall overthrow, that the Athenians to prevent all the like dysasters, did or∣dain by Law, that whosoever mentioned the recovery of Salamis, was to lose his life: so that Solon was compelled to faign himself frantick, the better to propound the enterprise. In which, although the State of Athens got the Isle of Salamis: yet did the Megarenses continue a Free-people, till brought under (with the rest) by the Macedonians, and with them made subject unto Rome.

3 BOEOTIA is bounded on the South with Megaris, and the Bay of Corinth; on the North with the River Cephisus; on the East with Attica, and a branch of the Aegean Sea; and on the West with Ph••••is. Thus named from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, which in Greek signifieth an Oxe: because when Cadmus weary of seeking his sister Europa (whom Jupiter had stollen out of Phoenicia) came to the Oracle at Delphos; he was commanded to follow the first Oxe he saw, and where the Oxe did rest it self, there to build a Citie.

In the Countrie nothing singular but an ancient custome of burning before the door of an house in which a new-married wife was designed to dwel, the Ax••e-tree of the Coach which brought her thi∣ther: giving her by that Ceremonie to understand (as Plutarch telleth us in his Morals) that she must restrain her self from gadding abroad; and that being now joined unto an husband, she must frame herself to live and abide with him, without hope of departure. In this Country also are the Straits of the Mountain Oeta, from the neighbouring Bathes, called Thermopylae, not above 25 foot in breadth: which ••n the war that Xerxes made against the Greeks, were valiantly defended by Leonidas King of Sparta, with no more then 300 of his men: who having valiantly resisted that Armie which in its passage out of Persia had drank Rivers drie, and slain at least 30000 of them, dyed every man upon the place. To hide the greatnesse of which losse, lest it should terrifie the rest of his Armie which were coming on, Xerxes commandedd all the slain men to be buried in severall pits, except a thou∣sand, as it no more then they had been lost in that passage.

Places of most observation in it: 1 Thespias, on a River of the same name, at the fall whereof in∣to the Bay it is pleasantly seated: shadowed on the North with a Branch of the Mountain Helicon; and consecrated as that was, unto the Muses, hence called Thespiades in the Poets. 2 Platea, nigh to which Mardonius, Generall to the Persians, was overcome by the Greeks, with the losse of Mardonius himself and 160000 men on the Persian side; and on the other no more then 31 Spartans, 16 Arcadians, 52 Athenians, and about 600 of the Megarenses. In memorie of which brave exploit, and to preserve the names and honour of those Worthies who there laid down their lives for the liberty of Greece, there was a festivall kept annually by the Plateans in the month of September, with solemn Sacrifices, and a kinde of divine acknowledgment unto the deceased, continued from the time of Aristides the Athenian who first ordained them, to the dayes of Plutarch, who records it: but how long after I am not able to say. In this great fight the Commander in chief was a noble Spartan, called Pausanias, who afterwards having a design to make himself Soveraign of all Greece, and being discovered in the practise, fled for sanctuarie to the Temple of Pallas. From whence because it was counted sacriledge to constrain him by violence, it was unanimously resolved to wall up the entrances, his own Mother laying the first stone. It is recorded that before the fighting of this battell, the Athenians had been told by the Oracle that they should be Conquerors if they fought upon their own ground: where∣upon the Plateans within whose territories the Persians had prepared to fight, bestowed that field on the State of Athens. In requitall of which noble act, Alexander the Great re-edified and enlarged their Citie, having been first burnt and sacked by the Persians, and after levelled with the ground by the Lacedemonians, because confederate with Athens in the war against them. 3 Leuctra, remarkable for the great overthrow which the Thebans under the conduct of Epaminondas, gave unto the Spartans, and their King Cleombrotus, there slain: by which victory they did not only preserve their own liberty, but brought their enemies to that fall of courage and reputation, that they could never rise again: the divine vengeance overtaking them in that very place, where some of their Nation had deflowred the daughters of Schedasus who had given them courteous entertainment. For which, when no reparation could be had from the State of Sparta, the unfortunate Damosels flew themselves to avoid the infamie of consenting to their own dishonour, and were buried in those very fields where this battell was fought. 4 Asera, the birth-place of Hesiod, a man (according to Paterculus) elegantis ingenii, & carminum dulcedine memorabilis: though it hath pleased that proud Critick Julius Scaliger, intending to deifie Virgil, to prefer the worst verse in the Georgicks of the one, before the whole works of the other. 5 Lebadia, near the River Cephisus, the Inhabitants whereof were counted the most superstitious of all the Grecians: memorable for the Den or Cave of Trophonia, and the Oracle there given by Jupiter, hence called Trophonius. Into which Cave none were permitted to enter and receive the Oracle but after many ointings, washings, and the like superstitious prepara∣tions: too long and many to be specified in this place and time. A town which still preserves so much of its ancient estimation, that from hence (as I conjecture) the whole Country of Achaia hath the name of Levadia, by which the Turks call it at this present. 6 Cherona, or Coronea, the birth∣place

of Plutarch. Near unto which was fought that memorable battell betwixt L. Sylla and the Ro∣mans, against Archelaus one of the Lieutenants of Mithridates King of Pontus, leading an armie of 120000 souldiers, of which 10000 only escaped with life, the Romans losing but 14. 7 Orchome∣n••n, no lesse memorable for another victorie obtained by the same L. Sylla, against Dorilaus another of that Kings Commanders, having an armie of 80000 men, of which 20000 lost their lives that day. After which victories, when Sylla might easily have destroyed that King, he suddenly patched a peace up with him, that he might hasten unto Rome, where Marius and Cinna had trodden his faction under foot; preferring by that act the pursuit of his own private quarrels before that of his Coun∣trie; endangered more by Mithridates after his return, then it had been formerly. 8 Aulis, a Port town on the shores of the Aegean Sea, where the Grecians took shipping when they went to the war of Troy; here making Oath never to give over the enterprize untill they had destroyed that Citie. Concerning which, thus she in Virgil:

Non ego cum Danais Trojanam excindere Gentem Aulide juravi.

That is to say:

I took no oath at Aulis to destroy, As did the Greeks, the Town and State of Troy.

But the chief Citie of this Country, and such as had a speciall influence over all the rest, was the Citie of Thebes, situate on the banks of the River Cephisus, where built by Cadmus the Phoenician after all his wandrings. Famous in old times for the wars between Eteocles and Polynices, the sons of the unfortunate Prince Oedipus, and of his Mother and wife Jocasta. The historie of which war is the most ancient piece of storie, that we finde of all Greece; the former times and writings containing nothing but fables, little favouring of humanity, and lesse of truth; as of men changed into Monsters, the adulteries of the Gods, and the like. In this town lived Pelopidas and Epaminondus, who so cru∣shed the Lacedemonians at the battell of Leuctra and Mantinea: that they could never after re-obtain their former puissance. This Common-wealth long flourished, and at last being overburthened in the Phocian war, was glad to submit it self to the protection of the Macedonians, under the leading of King Philip: who by this means first got footing in Greece, into which afterwards he thrust his whole bo∣dy. Upon the death of Philip, Thebes revolted from the Macedons; but Alexander his successour quick∣ly recovered it: and to dishearten the Greeks in the like attempts, he razed the Citie, selling all the inhabitants of age and strength; only Pindarus house he commanded to be left standing, in honour of that learned Poet. At this sack of the town, one of the Macedon souldiers entred the house of a principall woman, named Timoclea, ravished her, and rifled her coffers; but still demanding more treasure she shewed him a deep Well, saying, that there all her money was hidden. The credulous villain stooping down to behold his prey, she tumbled into the Well and over-whelmed with stones; for which noble act, the generous Prince not only dismissed her unhurt, but most highly commended her. It was after re-edified by Cassander, and followed for the most part, as the rest of the Boetians did, the fortunes of Macedon. Reduced at this time to the State of an ordinarie Burrough, and called Scibes by the Turks.

4 PHOCIS is bounded on the East with Baeotia, on the West with Doris and Looris, on the North with the River Cephisus, and on the South with the Bay of Corinth. A Country somewhat swelled with Mountains, but those of eminent note in the elder times. The chief whereof 1 Helicon, 2 Citheron; both consecrated to the Muses, and both contending with Parnassus for height and bignesse. 3 Parnassus, of so great an height, that in that great deluge, in which most of these parts of Greece were over-whel∣med with the waters, Deucalion and Pyrrha saved themselves, and many others, on the top hereof: for which and for its two summits reaching to the clouds, of great renown amongst the Poets; as in Ovid thus:

Mons ibi verticibus petit arduus astra duobus, Nomine Parnassus; superatque cacumine nubes.

Parnassus there with his two tops extends To the toucht stars, and all the clouds transcends.

Places of most observation in it, 1 Anticyra situate near the Sea, and famous for the Helleborum there growing, an herb very medicinall for the Phrenzie; whence the Proverb, Naviget Anticyras, applyed to mad men. 2 Pytho, or Pythia, said to be seated not only in the midle of Greece, but of all the world: Strabo relating how Jupiter desirous to know the exact middle of the earth, let loose two Eagles, one from the East and the other from the West, which flying with an equall wing (so we must conceive) and meeting at this very place, shewed it apparently to be the Navell of the World. By reason of which convenient situation in the heart of Greece, it was made a Sessions town for all the Grecians, and honoured with the Court and generall Assemblie of the Amphictiones, men chosen out of the prime Cities of Greece, who had power to decide all Controversies, and to make Lawes for the

common good. A Court first instituted by Acrisius, as Strabo telleth us; or as Halicarnasseus more pro∣bably, by Amphictyon the son of Helles, from whom they seeme to have their name. The Commissi∣oners from the severall Cities, with reference to the places for which they served, had the name of Pylagorae; when assembled, they were called the Amphictyones: their meetings, at the beginning of the Spring and Antumn. Some instances concerning their authoritie will not be amisse. In the time of Cimon, the Cyrrhenians having by Piracie wronged the Thessalians, were fined by this Coun∣cell. And after that the Lacedemonians for surprizing Cadmea; and the Phocians for ploughing up the Land of Cyrra, which belonged to the Temple of Delphos, were by them amerced: and because they continued obstinate, and paid not their amercements, their Dominions were adjudged to be confiscate unto that Temple. But they disobeying this Decree also, spoiled the Temple it self: for which war being proclaimed against them by the rest of the Grecians, who by the assistance of Philip King of Macedon▪ brought them to obedience; the Councell was again assembled. In which it was decreed that the Phocians should raze the wall of their Cities; that they should pay the yearly tri∣bute of 60 Talents; that they should no more keep Horse and Arms, till they had satisfied the Trea∣surie of the Temple; nor any longer have a voice in those Conventions. It was also then enact∣ed, that the lost suffrages of the Phocians should be vested in King Philip and his successours Kings of Macedon; on whom they also did confer the perpetuall Presidentship, and made them Princes of that Senate. A Court to which the Sanhedrin of the 70 Elders among the Jewes; and in our times, the Diets of the Empire, and the Assemblies of the Switzers, carry most resemblance. 3 Cyrrha, on the Sea side, the Port town to Delphos. 4 Crissa, so called from Crissaeus the son of Phoeus, and grand∣child of Aeacus, situate on the edge of the Bay of Corinth, called sometimes from hence Crissaeus Sinus. 5 Scarphia, memorable for the defeat of Critolaus Captain of the Achaean Armie, by Metellus one of the Roman Praetors: the losse of which bat••ell drew after it the destruction of Corinth. It was observed in the successe of this great fight, that a band of Areadians escaping out of the battell came unto 6 Ela∣tea, another Citie of this Province, and were there kind••y entertained on memorie of some former alliances, till news came of the overthrow of Critolaus: when ordered by the State of Phocis to re∣linquish the town, (for adversitie seldome meeteth with returns of friendship) they were set upon, and all slain by the Romans, in the selt-same place in which their Ancestors had unworthily forsaken the rest of the Grecians in their war against Philip King of Macedon, for the publick Libertie. 7 Daulis, a Citie appertaining to Tereus King of Thrace, who having marryed Progne the daughter of Pandien King of Athens, ravished her sister Philomela, and cut out her tongue the better to keep his villanie undiscovered. But Progne being made acquainted with the double injury, first made him ignorantly eat his own son I••ys, whom she had baked in a Pye; and after killed him, with the help of her ravish∣ed sister. 8 Delphos, renowned in old times for the famous Temple of Apollo, in which with that of Jupiter Hammen in Marmari••a, (now reckoned as a part of Egypt) were the most famous Oracles of the ancient Gentiles: dark Riddles of the Devill, couched and contrived with so much cunning, that the meaning of them was most hidden when it was thought most easie to be discerned. Instance of which that given to Croesus, in the war by him projected against the Persian, which was thus delivered:

Croesus Halyn penetrans magnam subvertet opum vim.

When Croesus over Halys goes A mighty Nation he o'rethrows.

Which he interpreting according to his own hopes, crossed the River; was vanquished by Cyrus King of Persia, and his Kingdome conquered. The like we finde of Pyrrbus King of Epirus, who be∣fore he made war against the Romans, consulted with the Oracle, and received this answer.

Aio te Aeacide Romanos vincere posse.

Which doubtfull prediction he thus construed; Te posse vincere Romanos, that he should overcome the Romans; but found it unto his cost that the meaning was, Romanos posse vincere te, that the Romans should overcome him; as indeed it happened. By another kinde of the same fallacie which the Logi∣cians call Amphibolia, did this great enemy of mankind overthrow another: who demanding of the Oracle what successe he should have in an expedition which he was in hand with, received his an∣swer in these words:

Ibis redibis nunquam per bella peribis.

Which he thus pointing, Ibis, redibis, nunquam per &c. engaged himself in the war, and was therein slain. Whereupon his followers canvassing the Oracle found the meaning of it to be this, Ibis, redibis nunquam, per &c. The like jugling he also used in those supernaturall Dreams which Philosophers call 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. For Caesar dreaming that he carnally knew his own mother the night before he passed over the Rubicon, became Lord of Rome, the common mother of the Romans: and Hippias the son of Pisistratus the Tyrant of Athens, having upon the same projects the same dream, was killed and buried in the bowels of his mother the earth: so that had Caesar miscarried in his action, and

Hippias thrived: yet still had the Devill been reputed his crafts-master, and the father of truths. But as the Ecclesiasticall history telleth us, that Julian the Apostata consulting with the Devill, was told that he could receive no answer, because that the body of Babylas the Martyr, was entombed nigh his Altar: so neither could the Devils deceive the world as formerly they had done, after Christ the truth it self was manifested in the flesh, and tormented these unclean spirits, though as they alledged, before their time. Augustus, as Suidas telleth us, in whose time our Saviour was born, consulting with the Oracle about his successour, received this not satisfying answer:

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

An Hebrew child, whom the blest Gods adore, Hath bid me leave these shrines and pack to hell; So that of Oracle I can no more: In silence leave our Altar, and farewell.

Whereupon Augustus coming home, in the Capitol erected an Altar, and thereon in capitall Letters cau∣sed this inscription to be ingraven, HAEC EST ARA PRIMOGENITI DEI. Now as the Devils had by Christs birth lost much of their wonted vertue, so after his passion they lost it al∣most altogether. Concerning which Plutarch in a tract of his Morals, called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 Why Oracles cease to give answers, telleth us a notable story, which was this. Some company going out of Greece into Italie, were about the Echinades becalmed; when on the suddain there was heard a voice, loudly calling on one Thamus an Egyptian, then in the ship. At the two first calls he made no answer, but to the third he replyed, saying, Here I am: and the voice again spake unto him, bidding him when he came to Palodes, to make it known, that the great God Pan was dead. When they came unto the Palodes, which are certain shelves and rocks in the Ionian Sea, Thamus standing on the poope of the ship, did as the voice directed him: whereupon was heard a mighty noise of many together, who all seemed to groan and lament with terrible and hideous shreekings. News hereof coming to Tiberius he caused the learned men in his Empire, to enquire out of their Books who that Pan should be; by whom it was answered, that he was the son of Mercury and Penelope; with ignorance enough, and lit∣tle satisfaction to the businesse propounded to them. Such therefore as more narrowly observed the circumstances of this accident, found it to happen at the time when our Saviour suffered on the Crosse; who was indeed the true God Pan, the chief Shepherd and Bishop of our souls, as the Scripture cal∣leth him: and that upon this divulging of his death and passion, the Devils who used to speak in Oracles, did with great grief and lamentation forsake that Office, which had been so gainfull to them in seducing mankind. That all Oracles at that instant ceased, I dare not say; though it be certain that about that time they began to fail: it being said by Juvenal who lived in the reign of Domitian, Delphis Oracula cessant, that the Oracle of Delphos was then silent; the rest decaying sensibly in a short time after.

But to proceed, the Temple of Apollo being spoiled by the Phocians, as before was noted, caused the war betwixt them and the Thebans called the Holy War: in which the Thebans being likely to have the worst, sent for Philip of Macedon, who made an end of the quarrell by subduing both. The treasure which the Phocians found in the Temple, was reckoned at 60 talents of Gold: but it pro∣ved Aurum Tolosanum, and brought a sudden ruine on their State and Nation: Sacriledge being so impardonable a crime, even amongst the Heathen, that the fault of some few countenanced by the rest of a people, hath brought destruction on them all. It was afterwards with the like ill fortune ransacked by Brennus and his Gaules, in the main of the Macedonian Empire; all of them miserably perishing who had any hand in it.

5 LOCRIS is bounded on the East with Phoeis and a branch of the Aegean Sea; on the West with Aetolia; on the North with a long ridge of hils which part it from Thessalie; and on the South with parts of Achaia, Boeotia, Phocis, the Bay of Corinth, the Straits of Amirrhium, and a part of the Ionian Sea. So that for largenesse of extent, and the commodiousnesse of the Seas, it yeeldeth to no Province in Attica, though not so fruitfull as some others. Divided into the three Nations of the Locri, 1. Azolae, lying towards the South, on both sides of the Straits; so called from some ill smels of the Country or people; 2 the Epi••nemidii, inhabiting the middle parts, so named from Mount Cnemis, not far from Parnassus; and 3. the Opuntii, so called from Opus their chief Citie, lying on the North side of the River Cephisus on the Coasts of the Aegean or Euboean Seas.

Chief Cities of the whole, 1 Opus, the head Citie of the Opuntians, situate on the River Asopus, being one of the main branches of Cephisus. 2 Cynus, the Port town to Opus. 3 Thronium, the prime town of the Epi••nemidii, mentioned by Polybius, Livie, Ptolemie. 4 Cnemides, at the foot of Mount Cnemis, whence they had their name. 5 Amphissa, the chief Citie of the Ozolae, situate in the In∣land parts of it: the people whereof refusing to yeeld to the sentence of the Amphictyones, against their confederates the Phocians, were the cause that Philip of Macedon returned into Greece. Against whom grievously infesting the Boeotians, and manifestly aspiring to the command of Greece, the Athe∣nians desperately opposed, not so much with possibility of prevailing, as by the sharp and biting orations of Demosithenes, made against his proceedings: which being by him called Philippicks, occa∣sioned

Tully to call his bitter invectives against M. Antonius by the same name also. But the successe hereof was such as commonly attendeth a broken fortune, the Athenians being vanquished at Chaeronea, and Philip declared Captain of Greece against the Persians, obtaining under that title the command he sought. 6. Evantia, as Ptolemie; Oeantia, as Plinie and Pausanias call it; opposite to Aegira in Achaia prepria. 7 Moly••hria, by Ptolemie placed here; but by others reckoned in Aetolia. 8 Naupactus, so called from the building of ships there by the Heraclidae, situate on the Corinthian Bay near the mouth thereof. Given by the Citizens of Athens to the poor Messenians, when after the end of the third war, the Lacedaemonians unwilling to have them troublesome neighbours (and they scorning to be quiet slaves) compelled them to seek new habitations. It hath of late been called Lepanto, giving the name of the Colfe of Lepanto to the Bay of Corinth; by that name subject for a while to the Venetians, and from them taken by the Tucks, anno 1499. Of these Locrians, those of Italie were a branch or Colo∣nie, whose Lawgiver was Zaleucus spoken of elsewhere.

6 DORIS is bounded on the East with Phocis, on the West with Aetolia, on the North with the hill Octa, and other Mountains which divide it from Thessalie; and on the South with Aetolia, and part of Loeris. The air hereof is very healthy, and the soil sufficiently fruitfull if well manured, but now the greatest part lyeth waste, for want of tillage. First peopled by the Dores or Dorienses, descended from Dorus the son of Hellen and grandchild of Deuealion; by whom placed in Thessalie, after wards spreading into this Country which they left their name to, as their proper dwelling: though many of them following the Heraclidoe into Peloponnesus, possessed themselves of the greatest part of Laconia also, imprinting on the same their Dialect or form of speech, from them called the Dorick

Chief Cities hereof are 1 Doris, so called in memorie of Dorus, the first Progenitour of this peo∣ple. 2 Erineus, seated at the foot of Parnassus, mentioned by Thucydides, Strabo, Mela, Ptolemie, and the rest of the ancients. 3 Bium, as Ptolemie; or Boion, as Strabo and Plinie call it. 4 Cytinum, near Parnassusalso, in the common impressions of Diodorus Siculus the Historian, falsly called Cynthinium. 5 Liloea, situate not farre from the spring or fountain of the River Cephisus; which rising hereabouts passeth thorow the whole length of Achaia and falls into the Aegean or Euboean Sea.

7 AETOLIA hath on the East Loeris, on the West Epirus, on the North Doris, on the South the Ionian Sea. Said to be so called from Aetolus the son of Mars, who being by Salomoneus cast out of Elis, fix'd himself in this Country.

Here is the Forrest Calydon, where Meleager and the flower of the Greek Nobility slew the wild Bore. Here is the River Evenus, over which the Centaure Nessus having carryed Deianira, wife of Hercu∣les; and intending to have ravished her, was slain by an arrow which Hereules on the other side of the River shot at him. Here also is the river of Achelous, of whom the Poets fable many things, as that being rivall with Hercules in the love of Deianira, he encountred him in the shape of a Bull; and that when Hercules had pluckt off one of his horns, the Nymphs made of it their so much celebrated cornu∣copia.

The people of this Country were the most turbulent and unruly people of all Greece, never at peace with their neighbours, and seldome with themselves. The Macedonians could never tame them, by reason of the cragginesse of the country: yet they brought them to such terms that they were compelled to let the Romans into Greece, who quickly made an end of all.

Principall towns hereof, were 1 Chalcis, situate near the spring-head of Achelous before mention∣ed. 2 Arachthus, near the river so called, which arising hereabouts passeth into Epirus, and falleth into the Bay of Ambracia, not far from Nicopolis. 3 Olenus, not far from the Forrest of Calydon. 4 Pleurona, giving name to the adjoyning Country, called hence Pleuronia: the people whereof had the name of Curetes: 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from their shaving; it being their custome to shave the fore-parts of their heads, and let the hair grow on the hinder parts only: nehos••es eos coesarie apprehenderent, be∣cause their enemies should not lay hold on them by the foretops, and so pull them down. 5 Ther∣mus, the Parliament-Citie or place of generall Assembly for all the Estates of Aetolia, which meeting was called Panetolium, chosen for those meetings, in regard of the situation and strength thereof; as situate welnear in the middest of the Country, environed with rockie Mountains, of steep and diffi∣cult ascent. For that cause made also the receptacle of their wealth and treasure in all times of danger; but taken by the last Philip of Macedon, with all the spoile in it, in his war against them. 6 Calydon, near the forrest so called, giving name unto it; the royall seat of Oeneus father of Melea∣ger; divided into two parts by the River Evenus, which runneth through it, according unto that of Ovid:

Et Meleagream maculatus sanguine Nessi, Evenus, Calydona secat.

That is to say:

Calydon, Meleagers town, the flood Even divides, defil'd with Nessus bloud.

Adjoining hereunto were the the Athamanes, whom Plime makes a people of it, who gave name un∣to a little Province called Athemania; but such, (as little as it was) as gave it the title of a Kingdom to Animander: a Prince whom the Aetolians made especiall use of in their wars against Philip King of Macedon the father of Perseus, suggesting to him and his children, that they were descended of the house of Alexander the great, and so ingaging them in a hope of that Kingdom to hazard the quiet of their own. The places of most note is 1 Dium, 2 Atheneum, both took by Philip in that warre.

These as they were the last Actors on the stage of Achaia, so had they the most desperate part in all the tragoedie of that Countrie. The astaires whereof, governed successively by that State which was most, powerfull were for a long time managed by the Athenians: whose counsels and con∣clusions went for law amongst them. But that Estate being broken, it not subverted by the power of Sparta, the Thebans and Boeotians who came next in play had the chief command, uniting almost all the rest in design with them against the Spartans; who now grow terrible to all. Becoming in∣solent by the course of too much prosperitie, and the many great victories which they had against the Spartans; and thereupon quarrelling with the Phocians, they were the cause of Philips coming into Greece; who as he had learned amongst them the use of arms, so made he use thereof at last, and of their dissensions, to unite all the States of Greece under his command. Thebes it self being took and sacked by Alexander the son of Philip, as before is said. The Macedonians thus prevailing, partly by force, but specially by art and practise, there was no people in Achaia that durst oppose them till these Aetolians, a restlesse and impatient people took the cause in hand: Who thrived so well un∣der Antigonus and Philip: two of the last Kings of Macedon, that they took from them many towns, in∣vaded Thessalie, attempted Macedon it self: and when they could not otherwise obtain their purpose in the destruction of that Kingdome, opened a passage for the Romans to effect it for them. But fin∣ding no such favour at the Romans hands as they did expect, they began to murmur, and afterwards to excite Antiochus and the Greeks against them, drawing thereby those forces against themselves which they had invited into Greece: and were the first people of all the Grecians that were conquered by them: though by the mediation of the Rhodians and some other friends, their Countrie was resto∣red unto them, with the losse only of Cephalenia, Zant, and some other Islands which the Romans were resolved to keep as the fruits of the war. This was about the 564 year of the building of Rome, Ful∣vius Nobilior being then Consul, and chief Commander in this war. After which time the severall Estates hereof enjoyed so much liberty, as the Romans their new Masters thought fit to give them: till finally made absolutely subject in the time of Vespasian, by whom Achaia was reduced into the form of a Province, Peloponnesus being reckoned as a part thereof. In the division of the Empire by Constan∣tine the Great, the West parts hereof being divided from the rest, was called New Epinus: but both of them made Provinces of the Diocese of Macedon, under the Proefecsus Froetorio for Illyricum: the principall office of this part being called the Proconsul of Achaia: continuing under him and his suc∣cessours, Emperours of Constantinople, till the destruction of that Empire by the power of the Turks. But so that it remained not alwayes under the command of one sole Officer, the politie of that State being altered, and this Country parcelled out into many Governments: especially after the taking of Constantinople by the Latines or Western Christians. At what time Theodorus Angelus a noble Grecian, and one of the (then) imperiall familie, seised on Aetolia and Epirus, part of which last, and all the first he left to Michael his son: who held them though with some dispute betwixt him and Michael Paleologus, the first Emperour of Constantinople after the expulsion of the Latines. Charls the last Prince of that familie dying without issue about the year 1430. bequeathed Aetolia to another Charls, the son of his brother: and Acarnania (being that part of Epirus, which the Princes of Aetolia held) to his base sons, Memnon, Turnus, and Hercules. But many quarrels hapning upon this divi∣sion, Amurath the 2. having then newly conquered Thessalonica, composed the differences by taking all unto himself, anno 1432. There were at that time other Princes of like authoritie, as of Athens, Phocis, and Boeotia, but the first the chiefest: as honoured not only with the title of Dukes of Athens, but the Princes of Achaia also: such being the fortune of that Citie, as to have the first and last great sway in the affairs of Achaia. For at the translation of the Empire upon the Latines, Godfrey of Troyes, a French man, was made Duke of Athens, and Prince of Achaia, of whom Paulus Aemilius speaketh, anno 1220. which honour afterwards was conferred on a kinsman of John di Brenne, the last King of Jerusalem, Protectour of Baldwin the 2. the last Emperour of the Latines, mentioned by the said Aemilius, anno 1288. By the heir generall of this house it was conveighed in marriage to Izaulus di Accio, a Noble man of the Realm of Naples: whose son Walter for a time obtained the so∣veraigntie of the State of Florence, anno 1342. but lost it suddenly again by his too much cruelty. Francis di Acciavol, the last Prince of this house, having been brought into the Court of Mahomet the Great, as one of his Favourites, surrendred his estate herein, at the perswasion of that Tyrant, in ex∣change for the Countrie of Boeotia, and the Dukedom of Thebes: which he no sooner had received but he was sent by Mahomet to Zoganus, his Lieutenant in Morea, by whom at first courteously recei∣ved, at last cruelly murdered. And so the whole Country of Achaia fell into the hands of the Turks, anno 1454. or thereabouts.

EPIRUS.* 1.113

EPIRUS is bounded on the East with Aetolia, on the West with the Adriatick; on the North with Thrssay, Maceaen, and some part of Albania; and on the South with the Ionian Seas. So called from the soliditie and Ermnesse of it; the word Epeiros in the Greek tongue, signifying as much as terra firma, or the firm land. But by the Turkes at this day it is called Albania, which name they give to all the lands and Countries in their possession, lying upon the Adriatick and Ionian Seas.

In this Countrey was born Olympias, mother of Alexander the Great; and Pyrrhus, who con∣quered the Realm of Macedon, and was the first foreiner, who made tryall (though to his owne losse) of the power and puissance of Rome; accounted by Hannibal, next to Alexander, the second great souldier of the world. Here is also Mount Pindus sacred to Apollo and the Mujes, dividing this countrey from Thessaly, and therefore common unto both: as also the Acrocerautan hils, so called, because they are much subject unto thunder and lightning; eminent for their height and much feared by Mariners: who when they see a little cloud rising on the top hereof, are sure of a tempest. Finally here are the famous Rivers Acheron, and Cocytus, which for their black waters and unsa∣voury tast are said to be the Rivers of Hell: from which last the sacrifices and solemnities made in honour of Proserpine whom Plato ravished and brought hither, had the name of Cocytia. Whence by a Metonyuie, these Rivers are taken sometimes, for hell it selfe, as in that of the Poet;

Flectere si nequeo superos, Acheronta movebo.

Since those in Heaven I cannot move, The powers of Hell I meane to prove.

The soyle hereof is very barren, and in many places full of Forrests, and thin of people; but to∣wards the Sea side reasonably fruitfull: plentifull of Oxen, Dogs, and Sheep, of more then ordi∣nary bignesse, and yeelding the best breed of Horses. The people use a distinct language from the Grecians, though of the Greek tongue not utterly ignorant: and by reason of the barrennesse of their own countrey, become great wanderers, especially in summer time, when they travell into Thrace, Macedon, and Asia minor, hiring themselves to work in harvest under the Turkes, as also to thresh, winnow, and make clean their Corn; and in the Winter time return to their wives and children. Able of body, swift of foot, apt to undergoe any toyle and labour; having withall good courages and high projections, which makes such of them as delight not in works of drudgerie, to look for action in the warres, and otherwise to rob and spoile in the neighbouring mountaines of Albania. Till their subjection to the Turkes, much used both by the Kings of Hungary, and the State of Venice, in their severall warres; serving on Horse, or Foot, as occasion was: as Mercenary as the Switzers in the Western parts, but not so faithlesse to the party by whom entertained.

Antiently it was divided into Chaonia, (which was the proper Epirus) lying on the West, and Acarnania, bordering on Aetelia, from which parted by the river Aehelous; the middle parts hereof be∣ing Amphilochia, Thesprotia, and Almene: all very populous in old times, and so continued, till Paulus Aemilius, on the conquest of Macedon, overthrew 70 of their Cities. Few of which being since reedisied, and the Countrey for a long time languishing under the Turks, here are not any faire Townes or well-peopled Cities at the present to be spoken of; and therefore we must look on such as flourished in the times foregoing. The principall whereof, 1 Dodona, one of the Cities of Chaonia, memorable for the Temple and Oracle of Jupiter, hence called Dodonaeus, situate in a fair grove, the trees whereof were said to be Vocall, and to give the Oracle; though others say, it was delivered first by a paire of Pigeons; whereof the one afterwards fled to Delphos, the other to the Temple of Jupiter Hammon in Aegypt. It was the antientest Oracle of all Greece; and so perhaps was the Town also. Said to be first built by Dodone the sonne of Jupiter and Europa: more pro∣bably so called from Dodonim the sonne of Javan and Grandchild of Japhet, who first inhabited this Region; the whole Countrey (Greece I mean) being called Javan from the Father (by which name commonly it occurreth in the Hebrew text,) this Town Dodona from the Sonne. 2. Cassiope, a Port Town, with a faire Promontery of the same name adjoining to it. 3 Onchesinus, by Strabo called Orchimus, and by Pliny Echinus, a Port town also now called Santi Quaranta. 4 Panormus, on the Sea side also, retaining still the old name, and but little else. 5 Antigonia, more within the land, sounded or repaired by Antigonus a King of Macedon, now called Argiro-Castro, as Niger think∣eth. 6 〈◊〉〈◊〉, once the chief Town hereof, which being sacked by the Illyrians under Teuta their Queen gave the Terms an occasion of quarrell with them; upon complaint made to them by the Epirots. 7 〈◊〉〈◊〉 a Port town, the principall in that part which was called Thesprotia; as 8 Torona, on the River Thyainus, and 9 Sybora, an antient Haven Town (now called Syoita) was in that part hereof which was called Almence. 10 Argos, the chief Town of the Amphilochians. This part hereof was first named 〈◊〉〈◊〉 from Molossus the son of Pyrious and Axdremache, remarkable for the best breed of Mastives, hence called 〈◊〉〈◊〉 and afterward Chaonia, by Helenus the son of Priamus, by Pyr∣〈◊〉〈◊〉 the son of Achilles setled in this Countrey, who having unfortunately slain his brother Chaon,

caused it in memory of him to be called Chaonia; Chaoniam{que} omnem Trojano à Chaone dixit, as it is in Virgil. Of these Molossians, Pluto the third son of Saturn was sometimes King, called from the flat and hollow situation of this countrey, consisting much of deep valleys, the King of Hell.

Townes of especiall note in Acarnania, 1 Anactorium, on the bay of Ambracia, now called Va∣nizza. 2 Ambracia, the Regall Seat or Court of Pyrrhus, giving name unto a fair and capacious Bay, now called Golfo di Larta, from Larta an adjoining Town, situate in or neer the place where Am∣bracia stood. Once subject unto Periander, King or Tyrant of Corinth, who being slain by a woman named Lionna, whom he kept as his Concubine, occasioned the Inhabitants from that time forwards, in memory of their deliverance to worship a Lion. Afterwards being taken from the children of Pyrrhus by the Macedonians, and from them wone by the Aetolians in the time of their greatnesse, it was besieged by Fulvius a Roman Consul spoken of before. Who seeing that he could not force it, was willing at the mediation of the Athenians, Rhodians, and other friends of both parties, to conclude a peace: but so that he dispoiled this City at his going hence of much excellent Imagery, carrying away with him unto Rome the Pictures of the nine Muses most admirably well done by the hand of Zeuxis, the rarest Painter of his times. 3 Euthrotum, a Roman Colony, by Pliny called Colonia, simply; now a small Village called Butrinte. 4 Leucas, situate on the point of a Promontorie of the same name also, antiently memorable for the Temple of Apollo; from the top of which Promontorie by leaping into the Sea, such as unfortunately loved were cured of that malady: the first triall of that kinde being made by Sappho, that famous Poetesse. At that time joined unto the sand, but since by the violence of the Sea, or the hand of man made into an Island; according unto that of Ovid,

Leucada continuam veteres habuere Coloni, Nunc Freta circumcunt;—

That is to say:

Leucas in former times join'd to the land, Environ'd round with waters now doth stand.

It was called Leucas, from the whitenesse of the Rock or Promontorie, having before the separation or disjunction of it been called Neritos; the chief Town of it varying with the name of the Isle and Pro∣montory: both town and Island at this time called S. Maure, taken by Bajazet the second, from the State of Venice, and by him given unto the Jews, (who doe still inhabit it) at their expulsion out of Spaine. 5 Nicopolis, a Colonie of the Romans, of great both wealth and beautie in the time of S.Paul, who from hence dated his Epistle to Titus: called in that Postscript, Nicopolis of Macedonia, be∣cause Epirus at that time was part of the Province of Macedon, though afterwards a distinct Province of it selfe. It was first built by Augustus Casar, on a Promontory opposite unte Actium, on the other side of the Bay: that being the place, where his Land souldiers were incamped before the Navall battell betwixt him and Mark Anthony: and was thus called either in memory of his victory; or from a poor man and his Asse, whom he met there the day before. For asking the mans name, he told him that his name was Eutyches, i. e. Fortunate; and that the name of his Asse was Nicon, i. e. Con∣querour; which happy Omen made his souldiers courageous, and hopefull of victory: and he in me∣mory thereof erected here two brazen Images, the one of the Asse, the other of his Master. It is now a small village called Prevesa.

6. Actium, on the Sea-shore, nigh unto which Augustus and Antony fought for the Empire of the world. The Navy of the later consisted of 500 Gallies; the former had 250 onely, but those crowned with victory: Antonius shamefully deserting his souldiers to follow after Cleopatra; who on the very first charge fled away for Egypt. The town now ruined, the Promontory upon which it stood called Cab∣bo di Figulo.

The Countrey was first peopled by Dodonim the son of Javan, or at least by some of his posterity, coming hither from the Isle of Rhodes, whose memory was preserved a long time in the Towne of Dodona, him, or from him so denominated. Afterwards being parted into severall Nations, and those Nations united in the common name of Epirots: it became a great and powerfull Kingdome, go∣verned by a race of Kings descending from Pyrrhus the sonne of Achilles, and continuing till the time of Pyrrhus the sonne of Aeacides. A man of such courage and magnanimity, that he did not onely recover his owne Kingdome, of which Cassander had deprived his Father; but got the Kingdome of Macedon from Cassanders children: outed of which he tried his fortunes with the Romans, Anno Mundi 3683. V. C. 471. After his death this Kingdome was shrewdly shaken by the Macedonians, and shortly after subdued by Paulus Aemilius, who as we now said, destroyed 70 Cities hereof in one day. For, desirous to satisfie his souldiers after his victory in Macedon, he sent unto the Epirots for ten of the principall men of every City. These he commanded to deliver up all the gold and sil∣ver which they had; and to that end as he gave out, he sent certaine companies of souldiers along with them; unto whom he gave secret instructions, that on a day by him appointed, they should fall to fack every one the town, whereunto they were sent. A barbarous and bloudy decree, 70 Cities con∣federate with the Romans ruined in one day, and no fewer then 150000 Epirots made and sold for slaves. But the chief motive which induced him to so great a cruelty, was by dispeopling this coun∣trey, lying with a long and faire Sea-coast over against Italy, to give the Romans opportunity to

land their Armies, without any resistance, for the further progresse of their Forces into Macedon, Thrace, Moesia, or where else they pleased. Which ungodly policie was afterwards imitated by Wil∣liam the Conquerour, who laid wast all that part of Hampshire, since called New Forrest, and therein 36 Parish Churches: that he might have a safe landing place for his Norman Forces, if the English should at any time endeavour to make head against him. Being made subject to the Romans, it was a while part of the Province of Macedonia; but afterwards when Macedonia, was made a Diocese, it became a distinct Province of it selfe, called by the name of Old Epirus, to difference it from the Province of New Fpirus, which lay Eastward of it. At the division of the Empire it belonged to the Constanti∣nopolitans; and so continued till the taking of Constantinople by the Western Christians: at what time Throdorus Angelus, a Prince of the Imperiall family, seised on Aetolia and Epirus, as before is said; and sped so well in his designs that he took the strong City of Durazzo from the State of Venice (to whom it fell in the division of that spoil) and cunningly (if not treacherously) intercepted Peter the third Emperor of the Latines, whom, as some say, he caused to be murdered at a banquet. After his death, his whole Estate being divided into two parts; Aetolia with that part hereof which is called Chaonia, continued in his house till the time of Charles Prince of Aetolia and Epirus spoken of before, after whose death it was subdued by Amurath the second, as before was said. The residue hereof, to∣gether with that part of Macedon which is called Albania, fell to the family of the Ca••triots: the last of which named John (the Father of Scanderbeg) seeing himself unable to resist that Tyrant, who had already swallowed up all his neighbour Princes; submitted his estate unto him, and gave unto him all his sonnes for hostages. No sooner was the old Prince dead, but Amurath seised on his estate, murdered his three eldest sonnes; and caused George the youngest, to be trained up in the Law of Mah••met: who afterwards escaping out of his power, and recovering all his Fathers coun∣tries assumed also the style or title of Prince of Epirus. After whose death his children not being a∣ble to make good their game, lost it to Mahomet the Great, as shall be shewn more fully in the storie and description of Albania, which is next to follow.

4 ALBANIA.

ALBANIA is bounded on the East with Macedonia; on the West with the Adriatick: on the North, with S••lavonia; on the South with Epirus. The countrey mountainous and barren; watred with few Rivers, and those of no great note amongst the Antients, as 1 Laus, 2 Apsus, 3 Paniasus, 4 Celidnus; all of them falling into the Adriatick.

It took this name from the Albani, once the Inhabitants of this tract; from whom the chiefe City hereof was called Albanopolis. Other townes of most consideration, are 1 Stetigrade, or Vesti∣gard (called by some the Holy City) situate in the borders of Epirus on the top of an hill, where it is s••nced about like an Eagles nest: one of the last townes in all this Countrey which was taken by Scanderbeg, at his recovery of his birthright and estate herein; but being once taken by him held good courageously against the Turke, the souldiers neither fainting in their oppositions, nor cor∣rupted by mony. There was in the town one only Well, into which a treacherous Christian cast a dead dog; at the sight of which, being the next day drawn up, the souldiers gave up the town: being so unseasonably superstitious; that no perswasion, nor the example of the Captaine, or the Burgo-ma∣sters, could make them drink those (as they thought) defiled waters. 3 Durazzo, a town of great strength, first called Epidamnum, and afterwards Dyrrhachium. Under the wals of which town, was the first bickering between the souldiers of Coeser, and Pompey, not onely to the present losse, but also the utter discomfiture of Coesar, as he himselfe confessed; if the enemies Captain had knowne how to have overcome. I must not omit the valour of Scoeva at this siege, who alone so long re∣sisted Pompeys Army that he had 220 darts sticking in his shield, and lost one of his eyes, and yet gave not over till Coesar came to his rescue.

Par{que} novum fortuna videt concurrere, bellum Atque virum—densam{que} ferens in pectore sylvam.

Fortune beholds an unaccustom'd sight, An Army and a man together sight, Whose brest a wood of Arrowes covered quite.

In the division of the Eastern Empire amongst the Latines it fel into the power of Venice; taken at last after a long and tedious siege by Amurath the second, an. 1474. 4 Dibra, in the hill countries, neer Epi∣rus: the first town which submitted to the valiant Scanderbeg, at his revolting from the Turks, suppo∣sed to be the Deborus of Ptolemie; 5 Croia, conceived to be Epicaria of Ptolemie, the chief Town of all this countrey, seated amongst inaccessable mountains, and made impregnable by Art: not got by Scander∣beg, but by wile: who having got into his power the Secretary of the principall Bassa, forced him to write letters in his Masters name unto the Governour hereof to deliver it unto him; which was done accordingly; afterwards in vaine besieged by Amurath the second, who under the wals here of gave up his wretched soule to the Devill, and thrice besieged by Mahomet his son and successour, before he could againe possesse it, but taken at the last after Scanderbegs death; as if the Genius or tutelar

Deity of the place had departed with him. 6 Petrella, a town of great strength, seated on the top of an hill (as almost all the Townes of Albania are) about 25 miles from Croia; delivered unto Scanderbeg at his first sitting down before it; as also was 7 Petra Alba, three miles from Petrella, neer the borders of Macedon, and situate like the other on the top of a mountaine; the River Ema∣rbus running under the bottom of it. 8 Stellusa, fifty miles from Croia, built on the top of an high hill in the middle of a pleasant and fruitfull valley, with great and spacious plains about it. 9 Dag∣na or Dayna, a place of great importance in the hill countrey towards Sclavonia; for the possession whereof arose a war betwixt Scanderbeg, and the State of Venice: but the Venetians being worsted at the battell of Drino, relinquished their pretensions to it. 10 Aulon, a Port-town now called Vallona, situate over against Hydruntum or Otranto in Italy, from which distant about 60 miles. The town unwalled, but fortified with a very strong Castle. A town unfortunately fit for the invasion of Italy, and was accordingly made use of by Achmetes the chief Bassa under Mahemet the Great, who from hence passed his Army over into Apulta, took the Town of Otranto: and had not the death of Ma∣homet, and the combustions thereon following amongst the Turkes, altered the designe, might have opened them a very fair way for the adding of Rome unto Constantinople. 11 Apollonia, a town of great note in the time of the Romans, a Sea-town furnished with a commodious Haven, which they held as their entrance into Greece, to that purpose serving them as commodiously, as Calice did the English in their wars with France.

This countrey antiently was a part of Macedon, inhabited by the Talautii, Aestrai, and Albani, from which last (but not till these later times) it had the name of Albania: but whether these Al∣bani, were a Colonie of the Albanians of Asia, (though it be very probable) I determine not. When made a Province of the Empire it contained all Prevalitana, and some part of Macedonia Salutaris; under the Diocese of Dacia, in the time of Justinian, but at first of Macedon, Dismembred from the maine body of it, when the Latines had subdued Constantinople; it fell unto the Noble family of the Castriotes: who though they tooke unto themselves the title of Kings or Princes of Epirus, (most of which they held) as the countrey of more note and eminence; yet was Albania the greatest strength, and Croia the chief City thereof, the seat of their residence; called in that respect by some writers, the Kings of Albania. John Castriot, the Father of Scanderbeg, seeing himselfe unable to resist the Turkes, became their Homager, and delivered four sonnes for Hostages; whom Amurath the second in their Fathers life time, caused to bee circumcised, and turne Mahometans; and after his decease murdered the three eldest, and seized upon Croia the chief City, with the rest of the countrey. But George the youngest of those sons, being reserved for better fortunes, was carefully brought up by Amurath (who somewhat passionately loved him) in the arts of war; though some of his Courtiers then told him that he nourished a Serpent in his bosome which would one day sting him. Amurath to make triall of his disposition, offered him on a time the Crown of Albania: to which he prudently replyed, that he preferred the honour of his service before all the Kingdoms of the World, and that he held his hand fitter for a sword, then his head for a Crown. Satisfied with which answer the Tyrant preferred him to the place of a Sanziack or Provinciall Governor: & gave him some Office of Command in all those Armies, which he set out against the Christians. Escaping out of the battell wherein Caramben the great Basia was overthrown and taken Prisoner by Huniades, he got the Town of Croia by a peece of wit, as before was said: and in a very short time after, made himselfe Master of Petrella, Petra Alba, St••llusa, and all the rest of the countrey by the reputation and terrour of his first successe. Having recovered his inheritance out of the hands of the Turkes, he reconciled himselfe to the Church of Christ: styling himselfe the Souldier of CHRIST JESUS, from that time forwards. Invaded by a vast Army of Turkes, he overcometh Alis Bassa, and kils 20000 of his men. With no more then 20 horse and 50 foot, he assaulteth Mustapha in his Camp; in which 5000 Turkes were slain, and 300 taken: with whom encountring not long after in the open field, he slew 10000 of his men, took many pri∣soners, and Mustapha himself for one, whom he ransomed for 25000 Ducats. Falling upon the Host of Amurath, then besieging Croia, he killed Ferisses Bassa, hand to hand in a single comba••••and in the time of Mahomet who succeeded Amurath, vanquished Isaac the great Bassa; routed his whole army, had the spoil of his Camp, took 20 of his fairest Ensignes, and slew 30000 of his souldiers. Not to instance in the rest of his noble actions, it is reported that in the course of his war against the Turkes, he killed no fewer then 3000 of them with his own hands: using a Turkish Scymitar in all his fights, of great weight and bignesse. Which when Mahomet on a peace between them had desired to see, and afterwards returned againe with this censure of it, that he saw nothing in it more then ordinary: the gallant Prince sent back this answer, that the vertue of the weapon depended on the strength of his Arm, which hee could not send him, for that he did reserve it for the death of his Enemies. Finally having held his Cards against Amurath and Mahomet, two most fortunate Gamesters, for the space of 24 yeares, he set up his rest at last a winner: dying in peace at Lyssa, then belonging to the State of Venice; Jan. 17. an. 1466. and was there honourably interred. At the taking of which Town by the Turkes about nine years after, his body was digged up by them, not in spight, but honor: that man accompting himself happy who could get any of his bones to preserve as a relick; supposing that as long as he had it about him, he should be invincible. But with him died the liberty of his Countrey also, not long after subdued by the Turkes, and made a Province of that Empire, as it still continueth: the name of Al∣bania being by them extended over all Epirus, and so much of Dalmatia also as is under their power.

The armes of this kingdome (or rather of the Kings thereof) were Gules an Eagle Sable.

5 MACEDONIA.* 1.114

MACEDONIA is bounded on the East with the Aegean Sea, on the West with Albania; on the North with Moesia Superior, and part of Thrace, and on the South with Epirus, and Achaia.

It was first called Aemonia from Mount Haemus, which shutteth up that side hereof which is to∣wards Moesia; after Aemathia, from a King of it callled Aemathus; Macedonia from Macedo, the son of Deucalion and the Father of Caranaus, the first King of the line of Alexander: and finally Kit∣tim or the Land of Kethim, whereof see Maccab. c. 1. v. 1 & cap. 8. v. 5. from Kittim the sonne of Javan, and Grandchild of Japhet who was planted here. Antiently of more large extent then it is at the present; extending from the Aegean Sea unto the Adriatick, till the taking of Albania cut of it, which hath strained it upon that side, but the rest as formerly.

The Countrey, taking it together is very fruitfull and pleasant, though on the outward parts thereof begirt with rough mountaines and thick forrests: in former times much celebrated for its mines of gold and silver, but long since exhausted. It contained formerly the Provinces of Aema∣thia, Pierla, Pelasgia, Fstiotis, Phiniotis, Thessalie, Mygdonia, Amphaxitis, Paraxia, Edonis, and many others of lesse note inhabited by 152 severall Nations: now principally divided (besides Albania) into Thessalie. 2 Macedon specially so called, and 3 Mygdonia, which the Turkes call Jamboli.

1 THESSALIE hath on the East the Aegean Sea, on the West Albania; on the North Mace∣don and Mygdonia; on the South, Achaia. A sweet and delectable countrey, the pleasures and delights whereof inclined the people to be very effeminate and dissolute in their course of life; in love with luxury and ease, and much like the Persians in behaviour: whose entrance into Greece they did therefore favour. Yet notwithstanding this debauchednesse, they were esteemed the best Horsemen of all the Grecians: by their excellent managing of which creature (as if they had been one peece with it, and either lent the Horse their mindes or borrowed his body) they gave occasion unto the fiction of the Centaures, halfe men, half beasts.

It is now called Comenolitati, and of old was very famous for many things, especially for the hill Olympus, of so great height, that it seemeth to transcend the clouds; and therefore frequently by the Poets tooke for Heaven it selfe. 2 For the hill Othrys, inhabited by the Lapithoe, over whom Pi∣rithous was King. 3 For the Mountaines of Pelion and Ossa, the dwelling places of the Centaures, who intending to ravish Hippodame the Bride of Pirithous, on her wedding day, were flaine by Hercules and the Lapithoe. 4 For the delectable Valley of Tempe, situate betwixt Ossa and Olympus; extend∣ing in length six miles, and five in breadth: so beautified with Natures gifts, that it was supposed to be the Garden of the Muses. 5 And lastly, for the Dolopes, and Myimidones, (who did here inha∣bit) over whom Achilles had command at the fiege of Troy: these last, by reason that they were a laborious and thristy people, being fabled by the Poets to have first been Emmets; transformed unto men at the prayers of Aeacus when he wanted souldiers.

—Mores quos ante tenebant, Nune quo{que} babent, parcum genus est, patiens{que} laborum, Quaesiti{que} tenax, & quod quaesita reservet.

The custome they of Emmets still retain, A sparing Folk, and unto Labour set; Strangely addicted to all kinde of gain, And wary Keepers of what ere they get.

Places of most observation in it, 1 Tricea, the Episcopall See of Heliodorus, the Authour of that ingenious peece called the Aethiopick History: which he so prized, that hee chose rather: to lose his Bishoprick then consent to the burning of his Booke, which a Provinciall Synod had adjudged to the Fire. A peece indeed of rare contexture, and neat contrivances, without any touch of loose or lascivious language: honest and chast affection being the subject of it; not such as old or modern Poets shew us in their Comedies, or other Poems. For here we have no incestu∣ous mixture of Fathers, and daughters; no Pandarism of old Nurses; no unseemely action speci∣fied where heat of bloud and opportunity doe meet; nor indeed any one passage unworthy of the chastest Ear. 2 Lamia, where the Athenians after the death of Alexander, hoping to recover their freedomes, besieged Antipater: which was the last honourable enterprise undertaken by that great and renowned City; known in old Histories by the name of Bellum Lamiacum. 3 Larissa, situate on the South of Demetrias, but on the same Bay; memorable for the birth of Achilles; from hence called frequently in the Poets I arissaeus Achilles. 4 Demetrias, situate on the Bay called Sinus Pelasgicus (now the Golf of Armenia) of very great strength by Art and Nature. Which being held by the Ma∣cedonians, together with Chalcis in the Isle of Euboea, and the City of Corinth; kept all Greece in awe, and were therefore commonly called the Fetters of Greece: the Grecians never thinking themselves at liberty, till those townes were dismantled by the Romans. 5 Pharsalis, nigh to which was fought the great battell betwixt Caesar and Pompey, for the Soveraignty of the Roman Empire: a battell more

famous then bloudy, 6000 only of 300000, which were in the field on both sides, being therein slain. A battell before which the Pompeians were in such a miserable security, that some of them contended for the Priesthood which was Caesars Office; others disposed of the Consulship, and preferments in the City of Rome: Pompey himself being so rechlesse, that he neither considered into what place it were best to flie if he lost the day; or by what means he might provide for his own safety, and end the war. As if the war had been made against some ignoble Enemie, and not against that Caesar, who had taken 1000 Towns, conquered 300 Nations, tooke prisoners one million of men, and slain as many. 6 Philippi, so named from Philip the Macedonian, the first founder of it; situate in the further part of the same plains of Pharsalia; and famous for as memorable a Battell as that before, and of no lesse consequence: that namely, betwixt Augusius and M. Antonius on the one side, against Brutus and Cassius on the other; these later being rather overcome by chance then valour. For either of them thinking the other vanquished, slew himself in the field: being the two last that ever openly stood out for the common Liberty, and therefore called by Cremutius Cordus, Vltimi Romanorum, or the last of the true Roman Spirits. 7 Gomphi, an ancient Citie bordering on Epirus. 8 Pheroe, in which Ci∣tie Alexander the Tyrant reigned; against whom that noble Captain Pelopidas the Theban fighting, was slain in battell: the Tyrant being not long after murdered by his wifes brother, and by that means all Thessalie recovering liberty. 9 Pagasa, situate on the Bay called Sinus Pelasgicus, which from hence is sometimes named Pegasicus; in which the ship called Argo, was said to be built, so famous for the renowned voyage of the Argonautes. The hill Pelion spoken of before, is not far from hence. 10 Pythion, or Pythoeum, of great note for the Pythian games there celebrated in the honour of Apollo, who hereabouts killed the Serpent Python: the Conquerour in which games, were crowned at the first only with an Oaken Garland, but afterwards with one of Lawrell. Of which thus the Poet:

Neve operis famam posset abolere vetustas Instituit sacros celebri certam ne ludos, Pythia de domiti Serpentis nomine dictos, &c.

Thus made to speak English by G. Sandys:

Then lest the well-deserved memorie Of such an act in future times should die He instituted the so famous Games Of free contention, which he Pythia names. Who ran, who wrestled best, or rak'd the ground With swiftest wheels, the Oaken Garland crown'd.

These games, together with the Olympick, Isthmian, and Nemaean spoken of before; made the four annuall meetings amongst the Grecians; renowned for the universall concourse of the noblest spi∣rits. 11 Doliche, which together with Pythium, and 12 Azorium, another Citie of this tract, stan∣ding near together, are called in Livius the Historian by the name of Tripolis. 13 Hypata, the Metro∣polis of Thessalie, so called by Heliodorus in his Aethiopick Historie before mentioned: who placeth it near the Bay called Sinus Maliacus, now Golfo di Ziton, and not far from Mount Oeta, bordering on the Province of Doris: upon which Mountain, Hercules being tortured with a poisoned shirt, sent by his innocent wife Deianira, said to have burned himself; thence called Hercules Oeteus. Of all which Towns, Lamia, Pagasa, and Demetrias, are in the Region called Phthiotis; Larissa, Doliche, Phthium, and Azorium, in that called Pelasgia; Gomphi, and Trieca, in Estiotis; the rest in Thessalie, properly and specially so named.

This Country at first called Aemonia, afterwards Pelasgia, then Pyrrhoea from Pyrrha the wife of Deucalion, and finally Thessalia, from Thessalus one of the companions of Hercules; by Plinie is called Driopis, Estiotis by Strabo, Pelasgia by Diodorus, and by Homer, Argos; the name of some chief Citie or particular Pro∣vince, being figuratively used for the whole. Divided commonly into four parts, 1 Thessaliotis, 2 Estiotis, 3 Pelasgiotis, and 4 Phthiotis: the name of Thessalie or Thessaliotis in the end prevailing, ac∣cordingly distributed into severall governments, united finally in the person of Philip the father of Alexander; who partly by force, but specially by art and practise, made himself Master of the whole. Continuing in a mixt condition betwixt free and subject, under the Macedonian Kings of the second Race; it became subject with that Kingdome to the State of Rome: first reckoned as a part of the Province of Macedon, after a Province of it self, when Macedon was made a Diocese, part of which it was. But from a Province of that Diocese, and a member of the Eastern Empire it was made a king∣dome: given with that title to Boniface Marquesse of Mont-ferrat in exchange for Candie, together with the Citie of Thessalonica, and some part of Peloponnesus, at the division of that Empire amongst the Latines. Which title he affected in regard that Reiner the brother of Boniface his Grandfather, had formerly been created Prince of Thessalie, by the Emperour Emanuel, whose daughter Cyri Maria (or the Lady Mary) he had took to wife. In him as it began, so this title ended; Thessalonica falling to the State of Venice, Thessalie reverting to the Empire when the Greeks recovered it: from whom sub∣dued, and added to the Turkish Empire in the reign of Amurath the 2. anno 1432.

2 MACEDON specially so called,* 1.115 is bounded on the East with Mygdonia, on the West with Al∣bania, on the North with Mount Haemus, on the South with Thessalie. The Country for the most part fruitfull, as before was said; but not so surfeiting with delights as to make the people wanton or esteminate in their course of life; as being naturally good souldiers, exact observers of military discipline, and inured to hardnesse: which their many signall victories doe most clearly evidence, both in Greece and Asia.

The Greeks in the pride of their own wits reckoned them amongst the barbarous Nations; and yet by a strange kinde of contradiction ascribe unto their Country the seats of the Muses. For in this Coun∣try was Mount Pimple, with a fountain of the same name at the foot thereof; both consecrated to the Muses, from hence called Pimpleides. Here also was the hill Libethris, and the Province of Pieria, from whence the Muses had the names of Libethrides, and Pierides; by this last called more frequently then by any other name what ever, especially by the Greeks themselves. But the birth of Aristotle in this Country doth more convince the Grecians of this foolish arrogance, then all the Muses in the world. A man so admirable in the generall course of learning, so universally comprehensive of all Arts and Sciences: that the best witted Grecian might have been his scholar, and thought it a great happinesse, as King Philip did, that they had any children but to be tutored by him.

The principall Rivers hereof, besides Erigon and Aliaemon, spoken of before; are 1 Axius, now called Vardari, rising out of the hill Scaraius, a branch of Mount Aemus, and passing through the whole extent of this Country into Sinus Thermaicus, or the Golfe of Thessal••niea, as it is now named: the fairest River of those parts, and of sweetest waters; but such as maketh all the cattell black which drink of it. 2 Chabris, 3 Echedorus, both rising out of the mid-land Countries, and both falling into the same Bay also. Besides which there are three other fair and capacious Bayes ascribed to Macedon, though two of them belonging properly to Mygdonia, that is to say, Singeticus, now Golfe di Monte Sacro; and Toronicus, now the Golfe or Bay of Aiomama; and the third common unto Thrace also, which is Sinus Strimonicus, now the Bay of Contesso.

Towns of most observation in it, according to the severall Regions and parts hereof, were for the Almopes, 1 Hormia, called afterwards Seleucia. 2 Europus, of which name there were four in Macedon. 3 Apsalus. Of Syntice, 4 Tristolus, 5 Paroeaecopolis, 6 Gariscus, 7 Heraclea, for distinction called Hera∣clea Syntica; there being many others of that name in Greece. In Edonis bordering towards Terace, 8 Scotusa, 9 Berga, 10 Amphipolis, on the River Strymon, with which encompassed, whence it had the name; seated so close on the edge of Thrace that it is questionable to which of them it belongs of right, once garrisoned by the Athenians, and from them took by Philip the Macedonian, in the first rise of his fortunes. 11 Crenides, bordering on Thrace also, and by some Writers laid unto it, but I thinke erroneously: repaired and beautified by Philip before mentioned, by whom called Philippi: situate in a Country so rich in mines of gold, that the said Philip drew thence yearly 1000 talents, which make 600000 French Crowns, or 140000l. of our English money. Afterwards made a Roman Co∣lonie and accounted the chief Citie of Macedonia, as appeareth Acts 16. 12. to the people of which S. Paul writ one of his Epistles. Next in Emathia, we have 12 Tyrissa in the midlands, bordering upon Thessalie, now called Ceresi. 13 Aedessa, called afterwards Aegeas, and now Vodena; the first town of all this country taken by Caranaus, the founder of the first race of the Kings of Macedon. 14 Beraea on Sinus Thermaicus, honoured with the preaching of Paul and Silas; the Citizens whereof are by S. Luke commended for their readinesse in receiving the Gospell. 15 Pella, on the same Bay also, the birth-place of Alexander the Great, from hence called Juvenis Pellaeus. 16 Pydna, upon the same Bay at the influx of the River Aliacmon, in which Cassander besieged and took Olympias the mo∣ther, R••xane the wise, and Hercules the heir apparent of Alexander; all whom he barbarously mur∣dered. This cruelty he committed, partly to revenge himself of Alexander, who had once knocked his head and the wall together; and partly to cry quit with Olympias, who had before as cruelly mur∣dered Aridaeus the base son of Philip, and Eurydice his wife, with whom Cassander was supposed to be over-familiar. Memorable also is this Town for the great battell fought near it betwixt Perseus the last King of Macedon, and P. Aemilius the Consul, in which Perseus having shamefully deserted his Armie, lost both the battell and his Kingdome, with no lesse then 20000 of his foot which were therein slain: the Romans having so cheap a victory, that it cost them not above an hundred or sixscore men. 17 Dium, not far from the hill Olympus, and about a mile from the Sea; of which mile the River Helicon be∣coming there a Lake, and called Baphyrus, taketh up one halfe: situate in the borders towards Thessalie, the way unto it out of the Tempe being strait and narrow, and almost impassable, by reason of the spurs of the Mountains, running overthwart it: which had it been well defended by the Ma∣cedonians, would have kept their Country from the Romans, who that way attempted it. But Perseus hearing that the Enemy had got into Tempe, only took care to get his treasure out of Dium, and so abandoned both the passage, and the town together. 18 Phylace, more within the land: as is 10 Eribaea. But these four last are in that part hereof which is called Pieria.

3 MYGDONIA hath on the East the Aegean Sea, on the West Macedon, properly and specially so called; on the North Edonis and Sinus strimonicus, on the South Sinus Thermaicus, or the Golse of Thessa••nica. So that it is almost a Peninsula, environed on three sides with water.

Here is in this Country the hill Athos, standing in a Peninsula (the Isthmus being once cut thorow by Xerxes, but since closed again) said to be 70 miles in circuit, 3 dayes journey long, half a dayes in breadth, resembling the shape of a man lying with his face upwards: the highest point whereof co∣vered

perpetually with snow, is said to cast a shadow as far as Lemnos. Exceeding fruitful in grasse, fruit, oil, and wine; and wondrous plentifull in hares; according to that of Ovid:

Quot Lepores in Atho, quot Apes pascuntur in Hybla.

How many Hares in Athos feed, What swarms of Bees on Hybla breed.

Inhabited only by Greek Monks whom they call Caloires, of the order of S. Basil, to whom the hill commonly called the Holy Mountain, hath been long since dedicated: the place being so priviledged by the Grand Signeur, that neither Turke nor Grecian may inhabit in it, except such Grecians only as professe this life. Of these there are about 6000, dispersed in 42 Monasieries, built after a militarie manner for fear of Theeves and Pyrats, wherewith much infested in times past: frequented with great concourse of people coming thither to behold and adore some Relicks (for which they are of much esteem:) the tree oblations of those Pilgrims, and some benevolence from the Turks which do much respect them, being the chief means of their subsistence. The manner of their life is like that of the ancient Hermits, poorly clad, their shirts of Woollen, which they both spin and weave themselves; none of them idle at any time, doing still somewhat for their lively-hood, and the advancement of the house of which they are, as dressing vines, felling timber, yea and building ships: few of them giving themselves to study, and some of them of so grosse an ignorance, that they can neither write nor read: bound by their Order to lodge and entertain such strangers as have occasion to passe that way according to their rank and calling, and that of free cost, if it be desired.

Towns of most note, according to the severall Regions and parts hereof, are for Mygdonia special∣ly and properly so called, 1 Antigonia, so called from Antigonus a King of Macedon, the first founder of it. 2 Xilopolis, 3 Terpillus, 4 Physco, 5 Assorus, all mentioned by Ptolemie, but not else observable. 6 Apollonia, for distinction sake called Apollonia Mygdoniae, to difference it from Apollonia in Albania, then a part of Macedon: famous for the studies of Augustus Caesar, who here learnt the Greek tongue. For Amphaxitis, there was 7 Arethusa, 8 Stagira, now called Nicalidi, renowned for the birth of Aristotle, hence named Stagirites. 9 Thessalonica, situate on the bottome of Sinus Thermaicus, now called the Bay of Salonichi, by the name of the town. Anciently the Metropolis or head Citie of Macedon, the seat of the Praefectus Praetoria for Illyricum, after the removall thereof from Sirmium; as also of the Primate of the Greek Church, who resided here. To the people of this Citie did S. Paul write two of his Epi∣stles continuing in great power and credit till the fall of the Consiantinopolitan Empire into the hands of the Latines: at which time it was bestowed first on Boniface Marquesse of Moniferrat, the new King of Thessalie: after whose death it fell unto the State of Venice, who held it till the year 1432. when forced by Amurath the 2. to become Turkish. Which notwithstanding it still preserves the reputati∣on of a beautifull and wealthy Citie, inhabited by rich Merchants who drive here a great trade, especially for the commodities of the Indies; for beauty, riches, and magnificence, little inferiour unto Naples: and though the Turks and Jews make the greatest number of Inhabitants, yet here are reckoned 30 Churches for the use of Christians. As for the Jews they swarm here in such great abun∣dance, that in this Citie and that of Constantinople only, there are reckoned 160000 of them; but ge∣nerally hated and contemned by all sorts of people. 10 Syderocaspae, of old called Chrysites, remarka∣ble for its mines of gold and silver, so beneficiall to the Turk that he receiveth hence monthly 18000 and sometimes 30000 crowns de claro. Next for Chalcidice, there was 11 Panormus, a Port town, 12 Stratonice in the Peninsula of Mount Athos. 13 Athos or Athosa, in the same Peninsula, with a Pro∣montorie of the same name, nigh which it stood. 14 Acanthus, now called Eryssa, on the Bay of the Holy Mountain. And finally in Paraxia, we have 15 Ampelus, 16 Torone, giving name to the Bay adjoin∣ing, called anciently Sinus Toronicus, now Golfo di Aiomama. 17 Cassandria, on the Sea ••ide, so called from Cassander King of Macedon, who repaired and beautified it; being before named Potidea. 18 Der∣ris, 19 Merillus, 20 Pallene, situate in the Chersonese or Demy-Island, called Petalene, and by some Pe∣talia; formerly consecrated to the Muses: but before that infamous for the war which the Giants are sabled to have made here against the Gods; at what time it was called Phlegra, the fields adjoyning Campi Phlegraei, in which this great battell is supposed to be fought. The occasion of the Fable was, (as both Theagenes and Eudoxus do expound the same) that the Inhabitants hereof in those elder times being men of a most impious and insolent life, got the name of Giants: whom when Hercules endea∣voured to subdue and reduce to reason, it happened that there fell a great tempest of thunder and lightning, by which they were constrained to flee and submit themselves. Hence the report that those Giants made war against the Gods. Others have placed these Phlegraean fields in Thessalie, and perhaps more probably. Certain I am that some place nearer to the hils of Pelion, Ossa, and Olympus, doth agree best with it: if at least Ovid were not out in his narration, who makes those Mountains to be heaped upon one another for their better reaching to the skies, and fighting upon even ground as the saying is. For thus that Poet:

Affectasse ferunt regnum coeleste Gigantes, Altaque congestos struxisse ad sydera Montes. At pater omnipotens misso perfregit Olympum Fulmine, & excussit subjectum Pelion Ossae.

Which may be Englished in these words:

The Giants once the Throne of heaven affected And hils on hils unto the Stars erected. Till Jove with thunder high Olympus brake, And Pelion did from under Ossa take.

But from those Fables to proceed to more reall stories: this Country was first peopled by Cit∣t••m the son of Javan, passing over out of Asia Minor; in memorie whereof, here was not only a town called Cuium spoken of by Liviel. 42. but the whole land of Macedon is in the book of Maccabees called the land of Keium, Maccab. 1. v. 1. and the inhabitants hereof called Citims, in the 8 chapter of the same book, v. 5. spreading in tract of time from one Sea to the other, from the Aegean to the Adriatick, some Colonies of them passed from hence to Italie, and first inhabited that Countrie, as hath there been said. Such as continued in these parts, divided into severall tribes, as in all parts else, became in time to be united in the name of Macedons: a people not much taken notice of in the former times, living a poor and painfull life, Goatherds and Shepherds for the most part, scarceable to defend their own Mountains from the next invader; much lesse to dream of conquering either Greece or Persia. And therefore Alexander told them, and not much unfitly, (though by him spoke in passion and to their disgrace) that his father Philip had first made them Gentlemen. For Philip having learned the Eu∣diments of war under Epaminondas, (being then an Hostage with the Thebans) and by that means acquainted with the temper and state of Greece: not only freed his own Kingdome from the Il••yrians, Thracians, and other barbarous Nations who had gained upon it; but taking advantage of the facti∣ons raised amongst the Grecians (which he knew how to feed and cherish for his own improvement) brought them at first wholly to rely upon him, and after to be subject to him. Insomuch that ne∣ver any Monarchy had a swifter growth, nor a more speedy dissolution: there passing not ful 40 years from the first of Philip to the last of Alexander: in which space it was both begun, perfected, and broke to pieces. For the foundation being laid in murder, perjurie and treason, as at first it was, was never likely to be blessed with a long continuance.

The KINGS of MACEDON.

• A. M.
• 3155 1 Caranaus, 28
• 3183 2 Coenus, 12
• 3195 3 Tirimas, 38
• 32••3 4 Perdiceas, 51
• 3284 5 Argaeus, 38
• 3322 6 Philippus, 38
• 3360 7 Europus, 26
• 3386 8 Alcetas, 29
• 3415 9 Amintas, 50
• 3465 10 Alexander 43
• 3508 11 Perdiceas II. 28
• 3536 12 Archelaus 24.
• 3560 13 Orestes 5
• 3563 14 Archelaus II. 4
• 3567 15 Pa••sanias 1
• 3568 16 Amintas II. 6
• 3574 17 Argaeus II.
• 357d 18 Amintas III. 19
• 3594 19 Alexander II. 1
• 3595 20 Alorites, 4
• 3599 21 Perdiccas III 6
• 3605 22 Philip II. 24
• 3629 23 Alexander the Great.

Of these 23 Kings, only six are famous: viz. Caranaus the first King, originally of Argos, of the race of Hercules, and by an Oracle commanded to lead a Colony into this country, and to follow the first flock of Cattell he saw before him. Being here arrived in a tempestuous stormy day, he espyed a herd of Goats flying the fury of the weather. These Goats he followed unto Aedessa, into which by reason of the darknesse of the air, he entered undiscovered, won the town, and in short space be∣came Lord of all the Country. 2 Perdiccas the fourth King, who at Aega, built a buriall place for all his successors; assuring the people that as long as their Kings were there buried, his race should never fail; and so it happened. For the Kingdom of Macedon, after the death of Alexander the great, who was buryed at Babylon, was translated to the sons of Demetrius. 3 Europus, who in his infancie was carryed in a cradle against the Illyrians his enemies, and returned victorious. This the Macedons did either because they thought, they could not be beaten their King being present: or perswaded themselves that there was none so void of honour and compassion as to abandon an infant, no way able to save himself from destruction, but by the valour and fidelity of his servants. 4 Alexander, the son of Amintas, famous for a notable exploit on the Persian Embassadours; who being sent from Mega∣bizus, requested a view of the Macedonian Ladies. No sooner were they entred, but petulantius eas Per∣sis contrectantibus, as Justine relateth the story, they were called back by this Alexander, sending in their steads young springals maidenly attired; who upon the like indignities offered, slew these effeminate Asians. After which he behaved himself so discreetly, that the Persian Monarch gave him all Greece, between Haemus and Olympus. Philip father unto Alexander, who governed first as Guardian to the son of Perdi••cas his elder brother; but afterwards took unto himself both the Kingdom and title of King: which he continued in the deposition of his Nephew and naturall Soveraign, the murder of the resto his brethren, and the destruction of all such as opposed his practises. But being other∣wise a man of approved abilities, he cleared his own Country of the Illyrians, subdued Achaia, Thrace,

and a great part of Peloponnesus: and was chosen Generall of the Greeks against the Persians. But as soon as he had made all things ready for this expedition, he was slain by one Pausanias a young Gen∣tleman, whom he had for merly abused. 6 Alexander the son of Philip, who recovered such parts of Greece, as on the death of his father had befooled themselves with an hope of liberty. He subdued Darius the great King of Persia, Taxiles and Porus Kings of India; founded the Monarchie of the Gre∣cians; and in the height of his successes was poisoned at Babylon by Cassander, one of his great Cap∣tains: his Revenue at the time of his death, amounting to 300000 talents yearly. After his death his new got Empire was much controverted in the point of succession; he himself having bequea∣thed it to him, who was thought most worthy by his Armie: and the Souldiers, according to their severall affections and relations, thought their own Leaders most deserving. At last the title of King (and in effect nothing but the title) was by consent of the Commanders cast on Aridaeus, a bastard of Philip, to whom Perdiccas was appointed to be Protectour (for Aridaeus was a little crazed in his braine) and to be Generall of the Armie. As for the Provinces they were assigned unto the Government of the chiefe Commanders, viz. Egypt to Ptolemie, Syria to Laomeden, Cili∣cia to Philotus, Media to Pytho, Cappadocia to Eumenes, Pamphylia, Lycia, and Phrygia major to Antigonus, Caria to Cassander, Lydia to Minander, Pontus and Phrygia minor to Leonatus, Assyria to Seleueus, Persis to Peucestes, Thrace to Lysimachus, and Macedon it self unto Antipater: the other parts of the Persian Empire being left to them, unto whose hands they were committed in the time of Alex∣ander. But this division held not long. For Perdiccas being once slain by Ptolemie, and Eumenes made away by Antigonus, these two became quickly too great for the rest: Ptolemie adding Syria and Cyprus to the Kingdom of Egypt; and Antigonus bringing under his command not only all Asia minor, but Assyria, Media, and almost all the Eastern parts of the Persian Empire. Antipater in the mean time succeeding in the Protectourship, banished Olympias the mother of Alexander, out of Macedonia, as bea∣ring but a step-dames love unto Aridaeus. But he being dead, she returned out of Epirus, (the place of her banishment) into Macedonia, where raising a strong partie among the people, she put Aridaeus and his wife Eurydice to death; proclaiming Hercules the son of Alexander, King: both slaine not long after by Cassander the son of Antipater; who to make sure work, murdered also with the like cruelty Roxane and her son, another Alexander,* 1.116 the last surviver of that house. And so the royall familie being rooted out, Antigonus took unto himself the title of King: as did Seleu∣cas, who had now recovered all the Persian Provinces beyond Euphrates; the like did Ptoleme in Egypt and Cassander in Macedon.

The second Race of the MACEDON KINGS.

• A. M.
• 3648 1 Gassander, sonne of Antipater, supposed to have been the poisoner of Alexander, rooted out the blood royall of Macedon: his reigne full of troubles and difficulties, 19.
• 3667 2 Alexander and Antipater, sons to Cassander, but not well agreeing, called unto their aide Lysimachus, and Demetrius; by whom they were both in short time murdered, 4.
• 3671 3 Demetrius, sonne to Antigonus, the powerfull King of Asia, after he had in one bat∣tell against Seleucus, lost both his father, and all his Asian Dominions; settled himselfe in Macedon: but being there outed by Pyrrhus, he fled to Se∣leucus, and with him dyed, 6.
• 3677 4 Pyrrhus King of Epirus, was by the souldiers, voluntarily forsaking Demetrius, made King of Macedon; but after 7 months, the souldiers revolted to Lysimachus, as being a Macedonian born.
• 3678 5 Lysimachus King of Thrace, being thus made King of Macedon, was in the end vanqui∣shed and slain by Seleucus, the last surviver of Alexanders Captains, 7.
• 3685 6 Ceraunus, or Ptolemie Ceraunus, son to Ptolemie of Egypt, having traiterously slain his friend and Patron Seleucus, seised on Macedon, but lost it, together with his life, unto the Gaules; who then plagued these Countries. After whose death this Kingdome being distracted amongst many Competitors, settled at last upon
• 3687 7 Antigonus Gonatas, the son of Demetrius, who for his valour shewn in expulsing the Gaules, was made King of Macedon. And though for a while he gave way to Pyrihus, then returning from Italie; yet after the death of Pyrrhus he again recovered his estate; but outed once again by Alexander the son of Pyrrhus, 36.
• 3723 8 Demetrius II. son of Antigonus, recovered Macedon from the power of Alexander the son of Pyrrhus, 10.
• 3733 9 Antigonus II. surnamed Doson, left by Demetrius as Protectour to his young son Philip, usurped the Kingdom. He divers times vanquished and crushed the Grecians, be∣ginning then to cast off the yoke of Macedon, 12.
• 3745 10 Philip, the son of Demetrius, 42.
• ...

• 3787 11 Perjeus the son of Philip, the last King of Macedon; the subversion of which estate was first begun in the time of his Father, who had not onely warred upon the Aetolians and others of the Greekes, whom the Romans had taken into their protection; but fided with Hannibal against them. Upon which grounds they sent first Titus Qu. Flaminius, one of their Consuls, by whom Philip was vanquished at the battell of Cukos-cephalos, and his Kingdome made tributary unto Rome. After which picking a quarrell against Perseus also, managed with va∣riable successe by Licinius, Martius, and others of their Commanders; they dispatched Paulus Aemilius with an Army into Macedon, to bring him to absolute subjection: Who sped so well, that Macedon was made a Province of the Roman Empire, and Perseus led captive unto Rome, anno 3789. In which triumph, besides the pomp of leading a Captive King in bonds, Aemilius caused the ready money which he brought out of Greece to be carryed in 750 Vessels, every vessell containing 3 Ta∣lents; which made so infinite a summe, that the Roman people were free for many years after from all taxes and impositions.
• 3798 Macedon thus made a Province of the Roman Empire, and afterwards divided into three parts or Provinces, that is to say Macedonia Prima, Macedonia Secunda or Salutaris and Prevalitana; in the new mo∣dell of Const•• ••••ne became a Diocese, the Diocese hereof containing the Provinces of Crete, Achaia, old and now Fpirus, Macedonia Prima, and the greatest part of Salutaris, the residue of Salutaris and Prevali∣tana, (which makes up the Countrey now called Albania) being laid to the Diocese of Dacia. It continued part of the Eastern Empire, till towards the last fatall dissolution of it, though many times harassed and depopulated by the Sclavonians, Bulgarians, Rosses, and others of the barbarous people, at their severall invasions of it: finally conquered by the Turkes, first under the conduct of Bajazet their fourth king taking Nicopolis, a town hereof bordering on Thrace, and lying North of Sinus Strimenius, now the Bay of Contesso; and after under Amurath the second their fixt King, making themselves masters of The ssalonica the chief City of it, and therewith of all the countrey. By rea∣son of which many invasions and last desolation by the Turkes, there is scarse one of all those many Cities before mentioned now of any eminence; except Thessalonica onely: the rest being miserably destroyed. And for the Countrey it selfe it is governed by a Turkish Sanziack under the Beglerbeg of Greece, his annual Revenew being but 8000 Crownes: nor any thing else required of him then to maintaine 100 horse in ordinary pay, for defence of his Province, and to finde 400 Horse on ex∣traordinary occasions, as the Grand Signeur shall command him.

7 THRACE.

THRACE hath on the East, Pontus Euxinus, Propontis, and Hellespont; on the West Macedon;on the North, the hill Hoemus; on the South, the Aegoean Sea, and part of Macedon. A very large and goodly Province, extending 20 dayes journey in length, 7 dayes journey in breadth: and in relation to the heavens, reaching unto the 44 degree of Northern latitude, so that the longest day in summer is about 15 houres three quarters.

By severall men, according to the times they lived in, it hath been called by divers names: by Ste∣phanus, Aria; by Suidas Odryss by Lycephron, Crestona; by some writers, Scythia; by Josephus the Hebrew, Thyras. But generally it is called Thrace or Thracia, and that as some say from Thrax, the son of Mars; as others from Thraca, an Inchantresse; more probably from the serity and barbarous condi∣tion of the first Inhabitants; the name in the Originall Greek bearing that construction: most likely from Thyras the son of Japbet, who first planted here, in memory of whom it did retaine the name of Thyras in the time of Josephus; besides many other footsteps and remembrances of him, in the name of many of their townes, and some of their Princes; of which we have already spoken in our ge∣nerall Preface. Finally by the Turkes it is called Romania, either from the many Roman Colonies which were planted here; or because Constantinople the chief City of it was antiently called Nova Ro∣ma: and by that name it is now called in most modern Writers.

The Countrey generally is neither of a rich soyle nor a pleasant air, the corn and other fruites by reason of the coldnesse of the Climate leisurely ripening, the Vines yeelding more shade then juice, and the trees for the most part more leaves then fruit: yet in some parts there be many large and goodly plaines, where they reape good store of corn, but of Pulse especially; and towards the Sea∣side they have plenty of wine, which Pliny much commended both for strength and goodnesse.

The people antiently were very bold and valiant, and called by some 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 because every man was a law to himselfe. So that it was truly said by Herodotus, that if they had either beene all of one minde, or under one King, they had been invincible. Of manners they were rude and savage, somewhat neer to bru••ishnesse; buying their wives, and selling both their sonnes and daughters, as in open market: in which, since imitated by the Turkes, who possesse their Countrey. The men were more courageous then comely, wearing cloathes according to their conditions, ragged and unseemly. The marryed women were in love to their husbands so constant, that they willingly sacrificed themselves at their funerals. The Virgins were bestowed, not by their own parents, but the common Fathers of their Cities. Such as brought neither beauty nor ver∣tue for their dowry, were put off according to their money; most times sold as other cattell, in the markets. In matters of Religion, they worshipped Mars, Bacchus, Diana, Mercury, as did other Gentiles: swearing especially by the first, from whom they bragged themselves to have been descen∣ded.

But their chiefe nationall deity, was one Zamolxis, sometimes a native of this Countrey, who having been brought up under Pythogoras, and returning home, prescribed then good and whole∣some Laws, assuring them that if they did observe the same, they should goe unto a place when they left this world, in which they should enjoy all manner of pleasure and contentment. By this means having gotten some opinion of adivinity amongst them, he absented himselfe, after was worship∣ped as their God. Upon these principles, when any one was born amongst them, his Parents and other friends sitting round about him, lamented bitterly his coming into the world, ripping up all the miseries and afflictions whereto he was to be exposed in this present life, and so deplored his condition as absolutely miserable and unhappy. But on the contrary, when any one chan∣ced to dye, they buryed him with all joy and alacrity highly rejoycing that by this means he was freed from the crosses and dysasters of this wretched World. Expressed thus briefly, after his won∣ted manner by mine Authour. Lugentur Puerperia, nati{que} deflentur; funera contra festa sunt, & veluti sa∣cra cantu lusu{que} celebrantur. A peece of such sound and Orthodox Divinity, that I wonder how they hit upon it in these times of darknesse; and savouring very much of the Primitive piety: by which the Obits of the Saints were kept as Festivals, no notice being taken of the day of their births. According to that of the good old Writer, Non nativitatem sed mortem Sanctorum Ecclesia pretiosam & festam judicat.

Here lived the Tyrant Polymnestor, who villaniously murdered Polydorus, a younger sonne of Pria∣mus; for which fact, Hecuba the young Princes mother, scratched him to death. Here also lived the Tyrant Tereus, of whom before in Phocis: and Diomedes, who using to feed his Horses with mans flesh, was slaine by Hercules, and cast unto his horses. And finally here reigned King Corys, whom I mention not as a Tyrant, but propose as a pattern of rare temper, both in mastering and prevent∣ing passion. For when a neighbour Prince had sent him a present of Glasses, of the purest metall, and no lesse accurate in the workmanship or fashion of them: (having dispatched the messenger with all the due complements of Majesty and gratitude) he broke them all to peaces; lest it by mis∣hap any of his servants should doe the like, he might be stirred to an intemperate choler.

Chief mountaines in this countrey, besides Haemus spoken of already, are I Rhodepe, the highest next Mount Haemus in those parts of the World, craggy, and rough, the top whereof continually white with snow: memorable for the fate and fable of Orpheus, who in a melancholy humour (ha∣ving lost his wife) betooke himselfe unto these mountaines: where with his Musick he affected both Woods and Beasts, who are said to have danced unto his Musick: from this place of his abode cal∣led Rhodopeius, from his countrey Thracius; Non me Carminibus vincet nec Thracius Orpheus, &c. as the Shepheard boasteth in the Poet. The truth is, that he was a man of an heavenly Muse, and by his dictates and good Counsell laid down in verse, first of all civilized this people; and weaned them by degrees from their bestiality. Hence the occasion of the Fable. But for Mount Rhodope it selse, it is in the midst of this Countrey, thwarting it from Mount Haemus towards the West: which with the spurres and branches of it, and the plaines adjoining lying betwixt the River Nessus on the West, and Melas or Niger on the East, made up the Province of the Empire, cal∣led Rhodope, by the name of the Mountaine. 2. Pangoeus, rich in Mines of Silver; 3 Mela∣pus, shooting towards the Sea, full of rocks and cliffes; and 4 Orbelus, lying towards Ma∣cedon, where there is a little Region from hence called Orbelia.

Principall Rivers hereof besides Strymon spoken of before, the boundary in some places betwixt this and Macedon, are 1 Nessus, by the Grecians, now called Mestro, by the Turkes, Charajon, which rising out of Mount Haemus falleth into the Sea, near the Isle of Thassus. 2 Athyras, in which name the memory of Thyras the sonne of Japhet, seemes to be preserved; which rising in Mount Hemus also, loseth it selfe in the Propontick; as doth 3 Bathynias; another river rising from the same Mount Hemus. 4 Hebrus, the most noted River of this countrey, rising out of Mount Rhodope, and falling into the Aegean neer the Isle of Sanothrace, a river of so flow a course that it is not easie to discerne which way it goeth: but memorable in the Poets for the fate of Orpheus, who being torn in peaces by the Thracian women, had his limbes thrown into it by those Furies. 5 Thrarus, good against the scab both in man and Beast, issuing out of 30 Fountaines, some hot, some cold; with the pleasantnesse of whose waters Darius the King of Persia, was so delighted, that he erected a pil∣lar in honour of it.

The chief Towns 1 Abdera, now called Polystilo, situate not far from the fall of the River Nessus into the Aegean, the birth place of Democritus, who spent his whole life in laughing at the follies of others. 2 Potidea, of old a Colonie of Athens, from whom it revolted and submitted to the State of Corinth. But the Athenians not enduring the affront, beleaguered it, and after two yeares siege, and the expence of 2000 Talents, could not recover it againe but on composition. 3 Adnus, on the Aegean Sea, a town of great strength and safety, and therefore used by the later Constantinopolitan Emperours for the securing of great persons. For hither Michael Palaeilogus sent Ja∣thatines the Turkish Sultan, flying to him for aid; and hither Mahomet the Great sent Demetrius, Prince of Peloponnesus, when he yeelded up his countrey to him; both under colour of providing for their ease and safety, but in plain terms to keep them in honourable Prisons. 4 Lyssmachia, on the Sea-shore, once of great importance, built by Lysimachus, who after Alexanders death laid hands on this Countrey: afterwards garrisoned by Philip the Father of Perseus, on the withdrawing of whose Forces for some other service, it was taken and razed to the ground by the barbarous Thracians, and all the people of it carried into captivity; but by Antiochus the Great re-edified and new peopled a∣gain, moved thereunto by the convenient situation and former glories of the place. 5 Philippolis, so cal∣led

from Philip King of Macedon the father of Alexander, who built and fortified it as a bridle to hold in the Thraeians: called also Trimontium, from three hils on which it was situate: beautified in the time of the Romans with a goodly Amphitheatre, continuing entire and whole till these latter days, and might have lasted longer by many Ages; did not the Turks dayly take away the stairs thereof, which are all of marble to make money of them. Here are also many other antient Monuments, though the town be much wasted and destroyed, the Scythians at one time killing in it above 100000 persons: which notwithstanding it is populous, and well frequented, by reason of the convenient situation of it on the River Hebrus, which they now call Mariza. 6 Trajanopolis, so cal∣led from the Emperour Trajan, by whom either founded or repaired; indifferently well peopled, and still preserving its old name. 7. Selimbria, on the coast of the Propontick Sea, beautified with a commodious port for receipt of small vessells; and many Bayes adjoyning capable of greater: by Ptolemy called Selibria, and Olibria by Suidas. 8 Apollonia, upon Pontus Euxinus, or the Black Sea, now Sisopoli. 9 Phinopolis, on the same Sea also. 10 Nicopolis, at the foot of the Mount Haemus; there be∣ing another of that name neer the River Nessus. 11 Perinthus, on the Propontick sea, near the influx of the River Arsus. A town of great note in the antient businesses of Greece, of great strength, and peopled formerly with men of such resolutions, that they maintained their liberty against Philip of Macedon, after almost all the rest of Thrace had submitted to him. 12 Heraclea, at once a Colony of the Thebans; and afterwards of much request in the time of the Romans, as being beautified with the Palaces of Vespasian, Domitian, and Antoninus, Emperours of Rome; as also with an Amphith•• atre, cut out of one entire Marble, and accounted one of the worlds seven Wonders: and finally, made the Metropolitan City of the Province of Europe, one of the Provinces of the Diocese of Thrace, whereof more anon. 13 Olynthus, called by Xenophon, the greatest City of Thrace; as possibly enough it was in power and riches, though not in greatnesse of extent. A Colony of the Athenians, rich in Trade, and mistresse of a fair and goodly territory adjoyning to it: the people whereof had been malitious enemies to the Kings of Macedon, which principally induced Philip, spoken of before, to set upon them. In which attempt he sped so well, that what he could not get by force, he obtained by money; bribing some of the principall Officers to betray it to him: for the recovery whereof, Demosthenes oft moved the people of Athens in those elaborate Orations called the Olynthiacks. 14 Sestos, in the Thracian Cher∣sonese: which being a Peninsula abutting over against Troas, on the Asian side, is now called Saint Georges Arme. Opposite whereunto, on the other side of the Water, in the town of Abydus, remark∣able for the Tragicall Loves of Hero, and Leander, celebrated by Musoeus, an old Greek Poet. 15 Cal∣lipolis, on the Northern Promontory of this Chersonese, the first City of note that ever the Turkes possessed in Europe, taken by Solyman, the sonne of Orchanes, the second King of the Ottoman race, anno 1358. from whence they easily, and in little time, spred themselves all over the rest of Thrace: the ordinary passage of late times betwixt Europe, and Asia, by reason of the conveni∣ent Harbour, and safe Anchorage. 16 Cardia, seated on the Western side of it, opposite to the Isle of Lemnos, and the birth-place of Eumenes: who being a poor Carriers son, attained to such ability in the Art of Warre; that after the death of Alexander the Great, under whom he served, he seized on the Provinces of Cappadocia, and Paphlagonia: and siding (though a stranger to Macedon) with Olympias, and the Blood-royall, against the Greek Captains; vanquished and slew Craterus, and divers times drave Antigonus (afterward Lord of Asia) out of the field: but being by his own souldiers betrayed, he was by them delivered to Antigonus, and by him slain. 17 Sardiea, situate towards Mount Aemus, memorable for the Councel there held against the Arians, an. 351. 18 Adrianople, seated near the midst of Thrace, called antiently Vseudama, but got this name from Adrian the Emperor, who repaired, and beautified it, made subject to the Turks by Bajazet, an. 1362. from the first taking of it made the Seat of the Turkish Kings, til the taking of Consiantinople, by Mahomet the Great; by whom removed unto that City. 19 Pera, oppo∣site to Constantinople, on the further side of the water (as the word doth signifie in the Greek) by some cal∣led Galata: once peopled by a Colony of Genoese, as the Mart and Factory of that State; taken by Maho∣met the Great, an. 1453. but still replenished, for the most part, with Christian Merchants, and Artificers.

But the chief glory of this Country, and of all the East is, the renowned City of 20 Constan∣tinople, seated in so commodious a place for Empire, that it over-looks both Europe and Asia; and commands not onely the Propontis, and the Bosphorus, but the Euxine Sea. First, founded by one Byza, from whom named Byzantium: but being taken by the Persians, and from them recovered by the Spartans, (unwilling that the Persians should grow strong in Europe) it was repaired and fortified by Pausanias, one of their Commanders, 663 years before the Birth of our Saviour. In vain besie∣ged by Philip of Macedon, and of great strength in the flourish of the Roman Empire. The walls of a just height, every stone whereof was so joyned with Couplets of Brasse, that the whole seemed but one intire piece; adorned besides with Turrets, Bulwarks, and other Arts of Fortification. Siding with Niger, in his war against Severus the Emperour, it indured a siege of three years against all the forces of the Romans: during which time, the people were so distressed by Famine, that men meet∣ing in the streets, would draw, and fight; the Conquerour feeding on the Vanquished. For want of Artillery to discharge on the Assallants, they cast down upon them whole Statuas made of Brasse, and the like curious Imagery. Houses they pulled down to get timber for Shipping; the women cutting off their hair to inch out their tackle: and having thus patched up a Navy of 500 Sail, lost it all by one Tempest. Compelled to yeild by this misfortune, the principall of the Nobility were put to the Sword, the wealth of the Inhabitants given for a prey to the Souldiers; the walls thereof dismantled, the Town left in rubbish. Yet there appeared so much of Majesty and Beauty in the very Ruines: Vt mireris utrum corum qui primi extruxerunt, vel eerum qui deinceps sunt demel ••i, vires

sint potiores, as Herodian hath it.* 1.117 Re-edified afterwards by the Emperour Constantine, he honoured it with his own Name, and made it the chief Seat of the Roman Empire. The City finished May 11. anno 331. And being so finished, was endowed with all the Priviledges of Rome, an equall number of Senators, one of the Annuall Consuls, and all other Officers of State chosen out of both; the Citizens of the one being Free of the other, and capable of all places of most trust and power. For that cause called NOVA ROMA, in some following times. This City he adorned also with magnificent Buildings, curious Statues, and such like Ornaments, transported hither from Old Rome: which City he spoiled of more costly pieces then any twenty of his Predecessours had brought unto it. At this day the chief Buildings are the Turks Seraglio, and the Temple of Saint Sophia: which as they differ not much in place and situation, so as little in magnificence and state. The Temple of Saint Sophia, was, if not built, yet re-edified by the Emperour Justinian. It is built of an ovall form, surrounded with pillars of admirable workmanship, adorned with spacious and beautifull Galle∣ries, roofed all over with Mosaique work: and vaulted underneath very strongly for the fabrick, and pleasing for the eye. The doors are very curiously wrought and plated; one of which, by the su∣perstitious people is thought to have been made of the planks of Noahs Ark: and yet this Temple is little more then the Chancell of the ancient Church, which contained in length 260 foot, and 180 in breadth: and to our Saint Pauls in London, may seeme for the bignesse, to have been but a Chap∣pell of ease. But what it wants in Greatnesse, it hath gained in Beauty, and in the elegancy of the building, wherein it is thought to exceed all the fabricks in the whole world: the sides and floor, all flagged with excellent Marble; and before the entrance a goodly Portico, or Porch, in which, as well the Christians, who visit it out of curiosity, as the Turks, who repair thither for Devotion, are to leave their shoos. By Mahomet the Great, after the taking of the City, converted to a Turkish Mosque, as it still continueth; frequented by the Signeur almost every Friday, which is the Sabbath of that people. Near hereunto standeth the Palace, or Seraglio of the Ottoman Emperours, on the north-east Angle of the City, where formerly stood the antient Byzantium: divided from the rest of City by a wall, containing three miles in circuit, and comprehending goodly groves of Cypresses in∣termixed with Plains, delicate Gardens, artificial Fountains, and all variety of pleasures which luxury can affect, or treasure compasse. The Palace it self injoying a goodly prospect into the Sea, was first built by Justinus the Emperour, afterwards much enlarged by the Ottoman race; contain∣ing three great Courts one within another: the buildings yeilding unto those of France, and Italy for the neat contrivance; but farre surpassing them for cost, and curiousnesse.

As for the City it self, it is said to be 18 miles in compasse, and to contain 700000 living souls; yet would be more populous then it is, if the Plague, like a cruell Tertian Ague, did not every third year so rage amongst them. Fortified towards the Land with three strong, and high Walls, the one higher then the other, the outermost highest of them all: towards the Sea with one wall onely, built after the old fashion with many Turrets, which very strongly flanker, and defend the same. But formerly both the Town and Chersonnese in which it standeth, was defended from the incursions of the barbarous people, by a strong wall built on the very Isthmus of it, some ten miles from the City, reaching from one Sea to the other. The work of Anastasius, who succeeded Zeno, anno 494. A City which a farre off gives to the eye a most pleasing object; so intermixt with Gardens, and beset with Trees, that it seems a City in a Wood: but being entred, much deceiveth the expecta∣tion which it promised, the buildings of it being mean, if not contemptible. The streets for the most part exceeding narrow, but raised on each side for the greater cleanlinesse: the houses but of two stories high, some of rough Stone, and some of Timber; without any outward grace, or exterior garnshing: in many places nothing but low Sheds, or rowes of shops, and in some places long dead walls belonging unto great mens houses. The principall beauty of the whole, next to some Monuments of Antiquity, which are still preserved, and the Tombs, or Sepulchres of some of the Ott man Kings, which are very sumptuous; are the Mosques or Temples of the Turks, about eight thousand in number; And the Port or Havent, so conveniently profound, that Ships of greatest burden may safely lay their sides to the sides thereof, for the receit or discharge of their lading; and so commodiously seated on the Thracian Bosphorus, that there is no winde, what∣soever it be, which brings not in some shipping to it. But that which gives the greatest pleasure to the sight, from the hills adjoyning, is the situation of it on seven Mountenets, most of then crow∣ned with magnificent Mosques, built all of white Marble, round in form, and finished on the top with gilded Spires, reflecting the sun beames with a marvellous splendour. On the first whereof, standeth the ruines of Constantines Palace, exceeding stately to behold; on the second, a fair Turkish Mosque, built on the Palace antiently belonging to the Greek Patriarch; on the third, a stately Mosque, the Sepulchre of Mahomet the second, and a very large Hospitall, for entertainment of Pilgrims, and relief of the poor; the Annuall rents whereof are valued at 200000 Checquines: On the fourth and fift, the Sepulchres of Selimus the first, and Baiazet the second. On the sixt, the Mosque, and Sepulchre of Solyman the Magnificent, numbred amongst the present wonders of the world; and on the seventh, the Temple of Saint Sophia, and the Turkes Seraglio, spoken of already. In which respect it is called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, by Nicetas; Vrbs septicollis, by Paulus Diaconus; and so acknowledged to be by Janus Douza, Phines Morison, G. Sandys, and others of our modern Travellers, the eye-witnesses of it. So that if there be any Mystery in the number of Seven, or that the sitting of the Great Whore on a seven-headed beast, be an assured direction to find out the Antichrist: we may as well look for him in Con∣stantinople, or Nova Roma, where the Great Turk, the professed enemy of Christ, and the Christian Faith, hath his seat and residence, as amongst the seven hils of Old Rome, where the Pope resideth: Or if his

sitting in the Temple of God,* 1.118 shew us where to find him, we may as well look for him in the Temple of Saint Sophia, now a Turkish Mosque, as in Saint Peters Church at Rome, still a Christian Temple.

But to return again unto Constantinople, as it was made by Constantine the Imperiall City, and conse∣quently the chief City of the East in all Civill matters: so it became in little time to have a great sway also in affaires of Religion. The Christian Faith said to be first preached in Byzamium, by Saint Andrew the Apostle, the first Bishop thereof: afterwards spreading over Thrace, and the Churches of it regulated by many Bishops: the chief preheminence in matters which concerned those Churches, was given unto the Bishop of Heraclea, Heraclea being at that time the Metropolis, or principall City of the Province. But after that Constantinople was built by Constantine, and made the Imperiall City as before was said: it did not onely over-top Heraclea, and draw unto it self the Metropolitan dignity, but stood in competition with the other Patriarchall Churches, for the Supreme Power, insomuch as at the second Generall Councell, holden in this City, it was unanimously decreed, that the Patriarch hereof, shoul'd in degree of honour be next unto the Bishop of Rome, and above those of Antioch, and Alexandria; the same Decree confirmed in the Councell of Chalcedon also; by which not onely all the Churches in the Diocese of Thrace, but also of Natolia, or Asia Minor (except Cilicia and Isauria, which remained to the Patriarch of Antioch) were containing no lesse then 28 of the Roman Provinces, were made subject to him. And though Pope Leo the first pretending onely the preservation of the Priviledges of those two great Churches, but indeed fearing left New Rome might in the end get the precedency of the Old, did oppose this Act; and some of his Successours persisted in the same re∣sistance: yet they were forced in the end to give way unto it, especially after the Emperour Justinian had by his Imperiall Edict confirmed the same. By whom it was finally ordained, Senioris Romae Pa∣pam primum esse omnium Sacerdotum; beatissimum autem Archiepiscopum Constantinopoleos, Novae Romae, secundum habere locum: that is to say, that the Pope of Rome should have the first place, in all Generall Councels, and the Bishop of Constantinople, or New Rome, should have the second. Encouraged where∣with, and with the countenance and favor of the Emperor Mauritius, John Patriarch of Constantinople, in the time of Gregory the Great, took to himself the title of Vniversal or Oecumenical Bishop, the Pastor Gene∣rall (as it were) of the Church of CHRIST. And though Pope Boniface, by the grant of that bloody Tyrant PHOCAS, got that title from him: yet the Patriarchs of Constantinople made good their ground, never submitting either themselves, or their Churches to the Popes Authority; for that cause specially, accounted by the Church of Rome for Schismaticks, accordingly reviled, and persecu∣ted with all kind of indignities. How it succeeded with these Patriarchs in the times ensuing, and by what means their jurisdiction was extended over all Greece, Muscovie, part of Poland, and many other Churches in the North and East, hath been said already. Certain it is, the constant residence of the Emperours, from the time of Constantine, gave great ground unto: of whom I should here adde the names, but that I must first summe up the affairs of Thrace, before the building of this mighty and predominant City; and take a brief view of the rest of those Provinces which we have comprehended under the name of Greece.

Concerning which, we are to know, that the antient Inhabitants of it had the names of Strimonii, Bardi, Dolo••gi, Sapaei, Saii, and some others; united by most writers in the name of Thracians. Gover∣ned at first by the Kings or Princes of their severall Tribes, as most Nations else: distinguished from the common people, as in other pompes, so most especially by their Gods, which their Kings had to themselves apart, and were not to be worshipped by the best of their Subjects. These not agreeing well together for the common good, gave the Athenians, Spartans, Thebans, and other Nations of the Greeks, a good opportunity, to invade their Country, to seize on the Sea-townes thereof, and plant Colonies in them: the Country in those times being meanly peopled, and consequently giving that advantage unto the Grecians, as the Indies in these later times have to the Spaniards, Portugueze, English, Hollanders, and all other Adventurers. Such of them as lay next to Macedon, proving bad neighbours here unto upon all occasions, at last provoked Philip, the Father of Alexander, to put in for a share; who being chosen Arbitrator betwixt two competitors for that Kingdome (drawn at last into fewer hands) came not unto the Councell with such poor atten∣dants as Justice and Piety, but with a great and puissant Army; wherewith having vanquished and s••ain the two Pretenders, he pronounced sentence for himself, and made Thrace his own, compelling the Inhabitants to pay him the tenth part of their Revenue for his yearly Tribute. After the death of Alexander, this Country was seized on by Lysimachus, as his part of the spoil, who here built the City Lysimachia; from hence invading Dacia, Macedon, and the neighbouring Regions: and he be∣ing dead, the Thracians now accustomed to a forrein yoak, were either Subjects, or at least Tribu∣ta••ies to the Macedonians. Aiding them in their warres against the Romans, they incurred the dis∣pleasure of that people, who having setled their affairs in other places, and repulsed the Cimbri: thought it fit time to call the Thracians to accompt for their former Actions; but sped so ill in the attempt, that Porcius Cato lost his whole Army in the onset, cunningly intercepted in their woods and fastnesses. Didius the Praetor coming in, whilst the Thracians were busie in the chase, gave them such a stop, that he deserved a Triumph for it: and the Victory more easie to Metellus, who succeeded Cato in that charge, and triumphed also over them; as also did Lucullus on another Victory, A. U. C. 680. Broken with so many ill successes, they were finally subdued by Piso in the time of Augustus: becoming so obsequious to that fortunate Prince, that Rhitemalces, a great and puissant ••ing hereof, aided him with a strength of Horse against the Pannonians and Illyrians, who had then rebelled.

Afterwards made a Province of the Roman Empire, in Constantines new modell it became a Diocese, under the Proefecius Proefetorio Orientis: Thrace it self being cast into four Provinces, that is to say, Thrace specially so called, Hamimontum, Rhodope, and Europa; Scythia, and the Lower Moesia, spoken of before, being added to it: of which the Presidents of Rhodope and Haemimontum, were not to be appealed from to the praefectus Praetorio, as the others were; but onely to the Praefect of Con∣stantinople, the Imperiall City. But as Alfonsus, King of Castile, surnamed the Wise, was once heard to say (never the Wiser for so saying) That had he stood at the elbow of Almighty God, when he made the World, he would have shewed him how some things might be better ordered: so give me leave to play the fool, and to say this here, that had I stood at Constantines elbow, I would have counselled him to lay the Diocese of Thrace to the Praefecture of Illyricum, who had originally onely the Dioceses of Macedon and Illyricum under his command; and not have placed it under the Praefect of the East, who had both Asias, and all Aegypt under his Authority. For being that there lay Appeals from the Vicars of Lieute∣nants of the severall Dioceses to their severall and respective Prefects: how great a trouble must it be to the subjects of Thrace, on every occasion of Appeal, to post to Antioch, there to complain unto the Pre∣fect of the Orient; when Sirmium and Thessalonica, the ordinary residences of the Praefectus Praetorio for Illyri∣rum, were so hard at hand. But Constantine was an absolute Prince, and might doe what he listed. He had not else removed his seat so farre towards the East, and left the western parts of the Empire open to the barbarous people, out of a fancy onely to preserve the Eastern. For that it was a fancy onely the event did shew, the Persians for all this, prevailing more then ever formerly; and Thrace it self, though honoured with the Imperiall City, and planted with so many Roman Colonies, so ill inhabited, that a great part thereof lay wast and desert many Ages after. Insomuch as the Goths being by the Hunnes driven over the Danow, where by the Emperour Valens plainted in this Country, (the Emperour having a designe to use them in his following warres) where not contented with the por∣tion allotted to them, they bid fair for all, wasting the whole Province, taking divers townes, and endangering Constantinople it self, from whence not driven, (Valens himself being killed in the warre against them) but by the coming of some Saracens to the aid of the Citizens. Nor could the resi∣dence of the Emperours so protect this Country, but that it was continually harassed, and depopu∣lated by the Sclaves, Bulgarians, Rosses, Saracens, and other barbarous people falling in upon it: nor hinder one Bryonnius in the time of Michael Ducas, and Nicephorus Botoniates from assuming to himself the title of King of Thrace; nor finally prevent the Turks of the Ottoman race from getting ground every day on the lesser Asia, incroaching upon Thrace it self, and in the end obtaining the Imperiall City.

And here perhaps it is expected, considering the Turks are now possessed of Thrace, and the rest of Greece, that we should make relation of the nature of that people, their customes, forces, policies, originall, and proceedings. But the discourse thereof, we will deferre till we come to Turcomania, a Province of Asia: from whence they made their first inundations, like to some unre∣sistible torrent into Persia; and after into the other parts of the world now subject to them. And therefore letting that alone till another time, we will proceed to our Description of the rest of Greece, consisting of the Ilands scattered in the Pontick, Propontick, Aegean, Cretan, and Ionian Seas: leaving out such as properly belong to Asia to our description of that Country, though otherwise Greek Ilands, and so accompted both for their Language and Originall.

The ISLANDS of the PONTICK and PROPON. TICK SEAS.

Before we come to the descriptions of these Ilands, we must first look upon the Seas in which they lie: beginning with the PONTICK first, because the Greatest, and that which doth communicate and convey its waters unto all the rest. A Sea made up Originally of the confluence of those mighty Rivers, (the greatest in those parts of the World) which do fall into it: that is to say, the Danow, Borysthenes, and Tanais falling out of Europe, besides many other fair and large Rivers (though of lesser note) to the number of at least an hundred, which pay Tribute to it: the whole compasse of it be∣ing 2700 miles; in form, by some resembled to a Scythian Box when it is bended. A Sea not so salt as many others, and therefore much annoyed with ice in winter; seldome remitted in the spring on the Northern shores: the Traffick of it wholly in a manner engrossed by the Turkes, who is master of all the Sea-coast of it, save what belongs to the Polonian and Crim-Tartar. At first called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 from the inhospitablenesse of the neighbouring people; which being brought to some conformity, caused the Sea to be called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉. By Florus it is called Mare Sinistrum, because in the way from Rome to Asia Minor it lay upon the left hand, as the Mediterranean did upon the right. It is commonly called at this time Mare Maggiore, for its greatnesse; and the Black Sea, because of the great mists thence arising. Others not unprobably affirme, that it is called the Black Sea, from the dangerous and black∣shipwraks here happening. For it is a very dangerous shore full of Rocks and Sands: and for this cause there is on the top of an high tower, a lanthorn, in which there is a great pan full of pitch, rozen, tallow, and the like, in dark nights continually burning, to give warning to Mariners how near they approach unto the shore. This Sea being the biggest of all those parts, gave occasion to

them which knew no bigger,* 1.119 to call all seas by the name of Pontus, as Ovid, Omnia pontus erant, deerant quoque littora ponto; and in another place of the same Poet,—nil nisi pontus & aer; a better reason doubtlesse of the name, then that of the Etymologists: Pontus, quia ponte caret. Of this Sea the chief Iles are Thimius, and Erithinnus, little famous. From hence the Sea bending Southward, is brought into narrow bounds, not being fully a mile broad; and called Thracius Bosphorus: Thracius, for its fate nigh Thrace; and Bosphorus, for that Oxen have swomme over it, and hath no Iland worth naming.

This Strait having continued 26 miles in length, openeth it self into the Propontis, 30 miles in compasse; confined with Thrace on the one side, and with Bythinia on the other: so as they which saile in the midle, may descry the land on all parts. Now called Mare di Marmora, from the Iland Marmora, which formerly called Proconnesus, hath for its abundance of Marble purchased this new name. The soile apt for Vines, and not destitute of Corn, yeilding also good pasturage for Goats, wherof here is plenty, with an incredible number of Partriges amongst the Rocks: the Country of Aristaeus, a famous Poet, who flourished in the times of Croesus. Antiently it had in it two Cities of the same name with the Iland, called the Old and New Proconensus, the former first uilt by the Milestans, an Asian people; the latter by the natives of this Iland. But both these being long since decayed; it hath now onely a small Village towards the North, with an Haven to it; inhabited by Greeks, as is all the rest of the Iland: such Christian Slaves as are in great numbers em∣ployed here by the Turkes in digging Marble for their Mosques, and other buildings, being onely sojourners, not house-keepers, and therefore not accompted amongst the Inhabitants. Here is also in this Propontick Sea, the Isle of Cyzieus; but being it is on Asia side, we shall there speak of it.

The Sea having gathered her waters into a lesser Channell, is called Hellespont, from Helle, daughter to Athamas, King of Thebes, who was here drowned. Over this famous strait did Xerxes, according to Hercdotus, make a bridge of boats to passe into Greece: which when a suddain tempest had shrewdly battered, he caused the Sea to be beaten with 300 stripes; and cast a pair of Fetters into it, to make it know to whom it was subject. Xerxes in this expedition wasted over an Army consisting of two millions, and 164710 fighting men, in no lesse than 2208 bottomes of all sorts. When all the Persians soothed the King in the unconquerableness of his forces; Artabanus told him, that he feared no enemies but the Sea and the Earth; the one yeelding no safe harbour for such a Navie; the other, not yeel∣ding sufficient substance for so multitudinous and Army. His return over this Hellespont was as dejected, as his passage magnificent; his Fleet being so broken by the valour of the Greeks, and the fury of the sea: that for his more speedy flight, he was compelled to make use of a poor sisher-boat. Nei∣ther yet was his passage secure; For the boat being overburdened, had sunk all, if the Persians by easting away themselves, had not saved the life of their King. The losse of which noble spirits so vexed him, that having given the Steersman a golden Coronet, for preserving his own life: he com∣manded him to execution, as a Co-author of the death of his servants. It is now called the Castles, or the sea of the two Castles; which two Castles stand one on Europe, the other on Asia side; in the Townes of Sestos, and Abydos. These Castles are exceeding well built, and abundantly furnished with munition. They search and examine all Ships that passe that way: they receive the Grand Seigni∣eurs customes, and are in effect the principal strength of Constantinople. At these Castles, all Ships must stay three dayes; to the end, that if any Slave be run away from his master, or theeves have stolen any thing, they may be in that place pursued and apprehended. So that these Castles are as it were the out-works of Constantinople to defend it from all invasions, and from any forces which may come unto it by Sea, out of the Mediterranean. And for the safety thereof, from such as may finde passage into the Euxine, there are situate at the very entrance of the Thracian Bosphorus two strong Castles also: the one above Constantinople on Europe side, anciently called Damalis, and now the Black tower, strongly fortified, and compassed with a wall twenty two foot thick, which with the opposite Castle on the Asian Shore, doe command that entrance. No Europaean Isle of note in either Strait. And therefore on unto

The ISLANDS of the AEGEAN SEA.

Hellespont, after a forty miles course, expaciateth its waters in the Aegaean Seas; so called either from Aegaeus, the father of Theseus, who misdoubting his sons safe return from the Minotaure of Crete, here drowned himself: or secondly, from Aege, once a principall City, in the prime Island Euboea: or thirdly, because that the Islands lie scattered up and down like the leaps of a wanton Goat, from the Greek 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

The chief Ilands of it are 1 Samothrace, 2 Thassus, 3 Imbrus, 4 Lenmos, 5 Euboea, 6 Salamis, 7 Aegint, 8 the Cyclades, 9 the Sporades, and 10 Cythera: all which, especially from Euboea South∣wards, are called the Islands of the Arches; the Sea, being by the Mariners called the Archipelago, in re∣gard of its greatnesse, compared unto the narrow Seas which lie about it.

1 SAMOTHRACE is a small Iland opposite to the Coast of Thrace, where the Hebrus falls in∣to the Sea; so called, quasi Samos Thraciae, to difference it from the Asian Samos, bordering on Ionia.

Formerly it was called Dardania,* 1.120 from Dardanus the Trojan, who fled hither when he carried the Palladium thence. But Aristotle writing of the Common-weal of these Samo-Thracians, telleth us that it was first called Leucosia, and afterwards Samus from Saus, the sonne of Mercury and Rhene, the letter M being interposed. It is now called Samandrachi, plentifull in Honey, and Wilde Deer, and better stored with commodious harbours, then any other in these Seas. It hath a town of the same name with the Iland, situate on an high hill on the North part hereof, over-looking a capacious Haven; of late, by the Pirates frequent infesting of these Seas in a manner de∣solate.

II THASSVS, another little Iland on the same Coast, opposite to the influx of the River Nes∣sas, lying betwixt that and Athos in Macedonia, at the mouth of the Strymonian Bay: by Pliny called Aerid, and Aethria; by Ptolemy Thalassia, at the present Thasse. In compasse betwixt forty and fifty miles; sufficiently fruitfull, well replenished with woods, and yeilding good store of the best Wines: mountainous in some places, but those mountains fraught with Quarries of excellent Marble, which the Romans called Thassiam, from the Iland: and in the times of Philip, and Alexander the Great, so rich in Mines of usefull metals, that those Kings received yearly 80 talents for their Customes of them. It hath one town of the same name with the Iland, situate on a large plain in the north part of it, bor∣dering on a goodly Bay, which serves for an Haven to the Town: and on the South parts where the Country is more mountainous and hilly, there are two towns more, each of them situate on an hill; but the names thereof occur not amongst my Authors.

III IMBRVS, another small Iland, now named Lembro, is situate betwixt Samothrace and the Thracian Chersonese; in compasse about thirty miles, but more long then broad, stretching north and south; and distant from Samothrace about ten miles. The Iland mountainous for the most part ex∣cept towards the West; where it hath some pleasant and well-watered Plaines: in which a town of the same name, situate at the foot of the mountain, once sacred unto Mercury, but not else ob∣servable.

IV LEMNOS, an Iland of more note, lyeth betwixt Thrace and Mavedon, not far from Imbrus; memorable amongst the Poets for the fabulous fall of Vulcan, who being but an homely brat, hard∣ly worth the owning, was by Juno in great passion thrown out of Heaven; and falling on this Iland, came to get his halting. Howsoever, he was antiently worshipped by the people hereof, and from hence called Lemnius. In compasse about an hundred miles, but more long then broad, extended from the East to the West; on every side well furnished with convenient Greeks, and some pretty Ha∣vens; by which the want of Rivers is in some sort recompensed.

The Country for the most part plain, if compared unto the adjacent Ilands; but otherwise swel∣led with rising mountainets, the enterposed valleys being very fruitfull of wheat, pulse, wine, flesh, cheese, wooll, flax, linnen, and all other necessaries: onely wood is wanting. And though here be no Rivers, as before was said, yet have they good fishing on the Sea-cost, for their use and sustenance; and in some parts Hot-bathes for health and medicine. But the chief riches of this Iland is in a Mine∣rall Earth here digged, of excellent Vertue for curing wounds, stopping of fluxes, expulsing poisons, preservative against infections, and the like: called Terra Lemnia, from the place; and Terra Sigil∣lata, from the seal or Character imprinted on it. For being made up into small pellets, and sealed with the Turks Character or Signet, it is then (not before) sold unto the Merchants; by whom di∣spersed over most parts of the Christian world. Upon the sixt of August yeerly they goe to gather it; but not without much Ceremony, and many religious preparations, brought in by the Venetians, when they were Lords of this Iland; and still continued by the Greek Monks or Caloires, who are the principall in the work. There is one hill onely where it groweth, the top whereof being opened, they discover the vein, resembling the casting up of wormes; and having gathered as much of it that day, as the Priesis think fit, it is closed again: certain bags of it being sent to the Grand-Signeur yeerly, the residue sealed up, and sold to the forain Merchant.

But to return to the Topographie of the place, the eastern parts hereof are said to be fat and fruitfull, the western very dry and barren: in both containing 57 Towns and Villages, all of them inhabited by the Greeks, except only three, and those three garrisoned by the Turks; who being Lords of the whole Iland, have new named it Stalimene. In former times, from two prime Cities in it, it was called Dios∣polis: Of which the first was called Lemnos, by the name of the Iland, as large, and well-people now, as ever formerly, but of no great estimation, when it was at the best; seated upon an high hill look∣ing over the Sea; with a handsome market-place, on which mount Athos casts a shadow, though di∣stant 87 miles from it. It was formerly by another name called Myrina; but that held not long, the name of Lemnos still remaining. 2 The second of the two Cities was then called Hephaestias, memo∣rable for the temple of Vulcan, hence called Hephaestiades, since desolate and destroyed, and a new town built in the place of it, being called Chochino: This town not great, but of a reasonable strength, memorable for the stout resistance, which a notable Virago named Marulla, made against the Turkes, in the time of Mahomet the Great, the Venetians then being Lords of the Iland. For suddenly landing; when they were not looked for, with a purpose to surprise this town, they found more resistance at the gates then they did expect: none more commended then this Maiden, who seeing her Father stain, took up such weapons as lay by him, and manfully made good the place, until the

rest of the Citizens wakened with the Alarum,* 1.121 came unto her rescue, and forced the enemy to retire. Near hereunto is the hill on which Vulcan is fabled to have fell; more eminent for the minerall earth here onely gathered. And not far hence Pliny reports a Lebyrinth to have stood in the dayes of old, little inferious unto those of Crete or Aegypt: the ruines of it so decayed, that Bellonius, who took great pains in it, was not able to trace them. 3 The third place of note is Setira, though an ordi∣nary Village, yet memorable for the Chappell in which the Greek Caloires begin their Orisons on the sixt day of August, before their gathering of the Earth, so often mentioned.

Besides these on the Coast of Thrace, there are also some of lesse note on the shores of Macedon, the principall whereof are 1 Peparinthus, as Ptolemy; Euonus, as Pliny calls it, containing about 40 miles in compasse: now, called Sarquius, as Castadus, or Limene, as Niger hath it; fortified on the Eastern part with a Castle built upon a Rock. Others of lesse note are, 2 Scyathos, now Scyati; 3 Scoyelos, 4 Allonesus, 5 Cicy••othus, now Pontico; and 6 Dromus; of which little memorable: all which, to∣gether with those tormerly described on the Coast of Thrace, being but the Accessories of the severall Continents, upon which they border, following the fortune of the Principall, and were con∣quered in them.

V EVEOEA known to the antients by the names of Macris and Abantis; to the moderns, by that of Necropont; frontireth all along the Coast of Achaia, parallel to which it is in fertility: one part hereof, torn away from it by an Earth-quake, and lying still so near unto it, that between the Iland and the Continent is onely a little Euripus, which ebbeth and floweth seven times in one day: the reason of which, when Aristotle could not finde, it is said, that he threw himself in the Sea, with these words, Quia ego non capio te, tu capies me. In this Iland is the Promontory Capareus, where Nauplius, the father of Palamedes, placed his false fires, to the destruction of so many Greeks. For understanding how his son Palamedes, whom he deemed to have been slain by the hand of Paris, was treacherously circumvented by the policy of Ulysses, and Diomedes: he conceived such a displeasure against the whole host of the Grecians, that he intended their generall destruction. To this end he caused fires to be made on the tops of the most dangerous and unaccessible rocks in this whole Iland: which the Greeks taking (according to the custome of the time) to have been the marks of some safe Haven, made thitherward; and were there miserably cast away, there perishing 200 Ships, and many thousand men. But when Nauplius understood how Diomedes and Vlysses, whose ruine he principally intended, were escaped, he drowned himself, for very vexation, in this very same place. Palamedes, this Nauplius son, is said to have invented four of the Greek letters, viz. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉; to have first insti∣tuted Sentinells in an Army, and to be the first inventour of their Watch-word.

It is in length 150 miles, stretched out from the North-west to the South-east, in breadth, not above twenty, where it is broadest; the whole compasse 365 Italian miles: The Queen of the Aegean Sea, not onely for greatnesse, but for fertility and strength; plentifull in Corn, Wine, Oyle, Fruit, and wood fit for Shipping; enriched with many fair Harbours, and capacious Bayes, and those well fortified: watred also with the Rivers of Cireus, and Neleus; two Rivers of so strange a nature, that if a sheep drink of the former, his wool turneth white, but coal-black, if he drink of the latter: For the credit whereof I refer the Reader unto Strabo. Here is also said to be a stone called Amianthus, which is drawn into threed like hemp, and good cloth made of it: which, when it is stained, in stead of be∣ing sent unto the Fullers, is thrown into the fire, and so cleansed. But whether this be so, or not, (for I put it onely upon hear-say) certain it is, that it was once enriched with Mines both of Brasse, and Iron, though those now decayed; and quarries of pure Marble, which continue still.

The Iland, before it was conquered by the Turks, was very populous: but the people most de∣lighted to live in Villages; the Cities, or walled towns being onely three. 1 Caristo, antiently Ca∣rysius, with little or no variation, but by Plinie called Aegea, and Chironia; memorable for its marble quarries, of which were made the Pillars called Columnoe Carystioe. 2 Chalcis, now Negropont, by the Turkes, Eribos, seated on a plain near the waters side, there growing into a fair and goodly Bay, cal∣led the Golf of Negropont; a populous, strong, and wealthy City, so fortified with Walls and Bul∣warks, that in the judgement of most men, it was held invincible, when the Turks first sate down before it. Nor was it purchased by the Turk (though Mahomet, who had took Constantinople, undertook the businesse) at a lower price then the losse of forty thousand men, who were spent, upon it: but taken at the last, and the people put unto the Sword, without conside∣ration of Sex, or Age. A town in former times of so great wealth and power, that it sent Co∣lonies abroad into Macedonia (a principall Region of the which was hence called Chalcidice, as also into Si••il, and some parts of Italy: and had a strong influence on the affaires of Achaia also, as being situate near the Continent, that it was joyned to it by a bridge. When it was in the hands of the King of Macedon; this town, together with D••metrias in Thessaly, and the Castle of Aerocorinth, were called the setters of Greece: insomuch, that when the Roman Senate commanded Philip, the Father of Persius, to set the Grecians at liberty, the Grecians made answer, that in vaine was their liberty resto∣red them, unlesse these three towns were first dismantled. Permitted by the Romans to live accor∣ding to their own Lawes; in memory of that benefit, they refused to declare against them in be∣half of Antio••hus, who thereupon made himself master of the Town, and consequently of the Iland. But forced to leave the place upon the losse of the battell at Thermopylae, it became free again; till finally made subject unto Rome, with the rest of Greece; and with it made a part of the Easten in Empire.

In the division whereof amongst the Latines,* 1.122 it fell to the share of the Venetians; who from hence used with their Gallies to infest the shores of Turkie, and disturb their trade. Provoked where∣with, especially with their taking of Aenus a City of Thrace, under the conduct of Nicolas Canalis, the Venetian Admirall, who in that enterprise had took 2000 Turks, which he carried with him into this Island: Mahomet the Great resolves upon the conquest of it; and with a puissant Army sets before the Town. And though it cost him dear, yet at last he got it, and therewith all the Island also, which de∣pended on the fortunes of it, an. 1471.

SALAMIS is nigh unto Megaris, one of the Provinces of Achaia, famous for the overthrow of the populous Navy of Xerxes, by the Athenians, and their confederates. What was the number of the souldiers and gallies of the Persian side, hath been already declared. The Grecian Fleet consisted of no more then 270 vessels, whereof 127 were rigged and set forth at the charge of the Athenians only: the rest by the associates. Yet was the admiralty committed to Eurybiades a Lacedoemonian; the Athenians preferring the main care of the common safety, before an unseasonable contention for priority. The Spartans seeing the inequality of forces, intended not to have hazarded the battell, but with full say I to have retired to Peloponnesus, into which countrey the Persians had made incursions; respecting more the welfare of their own countrey yet defensible, then the desperate estate of Attica. This designe was by Themistocles, (as carefull for the estate of Athens, as they for Sparta) signified to Xerxes: who getting between them and home, compelled them to a necessitie of fighting; but to his own ruine. For in the conflict more then 200 of his ships were sunk, and most of the rest taken; the confederates having lost of their Navy, forty onely. Between the Athenians and Megerenses, were many conten∣tions for this Island: the fortune of the Athenians in the end prevailing. It hath in it a City of the same name, the royall seat of Telamon the father of Aiax, so famous in the warre of Troy: more me∣morable for giving birth to Solon the Legislator of Athens, one of the seven wise men of Greece.

VII. AEGINA, now called Engie, an Island situate over against Sinus Saronicus, being that Bay of Corinth which openeth into the Aegean; hence called Golfo di Engia, the Realm of Aeacus, made for his justice and integrity one of the three Judges of Hell: the other two being his brother Rhada∣manthus, and Minos the King of Crete. It had formerly beene called Oenone, and Oenope; but tooke this name from Aegina the daughter of Asopus a King of Baeotia, on whom Jupiter is said to have be∣got both Aeacus and Rhadamanthus: The people hereof are properly called Aeginenses and Aeginetae, much spoken of in the wars of Athens, from which distant about 12 miles. Th•• ground hereof is very stony, but good for barley, of which very plentifull: inhabited in former times by a laborious and thriving people, to whom they gave in those dayes the name of Myrmidons, (the Island being also called Myrmidonia) quod formicarum more terram foderent, because Emmet-like, they digged up and under the earth, to make it the more fit for tillage, and dwelt at first in Caves without any houses. Hence the occasion of the fable of turning Emmets into men at the prayers of Aeacus; both tale and people, after (I know not how) carried into Thessaly, where before we found them.

VIII. The CYCLADES, so called because they lie in a circle round about Delos, are in num∣ber 53. They are also called the Islands of the Arches, because they are in the sea called Archipelago. They stand so close together, that in a clear day a man may see 20 of them at a time, for which cause it is with good reason accounted to be a dangerous place for saylers in a storm. The chief of these Cyclades, are 1 DELOS, quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, signifying apparent, because when all the earth had abjured the receipt of Latona at the request of Juno; this Island then under water, was by Jupiter erected alost, and sixt to receive her; and in it was she delivered of Apollo and Diana: of which thus Cvid:

—Erratica Delos Errantem accepit, tunc cum levis insula nabat. Illic incumbens, sub Palladas arbore, palma: Edidit, invita, Geminos Latona, noverca.

Unsetled Delos floating on the wave, A little Island entertainment gave To wandring Laton, spight of Juno's head, Under Minerva's Palme-tree brought to bed.

Notable also is this Island for the Temple of Apollo, and a custome neither permitting men to die, or children to be born in it; but sending sick men, and great-bellied women to Rhene, a small Island, and not much distant. By a more antient name it is called Ortygia; and by that name men∣tioned in many of the Poets both Greeke and Latines. The chief town of it called also Delos, is situate on a plaine environed with rocks, neer the hill called Cynthus: whence Apollo had the name of Cyntbius, and Diana of Cymhia, as of Delius and Delia from the Island. In this towne had Apollo both his Temple and Oracle, delivered here more plainely then in other places, and for that reason (as some say) called Delos; the word in Greek signifying manifest or apparent: made famous by the resort of people from all places hither, especially from the neighbouring Islands, who sent yearly multitudes of men and troopes of Virgins, to celebrate his solemn ities with heards

of Sacrifices.* 1.123 More wealthy afterwards by the removing of the trade of Corinth hither, that town being utterly destroyed by the Romans, and this made choice of by the Merchant, partly by reason of the immunities of the place, but principally in regard of the convenient situation betwixt Europe and Asia. Continuing in great wealth and power till Mithridates laid it wast; and at last on the ceasing of Oracles utterly forsaken. Both Town and Island now called Diles. By which name also Khene an adjoining Island (before mentioned) is at this day known; chained to the other by Polycrates the Tyrant of Samos, and now united to it at the least in name.

2 TENOS by Aristotle called Hydrusa, by some Ophiussa, by the Modernes, Tyna. The chiefe Town of it of the same name; so called from one Tenes, the builder of it, and giving name unto the Island. Memorable for a fountaine called Dipnosus, of which Aristole and Athenaeus doe both af∣firm, that the waters will not mix with wine. The onely Island of this seat, which remaineth un∣der the power of the State of Venice; the rest being subject to the Turk, deserving therefore the first place in our description of those Islands that incompasse Delos, though antiently

3 ANDROS, (prima inter Cyclades) was reckoned chief amongst the Cyclades, or first at least in order, because next to Delos: originally called Cauron, afterwards Antandros, and at last Andros, from Andrus the son of Eurymachus, who founded the chief town in it, of the same name also. Me∣morable for a pleasant fountaine mentioned by Pliny, the waters whereof, on the nones of January, yearly, had the tast of wine. It still retaines the name of Andros.

4 NAXOS, now Nicsia, one of the biggest of the pack, as being about 80 miles in compasse. In antient times called Veneris insula, or the Island of Venus, afterwards Dionysia by reason of its aboundance of wine and the goodnesse of those Wines together, consecrated to Bacchus, whom the Greekes call Dionysius: From its wonderfull plenty of Wheat, called by some Sicilia Minor, or the lesser Sicil; but at last Naxos from one Naxos, who had the conduct of a Colony of Carians hither. But notwithstanding this new name Bacchus did still retaine the honour to be worshipped in it, in regard of his love unto the place; marrying here Ariadne, (as the Poets fable) whom Theseus had left upon the Rocks; whose Coronet or Chaplet being by his meanes made one of the heavenly Constel∣lations is by Columella called Ardor Naxius, by the name of the Island, though commonly by Astro∣nomers Corona Ariadnes, from the name of the Lady. The women of this Island are said by Pliny to be delivered generally in the eight moneth; as Bacchus was: more certainly famous in true story for the beauty and fertility of it; and for a kinde of excellent Marble called Ophitis, or Serpentinus, the ground whereof is green, diapred with blew or purple spots; in much esteem amongst the Romans. When these Islands fell to the Venetians, they conferred this on one John Quirino a Patriti∣an, or Gentleman of that City (as they did divers of the rest on other Undertakers) from whom it came to the Noble family of the Crispos, who held it till the year 1572. James the last of that house lost it to Selymus the second.

5 GYAROS, a little Island into which the Romans used to banish delinquents: hence that of Ju∣venal cited by Sir G. Sandys.

Aude aliquid brevibus Gyaris, vel carcere dignum, Si vis esse aliquid: probitas laudatur, & alget.

If thou intend'st to thrive, doe what deserves Short Gyaros, or Gives: prais'd vertue sterves.

6 PAROS, now Paria, by some of the Antients called Pactia, by others Minois, but obtained this new name from Parus, a son of Jason, memorable for quarries of the whitest Marble, of which commonly the Statuas of the Gods were made, called from hence Marmor Parium by the Latines. In compasse about 50 miles running in a long Plaine from East to West, having once a Town of the same name seated in the North, once famous, but now utterly ruined. The Inhabi∣tants hereof were noted to be very carelesse of keeping their promises and contracts: whence 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, grew into a by-word applyed to those who made no reckoning of their promises. There is now a town in it called Cephalo, but of no great note.

7 SCYROS opposite to Magnesea in Asia Minor, famous for the birth of Neoptolemus or Pyrrhus, and that it was the lurking place of Achilles. For his mother Thetis being forewarned by an Oracle that he should be slain in the Trojan war, sent him to Lycomedes King of this Island, where hee was brought up in womans attire among the Kings daughters, and deemed a Virgin; till by getting Pyr∣rhus on Deidamia the Kings daughter, it was proved to be otherwise. Others relate that Vlysses disco∣vered him by a wile, who coming thither like a Pedler or Petit-Merchant, with armes, and other ware to avoid distrust; exposed his Merchandise to the view of the Damosels: and that the o∣ther Ladies falling on the tires and Laces, Athilles took into his hand the Speare and Shield. Which when Vlysses had observed he made him leave that company, and away for Troy. The hand∣somnesse of the fraud take from Ovid thus,

Conscia venturi genitrix Nereia fati Dissimulat cultu natum; & deceperat omnes, In quibus Ajacem, sumpte fallacia vestis. Arma ego foemineis animum motura virile m Mercibus inserui, &c.

Englished by G. Sandys in his Translation of the Metamorphosis.

The whole designe in Order to relate, Thetis fore-knowing great Achilles fate, Disguiz'd her sonne, so like a Virgin drest That all mistook, and Aiax with the rest. When Armes with womens trifles, which might blind Suspect, I brought to tempt a manly mind. Yet was the Heros Virgin-like a••aid; Who taking the Shield and Speare, I said O Goddesse-born, for thee the fate of Troy, Her fall reserves; why doubtst thou to destroy Great Pergamus! then made him d'off those weeds, And sent the mighty unto mighty deeds.

There is another of this name, betwixt Negropont and Lesbos, which Ortelius conceives to be the Scene of this action: but the generall opinion is for this, (though that the greater) to which the situation of it amongst the rest of those Islands, where reigned so many of the Greek Kings interessed in the war of Troy, seems to give good countenance: the name and power of Greece not reaching in those dayes, so much towards the North.

8 MELOS, situate betwixt Crete, and Pelopennesus, and equally distant from them both: the Promontories of Scylleum in the one, and that of Dyctymeum in the other, shooting out against it. In∣habited in former times by a Colony of Phanicians, who coming out of Biblus, a town of that coun∣trey, gave that name unto it, gave that name unto it, called Melos afterwards by the Greekes, from its aboundance of Honey. The birth-place of Diagorus the Philosopher, hence surnamed Melius, but more properly 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, or the Atheist: the first who in those dark times of ignorance, absolutely de∣nyed that there was a God. Protageras Deos in dubium vecavit, Diagoras exclusit, faith Lactantius of him. It is now called Milo, round in form, and containing 80 miles in compasse. The soyle sufficiently fruitfull in corn and oyl, but defective in wine. Here is great plenty of marble curi∣ously bespotted, and no small store of milstones: as also great quantities of pitch, and brimstone, and some sulphurie or hot springs, good for many diseases. The chief town of it called Milo also.

9 SERIPHUS, 20 miles from Delos, memorable of old for the education of Perseus, the son of Danae. It is reported of this Island, that the Frogs bred there are naturally mute; but such as are brought from other places, keep their naturall tone: from whence Proverbially, silent and sullen persons were called Ranoe Seriphia. It is now called Serphena, a stony and rocky Island, and hath a town of the same name.

10 CIA by some called CEOS, and now Z••a, opposite to the Promontory of Achaia called Sunium, in compasse about 50 miles, made towards the West in fashion of a Crescent or half Moon. Mountainous and hilly, except towards the North. By Pliny said to have been torn from Eubaea by a sudden violence of the Sea, many men perishing in the waters. Of old times beautified with three faire towns, 1 Julis, 2 Carthaea, and 3 Caressus; of which there is nothing now re∣maining.

Others there are whose names occurre amongst the Antients, as Miconus now called Micole, 12 Cythnus, now Cauro; 14 Syphnus, now Sifino; 15 Therasia or Theusia, now Santorini. 16 Cimolis cal∣led formerly Echinusa, but now Polino; 17 Olyarus now Quiminio; 18 Sicenus, now Sicino; 19 Polye∣gros, now Falconara; 20 Amurgos, now Murgo, one of the biggest of them all, but not else ob∣servable.

The SPORADES, so called from 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 spargo, eo quod in mari sparse sunt, & non in circulum coactoe, because they lie dispersed and scattered; not formed into a Circle as the Cyclades are. In number twelve, viz. 1 Anaphe, so called by the Argonautes, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, because the Moon did suddenly, and beyond her naturall course appear unto them, then grievously di∣stressed by tempest. Apollo worshipped here, is hence called Anapheus. It is now called Namsio. 2 Asty∣apalea, now Stampalia, in compasse 88 miles; by some of the Antients called Thewn Trapeza, or the table of the Gods. In Astypale, the chief town of it was Apollo worshipped, from hence some∣times called Astypaleus. 3 Helene, so called from that fair Greek Dame, whom Paris is here said to have first deflowred; now called Macroniso. 4 Los, fifteen miles from Naxos, where Homer is said to have been buried: But others finde his grave at Naxos, and some at Chios, the difference being almost as

great about the place of his buriall,* 1.124 as the place of his birth. There are 5 Lagusa, 6 Phocusa, 7 Phacasia, 8 Philocandros, 9 Schinusa, 10 Strybia, of little note either in Poetry or story. And finally Thera, not far from Aegina, before mentioned, formerly called Calliste, but named thus by Theras a Theban Gen∣tleman; the son of Autesion conducting hither a Colony of Spartans and Minyans, (these last of Thessaly) cast out of Lemnos by Pelasgus: in memory of whom, as the founder of their name and Na∣tion, the Islanders used to celebrate an Annuall Feast. A sedition after happening amongst this peo∣ple, the weaker party under the conduct of one Battus, admonished so to doe by the Oracle of Apolio, passed over into Asrick, and there built Cyrene, the birth-place of the Poet Callimachus, who ascribes his Originall to this Island, as, himselfe thus witnesseth.

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

That is to say:

Calliste, which men Thera now doe call, Of my deare Countrey the Originall.

X CYTHERA now called Cerigo, lyeth in the bottom of this Sea, not above five miles di∣stant from Capo Malo in Peloponnesus, formerly called Porphyris from the aboundance of Marble, where∣of the Island yeelds good plenty. In compasse about 60 miles, enriched with a delightfull soyle, and many havens, but those small, and unsafe, and very difficult of entrance: environed on all sides with rocks, of themselves inaccessible, by which defended from the Turkes who hitherto have suffered the Venetians to enjoy it, to whom it fell in the division of the spoile amongst the Latines, so often spoken of before. It had a Town of the same name, some two furlongs from the Haven stood the Temple of Venus, (the antientest dedicated to that Goddesse which the Grecians had) and therein her Statua in complete Armour, like another Pallas. Out of this Temple (the ruins whereof are still to be seen) was Helen the wife of Menelaus, willingly ravished by Paris the son of Priam; but not enjoyed by him till he had brought her to a small Island of the Sporades, by her name called Helene, as before is said. From the devotions of this people paid so duely to her, did Venus get the Adjunct of Cytherea, by which often called in the Poets. Thus, for one, in Virgil.

Parce metu Cytherea, manent immota tuorum Fata tibi.

That is to say:

Drive feare faire Cytherea from thy minde, Thou thy sonnes Fate immoveable shall finde.

And so I passe from the Aegean to the Cretan Sea, observing this onely by the way, that most of the 69 Kings, which accompanied Agamemnon in the warre of Tray, were Kings onely of these small Islands, or else of other places as inconsiderable for wealth and potency: every small Town and territory having in those early times amongst the Grecians (when ambition had not taught the great ones to devoure the lesse) a peculiar King.

The ISLANDS of the CRETAN SEAS.

The CRETAN SEA is properly that part of the Aegean or Ionian Seas, which lyeth about the shores of Crete, and formerly was under the command and power thereof: as in those times, the Sea about Carpathos, another Isle of the Aegean had the name of Carpathian; and that about Ica∣ria, the name of Icarian, though situate in the Aegean also. The Isles hereof are 1 Crete, 2 Claudi, 3 Dia, and 4 Letoa: for Melos and Cimolis, named by Prolemie amongst the Islands which adjoin on Grete, have been already spoken of amongst the Cyclades, in the accompt whereof they passe by consent of Writers.

1 CRETA, now Candie, hath on the East the Carpathian Sea; on the West, the Ionian; on the North the Aegean; on the South, the African or Libyck: In form extending East and West, with three points or Promontorics, whereof that towards the East, called antiently Samonium, is now called Cabo di Salamone, that on the South-west, looking towards Afric, formerly named Hermea, now Capo Grabasse; and finally that on the North-west towards Peloponnesus, of old called Cimarus, and now Capo Chestin. This last directly opposite to Malea, a Promontory of Laconia, the Sea betwixt them being so troublesome and tempesluous, especially on Laconia side, that at last it grew into an ordinary caveat, Maleam praetervectum obliviscatur quae sunt demi, viz. that he which was to saile by the point of Malca, should lay aside the care of all other matters and attend his pre∣sent safety onely.

It hath in severall Ages and in severall Authors obtained severall names:* 1.125 by Homer and Eustathius called Hecatompolis from the number of an hundred Cities then contained in it; by Plinie and Soanus, Macaros and Macaronesos, that is to say, the happie Island, from the goodnesse of the soil, and temper of the air. By Stephanus, Idea, from Ida, a famous Mountain of it; by Giraldus, Telchionia, from the Teichini, the Priests of Cybele, who was here had in great request. At the present, Candie, either a Candore from the whitenesse of the rocks wherewith environed, or from Candie the Metrop••lis or chief town thereof. But the general name, which hath prevailed most in all sorts of writers, is that of Crete, so called cursi Cureta, by a Syncope, or abbreviation from the Curetes, the first in habitants hereof; who together with the Corybantes and Telechini were the Priests of Cybele, the principall goddesse of this Island; and they so called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, from their tonsure, or shaving of the head. A custome much in use amongst the Priests of some of the Pagan Deities, and possibly enough from them transmitted to the Church of Rome. And to this Etymologie I do rather incline then either to derive the name from Crete the son of Jupiter and the Nymph Idea, or from Grete the daughter of Hesperus, though both these have their Authors also. Nor dare I to reject the conceit of Bochartus, who fetching the Etymons of most peo∣ple from the Punick language or Originall, will have the Cretans to be descended from the Cerehites, a Nation of the Philistins well known in Scripture: the word Cereth being abbreviated into Creth, from which into Crete, and Cretans, is no difficult passage. But in my mind his conjecture is better then his proof. For though it may begranted without inconvenience, that the chief arms of the Phi∣lisins, were their Bow and Arrows, as appears 1 Sam. 31. 3. and that the Cretans anciently were expert at those weapons also: yet this concludes no more that the Cretans are of the race of the Philistins, then that almost all Nations else had the same Originall; the Bow and Arrows being the ordinary weapons of most people formerly, till custome and experience trained them up to others of a later date, as he himselfe acknowledgeth in many places of his excellent and elaborate tractates.

In reference to the heavenly bodies it is situate under the beginning of the fourth Clorate, so that the longest day in Summer is no more then 14 hours and a quarter. And in relation to the earth set in the middle of the Sea, at so even a distance from Europe, Asia, and Africk as if naturally de∣signed to be what Aristotle hath pleased to call it, the Lady and Misiris of the Sea. For it is distant from Peloponnesus an hundred miles, as many from Asia the lesse, and not above 150 from the thores of Africk: So verifying that of Virgil,

Crete Jovis magni medio jacet insula Ponto.

Joves birth-place Crete, a fruitfull land, In the middle of the Sea doth stand.

It is in length 270. in breadth 50 miles, in compasse about 590. The soil is very fruitfull, especi∣ally of wines, which we call Muscadels, of which they transport yearly 12000 Buts: together with Sugar-Candie, Gums, Honey, Sugar, Olives, Dates, Apples, Orenges, Lemmons, Raisons, Melons, Citrons, Pomegranats. Yet as other Countries of the like hot nature, it is not a little deficient in corn: the most or greatest part of which is yearly brought hither from Peloponnesus.

The Island is very populous, insomuch that it is thought that upon any sudden occasion, the Signeury of Venice can raise in it 60000 men able to bear arms. The people have formerly been good sea-faring men; a vertue commaculated with many vices, which they yet retain, as envie, malice, and lying; to which last so infinitely addicted that an horrible lye was called proverbially Cretense mendacium. This fault was aimed at by the Poet Epirnemdes, a native of this Island, whose words thus cited by S. Paul in that to Titus, cap. 1. v. 2.

〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

The Cretans alwayes lyers are; Unrulie beasts, of labour spare.

To which this Proverb may be added, viz. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is to say, There are three Nations whose names begin with the letter K, worse then any others; viz. 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the Cappadocians, Cretans, and Cilicians: though some I know apply this Proverb to the Cities of Corinth, Capua, and Carthage, beginning all with the same letter, and all conceived to be very dangerous to the State of Rome. At this day they are sick of their old diseases, as great Lyers, and as idle as ever formerly; covetous withall and very subtile, impatient of labour, and not caring to learn any sci∣ence perfectly: only well practised in shooting to which accustomed from their youth, and therein thought more expert then the Turks themselves.

The language generally spoken is the Greek tongue, though the Gentleman and Merchant by rea∣son of their dependence on the State of Venice, speak Italian also. Both languages used also in di∣vine offices, the people being generally of the Communion of the Church of Greece; but the Latine service used also in many places, since the subjection of this Island to the Venetians. Converted first unto the faith by S. Paul the Apostle, who having planted the Gospel of life amongst them, left the watering of it unto Titus, whom he made Bishop of this Isle, recommending unto him the care of the Churches there, with power of Ordination and Eoclesiaticall censure, as appears clearly by the Text.

Which power that it belonged to Titus as Bishop, and not their Evangelist only, is attirmed expresly, not only by the subscription of the said Epistle, where he is plainly called 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the first Bishop of the Church of the Cretians: but by the concurrent testimonies of Eu∣seb. Eccl Hist. l. 3. c 4 S. Ambr. in praefa••. Ep. ad Tit. S. Hieron. in Tit. c. 1. v. 5. and in his tract de Scrip∣tor. Ecclesiasticis. Theodoret cited by Oecumen. in praefat. ad Ep. Tit. Oecumenius himself in Tit. 1. and fi∣nally by Theophylact, in his preface to the same Epistle. All which in plain terms call him Bishop, and the Bishop of Crete, according to that sense and meaning of the word Episcopus, as it was used in their times distinct from Presbyter. The Church hereof whilest wholly under the Greek Patriarchs was governed by four Archbishops, and 21 Bishops: but since the subjection of this Island to the State of Fence, there is but one Archbishop, which is he of Candie the chief Citie, and eight Bishops only; besides the titular Patriarch of Constantinople, who hath here his residence: some Prelate of the Latine Church having been alwayes honoured with that emptie title ever since the recoverie of that Citie from the Western Christians.

Famous was this Island amongst the Ancients for many things, memorized both by the Poets and old Hastonians. For here reigned Saturn in the first ages of the World, father of Jupiter, born here and secretly nursed in the hill called Ida. For seeing that by the compact betwixt Saturn and his brother Titan, Eaturn was to enjoy the Kingdom for his own life only, but all his male children to be murdered as soon as born: Jupiter, by the care of his mother Cybele, was conveyed away, and se∣cretly nursed in Mount Ida, as before was said: the crying of the Infant, being drowned by the noise of loud-sounding Cymbals, purposely used by his Rockers to avoid discovery. Whence after∣wards the Corytantes or Pricsts of Cybele, used in her sacrifices the like musicall instruments, continual∣ly sounding and withall shaking of their heads (like Fidlers) in an antick and ridiculous manner. Al∣luding whereunto thus the Poet Claudian.

Non te progenitum Cybeleius aere can••ro Lusiravit Corybas.

That is to say▪

No Cybeleian Corybas that day That thou wast born, did on his Cymbal play.

Here also lived Minos and Radamanthus, whose lawes were after imitated in the prime Cities of Greece; and who for their equitie on earth are fained by the Poets to be (together with Aeaeus) the Judges in Hell. In this I••land also lived the lewdly-lustfull Pasiphae, wife of Minos, who is fabled by the Poets (if it be a fable) to have doated on a white Bull, who, they say, begat on her the Minotaure: Daedalus having framed for her an artificiall cow into which she conveyed her self, and by that means obtained her desire. The table is thus expounded, that Pasiphae was in love with Taurus, one of Minos Secre∣taries; whose company by the pandarisme of Daedalus she enjoying, was delivered of two sons; one called Minos; the other, Taurus. And whereas it is said, that the Minotaure was slain by Theseus, like enough that the annuall tribute of 7 children which the Athenians paid to Minos, was laid up in some prison; Minos and Taurus being the keepers or jaylors. As for the action of Pasiphae, I think it not altogether impossible to be true: considering how Domitian, to verifie the old relation, exhibited the like beastly spectacle in his amphitheatre at Rome: for thus saith Martial:

Junctam Pasiphaen Dictaeo, credite, Tauro Vidimus: accepit fabula pris••a fidem. Nec se miretur (Caesar) longaeva vetustas, Quicquid fama canit, donat arena tibi.

The fable's prov'd a truth, our eyes did see The Cretan Bull sport with Pasiphae. What cause hath then antiquity to glory? We saw it done, she only heard the story.

Finally, here was the so much celebrated Labyrinth, made by Daedalus for the including and safe keeping of the Minotaurus; so full of various windings and turnings, that when any one was got to the end thereof it was impossible for him to come out but by the help of a clew of threed. By this Mino∣taure (half a man half-bull) the children of the Athenians paid yearly to Minos in way of tribute are said to be murdered; till killed by Theseus son of Aegeus King of Athens, with whom Ariadne the daughter of Minos falling in love taught him a means to kill the Monster, and gave him the clew of threed before spoken of, to conduct him out again: the morall or historie whereof hath been shewn before. Nor must it be forgotten, that Strabo the Geographer who flourished in the time of Tiberius Caesar was of Cretan parents (though born in the Citie of Amasia, in the Realm of ••ontus) which addes unto this Island as much true renown, as any of the fictions or stories, (be they which they will) of the former times.

Things most observable at the present are these that follow, I that it breeds no serpents nor

venemous worm, or ravenous or hurtfull creature; so that their sheep graze very securely without any Shepheard: 2 If a woman bite a man any thing hard, he will hardly be cured of it; which if true, then the last part of the priviledge foregoing (of breeding no hurtfull creature) must needs be false. 3 They have an hearb called Alimos, which if one chew in his mouth hee shall feel no hunger for that day, if Quade may be beleived who speakes it. 4 Here is (besides many other medicinall herbs) that called Dictamum or Dictamnos, of especiall virtue against poison, either by way of prevention or present cure; peculiar onely to this Island: it affordeth great store of Laudanum, a juice or gum forced with incredible labour out of a certaine tree Cisto, of which the mountaines yeeld aboundance, good to cause sleep, if moderately and carefully taken, but if not very well prepared and taken with moderation, it brings the last sleep upon a man, out of which not to be awakened, till the sound of the last Trumpet raise him.

Chief Mountaines of it, 1 Ida, now Psiloriti, situate in the midst of the Island, begirt about with many fair and pleasant villages, sheltred by it from the violence of winde and Sun, the hill be∣ing so high that from the top hereof both sides of the Island may be easily seen. Here Jupiter is said to have been secretly nursed, from hence called Idaeus. And at the bottom of it the Cretans use to shew some tracts of the antient Labyrinth, being indeed no other then the ruines of some larger Quarry: the Laby∣rinth made by Daedalus being so defaced in the time of Pliny, that he knew not where to finde any ruins of it. 2 Dicte, now called Sethia, in some places Lasti, so high that all the winter long it is covered with snow; yet all the sides thereof garnished with Cypresse trees, a mountaine of such such same, that the whole Island sometimes had the name of Dictaea, the City Dictinna, the Promontorie Dictynnae∣••••n, and the Herb Dic••amnos, all seeming to take name from hence. 3 Leuci, a long chaine of hils so named from the whitenesse of them, now called De Marara and by some La Spachia.

Rivers of any eminence here are few or none. The principall of those that be are 1 Melipotamus, 2 Scasinus, 3 Epicidnus, and 4 Divotro towards the North; 5 Populiar towards the East, and 6 Limens towards the West: none of them navigable, or capable of Ships of burden, scarse of little Barkes. But that defect supplyed by the neighbouring Sea, which affordeth many Creeks and Bayes, some capa∣cious Havens, and great store of fish, among which a kinde of bearded mullet reckoned among the de∣licacies of the antient Romans. By the convenience of which Harbours, their Fish-trade, and the si∣tuation of it in the midst of the Sea; the people antiently were esteemed so good Sea-faring men, that when the people of those times did tax a man with any incredible report, they used to say, Cretensis ne∣scit pelagus, meaning thereby the matter to be as improbable as for one of Crete to be no Sayler.

In former times there were reckoned in this Island an hundred Cities, thence called Hecatompolis, of which about 40 were remaining in the time of Ptolemie: for so many of their names he gives us. Those of most note were 1 Gnossus, the seat-royall or Court of Minos, whence Ariadne, the daughter of Minos, had the name of Gnossis; in former times called Ceratus, from a little River of that name running not far off. 2 Cydon, or Cydonia, a Midland City (as the former) memorable for an excellent kinde of Apple, which the Latines called Poma Cydonia, amongst whom they were in great request, as they are at this day, (though by the name of Adams apples) amongst the Turkes, the most antient of all the Cities of Crete, many of which were at first Colonies of this; for which reason it was cal∣led commonly mater urbium. 3 Eleuthera, as Ptolemie, Erythraea, as the printed copies of Florus, cor∣ruptly call it, one of the first Cities taken here by the Romans. 4 Miletum, mentioned by Strabo, though omitted by Ptolemie, the place in which S.Paul left Trophimus sick, as is mentioned 2 Tim. 4. 20. which happened when the Apostle hovered about that coast, as is said Act. 27. 7, 8. &c. For that it could not be that Miletum to which he congregated the Elders of Ephesus, appeareth by his being at Hieru∣salem, Act. 21. 19. and other circumstances of the story. 3 Cortyna, nigh to which stood the Laby∣rinth made by Daedalus: memorable also for a reed, growing on the River Lenaeus, (necre to which it stood) of which they made their strongest Arrowes, by Virgil, Aeneid. 11. called Spicula Cortynia, as also for a light garment much used by Hunters, which Claudian calls Cortyniam vestem, apparelling Diana the great Huntresse with it. 6 Dictamum, as Ptolemie, or Dictynna, as Pliny cals it, so named from the hill Dicte, near to which it is situate; one of the chief Cities of the North parts of this Island; as 7 Ampelas, so named from its plenty of vines was upon the South. 8 Minoa a Port town (now called Altomara) so named from Minos, in the East; and 9 Corytus on a Promontorie of the same name in the West side of it.

But these and almost all the rest spoken of by Ptolemie, being so destroyed by time and warres, that the ruines of them are hardly visible, we must behold it in the present condition and estate thereof: divided into four parts or Provinces, according to the names and number of the four chief Cities, that is to say, 1 Sittia, 2 Candie, 3 Rhetimum, and 4 Canea.

In the first part called SITTIA, lying towards the East, are 74 Villages, and but 17 Parishes, of which six onely are of the Church of Rome, the residue holding the Communion of the Church of Greece; the principall whereof are 1 Sittia or Cytia, conceived by some to be the Cisteum of Ptolemie, a small Town, but populous and very well fortified. 2 Gerapetra betwixt Sittia and Candie, seated on the Sea side on a lofty rock, at the bottom whereof is said to be a dangerous whirl-pit, supposed to be the Panormus of Ptolemie. 3 S. Macor, the dwelling place of one of the Bishops of the Latines.

2 In the second part hereof called the Territory of CANDIE, lying directly West of Sittia, are reckoned 465 Townes and Villages, making up amongst them 99 Parish Churches; whereof 77 are of the Communion of the Church of Greece, the other 22 onely of the Church of Rome. Of

these the principall, 1 Candia, an Archbishops See, the Metropolis or head City of the Island, which takes name from hence; situate on the North-coast hereof towards the Aegean, beautified with a safe and commodious Haven, and fortified so strongly, that it seems impregnable; affirmed by some to be the Matium of the Antients; but I find no such place in Ptolemie, or in Ortelius his Thesaurus. The City fair and large, built for the most part of free stone, with low roofes after the manner of Italy, the streets broad and spacious: from whence a faire and pleasant plain leadeth to a place called the Cave of Minos, reported by the common people to be the Sepulchre of Jupiter. 2 Malvisin, 3 The∣mene, Castell novo, 5 Bonifacio, 6 Belvedere, 7 Mirabello, of which little memorable.

3 In the third part, being the territorie of RHETIMO, lying North-west of the territorie of Cantie, are accounted 265 Townes and Villages, making up 44 Parishes, whereof 36 are Grecians, and but 8 of the Latines. The chief of which are 1 Rhetimo in the shore of the Northern Sea, as 〈◊〉〈◊〉, is, well fortified, and a Bishops See; but not else observable. 2 Milopotamo, an Episcopall See also, so called of the River M••lipotamos, on which it is seated. 3 Agistiman, 4 Mandrus, 5 Lappa, hardly worth the naming.

4 In the fourth and last part hereof, being the territorie of CANEA, taking up all the West of the Island, are contained 240 Towns and Villages, distributed into 47 Parishes: of which 33 are of the Greek Church, and the 14 remaining of the Church of Rome. Those of most note are 1 Canea, built by a Colonie or Plantation of Venetian Gentlemen on the North Coast also, supposed to stand in the same place where once Cydon did; second to none but Candie for wealth and beautie, but far be∣fore it for the commodiousnesse of the port, commonly called Porto della Suda, capable of more then a thousand good Gallies at a time, and therefore strongly fortified with two Citadels or Castles, on each side of the Haven, one; as the door and entrance of the countrey. 2 Chisamo, in Latine called Cysamum, old and decayed, the wals thereof onely holding good against the ruines of time, situate in a low moorish place towards the Aegean. 3 Selino, built upon an hill on the Seaside, opposite to Chisame. 4 Sfa∣chia or Spachia, situate on the foot of the mountaines, of old called Leuci, now della Spachia from this town: unwalled, but fortified with a Castle, built for a place of refuge against the incursions of such Pirates as annoied the Coasts; in which the Governour for this part hath his chief aboad. By which account it will appear that in the whole Island are no more then 1044 Townes and Villages, 207 Pa∣rish Churches: of which there be but 48 which are accompted Members of the Church of Rome, the re∣sidue, 159 in number, retaining their Communion with the Church of Greece.

As for the story of this Island, wee can ascend as high as the times of Saturn, for his An∣tiquity affirmed to be the sonne of Uranus and Vesta, or of Heaven and Earth: who better favoured by his mother, obtained the Kingdome of Crete, his elder brother Titan being quite excluded. Here-upon wars arising betwixt the Brethren it was ordered thus, that Saturn for his own life should en∣joy the Kingdome, which after his decease should return to the Titans: and for performance of this contract the sonnes of Saturn to be strangled assoone as born. But Cybele the wife of Saturn unawares to her husband, preserved first Jupiter, and after others of her sonnes, which comming to the know∣ledge of Titan and his sons, they made war against Saturn, but in conclusion were subdued by the aid of Jupiter: whence grew the Fable of the Titans warring against the Gods, Saturn and Jupiter his son, being after reckoned in that number. The Titans being vanquished a new war arose betwixt Saturn and Jupiter, occasioned onely (as many unnaturall warres since these times have been) by fears and jealousies: which ended at the last in the flight of Saturn, Jupiter became sole King of Crete, reigning there in great power and honour till the time of his death; and dying was interred at Gnos∣sus, with this inscription or Epitaph in old Greek letters 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, that is to say, Jupiter the son of Saturn. After his death, worshipped by the blinde Gentiles, as the chief of their Gods, and honored frequently with the title of 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉, the father both of Gods and men, though most incongruously and absurdly, as Lactantius noteth, there being many thousands living, in and before the times of Saturn, when Jupiter was yet unborn. But to proceed, he being dead, Minos be∣gotten by him on Europa, succeeded here: who wisely taking the advantage which the convenient situation of the Island gave him, made himselfe master of the Seas; and afterwards enlarged his Do∣minions by the conquest of the Megarenses and Athenians, upon which last he imposed amongst other hard conditions, a tribute of seven male children yearly, to be kept as hostages; determined after three years by the valour and good fortune of Theseus. But Minos being slain in Sicil, and his poste∣rity extinct, the Cretans would no longer admit of Kings, but governed themselves after the manner of a Common-wealth or Free-estate: the Lawes and Ordinances whereof first devised by Minos, were of such esteem, that they were much imitated by Lycurgus, and are at large described by Aristatle in the second Book of his Politicks, ch. 8. Under this government it continued till the Romans having taken in all the rest of Greece, picked a quarrell with them. For though it was pretended that they had been aiding unto Mithridates in his war against them, yet Florus states the matter rightly, affirm∣ing that the warre was undertaken on no other ground, but sola nobilem insulam vincendi cupiditate, a covetous desire onely of subduing such a wealthy Island. And to this war they went with so proud a confidence, that M. Antony who commanded in it, carryed more chaines with him to bring home his Prisoners, then Armes to conquer them. An-insolence which he paid right deare for, his navy being vanquished by the Cretans, the bodies of his slaine souldiers hanged upon the Ma••••s, and himselfe perishing in the action, by a fit of sicknesse. 〈◊〉〈◊〉 who succeeded him in that charge

went on more successefully, first taking Gnossus, Eleuthera, (or Erythraea, as Florus calls it) and Cy∣donia, their principall Cities; and not long after all the Island: using the vanquished Islanders with such inhumanity, that most of them poisoned themselves to avoid his cruelty: rewarded with no other honour for so great a victory, then that he got the surname of Creticus; his Triumph be∣ing denyed by the faction of Pompey, against whose will he had put himselfe upon that service. Thus added to the Roman Empire it was united unto Cyrenaica by Augustus Coesar, both making up one Pro∣vince onely, governed by a Proconsul, till the death of Nero: afterwards separated from it, but the time I finde not. During the reign of Constantine, in 36 yeares together here fell no reign, so that this Island was in a manner wholly desolated. But Helena the mother of Constantine having ob∣tained rain for it by her prayers to God, it was again new-peopled by severall Colonies brought out of Egypt, Syria, Greece, and the parts adjoining. By Constantine made a Province of the diocese of Ma∣cedonia, it continued a member of the Eastern Empire till the time of Michael Balbus, when subdued by the Saracens: from whom recovered under the more fortunate conduct of Nicephorus Phocas, who came unto the Empire, anno 963. In the division of the spoile amongst the Latines it was first given to Boniface Marquesse of Montferrat, by whom surrendred willingly to the State of Venice, who had a minde to be possessed of all the Islands of that Empire: he being recompensed with the King∣dome of Thessalie, the faire and wealthy City of Thessalonica, and many townes and territories in Peloponnesus. Under that State it still continueth, in vain attempted by Selimus the second, in the yeare 1571. at what time he invaded and conquered Cyprus: and gallantly defended for this yeare last past, against all the forces of Ibrahim the late Grand S••••neur. What the successe of this war will be we shall see hereafter.

For the defence hereof against the insurrections of the Inhabitants who did at first ill brooke the Venetian Government, there are some standing forces kept in constant pay; besides such as are main∣tained in severrall Garrisons, the City of Canca having in it no fewer then six companies of soul∣diers; Candie 2000 souldiers, and the lesser Cities proportionably: over which there is set so strong a guard, that a naturall Cretan is not permitted to enter weaponed into any of them. And for the preservation of their interesse in it from a forain power, they have furnished the Island with 70 or 80 Gallies for the defence of the shores: and have exceedingly fortified the haven of Suda, with two strong Castles: this haven being capable of more then 1000 vessels, and therefore meritoriously reputed the door and entry into the Countrey. It is reported that the King of Spain, Philip the second, did offer unto the Venetians for this haven, money more then enough; but it could not be accepted. For though the Spaniard seemed only to intend the retreat and relief of his own Navy, when he should undertake any expedition against the Turk: yet the wise Venetians saw, that by this haven he might at all times awe, and when he listed, surprize the whole countrey.

II The other Islands of this Sea, as of lesser note, will be past over in few words. The first of which is called CLAVD, mentioned, Act. 27. 16. situate on the South west of Crete, by Mela called Gaulos; wherein in Plinies time was a town or City named Gaudos; now called Golo, with the I∣sland. 2 DIA, now Standia, a very small Island, and of little note. 3 LETVA on the South-east of Crete, now called Christiana. And 4 AEGILIA, or Aegialia, by Pliny Aeglia, more in the Sea towards Peloponnesus; now called Ceterigo by Sophianus. Of which and others of lesse note (if lesse may be) there is no more to be said but that they have alwayes followed the fortunes of Crete, on which they seen to have their principall dependence.

The ISLANDS of the IONIAN SEA.

The IONIAN SEA is so called either from one Ionius, the son of Dyrachius, whom Hercules having ignorantly killed threw into this Sea, giving that name unto it to preserve his memory, as Didymus is of opinion: or from Iona, a Region in the extremity of Calabria, as Solinus, or from I•• the daughter of Inachus, as Lycophron the Poet hath it. It containeth all that part of the Mediterranean which lieth from the Aegean or Cretan Seas unto the Adriatick, from which parted about Epidamnum, (otherwise called Dyrrachium) as is said by Ptolemie: or rather at the shooting out of the Acrocerau∣nian hils; as affirmed by Pliny and other writers; and so along the shores of the two Calabrias, to the lsle of Sicil. Chief Isles whereof which passe in the accompt of Greece, (for of those lying on the coast of Italy we have spoke elsewhere) are 1 the Strophades, 2 Zacynthus, 3 the Echinades, 4 Cephalenia, 5 Corcyra, and 6 Ithaca.

1 The STROPHADES are two small Islands now called Strivali, lying against Messene in Peloponnesus; famous for nothing but the Harpies, ravenous birds affirmed to have the faces of women, but the talons of Vultures, sent by the offended Gods, (as the fable goeth) for the punishment of Phineus King of Arcadia, who had put out the eyes of his sons by a former wife, at the instigation of their Step-dame. For which so plagued by these Harpies, that he could set no meat on his table wheresoever he was, but these ravenous creatures first devoured it, and then bewrayed the dishes in which it was. Much pitied by the Argonauts, whom he had curteously entertained, they sent Ze∣thus and Calais the winged issue of Boreas and Orythia, who drave them thence, and having pursued them to those Islands turned back again: whence the name of Strophades. Under which fable was contained the sad condition of ignorant or unhappy Princes, devoured by Flatterers, Informers,

and false accusers,* 1.126 by whom their name and Government was made distastfull: till by good counsel they had purged their Courts of such ugly monsters: concerning which Alphonsus King of Naples was used to say, that these Harpyes had left the Strophades and dwelt at Rome. They are inhabited onely by some few Greek Friers: and in one of them there is a spring of fresh water, which hath his fountaine in Peloponnesus, and passing under the Sea ariseth here. The Greek Priests are called Caloirs, quasi 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉 boni Sacerdotes. About 30 in number: they weare long hair, never eat flesh, and but seldome fish: feeding usually on hearbes, olives, oyl and the like. They never goe out of the Islands, neither doe they, on any occasion, permit women to come amongst them. They all labour for their sustenance, some in tillage, some in vineyards, some in fishing, so that among very many of of them three or foure onely can read. But of these somewhat hath beene said elsewhere al∣ready.

2 ZACINTHƲS, or Zant, is 60 miles in compasse; and distant from Peloponnesus 20 miles, so called of Zacinthus son to Dardanus. The countrey is wonderfully stored with oile, wines, cur∣rans: of which last they made yearly 150000 Zechines, for their own coffers; and 48000 Dollars, which they pay for custome to the signeurie of Venice. They were a very poore people when the English used to traffique there first, but now they grow rich and proud. At our Merchants first fre∣quenting the countrey, they much marvelled to what end they bought so many currans, and de∣manded whether they used to dye cloathes, or fat hogges with them; for so they themselves did: but now they have learned a more profitable use of them. Here are also very good salt-pits, fresh water plenty, but little or no wood, and lesse Corn; their ground being husbanded, as the case stands with them, to their better advantage: but so that many times they are ready to starve, if either the wind or the Sea prove crosse unto them, and hinder them from fetching their provisions both of flesh and corn out of Peloponnesus. In which respect they are faine to hold fair Quarter with the Turkes considering how easie it is for him to distresse them for want of victuals. The Island is much troubled with earthquakes, commonly once a week; in regard whereof they build their houses very low; and when they perceive them coming, the Priests are to ring the Bells, to stirre the people to prayers. They have a custome here at weddings to invite many young men whom they call Compeeres; of which every one giveth the Bride a Ring. Which done it is accompted as detestable a sinne as Incest, to accompany her in any carnall kinde; and therefore they choose such to be their Compeeres, who have formerly been suspected of too much familiarity with her.

The Island is very populous and well inhabited, but the people of a spitefull and vindicative na∣ture; not to be reconciled, if angred. It containeth in it 48 Townes and Villages, the chief whereof which passeth by the name of a city is called also Zant, stretched out about the length of a mile on the foot of a mountaine, but in breadth not answerable: beautified with a faire and convenient Haven opening towards Greece, safe from the danger of Pirats, though not of windes, capable of great fleets of shipping both for bulk and number; and so frequented from all parts, that he who hath a minde to goe out of it, need not stay for a passage: yet notwithstanding this great concourse and resort of strangers, the Town is rather rich, then well built or beautifull: the streets hereof uneven and rugged, and the buildings by reason of the often Earthquakes very low. On the East side of it, on a round steep Mountaine, standeth a very strong Castle, a little City of it selfe, well garrisoned, im∣pregnably fortified, and of a very difficult entrance: which commandeth not the City and Har∣bour onely, but a great part of the Sea adjoining. Upon the wall thereof continually stands a watchman, to descrie what shipping is at hand, and hangeth out as many flags as he discovereth Vessels. And over the doore of the Town-hall (the better to instruct the Magistrares in their pub∣lick dutie) it is said these verses are inscribed.

Hic locus 1 odit, 2 amat, 3 punit, 4 conservat, 5 honorat, 1 Nequitiam, 2 pacem, 3 crimina, 4 jura, 5 probos.

Thus Englished by George Sandys, whence I had the Latine,

This place doth 1 hate, 2 love, 3 punish, 4 keep, 5 requite, 1 Voluptuous riot, 2 peace, 3 crimes, 4 Laws, 5 th' upright.

In matter of Religion, the people being generally Greeks both in birth and language, are for the most part of that Church also; but some adhere unto the Latine; each party having their own Bishop: of which the Greek Bishop hath his Cathedrall in the Church of S.Nicolas near unto the Haven (which it giveth name to) and therein a Monastery of Caloires or Monkes of Basil; the Latine Bishop hath his residence and Cathedrall within the Castle, and therein a Convent of Franciscans. The Jews have in this Town their Synagogue also: but there are not many of them, if not lately in∣creased. In civill matters they are subject to the State of Venice, the Governour hereof (whom they call the Providore) having his residence in the Castle, assisted by a Chancellour, and two Counsel∣lours, (all Gentlemen of Venice) whom they change every third year. The fortunes of this Island in former times, and by what means it fell to the Venetians, we shall shew anon.

The ECHINADES are certain little Islands, or rather great rocks, now called Curzolari, famous for

nothing but the great battell of Lepanto fought nigh them betwixt the Venetians and the Turkes:* 1.127 the Turks having in their Navy 207 sayle of ships, the Venetians and their confederates but 145 of all sorts. But it pleased God to give the victory to the weakest: the issue of it being such, that the Turk••s lost 29000 men, who were killed in the fight; 39000 more which were taken prisoners, 140 of their Gal∣lies, 400 peece of Ordinance, and 200 Christian Captives which were then redeemed: the Christians buying this great victory with the death of 7656 men or thereabouts: too great a price, could it have been purchased with a lesse. A victory obtained not far from the point of Actium, wherein Augu∣stus overcame the Navie of Marcus Antonius; and thereby got the Empire to himself alone, of which before he was but Joint-tenant with his Adversary. So that this place seems to be marked out for a Stage of eminent actions; and that this later Navall fight was but the second part of the first.

But to return unto these Islands, they stand just against the mouth of the River Achelous; of which thus the Poet,

Turbidu•• objectas Achelous Echinadas exit;

Fierce Achelous with the Sea is mixt Where the Echinades (great rocks) are fixt.

These Islands are in number five, faigned by the Poets to be so many Naiades, or Sea-Nymphes whom Achelous the River God upon some displeasure Metamorphosed into these Rocky Islands. But the truth is, that they were caused by the dirt and mud, which this River carried with it into the Sea, where at last it setled to firm ground. Of which himself saith thus in Ovid.

—Fluctus nostri{que} maris{que} Continuam deducit humum, pariter{que} revellit, In totidem, mediis (quod cernis) Echinadas, undis.

The fury of the Sea-waves, and mine own, Continuall heaps of mud, and Earth drew down; Which parted by the inter-running Seas, Made, as thou seest, these five Echinades.

4 CEPHALENIA.

CEPHALENIA, the most populous Island of this Sea, is situated over against Acarnania, part of the Province of Epirus, having on the South-East Zant, on the North-west Corcyra or Corsu. In length containing 80 miles, 40 in breadth, the whole compasse being reckoned at 160. Once cal∣led Tetrapolis from the number of foure Cities in it: but three of them were decayed in the time of Ptolemie, who takes notice of no more then one, and that of the same name with the Island. Woody and mountainous in most places; but the mountaines intermixt with Valleys, and the Woods with champagne: plentifull in Wheat, Honey, Currans, Manna, Oyle, incomparable though not long-lasting Muscadels; as also in Cheese, Wool, Turkies: and Powder for the dying of Scarlets. So destitute of water, as having no River and not many Fountaines, that when their Cattell would drink, they gape both morning and evening to receive the dew distilling insensibly from the clouds.

The people are for the most part Greeks, some few Italians naturalls of the Signeury of Venice being intermixt: the whole number of the Inhabitants computed at 6000 families; the number of the townes and villages to 200 or thereabouts. The principall whereof I Cephalenia, fortified with good workes, and a very strong Castle. 2 Argastolie, an haven town, distant six miles from Ce∣phalon; the Port thereof capable of a sufficient Navie. 3Sydre, another Port-town also, lying to∣wards the South.

As for the fortunes of this Island, it was first called Melena; after Teleboas: and being known by that name, was made subject to Thebes, by the valour and good conduct of Amphitryon, the The∣ban Generall, by whom Pterelas, the King hereof, was slaine inbattell. During which warre, and the stay of Amphitryo in this Island it hapened that Cephalus, a noble Athenian, having by misadven∣ture killed his wife Procris with an Arrow, which he shot at a Deer, not daring to abide in his own countrey, fled unto Amphitryo his old friend, then newly victorious over the Teleboans: who pi∣tying his case, made him the Governour of this Island, (since from his name) called Cephalenia. Having continued for some time in the power of the Thebans, it passed together with Zant, and some other Islands into the hands of the Macedonians; from whom in the declining of their affairs, the Acheans got the Isle of Zant, and the Aetolians, Cephalenia: But long they had not held them when the Romans began to look towards Greece, who under colour of setting the Continent at liberty, made themselves masters of both the Islands; that so they might at leisure possesse the whole, as in fine they did. In the division of the Empire they fell as parts of Greece, to the Constantinopolitans: and on the taking of that City by the Western Christians, they fell with almost all the rest of the Islands, to the State of Venice: the Governors whereof retaining Corfu, and some others of most importance in the hands of the Signeury, permitted these, (as many other of lesse note) unto private Adven∣turers. At the conclusion of the peace betwixt Mahomet the Great, and the State of Venice, these two with Neritos or Leniadia, (spoken of in Episus) were seised on by that Tyrant in despight

of that treaty or conclusion;* 1.128 as belonging unto private persons, not to the Republick: recovered afterwards by the Venetians, in the reign of Bajazet the second, in the name of the State, and as parts thereof still governed and defended by them.

6 CORCYRA.

CORCYRA (now CORFV) more antiently was called Phaeacia; but took this later name from a Nymph so called, whom Neptune is reported to have here deflowred. Situate over against ••pirus, from which 12 miles distant, stretched out from East to West in the form of a Bow, the length thereof being 54 miles, 24 the breadth; and so the biggest of these Seas. Commodiously seated for the trade and estate of Venice, as the Center of their Dominion, and command by Sea.

The Southern parts hereof are mountainous, and defective in water, much subject to be blasted with Southernly windes, and therefore they sow little corn, and plant lesse Fruites. The Northern parts levell and delightfull, adorned with whole Groves of Lemmons, Orenges, Figtrees, Olives, and Pomegranates; enriched with plenty of grain, aboundance of Wines, great store of Oile, and O∣lives, and most excellent Honey. Blest with a very temperate and healthfull Air, made Odorife∣rous by most pleasant and sweet-smelling fruites; which grow most plentifully in each part hereof. Alcinous, who so curteously entertained Vlysses after his ship-wrack, was once king of this Island: whose Gardens answerable to the naturall delights and sweetnesse of it, are so much celebrated by the Poets. One of which thus.

Quid bifera Alcinoi referam pomaria; vos{que} Qui nunquam vacui pr••distis in aethera, Rami?

Which may be Englished in these words,

Why should I name Alcinous fertile ground, And trees which never without fruit are found?

Townes of most note and strength herein, 1 Pagiopoli, 2 Castello S. Angelo, of good esteem in re∣spect of many others, but farre short of 3 Corfu, the chief and strongest of the Island, which the Turks have found by their frequent repulses to be impregnable. For it is situate at the foot of a Moun∣taine, on the top of which are built two inaccessible Fortresses as being strongly senced with a na∣turall Rock. The one is called The old Fortresse, and the other, The New: justly esteemed the chief Bul∣warks of Venice, whose Trade and Power would soon decay, should these Forts be lost. For which cause the two Governours (for each Fort hath one) are sworn before the State of Venice, never to hold intelligence with one another, by word or writing: lest by the treachery of the one, the o∣ther might be wrought also from his faith and duty. Neither is their command here for more then two yeares; their commission then terminating, and new successours being sent them. The town inhabited for the most part by Grecians, as is all the residue of the Island; beautified with one of the most commodious havens in all the Adriatick, and the residence of an Archbishop, A town of such a publick concernment, in regard of the strength and situation, that it is accomp∣ted of as the key of Venice, and one of the strongest Bulwarkes of Christendome against the encroach∣ment of the Turke. The story of it since dismembred from the Eastern Empire, at the taking of Con∣stantinople by the Latines, we have had before.

7 ITHACA.

ITHACA, now called Val de Campare, lieth on the North-east of Cephalenia, being in compasse 50 miles: most famous for the birth of Vlysses, the son of Laertes; of which thus the Poet,

Effugimus scopulos Ithacae, Laertia Regna. Et terram altricem saevi exceramur Ulyssis.

From th' Ithacan Rocks, Laertes Realm we fled, And curs'd the Land which dire Vlysses bred.

It was also called Dulichium, or else there was some other Island of that name, not farre from Ithaca, whereof Vlysses was also King; who is hence called Dulichius Heros, among the Poets: and in this Taunt of Aiax to him, Dulichius vertex signifieth the head of Vlysses.

Sed ne{que} Dulichius, sub Achillis casside, vertex Pondera tanta feret; Achilles helm's too great a weight I trow, For weak Vlysses head to undergoe.

But as weak a man as Ajax thought him: he was the Master-wit of Greece, for the times he lived in, and one that did as good service in the war of Troy, as the best sword-man of them all. A warre to which he went somewhat unwillingly as fearing the sad consequences and events thereof: insomuch that he faigned himself mad, ploughing the shore, and sowing salt in stead of corn. But Palamedes to make triall whether this was reall, or but counterseit only, cast young Telemachus the son of Ulysses before the Plough: which he observing, either drove the Plough besides him, or lifted it over him. Discovered by this means, and engaging with the rest in the Trojan war, he found out the design of Thetis, and brought Achilles to it also; in the course whereof by his wit and courage, he did very good service: associated with Diomedes in the action against Rhesus King of Thrace; and with Pala∣medes in forraging the Countrie for provisions. By his policie was the Palladium stollen out of Troy, and consequently the Citie taken and destroyed; whose fate depended on the preservation of that fatall Relick. After the ending of the war which held out ten years, he was with-held from Ithaca ten years longer by winds and tempests, and the displeasure of the Gods which favoured Troy: in which he saved himself from the inchantments of the Sirens, the allurements of Circe, the crueltie of Polyphemus; and after many dangers came home in safety. A man of so compleat a vertue, that Ho∣mer maketh him the pattern of a temperate and prudent man, in the Books called Odysses, (by his name as the Greeks pronounce it) as he doth Achilles, in his Iliads, of a compleat and perfect souldier.

The Countrie is generally very rockie, and barren, exceeding plentifull of Goats, but no Hares live in it: inhabited for the most part by Pirates and exiles, men banished out of civill society, and wil∣lingly acknowledging no Superior over them: but subject, if to any, to the State of Venice: which hitherto hath maintained these Islands against the Turks, though many times attempted by them in the most prosperous times of their arms and victories. For the Venetians being gratified at the taking of Constantinople by the Latines, with almost all the Islands of the Aegean and Ionian Seas (as being a people strong in shipping, and so most able to preserve a possession of them:) some of the greatest and most con∣siderable either for their riches or the commodiousnesse of situation, were furnished with convenient garrisons in the name of the State. The rest they did bestow on the better sort of the Citizens, to be de∣fended and made good at their own costs and charges; who accordingly possessed themselves of one, two, or more of them, as they were of abilitie to set out their Gallies for the keeping of them: the Signeurie having neverthelesse a care of all, and to that end keeping a Fleet at Sea continually under one of their Admirals: whereby they did not only preserve those Seas from the Genoa Pirats, but for long time de∣fended all their Islands also as well against the Greeks, as the Turkish Emperours. But all the Isles of the Aegean being lost to the Turk, except Cythera, and Tenos on the Europaean, and Carpathos, or Scarpan∣to on the Asian side: they have now only Crete with the Isles adjoyning, and those of the Ionian Sea, under their command; and these (but specially the Isle of Crete) endangered at the present by the Turkish Tyrant.

Thus having tooke a view of the severall Provinces and Isles which belong to Greece, according to the ancient and present state of each particular: let us next take a view of the Grecian Emperours, who have had here their principall residence, and possessed the whole, though for a while their Em∣pire was extended over all the East; as they here follow in this ensuing Catalogue of

The Constantinopolitan Graecian, or Eastern EMPEROURS.

• A. Ch.
• 331 1 Constantine, surnamed the Great, having reigned 21 years in Rome, translated his Imperiall Seat to Constantinople which himself had founded.
• 341 2 Constantius the 3. son of Constantine, in the division of the Empire, had for his partage Thrace, Constantinople, and all the Provinces of the East. After the death of his two brethren he remained sole Emperour, but resided for the most part in the East, a great Patron of the Arians, and as great a Persecuter of the Orthodox Christians.
• 366 3 Julian, surnamed the Apostata, son of Constantius, the brother of Constantine the Great; a•• first a Christian, afterwards a professed enemie of the Gospel: fortunate in his wars against the Almans, Franks, and other Transalpine Nations, whilest he was a Christian: prodigiously slain in the Persian war, when become a Persecuter.
• 368 4 Jovian, or Jovinian, chosen by the armie, a religious Prince, made peace with the Persian, and setled the affaires of the Christian Church: who being dead, Valentinian, one of meane birth, but great abilities in war, was elected Emperour.
• 368 5 Valens, the brother of Valentinian, made partner in the Empire with him, ruled in Con∣stantinople and the East; Valentinian taking more delight in Rome and the Western parts. A great Patron of the Arian faction, and the first who brought in the Goths on this side of the Danow, whom he placed in the desert parts of Thrace, to the destruction of the Empire and himself to boot.
• 382 6 Gratian, the eldest son of Valentinian, succeeded his father in the West, and his uncle Va∣lens in the East; after whose death he left Italie and the West to Valentinian his

• younger brother. Distressed by the Gothes, he made Theodosius partner in the Empire with him, and was treacherously murdered by Andragathius, at the ap∣pointment and command of the Tyrant Maximus.
• 383 7 Theodosius, a Spaniard born, revenged the death of Gratian on the tyrant Maximus, and of Valentinian the 2. on the traitour Eugenius. He vanquished the Goths, utterly sup∣prest the Pagan superstitions, which till his time continued even in Rome it self; and strengthened the Church of Christ with good Laws and Ordinances.
• 399 8 Arcadius, the eldest son of Theodosius, succeeded his father in the East, as his brother Ho∣norius did in the West: the Roman Empire after this last division of it, being so distracted and torn in pieces, that it was never since united.
• 412 9 Theodosius II. son of Arcadius, made peace with the Goths, whom he employed against the Hunnes and Persians, his more dangerous Enemies, and caused the Ephesine Councell to be called against Nestorius.
• 454 10 Martianus, Lieutenant to Theodosius, succeeded his Master, and marryed with Puleheria his Masters sister; he called the Councell of Chalcedon against Dioscorus.
• 461 11 Leo a Thracian born, elected by the joint consent of the Senate and Souldiery, sitting the Councell of Chalcedon; the Acts whereof he approved and ratified.
• 478 12 Zeno, the son-in-law and Lieutenant of Leo, sent Theodorick and the Goths into Italie against Odoacer: A tyrant and a great drinker, in one of his drunken fits, buryed quick by his Emperesse. In his time Constantinople was almost wholly destroyed by fire; in which perished amongst other things 120000 Volumes of good Manu∣scripts.
• 494 13 Anastasius, a mean Officer, of the Court, by the power and favour of the Emperesse crea∣ted Emperour; a great Patron of Eutyches; yet fortunate in his wars against the Persians and Arabians. In his time Constantinople besieged by the Scythians, was like∣ly to have fallen into great distresse, i•• Proclus, a famous Mathematician, like another Archimedes, had not fired their Gallies.
• 521 14 Justin the son of a Thracian shepherd, and Captain of the Guard unto Anastasius, a ca∣tholick Prince, and Patron of the Orthodox Clergy, whom he called from ba∣nishment.
• 528 15 Justinian, the sisters son of Justinus, with whom first consort in the Empire, recovered Africk from the Vandals, by Belisarius, and Italie from the Goths by Narses: and final∣ly reduced the laws of Rome into form and method.
• 566 16 Justin II. nephew of Justinian, instituted the Exarchate of Ravenna, and lost a great part of Italie to the Lombards. Unable of himselfe to oppose the Persians, he chose
• 577 17 Tiberius, one of his chief Commanders to be consort with him, who afterwards succeed∣ed in the sole command.
• 584 18 Maurice, a Cappadocian born, fortunate in his wars against the Persians, from whom he re∣covered Mesopotamia in the time of Tiberius; by whom at his return marryed to Constantine his daughter, and declared his successour. Refusing to ransome some of his souldiers, taken prisoners by Caganus King of Avares, he lost the affections of his armie.
• 604 19 Phocas, a common souldier, in a military tumult chosen Emperour, murdered the Em∣perour Mauritius, with his wife and children; and made Pope Boniface supreme Bishop or head of the Church: slain in a popular tumult by the common people for his lusts and cruelties.
• 611 20 Heraclius, a noble man of Constantinople, chosen by the generall consent repaired the ru∣ines of the Empire, vanquished the Persians, recovered Hierusalem out of their hands, and brought home the Crosse unto Constantinople in triumphant manner, whence the feast called Exaltatio crucis, Septemb. 14. In his time Mahomet began to disperse his dotages.
• 641 21 Constans or Constantine II. son of Heraclius, unfortunate in his wars against the Saracens, who prevailed in all places; picking a quarrell with the Romans he defaced Rome, robbing it of all the choicest Ornaments, which the Goths and other barbarous people had left: and ransacking the Isle of Sicil, was there slaine by the women.
• 670 22 Constantinus III. son of the former Constantine, from his long or early beard surnamed Pogonatus, repulsed the Saracens from Constantinople, but could not hinder the Bul∣garians from passing over the Danow.
• 687 23 Justinian II. son of Constantine the 3. subdued Mesapotamia, Armenia, and some part of Per∣sia; forcing the Saracens to sue for peace, and become his tributaries. Against whom Leontius on the one side, and Absimarus on the other, severally taking arms were declared Emperors; Justinian taken by Leontius, hath his nose cut off, and his person committed to custodie: but making an escape, by means of Trebellin King of the Bulgarians, recovered his Imperiall dignitie; and being too violent in the pursuit of his revenge, was finally murdered at the Altar by the com∣mand of
• ...

• 713 24 Philippicus Bardanes, Admirall of his Navie, elected Emperour by the Souldiers, a great enemy of Images, which he caused to be cast out of the Church: whereby incur∣ring the displeasure of
• 715 25 Anastasius II. called also Artemius, his principall Secretarie, who thrust himself into the Empire; forced to relinquish it by that armie which he had raised against the Saracens: in which tumult the Citie of Constantinople was sacked and spoiled.
• 717 26 Theodosius III. made Emperour in this tumult by the souldiers, hearing of the approach of Leo, Commander of the Eastern Armies, resigned the Empire, and took Orders to preserve his life.
• 718 27 Leo Isauricus, in whose time Galiph Zulciman besieged Constantinople the space of three years: and when by cold and famine 300000 of the Saracens were slain, they desisted. At this siege was that fire invented, which we for the violence of it, call wild fire; and the Latines, because the Greeks were the Authors of it, Graecus ignis: by which the Saracens ships were not a little molested. He was also a great Enemie to ima∣ges, for which cause hated by the Pope and Clergie of Rome, who gave him there∣upon the nick-name of Iconomachus.
• 741 28 Constantinus IV. son of Leo, surnamed Copronymus, for that when he was baptized, he be∣rayed the font; followed his fathers zeal in removing images, which created him much trouble, one Artabardus being chose Emperour against him, but at last de∣feated.
• 777 29 Leo III. son of Constantine Copronymus, commonly called Leo the 4. (Leontius the usurper (as I conjecture) being reckoned for one) an enemie of Images, and fortunate in his wars against the Saracens.
• 782 30 Constantine V. the son of Leo and Irene, first governed the Empire with his Mother; by whom at last supplanted, and deprived of sight, he dyed of melancholy.
• 798 31 Irene wife of Leo the 3. first consort with Constantine her son, and afterwards sole Em∣peresse of Constantinople: for her better support in which estate she sided with the Popes of Rome, and called the second Councell of Nice for defence of Images. In her time Charls, surnamed the Great, was by the Pope and people of Rome created Emperour of the West. For the Popes knowing their own greatnesse to grow out of the ruines of the temporall power, committed the Empire of the West unto the French Princes: whereby the Greek Emperours became much weakened; and the French being the Popes creatures, were in tract of time brought to their de∣votion. In following times, when Frederick Barbarossa was by Pope Alexander the 3. pronounced non-Emperour; Emanuel of Constantinople sued for a re union of the Empires: but the crafty Pope returned this answer, Non licere illi conjun∣gere, quae majores ejus de industria disjunxerunt: Let no man presume to joyn, what the God of Rome, the Pope, hath put asunder.
• 803 32 Nicephorus a Patritian, made Emperour by the souldiers, perswaded that Irene had made choise of him to be her successour, slaine in a pitcht field against the Bulga∣rians.
• 812 33 Michael, surnamed Curopalates from his office, (the Mayre of the Palace as it were) husband to Procopia the daughter of Nicephorus, assumed the Empire: which finding his own weaknesse, he did soone relinquish, and betooke himselfe unto a Mona∣sterie.
• 814 34 Leo V. surnamed Armenius from his Country, Generall of the horse to Michael, demo∣lished the images which his predecessour had set up; slain in the Church during the time of divine service.
• 821 35 Michael II. surnamed Balbus, having murdered Leo, assumed the Empire; unfortunate in his government, and dyed of madnesse.
• 830 36 Theophilus, the son of Michael Balbus, an enemy of images, like his father, and as unfortu∣nate as he; losing many battels to the Saracens, at last dyed of melan∣choly.
• 842 37 Michael III. son of Theophilus, first with his mother Theodora, who took unto her self the supreme command; and after of himself sole Emperour; his mother being made a Nun.
• 866 38 Basilius, surnamed Macedo, from the place of his birth, made consort in the Empire by Michael the son of Theophilus, whom he basely and treacherously murdered; kil∣led casually by a Stag.
• 886 39 Leo VI. for his learning surnamed Philosophus, the son of Basilius, a vigilant and provi∣dent Prince; most of his time, with variable successe spent against the Bul∣garians.
• 912 40 Constantine VI. commonly called the VII. son of Leo Philosophus, first under his uncle Alex∣ander, next under Zoe his mother, and after under Romanus Lacopenus, governed the Empire: by which last so miserably depressed that he was fain to get his livelyhood by painting. But Lacopenus being deposed and turned into a

• ... Monasterie by his own sons, Consiantine at last obtained his rights, and restored learning unto Greece.
• 961 41 Romanus, the son of Constantine.
• 963 42 Nicephorus, surnamed Phocas, first Governour or Protectour to the young Emperour Romanus; after whose death created Emperour by the armie, he recovered An∣tioch, Cilicia, and the greatest part of Asia minor from the power of the Saracens; slaine in the night by John Zimisces, his wife Theophania being privie to it.
• 971 43 John Zimisces, Emperour in the place of Nicephorus Phocas, governed the Empire better then he did obtain it; vanquishing the Bulgarians, Rosses, and others of the bar∣barous Nations: and left it at his death to the sons of Romanus.
• 977 44 Basilius II. surnamed Porphyrogenitus, as many of the Emperours had been before him, in regard that at their births they were wrapped in purple (which the Greeks call Porphyrie) the Imperiall colour: subdued the Bulgarians, and made them Homa∣gers to the Empire.
• 1027 45 Constantinus, VII. or VIII. brother of Basilius, and with him partner in the Empire; af∣ter whose death he governed three years by himself, but did nothing memo∣rable.
• 1030 46 Romanus II. for his prodigalitie surnamed Argyropolus, husband of Zoe the daughter of Constantine the 8. drowned in a Bath by the treason of his wife and her Adul∣terer.
• 1035 47 Michael IV. surnamed Paphlago from his Country, first the Adulterer, and afterwards the husband of Zoe: but dyed very penitent.
• 1042 48 Michael V. surnamed Calaphates, a man of obscure birth, adopted by Zoe, whom he de∣posed from the Government, and turned into a Monasterie. Out of which be∣ing again taken, in a popular tumult, she put out the eyes of Calaphates, and being then 60 yeares of age, bestowed both the Empire and her selfe upon
• 1043 49 Constantine IX. surnamed Monomachus, formerly husband to a Neece of Romanus the 2.
• 1055 50 Theodora, sister unto Zoe, after the death of Constantine, managed for two years the af∣fairs of the Empire with great contentment to all people. But grown in age surrendred it to
• 1057 51 Michael VI. surnamed Stratioticus, an old but militarie man, deposed within the year by
• 1060 52 Isaacius, of the noble familie of the Gomneni; valiant, of great courage and diligent in his affairs: which having managed for two years, he left it at his death, with con∣sent of the Senate and people, to
• 1063 53 Constantine X. surnamed Ducas, a great Justicier, and very devout, but exceeding cove∣tous, whereby he became hated of his subjects and contemned by his ene∣mies.
• 1071 54 Romanus III. surnamed Diogenes, marryed Eudoxia the wife of Constantinus Ducas, and with her the Empire. Took prisoner by the Turks, and sent home again, he found a faction made against him; by which Eudoxia was expelled, himself at his re∣turn deposed, and so dyed in exile.
• 1075 55 Michael VII. the son of Constantinus Ducas, surnamed Parapinacius, by reason of the fa∣mine which in his time happened, made Emperour in the aforesaid tumult. But being found unable for so great an honour (the Turks prevailing in all places) he was deposed again and put into a Monasterie.
• 1081 56 Nicephorus II. surnamed Boli••nates, of the house of the Phocas, succeeded in the place of Parapinace, deposed within 3 years by the Comneni.
• 1084 57 Alexius Comnenus, son of the Emperour Isaacius Comnenus, obtained the Empire: in whose time the Western Christians with great forces prepared for the recovery of the Holy Land. Of whose purposes being very jealous he denyed them pas∣sage through his Countrie; in the end forced to finde them victuals and other necessaries.
• 1113 58 Calo-Johannes, the son of Alexius, had a good hand against the Turks, from whom he tooke Laodicea and some other places of importance. He also vanquished the Scythians or Tartars passing over the Ister, most of which he either slew in bat∣tell, or sold as captives; permitting the remainder to abide on this side that River. He also conquered the Servians and Bulgarians, transporting many of them into Bithynia.
• 1142 59 Manuel, or Emanuel, the younger son of Calo-Joannes, an under-hand enemie to the We∣stern Christians, and an open enemie to the Turks: by whom intrapped in the dangerous straits of Cilicia, and his Armie miserably cut off; he was on honou∣rable terms permitted to return again.
• 1180 60 Alexius II. son of Manuel, deposed and barbarously murdered by Andronicus, the Cousin Grman of his father, with his wife and mother.
• ...

• 1183 61 Andronicus Comnenus, confined by Manuel to Oenum in Paphlag••nia, by reason of his dan∣gerous and ambitious practises; after his death, pretending to reform the State came unto Constantinople: first made Protector, afterwards consort in the Empire with young Alexius. Whom having barbarously slain, and got the Empire to himselfe, he was not long after cruelly torne in pieces in a popular tu∣mult.
• 1185 62 Isaacius Angelus, a noble man of Constantinople, and of the same Comnenian race, designed to death by Andronicus, was in a popular election proclaimed his successour; de∣posed by Alexius his own brother, and his eyes put out.
• 1195 63 Alexius Angelus deprived his brother, and excluded his Nephew from the Empire; but it held not long.
• 64 Alexius Angelus II. son of Isaac Angelus, who being unjustly thrust out of his Empire by his un∣cle Alexius, had recourse to Philip the Western Emperour, whose daughter Ma∣ry he had marryed: who so prevailed with Pope Innocent the 3. that the armie prepared for the Holy Land, was employed to restore him. On the approach whereof Alexius the Usurper fled, Alexius the young Emperour is seated in his fathers throne, and not long after slain by Alexius Dueas. In revenge whereof the Latines assault and win Constantinople, make themselves Masters of the Empire, and divide it amongst them: alotting to the Venetians Candie, many good towns of P••loponnesus, and most of the Islands: to Boniface Marquesse of Montferrat the Kingdom of Thessalie; to others of the Adventurers other liberall shares; and finally to Baldwin Earl of Flanders, the main body of the Empire with the title of Emperour.

EMPEROURS of the LATINES in CONSTANTINOPLE.

• 1200 65 Baldwin Earl of Flanders, first Emperour of the Latines reigning in Constantinople, taken in fight by John King of Bulgaria coming to aid the Greeks, and sent prisoner to Ternova, where he was cruelly put to death.
• 1202 66 Henry the brother of Baldwin, repulsed the Bulgarians, out of Greece, and dyed a Con∣querour.
• 1215 67 Peter Count of Auxerre in France, son in law of Henry, cunningly entrapped by Theodo∣rus Angelus a great Prince in Epirus, whom he had besieged in Dyrrachium. But of an Enemy being perswaded to become his ghest, was there murdered by him.
• 1220 68 Robert the son of Peter, having seen the miserable usage of his beautifull Emperesse, whom a young Burgundian formerly contracted to her, had most despitefully mangled, cutting off both her nose and ears; dyed of hearts grief as he was coming back from Rome, whither his melancholy had carried him to consult the Pope in his affairs.
• 1227 69 Baldwin II. son of Robert by a former wife, under the protection of John de Brenne the ti∣tularie King of Hierusalem, succeeded in his fathers throne: which having held for the space of 33 years; he was forced to leave it: the Citie of Constan∣tinople being regained by the Greeks, and the poor Prince compelled to sue in vain for succours to the French, Venetians, and other Princes of the West.

The EMPIRE restored unto the GREEKS.

• 1260 70 Michael VIII. surnamed Palaeologus, extracted from the Comnenian Emperours, Emperour of the Greeks in the Citie of Nice, most fortunately recovered Constantinople; the town being taken by a partie of 50 men secretly put into it by some Country labourers under the ruines of a mine. Present in person at the Councell of Lyons, at the perswasion of the Pope, he admitted the Latine Ceremonies into the Churches of Greece; for which greatly hated by his subjects, and denyed the honour of Christian buriall.
• 1283 71 Andronicus II. vexed with unnaturall wars by his Nephew Andronicus, who rebelled against him.
• 1328 72 Andronicus III. first partner with his grandfather, afterwards sole Emperour.
• 1541 73 John Palaeologus, son of Andronicus the 3. in whose minoritie Contacuzenus his Protectour usurped the Empire, and held it sometimes from him, and sometimes with him, till the year 1357. and then retired unto a Monasterie: leaving the Empire un∣to John, during whose reign the Turks first planted themselves in Europe.
• 1484 74 Andronicus IV. the son of Johanmes Palaeologus.
• 1387 75 Emanuel Palaeologus, the son of the said John, and brother of Andronicus the 4. in whose time Bajazet the sixt King of the Turks did besiege Constantinople; but found such notable resistance that he could not force it.
• ...

• 1417 76 John II. son of Andronicus the 4.
• 1420 77 John III. son of Emanuel Palaeologus, in person at the Councell of Florence for reconciling of the Churches; in hope thereby to get some aid from the Western Christians: but it would not be.
• 1444 78 Constantinus Palaeologus, the brother of John the 3.

In whose time the famous Citie of Constanitinople was taken by Mahomet the Great, 1452. the miserable Emperour, who had in vain gone from door to door to beg or borrow money to pay his souldiers, (which the Turks found in great abundance when they took the Citie) being lamentably trod to death in the throng. Now concerning this Empire of the Greeks, we may observe some fatal contrarieties in one and the same name: as first, that Philip the father of Alexander laid the first foun∣dation of the Macedonian Monarchie: and Philip the father of Perseus ruined it. Secondly, that Bald∣win was the first, and Baldwin the last Emperour of the Latines in Consiantinople. Thirdly, that this town was built by a Constantine, the son of Helena, a Gregory being Patriarch: and was lost by a Constantine the son of a Helena, a Gregory being Patriarch also. And fourthly, the Turks have a Prophecie, that as it was won by a Mahomet, so it shall be lost by a Mahomet. So Augusius was the first established Em∣perour of Rome, and Augustulus the last: Darius the son of Hystaspes, the restorer; and Darius the son of Arsamis the overthrower of the Persian Monarchie. A like note I shall anon tell you of Hierusa∣lem. In the mean time I will present you with a fatall observation of the letter H, as I find it thus versed in Albions England.

Not superstitiously I speak, but H this letter still, Hath been observed ominous to Englands good or ill. First Hercules, Hesione, and Helen were the cause Of war to Troy; Aeneas seed becoming so outlawes. Humbor the Hunn with forein arms did first the Brutes invade, Helen to Romes imperiall Throne, the British Crown conveyd. Hengist and Horsus, first did plant the Saxons in this Isle: Hungar and Hubba first brought Danes, that swayed here long while. At Harold had the Saxon end, at Hardie-Cnute, the Dane: Henries the first and second did restore the English raign. Fourth Henry first for Lancaster did Englands Crown obtain. Seventh Henry, jarring Lancaster and Yorke, unites in peace: Henry the eight did happily Romes irreligion cease.

A strange and ominous letter; every mutation in our State being as it were ushered by it.

What were the Revenues of this Empire since the division of it into the East and West, I could ne∣ver yet learn. That they were exceeding great, may appear by three circumstances, 1 Zonaras reporteth that the Emperour Basilius had in his treasury 200000 talents of gold, besides infinite heaps of silver and other moneys. 2 Lipsius relateth, how Benjamin a Jew in his discourse of Europe, saith, that the custome due to the Emperours, out of the victuals and merchandize sold at Constantinople only did amount to 20000 crowns daily. 3 We find, that at the sack of Constantinople, there was found an invaluable masse of gold, silver, plate, and jewels, besides that which was hid in the earth. For so the covetous Citizens chose rather to employ their wealth, then afford any part of it to the Empe∣rour: who with tears in his eyes, went from door to door to beg and borrow mony, wherewith he might wage more souldiers for the desence of the town.

The arms of the Empire were Mars, a crosse Sol between four Greek Beta's of the second: the four Beta's signifying, (as Bodin saith) 〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉〈 in non-Latin alphabet 〉.

It may perchance be expected that we should here make an additionall Catalogue of those Turkish Emperours, who have reigned in Constantinople, since the taking of it: and being they are possessed of Greece and do now inhabit it, that we should here also speak of the Turks themselves, their customs, forces, policies, originall, and proceedings. But the discourse of those things we intend to reserve for Turcomania, a Province of Asia, from whence they made their first inundation into Persia, and af∣terwards into other parts of the world now subject to them, the only Province which retains any thing of their name. And though the Peninsula called anciently Taurica Chersonesus (now part of Tartaria Pr••••opensis) be within the bounds of Europe also: yet we will deserre the description and sto∣ry of it, till we come to the affairs of the Tartars: and will here conclude our discourse of Europe, and prepare for Asia.

And so much for GREECE, the last of the Provinces of EUROPE.

Notes

• * 1.1

  Flanders.
• * 1.2

  Artois.
• * 1.3

  Flanders and Artois.
• * 1.4

  Hainalt.
• * 1.5

  Hainelt.
• * 1.6

  Cambray: & Namur.
• * 1.7

  Luxen∣bourg.
• * 1.8

  Bovillon.
• * 1.9

  ••imbourg.
• * 1.10

  Leige.
• * 1.11

  Brabant.
• * 1.12

  The Mar∣quisate.
• * 1.13

  Machlyn.
• * 1.14

  Holland.
• * 1.15

  Holland.
• * 1.16

  Zeland.
• * 1.17

  Zeland.
• * 1.18

  Holland.
• * 1.19

  Vtrecht and Over-Yssel.
• * 1.20

  Guelder∣land.
• * 1.21

  Zutphen.
• * 1.22

  Groining∣land.
• * 1.23

  Guelder∣land.
• * 1.24

  Cleveland.
• * 1.25

  Gulick.
• * 1.26

  Berg.
• * 1.27

  Gulick and Berg.
• * 1.28

  Cleve, & Mark.
• * 1.29

  Cleve.
• * 1.30

  Colen. Mentz.
• * 1.31

  Triers.
• * 1.32

  Palatinate of Rhene.
• * 1.33

  Palatinate.
• * 1.34

  Elsats.
• * 1.35

  Lorrain.
• * 1.36

  Suevia.
• * 1.37

  Bavaria.
• * 1.38

  Austria.
• * 1.39

  Austria.
• * 1.40

  Austria.
• * 1.41

  Stiria.
• * 1.42

  Carniola.
• * 1.43

  Tirol.
• * 1.44

  Wederaw.
• * 1.45

  Franconi••▪
• * 1.46

  Wirtenberg
• * 1.47

  Northgoia.
• * 1.48

  Bohemia.
• * 1.49

  Moravia.
• * 1.50

  Lusatia.
• * 1.51

  Branden∣bourg.
• * 1.52

  Pomerania.
• * 1.53

  Mecklenb.
• * 1.54

  Misnia.
• * 1.55

  Saxonie.
• * 1.56

  Saxony.
• * 1.57

  Saxony.
• * 1.58

  Saxony.
• * 1.59

  Brunswick▪
• * 1.60

  Lunenbourg
• * 1.61

  Hassia.
• * 1.62

  Westphalen
• * 1.63

  Bremen.
• * 1.64

  East Frise∣land.
• * 1.65

  Oldenburg.
• * 1.66

  Oldenbourg
• * 1.67

  The Cim∣brick Cher∣sonese.
• * 1.68

  Wagerland.
• * 1.69

  Stormarsh.
• * 1.70

  Holstein.
• * 1.71

  Juitland.
• * 1.72

  Baltick-Ilands.
• * 1.73

  Scandia.
• * 1.74

  Norwey.
• * 1.75

  Iceland.
• * 1.76

  Freezland.
• * 1.77

  Gr••enland.
• * 1.78

  Gothland.
• * 1.79

  Gothes.
• * 1.80

  Gothes.
• * 1.81

  Lapland▪
• * 1.82

  Finland.
• * 1.83

  M••scovie.
• * 1.84

  Novogrod.
• * 1.85

  Corelia.
• * 1.86

  Severia, &c.
• * 1.87

  Wiathka, &c.
• * 1.88

  Novogrod Inferior.
• * 1.89

  Livonia.
• * 1.90

  Samogitia.
• * 1.91

  Lituania.
• * 1.92

  Volhinia.
• * 1.93

  Russia Ni∣gra.
• * 1.94

  Prussia.
• * 1.95

  Poland.
• * 1.96

  Windisch∣land.
• * 1.97

  Croatia.
• * 1.98

  Dalmatia.
• * 1.99

  Liburnia.
• * 1.100

  Illyricum.
• * 1.101

  Transylva∣nia.
• * 1.102

  Transylva∣nia.
• * 1.103

  Moldavia.
• * 1.104

  Valachia.
• * 1.105

  Rascia.
• * 1.106

  Servia.
• * 1.107

  Bulgaria.
• * 1.108

  Bulgaria.
• * 1.109

  Peloponne∣sus.
• * 1.110

  Achaia propria.
• * 1.111

  Elis.
• * 1.112

  Messenia.
• * 1.113

  Epirus.
• * 1.114

  Thessalie.
• * 1.115

  Macedon
• * 1.116

  Thrace
• * 1.117

  Constanti∣nople
• * 1.118

  Thrace.
• * 1.119

  Propontis.
• * 1.120

  Lemnos.
• * 1.121

  Euboea.
• * 1.122

  Salamis.
• * 1.123

  Cyclades.
• * 1.124

  Sporades.
• * 1.125

  Crete.
• * 1.126

  Zant.
• * 1.127

  Cephalenia
• * 1.128

  Corcyra.